以善逝等德号而受称扬,亦为安乐之施与;
礼敬胜者后,再礼敬清净之法与最胜之僧伽。
显示巴利原文 Sugatantyādivaṇṇehi , pasatthañca sukhaddadaṃ; Vandantānaṃ jinaṃ natvā, dhammaṃ suddhaṃ gaṇuttamaṃ.
为利益而作礼敬者,及古代诸师所行;
书写并安置此礼敬之福德,以此智慧,礼敬者得福。
显示巴利原文 Namakkāraṃ hitatthīhi, porāṇācariyehi ca; Likhitvā ṭhapitaṃ puñña, buddhiyā tena vandinaṃ.
我将作其义之注释,善能开显深义;
应名为莫维普那的寂静具戒者所请。
显示巴利原文 Tassatthavaṇṇanaṃ kassaṃ, gambhīratthasubodhanaṃ; Movipunāmena santena, sīlupetena yācito.
在诸注疏等中解释其义时,
我将依所说之理而作;诸贤善者,请以信心谛听。
显示巴利原文 Vaṇṇantopi ca tassatthaṃ, taṃ taṃ aṭṭhakathādisu; Vuttañāyena kassāmi, saddhā suṇātha sādhavo.
Namanaṃ namatītī vā, namatī tena vā namo; Tassa kāronti tāhīti, namakkāroti vuccati.
而此礼敬,乃佛音阿阇梨依其往昔所闻而作;
又,佛音阿阇梨的生平,于种种传说等中亦有记载。
显示巴利原文 Tañca buddhaghosācari, yena pubbasutaṃ kataṃ; Buddhaghosuppattiyañca, taṃ taṃ pana kathādisu.
未见所作之因,是故,由求利益者与
由古代诸师所安置,此是我所说。
显示巴利原文 Na diṭṭhaṃ katakāraṇaṃ, tasmā hitatthikehi ca; Porāṇācariyehī ca, ṭhapitanti mayā vuttaṃ; Taṃ kāraṇaṃ viññūhī ca, vicāretvā vijānitanti.
善逝之善逝,最胜者;善巧之善巧,舍离者;
不死之不死,寂静者;无等之无等,施与者;
皈依之皈依,世间;无诤之无诤,作者。
显示巴利原文 Sugataṃ sugataṃ seṭṭhaṃ, kusalaṃkusalaṃ jahaṃ; Amataṃ amataṃ santaṃ, asamaṃ asamaṃ dadaṃ. Saraṇaṃ saraṇaṃ lokaṃ, araṇaṃ araṇaṃ karaṃ; Abhayaṃ abhayaṃ ṭhānaṃ, nāyakaṃ nāyakaṃ name.
1 现在,为了以善逝等十八种功德赞叹并礼敬佛陀,首先说了“善逝”等两首偈颂。然而,这首偈应视为句首双关的回转偈。这种双关在《善觉庄严》中被称作“杂染过失”。显示巴利原文
1. [Ka] idāni paṭhamaṃ tāva sugatantyādīhi aṭṭhārasahi guṇehi thometvā buddhassa vanditukāmena sugatantiādi gāthādvayaṃ āraddhaṃ. Ayaṃ pana sabbapādādiyamakapathyā vattagāthāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Taṃ pana yamakaṃ subodhālaṅkāre kiliṭṭhadosanti vuttaṃ.
其中说道:显示巴利原文
Vuttañhi tattha –
若词杂染,愚者当破,如双关等;
即使杂染词之过失,也被纳入其中。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Yaṃ kiliṭṭhapadaṃ mandā, bhidheyyaṃ yamakādikaṃ; Kiliṭṭhapadadoseva, tampi anto karīyatī’’ti.
然而,此偈因以喜悦之声而造作,故具足名为“明净功德”的声庄严。因此,应视此双关为善说。于其他双关偈亦然。故《庄严论》中又说:显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ panettha patītasaddaracitattāyeva pasādaguṇa saṅkhātena saddālaṅkārena saṃyuttā hoti. Tasmā taṃ yamakaṃ suvuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Evaṃ parāsu yamakagāthāsu. Tena vuttaṃ punā laṅkāre –
以喜悦之声创作,文句衔接流畅,
具足明净功德,这是我认可的双关。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Patītasaddaracitaṃ, siliṭṭhapadasandhikaṃ; Pasādaguṇasaṃyuttaṃ, yamakaṃ matamedisa’’nti.
其中,“善逝”一词,因行得美好、到达美妙处、正确而行,故为善逝。此因依圣道行于美好,故称善逝。善(su)为前缀,逝(gam)为词根,su 为美好义。以圣道之行清净、无过、安稳、无滞地到达目的,此为义。此行有两种:身行与智行。其中,世尊亲近应度众生,纯为成就他们之利乐,此美好身行,名为身行。而凭自然智、以遍知通达了知一切世间,此智行,名为智行。此处即指智行。《增支部注》中说:“有美好去处与行处者,为善逝。”又说:因到达美妙处,故为善逝,即由所缘之作,到达不死涅槃,此为义。又,彼正确、无颠倒而行,故称善逝。此处 su 为正确义。以各道所断之烦恼,彼不再还、不再来、不再回转,此为义。或者也说:因正确而来,故为善逝,即从燃灯佛足下起,直至菩提座,以圆满三十波罗蜜之正行,唯作一切世间利乐,不堕常见、断见、欲乐、自苦行等边见而来,此为义。我敬礼、我顶礼彼善逝佛陀,此为连结。显示巴利原文
Tattha sugatanti sobhanagamanattā sundaraṃ ṭhānaṃ gatattā sammā gatattā ca sugato, so hi sobhanaṃ ariyamaggena gacchatīti sugatoti vuccati, supubbo gamudhātu ta. Susaddo sobhanattho. Ariyamaggagamanena parisuddhaṃ anavajjaṃ khemaṃ disaṃ asajjamāno gatoti attho. Tañca gamanaṃ duvidhaṃ hoti kāyagamanaṃ, ñāṇagamanañcāti. Tattha bhagavato veneyyajanupasaṅkamanaṃ ekantena tesaṃ hitasukhassa nipphāda nato sobhanaṃ kāyena gamanaṃ kāyagamanaṃ nāma. Sayambhū ñāṇena pana sakalampi lokaṃ pariññābhisamayavasena parijānanato ñāṇena gamanaṃ ñāṇagamanaṃ nāma. Idha pana ñāṇagamanaṃ adhippetaṃ. Aṅguttaraṭīkāyaṃ pana ‘‘sobhanaṃ gataṃ gamanaṃ etassāti sugato’’ti vuttaṃ. Sundaraṃ ṭhānaṃ gacchatīti sugatoti ca vuccati, ārammaṇakaraṇavasena amataṃ nibbānaṃ gatoti attho. Sammā aviparītaṃ cesa gacchatīti sugatoti vuccati. Susaddo sammāsaddattho. Tena tena maggena ye kilesā pahīnā, te kilese na puneti na pacceti na paccāgacchatīti attho. Atha vā sammā āgacchatīti sugatoti ca vuccati, dīpaṅkarapādamūlato pabhuti yāva bodhimaṇḍā tāva samatiṃsapāramipūrikāya sammāpaṭipattiyā sabbalokassa hitasukhameva karonto sassataṃ ucchedaṃ kāmasukhaṃ attakilamathañcāti ime cante anupagacchanto āgatoti attho. Taṃ sugataṃ buddhaṃ name namāmīti sambandho.
又,‘善逝’者,因善说故,名为善逝。以其正确说、宣说故,称为善逝。su 为前缀,gad 为词根,表言说、辩才、言语,加 ta 后缀,即示其作者。于六种语中,于适当处,唯说适当之二种语,此为其义。即如《中部·后分五十经》之《无畏王子经》中所说:显示巴利原文
Puna sugatanti sammā gadattā sugato. So hi sammā gadati bhāsatīti sugatoti vuccati. Supubbagadadhātu bhāsāyaṃ viyattiyaṃ vācāyaṃ vā, ta, dassa to. Chasu vācāsu yuttaṭṭhāne yuttameva dvivācaṃ bhāsatīti attho. Vuttañhi majjhimapaṇṇāsapāḷiyaṃ abhayarājakumārasutte –
“王子,如来知此语不实、不真、无义,且他人不喜不悦,如来即不说此语。如来知此语实、真、无义,他人亦不喜不悦,如来亦不说此语。如来知此语实、真、有义,但他人不喜不悦,如来知时而说此语。如来知此语不实、不真、无义,他人虽喜虽悦,如来不说此语。如来知此语实、真、无义,他人虽喜虽悦,如来亦不说此语。如来知此语实、真、有义,且他人亦喜亦悦,如来知时而说此语。”显示巴利原文
. ‘‘Rājakumāra yaṃ tathāgato taṃ vācaṃ jānāti abhūtaṃ atacchaṃ anatthasaṃhitaṃ, sā ca paresaṃ appiyā amanāpā, na taṃ tathāgato vācaṃ bhāsati. 2. Yampi tathāgato vācaṃ jānāti bhūtaṃ tacchaṃ anatthasaṃhitaṃ, sā ca paresaṃ appiyā amanāpā. Tampi tathāgato vācaṃ na bhāsati. 3. Yañca kho tathāgato vācaṃ jānāti bhūtaṃ tacchaṃ atthasaṃhitaṃ, sā ca paresaṃ appiyā amanāpā, tatrakālaññū tathāgato hoti tassā vācāya veyyākaraṇāya. 4. Yaṃ tathāgato vācaṃ jānāti abhūtaṃ atacchaṃ anatthasaṃhitaṃ, sā ca paresaṃ piyā manāpā, na taṃ tathāgato vācaṃ bhāsati. 5. Yampi tathāgato jānāti bhūtaṃ tacchaṃ anatthasaṃhitaṃ, sā ca paresaṃ piyā manāpā, tampi tathāgato vācaṃ na bhāsati. 6. Yañca kho tathāgato vācaṃ jānāti bhūtaṃ tacchaṃ atthasaṃhitaṃ, sā ca paresaṃ piyā manāpā . Tatra kālaññū tathāgato hoti tassā vācāya veyyākaraṇāyā’’ti.
此处,为便于理解,应依经简略了知。此六种语者:不真实、无利益、不可爱之语;真实、无利益、不可爱之语;真实、有利益、不可爱之语;不真实、无利益、可爱之语;真实、无利益、可爱之语;真实、有利益、可爱之语。其中,将非盗贼者说为盗贼等语,名为第一语。将盗贼者说为盗贼等语,名为第二语。‘因未修福业而贫穷、丑陋、少威德,今虽得人身却不造福业,于第二心刹那如何能从四恶趣解脱?’——如此以利益大众为先、以法为先、以教诫为先而应说之语,名为第三语。有一恶棍说:‘朋友,当我还在母胎时,我母亲曾有想吃迦比他果的妊娠反应。她找不到别的人采迦比他果,便派我去。我去后,自己不能爬树,便抓住自己的脚,像扔棍棒一样把自己抛到树上。然后在树枝间游走,取了果实,却不能下来,便回家取了梯子,下来后到母亲跟前,把果实给了母亲。那些果实很大,有缸口大小。于是,我母亲坐在一个座位上,连核带果一起吃了。’诸如此类应说之语,名为第四语。显示巴利原文
Ettha pāḷiyaṃ panesā sukhaggahaṇatthaṃ saṅkhepena veditabbā. Kathaṃ hesā abhūtā anatthasaṃhitā appiyā vācā ca, bhūtā anatthasaṃhitā appiyā vācā ca, bhūtā attha saṃhitā appiyā vācā ca, abhūtā anatthasaṃhitā piyā vācā ca, bhūtā anatthasaṃhitā piyā vācā ca, bhūtā atthasaṃhitā piyā vācā cāti chabbidhā hotīti. Tattha acoraṃyeva coro ayantiādivasena vattabbavācā paṭhamavācā nāma. Coraṃyeva coro ayantiādivasena vattabbavācā dutiyavācā nāma. Akatapuññatāya duggato dubbaṇṇo appesakkho, idha pana ṭhatvāpi puna puññaṃ na karoti, dutiyacittavāre kathaṃ catūhi apāyehi muccissatīti evaṃ mahājanassa atthapurekkhārena dhammapurekkhārena anusāsanīpurekkhārena vattabbavācā tatiyavācā nāma. Eko dhutto āha-mayhaṃ bho mātu mayi kucchigate kapiṭṭhaphaladohaḷo ahosi. Sā aññaṃ kapiṭṭhahārakaṃ alabhamānā maṃyeva pesesi. Ahaṃ gantvā rukkhaṃ abhiruhituṃ asakkonto attanāva attānaṃ pāde gahetvā muggaraṃ viya rukkhassa upari khipiṃ. Atha sākhato sākhaṃ vicaranto phalāni gahetvā otarituṃ asakkonto gharaṃ gantvā nisseṇiṃ āharitvā oruyha mātu santike gantvā phalāni mātuyā adāsiṃ. Tāni pana mahantāni honti cāṭippa māṇāni. Tato me mātarā ekāsane nisinnāya samasaṭṭhiphalāni khāditānīti. Evamādivasena vattabbavācā catutthavācā nāma. Āmisahetu cāṭukamyatādivasena nānappakārakaṃ paresaṃ thomanā vācā ceva rājakathaṃ corakathantiādinayappavattā tiracchānakathā ca pañcamavācā nāma. Ariyasaccasannissitā dhammakathā chaṭṭhamavācā nāma. Taṃ pana vassasatampi suṇantā paṇḍitā neva tittiṃ gacchanti . Tāsu pana bhagavā tatiyachaṭṭhamā dvivācāeva bhāsati. Tasmā sappurisehi sāyeva dvivācā vattabbāti. Ayaṃ tadaṭṭhakathāyaṃ āgato saṅkhepanayo. Visuddhimagga mahāṭīkāyaṃ pana sāratthadīpanīṭīkāyañca tadaññākārena vaṇṇito. Tāsu pana taṃ oloketvā gahetabbanti. Ayaṃ panettha saṅgahagāthā –
‘凡说真实、有利益,却为他人所不喜之语,’
‘以及说真实、有利益,又为他人所喜爱之语,’
‘他唯在适当的时机说此二种语,故称为善逝。’
智者把‘d’音转为‘t’音而称说。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Yo bhūtamatthasaṃhītaṃ, paresamappiyā vācaṃ; Bhūtamatthasahītañca, paresaṃ piyavācanti; Dvivācaṃ yuttaṭṭhāneva, vadatīti sugatoti; Vuccatī ca dakārassa, katvā takāraviññunā’’ti.
‘最胜’(seṭṭha):因功德广大,故为最可称赞者。由于他在可称赞者中特为可称赞,故称为‘最胜’。‘pasattha’一词,在最高级后缀上加‘iṭṭha’词缀;‘pasattha’之‘sa’变为‘se’,意为:在独觉、圣弟子等可称赞者中,以戒、定、慧等功德而特为可称赞者。或者,‘sundare’(于美妙)——在念处等种种法中,‘esati’(寻求)、‘gavesati’(探寻)或‘esiṃ’(已寻求)、‘gavesiṃ’(已探寻)者,即为‘seṭṭho’,即佛陀。‘su’前缀加‘esa’(寻求)或‘gavesana’(探寻)词根,加‘ta’词缀,其‘ra’变成‘ṭṭha’;‘su’意为美妙。或者,应被寂静者、善士所寻求、所探寻者,为‘seṭṭha’。‘santa’一词前置,加‘isa’(寻求)或‘gavesana’(探寻)词根,加‘ta’词缀,‘santa’之‘sa’变为‘se’,‘i’音变为‘e’,其‘ta’变为‘ṭṭha’。或者,被寂静者、善士以爱乐而欲求者,为‘seṭṭha’。显示巴利原文
Seṭṭhanti guṇamahantattā pasatthataraṃ. So hi pasatthānaṃ visesena pasatthoti seṭṭhoti vuccati. Pasatthapadaṃ, visesataddhite iṭṭhapaccayo. Pasatthasaddassa so, pasatthānaṃ paccekabuddhāriyasāvakādīnaṃ sīlasamādhipaññādi guṇehi visesena pasatthoti attho. Atha vā sundare satipaṭṭhānādibhede dhamme esati gavesati esiṃ gavesinti vā seṭṭho, buddho. Supubboesa gavesane ta. Tassa raṭṭho. Susaddo sundarattho. Santehi sappurisehi esitabbo gavesitabboti vā seṭṭho. Santasaddūpapado isa gavesane ta, santasaddassa so, ikārasse, tassa ṭṭho. Santehi sappurisehi icchiyati kantiya tīti vā seṭṭho. Santasaddūpapado isu icchākantīsu ta. Atha vā santānaṃ sappurisānaṃ hitasukhaṃ icchatīti seṭṭho, buddho. Kattusādhanoyaṃ. Sundare satipaṭṭhānā dibhede dhamme eseti buddhetīti vā seṭṭho. Hetu kattusādhanoyaṃ. Supubbaesadhātu buddhiyaṃ ta. Taṃ seṭṭhaṃ.
‘Kusalaṃkusalaṃ jahanti’——于此,‘kusalaṃ akusalaṃ jahanti’应作词分解。‘Kucchitaṃ pāpadhammaṃ salayati calayati kampeti viddhaṃsetīti kusalaṃ’,即:它动摇、移动、震荡、破坏可厌的恶法,故名为‘善’(kusala),这指四地之善。‘ku’前缀加‘sala’词根,加‘a’词缀。其中,欲界善以彼分断而动摇、移动恶法;大善(色界善、无色界善)以镇伏断而动摇、震荡恶法;出世间善以正断而动摇、破坏恶法。此即其义。显示巴利原文
Kusalaṃkusalaṃ jahanti ettha kusalaṃ akusalaṃ jahanti padavibhāgo kātabbo. Kucchitaṃ pāpadhammaṃ salayati calayati kampeti viddhaṃsetīti kusalaṃ, catubhūmikakusalaṃ labbhati. Kupubbo saladhātu a. Tattha kāmāvacarakusalaṃ tadaṅgappahānena pāpadhammaṃ salayati calayati, mahaggata ksalaṃ vikkhambhanappahānena salayati kampeti, lokuttara kusalaṃ samucchedappahānena salayati viddhaṃsetīti attho.
又或解释为:善士们以此关闭、防护、遮止可厌的恶趣之门,故称为‘善’,这是依工具格所作的释义。然而,在此因说‘舍断’,故唯指三地之善。此善以无过失、乐报为特相,以破坏不善为作用,以清净为现起,或以可爱之报为现起,以如理作意为近因。‘不善’:即非善,犹如‘非友’即是敌人,以其应被舍断且处于应被舍断的状态而为善的对立面。这是词义。此不善以有过失、苦报为特相,或以有过失、不可爱之报为特相,以产生无利益为作用,以不可爱之报为现起,以不如理作意为近因。‘kusalaṃkusalaṃ’指福行、不动行所摄的善,以及非福行所摄的不善。此词在‘舍断’一词中为受词。显示巴利原文
Atha vā kucchitaṃ apāyadvāraṃ salanti saṃvaranti pidahanti sādhavo etenāti kusalaṃ, karaṇasādhanoyaṃ. Idha pana jahanti vuttattā tebhūmakakusalamevādhippetaṃ. Taṃ pana anavajjasukhavipākalakkhaṇaṃ, akusalaviddhaṃsanarasaṃ, vodāna paccupaṭṭhānaṃ, iṭṭhavipākapaccupaṭṭhānaṃ vā, yonisomanasikāra padaṭṭhānaṃ. Na kusalaṃ akusalaṃ, mittapaṭipakkho amitto viya pahāyakapahātabbabhāvena kusalapaṭipakkhanti attho. Taṃ pana sāvajjadukkhavipākalakkhaṇaṃ, sāvajjāniṭṭhavipāka lakkhaṇaṃ vā, anatthajananarasaṃ, aniṭṭhavipākapaccupaṭṭhānaṃ, ayonisomanasikārapadaṭṭhānaṃ. Puññābhisaṅkhāraāneñjā bhisaṅkhārasaṅkhātaṃ kusalaṃ apuññābhisaṅkhārasaṅkhātaṃ akusalañca kusalaṃkusalaṃ. Taṃ pana padaṃ jahantipade kammaṃ.
‘Jahanti’(舍断):在道刹那以正断而舍断,在果刹那以止息断而舍断、破坏,这是它的含义。彼以阿罗汉道智而‘舍断’、‘遍舍断’,以果智而‘已舍断’、‘已遍舍断’、‘已止息’,故称为‘舍断者’,即佛陀。‘hā’词根表舍弃,加‘a’词缀。然而,虽然此处并未提及道所应断的善法,但当无明、渴爱等轮回根本烦恼被阿罗汉道智舍断时,作为世间善法生起之根本的无明与渴爱已不复存在,福行便无法在轮回中再引生结生。因此,当轮回根本烦恼被舍断时,依果的假说,善法亦名为被舍断。如‘诸比丘,色非你们所有,应当舍断它’等处所说。应知:阿罗汉所行的等正行,虽为善,却不称为‘善’,而称为‘唯作’。显示巴利原文
Jahanti maggakkhaṇe samucchedappahānena phalakkhaṇe paṭippassambhanappahānena pajahantaṃ viddhaṃsentanti attho. Tañhi arahattamaggañāṇena jahati pajahati, phalañāṇena jahiṃ pajahiṃ paṭippassambhinti vā jaho, buddho. Hādhātu cāge a. Kiñcāpi panettha kusalaṃ maggena pahātabbadhamme na vuttaṃ, vaṭṭamūlabhūte avijjātaṇhādikilese pana arahattamagga ñāṇena jahite lokiyakusaluppattiyā mūlabhūtāya avijjātaṇhāya abhāvā puññābhisaṅkhāro saṃsāre puna paṭisandhiyā nibbattetuṃ na sakkoti, tasmā vaṭṭamūlabhūte kilese jahite phalūpacārena kusalampi jahitaṃ nāma hoti. Rūpaṃ bhikkhave na tumhākaṃ taṃ pajahathātiādīsu viya . Arahantena hi abhisamācārikavattaṃ katampi kusalanti na vuttaṃ, kriyāti pana vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
正如《缘起品相应经注》中所说:‘漏尽者所造之业,非善非不善,无有果报,唯存于造作。’显示巴利原文
Vuttañhi nidānavaggasaṃyuttaṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘khīṇāsavena hi kataṃ kammaṃ neva kusalaṃ hoti nākusalaṃ, avipākaṃ hutvā kriyamatte tiṭṭhatī’’ti.
《增支部注释》中也说:“阿拉汉道能令善与不善业灭尽,因此,彼业即以此方式被破坏。”显示巴利原文
Aṅguttaraṭṭhakathāyañca ‘‘arahattamaggo ca kusalākusala kammakkhayāya saṃvattatīti evaṃ tena taṃ bhijjatī’’ti vuttaṃ.
又,《小义释》中说:“以阿拉汉道智,由行作识灭尽,那些可能生起的名色,即于此灭尽、寂止、消逝、平息。”显示巴利原文
Tena vuttaṃ cūḷaniddesapāḷiyaṃ ‘‘arahattamaggañāṇena abhisaṅkhāraviññāṇassa nirodhena ye uppajjeyyuṃ nāmañca rūpañca, etthete nirujjhanti vūpasamanti atthaṃ gacchanti paṭippassambhantī’’ti.
阿摩他(不死),即无有死。胜者实非死,而是不死;因以阿拉汉道断尽了那些产生死法的烦恼,故又离于死,称为不死。或者,以涅槃为所缘而证得时,胜者无有死,故称为不死。应知:胜者虽未战胜蕴死魔,但已战胜烦恼魔,由于必定战胜他们,故依果之近用语而称为不死。显示巴利原文
Amatanti maraṇavirahitaṃ. So jino hi na mato amato, maraṇadhammassa nibbattakānaṃ kilesānaṃ arahatta maggena samucchinditattā puna maraṇato virahitoti vā amato. Atha vā nibbāne ārammaṇakaraṇavasena adhigate natthi mataṃ maraṇaṃ yassa jinassāti amatoti vuccati. Jinena hi khandhamaccumāraṃ ajitopi kilesamāraṃ jayitvā tesaṃ avassaṃ jiyamānattā phalūpacārena amatoti vuccatīti veditabbaṃ.
其次,“不死”即具足不死的涅槃。此处无死,故称不死,亦即涅槃。此涅槃以寂静为相,以无变易为味,以无相为现起,或以出离为现起;然而,涅槃的近因了不可得。显示巴利原文
Puna amatanti amatanibbānasamannāgataṃ. Natthi mataṃ maraṇaṃ etthāti amataṃ, nibbānaṃ. Taṃ pana santilakkhaṇaṃ, accutarasaṃ, animittapaccupaṭṭhānaṃ, nissaraṇapaccupaṭṭhānaṃ vā, nibbānassa pana padaṭṭhānaṃ na labbhati.
如《弥兰陀问经》中那先长老所说:“涅槃不依任何因缘而生。”显示巴利原文
Vuttañhi milindapañhe nāgasenattherena ‘‘na kenaci kāraṇena nibbānaṃ uppajjatī’’ti.
因彼有此不死,故称“不死者”,即胜者。依“Saddhādito ṇāti”之经文,于“存在”之义加ṇ后綴,如“saddho, pañño”等词。意谓:彼胜者以四道智所证之不死涅槃存在,此即“不死”。显示巴利原文
Taṃ assa atthīti amato, jino. Saddhādito ṇāti suttena assathyatthe ṇapaccayo. Saddho paññotiādīsu viya . Assa jinassa catumaggañāṇena sacchikataṃ amataṃ nibbānaṃ atthīti attho, taṃ amataṃ.
寂静者,意指从一切烦恼尘劳与轮回之苦中得最胜寂静。彼佛确实已寂止、已善寂止一切烦恼尘劳与轮回之苦,故称为寂静。于词根“upa-same”加后綴“ta”,词根末音省略,后綴“ta”转为“anta”,应如此了知该词的形成。意思是:因在菩提座下,以阿拉汉道智断尽轮回中造作尘劳的一切烦恼,故成为清凉、身心寂静者,此即寂静。显示巴利原文
Santanti sabbakilesadarathehi ca vaṭṭadukkhehi ca suvūpasantaṃ. So hi buddho sabbakilesadarathavaṭṭadukkhehi samittha vūpasamitthāti santoti vuccati. Samudhātu upasame ta. Dhātvantassa lopaṃ tapaccayassantoādesaṃ katvā padasiddhi veditabbā. Saṃsāravaṭṭe darathakārakānaṃ kilesānaṃ bodhimaṇḍe arahattamaggañāṇena samucchinditattā sītibhūto santakāyacittoti vuttaṃ hoti, taṃ santaṃ.
不等者,意指于戒等功德,与任何补特伽罗不相似。彼佛确实无有以戒等功德与之相等、相似者,故称不等。意思是:在此世间,以戒、定、慧等功德,没有任何天、人、梵天能与佛相似。世尊实具足八十随形好所庄严、三十二大丈夫相之殊妙色身,以及一切行相极清净的戒蕴等功德宝所成就之法身,并于福德广大、威力广大、神通广大、声誉广大、智慧广大等功德中达至最胜。是故,世尊以戒等功德,不与任何人相等、相似。显示巴利原文
Asamanti sīlādiguṇehi kenaci puggalena asadisaṃ, so hi buddho natthi sīlādiguṇehi samo sadiso etassāti asamoti vuccati. Imasmiṃ sattaloke sīla samādhipaññādiguṇehi buddhena sadiso koci manusso vā devo vā brahmā vā natthīti attho. Bhagavato hi asīti anubyañjanapaṭimaṇḍita bāttiṃsa mahāpurisalakkhaṇehi vicitrarūpakāyo ca sabbākārehi parisuddhasīlakkhandhādiguṇa ratanasamiddho dhammakāyo ca puññamahattathāmamahatta iddhimahattayasamahattapaññāmahattādiguṇehi ca paramukkaṃsagato ca atthi, tasmā bhagavā sīlādiguṇehi kenaci asamo asadisoti vuttaṃ hoti.
施不等者,意指以与世间法不可比拟的道果涅槃法,以说法智施予应调伏众生的施者。此中,“不等”谓世间法中无有与其相等、相似者,故称不等,即指应证得的道果涅槃。或者,“不等”因于诸法中为最上,故指应以四圣道证悟的涅槃。世尊曾言:“诸比丘,凡所有法,无论有为无为,离染于他们中被说为最上。”此中“不等”一词与“施”一词构成业格关系。“施”指施者,即佛,由词根 dā 加后綴 a 而成。其意为:彼以大悲为先导,示现证得不死之道,以此说法智,将名为道果涅槃、与一切世间法不可比拟的出世间法,施予应调伏的众生。此即施不等者。显示巴利原文
Asamaṃ dadanti lokiyadhammena asadisaṃ maggaphalanibbāna dhammaṃ veneyyānaṃ sattānaṃ desanāñāṇena dāyakaṃ. Ettha ca asamanti natthi ettha etesaṃ vā samo sadiso lokiyadhammoti asamo, maggaphalanibbānaṃ labbhati. Atha vā asamanti aññesaṃ dhammānaṃ aggabhāvato catubbidhena ariya maggena sacchikātabbaṃ nibbānaṃ vuccati. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā ‘‘yāvatā bhikkhave dhammā saṅkhatā vā asaṅkhatā vā, virāgo tesaṃ aggamakkhāyatī’’ti. Tassa pana padassa dadantipadena kammabhāvena sambandho. Dadātīti dado, buddho. Dādhātu a, so kenaci lokiyadhammena asamaṃ asadisaṃ maggaphalanibbānasaṅkhātaṃ lokuttaradhammaṃ mahākaruṇāppadhānena amatādhigamapaṭipattidassanena desanāñāṇena veneyyānaṃ sattānaṃ dātāti attho. Taṃ asamaṃ dadaṃ.
在第二颂中,“皈依处”的意思是:成为一切众生世间的皈依、庇护、洞窟、救护。佛陀实为众生世间所归投、所返归之处,故称皈依处。sara词根加yu后缀。又或,众生世间所归向、所进入、所一同进入之处,故称皈依处。又或,具信和净信的天、人于此思惟“这是皈依处”,故亦称皈依处。又或,来至此处的天、人通达正法,故亦称皈依处。在思惟义上,sara加yu后缀。在“皈依处”章中,则说“saraṇaṃ”意指杀害、伤害怖畏、热恼、苦与烦恼。注疏中说为三宝,此即是皈依处。显示巴利原文
(Kha) dutiyagāthāyaṃ pana saraṇanti sabbasattalokassa paṭisaraṇabhūto parāyaṇo leṇo tāṇoti vuttaṃ hoti. So hi buddho saranti paṭisaranti ettha sattalokāti saraṇoti vuccati. Saradhātu yu. Atha vā saranti osaranti samosaranti ettha sattalokāti saraṇoti vuccati. Saranti cintenti ettha saddhā pasannā devamanussā saraṇamidanti saraṇoti ca. Saranti paṭivijjhanti etthupagatā devamanussā saddhammanti saraṇoti ca vuccati. Sara cintāyaṃ yu. Saraṇagamanaṭṭhāne pana sarati hiṃsati bhayaṃ santāpaṃ dukkhaṃ kilesañcāti saraṇaṃ. Ratanatta yanti aṭṭhakathāsu vuttaṃ. Taṃ saraṇaṃ.
复次,“知世间皈依处”者,指了知、知晓名为众生、诸行与空间的世间。此处,“世间”一词,因福德、非福德及其异熟在此存续、安立,故称世间,即指众生世间。loka词根在安立义上加ṇa后缀。“世间”又指坏灭、崩坏,故为行世间。luja词根加ṇa后缀。“世间”又指以种种方式可见,故称世间;又或指动与不动者在此安立,故称世间,即名为轮围的空间世间。loka词根加ṇa后缀。在“世间是常”或“世间是无常”等语句出现之处,依词义应知,诸根所系之色等蕴的聚集与相续,即有情本身,即是世间,此为众生世间。在“唯有一世间:一切有情依食而住”等语句出现之处,诸根所系或非诸根所系之蕴的聚集与相续,由诸缘所造作,故为诸行;诸行即是世间,依词义即是行世间。显示巴利原文
Puna saraṇaṃ lokanti sattasaṅkhārokāsasaṅkhataṃ lokaṃ sarantaṃ jānantaṃ. Ettha hi lokayati patiṭṭhayati ettha puññāpuññañca tabbipāko cāti loko, satta loko labbhati. Lokadhātu patiṭṭhāyaṃ ṇa. Lujjati palujjatīti loko, saṅkhāraloko. Lujadhātuṇa. Lokiyati vicittākārena dissatīti loko, lokiyanti patiṭṭhiyanti ettha vā jaṅgamā ca thāvarā cāti loko, cakkavāḷasaṅkhato okāsaloko labbhati. Lokadhātuṇa. Ettha ca sassato lokoti vā asassato lokoti vāti āgataṭṭhāne indriyabaddhānaṃ rūpādīnaṃ khandhānaṃ samūho santāno ca sattoyeva loko sattalokoti vacanatthena sattalokoti veditabbo. Eko loko sabbe sattā āhā raṭṭhitikāti āgataṭṭhāne indriyabaddhānaṃ vā anindriyabaddhānaṃ vā khandhānaṃ samūho santāno ca paccayehi saṅkhariyantīti saṅkhārā, saṅkhārāeva loko saṅkhāralokoti vacanatthena saṅkhāralokoti.
诸方闪耀,光明遍照;
那时,千重世界,
于此,他的威德运行。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Yāvatā candimasūriyā pariharanti, Disā bhanti virocamānā; Tāva sahassadhā loko, Ettha te vattati vaso’’ti.
于“来处”中,不受根所束缚的色等集聚与相续,于此安立、住立,故为“处”;此即是世间,以“处世间”之语义,当知“处世间”即指此世间。“忆念”者,或以忆念故,能知或不知,为“忆念者”,指佛陀。“忆念”于此作思择义。“忆念世间”是指与世间的结合。而佛陀以无碍智通达有情世间、行世间、处世间、烦恼世间、有世间、根世间、蕴世间、处世间、界世间等种种世间,此即所说。显示巴利原文
Āgataṭṭhāne anindriyabaddhānaṃ rūpādīnaṃ samūho santāno ca avakasanti patiṭṭhahanti etthāti okāso, soyeva loko okāsalokoti vacanatthena okāsa lokoti veditabbo, taṃ lokaṃ. Sarati jānāti ajānīti vā saraṇo, buddho. Sara cintāyaṃ yu. Lokaṃ saraṇanti sambandho. Buddho pana sattalokaṃ, saṅkhāralokaṃ, okāsalokaṃ, kilesalokaṃ, bhavalokaṃ, indriya lokaṃ, khandhalokaṃ, āyatanalokaṃ dhātulokañcātiādimanekalokaṃ anāvaraṇañāṇena paṭivijjhatīti vuttaṃ hoti.
“无战”者,谓无烦恼,或谓远离名为“战”的烦恼。而“战”之一词,通于烦恼、战斗及粉粹之义。例如在“有战法、无战法”等中,“战”即指烦恼。因为众生依此而悲泣、号叫,故称为“战”。显示巴利原文
Araṇanti nikkilesaṃ, kilesasaṅkhātaraṇavirahitaṃ vā. Raṇasaddo ca kilesesu ca yuddhe cuṇṇavicuṇṇakaraṇe ca dissati. Tathā hi saraṇā dhammā araṇā dhammātiādīsu kilesesu dissati. Te hi raṇanti kandanti sattā etehīti raṇāti vuccanti.
“弓箭手无与伦比,王子具大威力;
降伏一切怨敌之后,他进入了调御的出家。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Dhanuggaho asadiso, rājaputto mahabbalo; Sabbāmitte raṇaṃ katvā, saṃyamaṃ ajjhupāgamī’’ti.
此义见于《无偶本生经》中的战斗。“作战”即指战斗;“自制”即是调伏的出家,他达到这种自制,这便是其中的意义。又如在《六牙本生经》中,从粉碎的意义上可见:“草与木交战,它们朝八方奔散。”“作战”即是指粉碎,“它们”则是指所有八千头象。然而,此处应取烦恼的意义,这才是此处的语义。“战”者,因为贪等能令有情粉碎、压迫,故称为“战”;或者由于有情依这些烦恼而悲泣、号叫,所以烦恼即为“战”。语根“raṇa”加上后缀“a”。没有烦恼之战,故得名为“arāṇa”(无战)。即是说,当胜者的烦恼魔于菩提树下被摧破时,烦恼之战便不复存在。这便是“无战”。显示巴利原文
Asadisajātake yuddhe dissati. Raṇaṃ katvāti hi yuddhaṃ katvā, saṃyamanti saṃyataṃ isipabbajjaṃ ajjhupāgamīti attho. Tiṇañca kaṭṭhañca raṇaṃ karonto, dhāviṃsu te aṭṭhadisā samantatoti chaddantajātake cuṇṇavicuṇṇakaraṇe dissati. Raṇaṃ karontoti hi cuṇṇaṃ vicuṇṇaṃ karonto. Teti sabbe aṭṭhasahassanāgāti attho. Idha pana kilese daṭṭhabbo. Ayaṃ panettha vacanattho. Raṇanti satte rāgādayo cuṇṇenti pīḷentīti raṇā, raṇanti sattā etehi kandanti paridevantīti vā raṇā, kilesā. Raṇadhātu sadde a. Natthi raṇā kilesā etassāti araṇoti vuccati. Jinassa kilesamārassa bodhimūle jiyamānattā raṇā kilesā na santīti attho. Taṃ araṇaṃ.
“作无战”是指,于可度化众生的相续中,令名为“战”的烦恼不再生起。此处,“战”是贪等烦恼的别名,被它们所制伏的众生忧伤悲泣、哀号啼哭。以说法之智,令这些烦恼在可度化众生的相续中无有立足,这便是其意义。或者,“作”是指能作者,即佛陀。这便是“作”。显示巴利原文
Araṇaṃ karanti veneyyasantāne raṇasaṅkhatakilesassa abhāvakaraṇaṃ. Ettha ca raṇanti etaṃ yehi abhibhūtā sattā kandanti paridavanti etesaṃ rāgādīnaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Tesaṃ abhāvaṃ veneyyasantāne desanāñāṇena karoti attho. Atha vā karotīti karo, buddho. Taṃ karaṃ.
“无畏”,由于无有生等怖畏,故为无怖畏。此中,怖畏有四种:心惊怖、智怖、所缘怖、愧怖。其中,心惊怖即因心而生怖;智怖即依智审决而生怖;所缘怖即于所缘而生怖;愧怖即畏作恶而生怖。“怖畏”一词,由语基加ṇa而成。显示巴利原文
Abhayanti jātibhayādīnaṃ abhāvato nibbhayaṃ. Ettha hi bhayaṃ cittutrāsabhayaṃ, ñāṇabhayaṃ, ārammaṇabhayaṃ, ottappa bhayañcāti catubbidhaṃ hoti. Tattha bhāyati cittenāti bhayaṃ, cittutrāsabhayaṃ. Ñāṇena tīretvā bhāyatīti bhayaṃ, ñāṇaṃ. Bhāyati etasmāti bhayaṃ, ārammaṇabhayaṃ. Bhāyati etena pāpatoti bhayaṃ, ottappabhayaṃ. Bhīdhātu bhaye ṇa.
然《大义释》中列举生怖、老怖、病怖、死怖、王怖、贼怖、火怖、水怖、自谴怖、他谴怖、杖怖、恶趣怖、波浪怖、鳄怖、漩涡怖、鲨怖、活命怖、恶名怖、众中怯怖、醉怖、恶趣怖等。离此诸怖畏,故为“无畏”,指佛陀。彼以阿罗汉道断尽一切怖畏之因——一切烦恼,故无一切怖畏,此为义。显示巴利原文
Mahāniddesapāḷiyaṃ pana āgatāni jātibhayaṃ, jarābhayaṃ, byādhibhayaṃ, maraṇabhayaṃ, rājabhayaṃ, corabhayaṃ, aggibhayaṃ, udakabhayaṃ, attānuvādabhayaṃ, parānuvādabhayaṃ, daṇḍabhayaṃ, duggatibhayaṃ, ūmibhayaṃ, kumbhīḷabhayaṃ, āvaṭṭabhayaṃ, susukabhayaṃ, ājīvikabhayaṃ, asilokabhayaṃ, parisayasārajjabhayaṃ, madana bhayaṃ, duggatibhayantiādīni gahitāni. Natthi bhayāni etassāti abhayo, buddho. Tassa bhayānaṃ kāraṇa bhūtānaṃ sabbakilesānaṃ arahattamaggena samucchinditattā sabbabhayaṃ natthīti attho.
复次,“无畏之处是导师”一句中,“无畏”是“处”的定语,“处”是“导师”的宾语。“怖畏”之义如前所述。于彼处无一切怖畏,即是涅槃,故称“无畏”,指涅槃。佛、独觉佛、阿罗汉安住、生起于此,故为“处”,亦指涅槃。化导应度有情,故为“导师”,即佛陀。“导师”一词,由词根√nī(引导)加后缀ṇvu构成。彼佛陀以开示法,令堪能之善男子趣入道等、证得道果智,而引导至涅槃之处,此即其义。是谓“导师”。显示巴利原文
Puna abhayaṃ ṭhānaṃ nāyakanti ettha abhayantipadaṃ ṭhānantipade visesanaṃ. Ṭhānantipadaṃ nāyakantipade kammaṃ. Bhayasaddassa attho heṭṭhā vuttoyeva. Natthi sabbabhayaṃ ettha nibbāneti abhayaṃ, nibbānaṃ. Buddhapaccekabuddha arahantā ṭhanti uppajjanti etthāti ṭhānaṃ, nibbānaṃ. Veneyyasatte netīti nāyako, buddho. Nīdhātu nayane ṇvu. So buddho bhabbe kulaputte maggādhi gamappattiyā dhammadesanāya maggaphalañāṇaṃ adhigamento nibbānaṭṭhānaṃ netīti attho, taṃ nāyakaṃ.
接着,“礼敬导师,我礼敬导师佛陀”——这是连接。在此,“导师”意为:他引导应化众生渡过轮回海,抵达涅槃彼岸,因此称为导师,也就是佛陀。正如船夫用船将人从此岸渡至彼岸,佛陀也以道品之船,引导众生渡过轮回海,抵达涅槃彼岸——这就是它的含义。
或者,“导师”在欲、色、无色三世间中行于最尊之位,因此称为导师,意为最尊、最胜、最上者。他达到了最尊之位,所以是导师。“导师”(nāyaka)一词由词根“nī”(引导)加上后缀ṇvu构成。在此世间,于陷入无明卵中的一切众生中,他最先以阿罗汉道打破无明的卵壳,出生于圣者之生,由此抵达一切众生中最胜、最尊、最上之位——这就是它的含义。这就是“导师”。
“礼敬”的意思是:我以身、语、意三门恭敬地礼敬。在这里,根据现在时语基等规则,发生了e的替换。这是随顺世俗义等理趣。“礼敬”一词是动词,因此不应作字面解释。声论师已说:显示巴利原文
Puna nāyakaṃ nameti nāyakaṃ buddhaṃ ahaṃ name namāmīti sambandho. Tattha nāyakanti veneyyasatte saṃsāraṇṇavato nibbānapāraṃ netīti nāyako, buddho. So hi yathā nāviko jane nāvāya orimatīrato pārimatīraṃ neti, evaṃ satte maggaṅganāvāya saṃsāraṇṇavato nibbāna pāraṃ neti pāpuṇetīti attho. Atha vā nāyakanti tiṇṇaṃ lokānaṃ jeṭṭhabhāvagamanattā nāyako jeṭṭha seṭṭhavuḍḍhataro. So hi jeṭṭhabhāvaṃ neti gacchati pāpuṇātīti nāyakoti vuccati. Nīdhātu gatimhi ṇvu. So pana idha loke avijjaṇḍagatānaṃ sabbapajānaṃ paṭhamataraṃ avijjaṇḍakosaṃ arahattamaggena padāletvā ariyāya jātiyā jātattā sabbasattānaṃ seṭṭhajeṭṭhavuḍḍhatarabhāvaṃ gatoti attho. Taṃ nāyakaṃ. Nameti ahaṃ tīhi dvārehi sakkaccaṃ namāmīti attho. Ettha hi vattamānamivibhattiyā kvacidhātutyādisuttena eādeso hoti. Ayaṃ panettha vāccatthādinayo. Nametipadassa ākhyātapadattā vacanattho na kātabbo. Vuttañhi saddavidūhi –
惯用的名称、助词,以及随唤的称呼,
对这一切,一切名称在六种情形中不构成争论。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Ruḷhīkhyātaṃ nipātañcu, pasaggālapanaṃ tathā; Sabbanāmantimetesu, na kato viggaho chasū’’ti.
该词是以 namu 词根构成的现在时、自作业、为他业之语基与语尾变化的动词。或者,namu 词根所表之义,即以名为礼敬动作的善心生起,依精勤而得。语基与语尾变化所表之义,即以彼善心生起所标记、所生起、具彼行相之人,不依精勤而得。而词之集合所表之义,于主动与业处中作作者,于过去等时中作现在时,唯得词根义与动作之特相。此即此中之略说。显示巴利原文
Taṃ pana padaṃ namudhātuvattamānaamhayogaparassapadamivibhatyantaṃ ākhyātapadaṃ. Namudhātuyā vāccattho namanakriyā saṅkhāto kusalacittuppādo padhānavasena labbhati. Mivibhattiyā vāccattho tena cittuppādena upalakkhito uppāda vanto tadākāro puggalo appadhānavasena labbhati. Padasamudāyassa pana vāccattho kattukammabhāvesu kattubhūto atītādikālesu paccuppannakālabhūto dhātvattha kiriyāvisesova labbhati. Ayamettha saṅkhepo.
其广释应如此了知:以“礼敬”(namu)词根所表之义,即以善逝等佛功德为所缘而生起的、表现为顶礼动作的、以身表与语表为发起因的、以信、思、慧为增上的善心生起;以及不发起两种表识、唯于意门中生起表现为顶礼动作的善心生起——此为主要所得。以随念佛功德之力而生起的如理作意等前行、随行的善心生起,依果之转用而说。现法乐住与来世之乐,即最终之果,以及疾病等障碍之不生起,或天界与解脱成就之乐,依因之转用而说;前前之礼敬,依同类之转用而说;礼敬者之假名,依处所之转用而说;所依、门、所缘,依处所之转用而说;以礼敬功德为特征的人士实体,依功德之转用而说。殊胜、中等、低劣之身量,依功德之转用而说;作为组成部分的礼敬,依一分之转用而说。作为集合体的礼敬,依一分之转用而说;前前之善心生起,依邻近之转用而说;后后之善心生起,依邻近之转用而说;作为合掌善心生起之究竟法的无功用性,依彼法之转用而说。他们之无有法性,依非彼法之转用而说;顶礼之动作,依不异与异之转用而说。礼敬之能力,依异与不异之转用而得。以……显示巴利原文
Vitthāro panevaṃ veditabbo. Namudhātuyā vaccaṃ sugatādi buddhaguṇaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā vandanākārappavatto kāyavacī viññattisamuṭṭhāpako saddhācetanāpaññāpadhāno kusala cittuppādo ca dve viññattiyo asamuṭṭhāpetvā manodvāre vandanākārappavatto kusalacittuppādo ca mukhyena labbhati. Buddhaguṇānussaraṇavasena pavatto yonisomanasikā rādipurecarānucarakusalacittuppādo phalūpacārena. Diṭṭhadhammi kasamparāyikasaṅkhātaṃ pacchimapacchimaphalaṃ rogādiantarāyānaṃ abhāvañca vā saggamokkhasampattisukhañca kāraṇūpacārena, pure pure vandanā sadisyūpacārena, vandanassa nāmapaññatti ṭhānūpacārena, vatthudvārārammaṇaṃ ṭhānūpacārena, vandana guṇena lakkhitaṃ puggaladabbaṃ guṇūpacārena. Ukkaṭṭhamajjha muduttamattabhāvo guṇyūpacārena, avayavabhūtā vandanā ekadesūpacārena. Samūhabhūtā vandanā ekadesyūpacārena, pubbapubbakusalacittuppādo samīpūpacārena, pacchimapacchima kusalacittuppādo samīpyūpacārena, paṇāmakusalacittuppādabhūtānaṃ paramatthadhammānaṃ nibyāpārabhāvo taddhammūpacārena. Tesaṃ evaṃ dhammatābhāvo ataddhammūpacārena, vandanākāro abhedabhedūpacārena. Vandanasatti bhedaabhedūpacārena labbhati. Mivibhattiyā vāccaṃ taṃmukhyādīhi lakkhito kattu kriyāvisesena ca vattamānavibhattisaṅkhātena vibhattivise sena ca parassapadasaṅkhātena padavisesena ca uttamapurisa visesena ca amhayogavisesena ca sabbadhātuvisesena ca ekavacanavisesena ca paccuppannakālavisesena ca dhātvatthakriyāvisesena ca aliṅga visesena ca bhūvādigaṇa visesena ca novikaraṇavisesena ca bhāvakammakattūsukattuvisesena ca lakkhito ahaṃsaṅkhāto khandhasaṅkhato santāno appadhānena labbhati. Kriyāpadassa kriyāya padhānena vācakattā dhātvatthova padhānena labbhati. Apaccayassa vāccaṃ bhūvādigaṇajotakā rūpasiddhimattā pada siliṭṭhatā labbhati.
或者,“我礼敬”中的“我”,即“他礼敬”。这是依通义的解释。其所表达的意义,应依前述方法了知。此处的“礼敬”,是对佛陀的戒等无量功德,以倾向、归向的方式成就礼敬行为的善思。而这善思,依所应礼敬者与礼敬者的福田与意乐成就,成为现法受(业),通过给予作为已得成就之因的先前业以助力,遮止能中断其所生异熟相续的损害业与断绝业,在运作时,成就疾病等障碍的不生起。于后世,成为生报受(业),产生天界与解脱成就之乐。显示巴利原文
Atha vā yo ahaṃ namāmīti so name. Sāmaññattha viggahoyaṃ. Vāccattho pana vuttanayena veditabbo. Namanañcettha buddhassa sīlādianantaguṇesu ninnapabbhāratāvasena paṇāmakriyābhinipphādikā kusalacetanā. Sā ca vandaneyya vandanakānaṃ khettajjhāsayasampadāhi diṭṭhadhammavedanīyabhūtā yathāladdhasampattinimittakassa purimakammassa anubalappadāna vasena tannibbattitavipākasantatiyā antarāyakarāni upapīḷakaupacchedakakammāni paṭibāhitvā pavattikāle rogādiantarāyānamappavattiṃ sādheti. Samparāye ca upapajjavedanīyabhūtā saggamokkhasampattisukhaṃ nibbattetīti.
于此,这是开示之理:以“礼敬”一词,主要开示缘取佛陀善逝等功德而生起的三种礼敬善思。通过开示彼,依果显因,阐明作为其因的如理作意等、四轮成就、佛陀出世之殊胜福田,以及先前阶段生起的以信、慧为主的善心生起。通过阐明彼,依初因推果,显示其果——现法疾病等障碍的消除,以及天界与解脱之乐。通过显示彼,依第二因推果,阐明佛陀堪受礼敬的状况。通过阐明彼,依第三因推果,令知我礼敬者入福田的状况,以及礼敬中的那种状况。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ panettha dassanatthanayo. Nametiiminā buddhassa sugatādiguṇaṃ ārabbha pavattā tividhā paṇāmakusala cetanā mukhyena dasseti. Taṃ dassanena tassā kāraṇabhūtā yonisomanasikārādayo ca catucakkasampattiñca buddhuppādanavamakhettañca pubbabhāge pavattaṃ saddhāpaññāpadhānaṃ kusalacittuppādañca phalūpacārena dīpeti. Taddīpanena tassā phalabhūtaṃ diṭṭhadhammarogādiantarāyavisosanañca saggamokkha sukhañca paṭhamakāraṇūpacārena pakāseti. Tappakāsanena buddhassa paṇāmārahabhāvaṃ dutiyakāraṇūpacārena vibhāveti . Taṃvibhāvanena vandakassa me khettaṅgatabhāvañca paṇāme tabbabhāvañca tatiyakāraṇūpacārena anubhāveti.
而此处,是庄严之理:能诠词“礼敬”所表达的三种佛陀礼敬善思,称为“平等安住状态”。何以故?因其有实体。或者,与三种佛陀礼敬善思相应、以定为主的广大善心生起,称为“平等安住状态”。何以故?因为于佛陀善逝等功德所缘上,心达一境,或已等持。而彼状态本身,称为“寂静味”。何以故?因为佛陀礼敬思以善支断除了不善支。剩余词“佛陀的”所表达的佛陀实体,称为“所缘显现”。何以故?因为它作为所缘缘,资助彼礼敬善心生起。佛陀的善逝等功德,称为“激发显现”。何以故?因为是礼敬之因。依于彼因的平等安住状态,可知现法疾病等障碍的不存在,以及后世的生天与解脱乐成就,这称为“威力”。何以故?因为这是功德的果。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ panettha alaṅkāranayo. Nametivācakapadassa vāccabhūtā tividhā buddhapaṇāmakusalacetanā samaṭṭhāyī bhāvo nāma. Kasmā, sarīrattā. Atha vā tividhāya buddhapaṇā makusalacetanāya sampayutto samādhippadhāno mahā kusalacittuppādo samaṭṭhāyībhāvo nāma. Kasmā, buddhassa sugatādiguṇārammaṇe ekaggattā samāhitacittattā vā. Soyeva pana santaraso nāma. Kasmā, buddhapaṇāmacetanā kusalaṅgena akusalaṅgassa pahīnattā. Buddhantipāṭhasesa padassa vāccabhūto buddhadabbo ārammaṇavibhāvo nāma. Kasmā, tassa paṇāmakusalacittuppādassa ārammaṇapaccayena upakārattā. Buddhassa sugatantyādiguṇo uddīpanavibhāvo nāma. Kasmā, paṇāmassa kāraṇattā. Kāraṇabhūtaṃ taṃ samaṭṭhāyībhāvaṃ upādāya jānitabbo diṭṭhadhammarogā diantarāyābhāvo ca samparāye saggamokkhasukhasampatti ca ānubhāvo nāma. Kasmā, ānisaṃsaphalattā.
于此,虽然没有直接显示威力的词语,但由于因不离开果而存在,故应知因之果。或者应视为,“礼敬”一词依其能力,即已显示了威力。显现、精勤、了知佛陀礼敬功德的慧、无懈怠的状态、心的净信、定等,这些称为“不定状态”。身毛竖立等状态,称为“无伪状态”。应如此了知庄严之理。于最末后的偈颂中亦然。显示巴利原文
Tattha hi kiñcāpi ānubhāvadīpakaṃ padaṃ natthi. Kāraṇassa pana phalena vinābhāvato kāraṇassa phalaṃ viññeyyanti. Atha vā nametipadassa sāmatthiyato ānubhāvo dassitoyevāti daṭṭhabbo. Āvibhūto ussuko ca buddhapaṇāmassa ānisaṃsapajānanā mati ca alasābhāvo ca cittappasādo ca samādhityādi ca byabhicārībhāvo nāma. Lomahaṃsādibhāvo satvaṃkābhāvo nāmāti alaṅkāra nayo veditabbo. Evaṃ pacchimapacchimagāthāsūti.
此处是简要注释。‘善逝’:已至善妙之处,或已抵达美丽的涅槃,或已正确到达;亦指说善妙之语。‘最胜’、‘最可称赞’:于念处等法中寻求,或应被寂静者寻求,或为众生所希求的利益安乐;善与不善,皆已舍断。‘不死’:远离死亡,或具足不死涅槃而到达。‘寂静’:烦恼与不安的止息。‘无等’:不与世间法相似的道、果、涅槃法。‘施与’:已施与者或施主。‘皈依’:为一切众生世间之所依处。‘世间’:有情世间与行世间,即三界;知皈依者。‘无恼’:无烦恼,或远离称为烦恼的尘垢;于众生中无烦恼尘垢。‘作’:以宣说之智所作。‘无畏’:无恐惧,亦指无恐惧之处,即涅槃之方。‘导师’:引导众生至涅槃彼岸者;三界之最胜、上首的佛陀,我以三门恭敬地礼敬、敬拜。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepayojanā. Sugataṃ sobhanagataṃ sundaranibbānaṭṭhānaṃ gataṃ vā sammā gataṃ vā, sugataṃ sammā vacanaṃ gadaṃ bhāsanaṃ, seṭṭhaṃ pasatthataraṃ satipaṭṭhānādibhede dhamme gavesantaṃ vā santehi gavesitabbaṃ vā sattānaṃ hitasukhaṃ icchitaṃ vā, kusalaṃkusalaṃ kusalaṃakusalaṃ, jahaṃ jahitaṃ, amataṃ maraṇavirahitaṃ amataṃ amatanibbānasamannā gataṃ, santaṃ kilesadarathavūpasamaṃ, asamaṃ lokiyadhammena asadisaṃ maggaphalanibbānadhammaṃ. Dadaṃ dātaṃ dāyakaṃ vā, saraṇaṃ sabbasattalokassa paṭisaraṇabhūtaṃ. Lokaṃ sattasaṅkha rokāsasaṅkhataṃ tilokaṃ, saraṇaṃ jānantaṃ, araṇaṃ nikkilesaṃ, kilesasaṅkhātaraṇavirahitaṃ vā. Araṇaṃ sattesu kilesarajassābhāvaṃ, karaṃ desanāñāṇena kataṃ, abhayaṃ nibbhayaṃ, abhayaṃ nibbhayaṭṭhānaṃ nibbānadisaṃ, nāyakaṃ satte nibbānapāraṃ nentaṃ, nāyakaṃ tilokānaṃ jeṭṭhaṃ pāmokkhaṃ buddhaṃ sakkaccaṃ tīhi dvārehi ahaṃ name namāmīti.
Nayanasubhagakāyaṅgaṃ, Madhuravarasaropetaṃ; Amitaguṇagaṇādhāraṃ, Dasabalamatulaṃ vande.
2 2. 在最初两颂礼赞佛陀之后,为以“令眼愉悦的身躯”等五种功德赞叹并礼敬佛陀,而宣说“令眼愉悦的身躯”等颂。然而,此颂因含有“na na magaṇa”的组合,应视作以九个音节为特征的“bhujagasusu”颂。正如《Vuttodaya》中所说:“名为bhujagasusumatā”。显示巴利原文
2. Evaṃ paṭhamaṃ gāthādvayena buddhassa namassitvā idāni nayanasubhagakāyaṅgantyādīhi pañcahi guṇehi thomitvā buddhaṃ vandituṃ nayanasubhagakāyaṅgantiādigāthamāha. Ayaṃ pana na na magaṇayuttattā navakkharehi lakkhitā bhujagasu sugāthāti daṭṭhabbā. Vuttañhi vuttodaye ‘‘bhujagasusumatā nāmo’’ti.
此处的注释如下:若某一偈颂的句节中,具有两个na-gaṇa和一个ma-gaṇa,则该偈应知为‘bhujagasusu’偈。其中,‘具有令眼愉悦的身躯’意指:具足令一切众生眼目愉悦、美好的身躯。在此,‘nayana’(眼),因能显示端正与不端正之自相而称为‘nayana’,即眼;由词根‘nī’加‘yu’构成。‘subha’(美好)与‘gacchati’(去)结合为‘subhaga’(令愉悦),指身躯;‘subha’加前缀‘gam’词根,再加‘kvi’。‘kāyaṅga’指身体的肢节、部分;此处指世尊的身躯。此为第六格依主释复合词。‘nayanassa subhagaṃ’即‘nayanasubhagaṃ’(令眼愉悦),彼佛陀具有此身躯,故称‘nayanasubhagakāyaṅgo’(具有令眼愉悦身躯者),即佛陀。其义为:由于观见其色身能获得无上功德,故具足令一切众生净信之眼愉悦、美好,并以三十二大丈夫相和八十随形好为特征的身躯。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ panettha yojanā. Yassaṃ paṭipādaṃ nā ca dve nagaṇāmo ca magaṇo ca yadi siyā. Sā bhujagasusu gāthāti matā ñātabbāti. Tattha pana nayanasubhagakāyaṅganti sabbasattānaṃ cakkhussa sobhanaṃ gatena kāyaṅgenasamannāgataṃ. Ettha hi nayananti samavisamaṃ dassentaṃ attabhāvaṃ netīti nayanaṃ, cakkhu labbhati. Nīdhātu yu. Subhaṃ sobhanaṃ gacchatīti subhagaṃ, kāyaṅgaṃ labbhati. Subhasaddūpapado gamudhātu kvi. Kāyassa aṅgaṃ avayavaṃ kāyaṅgaṃ. Bhagavato kāyaṅgaṃ labbhati. Chaṭṭhītappurisasamāsoyaṃ. Nayanassa subhagaṃ nayanasubhagaṃ, taṃ kāyaṅgaṃ yassa buddhassāti nayanasubhaga kāyaṅgo, buddho. So hi rūpakāyassa dassanā nuttariyaguṇayogato sabbasattānaṃ pasādacakkhussa sobhanaṃ gatena dvattiṃsamahāpurisalakkhaṇehi ca asītyā nubyañjanalakkhaṇehi ca lakkhitena kāyaṅgena samannāgatoti attho.
‘具足最上甜蜜的声音’意指:具足可爱、令人喜爱、最殊胜的声音。世尊因令人陶醉、令人喜爱、令人爱恋,而称为‘madhura’(甜蜜),由词根‘madh’加‘uro’构成。如《中部注》所说:‘madhura意为可爱、令人喜爱、无碍。’或者,因令人陶醉、可品尝而称为‘madhura’;‘madhati’意为令一切众生的喜悦涌出、增长,故为‘madhura’,由词根‘madh’加‘unde’成为‘uro’。因此《Saddanīti》中说:‘madha unde’。‘vara’(最上)指应被希求、应被渴望、应被期盼者,即声音;由词根‘var’(希求义)加‘a’。‘sara’(声音)指运行、成为耳识所缘者;由词根‘sar’(运行义)加‘a’。或者,‘sara’指运行、被听闻者,或因‘sariyati’(被听闻)而称为‘sara’;此处指世尊具足八支的声音。‘upeta’(具足)指具备、成就;由前缀‘upa’加词根‘i’再加‘ta’。因此,‘madhura’、‘vara’、‘sara’合为‘madhuravarasara’(最上甜蜜声)。显示巴利原文
Madhuravarasaropetanti piyapemanīyauttamasaddena samannāgataṃ, so hi bhagavā madhiyati piyati pemiyati vāti madhuro. Madhadhātu uro. Vuttañhi majjhimapaṇṇāsaṭīkāyaṃ ‘‘madhuroti piyo pemanīyo apalibuddho’’ti. Atha vā madhiyati assādiyatīti madhuro, madhati sabbasattānaṃ pītiṃ undeti vaḍḍhetīti madhuro, madhadhātu unde uro. Tena vuttaṃ saddanītiyaṃ ‘‘madha unde’’ti. Varitabbo icchitabbo patthitabbo vāti varo, saro. Varadhātu icchāyaṃ a. Sarati gacchati sotaviññāṇārammaṇabhāvanti saro, saddo. Saradhātu gatiyaṃ a. Sarati gacchati suyyamānatanti vā saro, sariyati suṇiyatīti vā saro, bhagavato aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgato saddo labbhati. Upasampajjatīti upeto, upapubbaidhātu ta. Madhuro ca varo ca so saro cāti madhuravarasaro, tena upeto sampanno samannāgatoti madhuravarasaropetoti vuccati. Bhagavato pana hadaya vatthuno suvisuddhattā pittasemhādīhi apalibuddhattā deva manussehi madhurena piyena manāpiyena varena icchitapatthi tena aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgatena sarena saddena upeto sampanno samannāgatoti vuttaṃ hoti.
在此,虽然‘saropeta’(具足声音)是总说,然而世尊的声音特别具足八支,即:清晰、可解、甜美、悦耳、圆润、不散逸、深沉、有回响,应知此即是具足八支之义。如《中部·梵寿经》所说:‘从乔达摩口中发出的声音具足八支:清晰、可解、甜美、悦耳、圆润、不散逸、深沉、有回响。乔达摩尊以声音随众会而令知,其音声不出众会之外。’显示巴利原文
Ettha ca kiñcāpi saropetanti sāmaññavasena vuttaṃ, bhagavato saro pana visaṭṭho ca, viññeyyo, mañju, savanīyo, bindu, avisārī, gambhīro, ninnādi cāti visesena aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgatoti attho daṭṭhabbo. Vuttañhi majjhima paṇṇāse brahmāyusutte ‘‘aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgato kho panassa gotamassa mukhato ghoso niccharati visaṭṭho ca, viññeyyo ca, mañju ca, savanīyo ca, bindu ca, avisārī ca, gambhīro ca, ninnādi ca. Yathāparisaṃ kho pana so bhavaṃ gotamo sarena viññāpeti, na cassa bahiddhā parisāya ghoso na niccharatī’’ti.
依其义注,'visaṭṭha'(清晰)即柔和、无碍。'viññeyya'(可解)即能令了知、明显;正因其清晰,故为可解。'mañju'(甜美)即甜蜜。'savanīya'(悦耳)即听闻之乐;正因其甜美,故为悦耳。'bindu'(圆润)即凝聚。'avisārī'(不散逸)即不扩散;正因其圆润,故为不散逸。'gambhīra'(深沉)即从深处生起。'ninnādi'(有回响)即有回荡之声;正因其深沉,故为有回响。'yathāparisaṃ'(随众)意谓:纵使大众遍满轮围世界,亦能令全体了知。'bahiddhā'(外)意谓:声音不超出大众之外一指宽。何以故?如此甜美之音声不应无因消散。如是,世尊之音声唯随大众之量而行,此为所述。在《Abhidhānappadīpikā》中,更以摄颂说——显示巴利原文
Tassāṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana visaṭṭhoti siniddho apalibuddho. Viññeyyoti viññāpanīyo pākaṭo. Visaṭṭhattāyeva cesa viññeyyo hoti. Mañjūti madhuro. Savanīyoti sotasukho, madhurattāyeva cesa savanīyo hoti. Bindūti sampiṇḍito. Avisārīti avisaṭo. Binduttāyeva cesa avisārī hoti. Gambhīroti gambhīrasamuṭṭhito. Ninnādīti ninnadavā. Gambhīrattāyeva cesa ninnādi hoti. Yathāparisanti cakkavāḷapariyantāpi ekabaddhaṃ parisaṃ viññāpeti. Bahiddhāti aṅgulimattampi parisato bahiddhā na gacchati. Kasmā. So evarūpo madhurasaro akāraṇā mā nassīti. Iti bhagavato ghoso parisāya mattakeneva caratīti vaṇṇitoti. Abhidhānappadīpikāyañca vuttā saṅgahagāthā –
清晰、甜美、可解,悦耳、不散逸;
圆润、深沉、有回响,是为八支之音声。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Visaṭṭhamañjuviññeyyā, savanīyāvisārino; Bindugambhīraninnādi, tyevamaṭṭhaṅgiko saro’’ti.
正如梵天的声音因不被胆汁、痰等障碍所覆蔽而清净、甜美。又如小动物被狮子、老虎等猛兽追逐而奔逃时,听到迦陵频伽鸟的鸣声,因其声音甜美,便放下对死亡的恐惧,不再奔逃,抬脚停住不动而聆听。同样,迦陵频伽鸟的声音因具足法性而甜美、可爱、令人愉悦。同样,世尊所造之业净化了所依处,由于所依处的清净且不被胆汁、痰等障碍所覆蔽,从世尊脐部生起的声音也具足八支,极为清净、极为甜美、极为可爱、极为令人愉悦。然而,这其实只是低劣的譬喻,因为世尊的声音比那些声音甜美、可爱、令人愉悦百倍、千倍。正如法施王后阿僧祇蜜多听到迦陵频伽鸟甜美的声音后思惟:‘这畜生的声音尚且如此甜美,那么证得一切知智之祥瑞的世尊,其声音又该是何等极为甜美啊!’她生起喜悦,不舍弃那份喜悦,连同她那长达七百由旬的双腿,安立于须陀洹果。因此,赞叹世尊具有极为甜美的妙音。显示巴利原文
Yathā hi brahmuno saro pittasemhehi apalibuddhattā visuddho madhuro hoti. Yathā ca sīhabyagghādīhi vāḷamigehi anubandhā dhāvantā khuddakamigā karavīkasakuṇassa vikūjamānaṃ saddaṃ sutvā sarassa madhurattā maraṇabhayaṃ hitvā adhāvitvā ukkhittapādaṃ anikkhipitvā tiṭṭhantā suṇanti, evaṃ karavīkassa saddo dhammatābhāvena madhuro piyo manāpo hoti. Evaṃ bhagavatā kataṃ kammaṃ vatthuṃ sodheti, vatthussa suddhattā pittasemhehi ca apalibuddhattā bhagavato nābhito samuṭṭhahanto saropi aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgato suvisuddho atimadhuro atipiyo atimanāpo hoti. Sā panesā hīnūpamā hoti, bhagavato hi saro tehi saddehi satabhāgena sahassabhāgena atimadhuro atipiyo atimanāpo hoti, tathā hi dhammāso karañño asandhimittā devī karavīkasakuṇassa madhurasaddaṃ sutvā cintesi ‘‘imassa tiracchānassa madhuro saddo, ko nāma sabbaññutañāṇasiriṃ pattassa bhagavato atimadhuro saddo’’ti, pītiṃ uppādetvā taṃ pītiṃ avijahitvā sattahi jaṅghasatehi saddhiṃ sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhāti, tasmā bhagavato madhuravarasaropetanti thometīti.
“无量功德聚之依处”是指不可限量的戒等功德集合的安立处。此处,“无量”:所谓“量”指应被限量者,“有量”即是被限量者,非有量故名“无量”。“功德”指戒等诸法。由于它们能庄严、彰显具足它们的人,故称为“功德”。此词源自意为“彰显”的词根。而在《宝珠心要箧释》中则说:“功德,因能令自己的依处显明,故为功德。”显示巴利原文
Amitaguṇagaṇādhāranti aparimiṇitabbasīlādiguṇasamūhānaṃ patiṭṭhānabhūtaṃ. Ettha ca samitoti parimiṇitabboti mito, mādhātu parimāṇe ta, na mito amito. Guṇoti sīlādayo dhammā. Te hi guṇenti taṃsamaṅgīpuggalaṃ pakāsentīti guṇāti vuccanti. Guṇadhātu pakāsane a. Maṇisāramañjūsāṭīkāyaṃ pana ‘‘guṇanti attano ādhāraṃ pākaṭaṃ karontīti guṇā’’ti vuttaṃ.
《声论词根鬘》中又说:‘guṇa(功德)有“呼唤”之义。功德指戒等诸法。以何义而称为功德?因为众生想要见、闻、供养安立于自身之人,便会受到呼唤、邀请,故为功德。在此,虽然戒等诸法本身并无呼唤,但因有它们,呼唤与邀请确实由之而生,故如此说。另有人说:“它们发出嗡嗡声,故为功德。”我们则看到与此相应的词根。我们只看到guṇa有“呼唤”之义。应审察后采纳。’无量功德即不可限量的功德,其集合、聚集为无量功德聚,其依处——即安立于此者,为无量功德聚之依处,此指胜者。其义为:如同用那利叶盛取的海水不可限量一般,他是某种不可限量的戒等功德集合的依处、安立处。显示巴利原文
Saddanītidhātumālāyañca ‘‘guṇa āmantane, guṇoti sīlādayo dhammā, kenaṭṭhena te guṇā, goṇāpiyati āmantāpiyati attani patiṭṭhito puggalo daṭṭhuṃ sotuṃ pūjituñca icchantehi janehīti guṇo. Ettha kiñcāpi sīlādi dhammānaṃ āmantāpanaṃ natthi, tathāpi taṃhetu āmantanaṃ nimantanañca teyeva karonti nāmāti evaṃ vuttaṃ. Aññe pana guñjante abyayante iti guṇāti atthaṃ vadanti. Tadanurūpaṃ pana dhātusaddaṃna passāma . Guṇa āmantane icceva passāma. Vicāretvā gahetabba’’nti vuttaṃ. Amito guṇo amitaguṇo, tesaṃ gaṇo samūho amitaguṇagaṇo, tesaṃ. Ādhārati tiṭṭhati etthāti amitaguṇagaṇādhāro, jino labbhati. So pana samuddodakaṃ nāḷipattena aparimitaṃ viya kenaci aparimitānaṃ sīlādiguṇasamūhānaṃ ādhāro patiṭṭhānabhūtoti attho.
“十力”指具足不共于他的如来十力。在此,“力”意为不被任何敌对因缘所动摇而安住,故称为力。具足十力者,即是十力者,亦即佛陀。它又分两种:如来的十力,即身力与智力。其中,身力可依象种而了知。古德曾这样说:显示巴利原文
Dasabalanti aññehi asādhāraṇaṃ tathāgatadasabalasampannaṃ. Ettha hi balanti kehici viruddhehi kāraṇe hi balanti na kampenti thirantīti balaṃ, dasa balāni yassa soti dasabalo, buddho. Taṃ pana duvidhaṃ hoti tathā gatassa dasabalaṃ kāyadasabalañca, ñāṇadasabalañcāti. Tesu hi kāyabalaṃ hatthikulānusārena veditabbaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ porāṇehi –
黑象、婆迦象、恒河象、白象、铜色象、褐色象、
香象、吉祥象、金象、布萨象、六牙象,此为十种。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Kāḷā vakañca gaṅgeyyaṃ, paṇḍaraṃ tambapiṅgalaṃ; Gandha maṅgalahemañca, uposathaṃ chaddantime dasā’’ti.
此即十种象族。其中,黑象应视为普通的象种。十人之体力,等于一头黑象之力;十头黑象之力,等于一头恒河象之力;十头恒河象之力,等于一头白象之力;十头白象之力,等于一头铜色象之力;十头铜色象之力,等于一头褐色象之力;十头褐色象之力,等于一头香象之力;十头香象之力,等于一头吉祥象之力;十头吉祥象之力,等于一头金象之力;十头金象之力,等于一头布萨象之力;十头布萨象之力,等于一头六牙象之力;十头六牙象之力,等于一位如来之力。此力即名为‘那罗延那聚合之力’。若以普通象计,此力相当于千亿头象之力;若以人计,则相当于十千亿人之力。这便是如来的身力。然而,此身力并未出现于诸经文中,唯在注释书中有所说明。故《增支部·十集注》中说:‘十智力已见于经文中,不像身力那般仅存于注释书,此乃其要旨。’此处所言‘那罗延那聚合之力’:其中,‘那罗’意为‘光线’,由于众多、种种光线由此生起,故称‘那罗延那’,即金刚;因此,‘那罗延那聚合之力’意指金刚聚合之力。显示巴利原文
Imāni hi dasa hatthikulāni. Tattha kāḷāvakanti pakatihatthikulaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yaṃ dasannaṃ purisānaṃ kāyabalaṃ, taṃ ekassa kāḷāvakahatthino. Yaṃ dasannaṃ kāḷāvakānaṃ balaṃ, taṃ ekassa gaṅgeyyassa. Yaṃ dasannaṃ gaṅgeyyānaṃ, taṃ ekassa paṇḍarassa. Yaṃ dasannaṃ paṇḍarānaṃ, taṃ ekassa tambassa. Yaṃ dasannaṃ tambānaṃ, taṃ ekassa piṅgalassa. Yaṃ dasannaṃ piṅgalānaṃ, taṃ ekassa gandhahatthino. Yaṃ dasannaṃ gandhahatthīnaṃ, taṃ ekassa maṅgalassa. Yaṃ dasannaṃ maṅgalānaṃ, taṃ ekassa hemavatassa. Yaṃ dasannaṃ hemavatānaṃ, taṃ uposathassa. Yaṃ dasannaṃ uposathānaṃ, taṃ ekassa chaddantassa. Yaṃ dasannaṃ chaddantānaṃ, taṃ ekassa tathāgatassa, nārāyanasaṅghātabalantipi idameva vuccati. Tadetaṃ pakatihatthīnaṃ gaṇanāya hatthikoṭisahassānaṃ . Purisagaṇanāya dasannaṃ purisakoṭisahassānaṃ balaṃ hoti. Idaṃ tathāgatassa kāyabalaṃ hoti. Idaṃ pana tāsu tāsu pāḷīsu na āgataṃ. Aṭṭhakathāsuyeva āgataṃ. Tena vuttaṃ dasaka nipāta aṅguttaraṭīkāyaṃ ‘‘dasa balañāṇaṃ pana pāḷiyaṃ āgatameva. Na kāyabalaṃ viya aṭṭha kathārūḷhamevāti adhippāyo’’ti. Ettha ca nārāyana saṅghāta balanti ettha nārā vuccanti rasmiyo, tā bahū nānāvidhā ito uppajjantīti nārāyanaṃ, vajiraṃ. Tasmā nārāyanasaṅghāta balanti vajirasaṅghātabalanti atthoti.
智十力的内容,在《分别论》经文、《根本五十篇·大狮子吼经》以及《增支部·十集》经文中已有详尽记载。然而,为便于理解,我简要说明如下:即处非处智、业报智、遍趣行智、界差别智、众生种种意乐智、知他众生根器上下智、禅那解脱定等至之杂染清净出离智、宿住随念智、众生死生智、漏尽智。此为《阿毗达摩分别论》中所出现的顺序。显示巴利原文
Ñāṇadasabalaṃ pana vibhaṅgapāḷiyañca mūlapaṇṇāse mahā sīhanādasutte dasakanipātaaṅguttarapāḷiyañca vitthārena āgatameva. Sukhaggahaṇatthaṃ pana saṅkhepena dassayissāmi. Seyyathidaṃ. Ṭhānāṭṭhānañāṇañca, kammasamādānānaṃ vipākañāṇaṃ, sabbatthagāminipaṭipadāñāṇaṃ, anekadhātu nānādhātu loka ñāṇaṃ, sattānaṃ nānādhimuttikataṃ ñāṇaṃ, parasattānaṃ parapuggalānaṃ indriyaparopariyattiñāṇaṃ, jhānavimokkhasamādhisamāpattīnaṃ saṃkilesaṃ vodānaṃ vuṭṭhānaṃ ñāṇaṃ, pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇaṃ, sattānaṃ cutūpapātaṃ ñāṇaṃ, āsavānaṃ khayañāṇañcāti. Ayaṃ pana kamo abhidhammavibhaṅgapāḷiyaṃ āgatakkamo.
然而,在涉及死生智之处,《根本五十篇》的巴利经文、《大狮子吼经》以及《增支部·十集》的巴利经文中,所出现的是天眼智。但从义理上而言,因为天眼智能观见死生,故二者本质相同。此处,‘处非处智’即如实了知因与非因的智慧。之所以说为‘处’,是因能安立果,果依彼因而生起、转起。‘业异熟智’即如实了知已受、所造作的过去、未来、现在善与不善业的异熟——即善趣、恶趣的结生以及涅槃果的智慧。‘遍趣行智’即如实了知通向一切趣之行道的智慧。其中,‘行’意为藉以行进、到达的道路。‘遍趣’指通往地狱等五趣;‘无趣’即通往涅槃。正如经中所说:‘舍利弗,我知涅槃,亦知通往涅槃的行道。’显示巴利原文
Cutūpapātañāṇaṭṭhāne pana mūlapaṇṇāsapāḷiyaṃ mahāsīhanādasutte ca dasakanipātaaṅguttarapāḷiyaṃ dibbacakkhuñāṇaṃ āgataṃ. Atthato pana dibbacakkhuñāṇena cutūpapātassa passitattā sadisamevāti. Tattha hi ṭhānāṭṭhānañāṇanti kāraṇākāraṇaṃ yathābhūtaṃ jānanañāṇaṃ. Kāraṇañhi yasmā tattha phalaṃ tiṭṭhati tadāyattavuttitāya uppajjati ceva pavattati ca, tasmā ṭhānanti vuccati. Kammasamādānānaṃ vipākañāṇanti samādiyitvā katānaṃ atītānāgata paccuppannānaṃ kusalākusalakammānaṃ sugatiduggatipaṭisandhisaṅkhātaṃ vipākaṃ nibbānaphalañca yathābhūtaṃ pajānanañāṇaṃ. Sabbattha gāminipaṭipadaṃ ñāṇanti sabbagatigāminiñca paṭipadaṃ maggaṃ yathābhūtaṃ pajānanañāṇaṃ. Tattha ca paṭipadanti paṭipajjati pāpuṇāti etenāti paṭipadaṃ, maggaṃ. Gatigāmininti nirayādipañcagatigāminiṃ. Agatigāmininti nibbānagāminiṃ. Vuttañhi ‘‘nibbānañcāhaṃ sāriputta pajānāmi nibbānagāminiñca paṭipada’’nti.
'多界种种界世间智':此处,'多界'是以眼界等或欲界等而说有多界。'种种界'指那些界由于特征各异、自性不相似而有种种差别。'世间'是蕴、处、界的世间。'智'是如实了知的智。'众生意乐智':即对众生因低劣等意乐而有种种意乐的状态如实了知的智。'他众生、他补特伽罗的根胜劣智':此处,'他众生'指主要的众生,'他补特伽罗'指较之低劣的众生;或者,这两个词是同义的,仅为应所化的众生而分两种方式宣说。'根胜劣智':即对信等诸根的殊胜与增长,以及低劣与损减如实了知的智。显示巴利原文
Anekadhātunānādhātulokaṃ ñāṇanti ettha aneka dhātūti cakkhudhātuādīhi kāmadhātūhi vā bahudhātuṃ. Nānādhātūti tāsaṃyeva dhātūnaṃ vilakkhaṇattā visadisa sabhāvattā nānāppakāradhātuṃ. Lokanti khandhāyatana dhātulokaṃ. Ñāṇanti yathābhūtaṃ pajānanañāṇaṃ. Sattānaṃ adhimuttikataṃ ñāṇanti sattānaṃ hīnādīhi adhimuttīhi nānādhimuttikabhāvaṃ yathābhūtaṃ pajānanañāṇaṃ. Parasattānaṃ parapuggalānaṃ indriyaparopariyattiñāṇanti ettha parasattānanti padhānasattānaṃ. Parapuggalānanti tato paresaṃ hīnasattānaṃ. Ekatthameva vā etaṃ padadvayaṃ veneyyavasena dvedhā vuttaṃ. Indriyaparopariyattiñāṇanti saddhādīnaṃ indriyānaṃ parabhāvaṃ vaḍḍhañca aparabhāvaṃ hāniñca yathābhūtaṃ pajānanañāṇaṃ.
'诸禅、解脱、定、等至的杂染、清净、出起智':此处,'诸禅、解脱、定、等至'指初禅等四禅、'内有色想观外色'等八解脱、有寻有伺等三定,以及初禅等至等九种次第等至。'杂染'是退分法,'清净'是胜分法,'出起'指从禅等出起的原因。'智'是如实了知的智。'宿住随念智':是对过去所住之蕴的随念所摄的如实了知的智。'众生死生智':是了知众生死与生的天眼智。'漏尽智':即对欲漏等灭尽所摄的漏灭尽——也就是涅槃——如实了知的智。当知这些智是不共的,唯如来所有的十力智。显示巴利原文
Jhānavimokkhasamādhisamāpattīnaṃ saṃkilesaṃ vodānaṃ vuṭṭhānaṃ ñāṇanti ettha jhānavimokkhasamādhisamāpattīnanti paṭhamādīnaṃ catunnaṃ jhānānaṃ, rūpī rūpāni passatītiādīnaṃ aṭṭhannaṃ vimokkhānaṃ, savitakkasavicārādīnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ samādhīnaṃ, paṭhamajjhāna samāpattiādīnañca navannaṃ anupubbasamāpattīnaṃ. Saṃkilesanti hānabhāgiyadhammaṃ. Vodānanti visesabhāgiyadhammaṃ. Vuṭṭhānanti yena kāraṇena jhānādīhi vuṭṭhahanti, taṃ kāraṇaṃ. Ñāṇanti yathābhūtaṃ pajānanañāṇaṃ. Pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇanti pubbe nivutthakkhandhānussaraṇasaṅkhātaṃ pajānanañāṇaṃ. Sattānaṃ cutūpapātaṃ ñāṇanti sattānaṃ cutiñca upapātañca pajānanaṃ dibbacakkhuñāṇaṃ. Āsavānaṃ khayañāṇanti kāmāsavādīnaṃ khayasaṅkhātaṃ āsavanirodhaṃ nibbānaṃ yathābhūtaṃ pajānana ñāṇanti . Imāni pana ñāṇāni aññehi asādhāraṇāni tathāgatassa dasabalañāṇānīti daṭṭhabbāni.
于此有云:显示巴利原文
Honti cettha –
处非处与异熟之智,以及行道智;
多界世间,及众生意乐。[应知此是白胜广偈;]
根之胜劣,及禅等之杂染;
清净出起智、宿住随念;
众生之死生智、漏尽智;
这十种是佛陀的共通智。[应知此为共通偈颂;]
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Ṭhānāṭṭhānaṃ vipākañca, ñāṇaṃ paṭipadaṃ ñāṇaṃ; Anekadhātulokañca, sattānaṃ adhimuttikaṃ. [sā panesā setavavipulāgāthāti daṭṭhabbā;] Indriyaparāparañca, jhānādinaṃ saṃkilesaṃ; Vodānaṃ vuṭṭhānaṃ ñāṇaṃ, pubbenivāsānussatiṃ; Sattānaṃ cutūpapātaṃ, āsavakkhayaṃ ñāṇanti; Dasimāni buddhassa cā, sādhāraṇāni ñāṇānī’’ti. [sā panesā sāmaññagāthāti daṭṭhabbā;]
难道十力智不是各别存在,而唯是一切知智吗?那么,为何将此智说为十种差别呢?答:因为十力智是一回事,一切知智是另一回事。十力智唯了知各自的作用,而一切知智则了知其本身及此外的一切。在十力智中:第一唯了知因与非因;第二唯了知业与异熟的差别;第三唯了知决定的业;第四唯了知界差别的因;第五唯了知众生的意欲与意乐;第六唯了知诸根的利钝;第七唯了知与禅那等相关的杂染等;第八唯了知过去所住蕴的相续;第九唯了知众生的死与结生;第十唯了知谛的决定。然而,一切知智了知由这些所应知的乃至更超胜的一切,但它并不执行这十种智的所有作用,因为它不能作为禅那而安止,不能作为神通而变现,不能作为道而断除烦恼。如此,便是这两种智的差别。在此,意指这两种智。显示巴利原文
Nanu dasabalañāṇaṃ nāma pāṭiyekkaṃ natthi, sabbaññutañāṇameva hoti, atha kasmā taṃ ñāṇaṃ dasabhedena vuttanti. Vuccate. Aññameva hi dasabalañāṇaṃ, aññaṃ sabbaññutañāṇaṃ, dasabalañhi sakasakakiccameva jānāti. Sabbaññutañāṇaṃ pana tampi tato avasesampi pajānāti. Dasabalañāṇesu hi paṭhamaṃ kāraṇākāraṇameva jānāti. Dutiyaṃ kammantara vipākantarameva. Tatiyaṃ kammaparicchedameva. Catutthaṃ dhātu nānattakāraṇameva. Pañcamaṃ sattānaṃ ajjhāsayādhimuttimeva. Chaṭṭhaṃ indriyānaṃ tikkhamudubhāvameva. Sattamaṃ jhānādīhi saddhiṃ tesaṃ saṃkilesādimeva. Aṭṭhamaṃ pubbe nivutthakhandhasantatimeva. Navamaṃ sattānaṃ cutipaṭisandhimeva. Dasamaṃ saccaparicchedameva. Sabbaññutañāṇaṃ pana etehi jānitabbañca tato uttariñca pajānāti. Etesaṃ pana kiccaṃ na sabbaṃ karoti. Tañhi jhānaṃ hutvā appetuṃ na sakkoti. Iddhi hutvā vikubbituṃ na sakkoti. Maggo hutvā kilese khepetuṃ na sakkoti. Evaṃ tesaṃ ñāṇadvayānaṃ visesoti. Taṃ pana idha ñāṇadvayaṃ adhippetanti.
Atula(无与伦比)意为:以戒等功德,与任何人均不相似。此处解释其词义。衡量、称量称为tulā(秤),tula意为相似。在《声论》中确实说“tula指称量”。或者,因以此衡量、计量,故称为tulā,即本性之量。如同秤,故称为tulā,指智。以此智衡量,称为tula(被衡量者)。在衡量这一派生词中,无后缀。以与秤相似的智所衡量之人。既非tula,则是atula(无与伦比)。这是持业释与依主释的混合复合词。以戒等功德,与任何人都不相似的世尊可得。或者,没有与他相似、等同之人,故为atula,指世尊。这是表示其功德内涵的持业释。意为:以戒等功德,与任何人都不相似的最上之人。因为在天世间中,他是最上之人。如经所说:“诸比丘,所有众生,无论无足、二足或四足,如来被宣告为其中之最上者;离欲是诸法之最胜者,具眼者是二足中之最上者。”这与“我礼敬那位无与伦比的佛陀”相连。Vande(我礼敬)意为:忆念佛陀令眼愉悦的身相等功德后,我以三门恭敬地礼敬。此处应知,由于大范围经,mi显示巴利原文
Atulanti sīlādīhi guṇehi kenaci puggalena asadisaṃ. Ayaṃ panettha vacanattho. Tulanaṃ ummānaṃ tulā, tula sadisyaṃ. Saddanītiyañhi ‘‘tula ummāne’’ti vuttaṃ. Atha vā tuliyati pamiyati etāyāti tulā, pakatitulā. Tulā viyāti tulā, ñāṇaṃ. Tāya sammito tulo. Sammita taddhite apaccayo. Tulasadisañāṇena sammito puggalo. Na tulo atulo. Kammadhārayamissakatappurisa samāsoyaṃ. Sīlādiguṇehi kenaci puggalena asadiso bhagavā labbhati. Atha vā natthi tulo sadiso puggalo etassāti atulo, bhagavā. Atagguṇasaṃviññāṇoyaṃ bahubbīhi. Sīlādiguṇehi kenaci asadiso aggapuggaloti attho. Sadevake loke aggapuggalabhāvato. Yathāha ‘‘yāvatā bhikkhave sattā apadā vā dvipadā vā catuppadā vā, tathāgato tesaṃ aggamakkhāyati, virāgo seṭṭho dhammānaṃ dvipadānañca cakkhumā’’ti. Taṃ atulaṃ buddhanti sambandho. Vandeti buddhassa nayanasubhagakāyaṅgādiguṇaṃ anussaritvā tīhi dvārehi sakkaccaṃ ahaṃ vandāmīti attho. Ettha ca mivibhattiyā mahāvisayasuttena ekārā desoti daṭṭhabbo. Vandanā pana tividhā hoti kāyavacīmanovandanāvasenāti. Yathāha ‘‘tisso imā bhikkhave vandanā. Katamā tisso. Kāyena vandati, vācāya vandati, manasā vandatī’’ti.
其中,先令如理作意之心现前,将双膝、双肘及额头这五处肢体置于地上,面向应礼敬者俯身,称为以身礼敬。对此,注释书等中说:“以五体投地礼敬后”。以言语宣说佛陀功德,称为以语礼敬,如“礼敬毗婆尸!礼敬尸弃!礼敬毗舍浮!礼敬拘留孙!礼敬拘那含佛!礼敬迦叶!礼敬鸯耆罗娑!”等,也是语礼敬。以心忆念佛等功德,称为以意礼敬。显示巴利原文
Tattha yoniso manasikāracittaṃ paccupaṭṭhāpetvā jāṇudvayakapparadvayanalāṭasaṅkhātāni pañca aṅgāni bhūmiyaṃ patiṭṭhāpetvā vandaneyyānaṃ abhimukhaṃ nipatanto kāyena vandati nāma. Yaṃ sandhāya ‘‘pañcapatiṭṭhitena vanditvā’’ti aṭṭha kathādīsu vuttaṃ. Buddhaguṇapadāni vācāya pavattento vācāya vandati nāma. Vipassissa namatthu, sikhissāpi namatthu, vessa bhussa namatthu, kakusandhassa namatthu, koṇāgamanassa namatthu , kassapassa namatthu, aṅgīrassassa namatthu tyādīsupi vācāvandanāyeva. Buddhādi guṇāni anussaranto manasā vandati nāmāti.
此处略释:我以三门恭敬礼敬那位佛陀——他有令眼愉悦的身相,即以善妙身相令一切众生眼目欣悦;有甜美、殊胜、悦耳、可爱、令人爱乐的最上音声;是无量功德聚的承载,亦即不可称量的戒等功德聚集之所依;具足十力,即具足不与其余共通的如来色身十力与智十力;无与伦比,即在戒等功德上与任何人皆不相似。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepayojanā. Nayanasubhagakāyaṅgaṃ sabbasattānaṃ cakkhussa sobhanaṃ gatena kāyaṅgena samannāgataṃ, madhuravarasaropetaṃ piyapemanīyena assādi yena uttamasaddena samannāgataṃ, amitaguṇagaṇādhāraṃ aparimiṇitabbasīlādiguṇasamūhānaṃ patiṭṭhānabhūtaṃ, dasabalaṃ anaññasādhāraṇena tathāgatassa kāyañāṇadasa balena samannāgataṃ, atulaṃ sīlādiguṇehi kenaci asadisaṃ buddhaṃ tīhi dvārehi sakkaccaṃ ahaṃ vande vandāmīti.
那位坚定而持胜智的佛陀,
于轮回中历经身苦,
以及从世间而来的心苦
我礼敬那位人天祥瑞
显示巴利原文 Yo buddho dhitimāññadhārako, Saṃsāre anubhosi kāyikaṃ; Dukkhaṃ cetasikañca lokato, Taṃ vande naradeva maṅgalaṃ.
3 如此,以第三偈礼敬佛陀后,如今欲以定等四种功德称扬而作礼敬,故说出“那位具足坚定、持守他教的佛陀”等偈颂。应知此偈是纯毗罗吉陀偈,以十音节为特征,因其具有摩萨、伽那、伽鲁重音。诚如《日出论》中所说:“摩萨、伽那、伽鲁重音,是纯毗罗吉陀,应知为胜。”意为:若一行中具有摩萨(摩萨伽那)与伽那、伽鲁重音,即应知那名为纯毗罗吉陀胜。其关联为:那位具足坚定、持守他教的佛陀,于世间轮回中经历了身苦与心苦,是人天祥瑞,我礼敬那位佛陀。显示巴利原文
3. Evaṃ tatiyagāthāya buddhassa vanditvā idāni samādhi ādīhi catūhi guṇehi thomitvā vanditukāmo yo buddho dhitimāññadhārako tiādigāthamāha. Ayaṃ pana masajagaṇa garuyuttattā dasakkharehi lakkhitā suddhavirā jitagāthāti daṭṭhabbā. Vuttañhi vuttodaye-msājgā suddhavirā jitaṃ matanti. Tassattho. Yassaṃ paṭipādaṃ msā masagaṇā ca jgā jagaṇagarukā ca ce siyyuṃ, taṃ vuttaṃ suddhavirājitanti mataṃ ñātabbanti. Dhitimā aññadhārako yo buddho lokato saṃsāre kāyikaṃ dukkhañca cetasikaṃ dukkhañca anubhosi naradevamaṅgalaṃ, taṃ buddhaṃ ahaṃ vandeti sambandho.
在此,“yo”是表不定的指示词,意谓“任何”“无论何种”。因其为表不定意义的全名词,故不应再作词义解释,但应作“ya o”这样的词形分解。其中,ya 词所诠表的不定,以次要方式获得佛陀实体;其与“无论何种”相应的生类、名、姓、戒、住、行境等不定共相之特质,则以主要方式获得。由第一转声语尾所作成的“o”,所诠是以本性、亲依止为相的作者格单数。或者,趋入全名状态故称 yo,或趋入不定意义状态故称 yo;或以全名状态运行故称 yo,或以全名状态应知故称 yo,或以此当知不定之义故称 yo。显示巴利原文
Tattha hi yoti aniyamaniddeso. Yo yādisoti attho. Tassa ca aniyamavācaka sabbanāmapadattā vacanattho na kātabbo. Tassa pana ya oti padavibhāgo kātabbo. Tesu ca yasaddassa vāccaṃ aniyamo buddhadabbo appadhānena labbhati, tassa yādisayuttajaccanāmagottasīlavihārī gocarasaṅkhātaṃ aniyamasāmaññākārattaguṇameva padhānena labbhati. Paṭhamāsivibhattiyā kāriyabhūtassa okārassa vāccaṃ pakatūpanissayasaṅkhātaṃ kattukārakekavacanasaṅkhyaṃ labbhati. Atha vā sabbanāmabhāvaṃ yāti gacchatīti yo, aniyamavācakabhāvaṃ yāti gacchatīti vā yo, sabbanāma bhāvena yāti pavattatīti vā yo, sabbanāmabhāvena yātabbo ñātabboti vā yo, yātabbo ñātabbo etena vā aniyamatthoti yo.
因此古德说:显示巴利原文
Tenāhu porāṇā –
“依种种因缘和差别,而有界、缘的分析;
如同思维者之威力,在思维中最为殊胜。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Nānākāraṇaṃ paṭicca, dhātupaccayaviggahaṃ; Cintakānaṃ pabhāvova, padhānaṃ hoti cintane’’ti.
“佛陀”意为彻证四谛法者。此处解释其词义:因觉知四谛,故为佛陀,即世尊。此为主动义,词根为budha。或谓觉悟众生,故称佛陀,此为使役义,意为令他人觉悟四谛。或谓非从他觉,从随眠的愚痴睡眠中觉醒,故为佛陀;或谓如莲花因日光普照而绽放,得最胜妙色庄严,因最上道智现前,得无量功德聚庄严的一切知智而觉悟、绽放,故为佛陀;或谓觉悟、趣入名为涅槃的唯一道路,故为佛陀。Budha一词确有“知”“绽放”“行”“醒”四种意义。显示巴利原文
Buddhoti paṭividdhacatusaccadhammo. Ayaṃ panettha vacanattho. Bujjhati cattāri saccānīti buddho, bhagavā. Suddhakattusādhanoyaṃ. Budhadhātu ta. Bodhetā pajāyāti vā buddho, hetu kattusādhanoyaṃ. Aññesaṃ cattāri saccāni bodhetīti attho. Atha vā anaññabodhito hutvā savāsanāya sammohaniddāya bujjhati jāgarotīti buddho, dinakarakiraṇa samāgamena paramarucirasirīsobhaggappattiyā vikasitamiva padumaṃ aggamaggañāṇasamāgamena aparimitaguṇagaṇālaṅkata sabbaññutañāṇappattiyā bujjhati vikasatīti vā buddho, nibbāna saṅkhātaṃ ekāyanamaggaṃ bujjhati gacchatīti vā buddho. Budhasaddo hi ñāṇādīsu catūsvatthesu vattati.
于智与绽放,以及于行与觉醒,
佛陀一词,即于此四种意义上转起。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Ñāṇe vikasane ceva, gamane cāpi jāgare; Catūsvetesu atthesu, budhasaddo pavattatī’’ti.
又或,因觉知、了知一切应知法,故为佛陀;以波罗蜜所修之慧,于一切有为、无为法,觉知、已觉知、将觉知故,为佛陀;彼世尊实为正自觉者,以其所证得的智德殊胜,应被觉知故,为佛陀;世尊所应觉知、应了知者,即是佛陀。那是什么?即是一切知智。彼具此智故,为佛陀、世尊。从义理上,由波罗蜜修习成熟,以自觉智连同习气,摧破灭尽一切烦恼无余,以大悲与一切知智等无量功德聚为依处的蕴相续,即是佛陀。正如所说:'佛陀者,即彼世尊,自觉、无师,于前所未闻之法中,自证诸谛,于彼得一切知性,于诸力得自在。'显示巴利原文
Atha vā sabbañeyyadhamme bujjhati jānātīti buddho, pārami bhāvitāya paññāya sabbe saṅkhatāsaṅkhatadhamme bujjhati abujjhi bujjhissatīti vā buddho, sammāsambuddho vata so bhagavāti adhigatañāṇaguṇavisesehi bujjhitabboti vā buddho, bhagavatā bujjhitabbaṃ ñātabbanti buddhaṃ. Kiṃ taṃ, sabbaññuta ñāṇaṃ, tadassatthīti buddho, bhagavā. Atthato pana pāramitā bhāvito sayambhūñāṇena saha vāsanāya vihataviddhasta niravasesakleso mahākaruṇāsabbaññutañāṇādiapari meyyaguṇagaṇādhāro khandhasantāno buddho. Yathāha ‘‘buddhoti yo so bhagavā sayambhū anācariyako pubbe ananussutesu dhammesu sāmaṃ saccāni abhisambujjhi, tattha ca sabbaññutaṃ patto, balesu ca vasībhāva’’nti.
此处所说“佛”有四种:一切知佛、独觉佛、四谛佛、闻佛。其中,历经四阿僧祇劫又十万劫,圆满三十种波罗蜜而证得正觉者,称为一切知佛。历经二阿僧祇劫又十万劫,圆满波罗蜜而证得自觉者,称为独觉佛。其余漏尽者,称为四谛佛。多闻者,称为闻佛。但此处所指的是一切知佛。显示巴利原文
Ettha ca buddho nāma sabbaññubuddha, paccekabuddha, catusaccabuddha, suta buddhavasena catubbidho hoti. Tattha kappasatasahassādhikāni cattāri asaṅkhyeyyāni samatiṃsapāramiyo pūretvā sambodhippatto sabbaññubuddho nāma. Kappasatasahassādhikāni dve asaṅkhyeyyāni pāramiyo pūretvā sayambhūpatto paccekabuddho nāma. Avasesā khīṇāsavā catusaccabuddho nāma. Bahussuto sutabuddho nāma. Idha pana sabbaññubuddho adhippeto.
“Dhitimā aññadhārako”(坚固持异者)一词,应拆解为“dhitimā”和“aññadhārako”。“Dhitimā”,即具定者。令相应法安住于同一所缘,故称为“dhiti”(定),也就是三摩地。词根是“dhā”。“ā”变为“i”。“Dhiyati”意为安置,即让相应法住于一处所缘;这是通过心的作意,以安住于一处所缘、心于所缘不动摇的意义而安立。拥有这种定的人,便是“dhitimā”,即佛陀。正如大须弥山不被四方猛烈吹来的风所动摇,佛陀亦不被敌对之邪说之风、可爱与不可爱的所缘,以及利衰、称讥、毁誉、苦乐等世间法所动摇,是真正的具定者。这便是所说之义。显示巴利原文
Dhitimāññadhārakoti ettha dhitimā aññadhārakoti padacchedo kātabbo. Dhitimāti samādhivanto, sampayutta dhamme ekārammaṇe dhāretīti dhiti, samādhi. Dhādhātuti. Ākārassa ikārādeso. Dhiyati ṭhapeti ekārammaṇe sampayuttadhammeti dhiti, cittena yogeneveso ekā rammaṇe patiṭṭhāpanavasena cittassa ārammaṇe niccalabhāvena patiṭṭhāpetīti attho. Dhiti assa atthīti dhitimā, buddho. So hi yathā mahāmeru catūhi disāhi bhusaṃ āgatehi vātehi na samiñjati, evaṃ paṭipakkhehi micchāvāda vātehi ca iṭṭhāniṭṭhārammaṇehi ca lābhālābha yasāyasa nindā pasaṃsa sukhadukkhasaṅkhātehi lokadhammehi ca na samiñjati, samādhivantoyeva hotīti vuttaṃ hoti.
“Aññadhārako”,意为持阿拉汉果者。或者,也可理解为执持名为解脱的阿拉汉果白伞者。“Aññaṃ”即阿拉汉果,因为以初道见谛者,了知其果而不超越其界限。“ā”是前缀,表界限义。“ñā”是字根,加上“kvi”。由于音节相连,“ā”转为短音。执持此果者,即是“aññadhārako”。“añña”词加上“dhara”字根,再加上“ṇvu”。在轮回中——即于蕴、界、处无间断流转的轮回轮转中……显示巴利原文
Aññadhārakoti arahattaphalahārako. Vimuttisaṅkhātaṃ arahattaphalasetacchattaṃ dhārento vā. Jānāti paṭhama maggena diṭṭhasaccassa āmariyādaṃ anatikkamitvā vāti aññaṃ, arahattaphalaṃ. Āpubbañādhātu kvi. Āsaddo mariyādattho. Saṃyogaparattā ākārassa rasso, taṃ dhāretīti aññadhārako. Aññasaddūpapadadharadhātu ṇvu. Saṃsāreti khandhadhātuāyatanānaṃ abbocchinnaṃ pavattamāne saṃsāravaṭṭe.
如注疏中所说:显示巴利原文
Vuttañhi aṭṭhakathāyaṃ –
蕴的次第、界与处的次第;
相续不断地流转,即称之为轮回。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Khandhānañca paṭipāṭi, dhātuāyatanāna ca; Abbocchinnaṃ vattamānā, saṃsāroti pavuccatī’’ti.
蕴、界、处彼此相连而一再运行、流转,故名为“轮回”(saṃsāro)。“saṃ”前缀加上“sara”词根(行义),再加“ṇa”构成。或可作如此解释:蕴、处、界在其中无间断地运行、流转,故称为“轮回”。于轮回中,“anubhosī”意为一再受用、感受,即“令感受”(avedayī)之义。“kāyikaṃ”指于身中、于身体转起的身受。“cetasikaṃ”指于心中转起的心受。这两个词都是“苦”的修饰语。“苦”即轮转之苦。所谓“苦是苦”(dukkhanaṃ dukkhaṃ),或“令苦故为苦”(dukkhayatīti dukkhaṃ),词根“dukkha”加“a”。此说依使役义而作解释,即令彼生起者,使之受苦。“lokato”意为从有情世间而言。“世间”(loko)者,福非福及其异熟于其中流转故,词根“luka”加“ṇa”。或者,“世间”者,执取善等故,词根“lā”加词缀“oka”。此处指有情世间。“坚固持异者”(dhitimā aññadhārako)即彼佛,为显示巴利原文
Khandhadhātuāyatanānaṃ aññamaññasambandhena saṃpunappunaṃ sarati gacchati pavattatīti saṃsāro. Saṃpubbasaradhātu gatimhi ṇa. Atha vā khandhāyatanadhātuyo saṃ abbocchinnaṃ saranti gacchanti pavattanti etthāti saṃsāroti vacanattho kātabbo, tasmiṃ. Anubhosīti anupunappunaṃ abhuñji, avedayīti attho. Kāyikanti kāye sarīre pavattaṃ kāyikaṃ. Cetasikanti cetasi pavattaṃ cetasikaṃ. Taṃ pana padadvayaṃ dukkhantipade visesanaṃ. Dukkhanti vaṭṭadukkhaṃ. Dukkhanaṃ dukkhaṃ, atha vā dukkhayatīti dukkhaṃ, dukkhadhātu a. Idaṃ pana nibbacanaṃ kāritavasena vuttaṃ. Yassa uppajjati, taṃ dukkhitaṃ karotīti vuttaṃ hoti. Lokatoti sattalokahetu. Lokiyanti pavattanti ettha puññāpuññāni tabbipāko cāti loko. Lokadhātu ṇa. Atha vā kusalādīni lāti gaṇhātīti loko. Lādhātu okapaccayo. Satta lokova labbhati. Dhitimā aññadhārako yo buddho saṃsāravaṭṭe nimuggānaṃ sattānamanudayāya saṃsāravaṭṭadukkhato pamocetukāmo kappasatasahassādhikāni cattāri asaṅkhyeyyāni atidukkarāni samatiṃsapāramiyo pañca mahā pariccāge ca karonto sattalokahetu kāyikaṃ cetasikaṃ saṃsāravaṭṭadukkhaṃ anubhavasīti vuttaṃ hoti. Tanti tādisaṃ buddhaṃ. Vandeti vandāmi.
“Naradevamaṅgalaṃ”意为人与天的吉祥。此处词义如是:“Naro”(人):引导至地狱故,称为人,即人类。“nī”词根(到达义)加上词缀“aro”。然圣人是依过去曾有之趣向而称为“人”。或者,“导至最胜位”故为“人”,即引导至于最上出家之义。而在《天宫事注释》中说:“导至兄长之位”故为“人”,虽是作为子、弟之人,却立于母、姐之父位,更何况身为夫者之于其他女子。在《清净道大疏》中说:“作种种能”故为“人”,即男子汉。正如最初本性之有情,以超越其他本性之殊胜义而住于、转起于优越之处,故称“男子”(puriso);同样,以引导之义称为“人”。虽是子、弟之人,亦立于母、姐之父位,何况其他女子之于其他男子。因此,此处“人”虽是总称,但特指男子,因取其要义故为合理。“天”(devā)者,以欲乐、禅那、神通、心自在等而游戏故,“divu”词根加上“ṇa”。或者,以身庄严之光耀游戏故为“天”。天有三种:约定天显示巴利原文
Naradevamaṅgalanti naradevānaṃ maṅgalabhūtaṃ. Ayaṃ panettha vacanatto. Nirayaṃ neti pāpuṇātīti naro, manusso. Nidhātu pāpunane aro. Ariyamanusso pana bhūtapubbagatika nayena naro nāmāti. Atha vā seṭṭhabhāvaṃ netīti naro, uttamaṃ pabbajjaṃ netīti attho. Vimānavatthuaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana jeṭṭhabhāvaṃ netīti naro. Puttabhātubhūtopi hi puggalo mātujeṭṭhabhaginīnaṃ pituṭṭhāne tiṭṭhati, pageva bhattubhūto itarāsanti vuttaṃ. Visuddhimaggamahāṭīkāyaṃ pana naratīti naro, puriso. Yathā hi paṭhamapakatibhūto satto itarāya pakatiyā seṭṭhaṭṭhena puriucce ṭhāne seti pavattatīti purisoti vuccati, evaṃ nayanaṭṭhena naroti vuccati. Puttabhātu bhūtopi hi puggalo mātujeṭṭhabhaginīnaṃ pituṭhāne tiṭṭhati. Pageva itarā itarāsanti vuttaṃ. Tasmā idha pana naranti sāmaññena vuttampi visesena purisanaranti viññāyati padhānanayena gahaṇassa yuttattā. Dibbanti kāmaguṇa jhānābhiññācittissariyādīhi kīḷantīti devā. Divudhātu ṇa. Atha vā sarīrālaṅkārajutiyā dibbantīti devā. Devā ca nāma tividhā honti sammutidevā, upapattidevā, visuddhidevā cāti. Tattha mahāsammatakālato paṭṭhāya lokena devāti sammatattā rājāno deviyo rājakumārā ca sammutidevā nāma. Devaloke upapannā upapattidevā nāma. Buddhapaccekabuddhakhīṇāsavā visuddhidevā nāma. Idha pana upapattidevā adhippetā.
“吉祥”者,即成为吉祥本身。在偈颂中为修饰语。以一切成就增长众生,故称为“吉祥”,即佛陀。“吉祥”(maṅgala)的词根为“增长”(vaḍḍhana),后缀“alo”。或者说,“maṅga”意为“恶”,以教法为应调伏者斩断、截除其恶,故称为“吉祥”,即佛陀。此由“maṅga”一词与“lud”(截断)词根及后缀“kvi”构成。人与天合称人天,他们之吉祥即“人天吉祥”,亦指佛陀。又因佛陀为一切人、天、梵天所敬重,于轮宝、满瓶、华宅、吉祥草、白伞、钩、旗、金线等八种世间吉祥中最为殊胜第一,故称为“吉祥”。因此,“人天吉祥”实为对佛陀的赞颂。显示巴利原文
Maṅgalanti maṅgalabhūtaṃ. Tantipade visesanaṃ. Maṅganti vaḍḍhenti sabbasampattīhi sattānaṃ etenāti maṅgalo, buddho. Maṅgala dhātu vaḍḍhane alo. Atha vā maṅgaṃ vuccati pāpaṃ, taṃ veneyyānaṃ desanāya lunāti chindatīti maṅgalo, buddho. Maṅgasaddūpapadaludhātu kvi. Narā ca devā ca naradevā, tesaṃ maṅgalo naradevamaṅgalo, buddho. So pana manussadevabrahmānaṃ pūjanīyattā ca saṅkhe, cakkaṃ, puṇṇakumbho, garā, sirī, setacchattaṃ, aṅkuso, dhajaṃ, sovattikañcāti aṭṭhahi lokiyamaṅgalehi seṭṭhattā uttamattā ca maṅgalo nāmāti vuccati, tasmā buddhassa naradevamaṅgalanti thometīti adhippāyoti.
此处略释如下:具足坚毅者、具足定力者、持余法者、持阿拉汉果者——或说,持阿拉汉果之伞盖者——如是之佛陀,于轮回、于轮回轮转中,为世间因,曾一再体验身中所转起之苦与轮转之苦,心中所转起之苦与轮转之苦;曾一再感受人天之吉祥、人天之福祉。如是之佛陀,我礼敬,我顶礼。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepayojanā. Dhitimā samādhivanto aññadhārako arahattaphaladhārako arahattaphalase tacchattaṃ dhārento vā, yo yādiso buddho, saṃsāre saṃsāravaṭṭe, kāyikaṃ kāye pavattaṃ dukkhañca vaṭṭadukkhañca cetasi pavattaṃ dukkhañca vaṭṭadukkhañca, lokato lokahetu, anubhosi punappunaṃ abhavasi avedayi, naradevamaṅgalaṃ naradevānaṃ maṅgalabhūtaṃ, taṃ tādisaṃ buddhaṃ ahaṃ vande vandāmīti.
具足三十二相、妙色庄严之身,
从身迸出光芒,炽然照耀;
慧、决意、戒,功德聚之顶。
显示巴利原文 Bāttiṃsatilakkhaṇacitradehaṃ, Dehajjutiniggatapajjalantaṃ; Paññādhitisīlaguṇoghavindaṃ,
我礼敬已达最后生之牟尼。显示巴利原文
Vande munimantimajātiyuttaṃ.
4 4. 如此,于第三偈礼敬佛陀已,今欲以三十二相彩身等六种功德赞叹牟尼、致以礼敬,故说“三十二相彩身”等偈。此偈因具ta-ja-ja-gaṇa及重音的紧密结合,当知为由十一个音节所成之偈颂。正如《偈颂庄严》中说:“以ta、ja gaṇa与重音结合而呈现。”其义为:若于偈中次第具足ta、ja gaṇa,以及ja、ga ja gaṇa之重音,并与句末重音结合,即名为此偈之呈现。并且,此处纵有一重音或两重音,因标记相同,亦当知名为“呈现之偈”。其中,“三十二相彩身”即具足三十二大人相之庄严身。此处“三十二”,即二加三十,“二”以音变而成“bā”。以此相能标、应标佛陀之身,故名“相”。于此积集、增长或长养诸善,故为“身”,即身体。“身”之词根为积集、增长,后缀为“ṇa”。具三十二大人相庄严之身者,即得“三十二相彩身”,此指牟尼。显示巴利原文
4. Evaṃ tatiyagāthāya buddhassa natvā idāni bāttiṃsatilakkhaṇacitradehantyādīhi chahi guṇehi thomitvā munino vanditukāmo bāttiṃsati lakkhaṇa citra deha ntyādigāthamāha. Ayaṃ pana ta ja ja gaṇa garudvaya yuttattā ekādasakkharehi lakkhitā upaṭṭhitā gāthāti daṭṭhabbā. Vuttañhi vuttodaye tjā jgā garunāyamupaṭṭhitā sā’’ti. Tassattho. Yassaṃ paṭipādaṃ tjā tajagaṇā ca jgājagaṇagarū ca garunā pādantagarunā ce yuttā, sā ayaṃ gāthā upaṭṭhitā nāmāti. Ettha ca eka garuke satipi dvigarukepi lakkhaṇasamānattā upaṭṭhitā gāthā nāmāti daṭṭhabbā. Tattha bāttiṃsati lakkhaṇa citra dehanti dvattiṃsamahāpurisalakkhaṇehi vicitraṃ sarīravantaṃ. Ettha ca dvīhi adhikaṃ tiṃsaṃ bāttiṃsati. Dvisaddassa bādeso. Lakkhiyati lakkhitabbaṃ buddhasarīraṃ etenāti lakkhaṇaṃ. Dihati upacayati vaḍḍhati vā ettha kusalā kusalanti dehaṃ, sarīraṃ. Dihadhātu upacaye vaḍḍhane vā ṇa. Bāttiṃsati mahāpurisalakkhaṇehi citraṃ vicitraṃ dehaṃ sarīraṃ yassa soti bāttiṃsatilakkhaṇacitradeho, muni labbhati.
此处为三十二大人相之略说。即是:足善安立、足跟宽广、手指纤长、手足柔软嫩滑、手足有网缦、足踝不现、腿如羚羊、站立不弯而能以两手掌抚摸双膝、阴藏隐如马阴、肤色如金似黄金、皮肤细滑、一一毛孔生一毛、毛向上生、身如梵天挺直、七处隆满、上身如狮、肩际圆满、身如榕树周正、体围匀称、味觉最胜、颌如狮子、齿四十、齿齐平、齿无隙、牙齿极白、舌宽广、梵音、眼极青、睫如牛王、眉间生白毫、顶如裹巾。这些名为三十二大人相。显示巴利原文
Idaṃ panettha dvattiṃsamahāpurisalakkhaṇasarūpassa saṅkhepa dassanaṃ. Suppatiṭṭhitapādo ca, āyatapaṇhi, dīghaṅguli, muduta luṇahatthapādo, jālahatthapādo, ussaṅkhapādo, eṇijaṅgho, ṭhitakova anonamanto ubhohi pāṇitalehi jāṇu kāni parimasati parimajjati, kosohitavatthaguyho, suvaṇṇa vaṇṇo kañcanasannibhattaco, sukhumacchavī, ekekalomo, uddhaggalomo, brahmujugatto, sattussado, sīhapubbaddha kāyo, citantaraṃso, nigrodhaparimaṇḍalo, samavaṭṭakkhandho, rasaggarasī, sīhahanu, cattālīsadanto, samadanto, aviraḷadanto, susukkadāṭho, pahūtajivho, brahmassaro karavīkabhāṇi, atinīlanetto, gopakhumo, uṇṇā bhamu kantare jāto, uṇhīsasīso cāti dvattiṃsavidhāni honti mahāpurisalakkhaṇāni.
因此,在《资具品》的《相经》中这样说:“诸比丘,哪些是三十二大人相?具足这些大人相的大士唯有两种去处,别无其他。若居家,则为转轮王……若弃舍居家而出家过无家生活,则成为阿拉汉、正自觉者、世间面纱的揭开者。1. 诸比丘,于此,大士足善安立。诸比丘,大士足善安立,此亦是大士之大人相。2. 复次,诸比丘,大士足下有千辐轮相,轮辋、轮毂圆满具足。此亦是大士之大人相。3. 复次,诸比丘,大士足跟宽广……4. 手指纤长……5. 手足柔软嫩滑……6. 手足有网缦……7. 足背高隆……8. 腿如羚羊……9. 站立不弯,能以两手掌触摸摩擦双膝……10. 阴藏隐于马阴藏相……11. 肤色如金,皮肤似金色……12. 皮肤细滑,因皮肤细滑,尘垢不沾身……13. 一一毛生,一一毛从毛孔中生……14. 毛向上生,毛向上而生,色如眼药般青黑,卷曲右旋……15. 身如梵天正直……16. 七处隆满……17. 上身如狮子……18. 肩窝丰满……19. 身如尼拘律树般显示巴利原文
Tena vuttaṃ pātheyyavagge lakkhaṇasutte ‘‘katamāni tāni bhikkhave dvattiṃsamahāpurisassa mahāpurisalakkhaṇāni, yehi samannāgatassa mahāpurisassa dve gatiyo bhavanti, anaññā. Sace agāraṃ ajjhāvasati rājā hoti cakkavatti…pe… sace khopana agārasmā anagāriyaṃ pabbajati, arahaṃ hoti sammā sambuddho loke vivaṭacchado 1. idha bhikkhave mahā puriso suppatiṭṭhitapādo hoti. Yampi bhikkhave mahā puriso suppatiṭṭhitapādo hoti. Idampi bhikkhave mahā purisassa mahāpurisalakkhaṇaṃ bhavati 2. puna caparaṃ bhikkhave mahāpurisassa heṭṭhāpādatalesu cakkāni jātāni honti sahassārāni sanemikāni sanābhikāni sabbā kāraparipūrāni. Idampi bhikkhave mahāpurisassa mahāpurisa lakkhaṇaṃ bhavati 3. puna caparaṃ bhikkhave mahāpuriso āyatapaṇhī hoti 4. dīghaṅgulī hoti 5. mudutaluṇa hatthapādo hoti 6. jālahatthapādo hoti 7. ussaṅkhapādo hoti 8. eṇijaṅgho hoti 9. ṭhitakova anonamanto ubhohi pāṇitalehi jāṇukāni parimasati parimajjati 10. kosohitavatthaguyho hoti 11. suvaṇṇavaṇṇo kañcanasannibhattaco 12. sukhumacchavī hoti sukhumattā chaviyā rajojallaṃ kāye na upalimpati 13. ekekalomo hoti, ekekāni lomāni lomakūpesu jātāni 14. uddhaggalomo hoti. Uddhaggāni lomāni jātāni nīlāni añjanavaṇṇāni kuṇḍalā vattāni padakkhiṇāvattakajātāni 15. brahmujugatto hoti 16. sattussado hoti 17. sīhapubbaddha kāyo hoti 18. citantaraṃso hoti 19. nigrodhaparimaṇḍalo hoti, yāvatakvassa byāmo, tāva takvassa kāyo 20. samavaṭṭakkhandho hoti 21. rasagga saggī hoti 22. sīhahanu hoti 23. cattālīsadanto hoti 24. samadanto hoti 25. aviraḷadanto hoti 26. susukkadāṭho hoti 27. pahūtajivho hoti 28. brahmassaro hoti karavīkabhāṇi 29. atinīlanetto hoti 30. gopakhumo hoti 31. uṇṇā bhamukantare jātā hoti odātā mudutūla sannibhā. Yampi bhikkhave mahāpurisassa uṇṇā bhamukantare jātā hoti odātā mudutūlasannibhā. Idampi bhikkhave mahāpurisassa mahāpurisalakkhaṇaṃ bhavati 32. puna caparaṃ bhikkhave mahāpuriso uṇhīsasīso hoti. Yampi bhikkhave mahāpuriso uṇhīsasīso hoti. Idampi bhikkhave mahāpurisassa mahāpurisalakkhaṇaṃ bhavati. Imāni kho tāni bhikkhave dvattiṃsamahāpurisassa mahāpurisa lakkhaṇānī’’ti. Etesaṃ pana dvattiṃsamahāpurisalakkhaṇānaṃ attho pacchā āvibhavissatīti.
“身光发出而遍照”者:即从世尊的色身所放射的、称为六色光芒的光明,周遍照耀于众会之间。“光”为闪耀、照耀,即juti,词根为judh。“发出”谓出来、放射,即niggatā,指光芒,由前缀ni加词根gam构成。“遍照”谓以种种方式照耀、辉耀。此处本应说“dehaniggatajuti”(从身发出的光),为保护韵律而以词序颠倒说为“dehajjutiniggata”,故应理解为“从身发出的光”这一复合词。由身、由色身发出放射光明而遍照者,即是“身光发出而遍照的牟尼”。据说,从牟尼的前身,六色光芒生起,遍照八十肘之地;从后身、右手、左手,六色光芒生起,遍照八十肘之地;从头顶发际始,一切发旋中生起如孔雀颈色的光芒,遍照空中八十肘之地;从足底生起如珊瑚色的光芒,遍照坚厚大地八十肘之地。如此,周围八十肘之地,六色佛光闪耀跃动,犹如从金柱灯中放射而出、跃入虚空之火焰,又如从四大洲大云中射出的闪电般流散。因此,“身光发出而遍照”是赞叹之辞。显示巴利原文
Dehajjutiniggatapajjalantanti bhagavato rūpakāyato nikkhantehi chabbaṇṇaraṃsīsaṅkhātehi obhāsehi parisamantato vijjotavantaṃ. Javati dibbatīti juti. Judhātuti. Nigacchati niccharatīti niggatā, rasmi. Nipubbagamudhātu ta. Pakārena jalate dibbate pajjalantaṃ. Ettha ca dehaniggatajutīti vattabbe chandānurakkhaṇatthaṃ padavipariyāyena dehajjutiniggatanti vuttaṃ. Tasmā dehato niggatā jutīti samāso daṭṭhabbo. Dehato rūpakāyato niggatehi niccharehi jutīhi raṃsīhi pajjalantaṃ yassa soti dehajjuti niggatapajjalanto, muni labbhati. Munino hi puratthimakāyato chabbaṇṇarasmiyo uṭṭhahitvā asītihatthaṭṭhānaṃ agga hesi. Pacchimakāyato dakkhiṇahatthato vāmahatthato chabbaṇṇā rasmiyo uṭṭhahitvā asītihatthaṭṭhānaṃ aggahesi. Upari kesantato paṭṭhāya sabbakesavattehi moragīvavaṇṇā rasmi uṭṭhahitvā gaganatale asītihatthaṭṭhānaṃ aggahesi. Heṭṭhāpādatalehi pavāḷavaṇṇā rasmi uṭṭhahitvā ghanapathaviyaṃ asītihatthaṭṭhānaṃ aggahesi, evaṃ samantā asītihatthamattaṃ ṭhānaṃ chabbaṇṇā buddharasmiyo vijjotamānā vipphandamānā kañcanadaṇḍadīpikāhi niccharitvā ākāsaṃ pakkhandajālā viya catuddīpika mahāmeghato nikkhantavijjulatā viya vidhāviṃsūti vuttaṃ hoti. Tasmā dehajjutiniggatapajjalantanti thometīti.
Paññādhitisīlaguṇoghavinda:此处,paññā(慧)指一切知智。dhiti(定)指与禅那、道、果相应的定。sīla(戒)指独觉佛与圣弟子们所不共的、极清净的四遍清净戒。ogha(流)指集合。vinda(得)指已获得。或者,以种种方式如实了知、通达一切所知法,故为paññā(慧),即一切知智。其前分字根为√ñā。此慧以通达为相、以照耀为相,以照亮所缘为味,以不痴为现起,以定为足处。dhiti一词的词义如前已述。sīlati(持戒)故为sīla(戒),即正确地安立、持守身语业。或者,sīlati(持戒)即等持,以身业等善习性而不散乱,故名sīla(戒);或者,以此令心安住,故名sīla(戒),即四遍清净戒。其字根为√sīl。此戒以建立为相,以摧破恶戒为味,或以无过失为味,以清净为现起,以惭愧为足处。guṇa(功德)一词的词义如前已述。uhanati(聚集):此处意指将各部分集合起来,故为ogha(流),即集合。字根为√ūh加ṇa,ū变为o,h变为gh。然而在《显示巴利原文
Paññādhiti sīla guṇoghavindanti ettha paññāti sabbaññuta ñāṇaṃ. Dhitīti jhānamaggaphalasampayuttasamādhi. Sīlanti pacceka buddhāriyasāvakehi asādhāraṇaṃ suvisuddhaṃ catupārisuddhisīlaṃ. Oghanti samūhaṃ. Vindanti laddhaṃ. Pakārena yathāsabhāvaṃ sabbañeyyadhammaṃ vā jānāti paṭivijjhatīti paññā. Sabbaññuta ñāṇaṃ. Papubbañādhātu a. Sā panesā pajānanalakkhaṇā paṭivedhalakkhaṇā obhāsanalakkhaṇā ca, visayobhāsa rasā, asammohapaccupaṭṭhānā, samādhipadaṭṭhānā. Dhitisaddassa vacanattho heṭṭhā vuttoyeva. Sīlatīti sīlaṃ. Kāyavacīkammāni sammā dahati sammā ṭhapetīti attho. Atha vā sīlati samādhiyati kāyakammādīnaṃ susilya bhāvena na vippakiratīti sīlaṃ, sīlanti samādahanti cittaṃ etenāti vā sīlaṃ, catupārisuddhisīlaṃ. Sīladhātu a. Idaṃ pana patiṭṭhāpanalakkhaṇaṃ, dussilyaviddhaṃsanarasaṃ anavajjarasaṃ vā, soceyyapaccupaṭṭhānaṃ, hiriottappapadaṭṭhānaṃ. Guṇasaddassa vacanattho heṭṭhā vuttoyeva. Uhanati samūhaṃ karoti ettha avayavanti ogho, samūho. Upubbahanadhātu ṇa. Ussa o. Hanassa gho. Abhidhānappadīpikāṭīkāyaṃ pana ‘‘avayavaṃ byapiyati gacchatīti ogho’’ti vuttaṃ. Vindanaṃlabhanaṃ vindaṃ, vindiyittha labbhitthāti vā vindaṃ, paññā ca dhiti ca sīlañca taṃ guṇañcāti paññādhitisīlaguṇā, tesaṃ ogho samūhoti tathā, taṃ vindaṃ labhanaṃ yassāti paññādhitisīlaguṇoghavindo, muni . Atha vā vindaṃ labhitabbaṃ paññādhitisīlaguṇoghaṃ yenāti paññādhitisīlaguṇoghavindo. Tatiyābahubbīhi samāsoyaṃ. Vindānaṃ labhitabbānaṃ paññādhitisīla saṅkhātānaṃ guṇānaṃ samūho atthīti attho. Taṃ.
Vande(我敬礼):即ahaṃ vandāmi(我敬礼)。Muniṃ(牟尼):即佛陀。munāti(了知):即了知、判别利与不利,故为muni(牟尼),即佛陀。字根√mun为了知义,加i。或者,munāti(了知):即了知两种义利,故为muni(牟尼)。将蕴等世间置于秤上衡量般,以‘这些为内蕴,这些为外蕴’等方法,世尊了知此世之义利与他世之义利,此为义。此牟尼有多种:在家牟尼、出家牟尼、有学牟尼、无学牟尼、独觉牟尼、牟尼中之牟尼。其中,在家牟尼指证果、了知教法的在家者。出家牟尼指同样证果的出家者。有学牟尼指七种有学。无学牟尼指漏尽者。独觉牟尼指独觉佛。牟尼中之牟尼指正等正觉佛。这些之中,此处意指牟尼中之牟尼,即彼牟尼。Antimajātiyutta(与最后生俱行):即与最后有、最后身俱行。anta(终):即终结、不再行去。字根√am加ta,m变为n。终之有即antima(最后的),即最后有。jāti(生):即了知、产生,即诸蕴的转起。或者,由业所生、所产生,故为jāti(生),即结生有。字根为√jan加ti,词尾元音消失。与最后生俱行者,为antimajātiyutta(与最后生俱行),即牟尼。因于菩提座,以最上道已断尽未来三有中能生结生的一切烦恼,故世尊未来无有再生,因此说此圣者与最后自体俱行。显示巴利原文
Vandeti ahaṃ vandāmi. Muninti buddhaṃ. Munāti jānāti paricchindati vā hitāhitanti muni, buddho. Munadhātu ñāṇe i. Atha vā munāti jānāti ubho attheti muni, khandhādi loke tulaṃ āropetvā minanto viya ime ajjhattikā khandhā ime bāhirātiādinā nayena idhalokatthañca paralokatthañca bhagavā jānātīti attho. So panesa agāriyamuni, anāgāriyamuni, sekhamuni, asekhamuni, paccekamuni, munimuni cāti anekavidho. Tattha agāriyamunīti gihipi āgataphalo viññātasāsano. Anāgāriyamunīti tathārūpova pabbajito. Sekhamunīti satta sekkhā. Asekhamunīti khīṇāsavo. Paccekamunīti paccekabuddho. Munimunīti sammāsambuddho. Tesu pana idha munimuni adhippeto, taṃ muniṃ. Antimajātiyuttanti antimena carimabhavena yuttaṃ. Avasānaṃ amati gacchatīti antaṃ. Amadhātu ta. Massa no. Ante bhavo antimo, carimabhavo. Jānanaṃ nibbattanaṃ jāti, khandhānaṃ pavatti. Kammena janiyati nibbattiyatīti vā jāti. Upapattibhavo labbhati. Jānidhātuti. Dhātvanta lopo. Antimajātiyā yuttoti antimajātiyutto, muni. Āyatiñhi tīsu bhavesu paṭisandhijanakānaṃ sabba kilesānaṃ bodhipallaṅkeyeva aggamaggena samucchinditattā bhagavato anāgate punabbhavo natthi, tasmā ayaṃ ariyajāti pacchimattabhāvayuttoti vuttaṃ hoti.
因此,在《转法轮经》中说:显示巴利原文
Tena vuttaṃ dhammacakkapavattanasutte –
智与见生起,我的解脱不动摇,这是最后生,如今不再有后有。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ñāṇañca medassanaṃ udapādi, akuppāme vimutti, ayamantimā jāti, natthidāni punabbhavo’’ti.
此处略释如下:具三十二相之身,即以三十二大丈夫相庄严的色身;身光流散、辉耀,即从色身流散出六色光芒,周遍闪耀;慧、定、戒功德流获得者,即拥有慧、定、戒功德的集合,或拥有应获得的慧、定、戒功德之集合者;与最后生俱行,即与最后有或最后自体俱行的牟尼、佛陀。我以三门恭敬地敬礼。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepayojanā. Bāttiṃsatilakkhaṇacitraṃ dehaṃ dvattiṃsamahāpurisalakkhaṇehi vicitraṃ rūpakāyavantaṃ, dehajjutiniggata pajjalantaṃ rūpakāyato niggatehi chabbaṇṇaraṃ sīhi parisamantato vijjotavantaṃ, paññādhitisīlaguṇo ghavindaṃ paññādhitisīlasaṅkhatānaṃ guṇānaṃ samūhaṃ labhanavantaṃ, vinditabbānaṃ paññādhitisīlasaṅkhātānaṃ guṇānaṃ samūhavantaṃ vā, antimajātiyuttaṃ carimabhavena carimattabhāvena vā yuttaṃ muniṃ buddhaṃ ahaṃ tīhi dvārehi sakkaccaṃ vande vandāmīti.
犹如朝日初升,
在修行者之中,以祥瑞庄严而辉耀;
面如满月,不动摇,
我敬礼一切知者、牟尼之王。
显示巴利原文 Pātodayaṃ bāladivākaraṃva, Majjhe yatīnaṃ lalitaṃ sirīhi; Puṇṇindusaṅkāsamukhaṃ anejaṃ, Vandāmi sabbaññumahaṃ munindaṃ.
5 如此,以第四偈敬礼佛陀后,为以‘sirīhi lalitaṃ’等四种功德赞叹与敬礼,故宣说‘pātodayaṃ’等偈。此偈因具ta、ta、ja、ga双重重音,由十一音节所成,应知为因陀罗金刚偈。正如《韵律日出》所说:‘以inda等起始者,名为金刚偈,ja、ga、go。’其义为:于一偈行中,若有这些音组——即ja、ja、ga、ga——则此偈名为因陀罗金刚偈,亦即以‘inda’音起始的金刚偈。显示巴利原文
5. Evaṃ catutthagāthāya buddhaṃ vanditvā idāni sirīhi lalitantyādīhi catūhi guṇehi thomitvā vanditukāmo pātodayantyādigāthamāha. Ayaṃ pana ta ta ja gaṇadvigarūhi yuttattā ekādasakkharehi lakkhitā indavajirā gāthāti daṭṭhabbā. Vuttañhi vuttodaye ‘‘indādikā tā vajirā jagāgo’’ti. Tassattho, yassaṃ paṭipādaṃ tā dveta gaṇā ca jagā jagaṇa garu ca go garu ca ce bhavanti, sā indā dikā indasaddaādikā vajirā vajirāgāthā nāmāti.
其中,‘pātodayanti’一词应拆分为‘pāto’与‘udayanti’。‘pāto’意为清晨时分,即从东方世界升起之时。‘pāto’(清晨)与‘udayanti’(升起)合为‘pātodayo’,意指太阳。‘pāto’为前缀,‘ud’为表上升的词根,加‘ayo’词缀,即成‘pātodayaṃ’。‘bāladivākaraṃvā’应拆分为‘bāladivākaraṃ iva’。‘bāladivākaraṃ’意为如同初升的太阳。其中,‘bāla’指幼童——因仅靠呼吸存活,并非依凭殊胜智慧而活,故称‘bāla’(幼童)。‘bala’词根表呼吸或生命。以阳光照耀、嬉戏者,称为‘divā’;‘divu’为其词根。或说,黑暗依此被耗尽、灭尽,故称‘divā’;‘dī’词根表灭尽,加‘a’词缀并插入‘v’音。能造作此者,即‘divākaro’(造白昼者),亦即白昼中具光芒者,指太阳。如同幼童般的太阳,便是‘bāladivākaro’。或者说,如同幼童般造作白昼者。显示巴利原文
Tattha pātodayanti ettha pāto udayanti padacchedo kātabbo. Page pubbaṇhasamaye pācīnalokadhātuto uggatanti attho. Pāto page pācīnalokadhātuto udeti uggacchatīti pātodayo, sūriyo. Pātopubba udadhātu uggamane ayo, taṃ pātodayaṃ. Bāladivā karaṃvāti bāladivākaraṃ ivātipadacchedo. Bāladivākaraṃ vāti niggatābhinavasūriyaṃ viya. Ettha ca bāloti sampati jāto taruṇadārako potako vā. So hi balati assasitapassasitamattena jīvati na seṭṭhena paññājīvitenāti bālo, taruṇadārako. Baladhātu pāṇane jīvāyaṃ vā. Sūriyaraṃsinā divati dibbatīti divā. Divudhātu a. Atha vā dīyati khīyati andhakāro etenāti divā. Dīdhātu khaye a, vāgamo. Taṃ karotīti divākaro, divā divase vā karo ābhā yassāti divākaro, sūriyo. Bālasadiso divākaro bāladivākaro. Atha vā bālo iva divākaroti bāladivākaro, navuggatasūriyo. So pana ākāse nakkhattatārānaṃ majjhe sahassaraṃsīhi lalati vilāsati viyāti attho.
‘yatīnaṃ’意为比丘们。因为他们精勤、奋起、努力、策励于善法,故称‘yatī’。‘yata’词根表策励或精勤,加‘i’词缀。或者,他们自制、止息不善法,故称‘yatī’。‘yamu’词根表止息,加‘i’词缀,词根尾音省略。因此,‘yatīnaṃ’即这些比丘的。‘lalitaṃ’意为闪耀、嬉戏。闪耀嬉戏者,即‘lalito’,指牟尼。‘lala’词根表嬉戏,加‘ta’词缀。‘sirīhi’意为以世尊身体各部分所达到的庄严光辉,或以三十二相、八十种好、六色光芒所摄的成就光辉。因依止于所造福德,故称‘sirī’。‘sidha’词根表依止,加‘ra’词缀及表女性词性的‘ī’词缀。或说,所造福德所依止者即是成就,故称‘sirī’。《根本复注》中说:‘sirī是智慧与福德的同义词。’在比丘众中,以光辉闪耀、嬉戏,这即是关联所在。此处所说为:犹如清晨从东方升起、上升的太阳,在群星间的天空中以千道光芒闪耀嬉戏;同样,牟尼在世间,于比丘众中,以三十二相、八十种好、六色光芒所庄严的身体殊胜光辉与成就而闪耀嬉戏。显示巴利原文
Yatīnanti bhikkhūnaṃ. Te hi yatanti uṭṭhahanti ghaṭanti vāyamanti kusale dhammeti yatīti vuccanti. Yata dhātu patiyatane vāyāme vā i. Atha vā yamanti uparamanti akusale dhammeti yatīti vuccanti. Yamudhātu uparame i. Dhātvantalopo. Tesaṃ yatīnaṃ. Lalitanti vilāsitaṃ. Lalati vilāsetīti lalito, muni. Laladhātu vilāse ta. Taṃ. Sirīhīti bhagavato kāyaṅgasobhaggapattehi sirīhi, bāttiṃsalakkhaṇāsītyā nubyañjanachabbaṇṇaraṃsīsaṅkhatehi sampattisirīhi vā. Katapuññe nissayatīti sirī. Sidhātu sevāyaṃ rapaccayo itthi liṅgajotakaīpaccayo ca. Katapuññehi seviyatīti vā sirī, sampatti. Mūlaṭīkāyaṃ pana ‘‘sirīti paññāpuññāna metaṃ adhivacana’’nti vuttaṃ. Yatīnaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ majjhe sirīhi lalitaṃ vilāsitanti sambandho. Ettha ca idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti, yathā pāto udito uggato sūriyo ākāse nakkhattatārānaṃ majjhe sahassaraṃsīhi lalati vilāsati, evaṃ muni loke yatīnaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ majjhe bāttiṃsalakkhaṇā sītyānubyañjanachabbaṇṇaraṃsīhi alaṅkatehi sarīrasobhagga pattīhi sampattisirīhi lalati vilāsatīti.
‘Puṇṇindusaṅkāsamukhaṃ’意指具有满月般的面容。正如月亮从黑半月的初一开始,日渐亏缺,牟尼的面容却从不如此减损;而世尊的面容恒常如满月轮,圆满无缺,光彩照人。因此,特以‘puṇṇa’一词加以简别,而赞叹为‘puṇṇindusaṅkāsamukhaṃ’。‘puṇṇaṃ’由十六分圆满而得名。词根‘pūra’,加后缀‘ta’,其中的‘n’变为‘ṇ’。‘indu’意为于群星中行使主宰,源自‘idi’词根(表主宰),加后缀‘u’。圆满而完全的‘indu’即为‘puṇṇindu’,指月亮。‘saṅkāsaṃ’意为相似。‘saṅkāsa’是不变词,表示比喻。正如所说:显示巴利原文
Puṇṇindusaṅkāsamukhanti puṇṇacandena sadisaṃ ānanasampannaṃ. Yathā hi cando kāḷapakkhe pāṭipadadivasato paṭṭhāya dine dine ūno hoti, evaṃ na munino mukhaṃ ānanaṃ ūnaṃ. Bhagavato pana mukhaṃ niccaṃ paripuṇṇacandamaṇḍalaṃ viya anūnaṃ hutvā sobhati, tasmā puṇṇasaddena visesetvā puṇṇindusaṅkāsamukhanti thometi. Soḷasakalehi pūretīti puṇṇaṃ. Pūradhātu ta, tassa ṇṇo. Idati nakkhattatārānaṃ issariyaṃ karotīti indu, ididhātu issariyaṃ u. Puṇṇaṃ paripuṇṇaṃ indu puṇṇindu, cando. Saṅkāsanti sadisaṃ. Saṅkāsasaddo hi upamāvācako nipāto. Vuttañhi
《善觉庄严》中说:显示巴利原文
Subodhālaṅkāre –
iva、ādi、iva 等词,表示相同、类似、相似;
如“yath┓saṅkāsa”“tulita”“ppakāsa”“patirūpakā”等词。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Ivādi iva vā tulya, samānanibhasannibhā; Yathā saṅkāsa tulita, ppakāsa patirūpakā’’tyādi.
如同满月般面容闪耀,故称“mukhaṃ”,即面容。“mukha”是词根,加“a”词缀。具有与满月相似、相同的面容者,即“puṇṇindusaṅkāsamukho”,指牟尼王。而牟尼王的面容,如同满月具有千道光芒而光辉灿烂一般,在比丘众中,以三十二大丈夫相、八十种好所庄严的光辉,以及以周围一寻光环为界限、呈波浪状、成对成簇放射的稠密佛光所庄严,成为光辉灿烂的面容。这是此处所说之义,因此赞叹为“puṇṇindusaṅkāsamukhaṃ”。显示巴利原文
Puṇṇacandaṃ viya mukhati sobhatīti mukhaṃ, ānanaṃ. Mukhadhātu a. Puṇṇindunā saṅkāsaṃ sadisaṃ mukhaṃ ānanaṃ yassa soti puṇṇindusaṅkāsamukho, munindo. Taṃ. Munindassa pana puṇṇa candassa sahassaraṃsīhi sassiriko viya bhikkhūnaṃ majjhe bāttiṃsa mahāpurisa lakkhaṇāsītyānubyañjana paṭimaṇḍitehi sirīhi ca byāmappabhāparikkhittehi āveḷāveḷā yamakāyamakā gumbāgumbā hutvā viniccharantīhi ghanabuddharasmisaṅkhātehi alaṅkito sassirikamukho hotīti vuttaṃ hoti. Tasmā puṇṇindusaṅkāsamukhanti thometi.
“anejaṃ”意为无渴爱。因得失等而动摇、颤动,故称“ejā”,即渴爱。“eja”是词根,表颤动,加“a”词缀。没有“ejā”者,即“anejo”,指牟尼王。正如《大义释》中所说:“因利衰、称讥、毁誉、苦乐而不动摇,故为‘anejo’,世尊即被证知为‘anejo’。”显示巴利原文
Anejanti nittaṇhaṃ. Lābhālābhādiṃ paṭicca ejati kampatīti ejā, taṇhā. Ejadhātu kampane a, natthi ejā yassāti anejo, munindo. Vuttañhi mahāniddesapāḷiyaṃ ‘‘lābhālābha yasāyasa nindāninda sukhadukkhehi na iñjatīti anejo, bhagavā labbhatī’’ti.
“一切知者”:指已通达一切应知之法。依行(有为)、变化、相、涅槃、施设,此五类而了知、通达一切应知法,因其戒行成就,故称一切知者、牟尼主。此词由“一切”一词置于“知”字根上构成。在此处,一切有为法称为“行”,因它们是由各自因缘所造作。两种表色与三种轻快性等,则称为“变化”,因是由四大种所变造。具体而言:两种表色依次为心生火界与心生地界的特殊性质,三种轻快性等则为心生、食生、时节生色的特殊性质。触等诸法有触等相,地界等有硬等相,心有识知所缘相,涅槃有寂静相,色有变坏相,名有倾向相;无常等三相与积集等四种相色,称为“相”,因依此得以标记及被标记诸法。无为界涅槃称为“涅槃”,而渴爱称为“织”,因涅槃是从彼出离。限定色,以及男女、瓶、布等一切世俗施设,称为“施设”,因是以种种方式令人了知。在此中,行与涅槃是胜义法;而在变化等之中,变化与相,则因是施设的差别而各别宣说。应知除此二者之外,限定色与一切世俗施设皆被称为施设。在《譬喻注》中说:“‘一切知者’:了知一切过去等分类诸法,如掌中余甘子果。”
},
{显示巴利原文
Sabbaññunti paṭividdha sabbañeyyadhammaṃ. Saṅkharavikāralakkhaṇanibbāna paññattivasena pañcavidhaṃ sabbaṃ ñeyyadhammaṃ jānāti paṭivijjhati sīlenāti sabbaññū, munindo. Sabbasaddūpapada ñādhātu rū. Ettha ca sabbe saṅkhatadhammā saṅkharā nāma sakasakapaccayehi saṅkhariyantīti katvā. Viññattidvayaṃ lahutādittayañca vikāro nāma catūhi mahābhūtehi virūpaṃ kariyatīti katvā. Viññattidvayassa yathākkamaṃ cittajavāyodhātu cittajapathavī dhātūnaṃ visesaguṇattā, lahutādittayassa ca citto tvāhārajanipphannarūpānaṃ visesaguṇattā. Phassādidhammānaṃ phusanādilakkhaṇañca pathavīdhātvādīnaṃ kakkhaḷādilakkhaṇañca, cittassa ārammaṇavijānanalakkhaṇañca, nibbānassa santilakkhaṇañca, rūpassa ruppanalakkhaṇañca, nāmassa namanalakkhaṇañca, aniccatādittayāni ca upacayādicattāri lakkhaṇarūpāni ca lakkhaṇāni nāma lakkhiyanti etena lakkhitabbā dhammāti katvā. Asaṅkhatadhātunibbānaṃ nāma vānaṃ vuccati taṇhā, tato nikkhantanti katvā. Paricchedarūpaṃ itthipurisādighaṭapaṭādayo sabba vohāratthā ca paññatti nāma paññāpiyati pakārena ñāpiyatīti katvā. Ettha ca saṅkhāranibbānāni paramatthadhammā honti. Vikārādīsu pana vikāralakkhaṇāni paññattivisesattā visuṃ vuttāni. Imehi dvīhi vinimuttā pana paricchedarūpā sabbavohāratthā paññattīti vuttāti veditabbā. Apadāna aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘sabbaṃ atītādibhedaṃ hatthāmalakaṃ viya jānātīti sabbaññū’’ti vuttaṃ.
“一切知者”有五种:次第一切知者、一时一切知者、恒常一切知者、能力一切知者、已知一切知者。其中,依次了知一切法者,名为次第一切知者。以一次转向、速行心路了知应知的四谛法者,名为一时一切知者。了知眼识等有固定所缘者,名为恒常一切知者。能以一刹那了知一切法者,名为能力一切知者。以无分别转向了知应知的一切法者,名为已知一切知者。其中,一时一切知者与能力一切知者这两种法唯是道智。其余则是一切知性智。彼为一切知者。显示巴利原文
Sabbaññūti ca kamasabbaññū, sakiṃ sabbaññū, satatasabbaññū, satti sabbaññū, ñātasabbaññū cāti pañcavidhā hoti sabbaññū. Tattha yathākkamaṃ sabbaṃ jānanadhammo kamasabbaññū nāma. Ekāvajjanena javanavārena jānitabbaṃ catusaccadhammaṃ jānanadhammo sakiṃsabbaññū nāma. Cakkhuviññāṇādīnaṃ niyatārammaṇattaṃ jānanadhammo satatasabbaññū nāma. Ekappahārena sabbadhammaṃ jānanasamattho dhammo sattisabbaññū nāma. Āvajjanābhedena jānitabbaṃ sabbadhammaṃ jānanadhammo ñātasabbaññū nāma. Tesu ca sakiṃ sabbaññū sattisabbaññūvasena dve dhammā maggañāṇāniyeva. Tadavasesā sabbaññutañāṇāni honti. Taṃ sabbaññuṃ.
“牟尼主”:此处“牟尼”一词的意义,如前已说。诸牟尼之主宰、自在者,称为牟尼主,意为:我礼敬那位牟尼主,如此连结。显示巴利原文
Munindanti ettha munisaddassa attho heṭṭhā vuttoyeva. Munīnaṃ indo issaro munindo, taṃ munindaṃ ahaṃ vandāmīti sambandhoti.
此处的简要释义如下:如同清晨初升的太阳,又如旭日般新升的少年,他在诸修行者、比丘众中,以三十二大丈夫相与八十随形好这等庄严相好而辉耀庄严,面容如满月般圆满,不动摇、离渴爱,或不为世间法所动,他是遍知一切者、了知一切法者,牟尼之尊、佛陀,我以三门恭敬礼敬。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepayojanā. Pātodayaṃ pageva udayaṃ uggataṃ, bāladivākaraṃva navuggatasūriyamāṇavoiva, yatīnaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ majjhe sirīhi bāttiṃsamahāpurisalakkhaṇā sītyānubyañjanasampattisaṅkhātehi sirīhi lalitaṃ vilāsitaṃ, puṇṇindusaṅkāsamukhaṃ puṇṇacandena sadisaṃ ānanavantaṃ, anejaṃ nittaṇhaṃ, lokadhammehi aniñjanaṃ vā, sabbaññuṃ sabbadhamma vijānantaṃ, munindaṃ buddhaṃ sakkaccaṃ tīhi dvārehi ahaṃ vandāmīti.
具足功德之人,于殊胜的菩提树下,
善逝征服了魔军及其眷属;
在黎明时分证悟菩提,
我礼敬那位不可摧破的降魔胜者。
显示巴利原文 Upetapuñño varabodhimūle, Sasenamāraṃ sugato jinitvā; Abojjhi bodhiṃ aruṇodayamhi, Namāmi taṃ mārajinaṃ abhaṅgaṃ.
6 如此,以第五偈礼敬牟尼主后,为以魔胜功德称赞而礼敬,故说出“具足功德者”等偈。应知此偈因含有ja、ta、ja、ga、ṇa及二重音,以十一音节标示,名为优宾达金刚偈。《音起论》中曾说:“优宾达偈者,有ja、ta、ja、ga、go。”其意为:在某一偈行中,若有ja、ta、ga、ṇa与ja、ga、ṇa、重音及go、重音,此即名为以“upa”开头的优宾达金刚偈。显示巴利原文
6. Evaṃ pañcamagāthāya munindaṃ vanditvā idāni mārajinaguṇena thomitvā vanditukāmo upetapuñño tyādigāthamāha. Ayaṃ pana ja ta ja gaṇa dvigaruyuttattā ekādasakkharehi lakkhitā upendavajirāgāthāti daṭṭhabbā. Vuttañhi vuttodaye ‘‘upādikā sāva jatā jagā go’’ti. Tassattho, yassaṃ paṭipādaṃ jatā jagaṇa tagaṇā ca jagā jagaṇagarū ca go garu ca ce siyā, sāva sāgāthāeva upādikā upasaddādikā indavajirāgāthā nāmāti.
那位具足功德者——善逝,在殊胜菩提树下,降伏魔军及其眷属后,于黎明时分觉悟菩提,成为不可摧毁的降魔者;我礼敬彼善逝。这便是与下文连结的意思。
其中,“具足功德者”:指具足布施、持戒等波罗蜜功德的人;或者说,以布施、持戒等波罗蜜功德而成就者。即以布施、持戒等波罗蜜功德而具足、完全具足、到达、完全到达、成就、具备,这就是它的含义。此处词义为:“具足”指已经生起、已经成就而到来、行进、转起,因此称为“具足”;“功德”一词中,前缀“upa”加字根“i”表示行进。能净化造作者自身,所以叫做“功德”,这里指波罗蜜功德。字根“pu”有滋养或净化的意思,加上“ṇya”语尾,其中“ṇa”变为“ña”。其中,“自作者”是指:通过屡屡转起,以自身心相续及所生妙色的散布,滋养和净化依止的色相续。这个意义出自《无碍解道·结文》。另一种解释是,能使心愿圆满,所以称为“功德”——字根“pūr”加“ṇya”语尾,意思是能令修功德者的心愿得以圆满。显示巴利原文
Upetapuñño yo sugato varabodhimūle sasena māraṃ jinitvā aruṇodayamhi bodhiṃ abojjhi mārajinaṃ abhaṅgaṃ, taṃ sugataṃ ahaṃ namāmīti sambandho. Tattha upetapuññoti sampannadānasīlādipāramīpuññavā. Dānasīlādi pāramīpuññena samannāgato vā. Dānasīlādipāramīpuññena upeto samupeto upagato samupagato sampanno samannāgatoti attho. Ayaṃ panettha vacanattho, upanno sampanno hutvā eti gacchati pavattatīti upetaṃ, puññaṃ. Upapubbaidhātu gatiyaṃ ta. Punāti attano kārakanti puññaṃ, pāramīpuññaṃ labbhati. Pudhātu pīṇane sodhane vā ṇyo. Tassa ño. Tattha attano kārakanti punappunaṃ pavattiyā sacittasantatiñca saṃjanitapaṇītarūpavisaṭena sanissaya rūpasantatiñca punāti pīṇeti sodheti vāti attho. Ayaṃ paṭisambhidāmaggagaṇṭhipade vutto. Pūreti ajjhāsayanti vā puññaṃ. Pūradhātu ṇya. Yo puggalo puññaṃ karoti tassa ajjhāsayaṃ pūretīti attho.
或者,因为能产生应受供养的殊胜状态,所以称为‘福’(puñña)。这是派生词(nibbattitaddhita),在‘pūja’(供养)一词后加上ṇya后缀构成。意思是:凡是造作福德者,就会令他应受供养的殊胜状态生起。
因此,《破除愚痴》注释书中说:‘它净化自己的作者,满足他的心愿,并产生应受供养的殊胜状态,所以称为福。’《根本复注》中也说:‘“净化”即是从非福的果报与苦的杂染中净化,以利益的心愿造作福德,通过成就此福德而满足作者的心愿,所以称为福。根据词源特征,应知“福”是充满者、产生供养者。’《清净道论大复注》中也说:‘它净化自己的相续,从非福的果报与苦的杂染中净化,所以称为福。以利益安乐的心愿造作福德,通过成就此福德而满足作者的心愿;或者因为能产生应受供养的殊胜状态,所以称为福。因此,依词源学的方法,应知“福”是充满者、产生供养者。’
‘具足福者’(upetapuñño)意为:拥有已获得、已具足的福德,也就是具足波罗蜜福德的人,即善逝。显示巴利原文
Atha vā pujjañca bhavaṃ nibbattetīti puññaṃ. Nibbattitaddhitāyaṃ. Pūja padaṃ ṇyapaccayo. Yo puññaṃ karoti, tassa pūjitabbaṃ bhavaṃ pavattetīti attho. Tena vuttaṃ sammohavinodanī aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘punāti attano kārakaṃ pūreti cassa ajjhāsayaṃ pujjañca bhavaṃ nibbattetīti puñño’’ti. Mūlaṭīkāyañca ‘‘punātīti sodheti apuññaphalato dukkhasaṃkilesato ca hitajjhāsayena puññaṃ karotīti taṃ nipphādanena kārakassajjhāsayaṃ pūretīti puñño. Pūrako pujjanibbattako ca niruttilakkhaṇena puññoti veditabbo’’ti vuttaṃ . Visuddhimaggamahāṭīkāyañca- ‘‘punāti attano santānaṃ apuññaphalato dukkhasaṃkilesato ca visodhetīti puññaṃ. Hitasukhajjhāsayena puññaṃ karotīti taṃnipphādanena kārakassa ajjhāsayaṃ pūreti, pujjabhavaṃ nibbattetīti vā puññaṃ. Iti pūrako pujjanibbattako ca niruttinayena puññanti veditabbo’’ti vuttaṃ. Upetaṃ sampannaṃ puññaṃ pāramīpuññaṃ yassa soti upetapuñño, sugato labbhati.
‘在殊胜的菩提树下’(varabodhimūle)意为:在最胜的菩提树附近。
其中,‘殊胜的’(varo)是指应被选择、应被希求、应被渴望的。
‘菩提树下’(bodhimūleti)中,‘菩提’(bodhi)一词可指树、道、一切知智和涅槃。例如,在‘在菩提树下最初成正觉’、‘在菩提与伽耶之间’等表述中,指的是树;在‘四道中的智称为菩提’等处,指的是道;在‘他证得了殊胜广大的智慧菩提’等处,指的是一切知智;在‘证得了无死无为的菩提’等处,指的是涅槃。但在此处,意指菩提树。
以下是词义解释:于其下觉悟、已觉悟、将觉悟四圣谛及一切所知法,所以称为‘菩提’,即菩提树。字根为‘budh’(觉悟)加ṇi后缀。觉悟四圣谛,故称为‘菩提’,指道;觉悟一切所知法,故称为‘菩提’,指一切知智;应为圣者所觉悟,故称为‘菩提’,指涅槃。
殊胜、最上的菩提树称为‘殊胜菩提’(varabodhi),它的根部、附近则称为‘殊胜菩提树下’(varabodhimūlaṃ),在此处即指这一地点。显示巴利原文
Varabodhimūleti uttamassa bodhirukkhassa samīpe. Tattha varoti varitabbo patthitabbo icchitabboti vā varo. Bodhimūleti ettha bodhīti vuccati rukkhopi, maggopi, sabbaññutañāṇampi, nibbānampi. Tattha hi bodhirukkhamūle paṭhamābhi sambuddhoti ca, antarā ca bodhiṃ antarā ca gayanti ca āgataṭṭhāne rukkho. Bodhīti vuccati catūsu maggesu ñāṇanti āgataṭṭhāne maggo. Pappoti bodhiṃ varabhūri medhasoti āgataṭṭhāne sabbaññutañāṇaṃ. Patvāna bodhiṃ amataṃ asaṅkhatanti āgataṭṭhāne nibbānaṃ bodhīti vuccati. Idha pana bodhirukkhoti adhippeto. Ayaṃ pana tesaṃ vacanattho. Bujjhati abujjhi bujjhissati cattāri ariyasaccāni sabbaṃ ñeyyadhammampi etthāti bodhi, bodhirukkho. Budhadhātu ṇi. Bujjhati cattāri saccānīti bodhi, maggo. Bujjhati sabbañeyyadhammanti bodhi, sabbaññutañāṇaṃ. Ariyena bujjhitabbanti bodhi, nibbānaṃ labbhati. Varo uttamo bodhirukkhoti varabodhi, tassa mūlaṃ samīpaṃ varabodhimūlaṃ, tasmiṃ.
“有军队之魔”(sasenamāraṃ),即与军队俱在的魔王。其中“军队”(senā)意为被系缚者,语根“sidh”表系缚义。与此(军队)一同存在,故称“有军队者”(saseno),指魔王。驱使众生行无意义事,以杀害善德而毁害众生,故称“魔”(māro);语根“mar”(死)加ṇe后缀。或指杀害、灭除众生之善法,故为“魔”。彼既有军队,又是魔,故为“有军队之魔”(sasenamāro),即魔王。此处“战胜了”(jinitvā)一词为宾语。“具足福德者即是善逝”(upetapuñño yo sugato)为关联句。“善逝”之义已如前说。显示巴利原文
Sasenamāranti saha senāya pavattaṃ mārarājaṃ. Tattha siyati bandhiyatīti senā. Sidhātu bandhaneyu. Tāya saha pavattatīti saseno, mārarājā. Anatthe niyojento guṇamāraṇena satte māretīti māro. Maradhātu ṇa. Sattānaṃ kusalaṃ māreti vināsetīti vā māro. Saseno ca so māro cāti sasenamāro, mārarājā. Taṃ . Jinitvāti pade kammaṃ. Upetapuñño yo sugatoti sambandho. Sugatasaddassa attho heṭṭhā vuttoyeva.
“战胜了”(jinitvā):在卫塞月满月的佛日,太阳尚未西沉之际,依波罗蜜福德之威力而战胜。“觉悟了”(abojjhī):证悟、获得。“菩提”(bodhiṃ):无上正等菩提,即阿罗汉道与一切知智。道智为一切知智的近因,一切知智亦为道智的近因,此二者共称“菩提”。即指此菩提。显示巴利原文
Jinitvāti visākhapuṇṇamiyaṃ buddhadine anatthaṅgateyeva sūriye pāramīpuññatejena vijayitvāti attho. Abojjhīti paṭivijjhi adhigami vā. Bodhinti anuttaraṃ sammā sambodhiṃ, arahattamaggasabbaññutañāṇanti attho. Sabbaññuta ñāṇapadaṭṭhānañhi maggañāṇaṃ, maggañāṇapadaṭṭhānañca sabbaññutañāṇaṃ bodhīti vuccati. Taṃ bodhiṃ.
“在曙光升起时”(aruṇodayamhī),解析为“aruṇaudayamhī”,意为曙光出现之际。其中,“曙光”(aruṇo):从周遭带来光明而升起者。前缀“ā”加语根“un”(去),加ṇe后缀;ā缩短为a,插入r,n变为ṇ。意为:太阳升起前现起的霞光,名为曙光。恰如《增支部·十集》所说:“诸比丘,日出有其前兆,有其前相,即是曙光。如是,诸比丘,善法亦有前兆、前相,即是正见。”《阿毗达摩灯论》对此说:“太阳升起之前,出现的霞光即是曙光。”《阿毗达摩灯论注》云:“以曙光之色,故去(升起),是名曙光。”“升起”(udayo):上升者,即太阳。语根“udi”加a后缀。太阳升起的曙光,称为“曙光升起”(aruṇodayo)。即在此曙光升起之时。与“觉悟了菩提”相连接。显示巴利原文
Aruṇodayamhīti aruṇaudayamhīti padacchedo. Aruṇuggamanavelāyanti attho. Tattha āsamantato ālokaṃ karonto unati gacchatīti aruṇo. Āpubbaunadhātu gatimhi ṇa. Ākārassa rasso. Rakārāgamo. Nassa ṇo. Sūriyassa udayato pubbe uggataraṃsi aruṇo nāmāti attho. Vuttañhi dasakanipāta aṅguttarapāḷiyaṃ ‘‘sūriyassa bhikkhave udayato etaṃ pubbaṅgamaṃ etaṃ pubbanimittaṃ yadidaṃ aruṇuggaṃ, evameva kho bhikkhave kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ etaṃ pubbaṅgamaṃ etaṃ pubbanimittaṃ yadidaṃ sammādiṭṭhī’’ti. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ abhidhānappadīpikāyaṃ ‘‘sūrassodayato pubbu, ṭṭhitaraṃsi siyāruṇo’’ti. Abhidhānappadīpikāṭīkāyaṃ pana ‘‘aruṇavaṇṇatāya arati gacchatīti aruṇo’’ti vuttaṃ. Udeti uggacchatīti udayo, sūriyo. Udidhātu a. Udayassa sūriyassa aruṇo uggataraṃsīti aruṇodayo. Tassaṃ aruṇuggamanavelāyaṃ. Bodhiṃ abojjhīti sambandho.
世尊于卫塞月满月之日,日尚未西沉时,摧破魔军,菩提树枝如红珊瑚嫩叶般飘落衣上,作供养状。于夜初分,他忆念宿住;于中夜分,净化天眼;于后夜分,顺逆观照缘起,成就入出息第四禅,以此为近因,增长那名为大金刚智的观智,依道次第证得的第四道智断尽一切烦恼。曙光将起时,他证悟并获得了以一切知智为首的一切佛德。此即所说之义。显示巴利原文
Bhagavā hi visākhapuṇṇamiyaṃ anatthaṅgateyeva sūriye mārabalaṃ vidhametvā cīvarūpari patamānehi bodhirukkhaṅkarehi rattapavāḷapallavehi viya pūjayamāno rattiyā paṭhamayāme pubbenivāsaṃ anussaritvā majjhimayāme dibbacakkhuṃ visodhetvā pacchimayāme paṭiccasamuppādaṃ anulomapaṭilomaṃ manasikaritvā ānāpānacatutthajjhānaṃ nibbattetvā tadeva pādakaṃ katvā mahāvajirañāṇasaṅkhātaṃ vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā maggapaṭipāṭiyā adhigatena catutthamaggañāṇena sabbakilese khepetvā yadā aruṇo uggamissati, tadā sabbaññutañāṇādisabba buddhaguṇe paṭivijjhi adhigamīti vuttaṃ hoti.
“战胜魔者”(mārajinaṃ)意为:已战胜五种魔者。善逝战胜、已战胜、将战胜五种魔——即天子魔、烦恼魔、行蕴魔与死魔。其义为:他已战胜天子魔、烦恼魔、行蕴魔这三魔,必将战胜行蕴魔与死魔这两魔。若如此,为何又说为“已胜者”(vijitāvi)?因彼之战胜是决定无疑、究竟无误的。“不可破坏者”(abhaṅgaṃ)意为:不能被有军众的魔所破坏、摧毁者;又或,不能被任何事物破坏、摧毁者。释其词义:不为任何魔所破坏,故称“不可破坏者”(abhaṅgo);或不被彼(魔)破坏、摧毁,故为不可破坏者。词根bhañj(破坏)加ta后缀,词根末音变为ga。又或,“破坏者”(bhaṅgo)指能破坏、摧毁者,即魔或任何事物。无有破坏者(魔等)能奈何他,故称“不可破坏者”(abhaṅgo),指善逝。我礼敬那位战胜魔者、不可破坏者、善逝。此为关联句。显示巴利原文
Mārajinanti pañcamārānaṃ vijitāviṃ. Devaputta kilesābhi saṅkhārakhandhamaccusaṅkhāte pañcamāre jināti ajini jinissatīti mārajino, sugato. Devaputtakilesābhisaṅkharasaṅkhataṃ mārattayaṃ jināti ajini, khandhamaccusaṅkhataṃ māradvayaṃ avassaṃ jinissatīti attho. Yadi evaṃ kasmā vijitāvinti vuttanti. Aviraddhaṃ ekantena jiyamānattāti. Abhaṅganti sasenamārassa bhañjituṃ viddhaṃsituṃ asamatthaṃ. Yassa kassaci bhañjituṃ viddhaṃsituṃ asamatthaṃ vā. Tatrāyaṃ vacanattho. Mārena yena kenaci bhañjituṃ na sakkotīti abhaṅgo, tena vā na bhañjiyati na viddhaṃsiyatīti abhaṅgo, sugato. Napubba bhanjadhātu ta. Tassa dhātvantena gakārādeso. Atha vā bhanjati viddhaṃsatīti bhaṅgo, māro. Yo koci vā. Natthi bhaṅgo māro yo koci vā yassāti abhaṅgo, sugato. Taṃ abhaṅgaṃ. Tanti sugataṃ. Mārajinaṃ abhaṅgaṃ taṃ sugataṃ ahaṃ namāmīti sambandho.
在此偈中,应依《单卷本生注释》与《譬喻注释》中所说之理,简要了知佛陀降魔等为闻法众所广闻之义。觉有情享受大荣华后,对已然在握的转轮王权毫无贪恋,如弃唾团般舍离,于二十九岁阿沙荼月满月之日、北娄宿星会合之时,行大出离而出家。在阿耨摩河岸,他接受了陶师梵天所施的八资具——此是阿罗汉幢相,穿著后作沙门出家,六年行苦行。于舍那村的尼拘律树脚下,他受用了舍那居士之女善生以价值十万的黄金钵所盛、全无余水、状如一枚棕榈果、共四十九口的蜜乳粥。傍晚时分,在诸天庄严的道路上向菩提树行进时,途中接受了名为吉祥的割草人所施的八握草,登上菩提道场。他知“此处是一切诸佛所不舍的不动之处,是摧破烦恼之处”,握住草梢摇动。即时便有十四肘长的金刚座现起,诸草亦以彼形态铺展安立,其形相之妙,纵是极巧的画师与织工亦无法描绘。觉有情背靠菩提树干,面向东方,坚定心意后——显示巴利原文
Imissaṃ pana gāthāyaṃ ekanipātajātakaṭṭhakathāyaṃ, apadānaṭṭhakathāyañca āgatanayena buddhassa māravijayādiṃ sotujanānaṃ bahussutatthaṃ saṅkhepena veditabbaṃ. Bodhi satto hi mahāsampattiṃ anubhavitvā hatthagataṃ cakkavattirajjaṃ kheḷapiṇḍaṃ viya anapekkho chaṭṭetvā ekūnatiṃsavasse āsaḷhipuṇṇamāya uttarasaḷhanakkhattena yutte mahābhinikkhamaṃ nikkhamitvā anomanadītīre ghaṭīkārabrahmunā dinnaṃ arahatta dhajabhūtaṃ aṭṭhaparikkhāraṃ paṭiggahetvā nivāsetvā samaṇapabbajjaṃ katvā chabbassāni dukkarakārikaṃ caritvā nigrodharukkhamūle senanigame senakuṭumbikassa dhītarāya sujātāya saha satasahassagghiyā suvaṇṇapātiyā dinnaṃ sabbaṃ appodakaṃ madhupāyāsaṃ ekaṭṭhitālapakkappamāṇaṃ ekūnapaññāsālopaṃ paribhuñjitvā sāyanhasamaye devatāhi alaṅkatena maggena bodhirukkhābhimukho gacchante antaramagge sotthiyena nāma tiṇahārakena dinnaṃ aṭṭhamuṭṭhikatiṇaṃ gahetvā bodhimaṇḍaṃ āruyha idaṃ ṭhānaṃ sabbabuddhānaṃ avijahitaṃ acalaṭṭhānaṃ kilesabhañjanaṭṭhānanti ñatvā tāni tiṇāni agge gahetvā cālesi. Tāvadeva cuddasahattho pallaṅko ahosi. Tānipi tiṇāni tathārūpena saṇṭhānena santhariṃsu saṇṭhahiṃsu vā. Yathārūpaṃ sukusalopi vicittakāro vā potthatāro vā ālikhitumpi samattho natthi. Bodhi satto bodhikhandhaṃ piṭṭhito katvā puratthābhimukho daḷhamānaso hutvā –
纵使皮肉、筋腱与骨骼都干枯;
纵使全身的血肉完全干枯;
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Kāmaṃ taco ca nhāru ca, aṭṭhi ca avasussatu; Upasussatu nisesaṃ, sarīre maṃsalohita’’nti.
“我若未证得正等正觉,绝不起此金刚座。”他发此誓愿已,便安坐于即使百雷齐轰亦不能坏的金刚座上。这时,魔天子心想:“悉达多太子欲超出我的领域,我今必不让他得逞。”便前往魔军处,告知此事,发出魔王的号令,率领魔军出发。此魔军,魔王前方延伸十二由旬,左右两翼各十二由旬,后方直至铁围山边际,上方高达九由旬。其喧嚣声,远闻于千由旬外,犹如大地震动之声。那时,魔天子骑上一头名为“山环”、高一百五十由旬的巨象,化现千臂,执持种种武器。其余魔众,无有二人执持相同武器者。他们变现出种种颜色、种种面庞,向大士汹涌逼来。显示巴利原文
Na tveva sammāsambodhiṃ apatvā imaṃ pallaṅkaṃ bhindissāmīti asanisatasannipātenapi abhejjarūpaṃ taṃ pallaṅkaṃ abhañjitvā nisīdi. Tasmiṃ samaye māro devaputto siddhatthakumāro ‘‘mayhaṃ vasaṃ atikkamitukāmo, na dāni assa atikkamituṃ dassāmī’’ti mārabalassa santikaṃ gantvā etamatthaṃ ārocetvā māraghosanaṃ nāma ghosāpetvā mārabalaṃ ādāya nikkhami. Sā mārasenā mārassa purato dvādasa yojanā honti. Dakkhiṇato ca vāmato ca dvādasa yojanā. Pacchato cakkavāḷapariyantaṃ katvā ṭhitā, uddhaṃ navayojanubbedhā. Yassā unnādantiyā unnādasaddo yojanasahassato paṭṭhāya pathavīundriyasaddo viya suyyati. Atha māro devaputto diyaḍḍhayojanasatikaṃ girimekhalaṃ nāma hatthiṃ abhirūhitvā bāhusahassaṃ māpetvā nānāvudhāni aggahesi. Avasesāyapi māraparisāya dve janā ekasadisaṃ āvudhaṃ na gaṇhiṃsu. Nānappakāravaṇṇā nānappakāra mukhā hutvā mahāsattaṃ ajjhottharamānā āgamaṃsu.
然而,一万世界诸天的天人们却站立称扬大士。帝释天王吹响胜利螺贝而立。据说那螺贝长达一百二十肘,若吸满气而吹,能鸣响四个月方才止息。大黑龙王以超过一百颂的赞辞称叹而立。大梵天手持白伞而立。但当魔军逼近菩提道场时,他们之中竟无一人能立,皆当面逃散。名为迦罗的龙王钻入地下,逃往五百由旬外的曼提罗迦龙宫,双手捂脸而卧。帝释天将胜利螺贝负于背上,立于铁围山边缘。大梵天收拢白伞,径往梵天界。竟无一位天神能够站立,唯有大士独自安坐。魔王便对其众说道:“诸位,没有其他人能与悉达多太子相匹敌,我们无法正面交战,将从背后攻击。”大士环视三方,因一切天神皆已逃散,只见空无一人。又见魔军从北方铺天盖地涌来,心念:“如此庞大之众只为我一人而来,何等兴师动众。此处我无父、无母、无兄弟,亦无任何亲族;唯有这十波罗蜜,长久以来如同我的子女眷属。因此,我当以波罗蜜为盾,以波罗蜜为剑,击溃此军。”他便如此随念十波罗蜜而坐。显示巴利原文
Dasasahassacakkavāḷadevatā pana mahāsattassa thuti yo vadamānā aṭṭhaṃsu. Sakko devarājā vijayuttarasaṅkhaṃ dhamamāno aṭṭhāsi. So kira saṅkho vīsahatthasatiko hoti. Sakiṃ vātaṃ gāhāpetvā dhamanto cattāro māse saddaṃ karitvā nissaddo hoti. Mahākāḷanāga rājā atirekapadasatena vaṇṇaṃ vadanto aṭṭhāsi. Mahābrahmā setacchattaṃ dhārayamāno aṭṭhāsi. Māra bale pana bodhimaṇḍalaṃ upasaṅkamante tesaṃ ekopi ṭhātuṃ nāsakkhi. Sammukha sammukhaṭṭhāneneva palāyiṃsu. Kāḷo nāma nāgarājā pathaviṃ nimujjitvā pañcayojanasatikaṃ mantirakanāgabhavanaṃ gantvā ubhohi hatthehi mukhaṃ pidahitvā nipanno. Sakko vijayuttarasaṅkhaṃ piṭṭhiyaṃ katvā cakkavāḷamukha vaṭṭiyaṃ aṭṭhāsi. Mahābrahmā setacchattaṃ koṭiyaṃ gahetvā brahmalokameva agamāsi. Ekadevatāpi ṭhātuṃ samattho nāma nāhosi. Mahāpuriso ekakova nisīdi. Māropi attano parisaṃ āha ‘‘tāta suddhodanaputtena siddhatthena sadiso añño puriso nāma natthi, mayaṃ sammukhā yuddhaṃ dātuṃ na sakkhissāma, pacchā bhāgena dassāmā’’ti. Mahāpurisopi tīṇi passāni oloketvā sabbadevatānaṃ palāyitattā suññāni addasa. Puna uttarapassena mārabalaṃ ajjhottharamānaṃ disvā ‘‘ayaṃ ettako jano maṃ ekakaṃ sandhāya mahantaṃ vāyāmaṃ karoti, imasmiṃ ṭhāne mayhaṃ mātā vā pitā vā bhātā vā añño koci ñātako vā natthi, imā pana dasa pāramiyova mayhaṃ dīgharattaṃ puttaparijanasadisā, tasmā mayā pāramiyova phalakaṃ katvā pāramisattheneva paharitvā ayaṃ balakāyo mayā viddhaṃsetuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti dasa pāramiyo āvajjamāno nisīdi.
那时,魔王天子心想:“我这就用风暴把悉达多赶走!”于是掀起风暴圈。刹那间,从东方刮起夹杂雷电的狂风,吹裂了半由旬、一由旬、二由旬、乃至三由旬大小的山峰,将树木森林连根拔起,能将周边村落城镇搅成粉末。这风虽有能力将一切化为齑粉,但当它触及菩萨时,却因大士的威神功德与大威力,连衣角也无法吹动。接着,魔王心想:“我用水淹没他!”便降下大暴雨。凭借着此威神力,层层叠叠涌起百千层的各色云团降雨。暴雨的水柱冲力使大地碎裂,浓云笼罩在森林树木上方,却连沾湿菩萨袈裟如同一滴汗珠的湿润都无法做到。接着,他降下石雨。冒着烟、燃烧着的大山岩从空中飞来,落在菩萨足下,却变作了天界花环。接着,他降下武器雨。单刃、双刃、剑尖般锋利的武器冒着烟、燃烧着从空中飞来,触到菩萨时,化为了天界之花。接着,他降下炭火雨。有如金鸟树花色泽的炭火从空中飞来,落在菩萨足下,化为天界之花而散落。接着,他降下热灰雨。极炽热的火色热灰从空中飞来,落在菩萨足下,化为了天界檀香粉。接着,他降下沙雨。极细的沙子冒着烟、燃烧着从空中飞来,落在菩萨足下,化为了天界之花。显示巴利原文
Atha māro devaputto eteneva siddhatthaṃ palāpessāmīti vātamaṇḍalaṃ samuṭṭhāpesi. Taṅkhaṇaññeyeva puratthimā dibhedā vātā samuṭṭhahitvā aḍḍhayojanaekayojana dviyojanatiyojanappamāṇāni pabbatakūṭāni padāletvā vanagaccharukkhādīni uddhaṃ mūlāni katvā sāmantā gāmanigame cuṇṇavicuṇṇaṃ kātuṃ samatthāpi mahāpurisassa puññatejena mahānubhāvena bodhisattaṃ patvā cīvarakaṇṇamattampi cāletuṃ nāsakkhiṃsu. Tato udakena ajjhottharitvā māressāmāti mahāvassaṃ samuṭṭhāpesi. Tassānubhāvena uparūpari satapaṭalasahassapaṭalādibhedā vaḷāhakā uṭṭhahitvā vassiṃsu. Vuṭṭhidhārāvegena pathavī bhinnā ahosi. Vanarukkhādīnaṃ uparibhāgena mahāmegho āgantvā mahā sattassa cīvare ussāvabinduggahaṇamattampi temetuṃ nāsakkhi. Tato pāsāṇavassaṃ samuṭṭhāpesi. Mahantāni pabbatakūṭāni dhūmāyantāni pajjalantāni ākāsenāgantvā bodhisattassa pādamūle dibbamālāguḷabhāvaṃ āpajjiṃsu. Tato paharavassaṃ samuṭṭhāpesi. Ekatodhārā ubhatodhārā asisattikhurappādayo dhūmāyantā pajjalantā ākāsenāgantvā bodhisattaṃ patvā dibbapupphāni ahesuṃ. Tato aṅgāravassaṃ samuṭṭhāpesi. Kiṃsukavaṇṇā aṅgārā ākāsenāgantvā bodhisattassa pādamūle dibba pupphāni hutvā vikiriṃsu. Tato kukkuḷavassaṃ samuṭṭhāpesi. Accuṇho aggivaṇṇo kukkuḷo ākāsenāgantvā bodhisattassa pādamūle dibbacandanacuṇṇaṃ hutvā nipatati. Tato vāḷukavassaṃ samuṭṭhāpesi. Atisukhumavāḷikā dhūmāyantā pajjalantā ākāsenāgantvā bodhisattassa pādamūle dibbapupphāni hutvā nipatiṃsu. Tato kalalavassaṃ samuṭṭhāpesi. Taṃ kalalavassaṃ dhūmāyantaṃ pajjalantaṃ ākāse nāgantvā bodhisattassa pādamūle dibbavilepanaṃ hutvā patati. Tato iminā bhiṃsetvā siddhatthaṃ palāpessāmīti andhakāraṃ samuṭṭhāpesi. Taṃ caturaṅgasamannāgataṃ andhakāraṃ viya mahātamaṃ hutvā bodhisattaṃ patvā sūriyappabhā vihataṃ viya antaradhāyati.
魔王以这风、雨、石、武器、炭火、热灰、沙、泥、黑暗九种灾雨都不能将菩萨赶走,便命令魔众:“喂!你们还站着干什么?抓住这悉达多王子!打他!把他赶走!”他自己则骑上吉里弥迦勒象的肩,手持轮兵器,走近菩萨说:“悉达多,从这宝座起来!这宝座不属于你,属于我!”大士听闻此言,说道:“魔王,十波罗蜜并非由你所圆满,次等波罗蜜也非你所圆满,最上波罗蜜也非你所圆满;五大施你亦未曾舍弃;亲族之行、世间之行、佛陀之行你全然未成;这一切皆由我圆满成就。所以此宝座不属于你,而属于我。”魔王勃然大怒,不堪忍受大士之言,便向大士掷出轮兵器。大士此时正随念十波罗蜜,那轮兵器便在其上方变为花盖停住。据说,那锋利的轮兵器,往日因愤怒掷出时,能像斩断石柱或竹笋一般劈砍而去;而今却化为花盖停住。其余魔众心想:“他马上就要从座上起来逃跑了!”便投出巨大的山岩。当大士随念波罗蜜时,那些山岩也变作花环,落在了地上。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ māro imāhi navahi vātavassapāsāṇapaharaaṅgāra kukkuḷavāḷuka kalalaandhakāravuṭṭhīhi bodhisattaṃ palāpetuṃ asakkonto ‘‘kiṃ bhaṇe tiṭṭhatha imaṃ siddhatthakumāraṃ gaṇhatha hanatha palāpethā’’ti parisaṃ āṇāpetvā sayampi girimekhalassa hatthino khandhe nisinno cakkāvudhaṃ ādāya bodhisattaṃ upasaṅkamitvā ‘‘siddhattha uṭṭhāhi etasmā pallaṅkā, nāyaṃ tumhākaṃ pāpuṇāti, mayhaṃeva pāpuṇātī’’ti āha. Mahāsatto tassa vacanaṃ sutvā avoca ‘‘māra neva tayā dasapāramiyo pūritā, na upapāramiyo na paramattha pāramiyo nāpi pañcamahāpariccāgā pariccattā na ñātatthacariyā na lokatthacariyā na buddhatthacariyā pūritā, sabbā tā mayāyeva pūritā, tasmā nāyaṃ pallaṅko tuyhaṃ pāpuṇāti, mayhameva pāpuṇātī’’ti. Māro kuddho kodhavegaṃ asahanto mahāpurisassa cakkāvudhaṃ vissajjesi. Taṃ tassa dasapāramiyo āvajjantassa uparibhāge mālāvitānaṃ hutvā aṭṭhāsi. Taṃ kira khuracakkāvudhaṃ aññadā tena kuddhena vissaṭṭhaṃ ekaghanapāsāṇa thambhe vaṃsakaḷīre viya chindantaṃ gacchati. Idāni pana tasmiṃ mālāvitānaṃ hutvā ṭhite avasesā māraparisā idāni pallaṅkato vuṭṭhāya palāyissatīti mahantamahantāni selakūṭāni vissajjesuṃ. Tānipi mahāpurisassa pāramiyo āvajjantassa mālāguḷabhāvaṃ āpajjitvā bhūmiyaṃ patiṃsu.
立于轮围山口的天神们伸长脖颈,抬头遥望,议论道:“哎呀!悉达多王子那已臻色究竟天的妙色身竟毁坏了,他又当如何是好?”此时,大士对站在身旁的魔王说道——正如圆满波罗蜜的诸菩萨于成正觉之日所说——“此座当属于我”,便问:“魔王,你所施的‘已施’,有谁为你作证?”魔王答道:“这些大众皆为我证。”说着便向魔军伸出手去。彼时,魔众中轰然发出“我作证!我作证!”的呼声,声如大地震动一般。于是魔王便问大士:“悉达多!你所施的‘已施’,又有谁为你作证?”大士说道:“你所施的‘已施’,尚有有心之人为证;而我所施,此刻此处,并无有心之人能为我证。且不论我于其余生中所行之布施,单说我在毗沙门太子(维山达拉)那一生中,曾行七百七十大布施,为此‘已施’,这无心的厚地便可作证。”言罢,便从袈裟内伸出右手,指向大地,正如在身为毗沙门太子行七百七十大布施时,询问“你可为我作证否”一般,将手伸向大地。大地顿时发出百千声、百千番咆哮,犹如欲淹没魔军一般轰鸣:“我为你此施作证!”显示巴利原文
Devatā cakkavāḷamukhavaṭṭiyaṃ ṭhitā gīvaṃ pasāretvā sīsaṃ ukkhipitvā ‘‘naṭṭho vata bho siddhatthakumārassa rūpaggappatto attabhāvo, kiṃ nu kho karissatī’’ti olokenti. Tato mahāpuriso pūritapāramīnaṃ bodhisattānaṃ abhi sambujjhanadivase pattapallaṅko mayhaṃva pāpuṇātīti vatvā ṭhitaṃ māraṃ āha ‘‘māra tuyhaṃ dānassa dinnabhāve ko sakkhī’’ti. Māro ‘‘ettakā janā sakkhino’’ti māra balābhimukhaṃ hatthaṃ pasāreti. Tasmiṃ khaṇe māraparisāya ‘‘ahaṃ sakkhī ahaṃ sakkhī’’ti pavattasaddo pathavīundriyasaddasadiso ahosi. Atha kho māro mahāpurisaṃ āha ‘‘siddhattha tuyhaṃ dānassa dinnabhāve ko sakkhī’’ti. Mahāpuriso ‘‘tuyhaṃ tāva dānassa dinnabhāve sacetanā sakkhino. Mayhaṃ pana imasmiṃ ṭhāne sacetano koci sakkhī nāma natthi. Tiṭṭhatu tāva me avasesattabhāvesu dinnadānaṃ, vessantarattabhāve pana ṭhatvā mayhaṃ sattasattaka mahādānassa dinnabhāve acetanāpi ghanamahāpathavī sakkhī’’ti cīvaragabbhantarato dakkhiṇahatthaṃ nīharitvā vessantarattabhāve mayhaṃ sattasattakamahādānassa dinnabhāve tvaṃ sakkhi na sakkhīti mahāpathaviyābhimukhaṃ hatthaṃ pasāresi. Mahā pathavī ‘‘ahaṃ te dānassa sakkhī’’ti viravasahassena viravasatasahassena mārabalaṃ avattharamānā viya unnadi.
当大士忆念“悉达多,这大布施已作,这无上布施已施”的毗沙门太子之布施时,高达一百五十由旬的轮围山,犹如巨象屈膝般沉稳定住。魔众随即向四方四维惊恐逃窜,无一者同走一路。他们纷纷丢弃头冠与衣饰,在各自所在之处,便向四方四维四散而逃。诸天见魔军溃逃,明了“魔王败北,悉达多王子已获胜”。为庆贺胜利,龙众派出龙众,金翅鸟众派出金翅鸟众,天众派出天众,梵天众派出梵天众,各持香、花鬘等供品,齐聚于大士所在的菩提座前。当他们来到之时——显示巴利原文
Tato mahāpurise dinnaṃ te siddhattha mahādānaṃ uttama dānanti vessantaradānaṃ sammasante diyaḍḍhayojanasatiko girimekhalo hatthī jāṇukehi patiṭṭhāsi. Māraparisā disāvidisā palāyiṃsu. Dve ekamaggena gatā nāma natthi. Sīsābharaṇāni ceva vatthābharaṇāni ca pahāya sammukha sammukhaṭṭhāne disāvidisāhiyeva palāyiṃsu. Tato devasaṅgho palāyamānaṃ mārabalaṃ disvā mārassa parājayo jāto. Siddhatthakumārassa jayo. Jayapūjaṃ karissāmāti nāgā nāgānaṃ, supaṇṇā supaṇṇānaṃ, devatā devatānaṃ, brahmāno brahmānaṃ pesetvā gandhamālādi hatthā mahāpurisassa santikaṃ bodhipallaṅkaṃ āgamaṃsu. Evaṃ gatesu ca panetesu –
“吉祥世尊之胜利确实已成,
以及邪恶魔罗的败亡;
欢喜者于菩提场高声欢呼,
那时,大圣者的龙众宣告胜利。
这是具威德佛陀的胜利,
与邪恶魔罗的败北;
他们在菩提座上欢喜唱言,
那时,金翅鸟众宣告大圣的胜利。
这胜利,正是属于那吉祥佛陀的胜利,
也是邪恶魔罗的彻底败亡;
他们于菩提道场欢喜宣告,
那时,梵天众亦宣告彼如来的胜利。”
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Jayo hi buddhassa sirīmato ayaṃ, Mārassa ca pāpimato parājayo; Ugghosisuṃ bodhimaṇḍe pamoditā, Jayaṃ tadā nāgagaṇā mahesino. Jayo hi buddhassa sirīmato ayaṃ, Mārassa ca pāpimato parājayo; Ugghosisuṃ bodhimaṇḍe pamoditā, Jayaṃ tadā supaṇṇasaṅghā mahesino. Jayo hi buddhassa sirīmato ayaṃ, Mārassa ca pāpimato parājayo; Ugghosisuṃ bodhimaṇḍe pamoditā, Jayaṃ tadā devagaṇā mahesino. Jayo hi buddhassa sirīmato ayaṃ, Mārassa ca pāpimato parājayo; Ugghosisuṃ bodhimaṇḍe pamoditā, Jayaṃ tadā brahmagaṇāpi tādino’’ti.
在其余一万个轮围世界,诸天众以花鬘、香、涂香作供养,并称扬种种赞叹而安住。就这样,太阳尚未落山,大士便摧破魔军,以飘落在衣上的菩提树嫩芽——犹如红珊瑚的新叶一般——作为供养。初夜时分,他随念宿住智;中夜,他净化天眼;后夜,他将智投入缘起。当他以顺逆方式,依流转与还灭观照十二支缘起时,一万世界界直至水界边际,震动十二次。据说,大士令一万世界界发出巨响,于黎明时分证悟了一切知智。此处未说之余事,应结合那些(本生故事等)来理解。显示巴利原文
Avasesesu dasasu cakkavāḷasahassesu devatā mālāgandhavilepanehi ca pūjayamānā nānappakāra thutiyo ca vadamānā aṭṭhaṃsu. Evaṃ anatthaṅgateyeva sūriye mahāpuriso mārabalaṃ vidhametvā cīvarūpari pata mānehi bodhirukkhaṅkurehi rattapavāḷapallavehi viya pūjayamāno paṭhamayāme pubbenivāsañāṇaṃ anussaritvā majjhimayāme dibbacakkhuṃ visodhetvā pacchimayāme paṭicca samuppāde ñāṇaṃ otāresi. Athassa dvādasapadikaṃ paccayā kāraṃ vaṭṭavivaṭṭavasena anulomato paṭilomato sammasantassa dasasahassilokadhātu udakapariyantaṃ katvā dvādasakkhattuṃ sampakampi. Mahāpurisena pana dasasahassi lokadhātuṃ unnādetvā aruṇuggamanavelāyaṃ sabbaññuta ñāṇaṃ paṭivijjhīti vuttaṃ hoti. Idha pana vuttāvasesaṃ tāsu ca oloketvā gahetabbanti.
此处是其简要注释:具足福德者,即拥有布施等波罗蜜福德之人,或由布施等波罗蜜福德而成就者;那位善逝,在无上菩提树之近处,战胜了率军而来的魔罗王——以波罗蜜福德威力降伏之后,于毗舍佉月满月破晓时分,证悟了菩提——即阿罗汉道智与一切知智所摄的菩提。我礼敬那位征服魔罗、战胜五魔、不可摧破、任何率军而来之魔罗皆不能毁坏的善逝。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepayojanā. Upetapuñño sampanna dānādipāramīpuññavā dānādipāramīpuññena sampanno vā, yo sugato varabodhimūle uttamassa bodhirukkhassa samīpe, sasenamāraṃ senāya saha pavattaṃ mārarājaṃ, jinitvā pāramīpuññatejena vijayitvā, aruṇodayamhi visākhapuṇṇamiyaṃ aruṇuggamanavelāyaṃ, bodhiṃ arahattamaggañāṇa sabbaññutañāṇasaṅkhātaṃ bodhiṃ, abojjhi paṭivijjhi adhigami vā, mārajinaṃ pañcamārānaṃ vijitāviṃ, abhaṅgaṃ sasenamāro yo koci vā bhindituṃ asamatthaṃ taṃ sugataṃ ahaṃ namāmīti.
那断除贪等烦恼的无垢智剑,
执持名为正念的盾牌
那以戒之波浪而为庄严者
我礼敬具足殊胜神通者
显示巴利原文 Rāgādi chedāmalañāṇakhaggaṃ, Satīsamaññāphalakābhigāhaṃ; Sīloghalaṅkāravibhūsitaṃ taṃ, Namāmibhiññāvaramiddhupetaṃ.
7 如此,以第六偈礼敬善逝后,为以阿罗汉道智等四种功德赞叹礼敬,故说“断除贪等”等偈。然此偈应视作优波阇提偈,由十一音节构成,因其兼具因陀罗金刚与优宾陀罗金刚二偈的特征。正如《音声论》所说:“若颂中诸句兼具前述因陀罗金刚与优宾陀罗金刚偈之特征,则他们颂名为优波阇提。”显示巴利原文
7. Evaṃ chaṭṭhamagāthāya sugataṃ vanditvā idāni arahatta maggañāṇādīhi catūhi guṇehi thomitvā vanditukāmo rāgādityādigāthamāha. Ayaṃ pana indavajira upendavajira gāthādvayassa lakkhaṇassa missakattā ekādasakkharehi lakkhitā upajātigāthāti daṭṭhabbā. Vuttañhi vuttodaye ‘‘anantarodīritalakkhaṇā ce, pādāvimissā upajātiyo tā’’ti. Tassattho. Yassā vuttiyā anantaro dīritalakkhaṇā anantare udīritaṃ vuttaṃ indavajiropenda vajiragāthānaṃ lakkhaṇavantā pādā vimissā saṃsaṭṭhā ce bhavanti, tā vuttiyo upajātiyo nāmāti.
其中,“断除贪等无垢智剑”一句,应分解为“断除贪等”、“无垢”、“智剑”。意为:能斩断贪等烦恼、远离垢秽、名为阿罗汉道智之剑。此处词释如下:于色等境染著,故为“贪”。“染”字根于贪著义,加ṇa后缀。以贪为首者,即“贪等”,指诸烦恼。能断那些者,为“断除贪等”,即阿罗汉道智。令堕恶趣、执持垢秽者,为“垢”,即贪等。或由此而为所染,故为“垢”。“垢”字根于染污义,加a后缀。远离于垢者,为“无垢”,即智。了知、证悟四谛者,为“智”,即阿罗汉道智。既是断除贪等,又是无垢,且是智,故称“断除贪等无垢智”。如以剑斩树等,或以此断除,故为“剑”,即通常所说的剑。犹如剑者,为“剑”,即智。拥有名为断除贪等无垢智之剑者,为“断除贪等无垢智剑者”,指佛陀。其意为:具备以斩断贪等烦恼、远离垢秽的最上道智所摄之剑。彼。显示巴利原文
Tattha rāgādichedāmala ñāṇakhagganti ettha rāgaādicheda amalañāṇakhaggantipadacchedo. Rāgādikilesaṃ chindantaṃ malavira hitaṃ arahattamaggañāṇasaṅkhātaṃ asivantanti attho. Tatrāyaṃ vacanattho. Rūpādīsu rañjatīti rāgo. Ranjadhātu rāge ṇa. Rāgo ādi yesanteti rāgādayo, kilesā. Te chindatīti rāgādichedaṃ, arahattamaggañāṇaṃ. Apāyaṃ malati dhāretīti malaṃ, rāgādi. Atha vā malati saṃkilissati etenāti malaṃ. Maladhātu saṃkilesane a. Malato virahitaṃ amalaṃ, ñāṇaṃ. Cattāri saccāni jānāti paṭivijjhatīti ñāṇaṃ, arahattamaggañāṇaṃ. Rāgādichedañca amalañca taṃ ñāṇañcāti rāgādichedāmalañāṇaṃ. Rukkhādiṃ khaggati chindati etenāti vā khaggaṃ, pakatiasi. Khaggaṃ viyāti khaggaṃ, ñāṇaṃ. Rāgādichedāmalañāṇasaṅkhataṃ khaggaṃ yassa soti rāgādichedāmalañāṇakhaggo, buddho. Rāgādikilesaṃ chindantena malavira hitena aggamaggañāṇasaṅkhatena asinā samannāgatoti attho. Taṃ.
“紧握名为正念之盾牌”一句,应分解为“正念”、“盾牌”、“紧握”。意为:坚固执持名为正念的盾牌。此处词释如下:念为依止,或诸相应法依此而忆念,或能忆念,故为“念”。“忆”字根。又,能忆念并损害放逸,故为“念”,即正念。“忆”字根于损害义。依此而正了知,故为“名”,即念,故为“正念”。能防护刀剑等武器者,为“盾牌”,即护盾。“果”字根于防护义,加ṇvu后缀。坚固执持正念盾牌者,为“正念盾牌紧握者”,指佛陀。正如军队中盾牌能防护刀剑等武器,同样,念能防护眼等诸门,不令色等所缘侵入而作守护。因此,世尊因念法能遮止一切不善、助长一切善法、于一切处成就,故说为坚固执持念盾。正如经中所说:“诸善法中,皆以不放逸为根、以不放逸为归宿,于诸法中,不放逸称为最上。”及:“比丘们,我说念于一切处皆有必要。”显示巴利原文
Satīsamaññā phalakābhigāhanti ettha satisamaññāphalaka abhigāhantipadacchedo. Sammāsatināmikaṃ phalakaṃ daḷhagāha kanti attho. Tatrāyaṃ vacanattho. Saraṇaṃ sati, sarati sampayuttadhammā etāyāti, saratīti vā sati. Saradhātuti. Atha vā pamādaṃ sarati hiṃsatīti sati, sammāsati. Saradhātu hiṃsāyaṃti. Sammā ājānāti etāyāti samaññā, satiiti samaññā satisamaññā, asiādisatthaṃ phalati nivāretīti phalakaṃ, kheṭakaṃ. Phaladhātu nivāraṇe ṇvu. Satisamaññaṃ phalakaṃ abhidaḷhaṃ gaṇhatīti satisamaññāphala kābhigāho, buddho labbhati. Yathā hi senāya phalakaṃ asiādisatthaṃ rakkhati, evaṃ satisaṃvaro cakkhādi dvāresu rūpādiārammaṇaṃ pavisituṃ adatvā rakkhati. Tasmā bhagavā satidhammo sabbākusalānaṃ rakkhakattā sabbakusala dhammānaṃ upakārattā sabbatthānaṃ sādhakattā ca satiphalakaṃ daḷhaṃ gaṇhatīti vuttaṃ hoti. Vuttañhi ‘‘ye keci kusalā dhammā, sabbe te appamādamūlakā appamādasamosaraṇā, appamādo tesaṃ dhammānaṃ aggamakkhāyatī’’ti ca. ‘‘Satiṃ khvāhaṃ bhikkhave sabbatthikaṃ vadāmī’’ti ca.
Sīloghalaṅkāravibhūsita:应作“sīla-ogha-alaṅkāra-vibhūsita”的词分解。其义为:以称为清净戒聚的庄严所庄严。其中,“戒”指出世间戒,其义如前已述。此戒有四种:思戒、心所戒、律仪戒、不犯戒。其中,思戒是指远离杀生等或履行义务时的思心所。心所戒是指远离杀生等时的正离心所。律仪戒:此中律仪有五种,即巴帝摩卡律仪、念律仪、智律仪、忍律仪、精进律仪,这一切统称为律仪戒。不犯戒是指受持戒者没有身、语的违犯。这在《无碍解道》中已说:“什么是戒?思是戒,心所是戒,律仪是戒,不犯是戒。”然而,此处并非指不犯戒。为何?因为世尊没有受持的学处。诸佛确实没有所谓的学处。Ogha指集合,“ogha”一词是集合的名称。因此,《阿毗达摩灯论》中说:显示巴利原文
Sīloghalaṅkāravibhūsitanti sīlaoghaalaṅkāra vibhū sitanti padacchedo. Visuddhasīlānaṃ samūhasaṅkhātena alaṅkārena vibhūsitanti attho. Tattha sīlanti lokuttara sīlaṃ. Tassa attho heṭṭhā vuttoyeva. Taṃ pana cetanā sīlaṃ, cetasikaṃ sīlaṃ, saṃvaro sīlaṃ, avītikkamo sīlañcāti catubbidhaṃ hoti. Tattha cetanā sīlaṃ nāma pāṇātipātā dīhi vā viramantassa vattapaṭipattiṃ vā pūrentassa cetanā. Cetasikasīlaṃ nāma pāṇātipātādīhi viramantassa virati. Saṃvaro sīlanti ettha saṃvaro pātimokkhasaṃvaro, sati saṃvaro, ñāṇasaṃvaro, khantisaṃvaro, vīriyasaṃvaro cāti pañcavidho hoti, sabbametaṃ saṃvaro sīlaṃ nāma. Avītikkamo sīlaṃ nāma samādinnasīlassa kāyikavācasiko anatikkamoti. Vuttañhetaṃ paṭisambhidāyaṃ ‘‘kiṃsīlanticetanā sīlaṃ, cetasikaṃ sīlaṃ, saṃvaro sīlaṃ, avītikkamo sīla’’nti. Idha pana avītikkamo sīlaṃ nādhippetaṃ. Kasmā. Bhagavato samādinnasikkhāpadassa abhāvato. Buddhānañhi sikkhāpadaṃ nāma natthīti. Oghoti samūho. Oghasaddo hi samūhavācako. Tena vuttaṃ abhidhānappadīpikāyaṃ –
“集合、群、聚合,聚集与积集;
聚集、堆聚、洪流,散布、群、堆”等。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Samūho gaṇasaṅghātā, samudāyo ca sañcayo; Sandoho nivaho ogho, visaro nikaro cayo’’tyādi.
“avahanati gacchati pavattati avayavaṃ etthāti ogho, samūho”——前缀 ava 的√han(行进)加 ṇa 后缀,ava 的 a 变为 o,han 变为 gha。意为:部分在其中行进、移动、转起,故称 ogha,即集合。而《阿毗达摩灯论注》中说:“以部分而行,遍满而转起,故称 ogha。”戒的 ogha,即戒的集合,称为 sīlogha。Alaṅkāra 指庄严。由 alaṃ(充分)与√kar(作)结合,加 ṇa 后缀,意为:以此使具足者充分庄严,故称 alaṅkāra,此处即戒。戒的集合本身即是庄严,故称 sīloghālaṅkāra。以此而庄严,故称 sīloghalaṅkāravibhūsita,指佛陀。然而,他是以与其他不共的出世间戒庄严而庄严,并非以衣服等外饰而庄严,因为与戒庄严相似的装饰并不存在。礼敬那位以戒之洪流庄严而庄严者。显示巴利原文
Avahanati gacchati pavattati avayavaṃ etthāti ogho, samūho. Avapubbahanadhātu gatimhi ṇo. Avassa o, hanassa gho. Abhidhānappadīpikāṭīkāyaṃ pana ‘‘avayavaṃ katvā byāpiyati gacchatīti ogho’’ti vuttaṃ. Sīlānaṃ ogho samūho sīlogho. Alaṅkāroti piḷandhano. Alaṃ vibhusaṃ taṃ samaṅgīpuggalaṃ karoti anenāti alaṅkāro, sīlaṃ. Alaṃsaddūpapadakaradhātu ṇo. Sīlogho eva alaṅkāro sīloghālaṅkāro, tena vibhū siyatīti sīloghalaṅkāravibhūsito, buddho. Tena pana aññehi asādhāraṇena lokuttarasīlālaṅkārena vibhūsito. Na cīvarādinālaṅkārenāti attho. Sīlālaṅkārena hi sadiso alaṅkāro nāma natthi. Taṃ sīloghalaṅkāravibhūsitaṃ.
Namāmi abhiññāvaramiddhupetaṃ 应作 namāmi abhiññāvaraṃ iddhi upetaṃ 的连词分解。其中,namāmi 指我礼敬。Abhiññāvaramiddhupetaṃ 意为:具足称为无上殊胜神通的智。Abhiññā(神通智)即殊胜地了知,指六种智。此六种智依神变智、天耳智、他心智、宿住随念智、死生智、漏尽智而分为六种。其中,神变智是对“一身成多身”等所示神变的了知智。天耳智是以远近等差别音声为所缘的天耳界了知智。他心智是对于其他有情心之分别的了知智。宿住随念智,即依自相续及所缘境中所住,随念过去世诸蕴等,与念相应之智。死生智是对于有情死与生的了知智。于此,注释书中说,在死生智之处,因其能成就彼,故称为天眼智。漏尽智是对于谛之分别的了知,即阿罗汉道智。Vara 指无上。Iddhi 指成就、圆满,或谓“成就、圆满”即 iddhi,词根为 idha。Abhiññāvaramiddhupeta 即具足、完全具足、拥有称为无上殊胜神通之智。显示巴利原文
Namāmibhiññāvaramiddhupetanti ettha namāmi abhiññāvaraṃ iddhi upetanti padacchedo. Tattha namāmīti vandāmi. Abhiññāvaramiddhupetanti abhiññāsaṅkhātāya uttamāya iddhiyā samannāgatanti attho. Abhivisesena jānātīti abhiññā, chabbidhaṃ ñāṇaṃ. Tañhi iddhividhadibbasota paracitta vijānana pubbenivāsānussati cutūpapāta āsavakkhaya ñāṇavasena chabbidhaṃ hoti. Tattha iddhividhañāṇanti ekopi hutvā bahudhā hotītiādinayappavatte iddhividhe jānana ñāṇaṃ. Dibbasotañāṇanti dūrasantikādibhedasaddārammaṇāya dibbasotadhātuyā jānanañāṇaṃ. Paracittavijānanañāṇanti parasattānaṃ cittaparicchedassa vijānanañāṇaṃ. Pubbenivāsā nussatiñāṇanti attasantāne vutthavasena ceva gocara nivāsavasena ca pubbe atītabhavesu khandhādīnaṃ anussaraṇa satiyā sampayuttaṃ ñāṇaṃ. Cutūpapātañāṇanti sattānaṃ cutiyañca upapāte ca jānanañāṇaṃ. Ettha ca aṭṭhakathāsu cutūpapātañāṇaṭṭhāne tassa sādhakattā dibbacakkhuñāṇanti vuttaṃ. Āsavakkhayañāṇanti saccaparicchedassa jānanaṃ arahatta maggañāṇanti. Varanti uttamaṃ. Iddhīti ijjhanaṃ samijjhanaṃ. Ijjhati samijjhatīti vā iddhi. Idhadhātuti. Abhiññāsaṅkhātāya varāya iddhiyā upeto samupeto samannāgatoti abhiññāvaramiddhupeto, buddho. Taṃ abhiññāvaramiddhupetaṃ. Taṃ buddhaṃ ahaṃ namāmīti sambandho.
此处略释如下:我礼敬那位佛陀——他手持断除贪等烦恼的无垢阿罗汉道智之剑;紧握名为正念的盾牌;以戒聚之庄严而庄严;具足、完全具足、拥有称为无上殊胜神通之智。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepayojanā. Rāgādichedāmalañāṇa khaggaṃ rāgādikilesaṃ chindantaṃ malavirahitaṃ arahattamaggañāṇa saṅkhātaṃ asivantaṃ, satīsamaññāphalakābhigāhaṃ sammā satināmikaṃ phalakaṃ daḷhagahaṇaṃ, sīloghalaṅkāravibhūsitaṃ sīlānaṃ samūhasaṅkhātena alaṅkārena vibhūsitaṃ, abhiññā varamiddhupetaṃ abhiññāsaṅkhātāya varāya uttamāya iddhiyā upetaṃ samupetaṃ samannāgataṃ taṃ buddhaṃ ahaṃ namāmīti.
安住悲愍,于一切处行难行之道,
已超越有海、抵达彼岸者;
三界之怙主,善入正定,饶益有情,
我礼敬彼具一切眼者、知量者。
显示巴利原文 Dayālayaṃ sabbadhi dukkaraṃ karaṃ, Bhavaṇṇavātikkamamaggataṃ gataṃ; Tilokanāthaṃ susamāhitaṃ hitaṃ, Samantacakkhuṃ paṇamāmi taṃmitaṃ.
8 第八。如此,以第七偈礼敬佛陀之后,为以悲等九种功德赞颂而致敬礼,宣说了“dayālayaṃ”等偈。应知,此偈由 ja、ta、ja、ra 音组构成,具十二音节,是四句双韵的 Vaṃsaṭṭha 偈颂。正如《Vuttodaya》所说:“若一句中具 ja、ta、ja 及 ja、ra 音组,诸牟尼仙人说此为 Vaṃsaṭṭha 偈颂。”其义为:一句中若含有 ja、ta、ja 及 ja、ra 音组,诸牟尼仙人便称之为 Vaṃsaṭṭha 偈颂。显示巴利原文
8. Evaṃ sattamagāthāya buddhaṃ vanditvā idāni mahākaruṇā dīhi navahi guṇehi thomitvā vanditukāmo dayālayantyādigāthamāha. Ayaṃ pana ja ta ja ragaṇehi yuttattā dvādasakkharehi lakkhitā catupādantayamakā vaṃsaṭṭhagāthāti daṭṭhabbā. Vuttañhi vuttodaye ‘‘vadanti vaṃsaṭṭhamidaṃ jatā jarā’’ti. Tassattho, yassaṃ paṭipādaṃ jatā jatagaṇā ca jarā jaragaṇā ca ce bhavanti, idaṃ vuttaṃ vaṃsaṭṭhaṃ vaṃsaṭṭhagāthā nāmāti munayo isayo vadantīti.
其中,“dayālayaṃ”是大悲与慈爱的依止处。“悲悯”(dayā)一词,既用于悲,亦用于慈:在“无悲悯者”中用于悲,义为陷入无悲悯的状态;在“有悲悯者”中用于慈,义为达到慈心的状态。此处则二者皆适用,故应将“悲悯”视为通过词形省略而成的复合词。其词义为:dayā(悲悯)有“折磨”义,即折磨有悲心者,此指大悲,因词根 day 有“折磨”义——当悲心未能如其心愿地成就利他时,便会折磨有悲心者。或解为“折磨、拔除他人之苦”。又解为:善人借此舍弃己乐而承受疲劳;或解为:借此摄受恶人;或解为:诸菩萨借此执取正等正觉——菩萨发愿成佛时,舍弃已到手的殊胜果报,以大悲欲救度众生出离轮回大海,并执取那无有喘息之机的巨大轮回之苦,乃至最后一生,连同证得界不死而成就的、为无量功德所庄严的一切知智。dayā 又意为:借此给予众生无畏,此即慈爱,因词根 day 有“给予”义。悲悯意为:不作分别。显示巴利原文
Tattha dayālayanti mahākaruṇāya ca, mettāya ca ādhāraṃ. Dayāsaddo hi karuṇāya ca, mettāya ca vattati. Adayāpannoti ettha hi karuṇāya vattati. Nikkaruṇikataṃ āpannoti attho. Dayāpannoti ettha mettāya mettacittataṃ āpannoti attho. Idha pana tadubhayampi vaṭṭati. Tasmā dayā ca dayā ca dayāti saddasarūpekaseso kātabbo. Vacanattho panettha evaṃ veditabbo. Dayati hiṃsati kāruṇikanti dayā, mahākaruṇā. Dayadhātu hiṃsāyaṃ a. Yā karuṇā yāva yathādhippetaṃ parassa hitanipphattiṃ na pāpuṇāti, tāva kāruṇikaṃ hiṃsatīti attho. Dayati hiṃsati apaneti paradukkhanti vā dayā. Atha vā dayati attano sukhampi pahāya khedaṃ gaṇhāti sajjano etāyāti dayā, dayati anuggaṇhāti pāpajanampi etāyāti vā dayā, dayanti gaṇhanti bodhisattā sammāsambodhiṃ etāyāti vā dayā, bodhisattā buddhabhāvāya abhinīhārakaraṇa kāle hatthagatampi aggaphalaṃ chaṭṭetvā mahākaruṇāya saṃsārasāgarato satte samuddharitukāmā anassāsa karaṃ mahantaṃ saṃsāradukkhañca pacchimabhave saha amata dhātupaṭilābhena anekaguṇasamalaṅkataṃ sabbaññutañāṇañca gaṇhantīti attho. Dayati dadāti sattānaṃ abhayaṃ etāyāti dayā, mettā. Dayadhātu dāne a. Dayati gacchati vibhāgaṃ akatvā sattesu samaṃ pavattatīti dayā. Yathā udakaṃ sabbasattesu sītena samaṃ pharati rajomalañca pavāheti, evaṃ mettā pāpakalyāṇajanesu vibhāgaṃ akatvā samaṃ pavattatīti attho.
复次,另有解释:众生借此而得到保护,或者它自身即是怜悯,或仅是怜悯,这称为悲悯,也就是悲与慈。依此而住者,名为悲悯之所依,即佛陀。世尊对提婆达多等怨敌众生、非怨敌众生,乃至亲子罗睺罗,恒怀利益之心,以大悲与慈爱平等安住,故称扬他为“悲悯之所依”。这在《譬喻经》中也有说:显示巴利原文
Aparo nayo. Dayanti anurakkhanti satte etāya, sayaṃ vā anuddayati anuddayamattameva vā etanti dayā, karuṇāmettā labbhanti. Tāya ālayati patiṭṭhati etthāti dayālayo, buddho. Bhagavā hi devadattādīsu virodhi sattesu ca avirodhisattesu orase rāhule ca samaṃ niccaṃ hitajjhāsayatāya mahākaruṇāya mettāya ca ṭhito , tasmā dayālayanti thometīti vuttaṃ hoti. Vuttañhetaṃ apadānapāḷiyaṃ –
于杀害者提婆达多,盗贼指鬘;
于财护象与罗睺罗,大牟尼心平等。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Vadhake devadatte ca, core aṅgulimālake; Dhanapāle rāhule ca, samacitto mahāmunī’’ti.
“一切处”指于一切生存状态中。其义为:从为成佛而发愿开始,在一切生存状态中。“难行”指难以做到之业,如五大舍弃等。因其难以实行,故称难行,此即指五大舍弃等业。这里,五大舍弃为:财物舍弃、肢体舍弃、子女舍弃、妻子舍弃、生命舍弃,共五种。其中,舍弃象、马、奴仆等有识之财,或珍珠、摩尼、银等无识之财,名为财物舍弃。舍弃手、足、眼、耳、鼻等身体支分,名为肢体舍弃。舍弃儿子与女儿,名为子女舍弃。舍弃妻子,名为妻子舍弃。舍弃与命根相连的身体,名为生命舍弃。虽然财物舍弃等实际上都摄于布施巴拉密中,但为显示其舍弃的特殊性及极为难行之性质,故以“大舍弃”之名别别列出,这是其意趣。在《大本经注》中则说:“肢体舍弃、眼睛舍弃、自身舍弃、王国舍弃、子女妻子舍弃,这些是五大舍弃。其中,肢体舍弃等虽也属于布施巴拉密,但为显示其舍弃殊胜及极为难行之性质,故将大舍弃单独列出。正因如此,在肢体舍弃之外,又别列眼睛舍弃;虽同为舍弃,亦别列王国舍弃与子女妻子舍弃。”此即难行。而显示巴利原文
Sabbadhīti sabbasmiṃ attabhāve. Buddhabhāvāya abhinīhārato paṭṭhāya sabbattabhāvesūti attho. Dukkaranti dukkhena karitabbaṃ pañcamahāpariccāgādikammaṃ dukkhena karitabbanti dukkaraṃ, pañcamahāpariccāgādikammaṃ labbhati. Ettha ca pañcamahā pariccāgoti dhanapariccāgo, aṅgapariccāgo, puttapariccāgo, bhariyapariccāgo, jīvitapariccāgo cāti pañcavidho hoti. Tattha hatthiassa dāsidāsādi saviññāṇakassa dhanassa vā muttāmaṇirajatādi aviññāṇakassa dhanassa vā pariccāgo dhanapariccāgo nāma. Hatthapādacakkhukaṇṇanāsādisarīrāva yavassa pariccāgo aṅgapariccāgo nāma. Puttassa ca dhītuyā ca pariccāgo puttapariccāgo nāma. Bhariyāya pariccāgo bhariyapariccāgo nāma. Jīvitindriyapaṭibaddhassa sarīrassa pariccāgo jīvitapariccāgo nāma. Kiñcāpi pana dhanapariccāgā dayo dānapāramiyaṃyeva antogadhā, tathāpi pariccāga visesabhāvadassanatthañceva sudukkarabhāvadassanatthañca mahāpariccāgavasena visuṃ katanti adhippāyo. Mahāpadānasuttaṭīkāyaṃ pana ‘‘aṅgapariccāgo, nayanapariccāgo, attapariccāgo, rajjapariccāgo, puttadārapariccāgoti ime pañca mahāpariccāgā. Tatthapi kāmaṃ aṅgapariccāgādayopi dānapāramīyeva. Tathāpi pariccāgavisesabhāvadassanatthañceva sudukkarabhāvadassanatthañca mahāpariccāgānaṃ visuṃ gahaṇaṃ. Tatoyeva ca aṅgapariccāgatopi visuṃ nayanapariccāgaggahaṇaṃ. Pariccāgabhāvasāmaññepi rajjapariccāga puttadārapariccāgaggahaṇaṃ kata’’nti vuttaṃ. Taṃ dukkaraṃ. Idaṃ pana karanti etassa kammapadaṃ. Karanti karontaṃ, karotīti karo, buddho. Taṃ.
“已越有海者”此处应分解为“有海已越”与“最上”。“已越有海”是指已超越称为有的大海,即欲有、色有、无色有之海。“有”即众生所存之处。“海”指水。有水之处称为海,即海洋。称为有的海即“有海”,是大海。如同大海充满众多波涛汹涌等怖畏,三种有也充满众多生、老、死等苦的怖畏,因此称为“有海”。已超越、已渡越它,即“已越有海者”,指佛陀。因为在深邃的大水体、大海洋中,水流相续不断;而在称为三有的轮回中,结生与死亡相续不断,但佛陀在菩提树下,以阿罗汉道智无余地摧毁了导致再生的千五百烦恼,故于三有中再无后有。因此,称扬佛陀为“已越有海者”是恰当的,这是所说之义。那个已越有海者。显示巴利原文
Bhavaṇṇavātikkamamaggatanti ettha bhavaaṇṇavaatikkamaṃ aggatanti padacchedo. Bhavaṇṇavātikkamanti kāmarūpaarūpabhavasaṅkhatā aṇṇavā samuddato atikkantaṃ. Bhavanti sattā etthāti bhavo. Aṇṇo vuccati udakaṃ. Taṃ etasmiṃ atthīti aṇṇavā, samuddo. Bhavasaṅkhāto aṇṇavoti bhavaṇṇavā, mahāsamuddo. Bahūhi ūmivegādīhi bhayehi okiṇṇo viya tividhopi bhavo bahūhi jātijarāmaraṇādīhi dukkhabhayehi okiṇṇo hoti, tasmā bhavaṇṇavāti vuccati. Taṃ atikkamittha uttaritthāti bhavaṇṇavātikkamo, buddho. Tassa hi gambhīre mahāudakakkhandhe mahāsamudde udakaṃ abbocchinnaṃ pavattati sandatiiva tibhavasaṅkhate saṃsāre paṭisandhicutiyo abbocchinnaṃ nibbattakānaṃ diyaḍḍhasahassakilesānaṃ bodhimaṇḍe arahattamaggañāṇena asesaṃ viddhaṃsitattā tīsu bhavesu punabbhavo natthi. Tasmā buddhaṃ bhavaṇṇavātikkamanti abhitthavituṃ arahatīti vuttaṃ hoti. Taṃ bhavaṇṇavātikkamaṃ.
“最胜”是指于一切众生中为最上。此处“最胜”一词,见于起始、末端、部分、最上等义。正如其在“从今日起,已得活命之皈依”等句中,见于起始义。在“以指尖触碰那指尖”等句中,见于末端义。在“诸比丘,我允许按精舍部分或院落部分分配”等句中,见于部分义。在“我是世间最上者”等句中,见于最胜义。此处亦应作此义解。他走向、达到天与人中最上之状态,故为最胜者,即佛陀。以无与伦比、功德殊胜、无等等之义,名为最胜、最上者,这是词义。或者,因稀有出现、因是不可思议之人、因带来众多人之利益与安乐、因无第二、无伴侣等之故,世尊于世间名为最胜、最上者,这是词义。正如《增支部》所说:“诸比丘,凡一切众生,或无足、或二足、或四足、或多足,如来被宣告为其中最上者。”最胜的状态,即最胜性。而此“已去”是其业处。“已去”即已到达、已获得,这是词义。显示巴利原文
Aggatanti sabbasattānaṃ seṭṭhabhāvaṃ. Ayaṃ panettha aggasaddo ādikoṭikoṭṭhāsaseṭṭhesu dissati. Tathā hesa ajjatagge pāṇupetaṃ saraṇaṃ gatantiādīsu ādimhi dissati. Teneva aṅgulaggena taṃ aṅgulaggaṃ parāmaseyyātiādīsu koṭiyaṃ. Anujānāmi bhikkhave vihāraggena vā pariveṇaggena vā bhājetuntiādīsu koṭṭhāse. Aggo hamasmi lokassātiādīsu seṭṭhe. Svāyamidhapi soyeva daṭṭhabbo. Devamanussānaṃ seṭṭhabhāvaṃ ajati gacchatīti aggo, buddho. Asadisaṭṭhena guṇavisiṭṭhaṭṭhena asamasamaṭṭhena ca aggo seṭṭho nāmāti attho. Atha vā dullabhapātu bhāvato acchariyamanussabhāvato bahujanahitasukhāvahato adutiyaasahāyādibhāvato ca bhagavā loke aggo seṭṭho nāmāti attho. Vuttañhi aṅguttarapāḷiyaṃ ‘‘yāvatā bhikkhave sattā apadā vā dvipadā vā catuppadā vā bahuppadā vā, tathāgato tesaṃ aggamakkhāyatī’’ti. Aggassa bhāvo aggataṃ. Taṃ pana gatantietassa kammapadaṃ. Gatanti pattaṃ, pāpuṇantanti attho.
『三界之庇护者』者,即欲界、色界、无色界所构成之三界的皈依处。此处“界”字之义,前文已述。三界即三界。“庇护者”一词,依已派生与未派生分为两种。其中,未派生的“庇护者”词,依约定俗成,为皈依处之义。正如在注释书中所说:“约定之言为真实,乃世间共许之因。”三界之庇护者、皈依处,故为三界之庇护者,即佛陀。由于以遣除一切不幸为先导,以无余安乐之施设、以此为终极、为无上之修行成就,对包括天人在内之众生作究竟饶益,并具足无量、无与伦比之威力功德殊胜,故一切众生中最上之世尊,于无量世界中对无量众生,名为唯一皈依处,这是词义。显示巴利原文
Tilokanāthanti kāmarūpaarūpasaṅkhatānaṃ tiṇṇaṃ lokānaṃ paṭisaraṇaṃ. Ettha ca lokasaddassa attho heṭṭhā vuttoyeva. Tayo lokā tilokā. Nāthasaddo pana nipphannānipphannavasena duvidho hoti. Tattha anipphannanāthasaddo paṭisaraṇattho hoti saṅketavasena. Tathā hi vuttaṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘saṅketavacanaṃ saccaṃ, lokasammutikāraṇa’’nti. Tilokānaṃ nātho paṭisaraṇoti tilokanātho, buddho. Sabbānatthaparihāra pubbaṅgamāya niravasesahitasukhavidhānatapparāyaniratisayāya payogasampattiyā ca sadevamanussāya pajāya accantupakāritāya aparimitanirupamappabhāvaguṇavisesasamaṅgitāya ca sabbasattuttamo bhagavā aparimāṇāsu lokadhātūsu aparimāṇānaṃ sattānaṃ ekapaṭisaraṇo nāmāti attho.
已派生的“庇护者”一词,则运用在乞求、折磨、统治和祝愿这四种意义上。其中,依乞求义,“他乞求”故称庇护者,即佛陀。词根是√nāth,加后缀a。意思是,他也通过乞求的方式,劝导应受教化的众生行持对自己有益的事。或者,世尊曾说:“善哉,诸比丘!比丘应时时省察自身的成就。”等言语,出于悲悯而乞求众生行持种种有益之行,激励、劝导他们。因此称为庇护者,这是词义。依折磨义,“他折磨”应受教化者心中的烦恼,故称庇护者,即佛陀。意思是,通过说法摧毁应受教化者相续中的烦恼。依统治义,“他统治、主宰”故称庇护者。意思是,具足最上心自在的世尊,以法主宰、征服一切众生。依祝愿义,“他祝愿”故称庇护者。意思是,以慈心的力量,希求应受教化者的利益与安乐。三界的庇护者,即三界之庇护者,也就是佛陀。我敬礼那位三界的庇护者。显示巴利原文
Nipphannanāthasaddo pana yācane, upatāpe, issariye, āsīse cāti catūsvatthesu vattati. Tattha yācane nāthati yācatīti nātho, buddho. Nāthadhātu a. So pana veneyyasatte attano hitakaraṇe yācitvāpi niyojetīti attho. Atha vā bhagavā sādhu bhikkhave bhikkhu kālena kālaṃ attasampattiṃ paccavekkheyyātiādinā sattānaṃ taṃ taṃ hitapaṭipattiṃ yācitvāpi karuṇāya samussāhito te tattha niyojeti. Tasmā nātho nāmāti attho. Upatāpe nāthati veneyyagate kilese upatāpetīti nātho, buddho. Dhammadesanāya veneyyasantāne kilese viddhaṃsāpetīti attho. Issariye nāthati issariyati satteti nātho. Paramena pana cittissariyena samannāgato bhagavā sabbasatte dhammena isati abhibhavatīti attho. Āsīse pana nāthati āsīsatīti nātho. Veneyyānaṃ hitasukhaṃ mettāya navasena patthetīti attho. Tilokānaṃ nātho tilokanātho, buddho. Taṃ tilokanāthaṃ.
“善等持者”:因为对利得、不利得等世间法不动摇,而拥有殊胜之定的人。能让相应法平等、正确地安止于同一所缘的,称为定。sam前缀加√dhā词根加i后缀。美妙或殊胜的定,就是善等持。具有这种善等持的人,是善等持者,即佛陀。在“具有”的意义上,使用后缀to,就像“山”等词那样。dh变为h。正如须弥山王不被四方来的风吹动,世尊也具足不被利得、不利得等世间法以及邪说之风所动摇的定,这是词义。我敬礼那位善等持者。显示巴利原文
Susamāhitanti lābhālābhādilokadhammehi acala mānattā sundarasamādhivantaṃ. Saṃsamaṃ ādhiyati ekārammaṇe sampayuttadhamme ṭhapeti etenāti samādhi. Saṃpubba dhā dhātu i. Sundaro pasattho vā samādhi susamādhi. Taṃ assa atthīti susamāhito, buddho. Assathyatthe to. Pabbatotiādīsu viya. Dhassa ho. Catūhi disāhi āgatehi vātehi acalamāno mahāmerupabbato viya bhagavā lābhālābhādilokadhammehi ca micchāvāda vātehi ca acalamānena samādhinā samannāgatoti attho. Taṃ susamāhitaṃ.
所谓“利益”,即承载人、天、梵天等一切众生之所需。随顺其因而现起的,便是利益,即所需之义。“hi”词根表“行”,加ta构成。承载此所需者,称为“利益者”,即佛陀。此为持业释复合词。本应说“持利益者”,为随顺韵律,省略后分而说为“利益”,如同“扫帚”“灯”等语。又或,能伤害苦故,名为利益。“hiṃs”词根表“伤害”,加ta后缀。如同病人的药被称为对病人有利益,同样,由于能灭苦,故名为利益。又或,能施设安乐故,名为利益。“dhā”词根表“持”,加ta构成。正如血肉等界所增长的味处被称为对某人有利益,同样,由于带来安乐,故称为利益。承载此所需者,为利益者,即佛陀。这便是说:他通过说法,为堪受教化者除去痛苦、令智慧成熟之后,承载着世间与出世间的利益与安乐。致敬彼利益者。显示巴利原文
Hitanti manussadevabrahmasaṅkhātānaṃ sabbasattānaṃ payojana dhārentaṃ. Kāraṇānurūpaṃ hinoti pavattatīti hitaṃ, payojanaṃ. Hidhātu gatiyaṃ ta. Taṃ dhāretīti hito, buddho. Kitanta samāsoyaṃ. Hitadharanti vattabbe chandānurakkhaṇatthāya uttara padalopena hitanti vattabbaṃ. Yathā samajjanī padīpoti. Atha vā dukkhaṃ hiṃsatīti hitaṃ. Hiṃsadhātu hiṃsāyaṃ tapaccayo. Yathā ca byādhiyā osamaṃ rogīnaṃ hitanti vuccati, evaṃ dukkhahananato hitaṃ nāma hoti. Sukhaṃ vidadhātīti vā hitaṃ. Dhādhātu dhāraṇe ta. Yathā ca rudhiramaṃsādi dhātu vaḍḍhanaṃ rasāyatanaṃ kissānaṃ hitanti vuccati, evaṃ sukhavahanato hitanti vuccati. Payojanaṃ taṃ dhāretīti hito, buddho. So pana dhammadesanāya veneyyajanānaṃ dukkhāpanayanampi ñāṇaparipācanampi katvā lokiyalokuttarahitasukhaṃ dhāretīti vuttaṃ hoti. Taṃ hitaṃ.
所谓“遍眼”,此处眼有五种:佛眼、法眼、智眼、遍眼、天眼。其中,“诸比丘,我以佛眼观察世间”——此为佛眼。“离尘离垢之法眼”——此为下分道所摄的法眼。“眼生起”——此为智眼。“遍眼即一切知智”——此为遍眼。“诸比丘,我以清净天眼观见”——此为天眼。此处所取的是遍眼。其义为:于一切方面照见一切所知法,即具足一切知智。此处释词:从一切方面观见一切所知法,故称遍眼,即一切知智。词根为“cakkh”(见)。因此,《大义释》中说:“遍眼即一切知智。”具有此遍眼者,为遍眼者,即佛陀。此义在《无碍解道》中已宣说:显示巴利原文
Samantacakkhunti ettha cakkhu nāma buddhacakkhu, dhammacakkhu, ñāṇa cakkhu, samantacakkhu, dibbacakkhūti pañcavidhaṃ hoti. Tattha addasaṃ kho ahaṃ bhikkhave buddhacakkhunā lokaṃ volokentoti idaṃ buddhacakkhu nāma. Virajaṃ vītamalaṃ dhammacakkhunti idaṃ heṭṭhimamaggatta yasaṅkhātaṃ dhammacakkhu nāma. Cakkhuṃ udapādīti idaṃ ñāṇacakkhu nāma. Samantacakkhu vuccati sabbaññutañāṇanti idaṃ samantacakkhu nāma. Addasaṃ kho ahaṃ bhikkhave dibbena cakkhunā visuddhenāti idaṃ dibbacakkhu nāma. Idha pana samantacakkhu adhippetaṃ. Parisamantato sabbañeyyadhammaṃ passantaṃ sabbaññutañāṇavantanti attho. Ayaṃ panettha vacanattho. Samantato sabbañeyyadhammaṃ cakkhati passatīti samantacakkhu, sabbaññutañāṇaṃ. Cakkhadhātu u. Tena vuttaṃ mahāniddesapāḷiyaṃ ‘‘samantacakkhu vuccati sabbaññutañāṇa’’nti. Samantacakkhu assa atthīti samantacakkhu, buddho. Vuttañhetaṃ paṭisambhidāmagge –
于此,无有任何他所未见之物,
无有未了知、不可了知者;
一切应知之法,如来皆已遍知,
如来因此,名为遍眼者。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Na tassa addiṭṭhamidhatthi kiñci, Atho aviññātamajānitabbaṃ; Sabbaṃ abhiññāsi yadatthi neyyaṃ, Tathāgato tena samantacakkhū’’ti.
其义为:对于那位如来,在此世间,没有任何法类是他未见、未观照的;同样,也没有任何法类是他未了知、未通达、未明了的,或是他不必了知的。凡是应知、当知的法类,如来皆已以胜智遍知、彻底通达。因此,如来被称为“遍眼”。我礼敬那位遍眼。显示巴利原文
Tassattho. Tassa tathāgatassa addiṭṭhaṃ apassantaṃ kiñci dhammajātaṃ idhaloke na atthi. Atho aviññātaṃ aviditaṃ apākaṭaṃ vā ajānitabbaṃ dhammajātaṃ na atthi. Neyyaṃ ñātabbaṃ yaṃ dhammajātaṃ atthi. Sabbaṃ taṃ dhammajātaṃ tathāgato abhiññāsi paṭivijjhi. Tena tasmā tathāgato samantacakkhu nāmāti. Taṃ samantacakkhuṃ.
“我礼敬彼无量者”一句,应分解为“我礼敬彼无量者”。其关联为:我礼敬那位无量的佛陀。其中,“无量”指以智慧不可测量、不可限量的,或具足戒、定、慧等功德者。或者,以智慧不可限量的戒等功德,称为“无量”。“ma”字根有计量之义。拥有此无量功德者,即是“无量者”,即佛陀。譬如在大海中,水的分量难以计算,不能说有这么多桶水、这么多百桶水、这么多千桶水或这么多十万桶水,而只能以“不可计数、不可测量的大水聚”来称说。同样,佛陀的戒等功德分量也难以计算,不能说有这么多戒德、这么多定德、这么多慧德等,而只能以“不可计数、不可测量的大功德聚”来称说。因此,在《譬喻经》中说:显示巴利原文
Paṇamāmi taṃmitanti ettha paṇamāmi taṃ amitanti padacchedo. Amitaṃ taṃ buddhaṃ ahaṃ paṇamāmīti sambandho. Tattha amitanti aparimeyyaṃ ñāṇena aparicchinnaṃ vā, sīlasamādhi paññādiguṇavantaṃ. Amitabbaṃ ñāṇena aparicchinditabbanti vā amitaṃ, sīlādiguṇaṃ. Napubba mādhātu parimāṇe ta. Taṃ assa atthīti amito, buddho. Yathā hi mahāsamudde na sukaraṃ udakassa pamāṇaṃ gaṇetuṃ ettakāni udakāḷhakānīti vā, ettakāni udakāḷhakasatānīti vā, ettakāni udakāḷhakasahassānīti vā, ettakāni udakāḷhakasatasahassānīti vāti. Atha kho asaṅkhyeyyo appameyyo mahāudakakkhandhotveva saṅkhyaṃ gacchati, evameva buddhassa na sukaraṃ sīlādiguṇassa pamāṇaṃ gaṇetuṃ ettakaṃ sīlaguṇaṃ, ettako samādhiguṇo, ettakā paññāguṇātiādināti. Atha kho asaṅkhyeyyo appameyyo mahāguṇakkhandhotveva saṅkhyaṃ gacchati. Tenavuttaṃ apadānapāḷiyaṃ –
即使佛陀也会称叹佛陀的功德相,
纵使另行宣说一劫之久,
那漫长的劫数也会穷尽,
如来德相却无穷尽。」等。
大牟尼因其功德,具有不可计量的名称;
纵使从千名之中,我亦唯以功德称扬其名。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Buddhopi buddhassa bhaṇeyya vaṇṇaṃ, Kappampi ce aññamabhāsamāno; Khīyetha kappo ciradīghamantare, Vaṇṇo na khīyetha tathāgatāna’’nti ca. ‘‘Asaṅkhyeyyāni nāmāni, saguṇena mahesino; Guṇena nāmamuddheyyaṃ, api nāmasahassato’’ti ca.
因此,他称叹佛陀为“无量者”。显示巴利原文
Tena buddhaṃ amitanti thometīti.
此处略释其义:那位佛陀是悲悯的居处,是大悲与慈爱的依止;于一切处、一切生中,行持难行、应以艰苦成就的五大舍离等业;已超越有海,即度过名为三有的轮回海;达到最胜位,即获得一切众生中的最上地位;是三界之主,即欲界、色界、无色界所摄三界的皈依处;是善定者,即拥有殊妙的三昧;是利乐者,即执持一切众生世间与出世间的义利;是遍眼,即从一切方面观见一切所知法,具足一切知智;是无量者,即拥有不可称量的戒等功德。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepayojanā. Dayālayaṃ mahākaruṇāya mettāya ādhāraṃ. Sabbadhi sabbasmiṃ attabhāve, dukkaraṃ dukkhena karitabbaṃ pañcamahāpariccāgādikammaṃ karaṃ karontaṃ, bhavaṇṇavātikkamaṃ tibhavasaṅkhātasamuddato atikkantaṃ, aggataṃ sabbasattānaṃ seṭṭhabhāvaṃ, gataṃ pattaṃ, tilokanāthaṃ kāmarūpa arūpasaṅkhātassa tilokassa paṭisaraṇaṃ, susamāhitaṃ sundara samādhivantaṃ, hitaṃ sabbasattānaṃ lokiyalokuttarasaṅkhātaṃ atthadhāraṇaṃ, samantacakkhuṃ parisamantato sabbañeyyadhammaṃ passantaṃ sabbaññutañāṇavantaṃ, amitaṃ aparimeyyaṃ sīlādiguṇavantaṃ, taṃ buddhaṃ ahaṃ paṇamāmi vandāmīti.
于各处累积波罗蜜聚,
已到达诸贤者所证的安乐境界;
成为人与天人的安乐之源,
我礼敬那无骄慢的胜者牛王。
显示巴利原文 Tahiṃ tahiṃ pāramisañcayaṃ cayaṃ, Gataṃ gataṃ sabbhi sukhappadaṃ padaṃ; Narānarānaṃ sukhasambhavaṃ bhavaṃ, Namānamānaṃ jinapuṅgavaṃ gavaṃ.
9 第九节。如此以第八偈礼敬佛陀后,为以“积累波罗蜜之聚”等五种功德称叹而礼敬,他宣说了“于各处积累波罗蜜之聚”等偈颂。此偈由“jata”与“jara”等音节组合而成,有十二音节,句首句尾皆为双声,应视为“Vaṃsaṭṭha”偈。如《Vuttodaya》中所说:“他们称此Vaṃsaṭṭha偈具有jata和jara。”其义如前已述。显示巴利原文
9. Evaṃ aṭṭhamagāthāya buddhaṃ vanditvā idāni pāramisañcayaṃ cayantyādīhi pañcahi guṇehi thomitvā vanditukāmo tahiṃ tahiṃ pāramisañcayaṃcayantyādigāthamāha. Ayaṃ pana jatajara gaṇehi yuttattā dvādasakkharehi lakkhitā sabbapādādyantayamakā vaṃsaṭṭhagāthāti daṭṭhabbā. Vuttañhi vuttodaye ‘‘vadanti vaṃsaṭṭhamidaṃ jatā jarā’’ti. Tassattho heṭṭhā vuttoyeva.
其中,“于各处”指在各个生中或各个自体存在中,即从发愿成就最胜佛陀开始,于那些生命形态或自体存在之中。“波罗蜜之聚”指布施等波罗蜜的集合。在此,波罗蜜有十种,即:布施、持戒、出离、智慧、精进、忍辱、真实、决意、慈、舍。正如《佛种姓》中所说:显示巴利原文
Tattha tahiṃ tahinti tasmiṃ tasmiṃ bhave attabhāve vā, buddhavaraṃ paṇidhānato paṭṭhāya tesu tesu bhavesu attabhāvesu vāti attho. Pāramisañcayanti dānādipā ramīnaṃ samūhaṃ. Ettha ca pāramī nāma dānasīlanekkhammapaññā vīriya khantisaccaadhiṭṭhānamettāupekkhāvasena dasavidhā hoti. Vuttañca buddhavaṃse –
布施、持戒与出离,智慧、精进为第五,
忍辱、真实与决意,慈、舍,此即十种。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Dānaṃ sīlañca nekkhammaṃ, paññā vīriyena pañcamaṃ; Khantisaccamadhiṭṭhānaṃ, mettupekkhāti te dasā’’ti.
以下解释“波罗蜜”一词的语义。由于具足布施、持戒等功德之殊胜结合,成为众生中的最上者,故大菩萨是“最上者”。此最上者的状态或业,即是波罗蜜,亦即布施等行为本身。在表示“所属状态或业”的派生词中,加ṇa后缀,并加表示阴性词性的ī后缀。又或,圆满布施等者,即是“最上者”;菩萨是布施等功德的圆满者与守护者,此由“pūra”字根加ama后缀构成。又或,以功德殊胜之结合,将其他众生系缚于己者,是“最上者”,即菩萨。前分“para”(最上)加“mav”字根(系缚义)加kvi后缀。又或,超越地净化烦恼垢染者,是“最上者”。前分“para”(超越义)加“majj”字根(清净义)加kvi后缀。“para”有超越义。又或,殊胜地趋向最胜涅槃者,是“最上者”。前分“para”(最胜义)加“may”字根(行义)加kvi后缀,字根末音省略。“para”有最胜义。又或,以成为量的智殊胜,如同观见现世一般,了知他世、限定他世者,是“最上者”。前分“para”加“mun”字根(限定义)加kvi后缀。又或,如同将戒等功德……显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ pana pāramīsaddassa vacanattho. Dānasīlādiguṇa visesayogena sattuttamatāya mahābodhisatto paramo. Tassa ayaṃ bhāvo kammanti vā pāramī, dānādi kriyāva labbhati. Santakabhāvakammataddhite ṇapaccayo. Itthiliṅgajotaka īpaccayo ca. Atha vā dānādīni pūretīti paramo. Dānādiguṇānaṃ pūrako pālako ca bodhisatto. Pūradhātu amapaccayo. Pare satte mavati attani bandhati guṇavisesayogenāti vā paramo, bodhisatto. Parasaddūpapada mudhātu bandhane kvi. Paraṃ atirekaṃ majjati kilesamalatoti vā paramo. Parasaddūpa pada majjadhātu saṃsuddhiyaṃ kvi. Parasaddo atirekattho. Paraṃ seṭṭhaṃ nibbānaṃ visesena mayati gacchatīti vā paramo. Parasaddūpapada mayadhātu gatiyaṃ kvi. Dhātvantalopo. Para saddo seṭṭhattho. Paraṃ lokaṃ pamāṇabhūtena ñāṇa visesena idhalokamiva munāti paricchindatīti vā paramo. Parasaddūpa pada munadhātu paricchindane kvi. Paraṃ ati viya sīlādiguṇagaṇaṃ attano santāne minoti pakkhipatīti vā paramo. Parasaddūpapada midhātu pakkhipane kvi. Parasaddo atirekavācako. Paraṃ attabhūtadhammakāyato aññaṃ paṭipakkhaṃ vā tadanatthakaraṃ kilesacoragaṇaṃ mināti hiṃsatīti vā paramo, mahābodhisatto. Parasaddūpapada midhātu hiṃsāyaṃ kvi. Parasaddo aññavācako, paṭipakkhavācako vā. Paramassa ayantiādinā vuttanayena pāramīti. Api ca pāre nibbāne majjati sujjhatīti pāramī, mahābodhi satto. Suddhakattusādhanoyaṃ. Pārasaddūpapada majadhātu saṃsuddhiyaṃ kvi. Ī ca. Pāre nibbāne satte majjati sodhetīti vā pāramī, hetukattusādhanoyaṃ.
令众生系缚、结合、连接于般涅槃,故名波罗蜜。抵达彼岸涅槃,并令众生抵达,故名波罗蜜。如实了知、决断彼岸涅槃,故名波罗蜜。于彼岸涅槃中,投入、安置众生,故名波罗蜜。“midhātu”有投入之义,加“ī”后缀。于彼岸涅槃中,伤害众生,故名波罗蜜,此指大菩萨。此状态或业,即布施等行为,称为波罗蜜。依此所说之理,当知波罗蜜一词之词义。波罗蜜一词的语源虽已略说,但为令听者善巧于语源之理,故详说如上,应作是观。显示巴利原文
Pārenibbāne satte mavati bandhati yojetīti vā pāramī. Pāraṃ nibbānaṃ mayati gacchati satte ca māyeti gameti vā pāramī. Pāraṃ nibbānaṃ yāthāvato munāti paricchindatīti vā pāramī. Pāre nibbāne satte minoti pakkhipatīti vā pāramī. Midhātu pakkhipane ī. Pāre nibbāne sattānaṃ mināti hiṃsatīti vā pāramī, mahābodhisatto. Tassa ayaṃ bhāvo kammanti dānādikriyā pāramīti. Iminā vuttanayena pāramīsaddassa vacanattho veditabbo. Kiñcāpi pana pāramīsaddassa nibbacanaṃ saṅkhepena vuttaṃ. Sotūnaṃ pana niruttinayakosallatthaṃ vitthārena vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
然而,波罗蜜有三种:十波罗蜜、十近波罗蜜、十最上义波罗蜜。其中,舍弃有识与无识之财而圆满的菩提资粮,名为十波罗蜜。舍弃手、足、耳、鼻等肢节而圆满的菩提资粮,名为十近波罗蜜。舍弃命根而圆满的菩提资粮,名为十最上义波罗蜜。而布施等波罗蜜之义,应依《行藏注疏》等了知。以部分摄集之义,而积聚、进行、转起,故称“sañcayo”(积聚)。“saṃ”前缀加“ci”字根(行义),加“ṇa”后缀。或积聚部分,故为“sañcayo”,即集合。波罗蜜之积聚、集合,故名“pāramisañcayo”(波罗蜜积聚),亦即波罗蜜的积聚。而彼“cayaṃ”(积聚)是此“cayanti”(积聚的行为)的业。“cayanti”即已累积、已圆满之义。由“cayati”(积聚)或“ciyittha”(已积聚)而得名“cayo”(积聚),指佛陀。“ci”字根(累积义)加“ṇa”后缀。彼即“cayaṃ”(积聚)。一切具足,故成关联。显示巴利原文
Sā pana dasapāramī, dasaupapāramī, dasaparamatthapāramī cāti tividhā hoti. Tattha saviññāṇāviññāṇakaṃ dhanaṃ pariccāgaṃ katvā pūritā bodhisambhārā dasapāramiyo nāma. Hattha pāda kaṇṇa nāsādiaṅgapaccaṅgapariccāgaṃ katvā pūritā bodhisambhārā dasaupapāramiyo nāma. Jīvitindriyapariccāgaṃ katvā pūritā bodhisambhārā dasa paramatthapāramiyo nāmāti. Dānādipāramīnaṃ pana attho cariyapiṭakaaṭṭhakathādīsu gahetabbo. Avayavaṃ saṅgahavasena cayati gacchati pavattatīti sañcayo, saṃpubba cidhātu gatiyaṃ ṇa. Sañcinoti avayavanti vā sañcayo, samūho. Pāramīnaṃ sañcayo samūhoti pāramisañcayo, taṃ pāramisañcayaṃ. Taṃ pana cayanti etassa kammaṃ. Cayanti upacitaṃ, parisambhūtanti attho. Cayati upacinātīti cayo, ciyittha upaciyitthāti vā cayo, buddho. Cidhātu upacaye ṇa. Taṃ cayaṃ. Sabbhigatanti sambandho.
此中,‘sabbhi’意为与善士、具善者同在。令贪等烦恼寂止、平息,故为‘santā’(寂静者),即善士。词根‘sam’有止息之义,加后缀‘anta’。当应说‘santehi’时,依‘smāhismiṃnaṃ mhā bhimhi’之经句,将‘hi’语尾变为‘bhi’;依‘santasaddassa so bhe bo ca’之经句,于‘bha’字前将‘santa’词变为‘sa’,并在末尾增置‘ba’字,故成‘sabbhi’。意为与他们善士一起。而‘taṃ gataṃ’(彼应往)是未说之词。‘gataṃ’意为应被亲近。因为诸天、人前往、接近、亲近彼,故说为‘gato’(已往)。彼佛陀具足戒等无量功德,被希求义利的善士、诸天、人视为‘皈依处’而应受敬奉,此义已说。故为‘gataṃ’。‘sukhappadaṃ padaṃ gataṃ’(乐处、处、往)相关联。其中,‘sukhappadaṃ’(乐处)是究竟乐的安立处。‘sukhanaṃ’为乐,彼乐于此中生起、安住,故为‘sukhap’显示巴利原文
Tattha sabbhīti santehi sappurisehi. Rāgādikilese samenti upasamentīti santā, sappurisā. Samudhātu upasameta, antapaccayo vā. Santehīti vattabbe smāhismiṃnaṃ mhā bhimhivāti suttena hivibhattiyā bhikāraṃ santasaddassa so bhe bo canteti suttena bhakāre pare santasaddassa sakāraṃ katvā ante ca bakārāgamaṃ katvā sabbhīti vuttaṃ. Tehi sabbhi. Taṃ pana gatanti etassa avuttakattā. Gatanti upagamitabbaṃ. Tañhi devamanussehi gamiyati upagamiyati upasaṅkamiyatīti gatoti vuccati. Taṃ buddhaṃ atthakāmehi sappurisehi devamanussehi sīlādianantaguṇikattā saraṇanti abhimānā payirupāsitabboti vuttaṃ hoti. Taṃ gataṃ. Sukhappadaṃ padaṃ gatanti sambandho. Tattha sukhappadanti accantasukhassa patiṭṭhānabhūtaṃ. Sukhanaṃ sukhaṃ, tassa pajjati tiṭṭhati etthāti sukhappadaṃ, nibbānaṃ. Padanti nibbānaṃ. Tañhi buddhādīhi ariyehi pajjiyati gamiyatīti padanti vuccati. Gatanti agaminti gato, buddho. Dukkhādiasammissassa ekantasukhassa patiṭṭhānabhūtaṃ nibbānaṃ ārammaṇakaraṇavasena apāpuṇinti vuttaṃ hoti. Taṃ gataṃ.
‘narānarānaṃ’应作‘naraanarānaṃ’而分解。其义为人与天。能引导至出家等最胜状态故为‘naro’(人);或被自业所引导故为‘naro’,即人、众生。‘nara’字根(引导义)加‘a’后缀。非人者为‘anaro’(非人),即天。人与非人合为‘narānaro’,他们的(复数属格)是‘narānarānaṃ’。此词又与‘sukhasambhavaṃ’(乐之因)相关联。显示巴利原文
Narānarānanti naraanarānanti padacchedo. Manussadevānanti attho. Pabbajjādiseṭṭhabhāvaṃ narati netīti naro, narīyati sakena kammena niyatīti vā naro, manusso, satto vā. Naradhātu nayane a. Na naro anaro, devo. Naro ca anaro ca narānaro, tesaṃ narānarānaṃ. Taṃ pana sukhasambhavanti pade sambandho.
‘sukhasambhavaṃ’(乐之因),是世间与出世间乐的因。或指能获得三种乐的生起因之福。令得快乐,故为‘sukhaṃ’(乐),即三种乐。令彼快乐生起者,使其快乐,此是词义。又或,善断苦故为‘sukhaṃ’。‘su’前缀加‘khan’字根(断义)加‘a’后缀。依此福,名为乐的果报得以生起,故为‘sambhavaṃ’(生起因),即造福业。‘saṃ’前缀加‘bhū’字根(有义)加‘ṇa’后缀。乐之生起因即‘sukhasambhavaṃ’。而此在‘bhavaṃ’(令有)一词中作业格。‘bhavaṃ’意为令生起。令彼乐之因修习、生起故为‘bhavo’(令有者),即指佛陀。故称‘bhavaṃ’。因为世尊以大悲为先行的说法,使诸天、人修习布施、持戒、修行等福——即世间与出世间乐的生起因,所以应知这是赞叹世尊为‘人与非人之乐之因的令有者’。显示巴利原文
Sukhasambhavanti lokiyalokuttarasukhassa kāraṇaṃ. Tividhasukhassa labhanakāraṇabhūtaṃ puññaṃ vā. Sukhayatīti sukhaṃ. Tividhasukhaṃ. Yassa uppajjati, taṃ sukhitaṃ karotīti attho. Atha vā suṭṭhu dukkhaṃ khanatīti sukhaṃ. Supubbakhanudhātu avadhāraṇe a. Sambhavati sukhasaṅkhātaṃ phalaṃ anena puññenāti sambhavaṃ, puññakaraṇaṃ. Saṃpubbabhūdhātu sattāyaṃṇa. Sukhassa sambhavaṃ sukhasambhavaṃ, taṃ pana bhavantipade kammaṃ. Bhavanti nibbattentaṃ. Taṃ sukhasambhavaṃ bhāveti nibbattetīti bhavo, buddho. Taṃ bhavaṃ. So hi mahākaruṇāpubbaṅgamāya dhammadesanāya devamanussānaṃ lokiyalokuttarasukhassa labhanakāraṇabhūtaṃ dānasīlabhāvanāsaṅkhātaṃ puññaṃ kāreti, tasmā bhagavato narānarānaṃ sukhasambhavaṃ bhavanti thometīti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
“namānamānaṃ”一词,应拆分为“name anamānaṃ”。“name”意为“我礼敬”,此处应知,语尾“mi”变为“e”。“anamānaṃ”意为不礼敬者、不恭敬者。它是“gavaṃ”的修饰语。“gavaṃ”指如牛般的愚人,为第六格复数名词。由此,“namaṃ”依“patimhālutte ca samāse”规则,借“ca”字之摄,将“naṃ”变为“aṃ”,并将“go”的“o”变为“a”,如此完成构词,应知。行走者,故称“gāvo”(牛),即牛;如同牛者,亦称“gāvo”(牛),故愚人的复数属格为“gavaṃ”。而在“jinapuṅgavaṃ”一词中,此为第六格业。“jinapuṅgavaṃ”意为最胜的征服者、最上人——佛陀,我礼敬,此为关联。此处,“puṅgava”一词在持业释复合词中表示最胜之义,如“munipuṅgava”(牟尼牛)等。又于《阿摩罗笈多》中说:显示巴利原文
Namānamānanti padassa name anamānanti padacchedo. Nameti ahaṃ namāmīti attho. Ettha ca mivibhattiyā ekārādesoti veditabbo. Anamānanti anamentānaṃ avandantānaṃ anādarānanti attho. Taṃ pana gavantietassa visesanaṃ. Gavanti goṇasadisānaṃ bālānaṃ. Gavanti hi chaṭṭhībahuvacanantanāmapadaṃ. Tato namaṃ patimhālutte ca samāseti sutte samabhiniviṭṭhena caggahaṇena naṃvacanassa aṃ ādesañca goiccetassa okārassa avādesaṃ katvā rūpasiddhi veditabbā. Gacchantīti gāvo, goṇā. Gāvo viyāti gāvo, tesaṃ gavaṃ bālānaṃ. Taṃ pana jinapuṅgavantipade chaṭṭhīkammaṃ. Jinapuṅgavanti jayantapurisuttamaṃ buddhaṃ name namāmīti sambandho. Ettha ca puṅgava saddo kammadhārayasamāse seṭṭhatthavācako. Munipuṅgavotiādīsu viya. Vuttañca amarakose –
于后一词中,有虎、贤士、牛与象;
狮、虎、龙等,用于男性,表示最胜之义。”
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Uttarasmiṃ pade byaggha, puṅgavosabhakuñjarā; Sīhasaddūlanāgādyā, pume seṭṭhatthagocarā’’ti.
释义如下:在持业释复合词中,处于后分的“虎-贤士”“牛-象”等词,以及“狮-蛇-龙”等词,其阳性形式表示“最胜”之义。此处,对于不知、不敬而持异见的愚痴者,犹如降伏牛只,佛陀以佛德征服他们,故为“胜者”。向上达到卓越或首要的状态,故为“贤士”。前缀“pu”与词根“gam”(去)结合,在“去”义中无格变化,鼻音化后成为“gamo”。该词的“ka”尾与元音尾依“yadādi”规则省略,应知如此构成。“胜者”与“贤士”结合即“胜贤士”,即指佛陀。对于不知、不敬、不尊、不拜佛陀不可测量的戒等诸德而持异见的愚痴者,犹如驯牛一般,世尊以无师自通的波罗蜜福德威神力征服他们,故有此称。此即“胜贤士”。显示巴利原文
Tassattho. Kammadhārayasamāse uttarapade vattamānā byagghapuṅgavosabhakuñjarā byagghapuṅgavausabhakuñjarasaddā ca sīha saddūlanāgādyā sīha saddūla nāgāsaddā ca pume seṭṭhattha vācakāti. Ayaṃ panettha vacanattho. Go viya buddhaguṇe ajānante anamante aññadiṭṭhike bāle jināti ajinīti vā jino. Pakaṭṭhabhāvaṃ padhānabhāvaṃ vā uddhaṃ gacchatīti puṅgavo. Paupubba gamudhātu gatiyaṃ avapaccayo. Niggahitā gamo. Tassa kavaggantaṃ dhātvantalopañca yadādinā katvā rūpasiddhi veditabbā. Jino ca so puṅgavo cāti jinapuṅgavo, buddho. So pana gunnaṃ viya buddhānaṃ sīlādike appameyyaguṇe ajānantānaṃ anamantānaṃ agāravantānaṃ avandantānaṃ añña diṭṭhigatikānaṃ bālānaṃ asatthena pāramīpuññatejena ajinīti vuttaṃ hoti. Taṃ jinapuṅgavanti.
此处略释:于各处、各生有或自体,布施等波罗蜜的积聚为“波罗蜜聚”;积集、累积、圆满为“聚”;善士、正士为“善士”;应前往、应亲近、应敬奉为“已至”;究竟乐的安立处为“乐基”;涅槃为“至”;人与非人(天、人)为“人”;世间与出世间乐之因、三种乐获得之因或生有之福为“乐生”。对于不敬、不尊、不重、不拜、如牛般的愚人,我礼敬此胜贤士、胜者、最上人、佛陀。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepayojanā. Tahiṃ tahiṃ tasmiṃ tasmiṃ bhave, attabhāve vā, pāramisañcayaṃ dānādipāramīnaṃ samūhaṃ, cayaṃ upacitaṃ parisambhūtaṃ, sabbhi santehi sappurisehi, gataṃ upagamitabbaṃ payirupāsitabbaṃ, sukhappadaṃ accantasukhassa patiṭṭhāna bhūtaṃ, padaṃ nibbānaṃ gataṃ pattaṃ agamiṃ, narānarānaṃ manussadevānaṃ, sukhasambhavaṃ lokiyalokuttarasukhassa kāraṇaṃ tividha sukhassa labhanakāraṇabhūtaṃ puññaṃ vā bhavaṃ nibbattentaṃ, anamānaṃ anamantānaṃ anādarānaṃ avandantānaṃ vā, gavaṃ goṇasadisānaṃ bālānaṃ jinapuṅgavaṃ jayantapurisuttamaṃ buddhaṃ ahaṃ name namāmīti.
以精进与智,为能摄受者;
若人乘此,渡越众多有海,
彼渡脱众生,我礼敬破魔之佛陀。
显示巴利原文 Maggaṅganāvaṃ munidakkhanāviko, Īhāphiyaṃ ñāṇakarena gāhako; Āruyha yo tāya bahū bhavaṇṇavā, Tāresi taṃ buddhamaghappahaṃ name.
10 10. 这样,以第九偈礼敬佛陀后,现在为了通过称赞佛陀度脱众多众生脱离三有轮回海的功德,以及止息众生痛苦的功德来礼敬佛陀,故说“如正道之船”等偈颂。而此偈是由ja与ra音步组合而成,应知为由十二音节组成的因陀罗族偈。正如《偈颂明》中所说:“凡有ja与ra之处,即是因陀罗族偈。”显示巴利原文
10. Evaṃ navamagāthāya buddhaṃ natvā idāni bahū satte tibhavasaṅkhātā saṃsārasamuddato tārentena guṇena ca sattānaṃ dukkhappahānena guṇena ca thomitvā buddhaṃ vanditu kāmo maggaṅganāvantyādigāthamāha. Ayaṃ pana tata jara gaṇehi racitattā dvādasakkharehi yuttā indavaṃsa gāthāti daṭṭhabbā. Vuttañhi vuttodaye ‘‘sāyindavaṃsā khalu yattha tā jarā’’ti.
其含义是:在某一偈颂中,如果同时存在那两个ja音步和ra音步,那么该偈必定称为因陀罗族偈。显示巴利原文
Tassattho. Yattha yassaṃ gāthāyaṃ tā tagaṇadvayañca jarā jagaṇa ragaṇā ca ce siyuṃ, sā gāthā khalu ekantaṃ indavaṃsagāthā nāmāti.
此处“yo munidakkhanāviko”是关联词。意思是:那位称为佛陀者,即是善巧的船长。其中,“牟尼”:因为了知两端世间,故称牟尼,即世尊。词根mun表“知”义,加i词缀。或者,mona意为一切智智,因为拥有它,所以是牟尼,即世尊。i词缀在此表“有”的含义。正如《小部·一集》中《花纹本生》注释所说:“牟尼的意思是智。又因具备身牟尼等,人们称他为牟尼。其中有:在家牟尼、出家牟尼、有学牟尼、无学牟尼、辟支牟尼、牟尼之牟尼等许多种。在家牟尼,指证得果位、了知教法的在家者;出家牟尼,指同样如此的出家者;有学牟尼,指七种有学圣者;无学牟尼,指漏尽者;辟支牟尼,指独觉佛;牟尼之牟尼,指正自觉者。”此处则是指“牟尼之牟尼”。显示巴利原文
Tattha yo munidakkhanāvikoti sambandho. Yo buddha saṅkhāto cheko nāvājeṭṭhakoti attho. Tattha munīti ubho loke munāti jānātīti muni, bhagavā. Munadhātu ñāṇe i. Atha vā monaṃ vuccati sabbaññutañāṇaṃ, taṃ assa atthīti muni, bhagavā. Assathyatthe ipaccayo. Vuttañhi ekanipāte vaṇṇapathajātakaṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘munīti monaṃ vuccati ñāṇaṃ. Kāya moneyyādīsu vā aññatarena samannāgatattā puggalo munīti vuccati. So panesa agāriyamuni, anagāriyamuni, sekkhamuni, asekkhamuni, paccekamuni, munimunīti anekavidho. Tattha agāriyamunīti gihi āgataphalo viññātasāsano. Anagāriyamunīti tathārūpova pabbajito. Sekkhamunīti sattasekkhā. Asekkhamunīti khīṇāsavo. Paccekamunīti paccekasambuddho. Munimunīti sammāsambuddho’’ti. Idha pana munimuni adhippeto.
“Dakkho”意为善巧。于渡海中善巧、得达故为“dakkho”,即舵手。“dakkh”词根取“去”义,加“a”词缀。或谓于善巧业及其他应作不应作之事,不迟滞、速达故为“dakkho”,即一切善巧者。“dakkh”词根取“速”义,加“a”词缀。“如善巧者”故为“dakkho”,指佛陀。依深义,佛陀以智了知、简别,拔济众生出离轮回海,故称“dakkho”。“Nāviko”:以船渡海达彼岸故为“nāviko”,即船长。“tara”词根加“taddhita”后缀“ṇiko”。“如舵手”故为“nāviko”,指佛陀。依深义,佛陀以八正道之船渡至涅槃彼岸,故称“nāviko”。善巧与舵手合为“善巧舵手”,是牟尼亦是善巧舵手,故为“munidakkhanāviko”,此为持业释。或解为如善巧舵手之牟尼,故为“munidakkhanāviko”,即佛陀,此为喻依持业释。正如善巧舵手渡海,引领众人至海之彼岸;如是,佛陀引领应化众生至涅槃彼岸,故作是说。显示巴利原文
Dakkhoti cheko. Samuddataraṇe dakkhati kusalattaṃ gacchatīti dakkho, nāviko. Dakkhadhātu gatiyaṃ a. Atha vā dakkhati kusalakamme aññasmiñca kiccākicce adandhatāya sīghaṃ gacchatīti dakkho, yokoci kusalo puggalo. Dakkhadhātu sīghatthe a. Dakkho viyāti dakkho, buddho. Nītatthena pana buddho sattānaṃ saṃsārasamuddato uddhāraṇassa kāraṇaṃ dakkhati paricchindati ñāṇenāti dakkhoti vuccati. Nāvikoti samuddatīraṃ nāvāya taratīti nāviko, nāvājeṭṭhako. Taratitaddhite ṇiko. Nāviko viyāti nāviko, buddho. Nītatthena pana buddho nibbānaṃ pāraṃ aṭṭhamaggaṅganāvāya taratīti nāvikoti vuccati. Dakkho nāviko dakkhanāviko, muni ca so dakkhanāvikocāti munidakkhanāviko, kammadhārayasamāsoyaṃ. Atha vā dakkhanāviko viya dakkho munīti munidakkhanāviko, buddho. Upamākammadhārayasamāsoyaṃ. Yathā hi samuddataraṇe cheko nāviko manusse samuddapāraṃ neti, evaṃ buddho veneyyasatte nibbānapāraṃ netīti vuttaṃ hoti.
“Maggaṅganāvaṃ āruyhāti”为句间关联。“Maggaṅganāvaṃ”指称为八支道的船。“Āruyhāti”意为登上之后。“道”(maggo):由于杀灭烦恼,以所缘为行境而趣向涅槃,故称为“道”。“māra”(杀)之言,加“gam”词根,构成“kvi”词缀。本应说“mārenta go”,依词源规则说为“maggo”。或者,道寻求、探索涅槃,故为“道”。“magg”词根表寻求,加“a”词缀。或者,被希求涅槃者所寻求、探索,故为“道”。被生、老、病、死等苦所逼恼的众生,为达至苦灭的涅槃,绝对应当寻求、探索此道,故为“道”,即四道。正如所说:“‘道’者,以何义为道?以趣向涅槃之义,及希求涅槃者所应寻求之义。”“支”(aṅga):以此而行至果涅槃,故为“支”。“ag”词根表行走,加“a”词缀。道的支分、原因,故为“道支”(maggaṅga),即正见、正思惟、正语、正业、正命、正精进、正念、正定,如此获得八支道。“船”(nāvā):被称扬,故为“船”。“nu”词根表称扬,加“avo”词缀。显示巴利原文
Maggaṅganāvaṃ āruyhāti sambandho. Maggaṅganāvanti aṭṭhamaggaṅga saṅkhātaṃ nāvaṃ. Āruyhāti ārohitvāti attho. Kilese mārento ārammaṇakaraṇavasena nibbānaṃ gacchatīti maggo. Mārasaddūpapada gamudhātu kvi. Mārenta goti vattabbe niruttinayena maggoti vuttaṃ. Atha vā nibbānaṃ maggati gavesatīti maggo. Maggadhātu gavesane a. Nibbānatthikehi maggiyati gavesiyatīti vā maggo. Ekantato jāti jarābyādhimaraṇadukkhādīhi pīḷitehi sattehi dukkhakkhayaṃ nibbānaṃ pāpuṇatthāya maggitabbo gavesitabboti maggo, catumaggo. Vuttañhi ‘‘maggoti kenaṭṭhena nibbānaṃ magganaṭṭhena nibbānatthikehi magganīyaṭṭhena cā’’ti. Aṅgati gacchati phalanibbānaṃ etenāti aṅgaṃ. Agidhātu gamane a. Maggassa aṅgaṃ kāraṇanti maggaṅgaṃ, sammādiṭṭhi sammāsaṅkappa sammāvācā sammākammanta sammāājīva sammāvāyāma sammāsati sammāsamādhivasena aṭṭhamaggaṅgaṃ labbhati. Nuyati thavīyatīti nāvā. Nudhātu thaviyaṃ avo. Atha vā orato pāraṃ netīti nāvā, bhāraṃ nayanti etāyāti vā nāvā. Nidhātu nayane avo. Maggaṅgasaṅkhātā nāvā maggaṅganāvā. Atha vā nāvā viya maggaṅganti maggaṅga nāvā. Yathā hi nāvā attani āruḷhe manusse samudda nadīpāraṃ neti, evaṃ aṭṭhamaggaṅgadhammā attānaṃ paṭipajjante nibbāna pāraṃ nentīti vuttaṃ hoti. Taṃ maggaṅganāvaṃ.
“Īhāphiyanti”指称为精进的桨柄。正如《经集注》中所说:“以桨,即桨柄。”“Īhā”:开始,故为“īhā”;或者,以此而开始、努力、思惟,故为“īhā”,即精进。在《词论》中则说:“īha,思惟。”“Phiyaṃ”:以此使水增长,故为“phiyaṃ”。“phā”词根表增长,加“iyo”词缀。或者,以此击水,故为“phiyaṃ”。或者,以此令船行进,故为“phiyaṃ”,即桨柄。“phāyi”词根表行进,加“a”词缀,ā变为i。称为“īhā”的桨,即“īhāphiyaṃ”。如同桨一样的“īhā”,即“īhāphiyaṃ”。正如以桨令船抵达所欲之处,同样地,以名为“īhā”的精进成就种种事务,抵达所欲的涅槃之处——这是意旨所在。该(桨)在“gāhako”一词中作宾语。“以智手”:以称为一切知智的手。了知一切所知法,故为“智”,即一切知智。作种种事业,故为“手”。称为智的手,即“智手”;或者,如同手一样的智,即“智手”;以那智手。“gāhako”:成为坚固执持者之后。“以彼”:以那称为八支道的。显示巴利原文
Īhāphiyanti vīriyasaṅkhātaṃ dabbisārakaṃ. Vuttañhi suttani pātaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘phiyenāti dabbisārakenā’’ti. Īhati ārabbhatīti īhā. Īhati vāyamati cetayati etenāti vā īhā, vīriyaṃ. Saddanītiyaṃ pana ‘‘īha cetāya’’nti vuttaṃ. Phāti vaḍḍheti udakaṃ etenāti phiyaṃ. Phādhātu vaḍḍhiyaṃ iyo. Phāti ghaṭṭeti udakanti vā phiyaṃ. Atha vā phāyati gacchati nāvaṃ etenāti phiyaṃ. Dabbisārakaṃ. Phāyi dhātu gatiyaṃ a. Ākārassa i. Īhāsaṅkhātaṃ phiyanti īhāphiyaṃ. Phiyaṃ viya īhāti īhāphiyaṃ. Yathā hi phiyena nāvā icchitaṭṭhānaṃ gacchati, evaṃ īhāsaṅkhātena vīriyena taṃ taṃ kiccaṃ sādheti, icchitaṃ nibbānaṭṭhānaṃ gacchatīti adhippāyo. Taṃ pana gāhakoti pade kammaṃ. Ñāṇakarenāti sabbaññutañāṇasaṅkhātena hatthena. Sabbaṃ ñeyyadhammaṃ jānātīti ñāṇaṃ, sabbaññutañāṇaṃ. Taṃ taṃ kammaṃ karotīti karo, hattho. Ñāṇasaṅkhāto karo ñāṇa karo, karaṃ viya ñāṇanti vā ñāṇakaro, tena ñāṇakarena. Gāhakoti daḷhagaṇhamāno hutvā. Tāyāti aṭṭhamaggaṅga saṅkhātāya tāya nāvāya, bahūti aneke veneyyasatte. Bhavaṇṇavāti tibhavasaṅkhātā saṃsāravaṭṭasaṅkhātā vā mahāsamuddato. Tassa pana vacanattho heṭṭhā vuttoyeva.
“Tāresīti”:意为使渡过、使超越。“Buddhanti”:指已证悟四谛法者。“Aghappahanti”:意为断除众生之苦者,即摧毁苦;或意为断除众生之烦恼者,即摧毁烦恼。在此,“agha”一词兼用于苦与烦恼。其中,苦能使有情痛苦、令其苦恼,故名为“agha”;或以苦的状态而转起,故名为“agha”。烦恼则因众生依此造恶,故名为“agha”。“agh”词根意为造恶,加“a”词缀。断除、摧毁“agha”者,称为“aghappaho”,即佛陀。此词以“agha”为前导,加“hā”词根表舍弃。佛陀以说法为所化众生除去苦与烦恼,这是其义趣。第一种解释中,苦虽非道所应断,但依果近说而称为“断苦者”。“Tanti”:我礼敬、顶礼那位牟尼善巧船师——此为关联句。显示巴利原文
Tāresīti otiṇṇesi, atikkamesīti attho. Buddhanti paṭividdhacatusaccadhammaṃ. Aghappahanti sattānaṃ dukkhappaja hantaṃ . Dukkhaviddhaṃsentanti attho. Atha vā aghappahanti sattānaṃ kilesappajahantaṃ. Kilesaviddhaṃsentanti attho. Ettha hi aghasaddo dukkhe kilese ca vattati. Tattha hi dukkhaṃ aghayati dukkhayatīti aghanti ca, aghayati dukkhākārena pavattatīti vā aghanti ca vuccati. Kileso pana aghayanti pāpaṃ karonti sattā etenāti aghoti vuccati. Aghadhātu pāpakaraṇe a. Aghaṃ pajahati viddhaṃsetīti aghappaho, buddho. Aghasaddūpapadapapubbahādhātu cāge. Buddho veneyyasattānaṃ dukkhañca kilesañca dhammadesanāya apanetīti attho. Ettha ca paṭhamavikappe dukkhassa appahātabbadhammattā maggena appahātabbampi phalūpacārena dukkhappajahantanti vuttaṃ. Tanti munidakkhanāvikaṃ ahaṃ name namāmīti sambandhoti.
此处简要解释:那位牟尼善巧船师,即被称为佛陀的善巧船主,登上了道支船——名为八支道的船后,以名为精进的桨柄,以名为一切知智的智手,成为坚固的执持者;又以那八支道船,将无量众生——可化导者,从有海,即名为三有的大海,度越,并使之度越。那位已证悟四谛法、断除众生之苦、摧毁苦,或摧毁烦恼的佛陀,那位牟尼善巧船师,我礼敬、顶礼。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepayojanā. Yo munidakkhanāviko yo buddhasaṅkhāto cheko nāvājeṭṭhako, maggaṅganāvaṃ aṭṭhamaggaṅgasaṅkhātaṃ nāvaṃ āruyha ārohitvā īhāphiyaṃ vīriyasaṅkhātaṃ dabbisārakaṃ, ñāṇakarena sabbaññutañāṇasaṅkhātena hatthena, gāhako daḷhaṃ gaṇhamāno hutvā tāya aṭṭhamaggaṅganāvāya, bahū aneke veneyyasatte bhavaṇṇavā tibhavasaṅkhātamahāsamuddato, tāresi otāresi, buddhaṃ paṭividdhacatusaccadhammaṃ aghappahaṃ sattānaṃ dukkhaviddhaṃsentaṃ kilesa viddhaṃsentaṃ vā taṃ munidakkhanāvikaṃ ahaṃ name namāmīti.
于殊胜菩提树下,通达四谛十相;
安住殊胜神变,利益人天,
我礼敬胜者,寂灭三有。
显示巴利原文 Samatiṃsatipāramisambharaṇaṃ, Varabodhidume catusaccadasaṃ; Varamiddhigataṃ naradevahitaṃ, Tibhavūpasamaṃ paṇamāmi jinaṃ.
11 11. 如此,以第十偈礼敬佛陀后,现在欲以“圆满三十波罗蜜”等五种功德赞叹并礼敬胜者,故说以下偈颂:“Samatiṃsatipāramisambharaṇa”等。此偈应视为由四组三音节构成、具十二音节的律偈(toṭaka)。正如《韵律明灯》所说:“在此,律偈以四组三音节为量。”意思是,在这种制作中,以四组三音节作为量的尺度而作,或以此为标记,此世间的这类诗律便称为律偈(toṭaka)。显示巴利原文
11. Evaṃ dasamagāthāya buddhaṃ vanditvā idāni samatiṃ satipāramisambharaṇādīhi pañcahi guṇehi thomitvā jinaṃ vanditukāmo samatiṃsatipāramisambharaṇantyādigāthamāha. Ayaṃ pana catūhi sagaṇehi racitattā dvādasakkharehi yuttā toṭakagāthāti daṭṭhabbā. Vuttañhi vuttodaye ‘‘iha toṭaka mambudhisehi mita’’nti. Tassattho. Yassaṃ paṭipādaṃ ambudhisehi catūhi sagaṇehi mitaṃ pamitaṃ racitaṃ lakkhitaṃ vā vuttaṃ idha jagatichande toṭakaṃ nāmāti.
其中,“圆满三十波罗蜜者”:即十波罗蜜、十近波罗蜜、十最上波罗蜜,此三十波罗蜜已生起、已圆满,此为义。而他们差别及“波罗蜜”一词之语义,前已说。已积集、已圆满故,为“积集者”,即胜者。“saṃ”前缀加“bhar”字根,于充满义中加“yu”语尾。圆满三十波罗蜜者,即“三十波罗蜜积集者”,胜者。自从于燃灯佛足下获得授记以来,于四不可数劫又十万劫中,圆满三十波罗蜜,此为义。彼三十波罗蜜积集者。“于殊胜菩提树下”:即于最上菩提树根处。此处“殊胜菩提”一词之语义,前已说。“树”:生长、前往,以根、干、皮、枝、节、叶、果而达到增长、茂盛、广大,或以银、金、宝、月光等极美妙之色而到达,故为“树”;即于菩萨降诞之日,与菩萨同时出生、高百肘之非斧伐树王可得。“du”字根于“行”义中加“ama”语尾。然于《譬喻注》中说:“‘树’者,摇动故;或‘树’者,充满虚空故。”殊胜菩提即殊胜菩提,彼殊胜菩提又是树,故为“殊胜菩提树”,于彼处。显示巴利原文
Tattha pana samatiṃsatipāramisambharaṇanti dasapāramiyo, dasa upapāramiyo, dasa paramatthapāramiyo cāti samatiṃsapāramiyo sambhūtaṃ, paripūritanti attho. Tāsaṃ pana viseso pāramisaddassa ca vacanattho heṭṭhā vuttoyeva. Sambharittha paripūrayitthāti sambharaṇo, jino. Saṃpubbabharadhātu pūraṇe yu. Samatiṃsapāramiyo sambharaṇoti samatiṃsatipāramisambharaṇo, jino. Dīpaṅkarabuddhassa pādamūle laddhabyākaraṇato paṭṭhāya kappasatasahassādhikāni cattāri asaṅkhyeyyāni samatiṃsapāramiyo pūrayitthāti attho. Taṃ samatiṃsatipāramisambharaṇaṃ. Varabodhidumeti uttamabodhirukkhamūle. Ettha ca varabodhisaddassa vacanattho heṭṭhā vuttoyeva. Davati gacchati mūlakhandhatacasākha viṭapa pallava phalehi vuḍḍhiṃ virūḷiṃ vepullaṃ rajata suvaṇṇamaṇi santā rucīhi atisobhanaṃ vā pāpuṇātīti dumo, bodhisattassa vijātadivaseyeva bodhisattena saddhiṃ saha jāto satahatthubbedho asatthadumarājā labbhati. Dudhātu gatimhi amo. Apadānaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘dunāti kampatīti dumo. Dumati pūreti ākāsatalanti vā dumo’’ti vuttaṃ. Varo bodhi varabodhi, varabodhi ca so dumo cāti varabodhidumo, tasmiṃ.
“四谛见”者:即以道智通达四圣谛。此处,“谛”字见于多种义中。即如:“应说真实,不应忿怒”等中,为语真实。“住立于谛之沙门婆罗门”等中,为离真实。“为何诸论师说种种谛,善说者”等中,为见真实。“唯一谛,无第二”等中,为胜义真实,即涅槃与道。“于四谛中,几为善”等中,为圣真实。当知此处亦用于圣真实。“谛”者,为真实、不虚妄。“satha”字根于不虚妄义中加“ṇya”语尾。譬如火之自性一向唯热,非冷;如是苦等之逼迫等自性,一向为真实、如实、不虚妄、不异。彼复有四种:苦谛、集谛、灭谛、道谛。其中,“苦谛”者:“du”为鄙劣,“kha”为空虚,故为“苦”。此为持业释复合词。即于《谛分别注》中说:“‘du’此字见于鄙劣义。鄙劣之子,称为‘恶子’。‘kha’字则为空虚。空虚之虚空,称为‘空’。此第一谛为鄙劣,因是众多灾患所依处;为空虚,因无凡愚所计执之常、净、乐、我性。故由鄙劣与空虚故,称为‘苦’。”彼是苦亦是谛,故为“苦谛”。三地轮转可得。显示巴利原文
Catusaccadasanti cattāri ariyasaccāni maggañāṇena paṭivijjhitaṃ. Ettha ca saccasaddo anekesvatthesu dissati. Seyyathidaṃ. Saccaṃ bhaṇe na kujjheyyātiādīsu vācāsacce. Sacce ṭhitā samaṇabrāhmaṇātiādīsu viratisacce. Kasmā nu saccāni vadanti nānā pavādiyāse kusalāvadānātiādīsu diṭṭhisacce. Ekañhi saccaṃ na dutiyamatthītiādīsu paramatthasacce nibbāne ceva magge ca, catunnaṃ saccānaṃ kati kusalātiādīsu ariyasacce. Svāyamidhāpi ariyasacce vattatīti veditabbo. Sathanaṃ saccaṃ, avitathaṃ. Sathadhātu avitathe ṇyo. Yathā hi aggīnaṃ sabhāvo ekantaṃ uṇhoyeva hoti, na sītalo, evaṃ dukkhādīnaṃ pīḷanādi sabhāvaṃ ekantaṃ saccaṃ tathaṃ avitathaṃ anaññathaṃ hoti. Taṃ pana catubbidhaṃ hoti dukkhasaccaṃ, samudayasaccaṃ, nirodhasaccaṃ, maggasaccañcāti. Tattha dukkhasaccanti dukkhacchitaṃ khaṃ tucchanti dukkhaṃ. Kammadhārayasamāsoyaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ saccavibhaṅgaṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘duiti ayaṃsaddo kucchite dissati. Kucchitañhi puttaṃ duputtoti vadanti. Khaṃsaddo pana tucche. Tucchañhi ākāsaṃ khanti vuccati. Idañca paṭhamasaccaṃ kucchitaṃ. Anekaupaddavādhiṭṭhānato, tucchaṃbālajanaparikappitadhuvasubhasukhattabhāvavirahitato. Tasmā kucchitattā tucchattā ca dukkhanti vuccatī’’ti. Dukkhañca taṃ saccañcāti dukkhasaccaṃ. Tebhūmikavaṭṭaṃ labbhati.
“集谛”:“来”是指,苦果由此而生起、转起,故称为“来”,即贪。“i”字根在“行”义中加“a”语尾。与其余诸缘和合时,为苦生起之因,故称为“集”。此为第六格依主释复合词。即如《谛分别注》中所说:“‘saṃ’字于‘集合’‘俱来’等中,表结合;‘u’字于‘已生’‘已说’等中,表生起;‘aya’字则表因。此第二谛,于其余诸缘和合时,为苦生起之因。如是,由苦之结合与生起之因故,称为‘苦集’。”彼是集亦是谛,故为“集谛”,即指贪所摄之渴爱。“灭谛”:“轮转”是指转起、运行、运转,故称为“轮转”,即轮转于三有之法。“rudh”字根在“行”义中加“ṇa”语尾。于此中,无有三有轮转法之运转、运行,故为“灭”,即涅槃。或复,轮回之苦于此中灭尽,故为“灭”,即涅槃。“rudh”字根在“遮止”义中加“ṇa”语尾。即如《谛分别注》中所说:“第三谛,因‘ni’字表无有,‘rodha’字表牢狱。故于此中,无有称为轮回牢狱之苦牢狱,因一切趣皆空故。或于彼中,达至等至时,称为轮回牢狱之苦牢狱无有,因是彼对治故,亦称为‘苦灭’。”或由苦之不显示巴利原文
Samudayasaccanti ayati pavattati dukkhaphalaṃ etenāti ayo, lobho. Ayadhātu gatimhi a. Saṃ avasesa paccayasaṃyoge sati u dukkhuppattiyā ayo kāraṇoti samudayo. Chaṭṭhītappurisasamāsoyaṃ. Vutteñhetaṃ sacca vibhaṅgaṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘saṃiti ca ayaṃsaddo samāgamo sametantiādīsu saṃyogaṃ dīpeti. Uiti ayaṃsaddo uppannaṃ uditantiādīsu uppattiṃ. Ayasaddo pana kāraṇaṃ dīpeti. Idañcāpi dutiyasaccaṃ avasesapaccayasamāyoge sati dukkhassuppattikāraṇaṃ. Iti dukkhassa saṃyoge uppattikāraṇattā dukkhasamudayanti vuccatī’’ti. Samudayo ca so saccañcāti samudayasaccaṃ, lobhasaṅkhātā taṇhā labbhati . Nirodhasaccanti rodhati carati pavattatīti rodho, tebhūmikavaṭṭadhammo. Rodhadhātu caraṇe ṇa. Natthi tebhūmikavaṭṭadhammassa rodho caraṇaṃ etthāti nirodho, nibbānaṃ. Atha vā nirujjhati saṃsāradukkhaṃ etthāti nirodho, nibbānaṃ. Rudhidhātu āvaraṇe ṇa. Vuttañhetaṃ saccavibhaṅgaṭṭha kathāyaṃ ‘‘tatiyasaccaṃ pana yasmā nisaddo abhāvaṃ. Rodha saddo cārakaṃ dīpeti. Tasmā abhāvo ettha saṃsāra cārakasaṅkhātassa dukkharodhassa sabbagatisuññattā. Samadhi gate vā tasmiṃ saṃsāracārakasaṅkhātassa dukkharodhassa abhāvo hoti tappaṭipakkhattātipi dukkhanirodhanti vuccatī’’ti. Dukkhassa vā anuppādanirodhapaccayattā dukkhanirodhanti. Nirodho ca so saccañcāti nirodhasaccaṃ. Nibbānaṃ. Maggasaccanti dukkhanirodhaṃ nibbānaṃ maggati gacchati etenāti maggo. Aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo. Maggadhātu gatiyaṃ a. Vuttañhetaṃ sacca vibhaṅgaṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘catutthasaccaṃ pana yasmā etaṃ dukkhanirodhaṃ gacchati ārammaṇavasena tadabhimukhabhūtattā paṭipadā ca hoti dukkhanirodhappattiyā. Tasmā dukkhanirodhagāminipaṭipadāti vuccatī’’ti. Maggo ca so saccañcāti maggasaccaṃ. Aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo labbhati. Yasmā panetāni buddhādayo ariyā paṭivijjhanti, tasmā ariyasaccānītipi vuccanti. Atha vā buddhādīhi ariyehi paṭivijjhiyanti, tasmā ariyasaccānītipi vuccanti.
然而,它们的特相等应如此理解:在此,苦谛以逼迫为特相,以热恼为作用,以转起为现起;集谛以生起为特相,以不断除为作用,以障碍为现起;灭谛以寂静为特相,以不死为作用,以无相为现起;道谛以出离为特相,以断烦恼为作用,以出起为现起。在这四圣谛中,第一与第三谛是果,第二与第四谛是因;前二谛是难见的深奥法,后二谛因深奥而难见。显示巴利原文
Tesaṃ pana lakkhaṇādīni evaṃ veditabbāni. Ettha hi bādhanalakkhaṇaṃ dukkhasaccaṃ, santāpanarasaṃ, pavattipaccupaṭṭhānaṃ, pabhavalakkhaṇaṃ samudayasaccaṃ, anupacchedakaraṇarasaṃ, palibodhapaccupaṭṭhānaṃ. Santilakkhaṇaṃ nirodhasaccaṃ, accutirasaṃ, animittapaccupaṭṭhānaṃ. Niyyānalakkhaṇaṃ maggasaccaṃ, kilesappahāna karaṇarasaṃ, vuṭṭhānapaccupaṭṭhānanti. Etesu pana catūsu saccesu paṭhamatatiyasaccāni phalāni honti. Dutiya catutthasaccāni hetūni honti. Purimāni dvesaccāni dudda sattā gambhīrāni. Pacchimāni dvesaccāni gambhīrattā duddasāni.
又当知,苦灭圣谛亦是甚深且难见的。每一谛各依四种义,而有十六种谛理。因此,在《无碍解道》的圣典中说:‘苦的逼迫义、有为义、热恼义、变易义,这四种是苦的苦理,是真实、不虚、不异的。如是,苦以真实义而为谛。集的积集义、因缘义、结缚义、障碍义,这四种是集的集理,是真实、不虚、不异的。如是,集以真实义而为谛。灭的出离义、远离义、无为义、不死义,这四种是灭的灭理,是真实、不虚、不异的。如是,灭以真实义而为谛。道的出离义、因义、见义、增上义,这四种是道的道理,是真实、不虚、不异的。如是,道以真实义而为谛。’显示巴利原文
Api ca kho pana dukkhanirodhaṃ ariyasaccaṃ gambhīrañceva duddasañcāti veditabbaṃ. Ekekassa pana saccassa catunnaṃ catunnaṃ atthānaṃ vasena soḷasa saccaṭṭhā honti. Tena vuttaṃ paṭisambhidā maggapāḷiyaṃ ‘‘dukkhassa pīḷanaṭṭho saṅkhataṭṭho santāpaṭṭho vipariṇāmaṭṭho, ime cattāro dukkhassa dukkhaṭṭhā tathā avitathā anaññathā. Evaṃ dukkhaṃ tathaṭṭhena saccaṃ. Samudayassa āyūhanaṭṭho nidānaṭṭho saṃyogaṭṭho palibodhaṭṭho, ime cattāro samudayassa samudayaṭṭhā tathā avitathā anaññathā. Evaṃ samudayo tathaṭṭhena saccaṃ. Nirodhassa nissaraṇaṭṭho vivekaṭṭho asaṅkhataṭṭho amataṭṭho, ime cattāro nirodhassa nirodhaṭṭhā tathā avitathā anaññathā, evaṃ nirodho tathaṭṭhena saccaṃ. Maggassa niyyānaṭṭho hetvaṭṭho dassanaṭṭho adhipateyyaṭṭho, ime cattāro maggassa maggaṭṭhā tathā avitathā anaññathā, evaṃ maggo tathaṭṭhena sacca’’nti.
“见”(dassana)有十种,又作“示现”“看见”,故说为“十”,即四道智。“界”(dhātu)在此作“观察”之义。具足四谛之见的人,名为“四谛见者”(catusaccadaso),也就是胜者。或者说,未见、未观四谛之人,是“未见四谛者”;而胜者已见、已观四谛,这是说:他以四道智通达了四谛。如此即是“四谛见者”。四谛智又有两种:随觉智与通达智。其中,随觉智是世间的,依传闻等而于灭、道中生起;通达智是出世间的,以灭为所缘,从作用上通达一切四谛。正如经中所说:“诸比丘,见苦者,亦见苦集、见苦灭、见趣向苦灭之道。”这一切都应详说。然而,四谛通达智若无随觉智便不能生起,因此,智者应当首先为随觉智而着手修习四谛业处。难道圣弟子们就不通达四谛吗?为何独独赞叹胜者为“四谛见者”呢?这是因为,世尊是以与圣弟子们不同的方式——以无师独悟的阿拉汉道智通达四谛。因此,唯有世尊被赞叹为“四谛见者”。在此,除了渴爱与涅槃之外,其余一切法名为苦谛;一百零八种渴爱行相名为集谛;涅槃名为灭谛;八支圣道名为道谛。在《阿毗达摩义集》中亦说:显示巴利原文
Dassanaṃ dasaṃ, disati passatīti vā dasaṃ, catumaggañāṇaṃ. Disadhātu apekkhane a. Catunnaṃ saccānaṃ dassanaṃ assāti catusaccadaso, jino. Atha vā cattāri saccāni adassi apassīti catusaccadaso, jino. So cattāri saccāni catumaggañāṇena appaṭivijjhīti attho. Taṃ catusaccadasaṃ. Catusaccañāṇaṃ pana duvidhaṃ hoti anubodhañāṇañca, paṭivedha ñāṇañcāti. Tattha anubodhañāṇaṃ lokiyaṃ anussavādivasena nirodhe magge ca pavattati, paṭivedhañāṇaṃ lokuttaraṃ nirodhamārammaṇaṃ katvā kiccato cattāripi saccāni paṭivijjhati. Yathāha yo bhikkhave dukkhaṃ passati, dukkhasamudayampi so passati. Dukkhanirodhampi passati, dukkhanirodhagāminipaṭi padampi passatīti sabbaṃ vattabbaṃ. Catusaccapaṭivedhañāṇaṃ pana anubodhañāṇena vinā na pavattati, tasmā anubodha ñāṇatthāya pubbe catusaccakammaṭṭhānaṃ paṇḍitena samārambhi tabbanti . Nanu ca ariyasāvakā cattāri saccāni paṭivijjhanti. Atha kasmā jinoyeva catusaccadasanti thomitoti. Bhagavā pana ariyasāvakehi visiṭṭhena anaññopadesena arahattamaggañāṇena cattāri saccāni paṭivijjhanti. Tasmā bhagavāyeva catusaccadasanti abhitthavitoti. Tattha pana ṭhapetvā taṇhañca nibbānañca avasesadhammā dukkhasaccaṃ nāma. Aṭṭhasatataṇhāvicaritā samudayasaccaṃ nāma. Nibbānaṃ nirodha saccaṃ nāma. Aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo maggasaccaṃ nāma. Vuttaṃ pana abhidhammatthasaṅgahe –
“苦,乃是三界的轮回;渴爱,为有之集;
灭,即名涅槃;道,则被尊为出世间。”
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Dukkhaṃ tebhūmakaṃ vaṭṭaṃ, taṇhā samudayo bhave; Nirodho nāma nibbānaṃ, maggo lokuttaro mato’’ti.
“殊胜神变所至”者,即殊胜的神变所至。其义为:已证得过去诸佛的最上神变;或谓是诸最上神变的安立处。“神变”即成就、圆满成就之义;或说能成就、能圆满成就、能生起,故称神变。由此可得神变智与阿拉汉道。如《清净道论》所说:“出离得以成就,故名神变;阿拉汉道得以成就,故名神变。”或说众生借此而成就、增长、兴盛、臻于最上,故名神变,由此可得八定与四道。于此,“idha”词根有增长义,“dhi”为缘,“ī”是阴性词缀。趣向神变者为“神变所至”,即胜者。又,“至”为趣向、安住于彼处之义;安住于诸殊胜、最上之神变,成为其依止处,故称“殊胜神变所至”,指胜者。虽然圣弟子中也有证得神变者,但诸佛尤其依此胜智而获得神变、圆满成就、增长、极至最上,故当知唯有佛陀才值得以“殊胜神变所至”来赞叹。显示巴利原文
Varamiddhigatanti varaṃ iddhigataṃ. Uttamaṃ atītabuddhānaṃ iddhiṃ pattanti attho. Atha vā uttamānaṃ iddhīnaṃ patiṭṭhānabhūtanti attho. Ijjhanaṃ samijjhanaṃ iddhi, ijjhati samijjhati nippajjatīti vā iddhi. Iddhividhañāṇañca arahattamaggo ca labbhati. Vuttañhi visuddhimagge ‘‘tathā nekkhammaṃ ijjhatīti iddhīti ca arahattamaggo ijjhatīti iddhī’’ti ca. Atha vā ijjhanti sattā etāya iddhā vuddhā ukkaṃsagatā hontīti iddhi, aṭṭhasamāpattiyo ca cattāro maggā ca labbhanti. Idhadhātu vuḍḍhiyanti paccayo. Atha vā tapaccayo itthiliṅgajotako īpaccayo ca. Iddhiṃ agaminti iddhigato, jino. Atha vā gacchati patiṭṭhahati etthāti gato, varānaṃ uttamānaṃ iddhīnaṃ gato patiṭṭhānabhūtoti varamiddhigato, jino. Taṃ varamiddhigataṃ. Kiñcāpi pana ariyasāvakā iddhippattā honti, buddhā pana visesato etāya abhiññāya iddhā samiddhā vuddhā atiukkaṃsagatā honti, tasmā buddhoyeva varamiddhigatanti abhitthavituṃ arahatīti veditabbo.
“人天利益”者,即人与天人的世间及出世间所摄的利益、所需、所持。其义已如前说。“三界寂止”者,即三界的寂止。由于不再有后有转起,故从欲、色、无色所名的三有中寂止、寂灭、灭尽;或说从三界中后有转起的寂止,这便是其义。“有”即众生所存在之处;三有即是“三界”,由此寂止,故为“三界寂止者”,即胜者。世尊在菩提树下,以阿拉汉道智无余断除了欲、色、无色三界中能生结生、以无明渴爱为根的福行等诸行,因此不再有后有转起。由此,唯世尊特别被赞叹为“三界寂止者”。“胜者”即战胜五魔的佛陀。“我礼敬”即我以与智相应之心恭敬礼拜,这是其连结。显示巴利原文
Naradevahitanti manussadevānaṃ lokiyalokuttara saṅkhātaṃ hitaṃ payojanaṃ dhāraṇaṃ. Tesaṃ pana attho heṭṭhā vuttoyeva. Tibhavūpasamanti tibhavaupasamaṃ. Punabbhavābhinibbattiyā abhāvato kāmarūpaarūpasaṅkhātehi tīhi bhavehi tīsu bhavesu punabbhavābhinibbattito vā upasamitaṃ nibbutaṃ niruddhanti attho. Bhavanti sattā etthāti bhavo, tayo bhavā tibhavā, tehi upasamitthāti tibhavūpasamo, jino. Taṃ tibhavūpasamaṃ. Bhagavato pana bodhipallaṅkeva kāmarūpārūpasaṅkhātesu tīsu bhavesu paṭisandhijanakānaṃ avijjātaṇhāmūlakānaṃ puññādisaṅkhārānaṃ arahattamaggañāṇena niravasesaṃ pahīnattā punabbhavābhinibbatti natthi. Tasmā bhagavantaṃyeva visesena tibhavūpasamanti thometīti vuttaṃ hoti. Jinanti pañcamārajayantaṃ buddhaṃ. Paṇamāmīti ahaṃ ñāṇasampayuttacittena ādaraṃ vandāmīti yojanā.
此处略释如下:圆满具备三十波罗蜜者,于最胜菩提树下,以道智见四圣谛、通达四圣谛者;证得最上神变,或为诸最上神变所依止者;持人与天人之世间、出世间所摄利益者;从欲、色、无色所称三有中寂止者,或从欲、色、无色三界中后有转起寂止寂灭者;战胜五魔的佛陀、胜者——我以与智相应之心恭敬礼拜。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepayojanā. Samatiṃsati sambharaṇaṃ samatiṃsapāramiyo sambhūtaṃ paripūritaṃ, varabodhidume uttamabodhirukkhamūle, catusaccadasaṃ cattāri ariyasaccāni maggañāṇena passantaṃ paṭivijjhantaṃ, varamiddhigataṃ uttamaṃ atīta buddhānaṃ iddhipattaṃ uttamānaṃ iddhīnaṃ patiṭṭhānabhūtaṃ vā, naradevahitaṃ manussadevānaṃ lokiyalokuttarasaṅkhātaṃ payojanaṃ dhāraṇaṃ, tibhavūpasamaṃ kāmarūpaarūpasaṅkhātehi tīhi bhavehi upasamitaṃ, kāmarūpārūpasaṅkhātesu tīsu bhavesu punabbhavā bhinibbattito upasamitaṃ nibbutaṃ vā, jinaṃ pañcamārajayantaṃ buddhaṃ paṇamāmi ahaṃ ñāṇasampayuttacittena ādaraṃ vandāmīti.
具足百福相好、离诸尘垢者,
智慧如虚空、坚毅如须弥山者,
具足如莲花般清凉戒德者,
我今顶礼如大地般堪忍的胜者。
显示巴利原文 Satapuññajalakkhaṇikaṃ virajaṃ, Gaganūpamadhiṃ dhitimerusamaṃ; Jalajūpamasītalasīlayutaṃ, Pathavīsahanaṃ paṇamāmi jinaṃ.
12 12. 如此,依第十一颂礼敬胜者之后,如今为以“百福所生之相好”等六种功德赞叹并礼敬胜者,而说“百福所生之相好”等颂。然此颂由四个音节组构成,具十二音节,应视为“都吒迦颂”。其依据已如前颂注释中所述。显示巴利原文
12. Evaṃ ekādasamagāthāya jinaṃ vanditvā idāni satapuññajalakkhaṇikantyādīhi chahi guṇehi thomitvā jinaṃ vanditu kāmo satapuññajalakkhaṇikantyādigāthamāha. Ayaṃ pana catūhi sa gaṇehi racitattā dvādasakkharehi yuttā toṭakagāthāti daṭṭhabbā. Sādhakaṃ pana anantaragāthāvaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttameva.
其中,“百福所生之相好”者:具足由无量波罗蜜福德威力所生的三十二大丈夫相。此处“百”字表众多之数,如“百光”、“千光”等。由百数——即众多波罗蜜福德威力所生,故为“百福所生”;以这些特征可标记、可识别佛陀之德,故为“相”,即三十二大丈夫相等。“lakkh”字根有“见”与“标记”之义。既是百福所生,又是相,故称“百福所生之相”。具足此相者,为“百福所生之相好者”,即胜者。其意趣为:世尊于无量轮围世界中,若一切众生各各行百次福业,由如此多人所行之福业,菩萨独自一人各各令其成百倍,由此所生之波罗蜜福德威力所生的三十二大丈夫相及八十随形好而圆满具足,故称扬为“百福所生之相好者”。此即其义。恰如《佛种姓经注》中所说:显示巴利原文
Tattha satapuññajalakkhaṇikanti anekapāramīpuññatejena jātena dvattiṃsamahāpurisalakkhaṇena sampannaṃ. Ettha ca satasaddo anekasaṅkhyāvācako. Satatejo sahassaraṃ sītiādīsu viya. Satena anekena pāramīpuññatejena jātanti satapuññajaṃ, lakkhiyati lakkhitabbaṃ buddhadabbaṃ etehīti lakkhaṇaṃ, dvattiṃsamahāpurisalakkhaṇādi. Lakkhadhātu dassanaṅkesuyu. Satapuññajañca taṃ lakkhaṇañcāti satapuññaja lakkhaṇaṃ. Taṃ assa atthīti satapuññajalakkhaṇiko, jino. Taṃ. Bhagavā hi anantesu cakkavāḷesu sabbe sattā ekekaṃ puññakammaṃ satakkhattuṃ kareyyuṃ. Ettakehi janehi kataṃ puññakammaṃ bodhisatto ekova ekekaṃ sataguṇaṃ katvā nibbattena pāramīpuññatejena jātehi dvattiṃsa mahāpurisalakkhaṇehi ca asītianubyañjana lakkhaṇe hi ca sampannoti satapuññajalakkhaṇikanti thometīti adhippāyo. Vuttañhi buddhavaṃsaṭṭhakathāyaṃ –
“百福相”的意思是:在无量的轮围世界中,一切众生各各行百次福业,菩萨独自一人将如此多人所造的福业,一一增长百倍而生起,因此称为“百福相”。但也有人说:“每一相是由一百或数百福业所生。”如果这样,那任何人都可能成佛,对此诸注疏已予驳斥。而《资具注》中说:“‘百福相’:有人说每一相是由一百或数百福业所生,但若如此,任何人都可成佛,因此不取此说。应取义为:在无量轮围世界中,一切众生各各行百次福业,菩萨独自一人将如此多人所造之业,一一增长百倍而生起,因此称为‘百福相’。”至于三十二大丈夫相,将在后文中阐明。显示巴利原文
‘‘Satapuñña lakkhaṇoti anantesu cakkavāḷesu sabbe sattā ekekaṃ puññakammaṃ satakkhattuṃ kareyyuṃ, ettakehi janehi katakammaṃ bodhisatto sayameva eko sataguṇaṃ katvā nibbatto. Tasmā satapuññalakkhaṇoti vuccati. Keci pana satena satena puññakammena nibbattaṃ ekekalakkhaṇoti vadanti. Evaṃ sante yo koci buddho bhaveyyāti. Taṃ aṭṭhakathāsu paṭikkhitta’’nti. Pātheyyaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘sata puññalakkhaṇanti satena satena puññakammena nibbattaṃ ekekaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ . Evaṃ sante yo koci buddho bhaveyyāti na rocayiṃsu. Anantesu pana cakkavāḷesu sabbe sattā ekekaṃ kammaṃ satakkhattuṃ kareyyuṃ. Ettakehi janehi kataṃ kammaṃ bodhisatto ekova ekekaṃ sataguṇaṃ katvā nibbatto. Tasmā satapuññalakkhaṇoti imamatthaṃ rocayiṃsū’’ti vuttaṃ. Dvattiṃsamahāpurisalakkhaṇaṃ pana upari āvibhavissatīti.
“离尘者”:由于远离贪等尘垢,所以称为离尘。能染着、粘附于色等所缘的,即是“尘”——贪等烦恼。“ranj”字根含有染着之义。远离此尘者,便是“离尘者”,也就是胜者。我礼敬那位离尘者。其含义是:胜者在菩提座处,已战胜一切烦恼魔尘,故而称为离尘者。“如虚空之慧者”:这里的“慧”指一切知智,意思是具有如虚空般一切知智的人。“虚空”(gagana)是指鸟等在其中飞行之处,即天空。“gam”字根有“行”义,加“yu”后缀,m变为g。“譬喻”(upamā)是被用作譬喻的事物,此为状态所成词。“upa”前缀加“mā”字根,有计量义,加“a”后缀。能持、能知一切所知法者,称为“慧”,即一切知智。“dhara”字根有“知”义,加“kvi”后缀和阴性标志“ī”。与虚空相应的譬喻即是“如虚空”,与此相似的慧——即一切知智——为彼所有,所以称他为“如虚空之慧者”,也就是胜者。我礼敬那位如虚空之慧者。然而,这是一种“法劣譬喻”,因为虚空并不具备无边际等功德。正如《善觉庄严》所说:“‘法劣’如面莲花,牟尼之相似。”正如虚空被称为无边际,它无边际而扩展;同样……显示巴利原文
Virajanti rāgarajādīnaṃ abhāvā vigatarajaṃ. Rañjati sañjati rūpādiārammaṇesūti rajo, rāgādirajo. Ranjadhātu rāge a. Vigato rajo assāti virajo, jino. Taṃ virajaṃ. Jino hi bodhipallaṅkeyeva sabbakilesamāra rajassa jayitattā vigatarajoti attho. Gaganūpamadhinti ettha dhī vuccati sabbaññutañāṇaṃ. Tasmā ākāsūpamasabbaññuta ñāṇavantanti attho. Gacchanti ettha vihaṅgamādayoti gaganaṃ, ākāso. Gamudhātu gatiyaṃ yu. Makārassa go. Upamiyate upamā. Bhāvasādhanoyaṃ. Upapubbamādhātu parimāne a. Sabbañeyyadhammaṃ dharati jānātīti dhī, sabbaññuta ñāṇaṃ. Dharadhātu ñāṇe kvi, itthiliṅgajotakaīpaccayo ca. Gaganena ākāsena yuttā upamā gaganūpamā, taṃ sadisaṃ dhī sabbaññutañāṇaṃ yassāti gaganūpamadhi, jino. Taṃ gaganūpamadhiṃ. Ayaṃ pana anantādiguṇahīnattā dhammahīnopamā nāma. Vuttañhi subodhālaṅkāre ‘‘dhammahīnāmukhambhoja, sadisaṃ munino itī’’ti. Yathā hi ākāso anantoti vuttattā ākāso ananto hutvā vittharati, evaṃ bhagavato anantaṃ buddhañāṇanti vuttattā sabbaññutañāṇassa anantārammaṇattā ca ñāṇaṃ anantaṃ hutvā vittharati. Tasmā gaganūpamadhinti thometīti.
“定如须弥者”:这里的“定”指三摩地,意思是具有如须弥山一般不为所动的三摩地者。“dhiti”(定)是指能令相应法住立于同一所缘者,即世尊的世间与出世间禅定。“dhi”字根有“持”义。“meru”(须弥)是指以其光芒摧毁黑暗者,即山王。“mī”字根有伤害义,加“ru”后缀。这是针对须弥山东面为银、南面为宝、西面为水晶、北面为金的说法而作出的词义解释。或者说,“meru”指的是以其更高而挫伤一切山者,即须弥。与须弥相等的定——即三摩地——为彼所有,所以称他为“定如须弥者”,也就是胜者。我礼敬那位定如须弥者。正如须弥山王不被八方来风吹动、不摇动一样,胜者由于断除了欲贪等盖障,具足出世间禅定,因此不被八种世间法及邪见之风吹动、不摇动。所以,称叹他为“定如须弥者”。显示巴利原文
Dhitimerusamanti ettha dhiti vuccati samādhi. Sinerupabbata sadisaṃ acalasamādhivantanti attho. Dhiyati ṭhapiyati sampayuttadhamme ekārammaṇe etenāti dhiti, bhagavato lokiyalokuttarajhānasamādhi. Dhidhātu dhāraṇeti. Raṃsiyā andhakāraṃ mināti hiṃsatīti meru, pabbatarājā. Mīdhātu hiṃsāyaṃ rupaccayo. Imaṃ vacanatthañhi sinerussa pācīnapassaṃ rajatamayaṃ, dakkhiṇapassaṃ maṇimayaṃ, pacchimapassaṃ phallikamayaṃ, uttarapassaṃ suvaṇṇamayaṃ hotīti vuttavacanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Atha vā mināti hiṃsati sabbe pabbate attano uccataraṭṭhenāti meru, merunā samo dhiti samādhi yassāti dhitimerusamo, jino. Taṃ dhitimeru samaṃ. Yathā hi merurājā aṭṭhahi disāhi āgatehi vātehi na kampati na calati, evaṃ jino kāmacchandādinīvaraṇe pajahitvā lokuttarajjhānasamādhinā samannāgatattā aṭṭhahi lokadhammehi ca micchādiṭṭhivātehi ca na kampati na calatīti dhitimerusamanti thometi.
具足水生花般清凉之戒者:即与如水中所生莲花相似、极清凉、不可计量的戒相应。正如《譬喻》经中所说:‘其戒不可计量。’其注疏中亦说:‘世尊之戒实不可计量。’‘Jala’有照耀、发光之义,故‘jala’指水。‘Jaladhātu’(水界)中,‘a’表照耀。生于水(jale)中者为‘jalaja’,即莲花。以水生莲花为譬喻、相似者,为‘jalajūpama’,指戒。为求安乐者所依止,故为‘sītala’(清凉),即戒。‘Sidhātu’(成就)表服务,‘tala’为后缀。又或,摄取清凉功德者为‘sītala’,即戒。‘Sīta’(清凉)一词前置,‘lā’(取)字根表执取,加‘kvi’后缀。生于水中的莲花,因水能平息炎热而似清凉。而佛陀之戒,因烦恼已完全止息,故为至极清凉。因为善加守护的清净戒,能通过断除烦恼而平息众生烦恼之热恼,非旃檀、珍珠鬘、宝石、水、风或月光所能比拟。因此,戒本身即是清凉,故称‘至极清凉’。故于《清净道论》中说:显示巴利原文
Jalajūpamasītalasīlayutanti udakajātappadumasadisena atisītalena asaṅkhyeyyasīlena saṃyuttaṃ. Vuttañhi apadāna pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘sīlaṃ tassa asaṅkhyeyya’’nti. Tadaṭṭhakathāyañca ‘‘bhagavato pana sīlaṃ asaṅkhyeyyamevā’’ti. Jalati dibbatīti jalaṃ, udakaṃ. Jaladhātu dittiyaṃ a. Jale udake jātaṃ jalajaṃ, padumaṃ. Jalajena padumena upamaṃ sadisanti jalajūpamaṃ, sīlaṃ. Sukhatthikehi seviyatīti sītalaṃ, sīlaṃ. Sidhātu sevāyaṃ talapaccayo. Atha vā sītaguṇaṃ lāti gaṇhātīti sītalaṃ, sīlaṃ. Sītasaddūpapada lādhātu gahaṇe kvi. Udake pana jātaṃ padumaṃ udakena uṇhassa samitattā sītalaṃ viya. Sīlaṃ pana buddhassa kilesatā panassa sametattā accantasītalaṃ hoti. Surakkhitañhi visuddhaṃ sīlaṃ kilesappahānena sattānaṃ kilesapariḷāhaṃ upasameti na haritacandanaṃ muttāhāro maṇi udakaṃ vāto candakiraṇo ca. Tasmā sīlameva sītalanti accantasītalanti vuccati. Tena vuttaṃ visuddhimagge –
“非是带雨之云与风,亦非旃檀之香;
既非珍珠璎珞,亦非宝石,更非月光的微芒;
能于世间息灭众生热恼,此善加守护之戒、
此圣洁、至极清凉之戒,能彻底止息热恼。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Na taṃ sajaladā vātā, na cāpi haricandanaṃ; Neva hārā na maṇayo, na candakiraṇaṅkurā; Samayantīdha sattānaṃ, pariḷāhaṃ surakkhitaṃ; Yaṃ sametidaṃ ariyaṃ, sīlaṃ accantasītala’’nti.
以下是此二偈颂的含义。此善加守护、圣洁、至极清凉之戒,能止息世间众生之热恼。与雨云俱起的凉风不能止息此热恼;檀香亦不能止息;珍珠项链亦不能止息;琉璃等宝石亦不能止息;月光的清凉亦不能止息。「戒」(sīla)意为「安止」(sīlati),即以身善行等善巧安住而不散乱。于「戒」字根中,「a」表安止义。或者,「戒」以此令心安止;或以此令善法安立、稳固、善持,故名为「戒」;或指思心所,或指善心生起。于「戒」字根中,「a」表执持义。如《清净道论》注疏所说:「以何义为戒?以安止义为戒。何为此戒?即安止,以身善行等善巧安住而不散乱之义;或为执持,即作为善法之立足处、基础之义。」具足水生花般清凉之戒者,即成就与莲花相似、清凉、至极清凉、不可计数的戒,是为胜者。称颂其「具足水生花般清凉之戒」。如同生于水中之莲花因水而清凉,世尊因道戒已断除烦恼之热恼,故其戒清凉、至极清凉。与之相应,故称颂为「具足水生花般清凉之戒」。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ pana tassa gāthādvayassattho. Surakkhitaṃ suṭṭhurakkhitaṃ ariyaṃ visuddhaṃ accantasītalaṃ idaṃ sīlaṃ idhaloke sattānaṃ yaṃ pariḷāhaṃ sameti, taṃ pariḷāhaṃ sajaladā udakadadena meghena saha pavattā vātā sītavātā na samayanti haritacandanañcāpi na samayati. Hārā muttāhārā neva samayanti. Maṇayo veḷuriyādimaṇiyo na samayanti. Candakiraṇaṅkurā candassa raṃsiaṅkurā na samayantīti. Sīlati samādhiyati kāyakammādīnaṃ susīlyavasena na vippakiratīti sīlaṃ. Sīladhātu samādhimhi a. Atha vā sīlanti samādahanti cittaṃ etenāti sīlaṃ, sīlenti vā etena kusale dhamme upadhārenti ābhuso dhārenti sādhavoti sīlaṃ, cetanādhammo, kusalacittuppādo vā labbhati. Sīladhātu upadhāraṇe a. Vuttañhetaṃ visuddhimaggaṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘kenaṭṭhena sīlanti sīlanaṭṭhena sīlaṃ. Kimidaṃ sīlaṃ nāma, samādhānaṃ vā, kāyakammādīnaṃ susīlyavasena avippakiṇṇatāti attho. Upadhāraṇaṃ vā, kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ patiṭṭhānavasena ādhārabhāvoti attho’’ti. Jalajūpamena padumasadisena sītalena accantasītalena sīlena asaṅkhyeyyasīlena yuttoti jalajūpamasītalasīlayuto, jino. Taṃ jalajūpamasītalasīlayutaṃ. Yathā hi udake jātaṃ padumaṃ jalena sītalaṃ hoti, evaṃ bhagavato maggasīlena kilesupatāpanassa pahīnattā taṃ sītalaṃ accantasītalaṃ. Tena sampayuttoti jalajūpamasītalasīla yutanti thometīti vuttaṃ hoti.
“如地忍者”:意为如大地般具足忍辱者,或具忍辱者。“patha”意为“安立”(patiṭṭhahanti),树木、山岳等安立其上的缘故,故名“pathavī”——大地、地。“pathadhātu”表安立,“vī”为后缀。又或依“puthu hutvā jātanti pathavī”(广布而生,故名为地),在“jāta”(生)的意义上,附以taddhita后缀“vī”。“sahayate khamiyate sahanaṃ”(能忍、能容,故名为忍),或“sahati khamatīti sahanaṃ”(能忍、能容故名为忍),即安忍、忍辱。“sahadhātu”表忍辱,“yu”为后缀。具有如大地般忍辱、宽容者,即是“pathavīsahano”——胜者。由此称颂其为“如地忍者”。正如大地对抛洒其上的种种净与不净之物悉能忍受,不起抗拒,亦不迎合;同样地,胜者于一切可意与不可意境皆能忍受,于彼不起抗拒或迎合。因此称颂为“如地忍者”,此即是义。故于《譬喻》经中说:显示巴利原文
Pathavīsahananti pathavī viya khantisampannaṃ khantivantaṃ vā. Pathanti patiṭṭhahanti ettha tarupabbatādayoti pathavī, bhūmi. Pathadhātu patiṭṭhāyaṃ vīpaccayo. Atha vā puthu hutvā jātanti pathavī. Jātataddhitatthe vīpaccayo. Sahayate khamiyate sahanaṃ, sahati khamatīti vā sahanaṃ, adhivāsanakhanti. Sahadhātu khantiyaṃ yu. Pathavī viya sahanaṃ khamanaṃ yassa soti pathavīsahano, jino. Taṃ pathavīsahanaṃ. Yathā hi pathavī attano upari pakkhittaṃ sucimpi asucimpi sabbaṃ sahati, na paṭighānunayaṃ karoti, evaṃ jino iṭṭhārammaṇampi aniṭṭhārammaṇampi sabbaṃ sahati, na tattha paṭighānunayaṃ karotīti pathavīsahananti thometīti adhippāyo. Tena vuttaṃ apadānapāḷiyaṃ –
于得与失不执著,于恭敬与轻慢亦不执著;
诸佛犹如大地,是故无有怨敌。”
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Lābhālābhe na sajjanti, sammānanavimānane; Pathavīsadisā buddhā, tasmā te na virādhiyā’’ti.
“我敬礼胜者,我顶礼”是此处的句法连接。显示巴利原文
Ahaṃ jinaṃ paṇamāmi vandāmīti sambandho.
此即此处的简要解释。我以至诚礼敬、稽首胜者——征服五魔的佛陀。他具足百福所成之祥瑞相,具足由无量波罗蜜福德威力所生的三十二大人相;远离尘垢,因无贪等尘垢而离尘;具足如虚空般的智慧,即如虚空之一切知智;具足如须弥山般的定,即如须弥山般不动之定;具足如水生花般清凉的戒,与如水莲花相似、极清凉、无量的戒相应;具足如大地般的忍辱,即如大地般的安忍者。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepayojanā. Satapuññajalakkhaṇikaṃ anekapāramīpuññatejena jātena dvattiṃsamahāpurisalakkhaṇena sampannaṃ, virajaṃ rāgarajādīnaṃ abhāvā vigatarajaṃ, gaganūpamadhiṃ ākāsūpamasabbaññutañāṇavantaṃ, dhitimerusamaṃ sinerupabbatasadisaṃ acalasamādhivantaṃ, jalajūpamasītala sīlayutaṃ. Udakajātappadumasadisena accantaatisītalena asaṅkhyeyyasīlena sampayuttaṃ, pathavīsahanaṃ pathavī viya khantisampannaṃ, khantivantaṃ vā, jinaṃ pañcamāravijayaṃ buddhaṃ ahaṃ sakkaccaṃ paṇamāmi vandāmīti.
善慧者佛陀,犹如白昼的日轮,
在那令人喜悦的石座上,光辉照耀;
安坐之后,宣说赐予寂静安乐之法;
为诸天众,如破暗冥;我恒常敬礼。
显示巴利原文 Yo buddho sumati dive divākarova, Sobhanto ratijanane silāsanamhi; Āsīno sivasukhadaṃ adesi dhammaṃ, Devānaṃ tamasadisaṃ namāmi niccaṃ.
13 如是,以第十二偈敬礼胜者已,今欲以于忉利天宫、向以母天子为首之化生诸天宣说阿毗达摩之功德,称扬而敬礼,故说“那位佛陀,善慧者……”等偈。此偈由 ma、na、ja、ra 诸音组、一个 ga 音组、三个 ya 音组及十个 ya 音组构成,故应视为具十三音节之 Pahassiṇī 偈。如《Vuttodaya》所说:“以 mnā、jarā、go,及三十与十音节,彼为 Pahassiṇī。”显示巴利原文
13. Evaṃ dvādasamagāthāya jinaṃ vanditvā idāni tāvatiṃsapure mātudevaputtappamukhānaṃ upapattidevānaṃ abhidhammaṃ desaka guṇena abhitthavitvā vanditukāmo yo buddho sumatityādigāthamāha. Ayaṃ pana ma na ja ra gaṇehi ca ekagarunā ca tīhi yatīhi ca dasahi yatīhi ca racitattā terasakkhara saṃyuttā pahassiṇīgāthāti daṭṭhabbā. Vuttañhetaṃ vuttodaye ‘‘mnā jarā go tidasayatippahassiṇī sā’’ti.
释义为:若一偈颂中,依次有 mnā 音组、ma 音组、na 音组、jarā 音组、ja 音组、ra 音组、go 音组、一个重音节、三十音节及十音节,则此偈名为 Pahassiṇī 偈。其中,“那位善慧者佛陀,曾为诸天宣说佛法”是句义关联。Yo 为不定指示代词,其词源释义不须赘述。正如音韵学家所说:显示巴利原文
Tassattho. Yassaṃ paṭipādaṃ mnā magaṇa nagaṇā ca jarā ja gaṇa ragaṇā ca go garu ca tidasayati tiyati ca dasayati ca ce siyā, sā gāthā pahassiṇīgāthā nāmāti. Tattha sumati yo buddho dhammaṃ devānaṃ adesīti sambandho. Yoti aniyamavācakasabbanāmapadaṃ. Tassa vacanattho na kātabbo. Vuttañhi saddavidūhi –
约定俗成之名、不变词,以及呼格等,亦复如是;
“Sabbanāmanti”于此诸义中,并未对六者作解析。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Ruḷhīkhyātaṃ nipātañcu, pasaggālapanaṃ tathā; Sabbanāmanti etesu, na kato viggaho chasū’’ti.
或者,“sabbanāmabhāvaṃ yātīti yo”,即进入整体名称状态者,或进入不定指示状态者。“sabbanāmabhāvena yāti pavattatīti vā yo”,即以整体名称状态而行、流转者。“aniyamavācakabhāvena yāti pavattatīti vā yo”,即以不定指示状态而行、流转者。“sabbanāmabhāvena yātabbo ñātabboti vā yo”,即应通过整体名称状态而被了知者,或“yātabbo ñātabbo etena aniyamatthoti vā yo”,即应以此了知不定义者。获得名为“sabbanāma”的“ya”字。其义为“yo, yā, so”等。“Buddho”指已证悟四圣谛法者,或已证悟一切所知法者。而其词义已如前所述。“Sumatī”指具有美妙的一切知智,或具有教说智。因为在此处,当说“向天人说法”时,一切知智被称为“sumati”。“Manati jānāti sabbañeyyadhammaṃ desetabbadhammaṃ vāti mati”,即了知一切所知法或应说之法,故为“mati”。“man”字根意为知。美妙之智为“sumati”,即获得具足三种能力的一切知智:能如实了知一切所知法之自性、能了知应说之法之种种方式、能辨别应度化众生之志向、根性等。“Sumatī”一词在此即显示,唯有具足一切知智,才能作为阿毗达摩论说的发起之因,而非其他,由此阐明阿毗达摩论说非他人所能共通的特性。“Sundarā mati assa asmiṃ vā atthīti sumati, buddho”,即此人或此中存在美妙之智,故为“sumati”,指佛陀。此为复合词末之派生词。依“tadassatthīti”等经句,以“ca”字故,无后缀。如“pītisukha”之例。正如《波罗夷篇注释》所说:“此喜与此乐存在于彼禅那,或在此禅那中存在,故此禅那称为‘pītisukha’。”显示巴利原文
Atha vā sabbanāmabhāvaṃ yātīti yo, aniyamavācaka bhāvaṃ yātīti vā yo. Sabbanāmabhāvena yāti pavattatīti vā yo. Aniyamavācakabhāvena yāti pavattatīti vā yo. Sabbanāmabhāvena yātabbo ñātabboti vā yo, yātabbo ñātabbo etena aniyamatthoti vā yo. Sabbanāmasaṅkhātaṃ yaitipadaṃ labbhati. Yo yādi soti attho. Buddhoti paṭividdhacatusaccadhammo, paṭividdhasabbañeyyadhammo vā. Tassa pana vacanattho heṭṭhā vuttoyeva. Sumatīti sundarasabbaññutañāṇavāto, desanāñāṇavāto vā. Adesi dhammaṃ devānanti vuccamānattā hi idha sabbaññuta ñāṇaṃ sumatīti vuccati. Manati jānāti sabbañeyyadhammaṃ desetabbadhammaṃ vāti mati. Manadhātu ñāṇeti. Sundarā mati sumati, sabbañeyyadhammānaṃ yathāsabhāvajānanasamatthaṃ tesaṃ dese tabbappakārajānanasamatthaṃ bodhetabbapuggalānaṃ āsayādhi muttiyādivibhāvanasamatthañcāti tisamatthasampannaṃ sabbaññutañāṇaṃ labbhati. Sumatīti iminā hi sabbaññutañāṇameva abhidhammakathāya samuṭṭhānabhāve samatthaṃ. Nāññanti imamatthaṃ dīpento abhidhammakathāya anaññasādhāraṇabhāvaṃ dasseti. Sundarā mati assa asmiṃ vā atthīti sumati, buddho. Samāsanta taddhitāyaṃ. Tadassatthītivī cāti sutte casaddena apaccayo. Yathā pītisukhanti. Vuttañhi pārājikaṇḍaṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘ayañca pīti idañca sukhaṃ assa jhānassa asmiṃ vā jhāne atthīti idaṃ jhānaṃ pītisukhanti vuccatī’’ti.
“Dive”指在白天。“Sūriyobhāsena dibbati etthāti divo”,即因太阳光而于此照耀,故名“divo”。“div”字根意为光耀,加后缀“a”。于彼“diva”(天空、白天)中。“Divā karovāti sūriyo iva”,正如太阳在白昼造作一般。“Divādinaṃ karotīti divākaro, sūriyo”,即造作白昼等者,为“divākaro”,指太阳。以“divā”为前缀,“kara”字根意为造作,加后缀“a”。或者,“divā divase karo raṃsi assāti divākaro”,即白昼时,其光芒为“kara”,故名“divākaro”。“kara”一词意为光芒。“Sobhanto”指正在闪耀。“Subhati virocati chabbaṇṇaraṃsiādīhīti sobhanto, buddho”,即以六色光芒等照耀、闪耀,故为“sobhanto”,指佛陀。“subha”字根意为闪耀或光辉,加后缀“ant”。显示巴利原文
Diveti divase. Sūriyobhāsena dibbati etthāti divo. Divudhātu jutiyaṃ a. Tasmiṃ dive. Divā karovāti sūriyo iva. Divādinaṃ karotīti divākaro, sūriyo. Divāsaddūpa pada karadhātu karaṇe a. Atha vā divā divase karo raṃsi assāti divākaro. Karasaddo hi raṃsivācako. Sobhantoti virocamāno hutvā. Subhati virocati chabbaṇṇaraṃsiādīhīti sobhanto, buddho. Subhadhātu sobhe, dittiyaṃ vā antapaccayo. Bhagavā hi chabbaṇṇaraṃsīhi dvattiṃsamahāpurisalakkhaṇehi asītyānubyañjanalakkhaṇehi ca devānaṃ majjhe sobhati virocatīti attho. Ratijananeti devānaṃ atappakapītisomanassuppādane, pemuppādane vā. Ramanaṃ rati. Ramudhātu kīḷāyanti. Taṃ janeti uppādetīti ratijananaṃ. Silāsanaṃ. Ratisaddūpapada janadhātu janane yu. Tasmiṃ ratijanane.
“Silāsanamhīti tidasālaye, pāricchattakamūle jāte nikkhitte vā”,即在三十三天宫殿中,生于或置于波利质多罗树下的石座。其长六十由旬,宽五十由旬,厚十五由旬,色泽如胜利花或红色迦昙婆花,柔软细滑,名为“paṇḍukampala”的石座。“Sakkena seviyatīti silaṃ”,即被帝释所依用,故为“sila”,指石头。“sidha”字根意为依用,加“ala”后缀。“Āsiyati etthāti āsanaṃ”,即在此处坐,故为“āsana”。或者,“āgantvā seviyati etthāti āsanaṃ”,即来此而依用,故为“āsana”。前缀“ā”加“sidha”字根意为依用,加“yu”后缀。“Silaṃ eva āsanaṃ silāsanaṃ”,即石头即是座,故为“silāsana”,指“paṇḍukampala”石座。在那个石座上。“Āsīnoti dasahi cakkavāḷasahassehi āgamma sannisinnānaṃ devānaṃ gaṇena parivārito hutvā nisīdanto”,即被来自一万轮围世界聚集而坐的天众所围绕,正在坐下。“Āsīdanaṃ nisajjanaṃ āsīno”,即坐的行为为“āsīno”。或者,“āsamantato sīdati vasatīti vā āsīno”,即从各处来而坐、而住,故为“āsīno”。或者,“abhidhammakathābhimukhaṃ sīdati nisajjatīti vā āsīno, buddho”,即面向阿毗达摩论说而坐、而就座,故为“āsīno”,指佛陀。前缀“ā”加“sīda”字根意为就座。或加“ta”后缀,变为“īṇa”,再变为“ṇa”,词根末音省略。“Sivasukhadanti nibbānasukhadāyakaṃ”,即能赐予涅槃乐者。“Ariyehi seviyatīti sivaṃ, nibbānaṃ”,即被圣者所依用,故为“siva”,指涅槃。“sidha”字根意为依用,加“ava”后缀。或者,“rāgaggiādīhi samati upasamati etthāti sivaṃ, nibbānaṃ”,即贪欲之火等在此处平息、寂止,故为“siva”,指涅槃。“samu”字根意为寂止,加“riva”后缀。而在《阿毗达摩灯论注释》中说:“‘sivaṃ khemabhāvaṃ karotīti sivaṃ’,即作安稳状态,故为‘siva’;或‘saṃsārabhīrukehi sevitabbattā vā sivaṃ’,即应为轮回怖畏者所依用,故为‘siva’。以‘yadādi’等加‘va’后缀。”“Sukhayatīti sukhaṃ”,即令快乐,故为“sukha”。其义为:令彼生起者,使其快乐。或者,“suṭṭhu dukkhaṃ khanatīti sukhaṃ”,即善能掘除苦,故为“sukha”。前缀“su”加“khanu”字根意为掘除,加“kvi”后缀。“Sivassa nibbānassa sukhaṃ sivasukhaṃ, taṃ dadātīti sivasukhadaṃ, abhidhammadhammo”,即涅槃之乐为“sivasukha”,能赐予彼者,为“sivasukhada”,指阿毗达摩法。以“sivasukha”为前导词,“dā”字根意为给予,加“a”后缀。因为凡听闻阿毗达摩法者,彼即赐予其涅槃乐,此为义。显示巴利原文
Silāsanamhīti tidasālaye, pāricchattakamūle jāte nikkhitte vā dīghato saṭṭhiyojane vitthārato paṇṇāsa yojane puthulato pannarasayojane vaṇṇato jayasumanapupphasadise rattakampalavaṇṇe vā saṇhasukhume paṇḍukampa lanāmake silāsane. Sakkena seviyatīti silaṃ. Pāsāṇo . Sidhātu sevāyaṃ alapaccayo. Āsiyati etthāti āsanaṃ. Atha vā āgantvā seviyati etthāti āsanaṃ. Āpubbasidhātu sevāyaṃ yu. Silaṃeva āsanaṃ silāsanaṃ. Paṇḍukampalasilāsanaṃ labbhati. Tasmiṃ silāsanamhi. Āsīnoti dasahi cakkavāḷasahassehi āgamma sannisinnānaṃ devānaṃ gaṇena parivārito hutvā nisīdanto. Āsīdanaṃ nisajjanaṃ āsīno. Āsamantato sīdati vasatīti vā āsīno. Abhidhammakathābhimukhaṃ sīdati nisajjatīti vā āsīno, buddho. Āpubbasīdadhātu nisajjāyaṃ. Visaraṇa gatyāvasānesu vā tapaccayo. Tassa īṇādeso, ṇassanattaṃ, dhātvantalopo. Sivasukhadanti nibbānasukhadāyakaṃ. Ariyehi seviyatīti sivaṃ, nibbānaṃ. Sidhātu sevāyaṃ avo. Atha vā rāgaggiādīhi samati upasamati etthāti sivaṃ, nibbānaṃ. Samudhātu upasame rivo. Abhidhānappadīpikaṭīkāyaṃ pana ‘‘sivaṃ khemabhāvaṃ karotīti sivaṃ, saṃsārabhīrukehi sevitabbattā vā sivaṃ. Yadādinā vapaccayo’’ti vuttaṃ. Sukhayatīti sukhaṃ. Yassuppajjati, taṃ sukhitaṃ karotīti attho. Atha vā suṭṭhu dukkhaṃ khanatīti sukhaṃ. Supubba khanudhātu avadāraṇe kvi. Sivassa nibbānassa sukhaṃ sivasukhaṃ, taṃ dadātīti sivasukhadaṃ, abhidhammadhammo. Sivasukhasaddūpapadadādhātu a. Yo hi abhidhammadhammaṃ suṇāti, so tassa nibbānasukhaṃ dadātīti attho.
“Adesi dhammaṃ devānanti devānaṃ dhammaṃ adesīti sambandho”,即“向天人说法”意为:向天人宣说了法,此为句子的关联。“Ettha ca dhammanti nānānayavicittaṃ gambhīraṃ saṇhasukhumaṃ duddasaṃ abhidhamma dhammaṃ”,在此,“法”指具多种理趣、甚深、微细、难见的阿毗达摩法。“Attano sabhāvaṃ dhāretīti dhammo”,即保持自性,故为“法”;或“paṇḍitehi dhāriyati na bālehīti vā dhammo”,即被智者所持,而非愚者,故为“法”,指阿毗达摩藏。“dhara”字根意为持,加“ramma”后缀。“Taṃ dhammaṃ”,那个法。“Devānanti pubbe manussaloke mātubhūtadevaputtappamukhānaṃ upapattidevānaṃ”,即“天人”指以前在人世间曾为其母的天子为首的化生天人。此义在《殊胜义注释》中曾说:显示巴利原文
Adesi dhammaṃ devānanti devānaṃ dhammaṃ adesīti sambandho. Ettha ca dhammanti nānānayavicittaṃ gambhīraṃ saṇhasukhumaṃ duddasaṃ abhidhamma dhammaṃ. Attano sabhāvaṃ dhāretīti dhammo, paṇḍitehi dhāriyati na bālehīti vā dhammo, abhidhammapiṭakaṃ. Dharadhātu dhāraṇe rammapaccayo. Taṃ dhammaṃ. Devānanti pubbe manussaloke mātubhūtadevaputtappamukhānaṃ upapattidevānaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ aṭṭhasālinīaṭṭhakathāyaṃ –
“以母亲为首,凭其智慧与威力;
他为诸天转动了阿毗达摩论说之道。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Mātaraṃ pamukhaṃ katvā, tassā paññāya tejasā; Abhidhammakathāmaggaṃ, devānaṃ sampavattayī’’ti.
此处,‘母亲’一词应理解为:往昔在人世间曾为其母的天子。此义在《胜者庄严》圣典中说:显示巴利原文
Ettha ca mātarantipadassa pubbe manussaloke mātubhūtaṃ devaputtanti attho daṭṭhabbo. Vuttañhetaṃ jinālaṅkārapāḷiyaṃ –
于是,母亲带着儿子,回到自己的家;
于第七天命终,得生为天子。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Tato puttaṃ gahetvāna, gatā mātā sakaṃ gharaṃ; Sattamiyaṃ cutā gantvā, devaputtattamāgamī’’ti.
《复注》中说:“菩萨的母亲于出胎后第七天命终,成为天子,生于兜率天。”此处即以“天子”一词所说。《伍达夷长老偈注》中说:“‘被围绕’一词所用阴性词尾,是基于前世所成的女性身或天女身而作。而天人投生则取男性之身出生。”《本生经复注》中亦以“母天子”一词说:“‘从天而降’意指母天子于三个月宣说阿毗达摩藏后,从天降下之时。”《阿毗达摩入门复注》中亦以“母天子”一词说:“‘天众’指当时以母天子为首的、遍满一万个轮围界的化生天众,皆为受法者。”《吉祥摩耶夫人经》中亦以“天子”一词说:“吉祥摩耶夫人于入胎第七天命终,以自身善业之力,成为天子,生于兜率天。”《宝灯复注》中亦说:“‘母’指往昔在人间的母亲,‘天子’是其义。因为吉祥摩耶生下菩萨七日后,从此处命终,即于兜率天以男性之身出生,而非女性之身。”因此,“母”一词应理解为“曾是母亲的天子”。显示巴利原文
Taṭṭīkāyañca ‘‘bodhisattamātā gabbhavuṭṭhānato sattame divase kālaṅkatvā tusitapure devaputto hutvā nibbattī’’ti vuttaṃ. Ettha ca devaputtasaddena vuttameva. Kāḷudāyī theragāthāaṭṭhakathāyañca ‘‘parivāritāti ca itthiliṅganiddeso purimattabhāvasiddhaṃ itthibhāvaṃ devatābhāvaṃ vā sandhāya kato. Devūpapatti pana purisabhāvena jātā’’ti vuttaṃ. Jātakaṭīkāyañca ‘‘devorohaneti mātudevaputtassa temāsaṃ abhidhammapiṭakaṃ desetvā devorohanakāle’’ti mātudevaputtasaddena vuttaṃ. Abhidhammāvatāraṭīkāyañca ‘‘devānanti tadā dhammapaṭiggāhakānaṃ dasasahassacakkavāḷādhivāsīnaṃ mātudevaputtappamukhānaṃ upapattidevāna’’nti mātudevaputta saddena vuttaṃ. Sirīmahāmāyāsatthe ca ‘‘sirīmahāmāyā devīpi sattadivaseyeva vasitvā kālaṅkatvā attano puññānubhāvena tusitabhavane devaputto hutvā nibbattī’’ti devaputtasaddena vuttaṃ. Maṇidīpaṭīkāyañca ‘‘mātaranti pubbe manussaloke mātubhūtaṃ devaputtanti attho. Sirīmahāmāyā hi bodhisattaṃ vijāyitvā sattāhamattaṃ ṭhatvā ito cavitvā tusitabhavane purisabhāveneva nibbatto, na itthibhāvenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tasmā mātarantipadassa mātubhūtaṃ devaputtanti attho mukhyena daṭṭhabbo.
《蜜义灯复注》中说:
大仙的父亲名为净饭王,
佛陀的母亲则名摩耶。
她以胎孕育菩萨,
身坏之后,于天界受乐;
乔达摩夫人寿尽命终,从此处谢灭,
成就、受用天界之欲乐。
显示巴利原文 Madhusārattha dīpanīṭīkāyaṃ pana – ‘‘Suddhodano nāma pitā mahesino, Buddhassa mātā pana māyā nāma. Bodhisattaṃ parihariya kucchinā, Kāyassa bhedā tidivasmiṃ modati; Sā gotamī kālaṃkatā ito cutā, Dibbehi kāmehi samaṅgibhūtā; Āmodati kāmaguṇehi pañcahi, Parivāritā devagaṇehi tehī’’ti; Therāpāḷi;
该注释中说:“‘被围绕’的阴性词尾,是依前世已成就的女性状态或天女状态而作的。然而天人的出生是以男性身投生,因此‘母’是依人类状态而言的。”但《长老注》并不接纳此说,其他注疏与复注中亦无此类说法。发愿时,并没有“先成为佛母而后愿成男性”的发愿;在三十法中,佛母亦无男性身。因此诸智者说“此事应加审察”。然而那种说法不应被采纳。何以故?因为智者说“应以怀疑之语审察”,且与上述注疏和复注之语直接相违。因为“天神”一词通用于天子、梵天与天女。例如,在“那时,某天神于深夜,具殊胜容色”等处是指天子。《小部诵解注》中说:“‘某’是不定指代。因其姓名与族姓不显著,故说‘某’。天神即是天子。此词男女共通,然而于此则是男性。他是天子,只依共通之名而称为天神。”在《须尼陀长老譬喻》中所说的“如是那七百位天神,从殊胜的梵天宫殿出来”等处则是指梵天。在《灯宫事》中所说——显示巴利原文
Tadaṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘parivāritāti ca itthiliṅganiddeso purimatta bhāvasiddhaṃ itthibhāvaṃ devatābhāvaṃ vā sandhāya kato. Devūpapatti pana purisabhāvena jātāti vuttattā mātaranti manussattabhāvavasena vutta’’nti vadanti. Theraṭṭhakathā pana nasaṅgahāruḷhā. Aññaṭṭhakathāṭīkāsu ca tādisaṃ vacanaṃ natthi. Patthanākāle ca buddhamātā hutvā pacchā puriso homīti patthanā natthi. Tiṃsadhammatāyañca buddhamātuyā purisabhāvo nāma natthi. Tasmā taṃ vīmaṃsitabbantipi vidū vadantīti vuttaṃ. Taṃ pana na gahetabbaṃ. Kasmā, saṃsayavacanena vīmaṃsitabbanti vidūvadantīti ca vuttattā ca yathāvuttaṭṭhakathāṭīkāvacanehi ujukaṃ viruddhattā ca. Devatāsaddo hi devaputte brahme devadhītāya ca vattati. Tathāhesa ‘‘atha kho aññatarā devatā abhikkantāya rattiyā abhikkantavaṇṇā’’tiādīsu devaputte. Vuttañhi khuddakapāṭhaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘aññatarāti aniyamita niddeso. Sā hi nāmagottato apākaṭā. Tasmā aññatarāti vuttā. Devoyeva devatā. Itthipurisasādhāraṇamevetaṃ. Idha pana purisoeva. So devaputto. Kintusādhāraṇanāmavasena devatāti vutto’’ti. Sunītattheraapadāna pāḷiyaṃ āgatāsu ‘‘tathā tā devatā sattasatā uḷārā brahmā vimānā abhinikkhamitvā’’tiādīsu brahme. Padīpavimānavatthupāḷiyaṃ vuttāsu –
你以那殊胜的容色伫立,天神啊;
照亮一切方所,犹如群星中的药草星。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Abhikkantena vaṇṇena, yā tvaṃ tiṭṭhati devate; Obhāsentī disā sabbā, osadhī viya tārakā’’ti.
诸如“天女”等词,也应同样理解“被围绕”一词。因此,应以法护长老所造《长老注》之言,及善觉长老所造《阿毗达摩入门复注》之言为依准,理解为“母天子”之义。然而,现今有些阿阇梨依据《长老偈》中的“被围绕”一词与《蜜义灯复注》之说,解释为“母天女”,那仅是他们的个人见解。“宣说”是指以大悲为先导,以一切智智而宣说。“无等者即是”是连接词。其中,“彼”指佛陀。“无等”即无可比拟,因无有与之可比拟者,故为“无等”,即指佛陀。在含摄天界的世间中,于戒等功德上无有与佛陀等同者,这便是它的含义。所以《律藏大品》说——显示巴利原文
Ādīsu devadhītāya. Evaṃ pana parivāritāsaddopi veditabbo. Tasmā ācariyadhammapālattherena katāya theraṭṭhakathāya vuttavacanaṃ jātakaṭīkāya vuttavacanañca ācariyasumaṅgalattherena katāya abhidhammāvatāraṭīkāya vuttavacanaṃ pamāṇaṃ katvā mātudevaputtoti atthoyeva daṭṭhabbo. Etarahi pana keci ācariyā therāpāḷiyaṃ āgataṃ parivāritāsaddañca madhusāratthadīpanīṭīkāvacanañca paṭicca mātudevadhītāti vadanti. Taṃ pana tesaṃ matimattanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Adesīti mahākaruṇāpubbaṅgamena sabbaññutañāṇena kathesi. Asadisaṃ tanti sambandho. Ettha ca tanti buddhaṃ. Asadisanti appaṭipuggalaṃ. Natthi etassa sadiso paṭipuggaloti asadiso, buddho. Sadevake loke sīlādiguṇena buddhena sadiso koci puggalo natthīti attho. Tenāha vinayamahāvaggapāḷiyaṃ –
我无有导师,亦无与我等同者;
于含天世间中,无有与我匹敌者。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Na me ācariyo atthi, sadiso me na vijjati; Sadevakasmiṃ lokasmiṃ, natthi me paṭipuggalo’’ti.
“常”即恒常、不断,于一切时无有间断,这是它的意思。“我常顶礼那位无有等者的佛陀”——这是该句的连结。显示巴利原文
Niccantisatataṃ samitaṃ, sabbakālaṃ nirantaranti attho. Asadisaṃ taṃ buddhaṃ niccaṃ namāmīti sambandhoti.
此处略释如下:善慧(须弥陀)智者,具足一切智之风,或具足说法智之风,如是之佛陀,日日犹如太阳,光辉闪耀,于令诸天生起无热恼喜乐与喜爱之处,坐在名为黄斑石的石座上,为以母天子为首的化生天众,宣说那赐予涅槃之乐的甘露法、阿毗达摩法。我恒常不断地顶礼那位无等的佛陀。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepayojanā. Sumati sundarasabbaññuta ñāṇavāto, desanāñāṇavāto vā. Yo yādiso buddho. Dive divase divākarova sūriyoiva, sobhanto virocamāno hutvā, ratijanane devānaṃ atappakapīti somanassuppādane, pemuppādane vā, silāsanamhi paṇḍu kampalanāmake silāsane, āsīno nisīdanto hutvā sivasukhadaṃ nibbānasukhadāyakaṃ, dhammaṃ abhidhammadhammaṃ, devānaṃ mātu pubbadevaputtappamukhānaṃ upapattidevānaṃ adesi kathesi. Asadisaṃ appaṭipuggalaṃ taṃ buddhaṃ ahaṃ niccaṃ satataṃ namāmi vandāmīti.
其足下莲花的柔和光辉,
于无有过患的三世间中无有染污。
成就那无与伦比的最上依怙,
我顶礼那位为一切世间所尊崇、无能等比者。
显示巴利原文 Yo pādapaṅkajamuduttalarājikehi, Lokehi tīhivikalehi nirākulehi; Sampāpuṇe nirupameyyatameva nātho, Taṃ sabbalokamahitaṃ asamaṃ namāmi.
14 十四、如此以十三首偈颂礼敬佛陀之后,现在欲借佛陀足掌上那由美妙纹饰所现的八百辐轮相来作赞叹与礼敬,因而说出“Yo pādapaṅkaja...”等偈。然而,此偈是由ta、bha、ja、ja音节组及两个重音组成,故应视为一首由十四个音节组成的“春日吉祥”偈。正如《Vuttodaya》中所说:“ta、bha、ja、ja、ga、go被称为春日吉祥。”其意思是:在一偈的每一行中,若具有ta、bha、ja音节组,以及ja音节组与重音,并以ga与重音收尾,则此偈被精通韵律者称为“春日吉祥”偈。显示巴利原文
14. Evaṃ terasamagāthāya buddhaṃ vanditvā idāni buddhassa pādatale vicittappavattehi aṭṭhasatacakkalakkhaṇehi thomitvā vanditukāmo yo pādapaṅkajatyādigāthamāha. Ayaṃ pana ta bha ja ja gaṇehi ca garudvayena racitattā cuddasakkharehi yuttā vasantatilakāgāthāti daṭṭhabbā. Vuttañhetaṃ vuttodaye ‘‘vuttā vasantatilakā ta bha jā jagā go’’ti. Tassāyamattho. Yassaṃ paṭipādaṃ ta bha jā ta bha ja gaṇā ca jagā jagaṇagarukā ca go garu ca ce bhavanti, sā gāthā vasantatilakāgāthāti chandācariyehi vuttāti.
其中,关联句为:那位保护者——以其无缺、无乱的足莲花柔软掌纹,确实达到了无与伦比的境界,为一切世间所尊崇、无可匹敌——我礼敬那位保护者。然而,此处我们不依词序,而依义理顺序来显示注释。所谓“保护者”(yo nātho),即是作为一切众生皈依处的佛陀。而“taṃ padaṃ sampāpuṇeeva”中的“taṃ padaṃ”应与其主语关联。至于“保护者”一词的词义,前文已述。“无缺”(avikalehi)意为:以无任何缺失、具足一切足轮相而圆满。所谓“有缺”(vikala),即“vi(坏、异)”与“kal(去)”结合,意为变坏散失。“无缺”(avikalā)指足纹中无任何缺失,也就是双足上明显的相好无有残缺。以这些无缺之相。显示巴利原文
Tattha pana yo nātho avikalehi nirākulehi pādapaṅkajamuduttalehitīhi lokehi nirupameyyataṃ sampāpuṇeeva sabbalokamahitaṃ asamaṃ taṃ nāthaṃ ahaṃ namāmīti sambandho. Ettha pana saddakkamena adassetvā atthakkamena vaṇṇanaṃ dassayissāma. Yo nāthoti yo yādiso sabbasattānaṃ paṭisaraṇo buddho. Taṃ pana padaṃ sampāpuṇeevātipade kattubhāvena sambandhitabbaṃ. Nāthassa pana vacanattho heṭṭhā vuttoyeva. Avikalehīti kenaci avekallehi sabbapādacakkalakkhaṇehi sampuṇṇehīti attho. Virūpaṃ kalati gacchatīti vikalo. Vipubbakaladhātu gatiyaṃ a. Natthi kiñci vikalaṃ etissā rājiyāti avikalā, pādarāji. Pādadvaye paribyattaṃ saṇṭhānarūpaṃ kiñci vikalaṃ natthīti attho. Tehi avikalehi.
“无乱”(nirākulehi)意为:远离杂乱。即足轮相彼此不相混杂、不相交缠。所谓“杂乱”(ākula),即“ā(遍)”与“kul(束缚)”结合,意为遍加束缚;或“ā(遍)”与“kul(覆障、庄严)”结合,意为遍覆或庄严。足纹中无有彼此混杂的杂乱,故称“无乱”(nirākulā)。以这些无乱之相。而此二词(无缺、无乱)是“足莲花柔软掌纹”的修饰语。“足莲花柔软掌纹”(pādapaṅkajamuduttalarājikehi)意为:在名为足的莲花之柔软掌上,所生起的八百轮相纹路。其中,“足”(pādo)由“pad(去)”的语根衍生,意为以此而行。“莲花”(paṅkaja)即生于泥中者,指红莲花。称为足的莲花即是“足莲花”(pādapaṅkaja),或者说足如莲花,故称“足莲花”。“柔软”(mudu)由“mud(行)”的语根衍生,以柔软性而运行。“掌”(tala)由“tal(安立)”的语根衍生,为安立之处。柔软之掌即是“柔软掌”(muduttala),足莲花的柔软掌即是“足莲花柔软掌”(pādapaṅkaj显示巴利原文
Nirākulehīti ākulavirahitehi. Pādacakkalakkhaṇānaṃ aññamaññaṃ asaṃmissehi asaṃsaṭṭhehīti attho. Ābhuso kulati bandhatīti ākulaṃ, āpubba kuladhātu bandhane a. Atha vā ābhuso kulati āvarati sobhananti ākulaṃ, natthi ākulaṃ aññamaññamissaṃ etissā pādarāji yāti nirākulā, pādarāji. Tehi nirākulehi. Taṃ pana padadvayaṃ pādapaṅkajamuduttalarājikehītipade visesanaṃ. Pādapaṅkajamuduttalarājikehīti pādasaṅkhātapadumassa saṇha tale jātehi aṭṭhasatacakkalakkhaṇarājikehi padati gacchati etenāti pādo. Padadhātu gatimhiṇa. Paṅke kaddame jātanti paṅkajaṃ, padumaṃ. Pādasaṅkhātaṃ paṅkajaṃ pādapaṅkajaṃ. Paṅkajaṃiva pādo vā pādapaṅkajaṃ, pādo. Saṇhabhāvena mudati pavattatīti mudu, mudadhātu gatiyaṃ u. Talati patiṭṭhati etthāti talaṃ. Taladhātu patiṭṭhāyaṃ a. Mudu ca taṃ talañcāti muduttalaṃ, pādapaṅkajassa muduttalaṃ pādapaṅkajamuduttalaṃ, rājati dissatīti rājikā, rājati sobhati etenāti rājikā. Rājadhātu sobhane ṇiko. Pādapaṅkaja muduttale jātaṃ aṭṭhasatacakkalakkhaṇasaṅkhātaṃ rājikanti pādapaṅkajamuduttalarājikaṃ, tehi.
然而,所谓八百足轮相应如此理解:世尊足莲花柔软掌的中央可见脐(nābhi);可见被脐所断的圆线(vaṭṭalekhā);可见朝向脐的环绕带(parikkhepapaṭṭa);可见管口(panāḷimukha);可见辐(arā);辐上可见圆线;可见辋(nemi);可见辋珠(nemimaṇikā)。以上仅是巴利圣典中所提及的部分。而广为流传的诸相虽未见于圣典,亦应作如此看待:矛(satti)、吉祥犊(sirīvaccha)、右旋喜旋(nandiyāvaṭṭa)、卍字(sovattiko)、耳环(vaṭaṃsako)、增长瓶(vaḍḍhamānakaṃ)、双鱼(macchayugalaṃ)、吉祥座(bhaddapīṭhaṃ)、钩(aṅkusaṃ)、矛棒(tomaro)、宫殿(pāsādo)、拱门(toraṇaṃ)、白伞(setacchattaṃ)、剑(khaggo)、扇叶(tālavaṇḍaṃ)、孔雀羽扇(morahatthako)、野牛拂尘(vāḷabījani)、顶髻(uṇhīsaṃ)、钵显示巴利原文
Taṃ pana aṭṭhasatapādacakkalakkhaṇaṃ nāmevaṃ veditabbaṃ. Bhagavato pādapaṅkajamudutalassa majjhe nābhi dissati. Nābhipaṭicchinnā vaṭṭalekhā dissati. Nābhimukhaparikkhepapaṭṭo dissati. Panāḷimukhaṃ dissati. Arā dissanti. Aresu vaṭṭalekhā dissanti. Nemi dissati. Nemimaṇikā dissanti. Idaṃ tāva pāḷiāgatameva. Sampahulavāro pana anāgato, so evaṃ daṭṭhabbo. Satti, sirīvaccho, nandiyāvaṭṭaṃ, sovattiko, vaṭaṃsako, vaḍḍhamānakaṃ, macchayugalaṃ, bhaddapīṭhaṃ, aṅkusaṃ, tomaro, pāsādo, toraṇaṃ, setacchattaṃ, khaggo, tālavaṇḍaṃ, morahatthako, vāḷabījani, uṇhīsaṃ, patto , maṇikusumadāmaṃ, nīluppalaṃ, rattuppalaṃ, setuppalaṃ, padumaṃ, puṇḍarikaṃ, puṇṇaghaṭo, puṇṇapāti, samuddo, cakkavāḷaṃ, himavā, sineru, candimasūriyā, nakkhattāni, cattāro mahādīpā, dveparittadīpasahassāni antamaso cakkavatti rañño parisaṃ upādāya sabbo cakkalakkhaṇasseva parivāroti ettakameva majjhimapaṇṇāsaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
《胜庄严鬘注释》中说:“足掌下方生起轮相,故名轮相。双足掌上有二轮,各具千辐。辋环呈金色,脐为靛蓝宝石色。脐中、脐边及脐前有圆线,中间穿孔,轮边自辋向外环绕。矛、吉祥犊、右旋喜旋、卍字、耳环、增长瓶、吉祥座、钩、宫殿、拱门、白伞、剑、扇叶、孔雀手、拂尘、顶髻、钵、宝珠、茉莉花鬘、青莲花、红莲花、红莲、白莲、白睡莲、满瓶、满器、海、轮围山、雪山、须弥山、日轮、月轮、星宿、具眷属的四大洲、具七宝的转轮圣王及其眷属、右旋白螺、金色双鱼、轮兵器、七大恒河、七族山、七清凉海、金色天鹅王、鳄鱼、幢幡、金色轿、金色野牛拂尘、凯拉萨山、狮王、虎王、云马王、布萨六牙象王、婆苏吉龙王、天鹅王、牛王、伊罗婆那象王、金色摩竭鱼、四面金船、带犊的母牛、紧那罗男、紧那罗女、迦陵频伽鸟、孔雀王、苍鹭王、鸳鸯王、共命鸟王、六欲天、十六梵天——如此众多的最上吉祥相,悉皆显现在足掌之上。”依此所说,应知八百足轮相为圆满。显示巴利原文
Jinālaṅkāraṭīkāyaṃ pana ‘‘heṭṭhāpādatalesu cakkāni jātānīti cakkalakkhaṇaṃ nāma dvīsu pādatalesu dve cakkāni ekekasmiṃ sahassamattā arā yuttā honti. Nemivalayaṃ suvaṇṇavaṇṇaṃ. Nābhi indanīlamaṇivaṇṇā. Tasmiṃ majjhe ca nābhipariyante ca nābhimukhe ca vaṭṭalekhā majjhe chiddaṃ cakkapariyante nemito bahiddhā vaṭṭe. Satti, sirīvaccho, nandiyāvaṭṭaṃ, sovattiko, vaṭaṃsakaṃ, vaḍḍhamānakaṃ, bhaddapīṭhaṃ, aṅkuso, pāsādaṃ, toraṇaṃ, setacchattaṃ, khaggaṃ, tālavaṇḍaṃ, mayūrahatthaṃ, cāmaraṃ, uṇhīsaṃ, pattaṃ, maṇi, sumanadāmaṃ, nīluppalaṃ, rattuppalaṃ, rattapadumaṃ, setapadumaṃ, puṇḍarikaṃ, puṇṇakalasaṃ, puṇṇapattaṃ, samuddo, cakkavāḷapabbato, himavantapabbato, merupabbato, sūriyamaṇḍalaṃ, candamaṇḍalaṃ, nakkhattaṃ, saparivārā catumahādīpā, saparivāro sattaratanasamaṅgī cakkavatti, dakkhiṇāvaṭṭa setasaṅkhaṃ, suvaṇṇamacchayugaḷaṃ, cakkāvudhaṃ, sattamahāgaṅgā, sattakulapabbatā, sattasīdantasāgarā, suvaṇṇa haṃsarājā, saṃsumāro, dhajapaṭāko, suvaṇṇasivikā, suvaṇṇavāḷabījani, kelāsapabbato, sīharājā, byaggharājā, valāhakaassarājā, uposathachaddantahatthirājā, vāsukīnāgarājā, haṃsarājā, usabharājā, erāvaṇa hatthirājā, suvaṇṇamakaraṃ, catumukhasuvaṇṇanāvā, savacchakā dhenu, kiṃpuriso, kinnarī, karavīko, mayūrarājā, koñcarājā, cakkavākarājā, jīvañjīvakarājā cha devalokā, soḷasa brahmalokāti ime ettakā aggamaṅgalalakkhaṇā pādatale paññāyantī’’ti vuttaṃ. Iminā ca vacanena aṭṭhasata pādacakkalakkhaṇaṃ paripuṇṇaṃ veditabbanti.
与“三界”相连,意指欲界、色界、无色界三种世间。其词义前已说明。此处的“三界”是表示原因的具格,与“不可比拟”一词构成主谓关系。“不可比拟性”即不可衡量的状态。“应被比较者”为所比。前缀 upa 加词根 mā(衡量)加后缀 ṇya,构成 upameyya。所比之状态为 upameyyataṃ。此足轮纹王没有所比的状态,故称“不可比拟性”。或者说,此足轮纹王无可比喻者,故为“不可比拟者”,即具足轮纹者。其状态为“不可比拟性”。该词在“达到”一词中作宾语,与“达到”相连,意为“正确到达”。为何由三界的足莲柔底而达到不可比拟性?因为除佛陀外,任何天人的足底中心皆无足轮纹。世尊的足莲柔底,由波罗蜜福德威力所生起的八百足轮纹得以具足,他人则无。因此,达到不可比拟性。显示巴利原文
Tīhi lokehīti sambandho. Tīhi kāmarūpārūpa lokehīti attho. Tassa pana vacanattho heṭṭhā vuttoyeva. Taṃ panetaṃ katvatthe karaṇavacanaṃ. Tassa pana padassa nirupameyyāti padena kattubhāvena sambandho. Nirupameyyatanti appameyyabhāvaṃ. Upamitabbanti upameyyaṃ. Upapubba mādhātu pamāne ṇyo. Upameyyassa bhāvo upameyyataṃ. Natthi upameyyataṃ assa rājikassāti nirupameyyataṃ. Atha vā natthi upameyyaṃ etassa rājikassāti nirupameyyo, pādacakkalakkhaṇarājiko labbhati. Tassa bhāvo nirupameyyataṃ. Taṃ pana padaṃ sampāpuṇe evātipade kammaṃ. Sampāpuṇeevāti sambandho. Sammā gacchatievāti attho. Kasmā pana tīhi lokehi pādapaṅkajamudutalehi nirupameyyataṃ pāpuṇātīti. Buddhato aññassa kassaci devamanussassa pādatalamajjhe pādacakkalakkhaṇassa abhāvato. Bhagavato hi pādapaṅkajamudutale pāramipuññānubhāvena nibbattāni aṭṭhasatapādacakkalakkhaṇāni sampāpuṇanti, na aññesaṃ. Tasmā nirupameyyataṃ pāpuṇātīti.
“为一切世间所崇敬”,即被一切世间所供养。应被一切天、人世间崇敬供养者,便是一切世间所崇敬者,此处指庇护主。当如来出世时,凡有大威德的天、人皆供养佛陀,更不用说其他。正如梵天萨汉帕提以须弥山量之宝鬘供养如来;其他天、人也各尽其力,如频婆娑罗王、拘萨罗王等。乃至佛陀般涅槃后,阿育大王为纪念世尊,舍九十六俱胝财宝,于全赡部洲建立八万四千寺院。因此,“他人供养更何待言”。显示巴利原文
Sabbalokamahitanti sabbalokena pūjitaṃ. Sabbena devamanussalokena mahitabbo pūjitabboti sabbaloka mahito, nātho labbhati. Taṃ. Uppanne hi tathāgate ye keci mahesakkhā devamanussā buddhassa pūjenti, pageva aññā. Tathā hi brahmā sahampati sinerumattena ratana dāmena tathāgataṃ pūjeti. Yathābalañca aññepi devā manussā ca bimbisārakosalarājādayo nibbutampi bhagavantaṃ uddissa channavutikoṭidhanaṃ vissajjetvā asoka mahārājā sakalajambudīpe caturāsītivihārasahassāni patiṭṭhāpeti. Kā kathā pana aññesaṃ pūjāti vuttaṃ hoti.
“无等”即与一切人、天、梵天不相似,意为无有匹敌者。无有与其相等、相似之人,故称“无等”,指庇护主。彼具足八十随形好、三十二大丈夫相之端严妙色身,以及一切行相清净之戒蕴等功德宝所成之法身,且于福德、威力、神通、名声、智慧悉达广大之最极究竟。是故与如来相等相似者实无所有,此即“无等”。我礼敬彼无等之庇护主——如此衔接。显示巴利原文
Asamanti sabbamanussadevabrahmehi asadisaṃ. Appaṭipuggalanti attho. Natthi samo sadiso puggalo assāti asamo, nātho. So pana asītianubyañjanapaṭimaṇḍita dvattiṃsa mahāpurisalakkhaṇa vicitrarūpakāyo. Sabbākāra parisuddha sīlakkhandhādiguṇaratanasamiddhadhammakāyo. Puññamahatta thāmamahattaiddhimahatta yasamahatta paññāmahattānaṃ paramukkaṃsa gato ca hoti, tasmā tathāgatena samo sadiso nāma natthīti attho. Taṃ asamaṃ. Tanti nāthaṃ ahaṃ namāmīti sambandho.
此处略释如下:那位庇护主、那位一切众生之皈依处——佛陀,以无缺、无减、无乱、离乱之足莲柔底所生,即名为足莲之柔底所生之八百轮纹王,由三界作为主体,而达到不可比拟、不可衡量之状态,即正确地到达;为一切世间所崇敬,即为一切世间所供养;无等,即与一切人、天、梵天不相似——我礼敬彼庇护主。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepayojanā. Yo nātho yo yādiso sabbasattānaṃ paṭisaraṇo buddho, avikalehi kehici avekallehi, nirākulehi ākulavirahitehi, pādapaṅkaja muduttalarājikehi pādasaṅkhātapadumassa saṇhatale jātehi aṭṭhasatacakkalakkhaṇarājikehi, tīhi lokehi kattubhūtehi, nirupameyyataṃ appameyyabhāvaṃ appamitabba bhāvaṃ vā, sampāpuṇeeva sammā gacchatieva, sabbalokamahitaṃ sabbalokena pūjitaṃ, asamaṃ sabbamanussadevabrahmehi asadisaṃ taṃ nāthaṃ ahaṃ namāmīti.
佛陀,人天共集之处,心意坚固者,
以智慧灯之辉耀,灭除黑暗;
他为希求利益的人与天,带来利益;
我礼敬悲悯者、道、无尽智慧者。
显示巴利原文 Buddhaṃ narānarasamosaraṇaṃ dhitattaṃ, Paññāpadīpajutiyā vihatandhakāraṃ; Atthābhikāmanaradevahitāvahaṃ taṃ, Vandāmi kāruṇikamaggamanantañāṇaṃ.
15 十五、如此,以十四行偈礼敬庇护主之后,现在想要以“人天共集”等七种功德赞叹佛陀而礼敬,故诵出“佛陀,人天共集”等偈颂。应当知道,此偈由tabhajajagaṇa与两个重音节构成,是具有十四音节的“婆散底罗迦”偈。其中例证前面已经说明。显示巴利原文
15. Evaṃ cuddasamagāthāya nāthaṃ natvā idāni narānarasa mosaraṇantyādīhi sattahi guṇehi thomitvā buddhaṃ vanditu kāmo buddhaṃ narānarasamosaraṇantyādigāthamāha. Ayaṃ pana tabhajajagaṇehi garudvayena ca racitattā cuddasakkharehi yuttā vasantatilakāgāthāti daṭṭhabbā. Sādhakaṃ panettha heṭṭhā vuttameva.
其中,“narānarasamosaraṇa”一词应分解为“narānarasamaṃ osaraṇa”。意思为天、人平等的集会处。“nara”与“nara”的词义前已述及。平等地来集于此者,为“samosaraṇa”,指佛陀。前缀sam-ā-加词根sar(行)加后缀yu。人天的集会处,即“narānarasamosaraṇa”,指佛陀。如同大榕树是寻求果实的鸟群的集会处,同样地,佛陀是希求世间与出世间成就的人天集会之处,或皈依处。故以“人天共集”赞叹。显示巴利原文
Tattha pana narānarasamosaraṇanti ettha naraanarasamaṃ osaraṇanti padavibhāgo. Manussadevānaṃ samaṃ osaraṇaṃ sannipatitaṭṭhānanti attho. Narānarasaddassa vacanattho heṭṭhā vuttoyeva. Samaṃ avasaranti sannipatanti etthāti samosaraṇo, buddho. Samaavapubba saradhātu gatiyaṃ yu. Narānarānaṃ manussadevānaṃ samosaraṇo narānarasamosaraṇo, buddho. Yathā hi mahānigrodho phalakāmānaṃ sakuṇa samūhānaṃ samosaraṇaṃ hoti, evaṃ buddho lokiya lokuttarasampattikāmānaṃ manussadevānaṃ samosaraṇo sannipatito paṭisaraṇo vā hoti. Tasmā narānarasamosaraṇanti thometi.
“dhitatta”意指心专注。此处“atta”一词应理解为表示心,如“attasammā paṇidhi”等中的“atta”是心的能诠。依此或由此,相应法住立于一所缘,故为“dhita”,即定。词根dhā(住立)加后缀ta。取所缘者,为“atta”,即心。词根ad(取)加后缀ta。具有定、专注之心者,为“dhitatto”,指佛陀。那就是“dhitatta”。显示巴利原文
Dhitattanti samāhitacittaṃ. Ettha attasaddo attasammā paṇidhi cātiādīsu attasaddo viya cittavācako daṭṭhabbo. Dhiyati ṭhapiyati ettha etena vā ekārammaṇe sampayutta dhammāti dhito, samādhi. Dhādhātu patiṭṭhāyaṃ ta. Ārammaṇaṃ adati ādadātīti attaṃ, cittaṃ. Adadhātu ādāne ta. Dhitaṃ samāhitaṃ attaṃ cittaṃ yassāti dhitatto, buddho. Taṃ dhitattaṃ.
“以智慧灯光之辉耀”:即以称为阿罗汉道智的灯光为工具。能遍知者,名为“智慧”,即阿罗汉道智。其义为:如实地以一切方式通达四谛法。智慧能由断除所知障,以一切方式照亮法之自性,故为“智慧灯”。能照耀者,名为“辉耀”,即智慧灯光。词根 jut(照耀)。智慧灯即是辉耀,为“智慧灯光”。或者,智慧灯之辉耀,为“智慧灯光”,此复合词应依同体与异体的关系看待。以此智慧灯光。显示巴利原文
Paññāpadīpajutiyāti arahattamaggañāṇasaṅkhātapadīpobhāsena karaṇabhūtena. Pajānātīti paññā, arahattamagga ñāṇaṃ. Yathāsabhāvaṃ sabbappakārehi catusaccadhammaṃ paṭivijjhatīti attho. Paññāva ñeyyāvaraṇappahānato sabbapakārehi dhammasabhāvaṃ dīpetīti paññāpadīpo. Jotetīti juti, paññāpadīpobhāso. Judhātu dittiyanti. Paññā padīpoeva juti paññāpadīpajuti. Atha vā paññāpadīpassa juti paññāpadīpajuti, ayaṃ pana samāso abhedabhedū pacārena daṭṭhabbo. Tāya paññāpadīpajutiyā.
“已破黑暗者”:指应被破除的、称为无明的愚痴之暗。由于断除了连同随眠的烦恼,故特别应被破除,称为“已破”。前缀 vi 的词根 han 表伤害义。令盲者生暗,故为黑暗,即称为无明的愚痴。由于覆盖所缘的自性,与黑暗相似,故愚痴被称为黑暗。或者,令盲者——即令智慧眼盲者,故为黑暗,即愚痴。 andha 加上词根 kara 与后缀 ṇa 构成。已破黑暗者,以此故为已破黑暗者,即佛陀。那已破黑暗者。正如世间灯火以光明破除黑暗,同样,佛陀的阿罗汉道智也破除无明之暗,这是所说的。但这仅属浅喻。因为具慧者即使仅结跏趺坐一座,一万世界也成一光明。此即世尊所说:“诸比丘,有四种光明。哪四种?月光、日光、火光、智慧光明。诸比丘,这就是四种光明。诸比丘,此四种光明中,最上者即是智慧光明。”显示巴利原文
Vihatandhakāranti hanitabbaavijjāsaṅkhātamohatamaṃ. Savāsanakilesappahānato visesena hanitabboti vihato. Vipubbahanadhātu hiṃsāyaṃ ta. Andhaṃ tamaṃ karotīti andhakāro, avijjāsaṅkhātamoho. Visayasabhāvapaṭicchādanato andhakārasarikkhakatāya moho andhakāroti vuccati. Atha vā andhaṃ paññācakkhuandhaṃ karotīti andhakāro, moho. Andhasaddūpapada karadhātu ṇa. Vihato andhakāro yena soti vihatandhakāro, buddho. Taṃ vihatandhakāraṃ. Yathā hi loke padīpo attano jutiyā andhakāraṃ hanati, evaṃ buddhassa arahattamaggapaññāpi avijjandhakāraṃ hanatīti vuttā. Ayaṃ pana hīnūpamāti vuccati. Paññāvato hi ekapallaṅkenapi nisinnassa dasasahassi lokadhātu ekapajjotā hoti. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā ‘‘cattārome bhikkhave pajjotā. Katame cattāro. Candapajjoto, sūriyapajjoto, aggipajjoto, paññā pajjoto. Ime kho bhikkhave cattāro pajjotā. Etadaggaṃ bhikkhave imesaṃ catunnaṃ pajjotānaṃ yadidaṃ paññā pajjoto’’ti.
在“以智慧灯之光明已破黑暗”句中,此处“以智慧灯之光明”主要显示佛陀的阿罗汉道智。由显示此智,以果喻照明波罗蜜智、观智及下分道果智。以彼能照之智,以第一因喻阐明无明黑暗的断除。由彼阐明,以第二因喻说明阿罗汉果智的获得。由彼说明,以第三因喻彰显一切知智等一切佛德的获得。显示巴利原文
Paññāpadīpajutiyā vihatandhakāranti ettha pana paññāpadīpa jutiyātiiminā buddhassa arahattamaggañāṇaṃ mukhyena dasseti. Taṃ dassanena pāramīñāṇañca vipassanāñāṇañca heṭṭhimamaggaphala ñāṇañca phalūpacārena dīpeti. Taddīpakena avijjandhakārappahānaṃ paṭhamakāraṇūpacārena pakāseti. Tappakāsanena arahatta phalañāṇalabhanaṃ dutiyakāraṇūpacārena vibhāveti. Taṃ vibhāvanena sabbaññutañāṇādisabbabuddhaguṇalabhanaṃ tatiya kāraṇūpacārena ānubhāveti.
难道不是一切漏尽者也具有以智慧之灯的光明破除黑暗的性质吗?那么,为何要以其他圣者所共通的功德来称赞佛陀呢?因为佛陀以断除随眠的殊胜性,而与他者不共。虽然一切漏尽者也具有以智慧之灯的光明破除黑暗的性质,但声闻弟子与独觉佛并不具有断除连同随眠的烦恼。唯有正自觉者才具足此断除随眠、断除烦恼的殊胜性。因此,正是以更为殊胜的无明黑暗之断除,而专就‘以智慧之灯的光明破除黑暗’来称赞世尊。显示巴利原文
Nanu ca sabbesampi khīṇāsavānaṃ paññāpadīpajutiyā vihatandhakāratā sambhavati, atha kasmā aññasādhāraṇāvisesa guṇena buddhassa thomanā katāti. Savāsanappahānena anaññasādhāraṇavisesatāya sambhavato. Sabbesampi hi khīṇāsavānaṃ satipi paññāpadīpajutiyā vihatandhakāratte ariyasāvakapaccekabuddhānaṃ savāsanāya kilesappahānaṃ na vijjati. Sammāsambuddhānaṃyeva savāsanappahānena kilesappahānassa viseso vijjatīti sātisayavasena avijjandhakārappahānena bhagavantaṃyeva paññāpadīpajutiyā vihatandhakāranti thometīti.
‘极希求义利者’:极度希求众生世间中,世间与出世间所摄之利益。因符合因缘而存在,故为‘义利’,即果。此是‘as’词根表存在义,加tha词缀。极度、超越地欲求与希求彼者,为‘极希求义利者’,即指佛陀。这是‘attha’词加上前缀‘abhi’的‘mudh’词根,表欲求义,加ṇa词缀构成。那极希求义利者。‘带来人天利益者’:持护人与诸天的利益。能引导、带来利益者,为‘人’,即人类。或者,被自己的业所引导、导出者,为‘人’,即人类。这是‘nar’词根表引导义,加a词缀。此即所谓:‘世间被业所引导’。以欲乐功德、禅那、神通、心自在等而游戏、嬉戏者,为‘天’;或住于他们之中者,为‘天’。这是‘div’词根表嬉戏等义,加ṇa词缀。人与天,合称人天。能增长、增盛者,为‘利益’,即果。这是‘hidh’词根表增长义,加ta词缀。人与诸天的利益,即人天利益;能带来彼者,为‘带来人天利益者’,即指佛陀。这是‘naradevahita’词加上前缀‘ā’的‘vah’词根,表持运义,加ṇa词缀构成。此即说:佛陀以说法,持护一切天与人的世间、出世间成就之利。那带来人天利益者。显示巴利原文
Atthābhikāmanti sattalokassa lokiyalokuttara saṅkhātaṃ payojanaṃ ativiya icchantaṃ. Kāraṇānurūpaṃ asati bhavatīti atthaṃ, phalaṃ. Asadhātu bhuvimhi tha. Taṃ abhiatirekaṃ kāmeti icchatīti atthābhikāmo, buddho. Atthasaddūpapada abhipubbakamudhātu icchāyaṃ ṇa. Taṃ atthābhikāmaṃ. Naradevahitāvahanti manussadevānaṃ hitaṃ dhārakaṃ. Hitaṃ narati netīti naro, manusso. Atha vā nariyati sakena kammena niyyatīti naro, manusso. Naradhātu nayane a. Vuttañhi ‘‘kammena niyyati loko’’ti. Kāmaguṇa jhānābhiññacittissariyādīhi dibbanti kīḷantīti devā, tesu vā viharantīti devā, divudhātu kīḷādīsu ṇa. Narā ca devā ca naradevā. Hinoti vaḍḍhatīti hitaṃ, phalaṃ. Hidhātu vaḍḍhane ta. Naradevānaṃ hitaṃ naradevahitaṃ, taṃ āvahatīti naradevahitāvaho, buddho. Naradevahitasaddūpapadaāpubba vahadhātu haraṇe ṇa. Buddho hi sabbadevamanussānaṃ lokiyalokuttarasampattiatthaṃ dhammadesanāya dhāretīti vuttaṃ hoti, taṃ naradevahitāvahaṃ. Kāruṇikamaggamananta ñāṇanti ettha kāruṇikaṃ aggaṃ anantañāṇantipadacchedo. Tattha kāruṇikanti sabbasattesu mahākaruṇāya yuttaṃ, mahākaruṇavantaṃ vā. Kiratīti karuṇā. Kiradhātu apanayane uṇapaccayo. Paradukkhaṃ vikkhipati apanetīti attho.
又或者,能‘购买’者,为‘悲’。此是‘ki’词根表伤害义,加ruṇa词缀。当他人有苦时,悲悯者伤害、逼迫自己的身心,这就是词义。或者,当他人有苦时,令善士之心为之颤抖,这就是‘悲’。此是‘kar’词根,加uṇa词缀。又或者,‘ka’被称为乐,能障碍彼乐者,就是‘悲’。此是‘ka’词加上‘rudh’词根,表障碍义,加yu词缀。这种悲,以想要拔除他人之苦为特相。由于不顾自己的安乐,而去障碍、逼迫悲悯者自身的安乐,这就是词义。与大悲相应者,即是‘具悲者’。或者说,那具有悲心者,即是‘具悲者’,指的就是佛陀。那具悲者。‘最胜者’:以出生、福德、功德之伟大,而达到一切众生中最为至上、最为殊胜的状态者,为‘最胜者’,即指佛陀。此是‘aj’词根表前往义,加a词缀,‘j’变为‘g’。佛陀由于出生在不混杂的刹帝利种姓,故以出生而最胜;因圆满波罗蜜之福德,故以福德而最胜;因具足无量无等伦的戒等功德之殊胜,故以功德而最胜,由此而达到无量世界一切众生中最为至上之状态,故为最胜者。或者,已前往涅槃者,为‘最胜者’。或者,能驱除、耗尽烦恼者,为‘最胜者’,即指佛陀。此是‘aj’词根表耗尽义,加a词缀。那最胜者。‘具无量智者’:由于数量、由于自性、由于所缘而无有边际显示巴利原文
Atha vā kinātīti karuṇā. Kidhātu hiṃsāyaṃ ruṇapaccayo. Paradukkhe sati kāruṇikaṃ hiṃsati vibādhatīti attho. Paradukkhe sati sādhūnaṃ hadayakampanaṃ karotīti vā karuṇā. Karadhātu uṇapaccayo. Atha vā kaṃ vuccati sukhaṃ, taṃ rundhatīti karuṇā. Kaṃsaddūpapada rudhidhātu āvaraṇe yupaccayo. Esā hi paradukkhāpanayanakāmatā lakkhaṇā. Attasukhanirapekkhatāya kāruṇikānaṃ sukhaṃ rundhati vibādhatīti attho. Karuṇāya mahākaruṇāya yutto kāruṇiko. Karuṇā assa atthīti vā kāruṇiko, buddho. Taṃ kāruṇitaṃ. Agganti jātipuñña guṇamahattabhāvena sabbasattuttamaṃ seṭṭhabhāvaṃ ajati gacchatīti aggo, buddho. Ajadhātu gatiyaṃ a. Jassa go. Buddho hi asambhinnakhattiyavaṃse jātattā jātivasena ca pūritapāramīpuññattā puññavasena ca aparimitanirupamasīlādi guṇavisesena samannāgatattā guṇavasena ca anantalokadhātūsu sabbasattuttamabhāvaṃ gacchatīti aggo. Nibbānaṃ ajati gacchatīti vā aggo. Atha vā ajeti khepeti kileseti aggo, buddho. Ajadhātu khepane a. Taṃ aggaṃ. Anantañāṇanti gaṇanavasena ca sabhāvavasena ca visayavasena ca antavirahitañāṇaṃ. Kenaci puggalena ñāṇena anantaṃ aparicchinnaṃ, sabbaññutañāṇavantaṃ vā. Natthi antaṃ yassāti anantaṃ, ñāṇaṃ. Sabbañeyyadhammaṃ jānātīti ñāṇaṃ, sabbaññutañāṇaṃ. Anantaṃ ñāṇaṃ yassa soti anantañāṇo, buddho. Buddhassa hi ñāṇaṃ koci manusso vā devo vā brahmā vā ettakanti paricchindituṃ na sakkoti, tasmā anantaṃ aparimāṇaṃ hotīti vuttaṃ hoti.
此语出自《舍利弗长老譬喻》——显示巴利原文
Vuttañhetaṃ sāriputtattheraapadāne –
‘能以升斗量尽大海之水;
却不能计量您一切知者的智慧。’
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Sakkā samudde udakaṃ, pametuṃ aḷhakena vā; Natveva tava sabbaññu, ñāṇaṃ sakkā pametave’’ti.
在“具悲、最上与无尽智慧”这一句中,以“悲”一词显示正等正觉的根本。因为世尊的心为大悲所策励,为了将众生从轮回的泥沼中救拔出来,曾在燃灯佛足下立下宏愿,历经四阿僧祇又十万大劫,次第圆满诸波罗蜜,证得无上正等正觉,所以说悲是正等正觉的根本。以“最上”一词,显示世尊因具足无量、无与伦比的戒等功德,而在无量世界、无量众生中处于最胜之位。以“无尽智慧”一词,显示正等正觉。因为以一切知智为近因的最上道智,以及以最上道智为近因的一切知智,被称为正等正觉。而凭借其能力,展示了以四无碍解智、四无畏智、六不共智、六神通、于八众中无怖畏智、十力智、十六种智行、四十四智所缘、七十七智所缘等众多智慧类别所行的智慧行境。我以净信之心,礼敬那位佛陀。这便是其中的关联。显示巴利原文
Kāruṇikamaggamanantañāṇanti ettha ca karuṇaggahaṇena sammāsambodhiyā mūlaṃ dasseti, mahākaruṇāsañcoditamānaso hi bhagavā saṃsārapaṅkato sattānaṃ samuddharaṇatthaṃ dīpaṅkarapādamūle katābhinīhāro kappasatasahassādhikāni cattāri asaṅkhyeyyāni anupubbena pāramiyo pūretvā anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhiṃ adhigatoti karuṇā sammāsambodhiyā mūlanti. Agganti etena bhagavato aparimitanirupamasīlādiguṇasamaṅgītāya aparimāṇāsu lokadhātūsu aparimāṇānaṃ sattānaṃ uttamabhāvaṃ dasseti. Anantañāṇantietena sammāsambodhiṃ dasseti. Sabbaññutañāṇapadaṭṭhānañhi aggamaggañāṇaṃ, aggamaggañāṇapadaṭṭhānañca sabbaññutañāṇaṃ sammāsambodhīti vuccati. Tassa ca sāmatthiyena catupaṭisambhidāñāṇaṃ catuvesārajjañāṇaṃ chaasādhāraṇañāṇāni ca chaabhiññā aṭṭhasu parisāsu akampana ñāṇāni dasabalañāṇāni soḷasañāṇacariyā ca catucattārīsañāṇavatthūni sattasattatiñāṇavatthūni cāti evamādīnaṃ anekesaṃ paññāpabhedānaṃ vasena ñāṇācāraṃ dassetīti. Taṃ buddhaṃ ahaṃ vippasannena cetasā vandāmīti sambandhoti.
然而,此处简略的句义解释如下:'narānarasamosaraṇaṃ' 指人与天众共同集会之处,即聚集之地;'dhitattaṃ' 指心已得定者;'paññāpadīpajutiyā vihatandhakāraṃ':以名为阿罗汉道智的智慧灯明为因,破除了应断的、名为无明的黑暗;'atthābhikāmaṃ' 指极度希求有情世间的世间与出世间利益者;'naradevahitāvahaṃ' 指为人与天众带来利益者;'kāruṇikaṃ' 指与大悲相应者,或具大悲者;'aggaṃ' 指因出身、福德、功德之伟大而为一切众生中最胜者;'anantañāṇaṃ' 指以数量、自性、所缘而言皆无边际的智慧,或指具足无边际的一切知智者。我以净信之心,礼敬那位佛陀。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepayojanā. Narānarasamosaraṇaṃ manussadevānaṃ samaṃ osaraṇaṃ sannipatitaṭṭhānaṃ, dhitattaṃ samāhitacittaṃ, paññāpadīpajutiyā arahattamaggañāṇasaṅkhāta padīpobhāsena karaṇabhūtena vihatandhakāraṃ hanitabba avijjāsaṅkhātamohatamaṃ, atthābhikāmaṃ sattalokassa lokiyalokuttarasaṅkhātapayojanaṃ ativiya icchantaṃ, naradevahitāvahaṃ manussadevānaṃ hitaṃ dhārakaṃ, kāruṇikaṃ sabbasattesu mahākaruṇāya yuttaṃ mahākaruṇavantaṃ vā, aggaṃ jātipuññaguṇamahattabhāvena sabbasattuttamaṃ, ananta ñāṇaṃ gaṇavasena ca sabhāvavasena ca visayavasena ca antavirahitañāṇaṃ, anantaṃ sabbaññutañāṇavantaṃ vā taṃ buddhaṃ ahaṃ vippasannena cetasā vandāmīti.
具足一切功德宝藏的牟尼圣尊,前往……
那名为仙人堕处的林野,是诸自制者所居之处;
于彼,他转起了断除不善的法轮,
我礼敬那位无与伦比、极殊胜、应受礼敬的圣者。
显示巴利原文 Akhilaguṇanidhāno yo munindopagantvā, Vanamisipatanavhaṃ saññatānaṃ niketaṃ; Tahimakusalachedaṃ dhammacakkaṃ pavatto, Tamatulamabhikantaṃ vandaneyyaṃ namāmi.
16 如是,以第十五首偈颂礼敬佛陀之后,现在为以仙人堕处鹿野苑转动法轮等功德称扬、礼敬牟尼圣尊,而宣说“具足一切功德宝藏……”等偈颂。应知此偈乃由“na、na、ma、ya、ya”诸音节组成,含十五音节,名为“摩利尼”调。正如《音声论》所说:“由‘na、na、ma、ya、ya’结合,具八与七音节者,为摩利尼调。”其义为:若一偈行中,“bhoga”与“isi”——即八音节与七音节——相结合,且与“na、na、ma、ya、ya”此诸音节组相结合,即“na”音节组、“ma”音节组、“ya”音节组,此偈便名“摩利尼”调。此处,“bhogisīhī”应分解为“bhoga”与“isīhi”。“bhoga”一词表数字八,“isi”一词表数字七。显示巴利原文
16. Evaṃ pannarasamagāthāya buddhaṃ vanditvā idāni isipatana migadāye dhammacakkapavattanādiguṇehi thomitvā munindaṃ vanditu kāmo akhilaguṇanidhāno tyādigāthamāha. Ayaṃ pana nanamayayagaṇehi racitattā pannarasakkharehi yuttā mālinī gāthāti daṭṭhabbā. Vuttañhi vuttodaye ‘‘nanamayayayutāyaṃ mālinībhogisīhī’’ti. Tassattho. Yassaṃ paṭipādaṃ bhogisīhi aṭṭhasattayatīhi yuttā ca nanamayayayutā nanagaṇamagaṇa yayagaṇehi yuttā ca ce siyuṃ, ayaṃ gāthā mālinīgāthā nāmāti. Ettha ca bhogisīhīti bhogaisīhīti padacchedo. Bhogasaddo aṭṭhasaṅkhyā vācako. Isisaddo sattasaṅkhyāvācakoti daṭṭhabbo.
其中,“akhilaguṇanidhāno”(具足一切功德宝藏者),指一切世间与出世间所摄的戒、定、慧等功德聚之安立处。在此,“akhila”一词意为无余,即是“一切”的意思。正如《蜜注》中所说:“此处‘khila’一词意为无余。”并非“khila”(荒芜),而是“akhila”(无余)。或可释为:“na khīyati”(不被耗尽)故,为“akhila”,即一切。“na”前缀的“khidhātu”意为耗尽。“guṇa”(功德)一词的语义前已述及。“akhilaguṇāni”即一切功德,安立于此,故为“akhilaguṇanidhāno”,指牟尼圣尊。“yo”指那位、那样的。“munindopagantvā”此处应分解为“munindo upagantvā”。“munindo”指在家牟尼、出家牟尼、有学牟尼、无学牟尼、独觉牟尼此五种牟尼中的至尊、自在者,其语义前亦已述及。具足一切功德宝藏的那位牟尼圣尊,前往名为仙人堕处的、自制者所居的林野,于彼处转起断除不善的法轮。这便是其义。显示巴利原文
Tattha akhilaguṇanidhānoti sabbalokiyalokuttara saṅkhātānaṃ sīlasamādhipaññādiguṇasamūhānaṃ patiṭṭhāno. Ettha ca akhilasaddo anavasesavācako. Sabboti attho. Vuttañhi madhuṭīkāyaṃ ‘‘khilasaddo hettha avasesavācako’’ti. Na khilaṃ akhilaṃ. Atha vā na khīyatīti akhilaṃ , sabbaṃ. Napubbakhidhātu khaye lo. Guṇasaddassa vacanattho heṭṭhā vuttoyeva. Akhilāni sabbāni guṇāni akhilaguṇāni, tesaṃ nidhāti tiṭṭhati etthāti akhilaguṇanidhāno, munindo labbhati. Yoti yo yādiso. Munindopagantvāti ettha munindo upagantvāti padacchedo. Munindoti agāriyamuni, anagāriyamuni, sekkhamuni, asekkhamuni, pacceka munivasena pañcannaṃ munīnaṃ indo issaroti attho. Tassa pana vacanattho heṭṭhā vuttoyeva. Akhilaguṇanidhāno yo munindo saññatānaṃ niketaṃ isipatanaavhaṃ vanaṃ upagantvā tahiṃ akusalachedaṃ dhammacakkaṃ pavattoti sambandho.
“Vanamisipatanavhaṃ”应分解为“vanaṃ isipatanaavhaṃ”。此处,“vanaṃ”指鹿野苑之林。实则,渴望远离愦闹者应于此敬奉、亲近,故称为“vana”(林)。“van”字根意为敬奉,加“kvi”后缀。“isipatanavhaṃ”指名为仙人堕处者;或因是诸仙人的坠落之处,而可称为“isipatana”(仙人堕处)者;或者,“isi”指寻求戒蕴等的独觉佛等。“is”字根意为寻求,加“i”后缀。他们坠落、集会于此,故为“isipatana”(仙人堕处),即林野。“isi”一词前置的“pat”字根意为去,加“yu”后缀。又或,诸仙人之坠落为“isipatana”,即林野。应称名为“avhaṃ”。“ā”前缀的“ve”字根意为称呼,加“kvi”后缀,因有复合词后缀,故“ā”缩短。“isipatana”与“avhaṃ”结合为“isipatanavhaṃ”,即林野。“saññatānaṃ”指防护身、语、意的善士们。他们自制,故为“saññatā”,即独觉佛等。显示巴利原文
Vanamisipatanavhanti vanaṃ isipatanaavhanti padacchedo. Ettha vananti migadāyavanaṃ. Tañhi vivekakāmehi vanitabbaṃ sambhajitabbaṃ etthāti vananti vuccati. Vanadhātu sambhattiyaṃ kvi. Isipatanavhanti isipatananāmikaṃ isīnaṃ patanaṭṭhānattā isipatananti voharitabbaṃ vā, sīlakkhandhādike esanti gavesantīti isi, paccekabuddhādayo. Isadhātu gavesane ipaccayo. Te patanti sannipatanti etthāti isipatanaṃ, vanaṃ. Isisaddūpapadapatadhātu gatiyaṃ yu. Atha vā isīnaṃ patanaṃ isipatanaṃ, vanaṃ. Avhetabbaṃ voharitabbanti avhaṃ. Āpubbavhedhātu avhayane kvi. Saṃyogaparattā ākārassa rassādeso. Isipatananti avhetabbanti isipatanavhaṃ, vanaṃ. Saññatānanti kāyavacīmanosaṃyamantānaṃ sādhūnaṃ. Saṃyamantīti saññatā, paccekabuddhādayo sādhū. Saṃpubbayamudhātu uparame ta. Tesaṃ saññatānaṃ. Niketanti vasanaṭṭhānaṃ, rammaṇaṭṭhānaṃ vā. Nikitati nivasati rammati vā etthāti niketaṃ, vanaṃ. Nipubba kitadhātu nivāse ṇa. Upagantvāti gamitvā. Tahinti tasmiṃ isipatananāmake migadāyavane. Akusalachedanti akusalassa samucchedaṃ. Akusalaṃ chindati samucchindati etena suttenāti akusalachedaṃ, dhammacakka pavattanasuttaṃ. Akusalasaddūpapadachididhātu dvidhākaraṇe ṇa.
“法轮”,即《转法轮经》。此处“轮”字,可表成就、特征、车辋、威仪、布施、宝轮、法轮、剃刀轮等义。如“诸比丘,有此四轮,凡具足者,天与人……”句中,是成就义。“足底生轮”中,是特征义。“如运载者之轮”中,是车辋义。“四轮九门”中,是威仪义。“施与、受用,莫放逸,转动一切众生之轮”中,是布施义。“天轮宝出现”中,是宝轮义。“我所转之轮”中,是法轮义。“贪欲者之轮,在头顶旋转”中,是剃刀轮义。“以剃刀为边际之轮”中,是武器轮义。“霹雳轮”中,是霹雳环义。而此处,当视为法轮。因其转动念处等法,故称“法轮”;或转动圣谛等法,故称“轮”;又或因不离法,既是法又是教令轮,故称“法轮”。它依法、如理而转,故名“法轮”。是故,《无碍解道》中说:“‘法轮’者,以何义为法轮?即转动法又是轮,故为法轮;转动轮又是法,故为法轮;依法而转动,故为法轮;以法行而转动,故为法轮;住立于法而转动,故为法轮”等。再者,“法轮”也指证悟智与教说智。其中,证悟智是指坐在菩提座上的那位,以十六行相、六显示巴利原文
Dhammacakkanti dhammacakkapavattanasuttaṃ. Ettha hi cakkasaddo sampattiyaṃ, lakkhaṇe, rathaṅge, iriyāpathe, dāne, ratana dhammakhuracakkādīsu ca dissati. Cattārimāni bhikkhave cakkāni, yehi samannāgatānaṃ devamanussānantiādīsu hi sampattiyaṃ dissati. Pādatalesu cakkāni jātānīti ettha lakkhaṇe. Cakkaṃva vahato padanti ettha rathaṅge. Catucakkaṃ navadvāranti ettha iriyāpathe. Dadaṃ bhuñja mā ca pamādo cakkaṃ vattaya sabbapāṇīnanti ettha dāne. Dibbacakkaratanaṃ pāturahosīti ettha ratanacakke. Mayā pavattitaṃ cakkanti ettha dhammacakke. Icchāhatassa posassa cakkaṃ bhamati matthaketi ettha khuracakke. Khurapariyantena cakkenāti ettha paharaṇacakke. Asanivicakkanti ettha asanimaṇḍale. Idha panāyaṃ dhammacakke daṭṭhabbo. Tañhi satipaṭṭhānādidhammaṃ cakketi pavattetīti dhammacakkanti vuccati. Ariyasaccādidhammaṃ vā cakketi pavattetīti cakkanti. Atha vā dhammato anapetattā dhammañca taṃ āṇācakkañcāti dhammacakkaṃ. Dhammena ñāyena cakkanti dhammacakkaṃ, tena vuttaṃ paṭisambhidāyaṃ ‘‘dhammacakkanti kenaṭṭhena dhammacakkaṃ. Dhammañca pavatteti cakkañcāti dhammacakkaṃ, cakkañca pavatteti dhammañcāti dhammacakkaṃ, dhammena pavattetīti dhammacakkaṃ, dhammacariyāya pavattetīti dhammacakkaṃ, dhamme ṭhito pavattetīti dhammacakka’’ntiādi. Api ca dhammacakkanti paṭivedhañāṇampi desanāñāṇampi. Tattha paṭivedhañāṇaṃ nāma yena ñāṇena bodhipallaṅke nisinno cattāri saccāni soḷasahākārehi saṭṭhinayasahassehi paṭivijjhi. Desanāñāṇaṃ nāma yena ñāṇena tiparivaṭṭaṃ dvādasākāraṃ dhammacakkaṃ pavattesi. Ubhayampetaṃ dasabalassa ure jātañāṇameva. Tesu pana dhammadesanāñāṇaṃ adhippetaṃ. Suttaṃ pana ṭhānūpacārena dhammacakkanti vuccati. Pavattoti pañcavaggiyānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ dveme bhikkhave antā pabbajitena na sevitabbātiādinā adesayi.
“Tamatulamabhikantaṃ”应作“taṃ atulaṃ abhikantaṃ”这样分词。此处“taṃ”指牟尼主。“atulaṃ”指以戒等功德与任何人不相似。没有与他相等的、相似的人,故为“atula”(无等),即牟尼主。因为在无量世界界中,没有以戒等功德与他相似的人。其义为与无等的诸佛同等。“abhikantaṃ”指被一切天、人极度喜爱、悦意的、具有身色者。或者,具有超胜的、令人满足的身色者。因为本应说“abhikkantavaṇṇaṃ”,为保护韵律,省略了“ka”和“vaṇṇa”词,依连声而说为“abhikantaṃ”。或者依省略后词而成。而牟尼主的身色,被一切天、人极度、超胜地喜爱、满足,故称“abhikantaṃ”。前缀“abhi”的“kamu”词根用于欲求与喜爱之义。其身色是极可爱、极悦意的,故牟尼主为“abhikanto”。因为他具足三十二大丈夫相、八十随形好、六色光芒及金色,其身色成就了身庄严,比一切天、人更极可爱、令人满足,故以“abhikantaṃ”赞叹。那极可爱者。“vandaneyyaṃ”指天、人应礼敬者。或应被他们礼敬,或被礼敬、被赞叹,即“vandana”。此是状态成就词。“vandi”或“vadi”词根用于敬礼与赞叹,加“yu”。值得那样者,故牟尼主为“vandaneyyo”。“vanda”词加“arahati”义派生词“ṇeyyo”。显示巴利原文
Tamatulamabhikantanti taṃ atulaṃ abhikantanti padacchedo. Ettha tanti munindaṃ. Atulanti sīlādīhi guṇehi kenaci asadisaṃ. Natthi tulo sadiso puggalo etassāti atulo, munindo. Tassa hi aparimāṇāsu loka dhātūsu sīlādīhi guṇehi sadiso puggalo natthi. Asadisehi buddhehi samoti attho. Abhikantanti sabbadevamanussehi ativiya kantaṃ kamanīyaṃ sarīravaṇṇavantaṃ. Atirekaṃ tusitabbasarīravaṇṇasampannaṃ vā. Abhikkantavaṇṇanti hi vattabbe chandānurakkhaṇatthaṃ kakāralopañca vaṇṇapadalopaṃ katvā vuttasandhivasena abhikantanti vuttaṃ. Uttarapadalopa vasena vā. Munindassa pana sarīravaṇṇaṃ sabbadevamanussehi ativiya atirekaṃ vā kamiyati tosiyatīti abhikantanti vuccati. Abhipubbakamudhātu icchākantīsu ta. Abhikantaṃ vaṇṇaṃ sarīravaṇṇaṃ yassa soti abhikanto, munindo. Tassa hi dvattiṃsamahāpurisalakkhaṇehi ca asītyānubyañjana lakkhaṇehi ca chabbaṇṇaraṃsīhi ca suvaṇṇavaṇṇena ca samannā gatattā sarīrasobhaggappattito sabbadevamanussehi ativiya kamanīyo tuṭṭho sarīravaṇṇo atthīti abhikantanti thometi. Taṃ abhikantaṃ. Vandaneyyanti devamanussānaṃ vandanārahaṃ. Tehi vanditabbaṃ vā, vandiyate thomiyate vā vandanaṃ. Bhāvasādhanoyaṃ. Vandadhātu vadidhātu vā abhivādanathutīsu yu. Taṃ arahatīti vandaneyyo, munindo. Vandapadaṃ arahatitaddhite ṇeyyo.
或者,牟尼主应被天、人礼敬、赞叹,故为“vandaneyyo”。因为他具足初、中、后功德,故是一切天、人的礼敬对象,或应被他们礼敬。其中,初功德名为以悲悯为因的戒,由远离杀生等而转起。中功德名为定,由三禅那相应。后功德名为慧,因为自此之后更无应作之事。由此特别赞叹世尊为“vandaneyya”。我以三门礼敬、稽首——如此连接。显示巴利原文
Atha vā devamanussehi vanditabbaṃ thomitabbanti vā vandaneyyo, munindo. So hi ādimajjhapariyosāna guṇehi samannāgatattā sabbadevamanussānaṃ vandanāraho tehi vā vanditabbo hoti. Tattha ca ādiguṇaṃ nāma karuṇānidānaṃ sīlaṃ pāṇātipātādiviratippavattito. Majjha guṇaṃ nāma samādhi jhānattayayogato. Pariyosānaguṇaṃ nāma paññā tato uttari karaṇīyābhāvatoti visesena bhagavato vandaneyyanti thometi. Ahaṃ tīhi dvārehi namāmi vandāmīti sambandho.
此处简要释义:那位无漏藏——即一切世间与出世间所摄的戒、定、慧等功德聚之安立处;那位如是、如此的牟尼主——于五牟尼中为尊、为自在者的世尊;那些调御身、语、意的自制善士所依止或喜乐的住处;名为仙人堕处的林野,即鹿野苑。他前往那里,在名为仙人堕处的鹿野苑中,断除不善,转起法轮——即《转法轮经》,为五群比丘教说。无与伦比,以戒等功德不与他者相似;极可爱乐,为一切天、人所极度喜爱、悦意、满足,且具足身色者;堪受礼敬,为天、人之所礼敬,或应被他们礼敬。那位牟尼主,我以三门礼敬、稽首。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepayojanā. Akhilanidhāno sabba lokiyalokuttarasaṅkhātānaṃ sīlasamādhipaññādiguṇa samūhānaṃ patiṭṭhāno yo yādiso munindo pañcannaṃ munīnaṃ indo issaro bhagavā, saññatānaṃ kāyavacīmanosaṃya mantānaṃ sādhūnaṃ, niketaṃ vasanaṭṭhānaṃ rammaṇaṭṭhānaṃ vā, isipatanavhaṃ isipatananāmikaṃ isipatananti voharitabbaṃ vā, vanaṃ migadāyavanaṃ, upagantvā gamitvā tahiṃ tasmiṃ isipatananāmake migadāya vane, akusalassa samucchedaṃ, dhammacakkaṃ dhammacakkappavattanasuttaṃ, pavatto pañcavaggiyānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ adesayi, atulaṃ sīlādīhi guṇehi kenaci asadisaṃ, abhikantaṃ sabbadevamanussehi ativiya kantaṃ kamanīyaṃ tuṭṭhi sarīravaṇṇavantaṃ, vandaneyyaṃ deva manussānaṃ vandanārahaṃ tehi vā vanditabbaṃ, taṃ munindaṃ ahaṃ tīhi dvārehi namāmi vandāmīti.
为清净眷属所围绕,以其胜妙光辉而红耀,
吉祥广大的住处,善加防护,诸根具足;
以日轮、月轮等相为庄严,
为天、人所供养的善逝,我恭敬地礼敬。
显示巴利原文 Suciparivāritaṃ surucirappabhāhi rattaṃ, Sirivisarālayaṃ gupitamindriyehupetaṃ; Ravisasimaṇḍalappabhutilakkhaṇopacittaṃ, Suranarapūjitaṃ sugatamādaraṃ namāmi.
17 如此以十六偈敬礼牟尼圣尊,再以“纯净环绕”等七种功德作赞叹后,欲敬礼者宣说了“纯净环绕”等偈颂。然而,此偈应知是由na、ja、bha、ja、ra诸音节组,及一个重音节所构成,具十六音节,名为Vāṇinī偈。正如《Vuttodaya》中所说:“当na、ja、bha、ja、ra诸音节组与重音节结合时,即为Vāṇinī。”意思是:在一偈行中,当na音节组、ja音节组、bha音节组、ja音节组、ra音节组与行末重音节结合时,便称为Vāṇinī偈。显示巴利原文
17. Evaṃ soḷasamagāthāya munindaṃ vanditvā idāni suciparivāritantyādīhi sattahi guṇehi thomitvā vanditukāmo suciparivāritantyādigāthamāha. Ayaṃ pana na jabhajaragaṇehi ca ekagarunā ca racitattā soḷasakkharehi yuttāvāṇinīgāthāti daṭṭhabbā. Vuttañhi vuttodaye ‘‘najabhajarā yadā bhavati vāṇinī gayuttā’’ti. Tassattho. Yassaṃ paṭipādaṃ najabhajarā nagaṇa jagaṇa bhagaṇa jagaṇa ragaṇā yadā gayuttā pādantagarunā saṃyogā ce siyuṃ, tadā sā vuttā vāṇinī vāṇinīgāthā nāma bhavatīti.
其中,“纯净环绕”是指被已远离贪等烦恼垢秽的圣弟子众等所围绕,或指烦恼垢秽已得清净、具有随从者。由于从贪等烦恼垢秽中得以清净而被净化,故称为“纯净”,即指众会。“suci”词根表清净,加“i”后缀。因从四方被圣比丘等、天、人所围绕、所随从,故称为“环绕”,即善逝。“pari”前缀加“var”词根,表遮止或随从,加“ṇa”后缀。意为被纯净的众会所环绕者,是“纯净环绕”,指善逝。此为第三依主释复合词。其意趣为:世尊恒常被已离贪等烦恼垢秽的圣比丘等四众或八众所围绕。或者,“纯净环绕”指其环绕本身即是纯净清净,此含义即为善逝。“极美光芒”指以从善妙可爱的身体所发出的一寻长光芒为体,而极令人喜爱、令人渴求、令人满足,故称“极美”,即指光芒。“su”前缀加“ruc”词根,意为照耀,加“ira”后缀。以种种方式照耀、辉耀,故称“光芒”,即光线。“pa”前缀加“bhā”词根,意为辉耀,加“kvi”后缀。那既极美又是光芒者,是“极美光芒”,以此诸极美光芒。“红润”指恒常应被染色的身体。被染色,故称“红润”,即指身体。“ra”显示巴利原文
Tattha suciparivāritanti rāgādimalavisuddhāhi ariyasāvakādiparisāhi parikkhāritaṃ kilesamalavisuddhaṃ parikkhāravantaṃ vā. Rāgādimalehi sucati sujjhatīti suci, parisā. Sucadhātu soceyye i. Parisamantato ariyabhikkhuādīhi deva manussehi vāriyati parikkhariyatīti parivāro, sugato. Paripubbavaradhātu āvaraṇe parikkhāre vā ṇa. Sucīhi parisāhi parivārito suciparivārito, sugato. Tatiya tappurisasamāsoyaṃ. Bhagavato hi sadā rāgādimala visuddhehi ariyabhikkhuādīhi catūhi parisāhi aṭṭhahi parisāhi vā parivārito hotīti adhippāyo. Atha vā suciparisuddhaṃ parivāritaṃ yassa soti suciparivārito, sugato. Surucirappabhāhīti suṭṭhu kantitasarīranikkhanta byāmamattaraṃsīhi karaṇabhūtehi suṭṭhu ruciyati kamiyati tusiyatīti surucirā, raṃsi. Supubba rucadhātu rocane iro. Pakārena bhāti dibbatīti pabhā, raṃsi. Papubba bhādhātu dibbane kvi. Surucirā ca sā pabhā cāti surucirappabhā, tāhi surucirappabhāhi. Rattanti niccaṃ rañjitabbakāyaṃ. Rañjiyatīti ratto, kāyo. Ranjadhātu rāge ta. Ratto kāyo yassa soti ratto, sugato. Uttarapadalopasamā soyaṃ. Rūpassa bhavo rūpaṃ viya, taṃ rattaṃ. Bhagavato hi sarīrato niccaṃ nikkhantehi byāmamattaraṃsīhi rañjitabbo rūpakāyo atthīti vuttaṃ hoti.
“祥瑞聚集之所依”指依止于称为智慧与福德的祥瑞之聚集。此处,“祥瑞”是智慧与福德的同义词。或者,是由福德所生的身相光辉等成就。因为彼成就依止于所作福德,或由所作福德所依止,故称为“祥瑞”,即智慧与福德,或自在。又或,指获得身相光辉等成就。正如《天宫事注疏》等中所说:“‘祥瑞’是智慧与福德的同义词,亦指‘祥瑞’即自在,亦指‘祥瑞’即色身成就。” “sidh”词根,表侍奉,加“ra”后缀及表阴性词干的“ī”后缀。因结集偈颂故,为护韵律,当说长音“sirī”,却以短音说。“visarālayaṃ”应作“visara-ālayaṃ”的词语分割。“visara”意为聚集。诸部分进入、汇入彼中,此聚集称为“visara”,即聚集。“vis”词根,表进入,加“ara”后缀。或者,诸部分于彼中集合、会合,故为“visara”。“vi”前缀加“sar”词根,意为会合,加“a”后缀。然而,在书册中见有以“ya”字母写作“visayālayaṃ”的读法,此不合理。何以故?因为只有“vis”显示巴利原文
Sirivisarālayanti paññāpuññasaṅkhātalakkhisamūhānaṃ patiṭṭhānaṃ. Ettha ca sirīti paññāpuññānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Atha vā puññanibbattā sarīrasobhaggādisampatti. Sā hi katapuññe siyati nissayati, katapuññehi vā siyati nissiyatīti sirīti vuccati, paññāpuññaṃ, issariyaṃ vā. Sarīrasobhaggādi sampatti vā labbhati. Vuttañhi vimānavatthuaṭṭhakathādīsu ‘‘sirīti buddhipuññānaṃ adhivacananti ca. Sirīti issariyanti ca sirīti rūpakāyasampattī’’ti ca. Sidhātu sevāyaṃ, rapaccayo ca, itthiliṅgajotakaīpaccayo ca. Sirīti hi dīghavasena vattabbe gāthābandhattā chandānurakkhaṇatthaṃ rassavasena vuttaṃ. Visarālayanti visaraālayanti padacchedo. Visaroti samūho. Visanti pavisanti avayavā yasmiṃ samūheti visaro, samūho. Visadhātu pavesane arapaccayo. Atha vā visaranti samosaranti avayavā yasminti visaro. Vipubba saradhātu samosaraṇe a. Potthakesu pana visayāla yanti yakārena pāṭho dissati. Na so yujjati. Kasmā, visarasaddasseva samūhavācakattā. Vuttañhi abhidhānappa dīpikāyaṃ –
‘‘Samūho gaṇasaṅghātā, Samudāyo ca sañcayo; Sandoho nivaho ogho, Visaro nikaro cayo’’tyādi.
“所依”指安立之处。诸祥瑞安立、住立于其中,故为“所依”,即善逝。“ā”前缀加“lī”词根(意为附着),加“ṇa”后缀。所谓智慧等祥瑞的聚集,名为“祥瑞聚集”;这些祥瑞聚集的所依,便是“祥瑞聚集之所依”,也就是善逝。那即是祥瑞聚集之所依。“具足所护诸根”:指具足、完全具备应被守护、应被防护的眼等六根。被守护、被保护者,称为“所护”(“gup”词根,意为保护,加“ta”后缀)。这些根对俱生法行使自在,故为“根”(“id”词根,意为最上自在,加“i”后缀)。所护的诸根即“所护诸根”,也就是眼等诸根。以那些根而具备、成就,故为“具足”,亦指善逝(“upa”前缀加“i”词根,意为去,加“ta”后缀,表具足)。虽然除佛陀之外,其他圣弟子等也守护了眼等诸根,但唯独佛陀在菩提座上,连同习气,以阿罗汉道断尽一切烦恼,因此以最为殊胜的方式守护了眼等诸根,故以“具足所护诸根”来称叹他。显示巴利原文
Ālayanti patiṭṭhānaṃ. Ālayanti patiṭṭhanti etthāti ālayo, sugato. Āpubba lidhātu alliyane ṇa. Sirīnaṃ paññāsaṅkhātalakkhīnaṃ visaro samūho sirīvisaro, tesaṃ ālayo sirīvisarālayo, sugato. Taṃ sirivisarālayaṃ. Gupitamindriyehupetanti gopitabbehi saṃvaritabbehi cakkhādīhi chahi indriyehi upetaṃ samupetaṃ samannāgataṃ. Gupiyanti rakkhiyantīti gupitāni. Gupadhātu rakkhane ta. Idanti sahajātadhamme issariyaṃ karontīti indriyāni. Ididhātu paramissariye iyo. Gupitāni indriyāni gupitamindriyāni , cakkhādiindriyāni labbhanti. Tehi. Upeti sampajjatīti upeto, sugato. Upapubba idhātu gatiyaṃ ta, taṃ upetaṃ. Kiñcāpi buddhato aññehi ariyasāvakādīhi puggalehi cakkhādiindriyāni rakkhitāni. Buddhoyeva pana bodhipallaṅke saha vāsanāya sabba kilesānaṃ arahattamaggena viddhaṃsitattā visiṭṭhena cakkhādi indriyaṃ rakkhito hotīti tassa gupitamindriyehupetanti thometi.
“以日轮月轮等相庄严”:指以日轮、月轮等足下千辐轮相所庄严的足;或指具有以日轮、月轮等所庄严的足下千辐轮相者。此处,“upa”前缀表强调之义。即极庄严的,或具有日轮、月轮等足下千辐轮相者。其中,“ravi”指太阳,因其放射光芒、迅速运行,故称“ravi”。“rudh”词根,意为运行,加“ṇi”后缀。正如《Pātheyya注疏》中所说:“月亮正直而缓慢地运行,太阳则正直而迅速地运行。”《Ṇvādi Moggallāna》中说:“‘rus’音,加‘i’,‘o’变为‘a’;发光、吼叫,故为‘ravi’,即太阳。”《阿毗达那复注》中也说:“众生因它而作声,因被照耀,故为‘ravi’。”“sasī”指月亮。因以草维持生命并呼吸,故为“sasa”,即兔子贤者;“sas”词根,意为呼吸,加“a”后缀。因带有兔子的形相特征,故称“sasī”。往昔,兔子王曾化作婆罗门,为乞者纵身跃入萨迦王的炭火堆,舍弃生命行布施。其时,萨迦天王为使那兔子贤者舍命布施的功德昭彰于全劫——显示巴利原文
Ravisasimaṇḍalappabhutilakkhaṇopacittanti sūriyamaṇḍala candamaṇḍalādīhi pādacakkalakkhaṇehi abhivicitrapādaṃ. Upasaddo cettha bhusaṭṭhavācako. Abhivicitraṃ sūriyamaṇḍala candamaṇḍalādiṃ pādacakkalakkhaṇavantaṃ vā. Ettha ca ravīti sūriyo, so hi ravati sīghaṃ gacchatīti ravīti vuccati. Rudhātu gatiyaṃ ṇi. Vuttañhi pātheyyaṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘cando ujukaṃ saṇikaṃ gacchati, sūriyassa pana ujukaṃ gamanaṃ sīgha’’nti. Ṇvādi moggallāne pana ‘‘rusadde i. O avādeso. Ravati gajjatīti ravi. Ādicco’’ti vuttaṃ. Abhidhāna ṭīkāyañca ‘‘ravanti etena sattā pabhāvitattāti ravī’’ti vuttaṃ. Sasīti cando. So hi sasati tiṇena pāṇati jīvatīti saso, sasapaṇḍito. Sasadhātu pāṇe a. Sasarūpalakkhaṇamettha atthīti sasīti vuccati. Atīte hi sasarājā brāhmaṇavesena āgantvā yācakassa sakkarañño aṅgārarāsimhi laṅghitvā jīvitaṃ pariccajitvā kāyaṃ adāsi. Atha pana sakko rājā tassa sasapaṇḍitassa jīvitapariccajitassa jīvitadānaguṇo sakalakappaṃ pākaṭo hotūti pabbataṃ pīḷetvā pabbatarasaṃ ādāya candamaṇḍale sasarūpalakkhaṇaṃ likhitvā ṭhapesi. Tasmā cando sasīti lokehi vohariyati. Tassa pana vitthāro sasapaṇḍitajātake passitvā gahetabbo.
或者,因其照耀、伤害及产生热气,故称“月亮”。“sasī”一词中,sas词根意为伤害,加ī后缀。“maṇḍiyati”(装饰)与“vibhūsiyati”(庄严),因其有区分之用,故称“maṇḍala”(圆轮/光轮)。“maṇḍ”词根或“maḍi”词根,于“庄严”义中加a后缀。又或:“maṇḍa”(装饰)从周围摄取(“lāti”即“gaṇhāti”),故为“maṇḍala”;在“maṇḍa”后,“lā”词根于“取”义中加kvi后缀。太阳的圆轮为“ravimaṇḍala”,月亮的圆轮为“sasimaṇḍala”,日轮与月轮合称“ravisasimaṇḍala”;“maṇḍala”一词也当与“ravi”结合,因为“maṇḍala”一词作为双数而被听闻之故。“pabhuti”(从……起)等:此为表示“初始”义的不变词。从日轮月轮等起,得足下千辐轮相之相。被标记、应被标记者,故为“lakkhaṇa”(相),即足下流转的轮相;日轮月轮等与此相相合,故为“ravisasimaṇḍalappabh…”显示巴利原文
Atha vā sasati hiṃsati uṇhaguṇanti sasīti vuccati. Sasudhātu hiṃsāyaṃ īpaccayo. Maṇḍiyati vibhūsiyati paricchedakaraṇavasenāti maṇḍalaṃ. Maṇḍadhātu maḍidhātu vā vibhūsane alo. Atha vā maṇḍaṃ vibhūsanaṃ parisamantato lāti gaṇhātīti maṇḍalaṃ. Maṇḍasaddūpapada lādhātu gahaṇe kvi. Ravino maṇḍalaṃ ravimaṇḍalaṃ, sasino maṇḍalaṃ sasimaṇḍalaṃ, ravimaṇḍalañca sasimaṇḍalañca ravisasimaṇḍalaṃ, maṇḍalasaddo ravisaddepi yojetabbo. Maṇḍalasaddassa dvandapadato suyyamānattā. Pabhutītiādi. So hi ādyatthavācako abyayanipāto. Ravisasimaṇḍalaṃ pabhutiādi yassāti ravisasimaṇḍalappabhuti, pādacakkalakkhaṇaṃ labbhati. Lakkhiyati lakkhitabbaṃ etenāti lakkhaṇaṃ, pādappa vattacakkalakkhaṇaṃ, ravisasimaṇḍalappabhuti ca taṃ lakkhaṇañcāti ravisasimaṇḍalappabhutilakkhaṇaṃ, tena upacittaṃ ativicitraṃ pādaṃ yassa soti ravisasimaṇḍalappabhutilakkhaṇopa citto, sugato. Atha vā upacittaṃ ativicitraṃ ravisasi maṇḍalappabhutilakkhaṇaṃ pādacakkalakkhaṇaṃ assāti tathā, sugato. Taṃ.
“天人应敬”意指应被天与人所恭敬。所谓“surā”(天),是因为他们藉由自在、嬉戏等而辉耀,故称为surā——词根sur意为“照耀”,加上后缀a。或者,因为他们向往、获得天的权威而光耀,故称为surā——词根sur有“权威”与“光辉”之义。又或者,因为他们美丽而有光辉,故称为surā。所谓“narā”(人),是因为他们引导诸蕴相续或其各自的业,故称为narā——词根nar意为“引导”,加上后缀a。天与人合称suranarā,被他们所恭敬的,便是suranarapūjito,也就是善逝(Sugato)。正是如此。“善逝”即佛陀。他的行去是善妙的,故名善逝。世尊以善妙的方式去往所化之众,毕竟成就他们的利益与安乐。同样,因相好庄严的身体,其身行无有迟滞、蹒跚、拖曳、踟蹰、弯曲等过失,犹如鹅王、牛王、象王、兽王般行走,是善妙的;其智行也因伴随广大无垢的悲心、正念、精进等殊胜功德之加行,直至大菩提皆无过失,故也是善妙的。显示巴利原文
Suranarapūjitanti devamanussehi pūjitabbaṃ. Suranti issariya kīḷādīhi dibbantīti surā, devā. Suradhātu dibbane a. Atha vā surati isati devissariyaṃ pāpuṇāti virocati cāti surā, devā. Suradhātu issariyadittīsu a. Sundarā rāvācā etesanti vā surā, devā. Khandhasantānaṃ sakakammaṃ vā naranti niyantīti narā, manussā. Naradhātu nayane a. Surā ca narā ca suranarā, tehi pūjitabboti suranara pūjito, sugato. Taṃ. Sugatanti buddhaṃ. So hi sobhanaṃ gataṃ gamanaṃ etassāti sugatoti vuccati. Bhagavato hi veneyyajanūpasaṅkamanaṃ ekantena tesaṃ hitasukhanipphādanato sobhanaṃ. Tathā lakkhaṇānubyañjanappaṭi maṇḍitarūpakāyatāya dutavilambitakhalitānukaḍḍhananippiḷinukkuṭika kuṭilākuṭilatādi dosarahita mavahasita rājahaṃsausabha vāraṇa migarājagamanaṃ kāyagamanaṃ. Ñāṇagamanañca vipula nimmala karuṇā sati vīriyādi guṇavisesa sahita abhinīhārato yāva mahābodhi anavajjatāya sobhanamevāti.
再者,他以自然智,依遍知之理如实了知一切世间,从而善行、善达,故名善逝;同样,他依舍断之理舍断世间集,令其不再生起,从而善行、善达,故名善逝;他依作证之理实证世间灭——涅槃,从而善行、善达,故名善逝;他依修习之理善行于世间灭之道,从而善行、善达,故名善逝。以入流道所断除的烦恼,那些烦恼不再生起、不再退转、不再回还,因此名为善逝。应通过这些理趣广泛理解此义。或者,他已去至、证得善妙之境——正等正觉或即涅槃,故名善逝。又因他宣说真实、如实、有益、随顺应化、相应的法,这便是“善语”;转为之音变,便成“善逝”。如此,由善妙的行走等义,名为善逝。此善逝,“Ādaro”意为恭敬,即尊崇。前缀ā加√dar(恭敬)加ṇa后缀。即此恭敬。“我礼敬”即我稽首顶礼,这是它的含义。显示巴利原文
Atha vā sayambhūñāṇena sakalampi lokaṃ pariññābhi samayavasena parijānanto ñāṇena sammā gato avagatoti sugato, tathā lokasamudayaṃ pahānātisamayavasena pajahanto anuppattidhammataṃ āpādento sammā gato avagatoti sugato, lokanirodhaṃ nibbānaṃ sacchikiriyābhisamayavasena sammā gato avagatoti sugato, lokanirodhagāminippaṭipadaṃ bhāvanābhi samayavasena sammā gato paṭipannoti sugato, sotāpattimaggena ye kilesā pahīnā, te kilese na puneti na pacceti na paccāgacchatīti sugatotiādinā nayena ayamattho vibhāvetabbo. Atha vā sundaraṃ ṭhānaṃ sammāsambodhiṃ nibbānameva vā gato adhigatoti sugato. Yasmā vā bhūtaṃ tacchaṃ atthasaṃhitaṃ veneyyānaṃ yathārahaṃ yuttameva ca dhammaṃ bhāsati, tasmā sammā gadatīti sugato dakārassa takāraṃ katvā. Iti sobhana gamanatādīhi sugato, taṃ sugataṃ. Ādaranti sakkaccaṃ, ādaranaṃ ādaro. Āpubba daradhātu ādare ṇa. Taṃ ādaraṃ. Namāmīti ahaṃ vandāmīti atthoti.
此处略释其联结:为清净的众圣弟子所围绕——即从贪等垢秽中清净;为美妙光辉所环绕——即由身中善巧磨研而出、仅一寻长的光焰所环绕;身常赤红——即其身常应赤红;荣耀所聚之处——即智慧与福德所成的睫毛之所;为所护根守护——即应守护、应防护的眼等六根所守护;具足、完备、拥有;以日轮、月轮等所现之相庄严——即足下有千辐轮相,为日轮、月轮等所极庄严;天人应敬——即应受天与人崇敬;我以至诚恭敬,顶礼这位善逝、佛陀。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepayojanā. Suciparivāritaṃ rāgādimala visuddhāhi ariyasāvakādiparisāhi parikkhāritaṃ kilesamalavisuddhaṃ parikkhāravantaṃ vā, surucirappabhāhi suṭṭhu kantita sarīranikkhantabyāmamattaraṃsīhi karaṇabhūtehi, rattaṃ niccaṃ rañjitabbakāyaṃ, sirivisarālayaṃ paññāpuññasaṅkhātalakkhisa mūhānaṃ patiṭṭhānaṃ, gupitamindriyehi gupitabbehi saṃvaritabbehi chahi cakkhādiindriyehi, upetaṃ samupetaṃ samannāgataṃ, ravisasimaṇḍalappabhutilakkhaṇopacittaṃ sūriyamaṇḍalacandamaṇḍalādīhi pādacakkalakkhaṇehi abhivicitrapādaṃ, abhivicitraṃ sūriya maṇḍalacandamaṇḍalādiṃ pādacakkalakkhaṇavantaṃ vā, suranarapūjitaṃ devamanussehi pūjitabbaṃ, sugataṃ buddhaṃ ādaraṃ sakkaccaṃ ahaṃ namāmi vandāmīti.
以道为筏,渡过愚痴、嗔恚等汹涌波涛的轮回苦海,
已渡过轮回暴流、到达无畏彼岸者;
救护所,避难处,无与伦比的皈依处,唯一的渡口,坚实的立足之地,
我敬礼福田、赐予最上安乐的法王。
显示巴利原文 Maggoḷumpena muhapaṭighāsādiullolavīciṃ, Saṃsāroghaṃ tari tamabhayaṃ pārapattaṃ pajānaṃ; Tāṇaṃ leṇaṃ asamasaraṇaṃ ekatitthaṃ patiṭṭhaṃ, Puññakkhettaṃ paramasukhadaṃ dhammarājaṃ namāmi.
18 如此,以第十七偈礼敬善逝之后,现在欲以“渡过轮回苦海”等九种功德赞叹而礼敬,故说“以道筏渡过”等偈。此偈由ma、bha、na、ta、ta等音组及两个重音构成,因此应知为具有十七音节的“缓转偈”。如《韵律明》所说:“缓转偈即ma、bha、na、ta、ta音组,配合重音go。”其含义是:依四、六、七(yuguttāsaka)的次第,配合ma、bha、na、ta、ta五组及重音go与重音ca,便得缓转偈之名。所谓yuguttāsaka:yuga一词因表示道果四双之人,故代表数字四;utu一词因冬、春、夏、雨季、秋等六时,故代表数字六;assa一词应知代表数字七。因为《六支释》等中说:“assa一词表示七数已说。”显示巴利原文
18. Evaṃ sattarasamagāthāya sugataṃ vanditvā idāni saṃsāroghaṃ taritādīhi navahi guṇehi thomitvā vanditukāmo maggoḷumpenatyādigāthamāha. Ayaṃ pana ma bha na ta ta gaṇehi ca garudvayena ca racitattā sattarasakkharehi yuttā mandakkantāgāthāti daṭṭhabbā. Vuttañhi vuttodaye ‘‘mandakkantā ma bha na tata gā go yugutvassa kehī’’ti. Tassā panāyamattho. Yassaṃ paṭipādaṃ yugutvassakehi catu cha sattayatīhi ma bha na ta ta gā magaṇa bhagaṇa nagaṇa tagaṇa tagaṇa garū ca go garu ca ce yuttā, mandakkantāgāthānāmāti. Yugutvassakehīti ettha ca yugasaddassa maggaphalacatubbidhapurisayugaḷavācakattā yugasaddo catusaṅkhyāvācako, utūnaṃ hemantasisira vassanta gimha vassāna sarada utuvasena chabbidhattā utusaddo chasaṅkhyāvācako. Assasaddo sattasaṅkhyāvācakoti veditabbo . Chappaccayaṭīkādīsu hi ‘‘assasaddassa sattasaṅkhyāvācakabhāvo vutto’’ti.
其中,那位法王以道筏渡过了无明、嗔恚、渴爱等大浪与小波的轮回瀑流,成为无畏、到达彼岸众生的庇护所、洞穴、无与伦比的皈依处、唯一的津渡、立足处、福田、最上乐之赐予者。我礼敬那位法王——这是句子的关联。我将依义理次第对此加以解释。所谓“无明、嗔恚、渴爱等大浪与小波”,即指由无明、嗔恚、贪爱等构成的大浪与小波。“无明”:使得相应诸法迷昧,或自身迷昧,或仅是迷昧本身,故为无明。“嗔恚”:使得相应诸法激怒,或自身激怒,或仅是激怒本身,故为嗔恚。“渴爱”:即希求、渴望,或以贪求为性,故为渴爱。无明、嗔恚与渴爱三者合称“无明、嗔恚、渴爱”;这些是烦恼之首,故说“无明、嗔恚、渴爱等”,即贪等烦恼。此处“等”字含摄了慢、见、疑、昏沉、掉举、无惭、无愧等烦恼,以及不善心的生起。“大浪”:向上搅动水流,使之浑浊,故称大浪。“小波”:拍击河岸而行,或聚集种种颜色,故称小波。大浪与小波合称大浪小波。某些典籍中可见“kullolavīci”的读法,但这并不合理,因为“kulla”一词意为筏。显示巴利原文
Tattha pana yo dhammarājā muhapaṭighāsādiullolavīciṃ saṃsāroghaṃ maggoḷumpena tari, abhayaṃ pārapattaṃ pajānaṃ tāṇaṃ leṇaṃ asamasaraṇaṃ ekatitthaṃ patiṭṭhaṃ puññakkhettaṃ paramasukhadaṃ taṃ dhammarājaṃ ahaṃ namāmīti sambandho. Etissaṃ pana atthakkamena vaṇṇayissāmi. Muhapaṭighāsādi ullolavīcinti mohadosataṇhādisaṅkhātaṃ mahātaraṅga khuddaūmikaṃ. Muyhanti etena sampayuttadhammā, sayaṃ vā muyhati, muyhanamattamevetanti muho, moho. Muhadhātu vekhitte ṇa. Paṭihaññanti sampayuttadhammā, sayaṃ vā paṭihaññati paṭihaññanamattamevetanti paṭigho, doso. Paṭipubba hanadhātu hiṃsāgatīsu a. Hanassa gho. Asanaṃ icchanaṃ āsā, isati icchatīti vā āsā, taṇhā. Isudhātu icchāyaṃ a. Issa ā. Muho ca paṭigho ca āsā ca muhapaṭighāsā, te ādi yesanteti muhapaṭighāsādi, lobhādikilesā labbhanti. Ettha ca ādisaddena māna diṭṭhi vicikicchā thina uddhacca ahirika anottappakilese ca akusalacittuppāde ca saṅgaṇhāti. Uddhaṃ udakaṃ lolati ākuletīti ullolo, mahātaraṅgo. Upubbalola dhātu ummādane ṇa. Tīraṃ ulati gacchatīti vā ullolo. Uladhātu gatiyaṃ olapaccayo. Vimhayaṃ vicittaṃ cinotīti vīci, khuddakaūmi. Vipubba cidhātu caye kvi. Ullolo ca vīci ca ullolavīci. Kesuci potthakesu ca kullolavīcintipāṭho dissati. Na so yujjati, kasmā, kullasaddassa uḷumpatthavācakattā. Ullolasaddoyeva hi mahātaraṅgattha vācako hotīti. Vuttañhi abhidhānappadīpikāyaṃ ‘‘ullolo tu ca kallolo, mahāvīcisu kathyate’’ti.
在《根本五十经注》中说:‘所谓筏,是为了渡越而捆扎成束的;而铺开绑缚的木板、陶罐等则是浮囊。’无明、嗔恚、渴爱等本身就是大浪与小波。这些大浪小波存在于轮回之流中,因此称轮回之流‘有无明、嗔恚、渴爱等大浪小波’。这是依复合词后缀的构词法,如同‘喜乐’、‘大座’、‘昼夜’等。如此解释词义:喜与乐合为喜乐,该禅那具有此喜乐,或喜乐存于该禅那中,故名为有喜乐的禅那。大座即是大座,其状态为大座性。夜与日合为昼夜,昼夜所作即是昼夜。又如,无明、嗔恚、渴爱等即是大浪小波,由此构成轮回之流,这是譬喻多财释复合词。正如大海中有可怖的大浪、波涛、急流等,以及鳄鱼、大鱼、鲨鱼等鱼类遍布其中;同样,无明等烦恼与不善心生起,以及由此引生的众多可怖的生、老、病、死之苦等,以及蕴等,也遍布轮回之流中——此是所说之义。‘轮回之流’:即名为轮回的流,犹如大海之流。‘轮回’:一再地、无间断地流转、运行、持续。这是词源解释。蕴、界、处的无间断持续,即是此义。因此,在注释书中说:显示巴利原文
Mūlapaṇṇāsaṭṭhakathāyañca ‘‘kullo nāma taraṇatthāya kalāpaṃ katvā bandho. Pattharitvā baddhā pana padaracāṭi ādayo uḷumpo’’ti vutto. Muhapaṭighāsādieva ullolavīci. Sā asmiṃ saṃsāroghe atthīti muhapaṭighāsādiullolavīci. Samāsantataddhitāyaṃ. Pītisukhaṃ, mahāsannaṃ, rattidivantyādīsu viya. Evaṃ panettha vacanattho kātabbo. Pīti ca sukhañca pītisukhaṃ, taṃ assa jhānassa atthi, tasmiṃ vā vijjatīti pītisukhaṃ, jhānaṃ. Mahantaṃ āsanaṃ mahāsanaṃ, tassa bhāvo mahāsannaṃ. Ratti ca divā ca rattidivaṃ. Rattidivaṃ kataṃ rattidivanti. Atha vā ullolavīci viya muhapaṭighāsādi ullolavīci, saṃsāroghaṃ labbhati. Upamā bahubbīhisamāsoyaṃ. Yathā pana mahāsamudde bhāyitabbā mahātaraṅgaūmivegādayo ca saṃsumāra timi tipiṅgalādi macchamakārādayo ca okiṇṇā honti, evaṃ mohādikilesā ca akusalacittuppādā ca tehi nibbattā bhayānakā bahū jātijarābyādhimaraṇadukkhādayo ca khandhādayo ca okiṇṇā hontīti vuttaṃ hoti. Saṃsāroghanti saṃsārasaṅkhātaṃ oghaṃ samuddajalappavāhaṃ. Saṃpunappunaṃ abbocchinnaṃ vā sarati gacchati pavattatīti saṃsāro. Saṃpubbasaradhātu gatiyaṃ ṇa. Khandhadhātuāyata nānaṃ abbocchinnaṃ pavattatīti attho. Tena vuttaṃ aṭṭhakathāsu –
诸蕴的次第,以及界与处的,
无间断地流转着,故被称为轮回。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Khandhānañca paṭipāṭi, dhātuāyatanāna ca; Abbocchinnaṃ vattamānā, saṃsāroti pavuccatī’’ti.
“流”:覆盖、淹没众生后,向下冲击、卷走,故为流,即水流。或者,众生陷入其中后,被向下冲击而沉没,故为流,即水流。如同水流一般,故说轮回为流。或者,覆盖、淹没、征服诸行后,在轮回中冲击、卷走众生的,即是流;或在轮回中令众生与诸行沉没的,即是流,此即贪等烦恼可得。轮回即是流,为轮回之流,那轮回之流。显示巴利原文
Satte ottharitvā ajjhottharitvā heṭṭhā hanati haratīti ogho, jalappavāho. Avapubba hanadhātu haraṇe ṇa. Hanassa gho. Avasaddo ottharaṇattho. Attani patite satte heṭṭhā katvā haneti osīdāpetīti vā ogho, jalappavāho. Avapubba hanadhātu osīdāpane ṇa. Avasaddo heṭṭhābhāgattho. Ogho viyāti ogho, saṃsāro. Atha vā sattasaṅkhāre ottharitvā ajjhottharitvā abhibhavitvā vaṭṭasmiṃ hanati haratīti ogho, ohaneti osīdāpeti vaṭṭasmiṃ sattasaṅkhāreti vā ogho, rāgādi kilesā labbhanti. Saṃsāroeva ogho saṃsārogho, taṃ saṃsāroghaṃ.
“以道筏”:此处应分读为“magga-oḷumpena”,意为:以名为八支道支的筏。其中,“道”指八支圣道。因诸佛与圣弟子由此前往未曾抵达的彼岸——涅槃,故名为道;为八支圣道。又,道寻求、探寻涅槃,故名为道;或为希求涅槃者所寻求、探寻,故名为道,即八支圣道。此意谓:以智所示。又,道被实行、被修习,故名为道;希求涅槃者即如此修习八支圣道,此为含义。“uḷu”指水,由此而得救护,故为“uḷupo”,依随韵音变成为“uḷumpo”,即筏。道即是筏,为道筏;或名为道的筏;或与道相似的筏;或如同道的筏;或道与筏合称道筏。又,筏即是道,为道筏;或名为筏的道;或与筏相似的道;或如同筏的道;或筏与道合称道筏。应依照同义、譬喻、平等观照以及自他分等理趣,来理解此中词义。以那道筏。“渡”:已渡。法王以八支道之船,渡越轮回之流,抵达涅槃彼岸。过去诸佛已到达,未来诸佛将到达——这是所说之义。正如《大品相应》中所说:显示巴利原文
Maggoḷumpenāti ettha maggaoḷumpenāti padacchedo. Aṭṭhamaggaṅgasaṅkhātena kullenāti attho. Ettha ca maggo vuccati aṭṭhaṅgikamaggo. Magganti gacchanti buddhā ca ariyasāvakā ca agataṃ disaṃ nibbānanti maggo. Aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo. Maggadhātu gatiyaṃ a. Vuttañhi paṭisambhidāmagge ‘‘etena maggena buddhā ca sāvakā ca agataṃ disaṃ nibbānaṃ gacchantīti aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo’’ti. Atha vā nibbānaṃ maggati gavesatīti maggo, nibbānatthikehi maggiyati gavesiyatīti vā maggo, aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo. Ñāṇena dassiyatīti attho. Maggadhātu gavesane a. Vuttañhetaṃ mahāvaggasaṃyuttaṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘maggoti kenaṭṭhena maggo, nibbānaṃ magganaṭṭhena nibbānatthikehi magganiyaṭṭhena cā’’ti. Atha vā maggiyati paṭipajjiyatīti maggo, nibbānatthikehi aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo paṭipajjiyatīti attho. Uḷu vuccati udakaṃ, tato pāti rakkhatīti uḷupo, soyeva niggahitāgamavasena uḷumpo, kullo. Uḷusaddūpapadapādhātu rakkhane kvi. Maggoeva uḷumpo maggoḷumpo, maggasaṅkhāto vā uḷumpo tathā, maggasadiso vā uḷumpo tathā, maggo viya vā uḷumpo tathā, maggo ca uḷumpo ca maggoḷumpo. Atha vā uḷumpoeva maggo maggoḷumpo, uḷumpasaṅkhāto vā maggo tathā, uḷumpa sadiso vā maggo tathā, uḷumpo viya vā maggo tathā, uḷumpo ca maggo ca maggoḷumpoti evaṃ rūpakasadisaupamā samupekkhatthavasena ca parapakkha sakapakkhatthavasena ca vacanattho veditabbo. Tena maggoḷumpena. Tarīti atari. Dhammarājā hi aṭṭhamaggaṅganāvāya saṃsāroghaṃ taritvā nibbānatīraṃ pāpuṇāti. Atītā buddhā pāpuṇiṃsu. Anāgatā buddhā pāpuṇissantīti vuttaṃ hoti. Vuttañhi mahāvaggasaṃyutte
“他照见生灭的尽处,知一乘之道”,
具利益与悲悯者,了知此道。
以此道,过去他们曾渡过,
他们必将渡过,也正在渡越暴流。此为《佛世史》所载。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Ekāyanaṃ jātikhayantadassī, Maggaṃ pajānāti hitānukampī; Etena maggena tariṃsu pubbe, Tarissantiyeva taranti ogha’’nti; Buddhavaṃse ca ‘‘Saṃsārasotaṃ chinditvā, viddhaṃsetvā tayo bhave; Dhammanāvaṃ samāruyha, tāremi janataṃ bahu’’nti.
“无畏”,因为没有了生、老、病、死等怖畏,所以无所畏惧。世尊没有任何怖畏,因此称为无畏。或者说,无畏就是安稳。安稳即是涅槃,因为涅槃中没有生等怖畏,所以称为无畏。在第二种解释中,这个词是“彼岸”的修饰语。所谓“达彼岸者”,这里的“彼岸”是指轮回流转的彼岸,也就是涅槃。它如同护水般地守护,因此称为“彼岸”,即大海的彼岸。“pā”这个词根有守护义,加上后缀“a”而成。或者说,“彼岸”由于能成就、能遮止波浪等,所以称为“彼岸”。“pā”词根也有成就义,加上后缀“a”而成。像彼岸一样,所以称为“彼岸”。不过,依词源的含义,应当这样理解:能在此中守护出生等怖畏,因此是“彼岸”;或者,能在此中成就、遮止出生等怖畏,因此是“彼岸”,即指涅槃。已经证得、获得它的人,称为“达彼岸者”,也就是法王。“彼岸”一词与词根“pad”(行走义)结合,加上后缀“ta”构成。或者,已经到达、抵达了大愿的究竟,或者全部轮回苦的究竟,或者一切知智等功德的究竟者,即为“达彼岸者”,即法王。因为“pāra”一词也有究竟、边际的意思。他正是达彼岸者。所谓“众生”,是指一切有情。由于他们依着业和烦恼而种种出生、流转,因此称为“众生”。为了那些众生。显示巴利原文
Abhayanti jātijarābyādhimaraṇabhayādīnaṃ abhāvato nibbhayaṃ. So hi bhagavā natthi bhayaṃ etassāti abhayoti vuccati. Atha vā abhayanti khemaṃ. Tañhi nibbānaṃ natthi jātiādibhayaṃ etthāti abhayanti vuccati. Etasmiṃ pana dutiyavikappe taṃ padaṃ pārantipade visesanaṃ. Pārapattanti ettha pāranti saṃsāravaṭṭassa paratīraṭṭhena vuccati nibbānaṃ. Tañhi udakaṃ pāti rakkhatīti pāraṃ, samuddapāraṃ. Pādhātu rakkhane aro. Atha vā pāreti samattheti taraṅgādayo vāretunti pāraṃ. Pāradhātu samatthiyaṃ a. Pāraṃ viyāti pāranti vuccati. Nītatthena pana evaṃ vacanattho kātabbo. Jāti bhayādiṃ pāti rakkhati etthāti pāraṃ, pāreti samattheti ettha vā jātibhayādayo vāretunti pāraṃ, nibbānaṃ. Taṃ pajjittha adhigamitthāti pārapatto, dhammarājā. Pārasaddūpapada padadhātu gatiyaṃ ta. Atha vā mutto moceyyantiādinā nayena pavattassa mahābhinīhārassa sakalassa saṃsāradukkhassa vā sabbaññutañāṇādiguṇānaṃ vā pāraṃ pariyantaṃ patto gatoti pārapatto, dhammarājā. Pārasaddo hi pariyanta vācako. Taṃ pārapattaṃ. Pajānanti sabbasattānaṃ. Tehi kammakilesehi pakārena janiyati nibbattiyatīti pajāti vuccanti. Tesaṃ pajānaṃ.
所谓“救护”,即具有救护之义。能救护、保护众生免于轮回怖畏,故称救护者,即是法王。词根√tā表守护,加后缀yu。或谓“救护”者,以能遍护众生免于轮回流转之苦,故为救护。彼法王通过说法,施予道果与涅槃之乐,救护、保护众生远离轮回流转之苦,故称救护者。彼即是救护。所谓“庇护”,即具有隐藏之义。为生等怖畏所逼迫的众生,于此隐藏、潜匿,故为庇护者,即是法王。词根√lī表隐藏,加后缀yu。或谓“庇护”者,以能成为观见轮回怖畏者之隐藏处,故为庇护。彼法王,正是希求出离轮回者所隐藏、所潜匿之处,故称庇护者。彼即是庇护。法王实为一切被轮回怖畏所逼恼的众生之救护、庇护、皈依、归宿与住处。此即所说之义。显示巴利原文
Tāṇanti tāyanaṭṭhena tāṇaṃ. Sattānaṃ saṃsāra bhayato tāyati rakkhatīti tāṇo, dhammarājā. Tādhātu rakkhane yu. Atha vā tāṇanti sattānaṃ saṃsāravaṭṭadukkhato paripālanaṭṭhena tāṇaṃ. So hi dhammarājā sattānaṃ saṃsāravaṭṭadukkhato dhammadesanāya magga phalanibbānasukhaṃ dadanto tāyati pāletīti tāṇoti vuccati. Taṃ tāṇaṃ. Leṇanti nilīyanaṭṭhena leṇaṃ, jātibhayādīhi pīḷitehi sattehi līyanti nilīyanti etthāti leṇo, dhammarājā. Līdhātu nilīyane yu. Atha vā leṇanti saṃsārabhayaṃ passantehi nilīyanaṭṭhena leṇaṃ. So hi dhammarājā saṃsāranissaraṇatthikehi līyanti nilīyanti etthāti leṇoti vuccati. Taṃ leṇaṃ. Dhammarājā hi saṃsārabhayehi pīḷitānaṃ sabbasattānaṃ tāṇaṃ leṇaṃ saraṇaṃ parāyanaṃ ṭhānaṃ hotīti vuttaṃ hoti.
所谓“无等皈依”,乃一切众生无与伦比的依止处。彼法王以戒等功德故,无有与其相等、相似者,故称“无等”。能忆念、趣向、依止于此者,称为“皈依”,即是法王。词根√sar表行,加后缀yu。无等且无相似,而为皈依者,即是“无等皈依”,指法王。此为持业释复合词。法王因施予一切成就之乐,故为一切众生不共、无等的皈依、依止与归宿。此即其义。彼为无等皈依。所谓“唯一渡口”,乃前往涅槃彼岸者之唯一渡口。能由此或依此渡过江河大海等,故称“渡口”。即能由此获得渡往江河大海等彼岸的入水之处。词根√tar表渡越,加后缀tha,元音缩短并插入i音。人中的唯一渡口,称为“唯一渡口”;如同彼者,便是“唯一渡口者”,即是法王。犹如人凭借渡口渡河等,能安乐抵达彼岸,若无渡口则不能至;同样,应受教化的众生,凭借殊胜的佛渡口,渡越轮回暴流,能安乐抵达涅槃彼岸,而非凭借非渡口的外道所能到达,因此赞法王为“唯一渡口”。依词源义,殊胜而唯一,能于此渡越、超脱至涅槃彼岸者,即是“唯一渡口”,指法王。欲渡至安稳涅槃彼岸的应受教化众生,于此佛渡口听闻所说之法,并依所说之法而行。显示巴利原文
Asamasaraṇanti sabbasattānaṃ asadisaavassayanaṃ, natthi etassa samo sadiso sīlādiguṇenāti asamo, dhammarājā. Sarati gacchati avassayati etthāti saraṇo, dhammarājā. Saradhātu gatimhi yu. Asamo asadiso hutvā saraṇoti asamasaraṇo, dhammarājā. Sambhāva nākammadhārayasamāsoyaṃ. Dhammarājā hi sabbasampattisukhānaṃ dāyakattā sabbasattānaṃ anaññasādhāraṇaṃ asamaṃ saraṇaṃ avassayanaṃ parāyanaṃ hotīti attho. Taṃ asamasaraṇaṃ. Ekatitthanti nibbānapāragamanānaṃ ekatitthabhūtaṃ. Taranti uttaranti ettha etena vā najjasamuddādinti titthaṃ. Najjasamuddādīnaṃ pārimatīragamanatthaṃ otaraṇaṭṭhānaṃ labbhati. Taradhātu otaraṇe tha. Rassa to, ikārāgamo. Manussānaṃ ekaṃ titthaṃ ekatitthaṃ, taṃ viyāti ekatittho, dhammarājā. Yathā hi titthena najjādiṃ tarantā manussā pārimatīraṃ sukhaṃ pāpuṇanti, na atitthena, evaṃ seṭṭhabhūtena buddhatitthena saṃsāroghaṃ tarantā veneyyasattā nibbānapāraṃ sukhaṃ pāpuṇanti, na atitthena aññatitthiyena, tasmā dhammarājaṃ ekatitthoti thometi. Nītatthena pana eko seṭṭho hutvā nibbānapāraṃ taranti uttaranti etthāti eka tittho, dhammarājā. Khemaṃ nibbānapāraṃ taritukāmā veneyyasattā ettha buddhatitthe desitadhammaṃ sutvā desitadhammānurūpaṃ paṭipajjitvā saṃsāroghaṃ aṭṭhamaggaṅganāvāya chinditvā khemaṃ nibbānapāraṃ sukhaṃ taranti, ititasmā etthātipadena niddiṭṭho so buddho sabbasattānaṃ eko seṭṭho tittho nāma. Na aññatitthiyā ekatitthā nāma hontīti attho. Taṃ ekatitthaṃ.
所谓“依止”,就如一切有情的大洲,是依止、是所依处。依止、庇护、归宿,这是其义。于此依止,故为依止,即是法王。前缀pati加词根√ṭhā,表回转之义,加后缀a。法王实如一切希求安乐的有情之大洲,成为他们的依止、庇护、洞穴与归宿,这是其义。彼为依止。所谓“功德田”,对于希求涅槃乐者而言,它是生长功德种子的田地;或对于希求功德者而言,它是播种功德种子的处所、田地。能净化自己的作者与相续,故为功德,即是善。词根√pudh表净化,加后缀ṇyo。或令他人产生应受供养的状态,故为功德;或常令供养产生,故为功德,即是善。以pūja词为前导,加词根√jan,加后缀ṇyo。应依词源学的方法了知词句的成就。又能净化非功德,故为功德,即是善。词根√pudh表净化,加后缀ṇyo。能保护所撒下的种子,故称为田,如稻田等。以khipa词为前导,加词根√tā表保护,加后缀kvi。为令播种种子的人们获得大果报而保护种子,这是其义。或于此撒下、播种种子,故为田。词根√khip表催促或撒,加后缀ta。如同田,故为田。此即是法王。依已引导之义,为令播种功德种子的有情得大果报而予守护,所以说他如同田地。显示巴利原文
Patiṭṭhanti sabbasattānaṃ mahādīpaṃ viya patiṭṭhaṃ ādhārabhūtaṃ. Paṭisaraṇaṃ leṇaṃ parāyananti attho. Patiṭṭhahanti etthāti patiṭṭho, dhammarājā. Patipubbaṭṭhādhātu gatinivattimhi a. Dhammarājā hi sabbasukhatthikānaṃ sattānaṃ mahādīpo viya patiṭṭho paṭisaraṇo leṇo parāyano hotīti attho, taṃ patiṭṭhaṃ. Puññakkhettanti nibbānasukhatthikānaṃ puññabījassa khettabhūtaṃ. Puññatthikānaṃ puññabījassa vapanaṭhānaṃ khettabhūtaṃ vā, attano kārakaṃ pavati sodhetīti puññaṃ, kusalaṃ. Pudhātu sodhane ṇyo. Atha vā paraṃ pujjabhāvaṃ janetīti puññaṃ, sadā pūjitaṃ vā janetīti puññaṃ, kusalaṃ. Pūjasaddūpapada janadhātu ṇyo. Niruttinayena saddasiddhi veditabbā. Avasesaṃ apuññaṃ punāti sodhetīti vā puññaṃ, kusalaṃ. Pudhātu sodhane ṇyo. Khittaṃ vuttaṃ bījaṃ tāyati rakkhatīti khettaṃ, kedārādi. Khipasaddūpapada tādhātu rakkhane kvi. Bījāni vapantānaṃ manussānaṃ mahapphalabhāvakaraṇena bījaṃ rakkhatīti attho. Atha vā khipanti vapanti ettha bījānīti khettaṃ. Khipadhātu peraṇe khepe vā ta. Khettaṃ viyāti khetto. Dhammarājā. Nītatthena pana puññabījāni vapantānaṃ sattānaṃ mahapphala bhāvakaraṇena khittaṃ vuttaṃ puññabījaṃ tāyati rakkhatīti khetto. Atha vā nibbānatthikehi puññabījāni khipiyanti vapiyanti etthāti khetto. Dhammarājāti kātabbo. Puññānaṃ khettaṃ puññakkhetto, dhammarājā. Yathā hi rañño vā amaccādīnaṃ vā sālīnaṃ vā yavānaṃ vā virūhanaṭṭhānaṃ rañño vā amaccādīnaṃ vā sālikhettaṃ yavakhettanti vuccati. Evaṃ dhammarājā sabbalokassa puññamahabbalabhāvakaraṇena puññānaṃ virūha naṭṭhānaṃ dhammarājaṃ nissāya sattalokassa nānāppakārahita sukhasaṃvattanikāni puññāni virūhanti, tasmā dhammarājā puññakkhettanti abhitthavitoti vuttaṃ hoti. Taṃ puññakkhettaṃ.
“最上乐施者”,意指施与最上涅槃乐者。经中说:“涅槃是最上乐。”此处“最上”一词是表示最上义的非派生词。或说,超越、殊胜、应受圣者尊敬,故为最上,即涅槃。其词由前缀 para 加 mā 字根,表尊敬,再加 a 构成。或以种种方式圣者于此喜悦,故为最上,即涅槃。其词由前缀 pa 加 ramu 字根,表喜悦,再加 ṇa 构成。在《阿毗达摩注释》中则说:“能杀灭敌对,故为最上;于殊胜状态中喜悦,故为最上;加 ṇo。”彼之乐,即为最上乐。或说最上、殊胜之乐,称为最上乐。能施与此乐者,即为最上乐施者,也就是法王。“最上乐”一词为前导,加 dā 字根,表施与,再加 kvi。法王通过对可化导的有情说法,以及接受四资具而施与涅槃乐,这便是它的含义。彼为最上乐施者。法王即是佛陀。他以世间法与出世间法令天人喜悦、满足,故称法王。或唯依波罗蜜法证得佛位而成为王,故称法王;或唯依波罗蜜法而生为王,故称法王。我礼敬彼法王。这是连接之义。显示巴利原文
Paramasukhadanti uttamaṃ nibbānasukhaṃ dadamānaṃ. Vuttañhi ‘‘nibbānaṃ paramaṃ sukha’’nti. Ettha ca paramasaddo uttamatthavācako anipphannapāṭi padiko. Atha vā paraṃ atirekaṃ ariyehi mānitabbanti paramaṃ, nibbānaṃ. Parapubbamādhātu māne a. Pakārena ariyehi ramiyati etthāti vā paramaṃ, nibbānaṃ. Papubbaramudhātu ramane ṇa. Abhidhānaṭīkāyaṃ pana ‘‘paraṃ paccanīkaṃ māretīti paramaṃ. Pakaṭṭhabhāve ramatīti paramaṃ. Ṇo’’ti vuttaṃ. Tassa sukhaṃ paramasukhaṃ. Paramaṃ uttamaṃ vā sukhaṃ paramasukhaṃ. Taṃ dadātīti paramasukhado, dhammarājā. Paramasukhasaddūpapada dādhātu dāne kvi. Dhammarājā pana veneyyasattānaṃ dhammadesanāya ca catupaccayappaṭiggahaṇena ca nibbānasukhaṃ detīti vuttaṃ hoti. Taṃ paramasukhadaṃ. Dhammarājanti buddhaṃ. So hi lokiya lokuttaradhammehi devamanussānaṃ rañjeti tosetīti dhammarājāti. Atha vā pāramīdhammeneva buddhattaṃ patvā rājā jātoti dhammarājāti. Pāramīdhammeneva jāto vā rājāti dhammarājāti ca vuccati. Taṃ dhammarājaṃ ahaṃ namāmīti sambandho.
此处略释如下:那位法王,以八支圣道所成的筏,渡越了名为轮回的瀑流——那瀑流有痴、嗔等动荡波浪,有贪、嗔、痴等大浪与细波,即名为轮回的大海水流;到达了无怖无畏、安稳,或因无生等而无有怖畏的彼岸,即到达、证得涅槃彼岸;他是诸有情的救护,以救护义为救护与保护;以隐藏义为洞穴与隐藏处;为一切有情无与伦比的皈依;为前往涅槃彼岸者共同的渡场;为一切有情的依止,犹如大洲,是依止与所依处;为希求涅槃乐者的功德种子之田,或为希求功德者播种功德种子的田地;为施与最上涅槃乐的最上乐施者;为以世间、出世间法令有情喜悦,或唯依波罗蜜法而生于佛位的法王、佛陀。我以三门礼敬彼。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepayojanā. Yo dhammarājā muha paṭighāsādiullolavīciṃ mohadosataṇhādisaṅkhātaṃ mahātaraṅga khuddakaūmikaṃ, saṃsāroghaṃ saṃsārasaṅkhātaṃ oghaṃ samuddajalappavāhaṃ . Maggoḷumpena aṭṭhamaggaṅgasaṅkhātena kullena tari atariṃ, abhayaṃ khemaṃ, jātiādīnaṃ abhāvato nibbhayaṃ vā, pārapattaṃ nibbānapāraṃ pattaṃ adhigataṃ, pajānaṃ sabba sattānaṃ, tāṇaṃ tāyanaṭṭhena tāṇaṃ rakkhaṇaṃ. Leṇaṃ nilīyanaṭṭhena leṇaṃ nilīyanaṃ, asamasaraṇaṃ sabbasattānaṃ asadisaavassayanaṃ, ekatitthaṃ nibbānapāragamanānaṃ ekatittha bhūtaṃ, patiṭṭhaṃ sabbasattānaṃ mahādīpaṃ viya patiṭṭhaṃ ādhārabhūtaṃ, puññakkhettaṃ nibbānasukhatthikānaṃ puññabījassa khettabhūtaṃ, puññatthikānaṃ puññabījassa vapanaṭṭhānaṃ khettabhūtaṃ vā, paramasukhaṃ uttamaṃ nibbānasukhaṃ dadamānaṃ, dhammarājaṃ buddhaṃ lokiyalokuttara dhammehi pajānaṃ rañjāpanaṃ vā, pāramīdhammeneva buddhabhāvaṃ jātaṃ buddhaṃ vā, ahaṃ tīhi dvārehi namāmīti.
那位牟尼王,坐于甘棠树根旁,为利他而行;
稀有、迅捷而悦目,光焰交织之火网;
摧破恶网,利益牟尼,示现神变;
我礼敬彼最胜者,从最上喜乐所生,具足神通之法。
显示巴利原文 Kaṇḍambaṃmūle parahitakaro yo munindo nisinno; Accheraṃ sīghaṃ nayanasubhagaṃ ākulaṇṇaggijālaṃ; Dujjāladdhaṃsaṃ munibhijahitaṃ pāṭiheraṃ akāsi; Vande taṃ seṭṭhaṃ paramaratijaṃ iddhidhammehupetaṃ.
19 如是,以第十八偈礼敬法王之后,为以舍卫城康丹巴树根处所示现的神变等功德赞颂并礼敬牟尼之主,现在说出“康丹巴树根处”等偈。然而,应知此偈是由五个“摩”音组、六个“耶”音组、七个“耶”音组及三个音组构成,具足十八音节,名为“花蔓藤绵延颂”。恰如《音声论》所说:“凡以摩、多、诺、耶、耶诸音组构成,具十八音节者,即为花蔓藤绵延颂。”此处其结构为:于一偈中,若以十八音节,由五个“耶”音组、六个“耶”音组、七个“耶”音组,以及“摩”音组、“多”音组、“诺”音组、“耶”音组和两个“耶”音组结合而成,此偈即名为“花蔓藤绵延颂”。在这里,“akkha”一词因有“五根”之义,故表示数字五;“utu”一词因有冬、寒、雨、热、雨、秋六季,故表示数字六;“isi”一词因有毗婆尸等过去七佛,故表示数字七。显示巴利原文
19. Evaṃ aṭṭhārasamagāthāya dhammarājaṃ vanditvā idāni sāvatthiyaṃ kaṇḍambamūle iddhipāṭiherādīhi guṇehi munindassa thometvā vanditukāmo kaṇḍambaṃmūletyādi gāthamāha. Ayaṃ pana matanayayayagaṇehi ca pañca yati chayati sattaya tīhi ca racitattā aṭṭhārasakkharehi yuttā kusumitalatā vellitāgāthāti daṭṭhabbā. Vuttañhi vuttodaye ‘‘mo to no yo yā kusumitalatā vellitākkhutvisīhī’’ti. Ayaṃ panettha yojanā. Yassaṃ paṭipādaṃ akkhutvisīhi pañcayati chayati sattayatīhi mogaṇo ca togaṇo ca nogaṇo ca yogaṇo ca yā yagaṇadvayañca ce yuttā , sā gāthā kusumitalatā vellitā kusumitalatā vellitā gāthā nāmāti. Ettha ca akkhasaddassa pañcindriyavācakattā akkhasaddo pañcasaṅkhyāvācakoti veditabbo. Utūnaṃ hemantasisīravassantagimhavassānasaradavasena chabbidhattā utusaddo chasaṅkhyāvācakoti. Isisaddo vipassīādīnaṃ buddhānaṃ sattavidhattā sattasaṅkhyāvācakoti veditabboti.
其中,关联义为:那位利益他人者、牟尼之主,坐于康丹巴树根处,迅速示现神通;我礼敬彼牟尼之主,我礼敬。今依义理次第,我当解释。利益他人者:即通过自身为其他一切众生作利益、作饶益。所谓“hita”,即由此而增长、增广安乐;“attha”即利益或目的。“hi”字根有增长义。具足此者,增长世间与出世间的安乐,此即义。他人的利益为“parahita”,作此利益者为“parahitakaro”,即牟尼之主。自于燃灯世尊足下获得授记以来,他舍弃自己的安乐,为了众生世间的利益安乐,历经四不可计劫又十万劫,圆满三十波罗蜜,行五大舍,在成就一切知佛果之时,又于四十五年间以说法为众生世间作世间与出世间的利益安乐,因此赞叹他为“利益他人者”。“yo”:即那位、那样的。“munindo”:即佛陀。因他是五种牟尼——在家牟尼、出家牟尼、有学牟尼、无学牟尼、独觉牟尼——之尊主,故称为“牟尼之主”。“康丹巴树根处”:此处应分词为“kaṇḍa-amba-mūle”。为护韵律而有增音“ṃ”。“kaṇḍa”是指波斯匿拘萨罗显示巴利原文
Tattha pana parahitakaro yo munindo kaṇḍambamūle nisinno pāṭiheraṃ sīghaṃ akāsi, taṃ munindaṃ ahaṃ vande vandāmīti sambandho. Atthakkamena panettha vaṇṇayissāmi. Parahitakaroti attanā paresaṃ sabbasattānaṃ hitaṃ atthaṃ karonto. Hinoti vaḍḍhati sukhaṃ etenāti hitaṃ, atthaṃ payojanaṃ vā. Hidhātu vaḍḍhane ta. Taṃsamaṅgino lokiyalokuttarasukhaṃ vaḍḍhatīti attho. Paresaṃ hitaṃ parahitaṃ, taṃ karotīti parahitakaro, munindo. So hi dīpaṅkarassa bhagavato pādamūle laddhabyākaraṇato paṭṭhāya attano sukhaṃ pajahanto sattalokassa hitasukhatthāya kappasata sahassādhikāni cattāri asaṅkhyeyyāni samatiṃsapāramiyo pañcamahāpariccāge ca karonto sabbaññubuddhabhāvaṃ pattakāle ca pañcacattālīsavassāni dhamma desanāya sattalokassa lokiyalokuttarahita sukhaṃ karotīti parahitakaroti thometi. Yoti yo yādiso. Munindoti buddho. So hi agāriya muni, anagāriyamuni, sekkhamuni, asekkhamuni, paccekamunivasena pañcannaṃ munīnaṃ indoti munindoti vuccati. Kaṇḍambamūleti ettha kaṇḍaambamūleti padacchedo. Chandānurakkhaṇatthaṃ bindāgamo. Kaṇḍanāmikena pasenadīkosalarañño uyyānapālena ropitassa setambarukkhassa samīpeti attho. Ettha ca kaṇḍanti tasseva nāmaṃ. Atha vā kaṃ vuccati sukhaṃ, taṃ ḍeti gacchati pāpuṇātīti kaṇḍo, uyyānapālo. Kaṃsaddūpapadaḍi dhātu gatiyaṃ ṇa. Kaṃ vuccati vā udakaṃ, taṃ rukkhesu siñcanaṃ ṭināti jānātīti kaṇḍo, uyyānapālo uyyāna nāyako vā. Phalakāmehi janehi amiyati gamiyatīti ambo, setambarukkho. Amadhātu gatiyaṃ bo. Kaṇḍanāmikena uyyānapālena ropito ambo kaṇḍambo, tassa mūlaṃ samīpanti kaṇḍambamūlaṃ, tasmiṃ kaṇḍambamūle.
“nisinno”:即安住。“accheraṃ”:以令人惊奇之义。此“acchera”一词是表示惊奇之义的不变化分词。又或,极度惊奇运行、现起者,名为“accheraṃ”,即神通。“ā”为前缀,“cara”字根有行义,加后缀“a”,“cara”字根变为“cchera”,前缀“ā”的元音缩短。犹如盲人登山,非恒常运行、非恒常现起者,名为“accheraṃ”,即神通。“na”为前缀,“cara”字根有行义,加后缀“a”。正如盲人登山并非恒常发生,只是偶尔发生;同样,世尊的神通并非恒常示现,只是偶尔示现。因此,彼称为“accheraṃ”。故《导论注》中说:“凡非频繁生起者,彼为希奇。”又或者,适合弹指者为“acchariyaṃ”,于适合义加后缀“ṇiya”。本应说“acchariyaṃ”,为护韵律而省略“iya”音,说为“accheraṃ”。此在《戒蕴品注》中已说:“犹如盲人登山,非恒常发生,故为希奇。此是词源理趣。而注释理趣则为:适合弹指者为希奇,义即适合弹指。” “nayanasubhagaṃ”显示巴利原文
Nisinnoti vasamāno. Vimhāpaniyaṭṭhena accheraṃ. Ayañhi accherasaddo vimhayatthavācako anipphannapāṭi padiko. Atha vā ābhuso vimhayo carati pavattatīti accheraṃ, pāṭiheraṃ. Āpubba caradhātu gatiyaṃ a. Caradhātussaccherādeso. Ākārassa rasso. Andhassa pabbatārohanaṃ viya niccaṃ na carati na pavattatīti accheraṃ, pāṭiheraṃ. Napubba caradhātu gatiyaṃ a. Yathā hi andhassa pabbātārohanaṃ niccaṃ na hoti, kadāciyeva hoti, evameva bhagavato pāṭihāriyaṃ niccaṃ na hoti, kadāciyeva hoti. Tasmā taṃ accheranti vuccati. Tena vuttaṃ nettiaṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘yaṃ abhiṇhaṃ na pavattati, taṃ acchariya’’nti. Atha vā accharaṃ paharituṃ yogganti acchariyaṃ. Yoggataddhite ṇiyapaccayo. Acchariyanti hi vattabbe chandānurakkhaṇatthaṃ iyasaddalopena accheranti vuttaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ sīlakkhandhavaggaṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘andhassa pabbatārohanaṃ viya niccaṃ na hotīti acchariyaṃ. Ayaṃ tāva saddanayo. Ayaṃ pana aṭṭhakathānayo, accharāyogganti acchariyaṃ, accharaṃ paharituṃ yuttanti attho’’ti. Nayanasubhaganti devamanussānaṃ pasādacakkhussa sobhanapattaṃ. Samavisamaṃ dassentaṃ attabhāvaṃ netīti nayanaṃ, pasādacakkhu. Nīdhātu naye yu. Tassa subhaṃ sobhanaṃ gacchatīti nayanasubhagaṃ, pāṭiheraṃ. Nayanasubha saddūpapadagamudhātu gatiyaṃ kvi. Taṃ nayanasubhagaṃ.
“ākulaṇṇaggijālaṃ”:此处应作词分析为“ākula-aṇṇa-aggi-jālaṃ”。意为遍布水柱与火焰。或者,其义为:在周围各处群聚、散布、相互混合、成双成对而具足水网与火网者。极度使水网与火网相互混合者,称为“ākulaṃ”,即指水网与火网。其中“ā”是前缀,“kul”字根有“作”义,加“a”后缀。或者,极度群聚、结合、相互者,称为“ākulaṃ”。或者,从周围群聚、成双成对的水网与火网生起者,称为“ākulaṃ”,即水网与火网。水网与火网,火网与水网相互混合,此为其义。“aṇṇaṃ”:众生赖以活命者,称为“aṇṇaṃ”,即水。“an”字根有“活命”义,加“a”后缀,“n”变为“ṇ”。其重复形式,或为双数。或者,运行、去往各处者,称为“aṇṇaṃ”。“ar”字根有“行”义,变为“ann”,字根尾音消失,“nn”变为“ṇṇ”。水之持流为“aṇṇaṃ”,此处略去后分。以弯曲之性运行、去往者,称为“aggi”。“aj”字根有“行”义,加“i”后缀,“j”变为“gg”。燃烧、照耀者称为“jālaṃ”,即火焰。“jal”字根有“照耀”义。显示巴利原文
Ākulaṇṇaggijālanti ettha ākulaaṇṇaaggijālanti padacchedo. Parikiṇṇa udakadhāra aggisikhāvantaṃ. Atha vā parisamantato kulaṃ pakiṇṇaṃ aññamaññamissakaṃ yamakaṃ yamakaṃ udakajālaaggijālavantanti attho. Ābhuso kulati udakaggijālaṃ aññamaññamissakaṃ karotīti ākulaṃ, udakaggijālaṃ. Āpubbakuladhātu karaṇe a. Ābhusaṃ kulati bandhati aññamaññanti vā ākulaṃ. Atha vā āsamantato kulati yamakaṃ yamakaṃ udakaggijālaṃ pavattatīti ākulaṃ, udakaggijālaṃ. Udakajālaṃ aggijālena aggijālañca udakajālena sammisso hotīti attho. Ananti jīvanti etena sattāti aṇṇaṃ, udakaṃ. Anadhātu jīvāyaṃ a. Nassa ṇo. Tassa dvittaṃ. Dvibhāvo vā. Atha vā arati gacchati taṃ taṃ ṭhānanti aṇṇaṃ. Aradhātu gatimhito. Tassa annādeso, dhātvantalopo, nnassa ṇṇattaṃ. Aṇṇassa dhāraṃ aṇṇaṃ. Uttarapadalopena. Kuṭilabhāvena ajati gacchatīti aggi, ajadhātu gatiyaṃ i. Jassa ggo. Jalati dibbatīti jālaṃ, sikhaṃ. Jaladhātu dittiyaṃ ṇa. Aggino jālaṃ aggijālaṃ. Aṇṇañca aggijālañca aṇṇaggijālaṃ, ākulaṃ parikiṇṇaṃ aṇṇaggijālaṃ assāti ākulaṇṇaggijālaṃ, yamaka pāṭiheraṃ labbhati. Taṃ ākulaṇṇaggijālaṃ.
“dujjāladdhaṃsaṃ”:意为恶见之网——即邪见论网——已被彻底摧毁。因其能邪恶地燃烧、捆绑、令轮回转动,故称“dujjāla”(恶网),即邪见论网。外道之说以“无布施”等论调展开,如同网一般使人无法出离轮回,故称“dujjāla”。其中“du”是前缀,加“jala”和“bandhana”的语根“ṇo”。摧毁、粉碎此网者,即“dujjāladdhaṃsaṃ”,指双神变。“munibhijahitaṃ”应分析为“munibhi ajahitaṃ”。其中“munibhi”指诸正自觉者。因为他们拥有“mona”——即一切知智,故称“muni”。或者,因为他们具足身默然、语默然、意默然,故称“muni”。有财释复合词中加“ṇī”后缀。又或者,因为他们了知此世、他世、自利、利他、利与不利,故称“muni”。由这些圣者……”显示巴利原文
Dujjāladdhaṃsanti duṭṭhu diṭṭhivādasaṅkhātajālaṃ viddhaṃsitaṃ. Duṭṭhu jalati bandhati saṃsāravaṭṭeti dujjālaṃ, diṭṭhivādajālaṃ. Titthiya vādo hi natthi dinnantiādinayapavatto saṃsārato nissaritumappadānavasena jālasadisattā dujjālanti attho. Dupubba jaladhātu bandhane ṇo. Taṃ dhaṃsati viddhaṃsatīti dujjāladdhaṃsaṃ, yamakapāṭihāriyaṃ. Munibhijahitanti munibhi ajahitanti padacchedo. Tattha munibhīti sabbasammāsambuddhehi. Te hi monaṃ vuccati sabbaññutañāṇaṃ, taṃ etesaṃ atthīti munīti vuccanti. Kāyamoneyya vacīmoneyya manomoneyyaṃ etesaṃ atthīti vā muni. Assatthitaddhite ṇīpaccayo. Atha vā idhaloka paralokaṃ attahita parahitaṃ hitāhitañca munanti jānantīti munīti vuccanti. Tehi munībhi.
“ajahitaṃ”意为未被舍弃、未被遗弃;应当被舍弃、应当被断除的,称为“jahita”。“hā”语根表舍弃。未被舍弃的,即“ajahitaṃ”,指神变。那是不被舍弃的。因为世尊在舍卫城南门康丹巴树下所行的神变,以及世尊于该神变结束后前往三十三天,在波利质多罗树下的般度甘婆罗石座上安坐,为诸天宣说阿毗达摩法教——这一切是一切正等正觉者所不舍弃的常法。在《佛种姓经注》中阐明三十种常法时,即说“于舍卫城门行双神变”、“于三十三天宫说阿毗达摩”为常法。因此,称叹“神变未被圣者所舍弃”。显示巴利原文
Ajahitanti avijahitaṃ apariccattaṃ vā, hātabbaṃ cajitabbanti jahitaṃ. Hādhātu cāge ta. Na jahitaṃ ajahitaṃ, pāṭiheraṃ. Taṃ ajahitaṃ. Bhagavato hi sāvatthinagarassa dakkhiṇadvāre kaṇḍambarukkhamūle kataṃ pāṭihāriyañca bhagavā pana tasmiṃ pāṭihāriyāvasāne tāvatiṃsapuraṃ gato, tasmiṃ pārichattakamūlamhi paṇḍukambalanāmake silāsane sannisinno devānaṃ abhidhammakathāya desanā ca sabbasammāsambuddhehi avijahitā dhammatāyeva hotīti vuttaṃ hoti. Buddhavaṃsaṭṭhakathāyañhi samatiṃsadhammatāpakāsane sāvatthi nagaradvāre yamakapāṭihāriyakaraṇaṃ. Tāvatiṃse bhavane abhidhammadesanāti dhammatābhāvena vuttaṃ. Tasmā pāṭiheraṃ munībhijahitanti thometi.
“pāṭiheraṃ”(神变):以反击敌对者为义,称为神变;即摧破敌对的外道而运行、展现,故名“pāṭiheraṃ”。此词是将“paṭi”前缀与意为“运行”的语根“hi”结合,加上后缀“ṇo”,其中“hi”转为“hera”。或者,因其能带走、除去世尊与教法的敌对之外道,故称“pāṭiheraṃ”,即神通智。此是将“paṭi”前缀与意为“带走、除去”的语根“hara”结合,加上后缀“ṇo”。或者,因其能反击、除去众生生起的邪见与慢心,故称“pāṭiheraṃ”。或者,因其能令未生信者生起净信,故称“pāṭiheraṃ”。或者,在心得等持、远离烦恼之后,由所作已办者随后而行、展现,故称“pāṭiheraṃ”。此处“paṭi”一词即表“之后”之义,如“在那之后,另一位婆罗门来了”等语中的用法。或者,因其一次又一次、不间断地以水火之网成双成对地运行、展现,故称“pāṭiheraṃ”,即双神变。此神变又分为三种:神通神变、记心神变、教诫神变。其中,此处意指神通神变。“sīghaṃ”意为迅速、快捷、轻快。此词在“akāsi”(他作了)这一动词句中显示巴利原文
Pāṭiheranti paccanīkapaṭiharaṇavasena pāṭihāriyaṃ, paṭipakkhe titthiye madditvā hinoti pavattatīti pāṭiheraṃ. Paṭipubbahidhātu gatiyaṃ ṇo. Hissa heraṇideso. Atha vā bhagavato ca sāsanassa ca paṭipakkhe titthiye harati apanetīti pāṭiheraṃ, iddhividhañāṇaṃ. Paṭipubbaharadhātu apanayane ṇo. Paṭiharati apaneti sattānaṃ diṭṭhimānopagatāni cittānīti vā pāṭiheraṃ. Appasannānaṃ pasādaṃ āharatīti vā pāṭiheraṃ. Samāhite citte vigatūpakkilese katakiccena paṭipacchā haritabbaṃ pavattetabbanti vā pāṭiheraṃ. Paṭīti hi ayaṃsaddo pacchāti etassa atthaṃ bodheti. Tasmiṃ paṭipaviṭṭhamhi añño āgacchi brāhmaṇotiādīsu viya. Atha vā paṭipunappunaṃ udakaggijālaṃ abbocchinnaṃ yamakaṃ yamakaṃ hutvā harati pavattatīti pāṭiheraṃ, yamakapāṭihāriyaṃ. Tañca pana iddhipāṭihāriya, ādesanāpāṭihāriya, anusā sanī pāṭihāriyavasena tividhaṃ hoti. Tesu pana idha iddhipāṭihāriyaṃ adhippetanti. Sīghanti khippaṃ āsuṃ lahuṃ vā. Taṃ pana akāsītipade kriyāvisesanaṃ. Seti lahu hutvā pavattatīti sīghaṃ. Sidhātu gatimhi ghapaccayo. Dīgho. Akāsīti akari.
在此,神变应如此理解:世尊于成正觉后第七年,在舍卫城南门的甘达巴树下,帝释天命令毗首羯磨天子化现出十二由旬的宝石殿堂,世尊则化现了一由旬大小的宝石宝座与宝石经行处,坐在其上。当三由旬的天界白伞盖被擎持时,在周围十二由旬的会众中,为了开示义利、摧伏外道,世尊从上半身现出火聚,从下半身现出水聚;从下半身现出火聚,从上半身现出水聚。从身体前部现出火聚,从身体后部现出水聚;从身体后部现出火聚,从身体前部现出水聚。从右眼现出火聚,从左眼现出水聚;从左眼现出火聚,从右眼现出水聚。从右耳孔现出火聚,从左耳孔现出水聚;从左耳孔现出火聚,从右耳孔现出水聚。从右鼻孔现出火聚,从左鼻孔现出水聚;从左鼻孔现出火聚,从右鼻孔现出水聚。从右肩现出火聚,从左肩现出水聚;从左肩现出火聚,从右肩现出水聚。从右手现出火聚,从左手现出水聚;从左手现出火聚,从右手现出水聚。从右半身现出火聚,从左半身现出水聚;从左半身现出火聚,从右半身现出水聚。从右脚现出火聚,从左脚现出水聚;从左脚现出火聚,从右脚现出水聚。从每一手指现出火显示巴利原文
Ettha ca pāṭihāriyamevaṃ veditabbaṃ. Bhagavā hi abhisambodhito sattame saṃvacchare sāvatthinagarassa dakkhiṇadvāre kaṇḍambarukkhamūle devānamindena sakkena āṇāpitena visukammadevaputtena nimmite dvādasayojane ratana maṇḍape bhagavatā nimmite yojanappamāṇe ratanapallaṅke ratanacaṅkame ca nisīditvā tiyojanike dibbasetacchatte dhārayamāne samantato dvādasayojanāya parisāya atthādānaparidīpanaṃ titthiyamaddanaṃ uparimakāyato aggikkhandho pavattati, heṭṭhimakāyato udakadhārā pavattati, heṭṭhimakāyato aggikkhandho, uparimakāyato udakadhārā. Puratthimakāyato aggikkhandho, pacchimakāyato udakadhārā. Pacchimakāyato aggikkhandho, puratthimakāyato udakadhārā, dakkhiṇaakkhito aggikkhandho, vāmaakkhito udakadhārā. Vāmaakkhito aggikkhandho, dakkhiṇaakkhito udakadhārā. Dakkhiṇakaṇṇasotato aggikkhandho, vāmakaṇṇasotato udakadhārā. Vāmakaṇṇasotato aggikkhandho, dakkhiṇakaṇṇasotato udakadhārā. Dakkhiṇa nāsikāsotato aggikkhandho, vāmanāsikāso tato udakadhārā. Vāmanāsikāsotato aggikkhandho, dakkhiṇanāsikāsotato udakadhārā. Dakkhiṇaaṃsakūṭato aggikkhandho, vāmaaṃsakūṭato udakadhārā. Vāmaaṃsakūṭato aggikkhandho, dakkhiṇaaṃsakūṭato udakadhārā. Dakkhiṇahatthato aggikkhandho, vāmahatthato udakadhārā. Vāmahatthato aggikkhandho, dakkhiṇahatthato udakadhārā. Dakkhiṇapassato aggikkhandho, vāmapassato udakadhārā. Vāmapassato aggikkhandho, dakkhiṇapassato udakadhārā. Dakkhiṇapādato aggikkhandho, vāmapādato udakadhārā. Vāmapādato aggikkhandho, dakkhiṇapādato udakadhārā. Aṅgulaṅgulehi aggikkhandho, aṅgulantarikāhi udakadhārā. Aṅgulantarikāhi aggikkhandho, aṅgulaṅgulehi udakadhārā. Ekekalomato aggikkhandho, ekekalomato udakadhārā. Lomakūpato lomakūpato aggikkhandho, lomakūpato lomakūpato udakadhārā pavattati. Channaṃ vaṇṇānaṃ nīlānaṃ pītānaṃ lohitakānaṃ odātānaṃ mañjaṭṭhānaṃ pabhassarānaṃ ubbahanabhūtānaṃ yamakā yamakā vaṇṇā pavattanti. Bhagavā caṅkamati, nimmito tiṭṭhati vā nisīdati vā seyyaṃ vā kappeti. Bhagavā tiṭṭhati, nimmito caṅkamati vā nisīdati vā seyyaṃ vā kappeti. Bhagavā nisīdati, nimmito caṅkamati vā tiṭṭhati vā seyyaṃ vā kappeti. Bhagavā seyyaṃ kappeti, nimmito caṅkamati vā tiṭṭhati vā nisīdati vā. Nimmito caṅkamati, bhagavā tiṭṭhati vā nisīdati vā seyyaṃ vā kappeti. Nimmito tiṭṭhati, bhagavā caṅkamati vā nisīdati vā seyyaṃ vā kappeti. Nimmito nisīdati, bhagavā caṅkamati vā tiṭṭhati vā seyyaṃ vā kappeti. Nimmito seyyaṃ kappeti, bhagavā caṅkamati vā tiṭṭhati vā nisīdati vāti vividhaṃ yamakapāṭihāriyaṃ titthiyānaṃ maddanatthāya akāsīti. Ettha ca pana yo koci evarūpaṃ pāṭihāriyaṃ kātuṃ samattho ce. So āgacchatūti codanāsadisattā vuttaṃ atthādānaparidīpananti. Atthādānañhi anuyogo, paṭipakkhassa atthassa ādānaṃ gahaṇanti katvā, tassa paridīpanaṃ atthādānaparidīpanaṃ. Titthiyamaddananti pāṭihāriyaṃ karissāmāti kuhāyanavasena pubbe uṭṭhitānaṃ titthiyānaṃ maddanaṃ. Tañca tathā kātuṃ asamatthatā sampādanameva. Tadetaṃ padadvayaṃ yamakapāṭihāriyanti etena sambandhitabbanti.
“最胜”即更为殊胜、值得称赞。其词义前文已释。“生最上喜乐者”即能令天与人产生最上喜乐者。或者,能令最上善人之心喜悦者。在此,第一种解释中,“parama”一词是表示“最上”的不变词,非派生词;第二种解释中,它是表示“善”的派生词。“令天与人产生最上喜乐者”为“paramaratijo”,即牟尼王。这里是将“paramarati”一词置于前,加上意为“产生”的词根“jan”及后缀“kvi”而构成。或者,以种种方式喜乐于正法者为“paramā”,即善人们。这是前缀“pa”加意为“游戏”的词根“ramu”及后缀“a”而构成。能令他们之心产生喜乐者为“paramaratijo”,即牟尼王。他即是“paramaratijaṃ”。因为他通过说法、神变、神通、身相庄严成就等,令天与人的心产生殊胜的欢喜,故称扬为“生最上喜乐者”。显示巴利原文
Seṭṭhanti pasatthataraṃ. Tassa vacanattho heṭṭhā vuttoyeva. Paramaratijanti devamanussānaṃ uttamaratiṃ janakaṃ. Paramānaṃ uttamasādhūnaṃ cittaramanaṃ janāpetaṃ vā, ettha ca paṭhamavikappe paramasaddo uttamavācako anipphannapāṭipadiko nipāto. Dutiyavikappe sādhuvācako nipphannapāṭipadiko. Devamanussānaṃ paramaṃ uttamaṃ ratiṃ janetīti paramaratijo, munindo. Paramaratisaddūpapada janadhātu janane kvi. Atha vā pakārena saddhamme ramantīti paramā, sādhū labbhanti. Papubba ramudhātu kīḷāyaṃ a. Tesaṃ cittassa ratiṃ ramanaṃ janetīti paramaratijo, munindo. Taṃ paramaratijaṃ. So hi dhamma desanāya ca pāṭihāriyena iddhiyā sarīrasobhagga sampattiādīhi ca devamanussānaṃ cittassa abhiratiṃ abhikkantaṃ janetīti paramaratijanti thometi.
“具足神通法者”(iddhidhammehupeta)应断作“iddhidhammehi upeta”。“以神通法”即依凭那些不可思议、无量的、名为佛神通的功德。因为“法”一词亦用于功德,正如“佛法”等词。成就、圆满即为“神通”;或者,能成就、圆满者即为“神通”;或者,藉此能成就、圆满所欲之义者即为“神通”。词根“idh”表增长,加后缀“i”,或加后缀“ti”。世尊藉此神通,所欲之义得以成就、增长、达至究竟——此即其义。能持守、能显了彼具足者之德者,即是“法”,亦即功德。神通即是法,故为“神通法”;以诸神通法而“具足”,即具备。“具足”(upeta)是“前往、成就”之义,指牟尼王。前缀“upa”加词根“i”(行),加后缀“ta”。他即是“具足者”。显示巴利原文
Iddhidhammehupetanti iddhidhammehi upetanti padacchedo. Iddhi dhammehīti acinteyyaappameyyehi buddhaiddhisaṅkhātaguṇehi. Dhammasaddo hi guṇe vattati buddhadhammātiādīsu viya. Ijjhanaṃ samijjhanaṃ iddhi. Ijjhati samijjhatīti vā iddhi. Ijjhati samijjhati yathicchitattho etāyāti iddhi. Idhadhātu vuddhiyaṃ i, tipaccayo vā. Bhagavā etāya iddhiyā yathicchitattho iddho vuddho ukkaṃsagato hotīti attho. Dhāreti pakāseti taṃsamaṅgino dabbanti dhammo, guṇo. Iddhieva dhammo iddhidhammo, tehi dhammehi. Upetanti samannāgataṃ. Upagacchati sampajjatīti upeto, munindo. Upapubbaidhātu gatiyaṃ ta. Taṃ upetaṃ.
神通有十种:决意神通、变化神通、意所成神通、智遍满神通、定遍满神通、圣神通、业异熟神通、具福者神通、明所成神通,以及于一切处由正加行之缘而成就(ijjhana)故,名为神通(iddhi)。其中,原本为一者变成多者:作意百或千之后,以智决意“我当成为多者”,如此分别显现的神通,由决意所生,故名决意神通。舍弃原本的形色,显现童子形、龙形、金翅鸟形、夜叉形……乃至显现种种军阵,如此生起的神通,因为是舍弃原本形色而变化运作,故名变化神通。“比丘从此身化作另一个意所成之身”——依此理趣而来的神通,因于色身内成就另一意所成色身而起,故名意所成神通。因智的证得,或前或后,或于当下刹那,由智的威力所生的殊胜,名为智遍满神通。于此,应知拔古喇长老、僧吉吒长老、护民长老的神通为智遍满神通。因定之故,或前或后,或于当下刹那,由止的威力所生的殊胜,名为定遍满神通。于此,应知舍利弗长老、生息长老、憍陈如长老,以及优婆夷郁多罗、沙摩婆提的神通为定遍满神通。显示巴利原文
Iddhi pana adhiṭṭhānā iddhi, vikuppanā iddhi, manomayā iddhi, ñāṇavipphārā iddhi, samādhivipphārā iddhi, ariyā iddhi, kammavipākajā iddhi, puññavato iddhi, vijjāmayā iddhi, tattha tattha sammāpayogapaccayā ijjhanaṭṭhena iddhi cāti dasavidhā hoti. Tattha pakatiyā eko bahukaṃ āpajjati. Sataṃ vā sahassaṃ vā āvajjitvā ñāṇena adhiṭṭhāti bahuko homīti evaṃ vibhajitvā dassitā iddhi adhiṭṭhāna vasena nipphannattā adhiṭṭhānā iddhi nāma. Pakativaṇṇaṃ vijahitvā kumāravaṇṇaṃ vā dasseti nāgavaṇṇaṃ vā supaṇṇavaṇṇaṃ vā yakkhavaṇṇaṃ vā…pe… vividhampi senābyūhaṃ dassetīti evaṃ āgatā iddhi pakativaṇṇavijahanavikāravasena pavattattā vikuppanā iddhi nāma. Idha bhikkhu imamhā kāyā aññaṃ kāyaṃ abhinimmināti rūpaṃ manomayanti iminā nayena āgatā iddhi sarīrabbhantare aññasseva manomayassa sarīrassa nipphattivasena pavattattā manomayā iddhi nāma. Ñāṇuppattito pubbe vā pacchā vā taṅkhaṇe vā ñāṇānubhāvanibbattā visesā ñāṇavipphārā iddhi nāma. Ettha ca āyasmato bākulattherassa ca āyasmato saṃkiccattherassa ca āyasmato bhūtapālattherassa ca ñāṇavipphārā iddhi veditabbā. Samādhito pubbe vā pacchā vā taṅkhaṇe vā samathānubhāvena nibbattā visesā samādhivipphārā iddhi nāma. Ettha ca āyasmato sāriputtattherassa ca āyasmato sañjīvattherassa ca āyasmato khāṇukoṇḍaññattherassa ca uttarāya upāsikāya ca sāmāvatiyā upāsikāya ca samādhivipphārā iddhi veditabbā.
于不净等之中作非不净想而住等,名为圣神通。鸟类、天神等飞腾虚空等,名为业异熟神通。如说:“何为业异熟神通?即一切鸟类、一切天神、某些人、某些堕地狱者的(神通),此为业异熟神通”等。转轮王等飞腾虚空等,名为具福者神通。如说:“何为具福者神通?转轮王与四军同腾虚空,乃至包括系马者、系牛者、步卒。居士乔提迦的(神通)为具福者神通。居士贾提拉的(神通)为具福者神通。居士哥沙卡的(神通)为具福者神通。居士弥伽的(神通)为具福者神通。此五大福者的(神通)为具福者神通。”持明者等飞腾虚空等,名为明所成神通。在此,由“等”字包含了在虚空中显现象、马……乃至显现种种军阵等。以如是正加行令如是业成就,在任何情况下由正加行缘而成就(ijjhana)故,名为神通(iddhi)。显示巴利原文
Paṭikūlādīsu appaṭikūlasaññī vihārādikā pana ariyā iddhi nāma. Pakkhidevādīnaṃ vehāsagamanādikā kamma vipākajā iddhi nāma. Yathāha ‘‘katamā vipākajā iddhi. Sabbesaṃ pakkhīnaṃ sabbesaṃ devānaṃ ekaccānaṃ manussānaṃ ekaccā nañca vinipātikānaṃ ayaṃ kammavipākajā iddhī’’tiādi. Cakkavattiādīnaṃ vehāsagamanādikā pana puññavato iddhi nāma. Yathāha ‘‘katamā puññavato iddhi. Rājā cakkavatti vehāsaṃ gacchati saddhiṃ caturaṅginiyā senāya antamaso assabandhagobandhapurise upādāya. Jotikassa gahapatissa puññavato iddhi. Jaṭilassa gahapatissa puññavato iddhi. Ghosakassa gahapatissa puññavato iddhi. Meṇḍakassa gahapatissa puññavato iddhi. Pañcannaṃ mahāpuññānaṃ puññavato iddhī’’ti. Vijjādharādīnaṃ vehāsagamanādikā pana vijjāmayā iddhi nāma. Ettha ca ādisaddena ākāse antalikkhe hatthimpi dasseti. Assampi…pe… vividhampi senābyūhaṃ dasseti tyādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Tena tena sammāpayogena tassa tassa kammassa ijjhanaṃ tattha tattha sammā payogapaccayā ijjhanaṭṭhena iddhi nāma.
此为略说。广说则应取自《无碍解道》之神通论与《清净道论》之注释。在这些神通中,除世尊的明所成神通外,应知其余神通他人亦可具有。或者,因世尊具足三明与八明,故一切佛之神通皆具,明所成神通亦可得,应作如是观。“我顶礼彼牟尼尊”即此段之关联。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepo. Vitthāro pana paṭisambhidāmagge iddhikathāya ca visuddhimaggaṭṭhakathāya ca gahetabbo. Tāsu pana iddhīsu bhagavato ṭhapetvā vijjāmayiddhiṃ avasesā atthīti veditabbā. Atha vā bhagavato tīhi vijjāhi ca aṭṭhahi vijjāhi ca samannāgatattā sabbā buddhaiddhiyo santīti vijjāmayiddhipi labbhatīti daṭṭhabbā. Taṃ munindaṃ ahaṃ vande vandāmīti sambandho.
此处是简要的义理联结。那位为他人谋利益、为一切众生作饶益的牟尼主,那位如是之佛陀,曾安住于坎达巴树下——那是由名为坎达的拘萨罗王波斯匿的园丁所种的白芒果树附近。他在此处示现了稀有、令人惊叹、赏心悦目,令天与人净信、眼目殊胜的神变:交织的火焰网与散布的水流,具足火焰之顶,周围完全交织、相互混杂,一对对水网与火网兼备;此神变亦摧毁了邪见之网,即那些恶邪见之说,为诸牟尼所不舍、一切正等正觉者所不舍。他迅速、快速地作了这神变、对治的神变、双神变、水火双对神变,这是最胜、更值得称赞的,能生最上喜乐,令天与人产生最上喜乐,或令最上善士心生欢喜。对于那位具足不可思议、不可称量的神足法、佛陀神变功德的彼牟尼主,我以头面敬礼。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepatthayojanā. Parahitakaro attanā paresaṃ sabbasattānaṃ atthaṃ payojanaṃ karonto, yo munindo yo yādiso buddho, kaṇḍambaṃmūle kaṇḍanāmikena pasenadikosalarañño uyyānapālena ropitassa setambarukkhassa samīpe sannisinno vasamāno accheraṃ vimhāpanīyaṃ nayanasubhagaṃ devamanussānaṃ pasāda cakkhussa sobhanapattaṃ ākulaṇṇaggijālaṃ parikiṇṇaudaka dhāraaggisikhavantaṃ parisamantato kulaṃ parikiṇṇaṃ aññamañña missakaṃ yamakaṃ yamakaṃ udakajālaaggijālavantaṃ vā, dujjāladdhaṃsaṃ duṭṭhuṃ micchādiṭṭhivādasaṅkhātaṃ jālaṃ viddhaṃsitaṃ, munibhijahitaṃ sabbasammāsambuddhehi avijahitaṃ, pāṭiheraṃ paccanīka paṭihārakaṃ pāṭihāriyaṃ udakaggiyamakaṃyamakaṃ pāṭihāriyaṃ vā , sīghaṃ khippaṃ akāsi akari, seṭṭhaṃ pasatthataraṃ, paramaratijaṃ devamanussānaṃ uttamaratiṃ janakaṃ uttamānaṃ sādhūnaṃ cittaramanaṃ janāpetaṃ vā, iddhidhammehi acinteyyaappameyyehi buddhaiddhi guṇehi upetaṃ samannāgataṃ, taṃ munindaṃ ahaṃ sirasā vande vandāmīti.
20 那唯一的牟尼尊,犹如初升之朝阳,智慧广如日轮。他以殊胜的法光,如日轮开启莲花,度化应度的众生流。他善觉悟,令三有窟穴清净,令名声遍满;他是三界的唯一眼目,不忍众生的难忍之苦。我恭敬顶礼彼大仙。显示巴利原文
20. Munindakko yveko dayudayaruṇo ñāṇavitthiṇṇabimbo, vineyyappāṇoghaṃ kamalakathitaṃ dhammaraṃsīvarehi. Subodhesī suddhe tibhavakuhare byāpitakkittinañca, tilokekaccakkhuṃ dukhamasahanaṃ taṃ mahesiṃ namāmi.
20 如此,以第十九偈礼敬牟尼尊后,为以“调御应度流”等说法中的九种功德赞叹四谛法,并再次礼敬牟尼尊,故说“唯彼牟尼尊”等偈。此偈由ya、ma、na、sa、ra等音节及一重音,总六十八或七十二音节所成,当知名为“云极耀偈”。如《文灯》中所说:“若以六或七音节,与ya音组、na音组、sa音组、ra音组及一重音结合,即名云极耀偈。”其义为:在偈行中,以六或七音节,配合ya gaṇa、na gaṇa、sa gaṇa、ra gaṇa及一重音者,即名云极耀偈。此处,味有苦、酸、甘、咸、淡、辛六种,故应知“味”字表六数;时有冬、寒、春、夏、雨、秋六季,故应知“时”字表六数。“阿萨(呼吸)”字应知表七数,因《旃陀疏》中已说“阿萨”表七数故。显示巴利原文
20. Evaṃ ekūnavīsatimāya gāthāya munindaṃ vanditvā idāni vineyyappāṇoghaṃ dhammadesanāya catusaccadhammaṃ bodhaneyyādīhi navahi guṇehi thomitvā munindakkaṃ vanditukāmo munindakkotyādigāthamāha. Ayaṃ pana ya ma na sa ra ragaṇehi ca ekagarunā ca chayatīhi ca sattayatīhi ca racitattā ekūnavīsatakkharā meghavipphujjitāgāthāti daṭṭhabbā. Vuttañhi vuttodaye ‘‘rasutvassehi ymā na sa ra ra garū meghavipphujjitā sā’’ti. Ayaṃ panettha yojanā. Yassaṃ paṭipādaṃ rasutvassehi cha cha satta yatīhi ymā yagaṇamagaṇā ca na sa rara garū nagaṇa sagaṇa ragaṇa ragaṇa ekagaru ca ce yuttā, sā gāthā meghavipphujjitā megha vipphujjitā gāthā nāmāti. Ettha ca rasānaṃ kasāva titta madhuralavaṇa ambila kaṭukavasena chabbidhattā rasasaddo chasaṅkhyāvācakoti daṭṭhabbo. Utūnaṃ hemanta sisīra vasanta gimhavassānasaradavasena chabbidhattā utusaddo chasaṅkhyāvācakoti. Assasaddo sattasaṅkhyāvācakoti daṭṭhabbo. Assasaddassa hi sattasaṅkhyāvācakabhāvo chandaṭīkāsu vuttoti.
其中,那位独一无二的牟尼之尊——具足悲愍,如旭日红光;智慧广阔,如圆满轮——在清净的三有之窟中,以殊胜的法光照亮了如莲花般的应度众生之流,令其开悟,名声遍及三界。我向那位不忍众生苦的大牟尼、那位牟尼尊顶礼。如此连结。显示巴利原文
Tattha pana dayudayaruṇo ñāṇavitthiṇṇabimbo eko yo munindakko suddhe tibhavakuhare kamalakathitaṃ vineyyappāṇoghaṃ dhammaraṃsīvarehi subodhesi byāpitakkitti nañca tilokekaccakkhuṃ dukhamasahanaṃ mahesiṃ taṃ munindakkaṃ namāmīti yojanā.
我们将依此颂的意义次第进行解释,以便于理解,而非依文字次第。“Dayudayaruṇo”一词应解析为“dayā-udaya-aruṇo”。意为:以大悲为山之旭日红光;或如从升起山升起的旭日红光般的大悲。此处,“dayā”一词用于悲悯与慈爱。因为在“adayā”(无悲悯)中,它用于悲悯义;在“dayāpanno”(具足悲悯者)中,它用于慈爱义,即“达到慈心状态者”。但在此处,所指为悲悯。显示巴利原文
Imissā gāthāya ca atthakkameneva sukhajānanatthaṃ vaṇṇayissāma, na saddakkamena. Dayudayaruṇotipadassa dayāudayaaruṇoti padavibhāgo kātabbo. Mahākaruṇāsaṅkhātaudayapabbatuggatasūriyāruṇo. Atha vā udayapabbatato uggatasūriyāruṇo viya mahākaruṇā vāti attho. Ettha ca dayāsaddo karuṇāmettāsu vattati. Adayāti vuccati nikkaruṇatanti ettha hi karuṇāyaṃ. Dayāpannoti ettha mettāyaṃ vattati. Mettācittataṃ āpannoti attho. Idha pana karuṇā adhippetā.
今释此词如下:'dayā'(悲)的原意为伤害——只要尚未达成所期望的利他成就,便会伤害悲悯者,此即大悲。'day'词根用于伤害义。或者,'dayā'意为以此摄受,即使对恶人亦然,'day'词根用于摄受义。或者,'dayā'意为舍弃自己的安乐而承受疲劳,'day'词根用于执取义。又或者,'dayā'意指菩萨们以此执取轮回之苦与一切知智,这也正是大悲。因为大菩萨们在发愿成佛之时,舍弃了已到手可证的阿罗汉果,为从轮回大海中救拔众生,执取了令人不安、极其恐怖的轮回之苦,以及在最后生中与证得不死界同时、以众多功德庄严的一切知智。一切佛德皆以大悲为根本,因此《增支部注》中说:'一切佛德以大悲为起始,因为它是这些德目的因缘。'显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ pana vacanattho. Dayati hiṃsati kāruṇikaṃ yāva yathādhippetaṃ parassa hitanibbattiṃ na pāpuṇāti tāvāti dayā, mahākaruṇā. Dayadhātu hiṃsāyaṃ a. Dayati anuggaṇhāti pāpajanampi etāyāti vā dayā. Dayadhātu anuggahaṇe. Dayati attano sukhampi pahāya khedaṃ gaṇhātīti vā dayā. Dayadhātu gahaṇe. Atha vā dayanti gaṇhanti etāya bodhisattā saṃsāradukkhañca sabbaññutañāṇañcāti dayā, mahākaruṇā. Mahābodhisattā hi buddhabhāvāya abhinīhārakaraṇakāle hatthagatampi arahatta phalaṃ chaṭṭetvā saṃsārasāgarato satte samuddharitukāmā anassāsakaraṃ atibhayānakaṃ saṃsāradukkhaṃ pacchimabhave ca saha amatadhātupaṭilābhena anekaguṇasamalaṅkataṃ sabbaññutañāṇañca gaṇhantīti attho. Karuṇāmūlakā hi sabbe buddhaguṇā. Tena vuttaṃ aṅguttaraṭīkāyaṃ ‘‘sabbesañca buddhaguṇānaṃ karuṇā ādi, tannidānabhāvato’’ti.
再者,'dayā'意为以此守护众生;或者,自己只是怀有怜悯,或仅存怜悯,故名为'dayā'。'day'词根用于守护义,加后缀'a'。'udaya'意为升起、增长,指山。'udi'词根用于产生义,加'ṇa'。'aruṇa'意为从周围带来光明而行进,指一种太阳光线。前缀'ā'加'uṇ'词根(用于运行义),加'ṇa'。因此,'dayudayaruṇo'意为:从名为悲悯的升山所升起的太阳红光属于他。或者,意为:他——牟尼之尊,拥有如同从升山升起的太阳红光一般的悲悯、大悲。正如升起的太阳红光是光明的开端,菩萨在燃灯佛足下舍弃了应证的涅槃之乐,以大悲心欲从轮回大海中救拔众生,为成正觉而修习了极为难行的布施等十波罗蜜、五大舍离,历经四阿僧祇又十万劫,所以悲悯是成佛的开端。因此,只有佛陀才配以'dayudayaruṇo'来称颂。显示巴利原文
Api ca dayanti anurakkhanti satte etāya, sayaṃ vā anuddayati anudayamattameva vā etanti dayā. Dayadhātu anurakkhaṇe apaccayo. Udeti vaḍḍhetīti udayo, pabbato. Udidhātu pasavane ṇa. Āsamantato ālokaṃ karonto uṇati gacchatīti aruṇo, sūriyaraṃsī viseso. Āpubbauṇadhātu gatiyaṃ ṇa. Dayāsaṅkhātato udayapabbatato uggatasūriyassa aruṇo yassāti dayudayaruṇo. Atha vā udayapabbatato uggatasūriyāruṇo viya dayā mahākaruṇā yassāti dayudayaruṇo, munindakko. Yathā hi uggatasūriyassa aruṇo ālokassa ādi hoti, evaṃ bodhisatto dīpaṅkarabuddhassa pādamūle karopayātaṃ nibbānasukhamosajja mahākaruṇāya saṃsārasamuddato satte samuddharitukāmo buddhabhāvāya sudukkarā dānādayo dasa pāramiyo ca pañca mahāpariccāge ca kappasatasahassādhikāni cattāri asaṅkhyeyyāni akāsīti karuṇā buddhabhāvāya ādi. Tasmā buddhasseva dayudayaruṇoti abhitthavituṃ arahatīti vuttaṃ hoti.
'Ñāṇavitthiṇṇabimbo'意为:以一切知智为体性,广阔而圆满者。他具有如广阔的铁围山圆轮一般、以广大境为所缘的一切知智。'ñāṇa'(智)即了知一切有为、无为等所知的法,为一切知智。'ñā'词根用于觉悟义。'vitthiṇṇa'意为特别地扩展、广布,指智。前缀'vi'加'tanu'词根(扩展义),加后缀'ta',经历'iṇṇa'替代、词根末音省略等变化。或者,'vitthiṇṇa'意为扩展、散布,此处实为'thara'词根的特殊变化。'bimba'意为以圆轮之形运行、转起的智轮。'vama'词根用于运行义,加'ba',带'assi','va'变为'ba'。显示巴利原文
Ñāṇavitthiṇṇabimboti sabbaññutañāṇasaṅkhāto vitthāra parimaṇḍalo. Vitthāracakkavāḷamaṇḍalaṃ viya vipulārammaṇa sabbaññutañāṇavā. Saṅkhatāsaṅkhatabhedaṃ sabbeñeyyadhammaṃ jānātīti ñāṇaṃ, sabbaññutañāṇaṃ. Ñādhātu avabodhaneyu. Visesena tanoti vitthāretīti vitthiṇṇaṃ, ñāṇaṃ. Vipubbatanudhātu vitthāre tapaccayo. Tassa iṇṇādeso. Dhātvantassa lopo, asarūpadvittaṃ. Atha vā vittharati pattharatīti vitthiṇṇaṃ. Tharadhātumevettha viseso. Vamati parimaṇḍalākārena gacchati pavattatīti bimbaṃ, ñāṇamaṇḍalaṃ. Vamadhātu gatiyaṃ bo. Assi. Vassa bo.
然而,在《Ṇvādimoggallāna》中则说:“vama 用于‘吐出’之义,加 ba。vama 的 va 变为 ba,成 bimba,意为‘吐出’,指身体。”但那是 bimba 一词用于“身体”之义时才恰当,并非用于“圆轮”之义。而此处 bimba 一词正是用于“圆轮”之义。不过,诸师说此处 bimba 一词的意义是“轮圆”。此说有待辨析。何以故?因《阿毗达那灯论》中说:“bimba 用于影像、圆轮、bimbikā 果之义。”其注释中也说:“用于圆轮、圆相之义。”所谓“Ñāṇavitthiṇṇabimbo”,意为:以一切知智为性,广阔、扩展、如圆轮般的智属于他。或者,“Ñāṇavitthiṇṇabimbo”意为:他具有如同广阔铁围山圆轮一般、以广大所缘为境的广阔扩展之智,即一切知智。正如铁围山圆轮因其无边际而广大,佛陀的一切知智也因其所缘无边际而广大,故称颂他为“ñāṇavitthiṇṇabimbo”。“Yveko”应断词为“yo eko”。有些地方也读作“yeko”。显示巴利原文
Ṇvādimoggallāne pana ‘‘vama uggiraṇe ba. Vamissa vassa bittaṃ. Vamati uggiratīti bimbaṃ, sarīra’’nti vuttaṃ. Taṃ pana bimbasaddassa sarīravācake yuttameva. Na parimaṇḍalavācake. Idha pana bimbasaddassa parimaṇḍalavācakattā. Ācariyā pana idha bimbasaddassa atthaṃ cakkamaṇḍalanti vadanti. Taṃ pana vicāretabbaṃ. Kasmā, abhidhānappadīpikāyaṃ ‘‘bimbaṃ tu paṭibimbe ca, maṇḍale bimbikāphale’’ti ca. Taṭṭīkāyañca ‘‘maṇḍale paṭimaṇḍale’’ti ca vuttattā. Ñāṇaṃ sabbaññutañāṇasaṅkhātaṃ vitthiṇṇaṃ vitthāraṃ bimbaṃ parimaṇḍalaṃ assāti ñāṇavitthiṇṇabimbo. Atha vā vitthiṇṇaṃ vitthāraṃ bimbaṃ cakkavāḷaparimaṇḍalaṃ viya vipulārammaṇaṃ ñāṇaṃ sabbaññutañāṇaṃ assāti ñāṇavitthiṇṇabimbo, munindakko. Yathā hi cakkavāḷassa anantattā cakkavāḷamaṇḍalaṃ vipulaṃ mahantaṃ hoti, eva meva buddhassa sabbaññutañāṇaṃ anantārammaṇattā vipulaṃ mahantaṃ. Tasmā tassa ñāṇavitthiṇṇabimboti thometīti. Yvekoti yo ekoti padacchedo. Yekotipi katthaci pāṭho. Tassa pana yo ekoti padacchedo kātabbo. Taṃ pana pāṭhadvayaṃ yuttameva. Yvekoti hi pāṭhe ādesasandhi hoti. Yekoti pāṭhe pana lopasandhīti ayametesaṃ viseso. Yo munindakkoti sambandho.
“一”者,即无伴侣、无第二者,唯是佛陀之义。此处“一”字见于“其他”“最胜”“无伴侣”“数目”等义。例如“他们说:‘我与世间是常,唯此是真实,其余皆虚妄’”等句中,见于“其他”义;“心之一境性”等句中,见于“最胜”义;“独处远离”等句中,见于“无伴侣”义;“诸比丘,唯有一刹那与一时节为梵行”等句中,见于“数目”义。而此处意指“无伴侣”。其词义则为:成为无伴侣而前往、行进、转起,故为“一”;或成为无第二者而前往、了知、通达无上正等觉,故为“一”,即最胜牟尼。以“edhā”或“idhā”语根加“ṇvu”后缀,表智与趣向。或者,世尊以出家之义为“一”,以无第二之义为“一”,以断渴爱之义为“一”,以绝对离贪者为“一”,以绝对离瞋者为“一”,以绝对离痴者为“一”,以绝对无烦恼者为“一”,以行一道者为“一”,以现证无上正等觉者为“一”——应依《大义释》所示之理趣了知此义。显示巴利原文
Ekoti asahāyo, adutiyako eka buddhabhūtoti attho. Ettha ca ekasaddo aññaseṭṭhāsahāya saṅkhyādīsu dissati. Tathāhesa sassato attā ca loko ca, idameva saccaṃ moghamaññanti ittheke abhivadantītiādīsu aññatthe dissati. Cetaso ekodibhāvantiādīsu seṭṭhe. Eko vūpakaṭṭhotiādīsu asahāye. Ekova kho bhikkhave khaṇo ca samayo ca brahmacariyāyātiādīsu saṅkhyāyaṃ. Idha pana asahāye adhippeto. Ayaṃ panassa vacanattho. Asahāyo hutvā eti gacchati pavattatīti eko, adutiyako hutvā anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhiṃ eti jānāti paṭivijjhatīti vā eko, munindakko. Edhātu idhātu vā ñāṇagatīsu ṇvu. Atha vā eko bhagavā pabbajjasaṅkhātena eko. Adutiyaṭṭhena eko, taṇhāya pahānaṭṭhena eko , ekantavītarāgoti eko, ekantavītadosoti eko, ekantavītamohoti eko, ekantanikkilesoti eko, ekāya maggaṃ gatoti eko, anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhiṃ abhisambuddhoti ekotiādinā āgatena mahāniddesanayenapettha attho veditabbo.
再者,于无量轮围世界中,唯有一佛出现、生起或显现,故为“一”。诚如《增支部·一集》所说:“诸比丘,此是不可能、无处可容的:于一世界界中,有两位阿罗汉、正等觉者不先不后地出现,此事不存在。然而,诸比丘,此是可能的:于一世界界中,唯有一位阿罗汉、正等觉者出现,此事存在。”其注释书中说:“‘于一世界界中’,指一万世界界。因为有三田:生田、教令田、境界田。其中,所谓生田即一万世界界,因如来入母胎时、出胎时、成正觉时、转法轮时、舍寿行时、般涅槃时,此田震动。而百千俱胝轮围世界则名为教令田,因《阿吒那智亚护卫经》《孔雀护卫经》《幢顶护卫经》《宝经》等之教令于此中生效。至于境界田,则无有限量,因诸佛之智所及即所知,所知所及即智,所谓‘智以所知为边际,所知以智为边际’,故无有非境界。然而,于此三田中,除了此轮围世界,并无经文说诸佛于其他轮围世界出现。但有经文说‘不出现’。因为有三藏:律藏、经藏、论藏;有三次结集:大迦叶长老之结集、耶舍长老之结集、目犍连子帝须长老之结集。于此三次结集所登载的三藏佛语中,除显示巴利原文
Api ca anantacakkavāḷesuyeva ekova buddho eti uppajjati vikasati vāti eko. Vuttañhi ekanipāta aṅguttara pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘aṭṭhānametaṃ bhikkhave anavakāso, yaṃ ekissā lokadhātuyā dve arahanto sammāsambuddhā apubbaṃ acarimaṃ uppajjeyyuṃ, netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjati. Ṭhānañca kho etaṃ bhikkhave vijjati, yaṃ ekissā lokadhātuyā ekova arahaṃ sammāsambuddho uppajjeyya, ṭhānametaṃ vijjatī’’ti. Tadaṭṭhakathāyañca ‘‘ekissā lokadhātuyāti dasasahassilokadhātuyā. Tīṇi hi khettāni jātikkhettaṃ āṇakkhettaṃ visayakkhettanti. Tattha jātikkhettaṃ nāma dasasahassilokadhātu. Sā hi tathāgatassa mātukucchiṃ okkamanakāle nikkhamanakāle sambodhikāle dhammacakkappavattane āyu saṅkhāravossajjane parinibbāne ca kampati, koṭisatasahassa cakkavāḷaṃ pana āṇakkhettaṃ nāma. Āṭānāṭiyaparitta moraparittadhajaggaparitta ratanaparittādīnañhi ettha āṇā pavattati. Visayakkhettassa pana parimāṇaṃ natthi. Buddhānañhi yāvatakaṃ ñāṇaṃ, tāvatakaṃ ñeyyaṃ. Yāvatakaṃ ñeyyaṃ, tāvatakaṃ ñāṇaṃ. Ñāṇapariyantikaṃ ñeyyaṃ, ñeyyapariyantikaṃ ñāṇanti vacanato avisayo nāma natthi. Imesu pana tīsu khettesu ṭhapetvā imaṃ cakkavāḷaṃ aññasmiṃ cakkavāḷe buddhā uppajjantīti suttaṃ natthi. Na uppajjantīti pana atthi. Tīṇi hi piṭakāni vinayapiṭakaṃ, suttantapiṭakaṃ, abhidhammapiṭakaṃ. Tisso saṃgītiyo mahākassapattherassa saṃgīti, yasattherassa saṃgīti, moggaliputtattherassa saṃgīti, imā tisso saṃgītiyo āruḷhe tepiṭake buddhavacane imaṃ cakkavāḷaṃ muñcitvā aññattha buddhā uppajjantīti suttaṃ natthi. Na uppajjantīti pana atthī’’ti.
此处,所谓“于一世界界中”即指一万世界界,这是就生田而说。因为一万世界界环绕此世界界而住,唯此范围成为生田,应依自然法则了知。而所谓“于此三田中”,即指一万世界界所摄之生田、百千俱胝轮围世界所摄之教令田、以及无量轮围世界所摄之境界田——于此三种佛田中,显示从此轮围世界之外的其他无量轮围世界中,诸佛并不出现。因为展示三种佛田之后,所说“于此三田中”是依处之义,而非简别之义。何以故?注释书中并无简别之词。若注释师意存简别,则应说“于此三田中,于教令田,除此轮围世界……”等,然而并未如此说。因此,应取依处之义。且前代依止师也是以此词之依处义而作释义。同样,在《阿毗达摩·智分别》及其注释书、《后五十经·多界经》及其注释书、《导论》及其注释书中,此理也已述及。而于《增支部复注》中说:“‘但有经文说“不出现”’,意指‘无有与我同师者,无有与我相等者’等。世尊立于这个世界界而说时,法将舍利弗尊者引出此经:‘若有人问:“贤友舍利弗,现在是否有其他沙门或婆罗门于世尊的正觉中与世尊同等?”’答言:‘尊者,我当说“无”。’为示其理由。显示巴利原文
Ettha ca ekissā lokadhātuyāti dasasahassi lokadhātuyāti idaṃ jātikkhettaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Dasasahassilokadhātu hi imaṃ lokadhātuṃ parivāretvā ṭhitā hoti. Tattakānaṃyeva jātikkhettabhāvo dhammatā vasena veditabbo. Imesu pana tīsu khettesūti iminā dasasahassilokadhātusaṅkhāte jātikkhette koṭisatasahassacakkavāḷasaṅkhāte āṇakkhette anantacakkavāḷa saṅkhāte visayakkhette cāti imesu tīsu buddhakkhettesu ito cakkavāḷato aññesu anantacakkavāḷesu buddhā nuppajjantīti dasseti. Tividhañhi buddhakkhettaṃ dassetvā imesu pana tīsu khettesūti ādhārabhāvena vuttaṃ, na niddhāraṇabhāvena. Kasmā, aṭṭhakathāyaṃ niddhāraṇīyapadassa abhāvato. Sati hi aṭṭhakathācariyo tassa padassa niddhāraṇatthe adhippete imesu tīsu khettesu āṇakkhette ṭhapetvā imaṃ cakkavāḷantiādi vucceyya. Na. Tasmā tassa padassa ādhāratthoyeva gahetabbo. Pubbanissayā cariyehi ca tassa padassa ādhārabhāvena atthayojanā katāti. Tatheva pana abhidhammañāṇavibhaṅgapāḷiyañca, tadaṭṭhakathāyañca uparipaṇṇāse bahudhātusuttapāḷiyañca, tadaṭṭhakathāyañca nettipāḷiyañca tadaṭṭhakathāyañca taṃ kāraṇaṃ āgatamevāti. Taṃ aṅguttaraṭīkāyaṃ pana ‘‘na uppajjantīti pana atthīti na me ācariyo atthi, sadiso me navijjatītiādi. Imissā lokadhātuyā ṭhatvā vadantena bhagavatā kiṃpanāvuso sāriputta atthetarahi añño samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā bhagavatā samasamo sambodhiyanti evaṃ puṭṭhohaṃ bhante noti vadeyyanti vatvā tassa kāraṇaṃ dassetuṃ aṭṭhānametaṃ anavakāso, yaṃ ekissā lokadhātuyā dve arahanto sammāsambuddhā apubbaṃ acarimaṃ uppajjeyyunti imaṃ suttaṃ āharantena dhamma senāpatinā ca buddhakkhettabhūtaṃ imaṃ lokadhātuṃ ṭhapetvā aññattha anuppatti vuttā hotīti adhippāyo’’ti vuttaṃ. Tatheva pana ñāṇavibhaṅgamūlaṭīkāyaṃ, uparipaṇṇāsabahudhātu suttaṭīkāyañca vuttaṃ. Ettha ca imaṃ lokadhātuṃ ṭhapetvā aññattha anuppatti vuttā hotīti iminā buddhakkhettabhūtato ito cakkavāḷato aññesu anantacakkavāḷesu buddhānaṃ anuppatti dassitā hoti. Aññatthāti hi sāmaññena vuttepi aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttena imesu tīsu khettesūti saddantarasannidhānena anantacakkavāḷabhūto visesattho gahetabbo. Sāmaññavacanopi hi saddo saddantarasannidhānena visesavisayoti.
这里还有另一种方法。注释书中说,诸佛出现时,只在此轮围界中出现。然而,若遮止其出现之处,则意味着在其他轮围界中不出现,这本身就是遮止。在此句中,“只在此”这一词语中的“只”字,是表示遮止、确定的含义。以此遮止了在其他无量轮围界中有其他佛的出现。因为,即使在其他无量轮围界中可能有其他佛出现,若果真如此,了知、照见一切有为法与无为法之别的我们的世尊,应当会这样说:“在其他轮围界中有其他佛出现。”但他并未这样说。因为在三藏佛语中,并没有从燃灯佛等二十八位正觉者在此轮围界之外的其他轮围界中出现的说法,同样在注释书和复注中也没有。因此,应知在此轮围界之外的其他无量轮围界中,并无其他佛出现。这在《经集·大品注释书》的《大集会经》解释中已说过:显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ panettha aparo nayo. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vutte buddhā hi uppajjamānā imasmiṃyeva cakkavāḷe uppajjanti. Uppajjanaṭṭhāne pana vārite ito aññesu cakkavāḷesu nuppajjantīti vāritameva hotītiettha vākye imasmiṃ yevātipade samabhiniviṭṭho evasaddo nivattāpanāvadhāraṇattho. Etena aññesu anantacakkavāḷesu aññesaṃ buddhānaṃ uppattiṃ nivatteti. Yadipi hi aññesu anantacakkavāḷesu aññe buddhā uppajjeyyuṃ. Evaṃ santesu saṅkhatāsaṅkhatabhedaṃ sabbadhammaṃ jānanto passanto amhākaṃ bhagavā aññacakkavāḷesu aññe buddhā uppajjantīti evaṃ vucceyya. Na. Taṇhaṅkarādayo hi aṭṭhavīsati sambuddhā ito cakkavāḷato aññesu cakkavāḷesu uppajjantītivacanaṃ tepiṭake buddhavacane natthi, tathā aṭṭhakathā ṭīkāsu ca. Tasmā ito cakkavāḷato aññesu ananta cakkavāḷesu aññe buddhā nuppajjantīti daṭṭhabbā. Vuttañhetaṃ suttantamahāvaggaṭṭhakathāyaṃ mahāsamayasuttavaṇṇanāyaṃ –
“当时他心想:‘唯有像我这样的佛才能做到。然而,其他地方还有别的佛吗?’他以无边智慧遍观无量世界界,却没有见到其他佛。这并不稀奇,如今他未见到与自己等同者。即使在他诞生之日,依《梵网经注释》中所说的方法,因未见到与自己等同者,而发出了不可反驳的狮子吼:‘我是世间最上者。’如此,在未见到其他与自己等同者之后,他进行了省察。”正是如此。在《波罗夷经·大义释注释书》和《大集会经复注》中,依经中所说“于一世界界中”的方法,于一切处,绝无前后二佛同时出现。因此,注释师才说:“在无量世界界中……未见到。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Athassa etadahosi mādiso buddhoyeva sakkuṇeyya. Atthi pana katthaci añño buddhoti anantāsu lokadhātūsu anantañāṇaṃ pattharitvā olokento aññaṃ buddhaṃ na addasa. Anacchariyañcetaṃ, yaṃ idāni attanā samaṃ na passeyya. Yo jātadivasepi brahmajālasuttavaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttanayena attanā samaṃ apassanto aggohamasmi lokassāti appaṭivattiyaṃ sīhanādaṃ nadi. Evaṃ aññaṃ attanā samaṃ apassitvā cintesī’’ti. Tathevetaṃ. Purābhedasutta mahāniddesaṭṭhakathāyañca, taṃ mahāsamayasuttaṭīkāyañca ekissā lokadhātuyāti sutte āgatanayena sabbattheva pana apubbaṃ acarimaṃ dve buddhā nāma na honteva. Tenevāha ‘‘anantāsu loka dhātūsu…pe… na addasā’’ti saṃvaṇṇeti.
在《无戏论本生经注释》中也说道:“导师告诉优婆塞们:‘下至无间地狱,上至有顶天,以此为界,于无量世界界中,以戒等功德能与佛陀等同者尚且不存在,更何况更超胜者……’”这两部注释书中,即以“无量世界界”和“无数量世界界”中的“无量”与“无数量”之词来说明。借由这两个词以及复注的说法,表明了在无量世界界中没有其他佛陀出现。显示巴利原文
Apaṇṇakajātakaṭṭhakathāyañca ‘‘satthā upāsakā heṭṭhā avīciṃ upari bhavaggaṃ paricchedaṃ katvā aparimāṇāsu lokadhātūsu sīlādīhi guṇehi buddhena sadiso nāma natthi. Kuto adhikataro…pe… āhā’’ti vuttaṃ. Imāsu dvīsu aṭṭhakathāsu ca anantāsu lokadhātūsūti ca aparimāṇāsu lokadhātūsūti ca anantaaparimāṇa saddena vuttaṃ. Tehi dvīhi saddehi ṭīkāvacanena ca anantāsu lokadhātūsu aññesaṃ buddhānaṃ anuppattiṃ dasseti.
然而,在《破除迷惑注释书》的注解中,以“然而在这些……”等语句说明:在百千万亿轮围界之外的其他轮围界中,佛不出生。但我们这样思惟:如果“在其他轮围界”的含义被理解为“在此轮围界之外的所有三种佛土中”,那么就会理解为“在百千万亿轮围界之外的其他轮围界中,佛不出生”。然而,如果“在其他轮围界”的含义被理解为“在此之外的、作为诞生与教令领域的轮围界”,那么就会理解为“在百千万亿轮围界之外的其他轮围界中,佛有可能出生”。而且,根据“于一世界界中,有两位阿拉汉、正自觉者出现,这是不可能、不存在的”等经文,以及“于一世界界中,有两位转轮王出现,这是不可能、不存在的”等经文的说法,如同在百千万亿轮围界之外佛不出生一样,在其他世界界中,转轮王也不出生。但在《论事》中,并未遮止在百千万亿轮围界之外的其他轮围界中有佛出生。因此,在作为教令领域的百千万亿轮围界之外的其他轮围界中,可能有佛出生——这是我们的认可。应当审察后采纳。显示巴利原文
Sammohavinodanīaṭṭhakathāya yojanāyaṃ pana imesu panātiādinā koṭisatasahassa cakkavāḷato aññasmiṃ cakkavāḷe buddhā na uppajjantīti ñāpeti. Mayaṃ pana evaṃ vitakkayāma. Aññasmiṃ cakkavāḷeti ito cakkavāḷato aññesu sabbesupi tīsu buddhakkhettesūti atthe gayhamāne sati koṭisatasahassacakkavāḷato aññasmiṃ cakkavāḷe buddhā na uppajjantīti viññāyati. Yadi pana aññasmiṃ cakkavāḷeti ito aññasmiṃ jātiāṇākhettabhūte cakkavāḷeti atthe gahite koṭisatasahassacakkavāḷato aññasmiṃ cakkavāḷe buddhānaṃ uppatti bhaveyyāti viññāyati. ‘‘Aṭṭhānametaṃ anavakāso, yaṃ ekissā lokadhātuyā dve arahanto sammāsambuddhā’’tiādipāḷiyā ca. ‘‘Aṭṭhānametaṃ anavakāso, yaṃ ekissā lokadhātuyā dve rājāno cakkavattī’’tiādipāḷiyā saddhiṃ kathanato koṭisatasahassacakkavāḷato buddhānaṃ anuppatti viya aññissā lokadhātuyā cakkavattirañño anuppatti bhaveyya. Kathāvatthuppakaraṇe ca koṭisatasahassacakkavāḷato aññasmiṃ cakkavāḷe buddhānaṃ uppatti na paṭisedhitā. Tasmā āṇakkhettabhūtato koṭisatasahassacakkavāḷato aññasmiṃ cakkavāḷe buddhassa bhaveyyāti ayaṃ amhākaṃ khanti. Vīmaṃsetvā gahetabbanti vuttaṃ.
在此,所谓“在《论事》中……并未遮止”等语,其实在《论事》巴利原文中并不存在。在这段关于“一切方所”的讨论中,唯有论敌的假设言论而已。因此,该巴利原文中说:“‘一切方所都有佛住立吗?’‘是的。’‘东方有佛住立吗?’‘不应这样说……’‘东方有佛住立吗?’‘是的。’‘彼世尊名为如何?是何种种姓?何等家族?彼世尊的父母名叫什么?一对上首弟子名叫什么?侍者名叫什么?他穿著何种衣?持用何种钵?住在何村、何镇、何城、何国、何邦?’‘不应这样说。’”诸如此类。显示巴利原文
Ettha ca yaṃ kathāvatthuppakaraṇe ca…pe… na paṭisedhitāti vuttaṃ. Taṃ pana kathāvatthupāḷiyaṃ nattheva. Imissā pana sabbadisākathāyaṃ paravādīnaṃ parikappavacanamattameva atthi. Tena vuttaṃ tassaṃ pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘sabbadisā buddhā tiṭṭhantīti. Āmantā. Puratthimāya disāya buddho tiṭṭhatīti. Nahevaṃ vattabbe…pe… puratthimāya disāya buddho tiṭṭhatīti. Āmantā. Kinnāmo so bhagavā kiṃjacco kiṃgotto, kinnāmā tassa bhagavato mātāpitaro, kinnāmaṃ tassa bhagavato sāvakayugaṃ, ko nāmo tassa bhagavato upaṭṭhako, kiṃdisaṃ cīvaraṃ dhāreti, kiṃdisaṃ pattaṃ dhāreti. Katarasmiṃ gāme vā nigame vā nagare vā raṭṭhe vā janapade vāti. Nahevaṃ vattabbe’’tyādi.
然而,其复注中说:“此时名为‘一切方论’。其中,于四方、下方、上方,即周遍一切世界界的安立;又于一切世界界中,认为有佛存在——他们生起自己的分别见解后,执著‘一切方皆有佛安住’,譬如大众部等。针对这些人,这是自论者的提问,是他方的承认。当被问到‘东方’时,针对释迦牟尼佛而予以拒绝。再次被问时,则依其执见,针对住于他方世界界的佛而承认。‘彼世尊是何名’等,是‘你若知道,便依名等而说出’的质问之意。依此方法,于一切处应知其义。”在此,“于四方……譬如大众部等”这句,显示了对方论者的执见。其中,“于四方、下方、上方,即如是周遍,有世界界的安立”是连接句。“那些……大众部等”指那些对方论者的执见——如同谁的执见?如同大众部的执见,是这个意思。“针对他们”指针对那些对方论者,以智执持、观察之后,是这个意思。“是自论者的提问”指自论者提出“一切方有佛安住”的质问。“是他方的承认”指对方论者的承认。“被问‘东方’时”指当被自论者以“东方”等问时。“针对释迦牟尼”指针对我们这位生于释迦族、刹帝利种姓的乔达摩佛。“拒绝”指对方论者予以否定。显示巴利原文
Tadaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘idāni sabbadisākathā nāma hoti. Tattha catūsu disāsu heṭṭhā uparīti samantato lokadhātusannivesaṃ sabbalokadhātūsu ca buddho atthīti attano vikappasippaṃ uppādetvā sabbadisāsu buddhā tiṭṭhantīti yesaṃ…pe… seyyathāpi mahāsaṅghikānaṃ, te sandhāya pucchā sakavādissa. Paṭiññā itarassa. Puratthimāyāti puṭṭho sakyamuniṃ sandhāya paṭikkhipati. Puna puṭṭho laddhivasena aññalokadhātuyaṃ ṭhitaṃ sandhāya paṭijānāti. Kinnāmo so bhagavātiādi sace tvaṃ jānāsi. Nāmādivasena naṃ kathehīti codanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Iminā upāyena sabbattha attho veditabbo’’ti vuttaṃ. Ettha ca catūsu disāsu…pe… seyyathāpi mahāsaṅghikānanti iminā paravādīnaṃ laddhiṃ dasseti. Tattha pana catūsu disāsu ca heṭṭhā ca upari ca iti evaṃ samantato lokadhātusannivesaṃ atthīti yojanā. Yesaṃ…pe… mahāsaṅghikānanti yesaṃ paravādīnaṃ laddhi hoti. Kesaṃ laddhi viya. Mahāsaṅghikānaṃ laddhi seyyathāpīti attho. Te sandhāyāti te paravādīpuggale sandhāya ñāṇena dhāretvā sallakkhetvāti attho. Pucchā sakavādissāti sakavādissa sabbadisāsu buddhā tiṭṭhantīti pucchā hoti. Paṭiññā itarassāti paravādissa paṭijānanā hoti. Puratthimāyāti puṭṭhoti sakavādinā puratthi māyātiādinā pucchite sati. Sakyamuninti sakyavaṃsa khattiyajātibhūtaṃ amhākaṃ gotamabuddhaṃ sandhāya. Paṭikkhipatīti paravādīpuggalo apaneti. Puna puṭṭhoti sakavādinā puna puratthimāya buddho tiṭṭhatīti pucchite sati. Laddhivasenāti attano aññalokadhātuyaṃ buddho atthi ca uppajjati cāti micchāladdhivasena paṭijānātīti paravādī puggalo paṭijānāti. Yadi pana aññalokadhātuyaṃ buddho tiṭṭhati. Evaṃ sati tassa nāmagottādiṃ tvaṃ kathehīti sakavādissa codanāvacanaṃ dassetuṃ kinnāmo so bhagavātiādimāha. Iminā ca ito cakkavāḷato aññesu anantacakkavāḷesu aññesaṃ buddhānaṃ abhāvaṃ dasseti. Tena vuttaṃ kathāvatthupāḷiyaṃ ‘‘kinnāmo so bhagavā kiṃjacco…pe… janapadevāti. Nahevaṃ vattabbe’’ti.
然而,在这里,当自论者以“是何名”等提问时,对方论者因为不知道、看不见依其执见在一切世界界出现的诸佛的名等,便以“不应如此说”而拒绝。因此可知,根据该人的执见,在其他无量轮围界中,并没有其他佛出现。因为,如果其他无量轮围界中确有其他佛出现,那么,了知、如实照见佛陀意趣的、具足大慧、有神通、具足天眼等六通、得无碍解的、依导师所授论母开示《论事》圣典的尊者大目犍连子长老,就会指出在其他无量轮围界中有其他佛出现。但他并没有这么说。因此,应知此《论事》圣典及其复注之语,在表明其他无量轮围界中无其他佛存在这一点上,比起一切注释、复注中的说法,是更为坚固、首要的言教。显示巴利原文
Ettha ca pana sakavādinā kinnāmotyādinā pucchite paravādīpuggalo attano laddhiyā sabbalokadhātūsu uppajjamānānaṃ buddhānaṃ nāmādiṃ ajānanto apassanto na hevaṃ vattabbeti paṭikkhipati. Tasmā panettha sakavādī puggalassa laddhiyā aññesu anantacakkavāḷesu aññesaṃ buddhānaṃ uppajjanābhāvo viññāyati. Yadipi hi aññānantacakkavāḷesu aññabuddhā uppajjeyyuṃ. Evaṃ santesu buddhassa matiṃ yathābhūtato jānanto passanto mahāpañño iddhimā dibbacakkhuādīhi chaḷabhiññehi sampanno paṭisambhidā patto satthārā dinnamātikānayena kathāvatthupāḷiṃ desento āyasmā mahāmoggaliputtatthero aññānantacakkavāḷesu aññabuddhānaṃ uppattiṃ katheyya ca. Nāti. Tasmā ayaṃ kathāvatthupāḷi ca tadaṭṭhakathāvacanañca aññānantacakkavāḷesu aññabuddhānaṃ abhāvadīpane sabbaṭṭhakathāṭīkāsu vuttavacanehi daḷhataraṃ padhānavacanameva hotīti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
然而,不单是诸佛不在其他无量轮围界中出现,已得授记的大菩萨、独觉有情、上首弟子、大弟子菩萨、根器成熟的声闻菩萨,也都唯在此佛土之轮围界中出现,而非他处。为什么呢?因为诸佛不在那些地方出现,而他们的誓愿、波罗蜜的积累、智慧的成熟,也唯独在此处成就,不在他处。因此,在《大本经》复注中说:显示巴利原文
Na pana buddhāeva aññānantacakkavāḷesu na uppajjeyyuṃ, atha kho laddhabyākaraṇā mahābodhisattā ca paccekabodhi sattā aggasāvakamahāsāvakabodhisattā paripākindriyā sāvakabodhisattā ca buddhakkhettabhūte imasmiṃyeva cakkavāḷe uppajjanti, na aññattha. Kasmā, tesu buddhānaṃ anuppannattā, tesaṃ pana abhinīhāro pāramīsambharaṇaṃ ñāṇaparipācanañca tasmiṃeva samijjhati, na aññattha. Tena vuttaṃ mahāpadāna suttaṭīkāyaṃ –
过去诸佛、大菩萨及独觉佛的诞生,声闻菩萨为声闻菩提发愿、积累与成熟声闻波罗蜜,唯在此佛土轮围界的赡部洲洲成就,而非他处。此语亦见于《增支部·一集》复注中。显示巴利原文
‘‘Purimabuddhānaṃ mahābodhisattānaṃ paccekabuddhānañca nibbattiyā sāvakabodhisattānaṃ sāvakabodhiyā abhinīhāro sāvakapāramiyā sambharaṇaṃ paripācanañca buddhakkhettabhūte imasmiṃ cakkavāḷe jambudīpeeva ijjhati, na aññatthā’’ti. Tathevetaṃ ekanipātaaṅguttaraṭīkāyañcāti.
然而,现今有其他论师说:“从作为教令区域的百千俱胝轮围界之外的其他轮围界中,有佛出现。”但他们的说法实不合理。何以故?因为在注释中所说的“在其他轮围界”一语中,“其他”一词,除了指“此轮围界”之外,并无其他所依处;且若在无量轮围界中有众多佛出现,则佛便不稀奇。因为正自觉者乃是希有之人。正如《增支部·一集》圣典中所说:显示巴利原文
Etarahi pana apare ācariyā ‘‘āṇakkhettabhūtato koṭisatasahassacakkavāḷato aññesu cakkavāḷesu buddhā uppajjantī’’ti vadanti. Tesaṃ pana vacanaṃ ayuttameva. Kasmā, aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vutte aññasmiṃ cakkavāḷeti ettha aññasaddassa ṭhapetvā imaṃ cakkavāḷantipadato aññassa apādānassa asambhavato ca anantacakkavāḷesu bahūsu buddhesu uppannesu buddhassa anacchariyattā ca. Acchariyamanusso hi sammāsambuddho. Vuttañhi ekanipāta aṅguttarapāḷiyaṃ
“诸比丘,有一人出现于世,是为希有之人而出现。何等一人?即如来、阿拉汉、正自觉者。诸比丘,此一人出现于世,是为希有之人。”其他理由,依前文所述之理,智者亦能了知。然而,有其他论师在《佛种姓经》圣典中说:显示巴利原文
‘‘Ekapuggalo bhikkhave loke uppajjamāno uppajjati acchariyamanusso. Katamo ekapuggalo, tathāgato arahaṃ sammāsambuddho. Ayaṃ kho bhikkhave ekapuggalo loke uppajjati acchariyamanusso’’ti. Aññaṃ pana kāraṇaṃ mayā heṭṭhā vuttanayenapi viññūhi viññātabbanti. Aññe pana ācariyā buddhaapadānapāḷiyaṃ –
世间有十方,往行而无边际;
而在彼方所之中,佛土无量无边;
我之光明被称扬,双运光芒之载者;
于其间,光网广大,光明无量。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Disā dasavidhā loke, yāyato natthi antakaṃ; Tasmiñca disābhāgamhi, buddhakkhette asaṅkhayā; Pabhā pakittitā mayhaṃ, yamakā raṃsivāhanā; Etthantare raṃsijālaṃ, āloko vipulo bhave’’ti.
对于所说的两首偈颂,若有人非以佛陀的本意去执取第一首偈颂的含义,并以邪智宣称:“在无量无边的轮围世界中生起的诸佛是无量的。”然而,此说全然不合理、不正确。何以故?因其与巴利圣典、注释书及复注的文句相违,而且对该偈颂含义的执取本身即是错误。当以此巴利偈颂来执取“在其他无量轮围世界中有其他佛陀生起”的含义时,注释书中明确说:“然而,在这三种田中,除了此轮围世界,在其他轮围世界中有佛陀生起的经文是不存在的,而‘不生起’的经文是存在的。”这与“在三藏佛语中,乃至三大结集所登载的三藏佛语中,没有这样的经文,而有‘不生起’的经文存在”这一说法直接相违。若有人认为,尊者佛音等注释师们未曾见到那巴利经文,便以自己错误的执取而诽谤注释师,然而那些具足诵持三藏、拥有锐利、明净、速疾、甚深智慧的注释师们,又岂会不见?他们必定得见。因此,此说全然不合理。应当了知,注释书中所说“无有如是经文”等语,方为更为合理。显示巴利原文
Vuttāsu dvīsu gāthāsu paṭhamagāthāya atthaṃ buddhassa anādhippāyena gahetvā micchāñāṇena aññānantacakkavāḷesu uppajjamānā buddhā asaṅkhayāti vadanti. Tesaṃ panetaṃ ayuttameva asundarameva. Kasmā, pāḷiyā ca aṭṭhakathāṭīkāvacanehi ca viruddhattā ca tassā gāthāya atthaggahaṇassa micchattā ca. Imāya hi pāḷiyā gāthāya vā aññānantacakkavāḷesu aññe buddhā uppajjantīti atthe gayhamāne aṭṭhakathāsu imesu pana tīsu khettesu ṭhapetvā imaṃ cakkavāḷaṃ aññasmiṃ cakkavāḷe buddhā uppajjantīti suttaṃ natthi, na uppajjantīti pana atthīti vuttavacanena ca, tīṇi hi piṭakāni…pe… imā tisso saṃgītiyo āruḷhe tepiṭake buddhavacane…pe… suttaṃ natthi. Na uppajjantīti pana atthīti vuttavacanena ca ujukaṃ virujjhati ca. Bhaddantamahā buddhaghosādayo aṭṭhakathācariyā taṃ pāḷiṃ na passantīti attano duggahitena aṭṭhakathācariyānaṃ abbhakkhānaṃ āpajjati ca. Kiṃ panete tipiṭakadharā tikkhavisadajavana gambhīrādiñāṇikā aṭṭhakathācariyā na passeyyuṃ. Passeyyuṃ eva. Tasmā ayuttameva. Aṭṭhakathāsu pana āgataṃ suttaṃ natthītiādivacanameva yuttataraṃ hotīti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
于此,“佛土”一词是“于彼方所”一词的定语,“无量”一词应视为第二偈中“光明”一词的定语。而其中的文句关联如下:世间,即轮围世间,有十种、十个部分的方位。在任一方位中,对于行者、前往者、行走者而言,我的边际、尽头并不存在。在佛土——即佛陀以一万为数的诞生地界,以及在那方所之中,我的无量、不可计数的光明,成双地放射,也就是轮宝、珠宝等的光芒,被宣告、显现或散布。在此一万轮围世界之间,光芒之网,即以光芒之聚,广大而极多的光明曾存在、曾出现。须知此义乃由荣获“轮王顶髻吉祥正法幢大法王无上师”尊号的阿阇梨佛所撰述。显示巴利原文
Ettha ca buddhakkhettetipadaṃ tasmiñca disābhāgamhītipade visesanaṃ, asaṅkhayātipadaṃ dutiyagāthāya pabhātipadassa visesananti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Ayaṃ panettha yojanā. Loke cakkavāḷaloke dasavidhā dasa koṭṭhāsā disā honti. Tattha koṭṭhāse yāyato yāyantassa gacchantassa me antakaṃ pariyosānaṃ natthi. Buddhakkhette buddhassa dasasahassisaṅkhātajātikkhettabhūte tasmiñca disābhāgamhi mayhaṃ asaṅkhayā saṅkhārahitā yamakā yugaḷā yugaḷā hutvā raṃsivāhanā raṃsivahantā raṃsimuñcamānā vā pabhā cakkaratanamaṇiratanādīnaṃ ālokā pakittitā pākaṭā pattharitā vā. Etthantare dasasahassacakkavāḷantare raṃsijālaṃ raṃsisamūhena vipulo bahutaro āloko bhave ahosinti. Ayamattho cakkindābhisirīsaddhamma dhajamahādhammarājādhirājagurūtiladdhalañchitena ācariyabudhena likhitoti daṭṭhabbo.
世尊以这些偈颂表明:在转轮王时期,我的轮宝、珠宝等所具有的无量光明,在作为佛土的一万轮围世界中,昭然显现、周遍散布;而并非表明在无量轮围世界中出现的诸佛具有无量性。显示巴利原文
Bhagavā hi imāhi gāthāhi cakkavattirājakāle mayhaṃcakkaratanamaṇīratanādīnaṃ asaṅkhayā pabhā buddhakkhettabhūte dasasahassicakkavāḷe pākaṭā pattharitāti dasseti. Na anantacakkavāḷesu uppajjanabuddhānaṃ asaṅkhayabhāvanti.
这在《佛种姓经注》中已说:“‘世间有十方’:在轮围世间中,方位有十种、十部分。于其中一部分,对于行进者而言,当他走向彼方、持续行进时,没有边际,此为含义。在转轮王时期,我所到之处,或于方位处,或于佛土——即佛的境界,无量且无可计数的光明被宣告。即:那时在转轮王时期,我的光明、轮宝与珠宝等的光芒、光亮,成双成对地放射光芒、运载光芒,被宣告、被显现。在此一万轮围世界之间,光芒之网、光芒之聚,广大极多的光明曾存在、曾出现,这是含义。”在此,由于第一偈的前半部分为同一语句,故说“世间有十方……乃至……没有边际,这是含义”。由于后半部分包含在第二偈中,故说“在转轮王时期……乃至……无量、无可计数的光明被宣告,即那时在转轮王时期……乃至……曾存在、曾出现,这是含义”。因此,应知“无量”一词是第二偈中“光明”一词的定语。显示巴利原文
Vuttañhetaṃ buddhaapadānaṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘disā dasavidhā loketi cakkavāḷaloke dasavidhā dasakoṭṭhāsā disā honti. Tattha koṭṭhāse yāyato yāyantassa gacchantassa antakaṃ natthīti attho. Cakkavattikāle tasmiṃ mayā gataṭṭhāne disābhāge vā buddhakkhette buddhavisayā asaṅkhayā saṅkhārahitā. Pabhā pakittitāti tadā cakkavatti rājakāle mayhaṃ pabhā cakkaratanamaṇiratanādīnaṃ pabhā ālokā yamakā yugaḷā yugaḷā hutvā raṃsivāhanā raṃsimuñcamānā pakittitā pākaṭā. Etthantare dasasahassacakkavāḷantare raṃsijālaṃ raṃsisamūhaṃ āloko vipulo bahutaro bhave ahosinti attho’’ti. Ettha ca paṭhamagāthāya pubbaḍḍhassa ekavākyabhāvato disā dasavidhā loketi cakkavāḷaloke…pe… antakaṃ natthīti atthoti vuttaṃ. Aparaḍḍhassa dutiyagāthāyaṃ antogadhattā cakkavattikāle…pe… asaṅkhayā saṅkhārahitā pabhā pakittitāti tadā cakkavattikāle…pe… bhave ahosinti atthoti vuttaṃ. Tasmā asaṅkhayātipadaṃ dutiyagāthāya pabhātipadassa visesananti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
而在《胜者庄严复注》中,如此显示了世尊于一切法无有障碍的智行之后,为显示世间无有如此之人,而说:显示巴利原文
Jinālaṅkāraṭīkāyaṃ pana evamassa sabbadhammesu appaṭihata ñāṇācāraṃ dassetvā idāni loke tādisassa aññassa abhāvaṃ dassento āha.
于无量众生界中,
唯彼一人,纵使一切众生齐聚,亦不能及。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Anantasattesu ca lokadhātusu, Ekova sabbepi samā na tenā’’ti.
其中,于无量世界界,一一世界界有无量众生,但与彼如来同等者,一人也无。如果说或许有一人可与同等,或一切众生聚于一处而成为同等——即便如此,亦不存在。意思是:即使一切众生齐聚,也不及此独一无二之人。此处以“于无量世界界”等语,显示了除此轮围世界之外,其余无量轮围世界中亦无他佛。然而,正如我掘开地面而显现的那样,以这些极为坚固的论证语句所显示的——即“除此轮围世界外,尚有他方轮围世界有佛出世”的邪说,已如太阳破除黑暗一般被破除、被消除,此义应当信受。显示巴利原文
Tattha anantalokadhātūsu ekekissaṃ lokadhātuyā anantasattesu tena tathāgatena samo ekopi natthi. Sace eko pana samo na bhaveyya. Sabbe sattā ekajjhaṃ hutvā samā bhaveyyunti ce. Tathāpi natthi, sabbe ekajjhaṃ hutvāpi iminā ekakena samā na hontīti adhippāyoti vuttaṃ. Ettha ca anantalokadhātusūtiādinā ito cakkavāḷato aññesu anantacakkavāḷesu aññesaṃ buddhānaṃ abhāvaṃ dasseti. Evaṃ pana mayā pathavojaṃ uddharitvā dassito viya dassitehi atidaḷhatarehi sādhakavacanehi ito cakkavāḷato aññacakkavāḷesu buddhā uppajjantīti micchāvādo sūriyo andhakāraṃ paṭihanati viya paṭihaniyati apaniyatīti saddhahakaṃ daṭṭhabboti.
“Munindakko”一词,应作“muninda akko”这样分解。其义为“佛日”等。“Muni”(牟尼),谓于一切法了知、遍知。“man”字根,用于智义,加“i”语尾,“ma”中的“a”不显示。又,通达一切法之自相、共相等,故为“muni”。或谓决断利与非利者,故为“muni”,即世尊。“mun”字根,用于通达义;谓了知四谛法,即为“mona”(牟那),指四道智。正如《相应部注》中所说:“‘mona’即四道智。彼能了知故,名‘mona’,即了知四谛法之义。”“mona”存在于彼,故为“muni”,即世尊。彼牟尼又能以法自在、调御所化有情,故为“inda”(因陀罗、主),合为“muninda”(牟尼因陀罗),即世尊。又,于诸牟尼中,为第五牟尼之主,故为“muninda”,即世尊。“akka”(日),谓不以足行,而以自身福业所成之速行殿而行,故为“akka”,即太阳。“na”为前缀,“kamu”字根,用于行义,加“kvi”语尾,字根末音消失,“ka”成双。又,在与持双山等量之虚空中,速行故为“ak”。
},
{显示巴利原文
Munindakkoti muninda akkoti padacchedo. Buddhādiccoti attho. Sabbadhamme manati jānātīti muni. Manadhātu ñāṇe i. Makāre assuttaṃ. Atha vā munāti sabbadhamme saka sāmaññalakkhaṇādinā paṭivijjhatīti muni. Munati hitāhitaṃ paricchindatīti vā muni, bhagavā. Munadhātu paṭivijjhane, catusaccadhamme munāti jānātīti vā monaṃ. Catumaggañāṇaṃ. Vuttañhi saṃyuttaṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘monanti catumaggañāṇaṃ. Tañhi munātīti monaṃ, catusaccadhamme jānātīti attho’’ti. Monaṃ assa atthīti muni, bhagavā. Muni ca so indati veneyyasatte dhammena abhibhavati indo cāti munindo, bhagavā. Atha vā munīnaṃ pañcamunīnaṃ indoti munindo, bhagavā. Na kamati na gacchati pādena attano puññajavimānena gacchatīti akko, ādicco. Napubba kamudhātu gatiyaṃ kvi. Dhātvantalopo. Kassa dvittaṃ. Atha vā yugandharubbedhappamāṇe ākāse arati gacchatīti akko. Aradhātu gamane kapaccayo. Kassa dvittaṃ. Taṃ taṃ rāsito taṃ taṃ rāsiṃ arati yātīti vā akko. Atha vā mahantajutatāya akkiyati abhitthaviyati tappasannehi janehīti akko, ādicco. Akkadhātu thavane a. Munindo ca so akko cāti munindakko, akko ādicco viya vā munindoti munindakko, buddho. Yathā hi sūriyo attano sahassaraṃsiyā ekacakkavāḷe timirandhakāraṃ vidhametvā dine dine navayojanasatasahassappadesaṃ koṭisahassappadesaṃ vā dasadisaṃ vā obhāsetvā virocamāno carati, evameva bhagavāpi attano saddhammaraṃ siyā buddhakkhettabhūtesu dasasahassacakkavāḷesu vineyyānaṃ avijjandhakāraṃ vidhametvā dine dine tasmiṃ tasmiṃ disābhāge veneyyasattasamūhaṃ catusaccadhammobhāsena jotayamāno virocanaṃ caratīti ṭhānānurūpaṃ munindakkoti thometi. Ayaṃ samāsopamā hīnūpamāti daṭṭhabbā.
“Suddhe”(清净)者,谓离贪等垢秽而清净。“Suddha”(清净)者,谓清净、极清净,指三有。“sudh”字根,于清净义。“Tibhavakuhare”(三有窟中)者,谓于名为三有之垢秽池沼中。或谓如莲池般,有情于三有中存在,故为“bhava”(有)。“bhū”字根,于有情义,为“ṇa”语尾。三有即“tibhavā”,指欲、色、无色地。“ku”称为水,能持水者为“kuhara”(窟、池)。“ku”前缀,“har”字根,于持义,为“a”语尾。三有即是彼窟,故为“tibhavakuhara”;或谓如窟般的三有,亦同。于彼三有窟中。“Kamalakathitaṃ”(所说莲华)者,应说为“uppala”(优钵罗华)。“kaṃ”为水,“alayati”为庄严,故“kamala”为庄严水者,即优钵罗华。“kaṃ”为前置词,“ala”字根,于庄严义,为“a”语尾。或谓“kamiyati”为被欲求,故为“kamala”。“kamu”字根,于欲求义,加“ala”语尾。所说为“kamala”即优钵罗华,故为“kamalakathitaṃ”。“Vineyyappāṇoghaṃ”(所化有情众)者,应分字为“vineyya pāṇa oghaṃ”。其义为应调伏之有情群。“vineyya”(所化)者,应被导师调伏、应被调御,即有情。“vi”前缀,“nī”字根,于调御义,为“ṇya”语尾。“pāṇa”(命)者,有情以此而活命,即命根。“paṇ”字根,于活命义,为“ṇa”语尾。彼有此,或此存在于彼,故为“pāṇa”(有情)。于属有义派生词中,加“ṇa”语尾。彼既是所化又是有情,故为“vineyyappāṇa”。“ogha”(众)者,与部分一起而行、而转起,即群集。“ava”前缀,“han”字根,于行义,为“ṇa”语尾,“ava”变为“o”,“han”变为“gha”。所化有情之群集,故为“vineyyappāṇogha”,指彼。显示巴利原文
Suddheti rāgādimalehi visuddhe. Sujjhati visujjhatīti suddho, tibhavo. Sudhadhātu soceyyeti. Tibhava kuhareti tibhavasaṅkhātakamalasare. Kamalasaraṃ viya tibhavasmiṃ vā bhavanti sattā etthāti bhavo. Bhūdhātu sattāyaṃ ṇa. Tayo bhavā tibhavā, kāmarūpārūpabhūmi labbhati. Kuṃ vuccati udakaṃ, taṃ haratīti kuharo. Kupubbaharadhātu haraṇe a. Tayo bhavā ca te kuharo cāti tibhavakuharo, kuharo viya tayo bhavāti vā tathā. Tasmiṃ tibhavakuhare. Kamala kathitanti uppalanti kathetabbaṃ kaṃ jalaṃ alayati vibhūsayatīti kamalaṃ, uppalaṃ. Kaṃsaddūpapada aladhātu vibhūsane a. Atha vā kamiyati icchiyatīti kamalaṃ. Kamudhātu icchāyaṃ alapaccayo. Kamalanti uppalanti kathiyatīti kamalakathitaṃ. Vineyyappāṇoghanti vineyyapāṇaoghanti padavibhāgo. Vinetabbasattasamūhanti attho. Vinetabbo dametabbo satthārāti vineyyo, satto. Vipubbanidhātu damane ṇyo. Paṇanti jīvanti sattā anenāti pāṇaṃ, jīvitindriyaṃ. Paṇadhātu jīvāyaṃ ṇa. Taṃ assa atthi tasmiṃ vā vijjatīti pāṇo, satto. Assatthitaddhite ṇapaccayo. Vineyyo ca so pāṇo cāti vineyyappāṇo. Avayavena saha hanati gacchati pavattatīti ogho, samūho. Avapubba hanadhātu gatiyaṃ ṇo. Avassa o. Hanassa gho. Vineyyappāṇānaṃ ogho samūhoti vineyyappāṇogho, taṃ.
“Dhammaraṃsivarehi”(以胜法光)者,谓以名为最上法之光。此处,“dhamma”(法)者,令依教奉行之有情不堕于四恶趣及轮回苦中而持之,故为“dhamma”。“dhar”字根,于持义,加“ramma”语尾。且持者,即破除能生恶趣等之烦恼,此为义。四道与涅槃,于非譬喻义可得。何以故?圣道以正断烦恼之断除故,为断除者;涅槃以出离断之方式,成为彼之所缘而成就其义故。四果与教法,于譬喻义可得。何以故?果以道所破之烦恼的止息断之方式,随顺于道而转起故;教法以彼分断之方式,为证得彼之因故。或谓,“dhamma”者,摇动、震动、破除烦恼,即四道。“dhun”字根,于摇动义,加“ramma”语尾。或谓,“dhamma”者,被圣者以作所缘之方式而持、通达、作证,即涅槃。“dhar”字根,于智义。或谓,“dhamma”者,破除、止息道所断烦恼之习气,即圣果。“dhaṃs”字根,于破除义。或谓,“dhamma”者,持自性,且被智者而非愚者所持,即教法。法、法、法、法,依一余法,可得十种法。此曾于《伞盖天宫》中说:显示巴利原文
Dhammaraṃsivarehīti uttamadhammasaṅkhātaraṃsīhi. Ettha ca dhammoti yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipajjamāne satte catūsu apāyesu vaṭṭadukkhesu ca apatamāne katvā dhāretīti dhammo. Dharadhātu dhāraṇe rammapaccayo. Dhāreti ca apāyādinibbattakakilesaṃ viddhaṃsetīti attho. Caturiyamaggo ca nibbānañca nippariyāyato labbhati. Kasmā, ariyamaggassa kilesānaṃ samucchedappahānavasena samucchedakattā, nibbānassa ca nissaraṇappahānavasena tassa ārammaṇabhāvaṃ patvā tadatthasiddhihetuttā. Caturiyaphalañca pariyattidhammo ca pariyāyato labbhati. Kasmā, phalassa maggena viddhaṃsi tabbānaṃ kilesānaṃ paṭippassambhanappahānavasena maggānukūlappa vattattā. Pariyattidhammassa ca tadaṅgappahānavasena tadadhigama hetuttā. Atha vā kilese dhunāti kampati calati viddhaṃsetīti dhammo, caturiyamaggo. Dhunadhātu kampane rammo. Ariyehi dhāriyati paṭivijjhiyati sacchikariyati ārammaṇa karaṇavasenāti dhammo, nibbānaṃ. Dharadhātu ñāṇe. Dhaṃseti paṭippassambheti maggappahīnakilesavāsananti dhammo, ariyaphalaṃ. Dhaṃsadhātu viddhaṃsane. Attano sabhāvaṃ dhāreti ca dhāriyati ca paṇḍitehi na bālehīti dhammo, pariyattidhammo. Dhammo ca dhammo ca dhammo ca dhammo cāti dhammo eka sesanayena, dasavidho dhammo labbhati. Vuttañhetaṃ chattavimāne –
离贪、不动、无忧之法,
是无为、无违逆之法;
此甜美、纯熟、善分别之法,
你当皈依此法,以此为皈依处。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Rāgavirāgamanejamasokaṃ, Dhammamasaṅkhatamappaṭikūlaṃ; Madhuramimaṃ paguṇaṃ suvibhattaṃ, Dhammamimaṃ saraṇattamupehī’’ti.
此处,其释义如下:“年轻人!离贪,即远离贪欲——这是道法;不动,即远离称为‘动’的渴爱;无忧,即远离忧悲——这是果法;无为,即远离有为——这是涅槃法。无违逆,即无抵触;甘美,因具足义味与文味而甘美;纯熟,即具殊胜功德;善分别,即善为解说。此法即教法,你当皈依,进入皈依之状态。”显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ panettha yojanā. Māṇava rāgavirāgaṃ rāgavigataṃ imaṃ dhammaṃ maggadhammañca anejaṃ ejāsaṅkhātataṇhāvirahitaṃ asokaṃ sokavirahitaṃ imaṃ dhammaṃ phaladhammañca, asaṅkhataṃ saṅkhatavirahitaṃ imaṃ dhammaṃ nibbānadhammañca. Appaṭikūlaṃ avirodhanaṃ madhuraṃ atthabyañjana sampannattā madhuraṃ, paguṇaṃ pakaṭṭhaguṇaṃ suvibhattaṃ suṭṭhu vibhajitabbaṃ, imaṃ dhammaṃ pariyattidhammañca saraṇattaṃ saraṇabhāvaṃ upehi upagacchāhīti.
在此,由于一切欲贪等类的贪染由此得以舍断、去除,故说“离贪”,以此宣说道。由于称为“动”的渴爱以及具有内在燃烧之相的忧悲,连同其生起因缘,都被彻底灭尽,故说“无动无忧”,以此宣说果。由于并非从任何因缘造作,故说“非造作法”,以此宣说涅槃。为彰显无违逆、义味与文味的成就、殊胜功德的开显以及善加分别,故以“无违逆”等词宣说一切教法。如义疏所说:“在此,以‘离贪’宣说道,以‘无动无忧’宣说果,以‘非造作法’宣说涅槃,以‘无违逆、甘美、纯熟、善分别’宣说由三藏所分别的一切法蕴。”然而此处,“法”通常说有十种,别别而言则意指教法。何以故?因为被称为“善令觉知”。(“Raṃsī”即光:rasiyanti assādiyantīti,意为喜乐、品尝,故为raṃsī;或rasanti assādenti sattā etāyāti,意为众生依此而品尝,故为raṃsī,于rasa词根表品尝义加a与ī。或者,rasiyati sinehiyati taṃ janehīti,意为令彼众人爱乐,故为raṃsī,于rasa词根表爱着义。鼻音化……显示巴利原文
Ettha hi kāmarāgādibhedo sabbopi rāgo virajjati pahiyati etenāti rāgavirāgoti maggo kathito. Ejāsaṅkhātāya taṇhāya antonijjhānalakkhaṇassa ca sokassa taduppattiyā sabbaso parikkhīṇattā anejama sokanti phalaṃ kathitaṃ. Kenaci paccayena asaṅkhatattā dhammamasaṅkhatanti nibbānaṃ kathitaṃ. Avirodhadīpanato pana atthabyañjanassa sampannatāya pakaṭṭhaguṇavibhāvanato suṭṭhu vibhajitattā ca appaṭikūlantiādinā sabbopi pariyatti dhammo kathito. Vuttañhi tadaṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘ettha hi rāgavirāganti maggo kathito. Anejamasokanti phalaṃ. Dhammamasaṅkhatanti nibbānaṃ. Appaṭikūlaṃ madhuramimaṃ paguṇaṃ suvibhattanti piṭakattayena vibhattā sabbadhammakkhandhā’’ti. Idha pana sāmaññato dasavidho dhammo. Visesato pana pariyatti dhammo adhippeto. Kasmā, subodhesīti vuccamānattā. Raṃsīti rasiyanti assādiyantīti raṃsī, rasanti assādenti sattā etāyāti vā raṃsī, rasadhātu assādane a ca ī ca. Atha vā rasiyati sinehiyati taṃ janehīti raṃsī. Rasadhātu sinehe. Niggahītāgamo.
“胜”(Varo):即最胜(uttamo),应被希求者(varitabbo patthitabbo)为“胜”,或阻止下劣者(varati nivāreti hīnanti vā)为“胜”。Vara 词根于希求(patthane)或阻止(nivāraṇe)义加 a。“法”与“光”(Dhammo ca so raṃsi cāti)合为“法光”(dhammaraṃsi),或法之光(dhammassa vā raṃsi)即“法光”。此处依不离假说而释复合词。“胜”与“法光”(Varo ca so dhammaraṃsi cāti)合为“法光胜”(dhammaraṃsivaro),由那些法光胜(tehi dhammaraṃsivarehi)。善令觉(Subodhesīti):以证悟四谛法故,善令觉悟、善令开显,此为其义。犹如太阳以自身光芒照耀,令生于暗洞池塘中的莲花绽放;同样,世尊也以自己说法之光,穿透这名为“三有”的莲花,依福德为所依而堪被穿透,令那名为应调伏众生莲花的四谛法绽放,以果法而使善觉、善显。故有此说。显示巴利原文
Varoti uttamo, varitabbo patthitabboti varo, varati nivāreti hīnanti vā varo. Varadhātu patthane nivāraṇe vā a. Dhammo ca so raṃsi cāti dhammaraṃsi, dhammassa vā raṃsi dhammaraṃsi. Ayaṃ pana samāso abhedūpacārena vutto . Varo ca so dhammaraṃsi cāti dhammaraṃsivaro, tehi dhammaraṃsivarehi. Subodhesīti catusaccadhammaṃ paṭivijjhayamānena suṭṭhu pabodhesi vikāsetīti attho. Yathā hi sūriyo attano raṃsiyā phusayitvā kuhara saṅkhāte sare jātaṃ uppalaṃ vikāseti, evameva bhagavāpi attano dhammadesanāsaṅkhātaraṃsiyā kamalasarasaṅkhāte bhavattaye vasantaṃ puññūpanissayaṃ paṭivijjhārahaṃ kamala saṅkhātaṃ vineyyappāṇoghaṃ catusaccadhammaṃ paṭivijjhayamāno phaladhammena pabodhesi vikāsetīti vuttaṃ hoti.
“遍扬名闻”(Byāpitakkittinañcāti):指在三界中周遍散布的称赞,即以戒等功德遍布的赞叹之声。其中的 ca 仅为补足音节。或以殊胜令种种增长故,称为“遍扬”(byāpita):前缀 vi- 加于散布(byāpane)或增长(vaḍḍhane)义,加 ta;或散布(byāpana)即是遍扬。被称扬、被赞叹(kittiyate abhitthaviyati)为名闻(kittinaṃ),此是状态成就,即赞叹之动名词。被天人所称扬赞叹者为名闻(kittinaṃ),即赞叹声。词根 kitti 于赞叹(abhitthavane)义加 yu。如此,遍扬、散布、称扬,具赞叹声故,为“遍扬名闻”(byāpitakkittino),即牟尼尊,即彼。因为世尊于三界中被天人以戒等功德,以及“阿拉汉、正自觉”等功德所称赞,其名声远达有顶,故以“遍扬名闻”来称叹,此为所说之义。显示巴利原文
Byāpitakkittinañcāti tiloke patthaṭaparikittanaṃ. Sīlādiguṇehi patthaṭathutighosikanti attho. Casaddo cettha padapūraṇamattoyeva. Visesena vividhaṃ vā āpati vaḍḍhatīti byāpito. Vipubbaāpadhātu byāpane vaḍḍhane vā ta. Byāpanaṃ vā byāpitaṃ. Kittiyate abhitthaviyate kittinaṃ. Bhāvasādhanoyaṃ. Thutikriyā labbhati. Kittiyati abhitthaviyati devamanussehīti kittinaṃ, thutighoso. Kittadhātu abhitthavane yu. Byāpito patthaṭo kittano thutighoso yassa soti byāpitakkittino, munindakko. Taṃ. Bhagavato hi tiloke devamanussehi sīlādiguṇehi ca arahaṃ sammāsambuddhotyādīhi guṇehi ca thomito kittisaddo yāva bhavaggaṃ abbhuggacchatīti byāpitakkittinanti thometīti vuttaṃ hoti.
“三界一眼”(Tilokekaccakkhu):即 tiloke ekacakkhu(三界一眼),如此断词。意为于欲界、色界、无色界三界中,成为唯一的慧眼。三界为 tiloka。拥有如彼之眼,成为唯一慧眼者,为“三界一眼”,指牟尼尊。此处,如 brahmassaro(梵音)等词,ekacakkhu 一词发生省略。又,成为三界唯一慧眼、通达者,为“三界一眼”,即牟尼尊。本应说 tilokekaccakkhubhūtā(成为三界一眼),为守护韵律而略去 bhūta(成为)一词,故说“三界一眼”。再者,成为三界唯一慧眼后,于一切法中行、见(cakkhati passati),故为“三界一眼”,指牟尼尊,即彼。因为世尊以慧眼之主导力,及令有情中生起慧眼,故成为三界的眼、成为智、成为法、成为梵。如《蜜丸经》中所说:‘诸友!彼世尊知而知、见而见,成为眼、成为智、成为法、成为梵,成为说者、成为引导者。’显示巴利原文
Tilokekaccakkhunti tiloke ekacakkhūti padacchedo. Kāmarūpa arūpasaṅkhātānaṃ tilokānaṃ ekaṃ paññācakkhubhūtanti attho. Tayo lokā tilokaṃ. Tassa cakkhu viya eka bhūtaṃpaññācakkhu yassa soti tilokekaccakkhu, munindakko. Ettha ca ekacakkhusaddassa lopo hoti brahmassarotiādīsu viya. Atha vā tilokassa ekaṃ paññācakkhuṃ bhūto pattoti tilokekaccakkhu, munindakko. Tilokekaccakkhubhūtanti vattabbe chandānurakkhaṇatthaṃ bhūtasaddalopaṃ katvā tilokekaccakkhunti vuttaṃ. Atha vā tilokassa ekabhūto paññācakkhu hutvā sabbadhamme cakkhati passatīti tilokekaccakkhu, munindakko. Taṃ. Bhagavā hi paññācakkhu mayattā sattesu ca taduppādanato tilokassa cakkhubhūto ñāṇabhūto dhammabhūto brahmabhūto hoti. Vuttañhi madhupiṇḍikasutte ‘‘so hāvuso bhagavā jānaṃ jānāti, passaṃ passati cakkhubhūto ñāṇabhūto dhammabhūto brahmabhūto vattā pavattā atthassa ninnetā amatassa dātā dhammassāmī tathāgato’’ti. Tasmā tilokekaccakkhunti thometi.
Dukhamasahananti(堪忍极苦):即凡夫极难忍受之处而能忍受。凡夫以苦、以极难忍受故称为dukhamaṃ(极难忍),指称意、不称意等所缘。在应说dukkhamanti处,为守护韵律,因音节结合而省略ka音,说为dukhamanti。能忍受、堪忍彼者,名为dukhamasahano,即牟尼尊。词根saha在“堪忍”义上加yu。他是堪忍极苦者。因为对于凡夫极难忍受的称意不称意等所缘、寒热等,以及得与不得、毁与誉、称与讥、苦与乐这些世间法,世尊都能极度堪忍、全然忍受,故以“堪忍极苦”赞叹。显示巴利原文
Dukhamasahananti puthujjanehi atidukkhamitaṭṭhānaṃ khamanaṃ. Puthujjanehi dukkhena kasirena khamitabbanti dukhamaṃ, iṭṭhāniṭṭhādi ārammaṇaṃ. Dukkhamanti vattabbe gajjabandhattā chandānurakkhaṇatthaṃ kakāralopaṃ katvā dukhamanti vuttaṃ. Taṃ sahati khamatīti dukhamasahano, munindakko. Sahadhātu parisahane yu. Taṃ dukhamasahanaṃ. Bhagavā hi puthujjanehi sudukkhamitaṃ iṭṭhā niṭṭhādiārammaṇaṃ sītuṇhādiṃ lābhālābhayasāyasa nindapasaṃsasukhadukkhasaṅkhātaṃ lokadhammañca ativiya khamati adhivāseti, tasmā dukhamasahananti thometi.
Mahesinti(大寻求者):寻求大戒蕴等,或寻求大涅槃故,于大戒蕴等中寻求、寻觅、探求者,为mahesī,即牟尼尊。以“大”(mahanta)字作前分,于“寻求”(es)词根表寻觅义时加后缀ī。诚如《大义释》所说:“mahesī(大寻求者):世尊寻求、寻觅、探求大戒蕴故,为mahesī。寻求、寻觅、探求大定蕴、大慧蕴、大解脱蕴、大解脱知见蕴故,为mahesī。”或于大三十七菩提分法中寻求、寻觅者,为mahesī;或寻求、寻觅大涅槃者,为mahesī。诚如《大义释》所说:“于大念处、大正勤、大神足、大根、大力、大觉支、大圣八支道、大第一义不死涅槃中寻求、寻觅故,为mahesī。”或者,被有大威力的诸有情寻求、寻觅、探求“我等之佛在何处”故,为mahesī。诚如《大义释》所说:“被有大威力之诸有情寻求、寻觅‘佛在何处’等故。”那位大寻求者,即牟尼尊。我以头面礼敬彼——如此结合。显示巴利原文
Mahesinti mahantaṃ sīlakkhandhādiṃ pariyesamānaṃ mahantaṃ nibbānaṃ gavesamānaṃ vā mahante sīlakkhandhādike esati gavesati pariyesatīti mahesī, munindakko. Mahantasaddūpa pada esadhātu gavesane ī. Vuttañhi mahāniddese ‘‘mahesīti mahesī. Bhagavā mahantaṃ sīlakkhandhaṃ esi gavesi pariyesīti mahesī. Mahantaṃ samādhikkhandhaṃ mahantaṃ paññākkhandhaṃ mahantaṃ vimuttikkhandhaṃ mahantaṃ vimuttiñāṇadassanakkhandhaṃ esī gavesī pariyesīti mahesī’’ti. Mahante sattatiṃsabodhipakkhiya dhamme esati gavesatīti vā mahesī, mahantaṃ nibbānaṃ esati gavesatīti vā mahesī. Vuttañhi mahāniddese ‘‘mahante satipaṭṭhāne mahante sammappadhāne mahante iddhipāde mahantāni indriyāni mahantāni balāni mahante bojjhaṅge mahantaṃ ariyaṃ aṭṭhaṅgikaṃ maggaṃ mahantaṃ paramatthaṃ amataṃ nibbānaṃ esī gavesī pariyesīti mahesī’’ti. Atha vā mahesakkhehi sattehi esiyati gavesiyati pariyesiyati amhākaṃ kahaṃ buddhoti mahesī. Vuttañhi mahāniddese ‘‘mahesakkhehi vā sattehi esito gavesito kahaṃ buddho’’tyādi. Taṃ mahesiṃ. Tanti munindakkaṃ. Ahaṃ sirasā namāmīti sambandho.
然而,此处是简要的义理连结:大悲如从悲悯之山升起的朝阳,或说大悲如同从悲悯之山升起的朝阳;其智慧之广轮,即名为一切知智的广大圆满轮,犹如广大的轮围山轮,具有以广大所缘为境的一切知智;独一无侣,成为唯一之佛。那位如此这般的牟尼王、佛日,在清净——即从贪等垢秽中清净——的三有之窟,即名为三有的莲池中,以名为法的光芒,即最上法之光芒,令应调伏的众生流,即应调伏的有情群体,善加觉悟——即以证得四谛法而善令觉悟、令开显;其名声遍满,即称扬之声遍于三界,或因戒等功德而称扬之声遍满;为三界之独眼,即成为欲界、色界、无色界唯一的智慧之眼;堪忍难忍——即凡夫极难忍受之处亦能忍受;大仙——即寻求伟大的戒蕴等,或寻求伟大的涅槃;我以头面礼敬、稽首那位牟尼王。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepayojanā. Dayudayaruṇo mahākaruṇāsaṅkhātaudayapabbatuggatasūriyāruṇo, udayapabba tato uggatasūriyāruṇo viya mahākaruṇā vā, ñāṇa vitthiṇṇabimbo sabbaññutañāṇasaṅkhāto vitthāraparimaṇḍalo, vitthāracakkavāḷamaṇḍalaṃ viya vipulārammaṇasabbaññutañāṇavā, eko asahāyo ekabuddhabhūto, yo yādiso munindakko buddhādicco suddhe rāgādimalehi visuddhe tibhava kuhare tibhavasaṅkhātakamalasare, kamalakathitaṃ uppalanti kathetabbaṃ, vineyyappāṇoghaṃ vinetabbasattasamūhaṃ, dhammaraṃ sīvarehi uttamadhammasaṅkhātaraṃsīhi, subodhesi catusaccadhammaṃ paṭivedhayamānena suṭṭhu pabodhesi vikāsesi, byāpitakkittinaṃ tiloke patthaṭaparikittanaṃ, sīlādiguṇehi patthaṭathutighosikaṃ vā, tilokekaccakkhuṃ kāmarūpaarūpa saṅkhātānaṃ tilokānaṃ ekaṃ paññācakkhubhūtaṃ, dukhamasahanaṃ puthujjanehi atidukkhamitaṭṭhānaṃ khamanaṃ, mahesiṃ mahantaṃ sīlakkhandhādiṃ pariyesamānaṃ mahantaṃ nibbānaṃ gavesamānaṃ vā, taṃ munindakkaṃ ahaṃ sirasā namāmi vandāmīti.
那位胜者,于多生之中,对子女、妻子、肢体乃至生命皆心无系著,出于对菩提的热爱,凡有来乞者,无不施舍。
此后,他更圆满布施巴拉密,乃至持戒巴拉密等亦复如是。
显示巴利原文 Yo jino anekajātiyaṃ saputtadāramaṅgajīvitampi; Bodhipemato alaggamānaso adāsiyeva atthi kassa; Dānapāramiṃ tato paraṃ apūri sīlapāramādikampi; Tāsamiddhiyopayātamaggataṃ tamekadīpakaṃ namāmi.
21 21. 如此,以第二十偈敬礼牟尼主之后,现在,为了以过去多生、在菩萨位时,舍命等行与圆满布施等十波罗蜜的功德,称赞并敬礼胜者,而说“那位胜者”等语。然而,应知此偈是由“raja raja raja”群与轻音重音所组成,以二十字母为相,即所称之说偈。恰如《音声论》所说:“若偈行中有raja、raja群、raja、raja群、raja、raja群及轻音重音,则此偈名为所说偈。”显示巴利原文
21. Evaṃ vīsatimāya gāthāya munindakkaṃ vanditvā idāni pubbe anekajātiyaṃ bodhisattakāle jīvitapariccāgādīhi ca dānādidasapāramiyo pūrentehi guṇehi ca thometvā jinaṃ vanditukāmo yo jino tyādimāha. Ayaṃ pana raja raja raja gaṇehi ca garulahūhi ca racitattā vīsatakkharehi lakkhitā vuttagāthāti daṭṭhabbā. Vuttañhi vuttodaye ‘‘vutta mīdisantu nāmato rajā rajā rajā garullahū cā’’ti.
此处是义理联结:若某一偈行中有raja、raja群、raja、raja群、raja、raja群与轻音重音,则此偈名为所说偈。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ panettha yojanā. Yassaṃ paṭipādaṃ rajā rajagaṇā ca rajā rajagaṇā ca rajā rajagaṇā ca garullahū ca ce siyyuṃ, īdisantu īdisaṃ pana gāthā nāmato nāmena vuttaṃ vutta gāthā nāmāti.
其中,所谓“胜者”,即指佛陀。因为他已胜、正胜、将胜以天子、烦恼、行、蕴、死为体的五魔,故称“胜者”。若问:“佛弟子们不也因战胜五魔而名为胜者吗?”答:并非如此。由于世尊不依他教、无有依止、最极殊胜地战胜五魔,唯有世尊堪称胜者。正如《界论根本复注》所说——显示巴利原文
Tattha pana yo jinoti yo buddho. So hi devaputtakilesābhisaṅkhārakhandhamaccuvasena pañcamāre ajini jināti jinissatīti jinoti vuccati. Nanu ca buddhasāvakāpi pañcamāre jinattā jinā nāmāti ce. Na bhagavato parūpa nissayavirahaniratisayavasena pañcamārajinattā bhagavāyeva jino nāmāti. Vuttañhi dhātukathāmūlaṭīkāyaṃ –
其中,以摧伏其力、超越其境而摧破天子魔;以令其不再生起而摧破烦恼魔与行作魔;以遍知断集而摧破蕴魔与死魔。正是由于在菩提树下便已摧破,以此无依止、无上的摧破,世尊被誉为“摧魔者”。显示巴利原文
‘‘Tattha balavidhamana visayātikkamavasena devaputtamārassa, apavattikaraṇavasena kilesābhisaṅkhāramārānaṃ, samudayappahānapariññāvasena khandhamārassa, maccumārassa, ca bodhimūle eva bhañjitattā parūpanissayarahitaṃ niratisayaṃ taṃ bhañjanaṃ upādāya bhagavāeva mārabhañjanoti thomito’’ti.
“多生”意指于众多轮回有中。此处“生”字具多义。如于“一生、二生”中,此字指“有”;于“维沙卡,有名尼犍陀之沙门种类”中,指“部类”;于“有名提利之草类,从脐生出而耸立空中”中,指“施设”;于“生由二蕴所摄”中,指“有为相”;于“于母胎中,最初心生起、最初识显现,依此而有彼之生”中,指“结生”;于“阿难,菩萨方诞生”中,指“出生”;于“不因出身论而遭讥嫌”中,指“家族”;于“姊妹,我由圣生而生”中,指“圣戒”。然此处专指“有”。故应知义为“众多轮回之有”。彼“有”因生起、趣向等类别而称为“生”。或诸蕴等生起、产生于此,故名为“生”,即“有”。“生”字根为产生。非一而为多,多即是生,故称“多生”。于彼多生中。显示巴利原文
Anekajātiyanti anekasaṃsārabhave. Ettha hi ayaṃ jātisaddo anekattho. Tathā hesa ekampi jātiṃ dvepi jātiyoti ettha bhave āgato. Atthi visākhe nigaṇṭhā nāma samaṇajātīti ettha nikāye. Tiri nāma tiṇajāti nābhiyā uggantvā nabhaṃ āhacca ṭhitā ahosīti ettha paññattiyaṃ. Jāti dvīhi khandhehi saṅgahitāti ettha saṅkhatalakkhaṇe. Yaṃ mātukucchiyaṃ paṭhamaṃ cittaṃ uppannaṃ paṭhamaṃ viññāṇaṃ pātubhūtaṃ. Tadupādāya sāvassa jātīti ettha paṭisandhiyaṃ. Sampatijāto ānanda bodhisattoti ettha pasūtiyaṃ. Anupakuṭṭho jātivādenāti ettha kule. Yatohaṃ bhagini ariyāya jātiyā jātoti ettha ariyasīle. Idha panāyaṃ bhave vattati. Tasmā anekasaṃsārabhaveti attho viññātabbo. So hi jāyati yoni gatiādi vibhāgoti jātīti vuccati. Atha vā jāyanti nibbattanti ettha khandhādayoti jāti, bhavo. Janidhātu nibbattaneti. Na ekā anekā, anekā ca sā jāti cāti aneka jāti. Tassaṃ anekajātiyaṃ.
‘与子女妻室俱’:即与儿子和妻子在一起。‘子’意为净化、延续、清净家族;或意为令父母心意满足。‘子’与‘女’合称为‘子女’。‘妻’意为由丈夫所持护;或意为由男子给予受用;或意为在此与具可厌行相的男子共乐,故名为妻。‘子’与‘妻’合称‘子女妻室’。于合集复合词中,诸师亦许为阳性。具足这些者,为‘有子女妻室者’——即舍弃了子女妻室者。‘肢体与命’:手、足、耳、鼻、眼等身体部分,连同以命根为依的全部身体,称为‘肢体’;有情依此而活,故为‘命’,即命根。‘肢体’与‘命’合称‘肢体与命’。此处‘亦’字为总括义,以此总括对财富、国土的舍弃。显示巴利原文
Saputtadāranti puttena ca bhariyāya ca sahitaṃ. Attano kulaṃ punāti pavati sodhetīti vā putto. Pudhātu pavane ta. Mātāpitūnaṃ manaṃ pūretīti vā putto. Pūradhātu pūraṇe ta. Putto ca dhītā ca putto. Virūpeka sesoyaṃ. Sāmikena dhariyateti dāro. Dharadhātu dhāraṇe ṇo. Dhassa do. Atha vā purisena bhogaṃ dīyatīti dāro. Dādhātu dāne rapaccayo. Dākucchitā kārena purisena ramiyati etthāti vā dāro, bhariyā. Dāpubbaramudhātu ramane kvi. Dāsaddo kucchitattho. Abhidhānaṭīkāyaṃ pana ‘‘dārayante yenāti dāro, dara vidāraṇe. Akattari ca kārake saññāyaṃ ṇo’’ti vuttaṃ. Putto ca dāro ca puttadāro. Samāhāradvandepi hi pulliṅgaṃ icchanti ācariyā. Tena saha vattati yassāti saputtadāro, puttadārapariccāgo. Taṃ saputtadāraṃ. Aṅgajīvitampīti hatthapādakaṇṇanāsacakkhādisarīrāvayavañca jīvitindriya paṭibaddhasakalasarīrañca aṅgati gacchati kāyeti aṅgo, cakkhādisarīrāvayavo. Agidhātu gatiyaṃ a. Jīvanti sattā etenāti jīvitaṃ, jīvitindriyaṃ. Jīvadhātu pāṇadhāraṇe ta. Aṅgo ca jīvitañca aṅgajīvitaṃ. Ettha ca pisaddo sampiṇḍanattho. Tena dhanaraṭṭhapariccāgaṃ sampiṇḍeti. Vuttañhi sīlakkhandhaṭṭha kathāyaṃ –
即‘已行五种大舍弃——舍弃肢体、舍弃命、舍弃财富、舍弃国土、舍弃子女妻室’。又或,‘亦’字为赞叹义。以此赞叹:世尊为成就遍知智,于子女妻室、肢体与生命,心亦无执著而舍离,更遑论财富等外物之舍弃。显示巴利原文
‘‘Aṅgapariccāgaṃ jīvitadhanarajjaputtadārapariccāganti ime pañca mahāpariccāge pariccajitvā’’ti. Atha vā sambhāvanattho. Tena bhagavā sabbaññutañāṇahetupi puttadāraaṅgajīvitampi alaggamānaso pariccajeti, pageva dhanādibāhiravatthu pariccāgepīti sambhāveti.
‘由菩提爱’:由于对菩提的爱乐——即对阿罗汉道智与遍知智的爱乐,后缀‘to’表因由义。‘菩提’:觉悟四谛,即阿罗汉道智;觉悟一切所知法,即遍知智。此处‘菩提’同形并称。‘爱’即可爱、应爱者。‘菩提爱’即对菩提的爱,由此而为‘由菩提爱’。此即说:世尊对菩提智的爱,较之对子女妻室、肢体与生命的爱,百倍、千倍、百千倍更为深切。显示巴利原文
Bodhipematoti arahattamaggasabbaññutañāṇasaṅkhātāya bodhiyā piyamānattā, hetvatthe hi topaccayo. Cattāri saccāni bujjhatīti bodhi, arahattamaggañāṇaṃ. Sabba ñeyyadhamme bujjhatīti bodhi, sabbaññutañāṇaṃ. Budhadhātu ñāṇe ṇa. Itthiliṅgajotako īpaccayo ca. Vuttañhi abhidhānappadīpikāyaṃ – ‘‘bodhi sabbaññutañāṇe, ariyamagge ca nāriya’’nti. Bodhi ca bodhi ca bodhi sarūpekase savasena. Piyanaṃ pemo, piyāyitabboti vā pemo. Pīdhātu tappanakantīsu manipaccayo. Bodhiyā pemo bodhipemo, tato bodhipemato. Bhagavatā hi puttadāraaṅgajīvitehipi sataguṇena sahassaguṇena sata sahassaguṇenapi bodhiñāṇameva piyanti vuttaṃ hoti. Vuttañhi vessantarajātake –
我并非不爱两个儿子,曼坻妃也非我所不爱;
遍知智是我所爱,因此我施舍了所爱。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Na me dessā ubho puttā, maddī devī na dessiyā; Sabbaññutaṃ piyaṃ mayhaṃ, tasmā piye adāsaha’’nti.
“不执著心者”:即对于子女、妻室、身体、生命等心无系著,成为不执著、不黏著。执著、黏著、系著或依著,称为执著(laggo)。‘lag’字根有黏著或依著之义,加‘ga’后缀。不执著即‘alaggo’,或谓在子女、妻室、身体、生命等中无有执著,故为‘alaggo’。‘manati’意为认知、了知所缘,故为‘意’(mano),此意本身即是‘心意’(mānaso)。若其心意不执著,即称为‘不执著心意者’(alaggamānaso),也就是胜者(jino)。‘有求者’(atthikassa)指欲求子女、妻子等人,或指乞求者、接受者,这是其义。‘attho’为欲求,‘assa’为存在,故‘atthiko’意为有欲求者,加‘ṇika’后缀。对于那样的有求者。‘已施与’(adāsiyeva)指以供养、摄益的意欲,以与智相应的舍思而施与,这是其义。因为菩萨在圆满波罗蜜时,虽仍有贪、嗔、痴,但对于来乞者,能割下已装饰准备好的头,放出喉中鲜血,挖出涂有锑粉的双眼,舍弃如同族系明灯的儿子和行止可爱的妻子,犹如唾弃一团唾液而毫无顾恋。显示巴利原文
Alaggamānasoti puttadāraaṅgajīvitādīsu anallīyana citto hutvā laganaṃ saṅganaṃ laggo, lagati saṅgati allayati vāti laggo. Lagadhātu saṅge allīyane vā gapaccayo. Na laggo alaggo, natthi laggo ettha puttadāra aṅgajīvitādīsūti vā alaggo. Manati jānāti ārammaṇanti mano. Soyeva mānaso. Alaggo mānaso yassa soti alaggamānaso, jino. Atthikassāti putta dārādiṃ kāmikassa, yācakassa paṭiggāhakassa vāti attho. Attho kāmo assa atthīti atthiko, ṇiko. Tassa atthikassa. Adāsiyevāti pūjānuggahakāmatāya ñāṇasampayuttapariccāgacetanāya adāsievāti attho. Bodhisatto hi pāramīpūraṇa kāle sarāgasadosasamohasseva sato āgatā gatānaṃ yācakānaṃ alaṅkatapaṭiyattaṃ sīsaṃ kantitvā galalohitaṃ nīharitvā suañjitāni akkhīni uppāṭetvā kulavaṃsappadīpaṃ puttaṃ manāpacāriniṃ bhariyañca kheḷapiṇḍamiva anapekkho pariccajitvā dīyamānova sammāsambodhiñāṇaṃ laddhuṃ sakkā, na puttadāraaṅgajīvitampi apariccajitvā. Pañca hi mahāpariccāge apariccajitvā buddhabhūtapubbā nāma natthi. Paccekabuddhāriyasāvakā pana puttadāraaṅgajīvitaṃ apariccajantāpi paccekabuddhāriyasāvakabodhiñāṇaṃ laddhuṃ samatthāva. Tasmāyeva bhagavantaṃyeva saputtadāramaṅgajīvitampi bodhipemato alaggamānaso adāsiyeva atthi kassāti thometi. Vuttañhetaṃ vessantarajātakaṭṭha kathāyaṃ ‘‘sabbabodhisattā dhanapariccāgaṃ, puttapariccāgaṃ, bhariyapariccāgaṃ, aṅgapariccāgaṃ, jīvitapariccāganti ime pañca mahāpariccāge apariccajitvā buddhabhūtapubbā nāma natthī’’ti.
如此以五种大舍离的功德赞叹世尊后,现在更欲以布施等波罗蜜圆满的功德来赞叹,故说“布施巴拉密”等。其中,“布施”有三种:舍思、远离及施物。在“以信、以惭、以善法为布施”的语境中,舍思称为布施;在“施与无畏”的语境中,远离称为布施;在“施与食物、饮料”的语境中,施物称为布施。其中,舍思以此施与,或以此施物被施与,故为布施。远离以切断、割断之义为布施,当它生起时,能施与、割断那称为怖畏恐惧的恶戒思,故为布施;施物被施与,故为布施。此处即指这三种布施。“波罗蜜”一词的词义已如前述。或者,“彼岸”(即涅槃)以此而到达、前往,故为“波罗蜜”。“彼岸”为前导词,词根“i”有前往之义,加“kvi”后缀。应作词析为“前往彼岸者”。布施本身即是波罗蜜,故为“布施巴拉密”,即指此布施巴拉密。“自此”即指从布施巴拉密。“其他”指另外的。“以戒波罗蜜等为首”:其中显示巴利原文
Evaṃ pañcahi mahāpariccāgaguṇehi bhagavato thomanaṃ katvā idāni dānādipāramīpūraṇaguṇena thomanaṃ kattu kāmo dānapāramintiādimāha. Tattha dānanti tividhaṃ hoti cāgacetanā ca, virati ca, deyyadhammo cāti. Saddhā hiriyaṃ kusalañca dānanti āgataṭṭhāne hi cāgacetanā dānaṃ nāma. Abhayaṃ detīti āgataṭṭhāne viratī dānaṃ nāma. Dānaṃ deti annaṃ pānanti āgataṭṭhāne deyyadhammo dānaṃ nāma. Tattha cāgacetanā deti vā deyyadhammaṃ denti vā etāya deyyadhammanti dānaṃ. Virati avakhaṇḍanaṭṭhena lavanaṭṭhena vā dānaṃ. Sā hi uppajjamānā bhayabheravasaṅkhātaṃ dussilyaṃ cetanaṃ dāti lunāti cāti dānaṃ, deyyadhammo diyyatīti dānaṃ. Idha pana tividhaṃ dānaṃ adhippetaṃ. Pāramīsaddassa vacanattho heṭṭhā vuttoyeva. Atha vā pāraṃ nibbānaṃ eti gacchati etāyāti pārami. Pārasaddūpapada idhātu gatiyaṃ kvi. Pāraṃ itīti padacchedo kātabbo. Dānameva pāramī dānapāramī, taṃ dānapāramiṃ. Tatoti dānapāramito. Paranti aññaṃ. Sīlapāramādikampīti sīlatīti sīlaṃ. Sīla dhātu samādhimhi a. Kāyavacīkammāni samādahati samādhapetīti attho. Sīlati samādhiyati kāyakammādīnaṃ susilyavasena na vippakiratīti vā sīlaṃ, sīlanti samādahanti cittaṃ etenāti vā sīlaṃ. Atha vā sīlayati upadhāretīti sīlaṃ, sīladhātu upadhāraṇe a. Kusala dhammānaṃ patiṭṭhānabhāvena ābhuso dhāretīti attho. Sīlenti vā etena kusale dhamme upadhārenti sādhavoti sīlaṃ, sīliyati upadhāriyati sappurisehi hadayamaṃsantaraṃ upanetvāti vā sīlaṃ, sīleti upadhāreti taṃ samaṅgī puggalaṃ apāyesu uppattinīvāraṇavasena suggati nibbānanti vā sīlaṃ, sīlameva pāramī sīlapāramī, sā ādi yāsanteti sīlapāramādikā. Ettha ca ādisaddena nekkhammapaññā vīriyakhantisaccaadhiṭṭhānamettāupekkhāpāramiṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Vuttañhetaṃ buddhavaṃsapāḷiyaṃ –
布施、戒与出离,智慧、精进为第五;
忍辱、真实、决意,慈与舍,这便是十种。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Dānaṃ sīlañca nekkhammaṃ, paññā vīriyena pañcamaṃ; Khantisaccamadhiṭṭhānaṃ, mettupekkhā imā dasā’’ti.
此处“pi”字为合集之义,以此总摄五种大舍。显示巴利原文
Pisaddo cettha sampiṇḍanattho. Tena pañca mahāpariccāge sampiṇḍeti.
“已圆满”(apūrī):为成就正等觉而圆满之义。世尊从于燃灯佛足下总摄八法、为成佛而发愿以来,于无数生中为证正等觉而精进,未曾有不施之施,未曾有不护之戒,未曾有未圆满之波罗蜜。他确实圆满至极。世尊在菩萨位时,曾施舍超过四大海水之量的血,施舍超过大地尘土之量的肉,施舍超过须弥山王之量的头,施舍超过空中星宿之量的眼。显示巴利原文
Apūrīti sammāsambodhatthāya pūraṇaṃ akāsīti attho. Bhagavato hi dīpaṅkarapādamūle aṭṭha dhamme samodhānetvā buddhatthāya abhinīhārato paṭṭhāya anekajātīsu sammāsambodhiṃ paṭivijjhituṃ vāyamanto adinnadānaṃ nāma natthi, arakkhitasīlaṃ nāma natthi. Apūritā pāramī nāma natthi. Atibahumpi pūraṇaṃ akāsiyeva. Bhagavā hi bodhisatta bhūto catūsu mahāsamuddesu udakaṃ parājetvā adhikaṃ lohitadānamakāsi. Sakalapathaviyā paṃsuṃ parājetvā adhikaṃ maṃsamadāsi. Sinerupabbatarājaṃ parājetvā adhikaṃ sīsadānamadāsi. Ākāse tārakasamūhaṃ parājetvā adhikaṃ nayanamadāsi.
因此,《胜者庄严》中说:显示巴利原文
Tena vuttaṃ jinālaṅkāre –
他于大海之中,所施之血逾于海水;
他布施自身之肉,胜过大地之尘;
他所施舍的戴冠头颅,其量高逾须弥山;
于虚空中,所施之眼,其数逾于星宿。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘So sāgare jaladhikaṃ rudhiraṃ adāsi, Bhūmiṃ parājiya samaṃsamadāsi dānaṃ; Meruppamāṇamadhikañca samoḷisīsaṃ, Khe tārakādhikataraṃ nayanaṃ adāsī’’ti.
其中,“彼”是指这类菩萨。“于大海中”是指在四大海中。“逾水”是指超过水之量而行。“施血”是指进行了布施血。“胜逾大地”是指超过大地之尘,并施舍了自身更多的肉。“逾须弥量”是指超过高达十六万八千由旬的须弥山王的量而作。“戴冠首”是指连同宝冠的灌顶之头,他施舍了。“空中”是指在铁围山边际的虚空之中。“逾星数”是指超过星宿等星辰的数量而作。“施眼”是指进行了布施眼睛。应如此理解这里的意思。显示巴利原文
Tattha ca soti so evaṃvidho bodhisatto. Sāgareti catūsu mahāsamuddesu. Jaladhikanti udakato adhikaṃ katvā. Rudhiraṃ adāsīti lohitadānamadāsi. Bhūmiṃ parājiyāti paṃsupathaviyā paṃsuṃ parājetvā attano sarīramaṃsaṃ adhikaṃ adāsi. Meruppamāṇamadhikanti yojana aṭṭhasaṭṭhisatasahassubbedhassa girirājassa pamāṇatopi adhikaṃ katvā. Samoḷisīsanti moḷiyā saha abhisittasīsaṃ adāsi. Kheti cakkavāḷapabbatapariyante ākāse. Tārakādhikataranti nakkhattāditārakarūpatopi adhikaṃ katvā . Nayanaṃ adāsīti nettadānaṃ adāsīti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo.
“他们成就所至之最上性”应作词析:tāsaṃ iddhiyā upayātaṃ aggataṃ。“他们”是指那些波罗蜜。“以成就”是指以圆满成就,此处是具格,表原因。“所至”是指已经到达。“最上性”是指一切众生中的最上性,即成为最殊胜的佛性,这是它的含义。这个词在“所至”一词中作宾语。这里“最上”是表示最上意义的不变词干。或者,“aggati”意为到达最上性、最胜性或佛性,因此“最上者”是指胜者。“agga”字根有前往之义,加上“a”后缀。最上者的状态就是“最上性”。因为世尊在无量的世间界中,于一切众生为最上、最胜、最尊,这是此处的意义。此义在《增支部·十集》中已说:显示巴利原文
Tāsamiddhiyopayātamaggatanti tāsaṃ iddhiyā upayātaṃ aggatanti padacchedo. Tāsanti tāsaṃ pāramīnaṃ. Iddhiyāti samiddhiyā, hetvatthe cetaṃ karaṇavacanaṃ. Upayātanti upagataṃ. Aggatanti sabbasattānaṃ uttamabhāvaṃ, seṭṭhabhūtaṃ buddhattanti attho. Taṃ pana padaṃ upayātantipade kammaṃ. Aggasaddo cettha uttamavācako anipphannapāṭipadiko. Atha vā aggati uttamabhāvaṃ seṭṭhabhūtaṃ vā buddhabhāvaṃ pāpuṇātīti aggo, jino. Aggadhātu gatiyaṃ a. Aggassa bhāvo aggataṃ. Bhagavā hi anantalokadhātūsu sabba sattānaṃ aggo uttamataro seṭṭhataroti attho. Vuttañhetaṃ dasanipāta aṅguttarapāḷiyaṃ –
诸比丘,凡所有众生,不论无足、二足、四足、多足,有色、无色,有想、无想,或是非想非非想,如来被誉为他们中最上者,是阿罗汉、正自觉者。显示巴利原文
‘‘Yāvatā bhikkhave sattā apadā vā dvipadā vā catuppadā vā bahuppadā vā rūpino vā arūpino vā saññino vā asaññino vā nevasaññīnāsaññino vā, tathāgato tesaṃ aggamakkhāyati arahaṃ sammāsambuddho’’ti.
“tamekadīpakaṃ”一词应拆解为“taṃ ekadīpakaṃ”。“taṃ”指胜者。“ekadīpakaṃ”意为一切众生的唯一皈依处或安立处。因为“dīpaka”是表示皈依处、安立处的派生词。正如《相应部注》中所说:“以安立之义而称为灯(dīpa)”。“dīpa”即安立,或因众生以皈依之相而依止于此,故为“dīpaka”,即指胜者。词根“√dīp”意为安立,加上词缀“aka”。“eka”表数目“一”。独一无二的灯便是“ekadīpaka”,指胜者。或者,“ekadīpakaṃ”意为:恰如大海中岛屿是人们的皈依处与安立处,胜者也是作为一切众生皈依处、安立处的唯一佛陀。显示巴利原文
Tamekadīpakanti taṃ ekadīpakanti padacchedo. Tanti jinaṃ. Ekadīpakanti sabbasattānaṃ ekapaṭisaraṇabhūtaṃ patiṭṭhabhūtaṃ vā. Dīpakasaddo hi paṭisaraṇapatiṭṭhavācako nipphannapāṭipadiko. Vuttañhi saṃyuttaṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘patiṭṭhāpanaṭṭhena dīpa’’nti. Dīpanti patiṭṭhahanti paṭisaraṇabhāvena sattā etthāti vā dīpako, jino. Dīpadhātu patiṭṭhāyaṃ ako. Ekasaddo saṅkhyāvācako. Eko ekabhūto dīpakoti ekadīpako, jino. Atha vā ekadīpakanti manussānaṃ paṭisaraṇabhūtaṃ patiṭṭhānabhūtaṃ samuddadīpakamiva sabbasattānaṃ paṭisaraṇabhūtaṃ patiṭṭhānabhūtaṃ ekabuddhabhūtaṃ.
此处另有一种词义解释:在水中闪耀,故为灯(dīpa)。或者,水在此分为两道而流,故为灯(dīpa)。那样的灯就是“dīpaka”。那独一无二的灯,成为佛陀后,来、去、转起,故为“ekadīpaka”,即胜者。正如在大海中,船只毁坏的人们以海岛为皈依、为安立,同样,胜者对于沉没在无依无靠的轮回大海中的一切众生,作为唯一的佛陀,是皈依处、安立处,因此以“ekadīpakaṃ”来赞叹。其联系为:我礼敬胜者。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ panettha vacanattho. Jalamajjhe dippatīti dīpo. Dvidhā āposandati etthāti vā dīpo. Soyeva dīpako. Soviya eko buddho hutvā eti gacchati pavattatīti ekadīpako, jino. Yathā hi mahāsamudde bhinnanāvānaṃ manussānaṃ samuddadīpo paṭisaraṇo patiṭṭho hoti, evaṃ jino saṃsārasāgare alabbhaneyyapatiṭṭhe osīdantānaṃ sabbasattānaṃ ekabuddhabhūto paṭisaraṇo patiṭṭho hotīti ekadīpakanti thometi. Taṃ jinaṃ ahaṃ namāmīti sambandhoti.
此处是简要的句义衔接:那位胜者,于无数生、无数轮回有中,对于子女与妻子等亲眷,乃至肢体与生命——即身体各部与命根,或手、足、耳、鼻、眼等身分,以及依附于命根的整个身体——因对菩提(即阿罗汉道与一切知智)的爱乐而心无执著,于子女、肢体、生命等皆不沾着。对于有所需求的乞求者,他确实以布施之思施舍了子女、妻子等。不仅布施巴拉密,乃至其后的持戒巴拉密等,皆为成就正等觉而圆满修习。由于那些波罗蜜的成就与圆满,他达到了最上、殊胜的佛位,成为一切众生唯一的皈依处、唯一的安立处,犹如明灯,成为唯一的皈依与安立。我以三门礼敬那位胜者。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepayojanā. Yo jino aneka jātiyaṃ anekasaṃsārabhave, saputtadāraṃ puttena ca bhariyāya ca sahitaṃ, aṅgajīvitampi aṅgapaccaṅgajīvitindriyampi. Atha vā hatthapādakaṇṇanāsacakkhādisarīrāvayavañca jīvitindriya paṭibaddhasakalasarīrañca, bodhipemato arahattamagga sabbaññutañāṇasaṅkhātāya bodhiyā piyamānattā, alagga mānasoti puttadāraaṅgajīvitādīsu anallīyanacitto hutvā, atthikassa puttadārādiṃ kāmikassa yācakassa adāsiyeva pariccāgacetanāya adāsieva. Dānapāramimpi tato dānapāramito paraṃ aññaṃ sīlapāramādikampi sīlapāramīādikampi, apūri sammāsambodhatthāya pūraṇaṃ akāsi, tāsaṃ pāramīnaṃ iddhiyā samiddhiyā aggataṃ uttama bhāvaṃ seṭṭhabuddhattaṃ vā, upayātaṃ upagataṃ, ekadīpakaṃ sabbasattānaṃ ekapaṭisaraṇabhūtaṃ ekapatiṭṭhānabhūtaṃ vā, dīpakamiva ekapaṭisaraṇabhūtaṃ patiṭṭhānabhūtaṃ vā taṃ jinaṃ tīhi dvārehi namāmīti.
“Brahmābrahmāgatānaṃ”:为梵天及非梵天而来的会众作殊胜说法者,已断诸恶者。
“Lokālokābhirāmaṃ”:令世间与出世间皆欢喜者,我恒常礼敬那位牟尼王、牟尼王。
显示巴利原文 Devādevātidevaṃ nidhanavapudharaṃ mārabhaṅgaṃ abhaṅgaṃ, Dīpaṃ dīpaṃ pajānaṃ jayavarasayane bodhipattaṃdhipattaṃ; Brahmābrahmāgatānaṃ varagirakathikaṃ pāpahīnaṃ pahīnaṃ, Lokālokābhirāmaṃ satatamabhiname taṃ munindaṃ munindaṃ.
22 如此,以第二十一首偈颂礼敬了胜者之后,如今欲以“Devādevātideva”等十种功德赞叹并礼敬牟尼王,而说出“Devādevātideva”等语。此偈当知是由“ma ra bha na ya ya”诸音节组及“timuniyati”所构成,具有二十一个字母,是首尾双韵的“saddharā”偈颂。正如《Vuttodaya》中所说:“以m rā bhnā yo yatra 结合 timuniyati,即名为saddharā。”显示巴利原文
22. Evaṃ ekavīsatimāya gāthāya jinaṃ vanditvā idāni devādevātidevantyādīhi dasahi guṇehi thometvā munindaṃ vanditukāmo devādevātidevantiādimāha. Ayaṃ pana ma ra bha na ya ya gaṇehi ca timuniyatīhi ca racitattā ekavīsatakkharehi yuttā ādyantayamakā saddharā gāthāti daṭṭhabbā. Vuttañhi vuttodaye ‘‘mrā bhnā yo yotra yena timuniyatiyutā saddharā kittitāya’’nti.
此处是其义理连接:在那种结构中,如果以 “mrā” 即 ma 音节组、“bhnā” 即 bha 音节组、与 ya 音节组结合的 ya 音节组,以及以第七个字母为结尾的 “timuniyati” 等停顿都存在,那么在此自然韵律中,这偈颂便被称为 “saddharā” 偈颂。这里,“muni” 一词应理解为表示数字七。由于在一个偈句中,以第七个字母、第七个字母为结尾的停顿有三种转折,故说 “timuniyatiyutā”,即具有二十一个字母。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ panettha yojanā. Yassaṃ paṭipādaṃ mrā maragaṇā ca bhnā bhanagaṇā ca yogaṇo ca yena yagaṇena saha yogaṇo ca timuniyatiyutā sattamakkharantetīhi yatīhi yuttā ca ce siyuṃ. Atra imasmiṃ pakati chande ayaṃ gāthā saddharāgāthāti kittitāti. Ettha ca munisaddo sattasaṅkhyāvācakoti daṭṭhabbo. Ekasmiṃ pāde sattamakkharante sattamakkharante yatīnaṃ tiparivattattā timuniyatiyutāti vuttaṃ. Ekavīsatakkharavantoti vuttaṃ hoti.
其中,“Devādevātidevaṃ” 意为:超越称为王的世间天、四大天王等化生天的最上、最胜者,亦即清净天。此处,“天” 指世间天:他们因人中自在成就而辉耀,故人王、王妃、王子等被称为天。其次,“天” 指化生天:他们因天界自在成就而辉耀,且以欲乐等嬉戏、游玩,或居住其中;因具足战胜能力而欲摧伏敌人;通过行使自在、财富等,接受恭敬供养及相应的教诫而交流;因殊胜福德所生威光而照耀;无碍地前往所欲之境;并能成就所欲,故名为天。此义亦应依《清净道大复注》所说的方法而了知。“Atideva” 意为:诸天中的最上、最胜者,或成为清净天的世尊。世尊以戒等功德,超越那些世间天与化生天,是超越诸天者,故被称为 “atideva”。天中的超越者、最上、最胜、最殊胜之天,即 “devādevātideva”,指成为清净天的牟尼王。礼敬这位 “devādevātideva”。显示巴利原文
Tattha ca devādevātidevanti rājasaṅkhātasammutideva catumahārājādikaupapattidevānaṃ atiuttamaṃ atiseṭṭhaṃ visuddhidevabhūtaṃ. Ettha hi devāti sammutidevā. Te hi mānussaissariyasampattīhi dibbantīti manussarājadevī kumārā devāti vuccanti. Puna devāti upapattidevā. Te hi dibbaissariyasampattīhi dibbantīti catumahārājikā devā vuccanti, dibbanti kāmaguṇādīhi kīḷanti laḷanti, tesu vā viharanti, vijayasamatthatāyogena paccatthike vijetuṃ icchanti, issariyadhanādisakkāradānaggahaṇaṃ taṃ taṃ atthānusāsanañca karontā voharanti. Puññātisayayogānubhāvappattāya jutiyā jotanti. Yathādhippetañca visayaṃ appaṭighātena gacchanti. Yathicchitanipphādane ca sakkontīti devāti visuddhimaggamahāṭīkāyaṃ āgatanayenapi veditabbo. Atidevanti tesaṃ devānaṃ atiuttamaṃ atiseṭṭhaṃ vā visuddhi devabhūtaṃ bhagavantanti attho. So hi tesaṃ sammuti upapattidevānaṃ sīlādiguṇehi atirekattā atireko devoti bhagavā atidevoti vuccati. Devo devānaṃ atireko atiuttamo atiseṭṭho ativisiṭṭho devo devādevātidevo, visuddhidevabhūto munindo labbhati. Taṃ devādevātidevaṃ.
如《法心分别》所说:“天有三种:世间天、化生天、清净天。世间天指国王、王妃、王子等。化生天指自四大王天以上的诸天。清净天指阿罗汉。”显示巴利原文
Vuttañhi dhammahadayavibhaṅge ‘‘devāti tayo devā sammuti devā, upapattidevā, visuddhidevā. Sammutidevā nāma rājāno deviyo rājakumārā. Upapattidevā nāma catumahārājike deve upādāya tadupari devā. Visuddhidevā nāma arahanto vuccantī’’ti.
而世尊,由于具备无上的神通游戏、殊胜的天住、梵住、圣住,对自他相续中五种魔的征服之欲成就,心得自在,具足七圣财等之正行道,并以契合法的本性、人的根基与意乐的教诫为殊胜的言说,以最上智慧身光为相的光明,以及不共的智慧身行,在战胜魔罗、一切知智的功德与利他成就中无有障碍,因此被包括天众在内的世间视为皈依处,应受赞叹,以恭敬心而可爱,并于一切诸天的功德中超越而安住于最胜,是诸天中的最胜、最高天,故称为“devādevātideva”,这也应依《清净道大复注》中所说的方法来理解。显示巴利原文
Bhagavā pana nirātisayāya abhiññākīḷāya uttamehi dibbabrahmaariyavihārehi saparasantānagatapañcavidhamāravija yicchānipphattiyācittissariya sattadhanādi sammāpaṭipatti aveccappasādasakkāradānaggahaṇasaṅkhātena dhammasabhāvapuggalajjhāsayānurūpānusāsanīsaṅkhātena ca vohārātisayena paramāya paññāsarīrappabhāsaṅkhātāya jutiyā anaññasādhāraṇāya ñāṇasarīragatiyā māravijaya sabbaññuguṇaparahita nipphādanesu appaṭihatāya sattiyā ca samannāgatattā sadevakena lokena saraṇanti gamanīyato abhitthavanīyato bhattivasena kamanīyato ca sabbe te deve tehi guṇehi abhibhuyya ṭhitattā tesaṃ devānaṃ atiseṭṭho atiuttamo devoti devādevātidevoti visuddhimagga mahāṭīkāyaṃ āgatanayenapi veditabbo.
“Nidhanavapudharaṃ”:持最后身。“Nidhana”一词表示终结,是非派生词。或说以此作终结,故为“nidhana”。又或毁坏、灭尽诸有,故为“nidhana”,即最后身。“ni”前缀的“dhā”词根加“yu”词缀,表灭尽。“Vapu”:于此播种善恶种子,故为“vapu”,即身体。“vap”词根加“u”词缀,表相续。“nidhana”又是“vapu”,故称“nidhanavapu”,持此者即“nidhanavapudhara”,牟尼王。礼敬那位“nidhanavapudhara”。因为他在菩提树下,以最上道智之剑,斩断了无始轮回诸有中产生的一切烦恼,故不再有后有结生。此佛位之生是最后有,因此特别以“nidhanavapudhara”赞叹牟尼王。正如《增支部》经文所说:“佛陀是最后身者。”显示巴利原文
Nidhanavapudharanti antimakāyadhāraṇaṃ. Ettha ca nidhanasaddo pariyosānavācako anipphannapāṭipadiko. Atha vā nidheti pariyosānaṃ karoti etenāti nidhanaṃ. Nidheti vināseti bhavanti vā nidhanaṃ, antimakāyo labbhati. Nipubba dhā dhātu nāse yu. Vapati kusalākusalabījametthāti vapu, kāyo. Vapadhātu bījasantāne u. Nidhanañca taṃ vapu cāti nidhanavapu, taṃ dhāretīti nidhanavapudharo, munindo. Taṃ nidhanavapudharaṃ. So hi anamataggasaṃsārabhavesu nibbattentānaṃ sabbakilesānaṃ bodhimaṇḍe aggamaggañāṇasatthena samucchindi tattā punabbhavābhinibbatti natthi. Ayañhi buddhabhāvajāti antima bhavo hoti, tasmā visesena munindameva nidhanavapudharanti thometi. Vuttañhetaṃ aṅguttarapāḷiyaṃ ‘‘buddho antima dharo’’ti.
“Mārabhaṅga”意为摧破包括天子魔在内的五魔。“Māra”一词的含义前文已述。摧破、已摧破、将摧破五魔者,称为“mārabhaṅga”(摧魔者),即牟尼王。“Māra”一词作为前分,加在表示压伏义的“bhanja”词根上,构成tappaccaya。该词根连同词尾发生“go”音替换。“n”音变为随韵,随韵又变为喉音组末音。此即“摧魔者”。“Abhaṅga”意为不能被魔军摧破、粉碎者:被摧破者称为“bhaṅga”,不被摧破者则为“abhaṅga”。或者说,不被魔军摧破者,称为“abhaṅga”,意为不应被魔军摧破;又或者说,魔军不能摧破者,称为“abhaṅga”,即牟尼王。此即“不可摧破者”。显示巴利原文
Mārabhaṅganti devaputtādipañcamāre viddhaṃsanaṃ. Mārasaddattho heṭṭhā vuttoyeva. Pañcamāre bhañjati abhañji bhañjissatīti mārabhaṅgo, munindo. Mārasaddūpapada bhanjadhātu avamaddane tapaccayo. Tassa saha dhātvantena goādeso. Nakārassa niggahitādeso. Tassa kavaggantādeso. Taṃ mārabhaṅgaṃ. Abhaṅganti mārasenāya bhañjituṃ viddhaṃsituṃ asamatthaṃ, bhañjiyate bhaṅgo. Nabhaṅgo abhaṅgo. Atha vā mārasenāya na bhañjiyatīti abhaṅgo. Mārasenāya bhañjituṃ na arahatīti attho. Mārasenā bhañjituṃ na samatthoti vā abhaṅgo, munindo. Taṃ abhaṅgaṃ.
于“Dīpaṃ dīpaṃ pajānanti”中,pajānaṃ 与 dīpaṃ dīpaṃ 相关联。其中,pajānanti 指众生。他们因业与烦恼而生、被产生,或以结生、死没的方式种种出生、产生,故称为 pajā(众生)。Dīpaṃ 指智慧之灯。它能分别善与不善法,予以照亮、阐明、照耀,故称为 dīpa(灯)。或者,被点燃、照耀,故称为 dīpa,意为驱散黑暗,显现光明。dīpa 词根意为照耀,加 a 后缀。如同灯一般,故称 dīpā,即智慧。正如灯能驱散黑暗、显现光明,智慧则灭除无明之暗,显现法光,作如此说。那盏灯。再者,dīpaṃ 意为能照亮者、阐明者。他能照亮、阐明,故称为 dīpa(灯)。牟尼王以亲近侍奉的方式,为来去的应调伏众生,通过说法,照亮四道智等智慧之灯,作如此说。那盏灯。显示巴利原文
Dīpaṃdīpaṃ pajānanti ettha pajānaṃ dīpaṃ dīpanti sambandho. Tattha pajānanti sattānaṃ. Tehi kammakilesehi pajāyanti nibbattiyanti, pakārena vā jāyanti nibbattanti paṭisandhicutivasenāti pajāti vuccanti. Dīpanti paññāpadīpaṃ. Tañhi kusalākusale dhamme vibhajitvā dīpeti pakāseti jotetīti dīpanti vuccati. Atha vā dippati jotetīti dīpo. Andhakāraṃ vidhametvā ālokaṃ pakāsetīti attho. Dīpadhātu dittiyaṃ a. Dīpamivāti dīpā, paññā. Yathā hi padīpo andhakāraṃ vidhamitvā ālokaṃ pakāseti, evaṃ paññā avijjandhakāraṃ hantvā dhammālokaṃ pakāsetīti vuttaṃ hoti. Taṃ dīpaṃ. Puna dīpanti dīpakaṃ pakāsentanti attho. So hi dīpeti pakāsetīti dīpoti vuccati. Munindo hi payirupāsanavasena gatāgatānaṃ vineyyasattānaṃ dhammadesanāya catumaggañāṇādipaññāpadīpaṃ pakāsetīti vuttaṃ hoti. Taṃ dīpaṃ.
“Jayavarasayane”意为在战胜五魔之处——最胜的菩提金刚座上。在此处战胜五魔,故称 jaya(胜利处),即菩提树下的金刚座。ji 词根意为战胜,加 ṇa 后缀。应被希求、值得希求者,称为 vara(胜妙)。vara 词根意为希求,加 a 后缀。或者,vara 意为阻止、遮止低劣者。vara 词根意为遮止,加 a 后缀。佛陀于此为众生所亲近、侍奉,故称 sayana(卧处、座处)。sī 词根意为侍奉,加 yu 后缀。胜妙、最上的座处为 varasayana,胜利处即是胜妙座处,故称 jayavarasayana,即菩提树下的金刚座。在那个座上。显示巴利原文
Jayavarasayaneti pañcamāravijayantaṭṭhānabhūte uttama bodhipallaṅkāsane. Pañcamāre jināti etthāti jayo, bodhirukkhapallaṅko. Jidhātu jaye ṇa. Varitabbo patthi tabboti varo, varadhātu patthane a. Varati nivāreti hīnanti vā varo. Varadhātu nivāraṇe a. Buddhena seviyati bhajiyati etthāti sayano. Sidhātu sevāyaṃyu. Varo uttamo sayano varasayano, jayoeva varasayano jayavarasayano, bodhirukkhapallaṅko. Tasmiṃ.
“Bodhipattaṃ adhipattaṃ”应分读为 bodhipattaṃ 与 adhipattaṃ。Bodhipattaṃ 意为已证得菩提——即阿罗汉道智与一切知智。此处 bodhi 一词可用于树、道、智、一切知智、涅槃等义。例如,在“于菩提树下初成正觉”等句中,用于树义;在“四道中之智称为菩提”等句中,用于道义;在“广大慧者证得菩提”等句中,用于一切知智义;在“证得菩提、不死、无为”等句中,用于涅槃义。但此处意指世尊的阿罗汉道智与一切知智。觉悟四圣谛,故称 bodhi(菩提),即阿罗汉道智。觉悟一切所知法,故称 bodhi,即一切知智。budha 词根意为知,加 ṇa 与 ī 后缀。以同形省略的方式,菩提与菩提合称。已证得、已达彼者,称为 bodhipatta(证菩提者),即牟尼王。那个证菩提者。Adhipattaṃ 意为已达包括天界在内的世间中一切天、人之最尊位。已达、已证一切天、人中增上、最尊、最上之位者,称为 adhipatta(达最尊位者),即牟尼王。那个达最尊位者。显示巴利原文
Bodhipattaṃdhipattanti bodhipattaṃ adhipattanti padacchedo. Bodhipattanti arahattamaggasabbaññutañāṇaṃ gataṃ. Ettha ca bodhisaddo rukkhamaggañāṇasabbaññutañāṇanibbānesupi vattati. Tathā hesa bodhirukkhamūle paṭhamābhisambuddhotiādīsu rukkhe vattati. Bodhi vuccati catūsu maggesu ñāṇantiādīsu magge. Pappoti bodhiṃ varabhūrī medhasotiādīsu sabbaññutañāṇe. Patvāna bodhiṃ amataṃ asaṅkhatantiādīsu nibbāne. Idha pana bhagavato arahattamaggasabbaññutañāṇaṃ adhippetaṃ. Cattāri saccāni bujjhatīti bodhi, arahatta maggañāṇaṃ. Sabbañeyyadhamme bujjhatīti bodhi, sabbaññutañāṇaṃ. Budhadhātu ñāṇe ṇa ī ca. Bodhi ca bodhi ca bodhi sarūpekasesavasena. Taṃ apajjiṃ agaminti bodhi patto, munindo. Taṃ bodhipattaṃ. Adhipattanti sadevake loke sabbadevamanussānaṃ jeṭṭhabhāvaṃ gatanti attho. Sabbadevamanussānaṃ adhikaṃ jeṭṭhabhāvaṃ vuḍḍhatarabhāvaṃ patto gatoti adhipatto, munindo. Taṃ adhipattaṃ. Yathā hi kukkuṭapotakānaṃ yo kukkuṭapotako aṇḍakosaṃ padāletvā abhinibbhido, so tesaṃ jeṭṭhabhāvaṃ vuḍḍhatarabhāvaṃ gato, evameva bhagavā sadevake loke avijjā gatāya pajāya taṃ avijjaṇḍakosaṃ padāletvā paṭhamataraṃ ariyāya jātiyā jātattā ca sīlasamādhipaññādi sabbaguṇehi adhikattā ca appaṭisamattā ca sabbadevamanussānaṃ jeṭṭhabhāvaṃ vuḍḍhatarabhāvaṃ seṭṭhabhāvaṃ appaṭisamabhāvañca patto gatoti vuttaṃ hoti. Tasmā adhipattanti thometi.
“Brahmābrahmāgatānaṃ”应拆解为 brahma、abrahma、āgatānaṃ。意思是,以亲近侍奉的方式前来的梵天与人天众。其中,brahmā 指梵众天等梵天,他们因禅那等功德而增长广大,故称 brahmā(梵天);abrahmā 指天与人,因非梵天而称 abrahmā(非梵天)。以亲近侍奉前来的,称为 āgatā(来者),此是 brahmā 的复数形式,由前缀 ā- 加 gamu(去)词根、再加 ta 后缀构成。梵天与非梵天来者合称 brahmābrahmāgatā,即指他们。这是限定语后置的复合词,如“agyāhita”等例。该词在“varagirakathika”一词中作间接宾语。整句意为,以亲近侍奉方式前来的梵天与天、人众。显示巴利原文
Brahmābrahmāgatānanti brahma abrahma āgatānanti padacchedo. Āgatānaṃ payirupāsanavasena āgatānaṃ brahma devamanussaparisānanti attho. Tattha brahmāti brahmapārisajjādi brahmā. Te hi jhānādiguṇehi brūhanti vaḍḍhantīti brahmāti vuccanti, abrahmāti devamanussā. Te hi na brahmā abrahmāti vuccanti, āgacchanti payirupāsanavasenāti āgatā, brahmā brahmāno labbhanti. Āpubbagamudhātu gatiyaṃ ta. Āgatā brahmā ca abrahmā cāti brahmābrahmāgatā, tesaṃ. Visesana paranipātapadametaṃ agyāhitotiādīsu viya. Taṃ pana padaṃ varagirakathikantipade sampadānaṃ. Payirupāsanānaṃ brahma devamanussaparisānanti attho.
“Varagirakathikaṃ”意为宣说最胜法语者,也指以最胜语说法者。被唱说、被言说者,称为 girā(语),即言语,由 gā(音声)词根加 īro 后缀构成。最胜、殊胜的言语为 varagirā。以此最胜语说法者,称为 varagirakathika(最胜语说法者),即牟尼王。意思是,以最胜、悦耳之语宣说法义。那个。显示巴利原文
Varagirakathikanti uttamaṃ dhammavācaṃ desentaṃ. Seṭṭhavācāya dhammaṃ desamānaṃ vā, gāyati kathiyatīti girā, vācā. Gādhātu sadde īro. Varā seṭṭhā girā vācā varagirā. Tāya dhammaṃ kathetīti varagirakathiko, munindo. Uttamāya manāpabhūtavācāya dhammaṃ desetīti attho. Taṃ.
“Pāpahīnaṃ”意为低劣、不善的烦恼。因为导致恶趣等苦,故称 pāpa(恶),即不善烦恼,由前缀 pa- 加 apa(到达)词根构成。应以善法断除、舍弃者,称为 hīna(低劣),即低劣法,由 hā(舍弃)词根加 ta 后缀、音变为 īna 而成。恶即是低劣,故合称 pāpahīna(恶低劣)。Pahīnaṃ 意为以阿罗汉道智彻底断除。他断除,故称 pahīna(断除者),即牟尼王,由前缀 pa- 加 hā(舍弃)词根、再加 ina 后缀构成。整词意指,以最上道智断除一切不善法。显示巴利原文
Pāpahīnanti lāmakaakusalakilesaṃ. Tañhi apāyādi dukkhaṃ pāpetīti pāpoti vuccati. Akusalakileso. Papubbaapadhātu pāpuṇane. Kusaladhammena hātabbaṃ caji tabbanti hīnanti vuccati. Lāmakadhammo. Hādhātu cāge tapaccayo, tassino. Pāpoeva hīnaṃ pāpahīnaṃ. Pahīnanti arahattamaggañāṇena susamucchinnaṃ. Pajahatīti pahīno, munindo. Papubbahādhātu cāge ino. Sabbe akusaladhamme aggamaggañāṇena samucchindatīti attho.
“Lokālokābhirāmaṃ”应分读为 loka、aloka、abhirāmaṃ,意为人间、天界、梵天世间之可爱乐处。其中,loka 指人世间,因为福德、非福德及其异熟在那里安立、转起,故称“世间”;其词根意为安立,加后缀 a 构成。非世间者为 aloka,指天界与梵天世间。世间与非世间合称 lokālokā。对于这些众生世间极为悦意安住之处,故称为 lokālokābhirāma(世间非世间可爱乐处)。而那位牟尼王,以供养、摄受等方式成为三界之可爱乐处,故以此语称叹。Satataṃ 意为恒常,即日夜不断。Munindaṃ 意为牟尼王,即五牟尼之主。Abhinameti 意为我至诚恭敬地顶礼。如此关联。显示巴利原文
Lokālokābhirāmanti lokaalokaabhirāmanti padacchedo. Manussalokadevabrahmalokānaṃ abhirāmaṭṭhānabhūtanti attho. Lokoti manussa loko, so hi lokayati patiṭṭhahati pavattati vā ettha puññāpuññaṃ tabbipāko cāti loko, manussa loko. Lokadhātu patiṭṭhāyaṃ a. Na loko aloko. Devabrahmaloko. Loko ca aloko ca lokālokā, tesaṃ sattalokānaṃ abhiadhikaṃ ramanti etthāti lokālokābhirāmo. Munindo, taṃ. So hi tilokānaṃ pūjānuggahādikaraṇavasena abhirāmaṭṭhānaṃ hotīti lokālokābhirāmanti thometi. Satatanti niccaṃ. Rattidivaṃ abhiṇhanti attho. Munindanti pañcamunissaraṃ, taṃ munindaṃ. Abhinameti ahaṃ abhisakkaccaṃ namāmīti sambandhoti.
此处略释如下:我恒常恭敬顶礼那位超越诸天、天中之天、众天最上者——他已证清净天,持最后身,摧破魔军:即粉碎了天子魔等五魔,不为魔军所破,堪能摧破魔军;他是众生的灯、智慧的灯,照亮作为业之灯与灯明者;他安坐殊胜胜利之床——即战胜五魔的最上菩提金刚座;已证菩提,即已到达、证得阿罗汉道与一切知智,于天世间中成为一切天人的最上者;他是为梵天及前来亲近的梵天、天、人众,以最胜言辞说法的无上语者;他已断除罪恶、不善、烦恼,以阿罗汉道智彻底断尽;他为世间与出世间之所喜爱,即人、天、梵天世间之悦意处。那位牟尼王、第五位牟尼主,我恒常、持续、不断地恭敬顶礼。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepayojanā. Devādevātidevaṃ sammutidevaupapattidevānaṃ atiuttamaṃ visuddhidevabhūtaṃ nidhanavapudharaṃ antimakāyadhāraṇaṃ, mārabhaṅgaṃ devaputtādipañcamāre viddhaṃsanaṃ abhaṅgaṃ mārasenāya bhañjituṃ asamatthaṃ, mārasenā bhañjanārahaṃ vā, pajānaṃ sattānaṃ dīpaṃ paññāpadīpaṃ, kammabhūtaṃ dīpaṃ dīpakaṃ pakāsentaṃ, jayavarasayane pañcamāravijayantaṭṭhānabhūte uttamabodhipallaṅkāsane ādhārabhūte, bodhipattaṃ arahattamaggasabbaññutañāṇaṃ gataṃ adhipattaṃ sadevake loke sabbadevamanussānaṃ jeṭṭhabhāvaṃ gataṃ, brahmā brahmāgatānaṃ payirupāsanavasena āgatānaṃ brahmadeva manussaparisānaṃ varagirakathikaṃ seṭṭhavācāya dhammaṃ desamānaṃ pāpahīnaṃ lāmakaakusalakilesaṃ pahīnaṃ arahattamagga ñāṇena susamucchinnaṃ lokālokābhirāmaṃ manussa lokadevabrahmalokānaṃ abhirāmabhūtaṃ, munindaṃ pañcamunissaraṃ taṃ munindaṃ satataṃ niccaṃ abhiṇhaṃ ahaṃ abhiname abhisakkaccaṃ namāmīti.
佛陀具足如尼拘律树般圆满的身躯,手足柔软,小腿美妙如梵音。
隐秘之相具足,善逝双足善安立;
身毛柔细上竖,善逝上身端正如梵天;
眼绀青色,足跟广长,皮肤细滑,是赞颂中最上之味、最上者。
显示巴利原文 Buddho nigrodhabimbo mudukaracaraṇo brahmaghoseṇijaṅgho, Kosacchādaṅgajāto punarapi sugato suppatiṭṭhitapādo; Mūdodātuṇṇalomo athamapi sugato brahmujuggattabhāvo, Nīlakkhī dīghapaṇhī sukhumamalachavī thomyarasaggasaggī.
四十齿齐整,齿列平正,两肩之间充实饱满,
足下有轮相,齿无间隙,足如螺贝;
站立时身不弯屈,以柔软的双手能触双膝;
肩圆如桶,胜者,睫如犊牛,上身如狮。
显示巴利原文 Cattālīsaggadanto samakalapanajo antaraṃsappapīno, Cakkenaṅkitapādo aviraḷadasano mārajussaṅkhapādo; Tiṭṭhanto nonamantobhayakaramudunā jaṇṇukānāmasanto, Vaṭṭakkhandho jino gotaruṇapakhumako sīhapubbaḍḍhakāyo.
七处隆满,手指纤长,善逝毛孔各生一毛;
齿白齐整,身如金色,顶毛绀青上竖;
正自觉者,舌广长,颊如狮子,手足具网缦相,
救护者,顶有肉髻——我如是礼敬彼具足功德的大仙。
显示巴利原文 Sattappīno ca dīghaṅguli matha sugato lomakūpekalomo, Sampannodātadāṭho kanakasamataco nīlamuddhaggalomo; Sambuddho thūlajivho atha sīhahanuko jālikappādahattho, Nātho uṇhīsasīso itiguṇasahitaṃ taṃ mahesiṃ namāmi.
23 23. 如此,以第二十二首偈向牟尼主礼敬之后,今以“佛陀如尼拘律圆相……”等三首偈,赞叹佛陀具足三十二大丈夫相之功德,并为礼敬大仙,而说出此三首偈。这三首偈应视为“信乐偈”。其证成如前述。显示巴利原文
23. Evaṃ dvāvīsatimāya gāthāya munindassa paṇāmaṃ katvā idāni buddho nigrodhabimbotyādīhi tīhi gāthāhi buddhassa dvattiṃsamahāpurisalakkhaṇasampannehi guṇehi thomitvā mahesiṃ vanditukāmo buddho nigrodhabimbotyādigāthāttayamāha. Taṃ pana gāthāttayaṃ saddharāgāthāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Sādhakaṃ pana heṭṭhā vuttameva.
其中,第一首偈颂中的“佛陀”,是指已通达四圣谛法者,或已通达无余一切法者。此词应与“如尼拘律树般圆满”等诸句,以同性关系相连接。因为他觉悟、已觉悟、将觉悟四圣谛,并觉悟、已觉悟、将觉悟无余一切法,故称“佛陀”。在这两种解释中,第一种解释:觉体的直接所指,主要是通达四圣谛法的阿罗汉道智;下位的道果智、观智及波罗蜜智,以果的转用而称;阿罗汉果智及一切知智等最终诸智,以因的转用而称。以此为因的所指,即依彼主要转用所表征的、为无量功德聚所庄严的五蕴,假立名为“佛陀”的补特伽罗。第二种解释:觉体的直接所指,主要是能通达一切所知法的一切知智;四道果智、观智及波罗蜜智,以果的转用而称;知根性、知随眠等最终诸智,以因的转用而称。以此为因的所指,即依彼主要转用所表征的、为无量功德聚所庄严的五蕴,假立名为“佛陀”的补特伽罗。那么,此处觉体的直接所指——智本身,是否即名为佛陀?还是以此为因的所指——蕴相续,名为佛陀?由于以智彻底断除了垢染烦恼及其习气,心相续成为清净;因其清净,其所依的色身也成为清净。因显示巴利原文
Tattha paṭhamagāthāyaṃ buddhoti paṭividdhacatusaccadhammo paṭividdhaniravasesasabbadhammo vā. Taṃ pana padaṃ nigrodhabimbo tyādīsu padesu tulyaliṅgattabhāvena sambandhitabbaṃ. So hi cattāri saccāni bujjhati abujjhi bujjhissatīti ca, niravasesasabbadhamme bujjhati abujjhi bujjhissatīti ca buddhoti vuccati. Tesu pana dvīsu vikappesu paṭhamavikappe budhadhātussa vāccaṃ catusaccadhammapaṭivijjhanaṃ arahattamaggañāṇaṃ mukhyena labbhati. Heṭṭhā maggaphalañāṇañca vipassanāñāṇañca pāramīñāṇañca phalūpacārena. Arahattaphalañāṇañca sabbaññutañāṇādipacchimapacchimañāṇāni ca kāraṇūpacārena. Tapaccayassa vāccaṃ tena mukhyopacārena upalakkhito aparimitaguṇagaṇālaṅkāraṃ khandhapañcakaṃ paṭicca buddhobuddhoti paññatto sattaviseso labbhati. Dutiya vikappe budhadhātussa vāccaṃ sabbañeyyadhammapaṭivijjhanasamatthaṃ sabbaññutañāṇaṃ mukhyena labbhati. Catumaggaphalañāṇañca vipassanā pāramīñāṇañca phalūpacārena. Āsayānusayañāṇādipacchima pacchimañāṇāni kāraṇūpacārena. Tapaccayassa vāccaṃ tena mukhyopacārena upalakkhito aparimāṇaguṇoghālaṅkataṃ khandhapañcakaṃ paṭicca buddhobuddhoti paññatto sattaviseso labbhati. Kiṃpanettha budhadhātussa vāccabhūtaṃ ñāṇameva buddho nāma hoti. Udāhu tapaccayassa vāccabhūto khandhasantāno buddho nāmāti. Ñāṇena pana malakara kilesānaṃ savāsanānaṃ niravasesaṃ pahīnattā citta santāno suddho hoti. Tassa pana suddhattā tassa nissayabhūto rūpakāyopi suddho hoti. Tasmā tapaccayassa vāccabhūto arahattamaggañāṇādīnaṃ ādhārabhūto khandhasantāno nāmapaññattivohārena buddho nāmāti. Tena vuttaṃ paṭisambhidāmaggaṭṭhakathāyaṃ –
依于为于一切法无碍智相、证得无上解脱所修习的蕴相续,而假立为一切知智之所依;或依于证悟四圣谛而假立的补特伽罗,名为佛陀。显示巴利原文
‘‘Sabbesu dhammesu appaṭihatañāṇa nimittānuttaravimokkhādhigamaparibhāvitaṃ khandhasantānaṃ upādāya paṇṇattiko sabbaññutapadaṭṭhānaṃ vā saccābhisambodhimupādāya paṇṇattiko sattaviseso buddho’’ti.
实际上,在胜义谛的蕴相续上,为了言说方便而安立众生、人我等假名。如此获得假名的众生,只要尚未为证菩提智而努力、未发愿,便只称为“众生”。然而,从开始为证菩提智而努力、发愿之时起,便有了“菩萨”的假名。当他证得菩提智时,便有了“佛陀”的假名。因此,应知假名所表的蕴相续即名为“佛陀”。如《大义释》中所说:“佛陀——此名非母所作,非父所作,非兄弟所作,非姊妹所作,非朋友同僚所作,非亲戚血亲所作,非沙门婆罗门所作,非诸天所作;此乃诸佛世尊于菩提树下,与证得一切知智同时,所现证的假名,即此‘佛陀’。”或者,依发趣论之理或等无间缘之理,以智为殊胜的、极清净的蕴相续名为“佛陀”,此义亦得成立。显示巴利原文
Paramatthabhūte hi khandhasantāne vohārasukhatthaṃ satta puggalādivohāro āropito. Evaṃ vohārappatto satto yāva bodhiñāṇatthāya na vāyamati, paṇidhānaṃ na karoti. Tāva sattotveva saṅkhaṃ gacchati. Yato pana paṭṭhāya bodhiñāṇatthāya vāyamati, paṇidhānaṃ karoti, tadā bodhisatto nāma vohāro hoti. So pana yadā bodhiñāṇaṃ labhati, tadā buddho nāma vohāro hoti. Tasmā paññattisaṅkhāto khandhasantāno buddho nāmāti daṭṭhabbo. Vuttañhi mahāniddese ‘‘buddhoti netaṃ nāmaṃ mātarā kataṃ, na pitarā kataṃ, na bhātarā kataṃ, na bhaginiyā kataṃ, na mittāmaccehi kataṃ, na ñātisā lohitehi kataṃ, na samaṇabrāhmaṇehi kataṃ, na devatāhi kataṃ, vimokkhantikametaṃ buddhānaṃ bhagavantānaṃ bodhiyā mūle saha sabbaññutañāṇassa paṭilābhā sacchikā paññatti yadidaṃ buddhoti taṃ buddha’’nti. Atha vā paṭṭhānanayena vā nānantarikanayena vā ñāṇappadhāno suvisuddhakhandhasantāno buddho nāmāti atthopi yujjatevāti.
“尼拘律树般圆满”:指身体如尼拘律树般圆满周遍。“尼拘律”意为向下遮蔽,即榕树。其中“尼”(ni)为前缀,“鲁陀”(rudha)取遮蔽义,加后缀“ṇa”,“乌”(u)为增音。“宾巴”(bimbo)意为吐出,引申为身体。字根“瓦姆”(vam)表吐出义,加后缀“bo”,其中“瓦”(va)变为“比”(bi)。“尼拘律宾巴”(nigrodhabimbo)即身体如尼拘律树般圆满者,指世尊。本应说“尼拘律般圆满之身”,此处省略“圆满”一词。正如尼拘律树,无论五十肘高或百肘高,其枝干匀称,高度与广度等量齐观;同样,世尊身长与臂展完全等量。他人或身长而臂展不足,或臂展长而身量不够,唯有世尊没有丝毫参差。如《梵寿经》所说:“乔达摩尊者,身如尼拘律树般圆满:其身如何,臂展即如何;臂展如何,其身即如何。”显示巴利原文
Nigrodhabimboti nigrodharukkhassa parimaṇḍalo viya parimaṇḍalasarīro. Adhobhāgaṃ rundhatīti nigrodho, vaṭarukkho. Nipubbarudhadhātu āvaraṇe ṇa, usso gāgamo. Vamati uggiratīti bimbo, sarīro. Vamudhātu uggiraṇe bo. Vamissa vassa bittaṃ. Nigrodhassa parimaṇḍalo viya parimaṇḍalo bimbo sarīro yassāti nigrodhabimbo, buddho. Nigrodhaparimaṇḍalabimboti vattabbe parimaṇḍalasaddalope nevaṃ vuttaṃ. Yathā hi paṇṇāsahatthatāya vā satahatthatāya vā samakkhandhasākho nigrodho dīghatopi vitthāratopi ekappamāṇova hoti, evaṃ kāyatopi byāmatopi ekappamāṇo. Yathā aññesaṃ kāyo vā dīgho hoti, byāmo vā na evaṃ visamappamāṇoti attho. Vuttañhi brahmāyusutte ‘‘nigrodhaparimaṇḍalo kho pana bhavaṃ gotamo. Yāvatakvāssa kāyo, tāva takvāssa byāmo. Yāvatakvāssa byāmo, tāva takvāssa kāyo’’ti.
“柔软手足”:即手足柔嫩。这里的“柔软”一词,是表示柔嫩、细滑的非派生词根词。或者,“柔软”(mudu)意为令众生喜悦,指手足柔嫩。“mud”字根有喜悦或欢笑之义,加后缀“u”。手能作种种业,故名“作”(karo),即手;足能行走、前往各处,故名“行”(caraṇo),即足。“car”字根有行走义,加后缀“yu”。具足柔软的手与柔软的足,故称“柔软手足”,指世尊。其义为:如同在熟酥中浸润、又经百回弹打的棉絮,又如初生婴孩,世尊的手足恒常如此柔软。显示巴利原文
Mudukaracaraṇoti saṇhahatthapādo. Ettha ca mudusaddo saṇhasukhumavācako anipphannapāṭipadiko. Atha vā mudeti modayati satteti mudu, saṇhahatthapādo. Mudadhātu modane hāse vā u. Taṃ taṃ kammaṃ karoti etenāti karo, hattho carati gacchati etena taṃ taṃ ṭhānanti caraṇo, pādo. Caradhātu gatiyaṃ yu. Mudukaro ca caraṇo ca yassāti mudukaracaraṇo, buddho. Sappi maṇḍe osāritvā ṭhapitaṃ satavāraṃ vihatakappāsapaṭalaṃ viya mudujātamattakumārassa viya ca niccakālaṃ muduhattha pādoti attho.
“梵音如羚羊胫”:应作“梵音”、“如羚羊胫”二词来理解。所谓“梵音”,是指如梵天之声,具足八支的妙音。因禅定等功德而增长广大,故名为“梵”(brahmā)。“bṛh”字根加“man”后缀。被宣告、被听闻、被讲述,故称“音声”(ghoso),即声音。“ghus”字根有发声义,加后缀“ṇa”。梵天之声就是梵音,具有这般音声者便称为“梵音”,指世尊。正如大梵天因不被胆汁、痰涎所障碍,其音声清净;同样,如来所行清净之业净化了所依身,所依清净故,从脐部生起的音声便清澈,具足八支。因此,这是赞叹世尊拥有如同梵音般具足八支的妙音。显示巴利原文
Brahmaghoseṇijaṅghoti brahmaghoso eṇijaṅghoti padacchedo. Brahmaghosoti brahmuno saro viya aṭṭhaṅga sampannasaravantoti attho. Jhānādiguṇehi brūhati vaḍḍhatītibrahmā. Brūhadhātu manipaccayo. Ghusiyati saddiyati kathiyatīti ghoso, saro. Ghusadhātu sadde ṇa. Brahmuno ghoso saro brahmaghoso, so viya ghoso saro yassāti brahmaghoso, buddho. Yathā hi mahābrahmuno pittasemhehi apalibuddhattā saro visuddho hoti, evameva tathāgatenapi kataṃ kammaṃ vatthuṃ sodheti, vatthussa suddhattā nābhito paṭṭhāya samuṭṭhahanto saro visuddho aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgatoti attho. Tasmā brahmaghoso viya aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgatasaravantoti thometi.
「如羚羊胫」:即如羚羊之胫,膝部匀称圆满。能行走者,名为「羚羊」,即鹿。「i」词根有行走之义,加后缀「ṇi」。依之而行者,名为「胫」,即膝。「jan」词根有生起之义,加后缀「gho」,「n」变为随韵。具有如羚羊胫者,称为「如羚羊胫」,指佛陀。正如羚羊之胫是匀称的,佛陀的胫部也因肌肉丰满而圆润,绝非某处有结块之肉。其义为:具足由周围均称之肉所覆盖、圆润如稻粒、麦粒般的胫部。因此,赞叹其膝部圆润如羚羊胫。显示巴利原文
Eṇijaṅghoti eṇimigassa jaṅghā viya suvaṭṭajāṇuko. Eti gacchatīti eṇi, migo. Idhātu gatiyaṃ ṇi. Jāyati kamanametāyāti jaṅgho, jāṇu. Janadhātu janane gho. Nassa niggahitādeso. Eṇimigassa jaṅgho viya jaṅgho yassa soti eṇijaṅgho, buddho. Yathā hi eṇimigassa jaṅgho suvaṭṭo hoti, evameva buddhassa maṃsussadena paripuṇṇajaṅgho. Na ekato bandhapiṇḍikamaṃso. Samantato samasaṇṭhitena maṃsena parikkhittāhi suvaṭṭitāhi sāli gabbhayavagabbhasadisāhi jaṅghāhi samannāgatoti attho. Tasmā eṇimigajaṅghasadiso suvaṭṭajāṇukoti thometi.
「阴藏如鞘」:应作「阴藏如鞘」分词。其义为:如公牛、大象等之阴部,具足以如金莲花蕊般之包皮所覆藏的隐秘阴部。「kus」词根有住立之义,加后缀「ṇa」,意为安住之处,故称「鞘」。被覆藏者,称为「覆」。「chad」词根有覆藏之义,加后缀「ṇa」。为鞘所覆,称为「鞘覆」。生于身体肢节者,称为「阴」。具足以鞘覆盖之阴相者,称为「阴藏如鞘」,指佛陀。世尊确实如公牛、大象等,具足如金莲花蕊般藏于鞘内的隐秘之相。因此,赞叹其具足阴藏如鞘之相。又,「punarapi」应作「puna api」分词,插入「r」音。「puna」是表示不同义理的不变词。「api」是合集之义。「善逝」即佛陀。他因善行而到达涅槃,故称「善逝」。显示巴利原文
Kosacchādaṅgajātoti kosacchādaaṅgajātoti padacchedo. Usabhavāraṇādīnaṃ aṅgajāto viya suvaṇṇapaduma kaṇṇikasadisena vatthakosena paṭicchannena guyhaṅgajātena samannāgatoti attho. Kusati tiṭṭhati etthāti koso. Kusadhātu gatiyaṃ ṇa. Chādiyatīti chādo. Chadadhātu paṭicchanne ṇa. Kosena chādo kosacchādo. Aṅge sarīrāvayave jātanti aṅgajātaṃ. Kosacchādaṃ aṅgajātaṃ byañjanaṃ yassāti kosacchādaṅgajāto, buddho. Bhagavato hi usabhavāraṇādīnaṃ aṅgajāto viya suvaṇṇapadumakaṇṇi kasadisena kosohitavatthaguyhena byañjanena samannāgatoti attho. Tasmā kosacchādaṅgajātasampannoti thometi. Punarapīti puna apīti padacchedo. Rakārā gamo . Punāti eso atthantaratthe nipāto. Apisaddo sampiṇḍanattho. Sugatoti buddho. So hi sundaraṃ nibbānaṃ gacchatīti sugatoti vuccati.
「足善安立」:即如金拖鞋底般,足掌平正、善巧地安立于地上。平正、善巧地安立于地者,称为「善安立」,即足。「su」与「pati」为前缀,「ṭhā」词根有住立、回转之义,加后缀「ta」。依之而行者,称为「足」。「pad」词根有行走之义,加后缀「ṇa」。具足善安立之足者,称为「足善安立」,指善逝。不同于他人置足于地时,或足尖、或足跟、或足侧先触地,或足弓留有虚空;举足时,亦仅足尖等某一部分先离地。而如来则不然,其足如金拖鞋底般,整个足掌同时触地,同时离地。即使世尊欲跨越数百人身深之地狱而伸足,彼低下之处即如风箱充气般隆起,与地平齐;高耸之处亦向内凹陷。若欲跨越远处而伸足,即使如山王须弥,亦如蒸软之竹笋般弯曲,来至足前。如是,世尊示现双神变后,欲跨越持双山而伸足时,山即弯曲,来至足前。他踏彼山,以第二足登入三十三天。确实,具足千辐轮相所立之处,无不平坦。木桩、荆棘、瓦砾、碎石、粪便、尿液、唾液、鼻涕等,皆预先消失,或就地陷没。因如来戒德之力、智慧之力,大地如是调节自身。显示巴利原文
Suppatiṭṭhitapādoti suvaṇṇapādukatalamiva bhūmiyaṃ samaṃ suṭṭhu patiṭṭhitapādo. Samaṃ suṭṭhu bhūmiyaṃ patiṭṭhatīti suppatiṭṭhito, pādo. Su pati pubbo ṭhā dhātu gatinivattiyaṃ ta. Pajjati gacchati etenāti pādo. Padadhātu gatimhi ṇa. Suppatiṭṭhito pādo yassāti suppatiṭṭhitapādo, sugato. Yathā hi aññesaṃ bhūmiyaṃ pādaṃ ṭhapentānaṃ aggatalaṃ vā paṇhiṃ vā passaṃ vā paṭhamaṃ phusati vemajjhaṃ vā pana chiddaṃ hoti, ukkhipantānampi aggatalādīsu ekakoṭṭhāsova paṭhamaṃ uṭṭhahati, na evaṃ tassa. Tassa pana suvaṇṇapādukatalaṃ viya ekappahāreneva sakalapādatalaṃ bhūmiṃ phusati, bhūmito uṭṭhahati. Sacepi hi bhagavā anekasataporisaṃ narakaṃ akkamissāmīti pādaṃ nīharati, tāvadeva ninnaṭṭhānaṃ vātapūritaṃ viya kammārabhastaṃ unnamitvā pathavīsamaṃ hoti, unnataṭṭhānampi anto pavisati, dūre akkamissāmīti abhinīharantassa sineruppamāṇopi pabbato seditavetthaṅkuro viya namitvā pādasamīpaṃ āgacchati. Tathā hissa yamakapāṭihāriyaṃ katvā yugandharapabbataṃ akkamissāmīti pāde abhinīharato pabbato namitvā pādasamīpaṃ āgato. So taṃ akkamitvā dutiyapādena tāvatiṃsabhavanaṃ akkami. Na hi cakkalakkhaṇena patiṭṭhātabbaṭṭhānaṃ visamaṃ bhavituṃ sakkoti. Khāṇu vā kaṇḍako vā sakkharakathalā vā uccārapassāvo vā kheḷasiṅghaṇikādīni vā purimatarāva apagacchanti. Tattha tattheva pathaviṃ pavisanti. Tathāgatassa hi sīlatejena paññātejena dhammatejena dasannaṃ pāramīnaṃ ānubhāvena ayaṃ mahāpathavī samā mudu pupphākiṇṇā honti. Tatra tathāgato samaṃ pādaṃ nikkhipati. Samaṃ uddharati, sabbāvantehi pādatalehi bhūmiṃ phusati, tasmā suppatiṭṭhitapādoti thometi.
「柔软洁白毫毛」:应拆解为「柔软」「洁白」「毫毛」。其义为:生于眉间,具足柔嫩、细滑、白色、清净之毫毛。此处「柔软」一词是表示柔嫩、细滑的非派生词根。或者,「柔软」意为令众生喜悦,即细滑。字根「mud」有喜悦义,加后缀「a」。被截断、被洗净者,称为「洁白」(odāta)。「ava」前缀加字根「dā」有截断义,加后缀「ta」。又,被洗净、清净者,称为「洁白」,如说「清净」(vodāna)。柔软且洁白,故称「柔软洁白」。向上生长者,称为「毫」(uṇṇā),即毛。诸师说:世间「毫」是「毛」的同义词。其义为:生于肉上。字根「uṇ」有行走义,加后缀「ṇa」。能割截肉与皮者,称为「毛」(lomo)。字根「lu」有割截义,加「man」后缀。或者,应被割截者,称为「毛」。毫与毛合称「毫毛」,即一种特殊的毛。具足柔软、洁白、毫毛者,称为「柔软洁白毫毛」,指善逝。世尊之白毫生于两眉之间、鼻端之上,长出后位于额间。其柔软如浸润熟酥后放置的、经过百显示巴利原文
Mūdo dātuṇṇalomoti muda odāta uṇṇalomoti padacchedo. Bhamukantare jāto saṇhasukhumo seto suddho uṇṇalomavantoti attho. Ettha ca mudasaddo saṇhasukhumavācako anipphannapāṭipadiko. Atha vā mudeti mudayati satteti mudo, sukhumo. Mudadhātu modane a. Avadāyati khaṇḍiyatīti odāto. Avapubba dādhātu avakhaṇḍane ta. Atha vā avadāyati sujjhatīti odāto, yathā vodānanti. Mudo ca odāto ca mudodāto, uṇati uddhaṃ gacchatīti uṇṇā, lomo. Uṇṇasaddo hi loke lomasaddapariyāyoti vadanti ācariyā. Maṃsassa upari pavattatīti attho. Uṇadhātu gatiyaṃ ṇa. Maṃsacammāni lunāti chindatīti lomo. Ludhātu chindane manipaccayo. Lunitabboti vā lomo, uṇṇā ca sā lomo cāti uṇṇalomo, lomaviseso. Mudo dāto uṇṇalomo yassa soti mudodātuṇṇa lomo, sugato. Uṇṇālomaṃ pana bhagavato dvinnaṃ bhamukānaṃ vemajjhe nāsimatthakeyeva jātaṃ. Uggantvā pana nalāṭamajjhe jātaṃ. Sappimaṇḍe osāretvā ṭhapitasata vitatakappāsapaṭalaṃ viya mudaṃ. Parisuddhaosadhitārakavaṇṇaṃ viya ca sippalitūlalatātūlaṃ viya ca vigatamalena odātaṃ uṇṇālomaṃ atthi, na aññesanti attho. Vuttañhetaṃ brahmāyusutte –
「尊者乔达摩眉间生有白毫,洁白柔软,如木棉絮。」显示巴利原文
‘‘Uṇṇā kho panassa bhoto gotamassa bhamukantare jātā odātā mudu tūlasannibhā’’ti.
若执其端而牵引,则长达半臂;若放开,则右旋卷起,尖端向上安立。犹如置于金板中央的银泡,又如从金瓶流出的乳流,亦如朝霞辉映的苍穹中的太白金星,闪耀着令人陶醉的祥光。因此,称叹为「柔软洁白毫毛」。显示巴利原文
Taṃ panetaṃ koṭiyaṃ gahetvā ākaḍḍhiyamānaṃ upaḍḍha bāhuppamāṇaṃ hoti. Vissaṭṭhaṃ dakkhiṇāvaṭṭavasena āvaṭṭitvā uddhaggā hutvā santiṭṭhati. Suvaṇṇaphalakamajjhe ṭhapitarajata pupphuḷakaṃ viya, suvaṇṇaghaṭato nikkhammamānaṃ khīradhāraṃ viya aruṇappabhārañjite gaganatale osadhitārakaṃ viya ca atimanoharāya siriyā virocati, tasmā mūdodātuṇṇalomoti thometi.
“Athamapīti”意为此外亦然。“Sugato”即佛陀,因宣说善妙之语,故称善逝。“Brahmujuggattabhāvo”可拆解为“Brahmuno uju uggataattabhāvo”(如梵天般正直而起的自体),其义为:犹如梵天自体正直而起,此(佛陀)自体亦正直而起,是为长身。然而,在《梵寿经》中读作“brahmujugatto”,其注疏释“brahmujugatto”为“如梵天般正直而起,即正直而起的长身”。正是考虑到这一点,才说“brahmujuggattabhāvo”(如梵天般正直而起的自体性)。显示巴利原文
Athamapīti tadaññaṃ api. Sugatoti buddho. So hi sundaravācaṃ gadati vadatīti sugatoti vuccati. Brahmujuggattabhāvoti brahmaujuuggataattabhāvoti padavibhāgo. Brahmuno uju uggataattabhāvo viya ujumeva uggataattabhāvo dīghasarīroti attho. Brahmāyusutte pana ‘‘brahmujugatto’’tipāṭho. Tadaṭṭhakathāyañca brahmujugattoti brahmā viya ujugatto ujumeva uggatadīghasarīroti vivarati. Taṃ pana sandhāya brahmujuggattabhāvoti vuttaṃ.
此处所说的字义如下:因禅那等功德而向上增长、广大,故为“梵”。以无弯曲的状态运作,故为“正直”。向上而行、到达,故为“起”。“我安立于此”——即“我”与“我所”之安立处,故为“自体”,即身体。或者,因感受苦乐,故为“自体”。《迦旃延语法》中说:“受用苦乐,故为自体;或被生老死等所受用,故为自体,即ātumā。”词之成立当依经文了知。由于“自体”之名及智依此而生起,故为“自体性”,即色身。而复注中云:“此处有我所安立之我,其自身即存在、生起,并非如他人所施设的常我,故为自体性;或以邪见者所执取的方式存在、运作,故为自体性。”其自体如梵天般正直而起,即正直而起的自体,故说“如梵天般正直而起的自体性”,此即是善逝。何以故?大多数众生的身体在腰、膝、背三处弯曲:少许腰弯者向后弯,其余两处则向前弯。有些长身者身形弯曲,有些如仰面观星般行走,有些血少肉薄者身形如针,摇摆而行。然而如来正直而起,长身巍巍,犹如天城中耸立的金门,故以“如梵天般正直而起的自体性”来称叹。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ panettha vacanattho. Jhānādiguṇehi uparūparibrūhati vaḍḍhatīti brahmā. Brūhadhātu vaḍḍhane ma, arati avaṅkabhāvena pavattatīti uju, avaṅko. Aradhātu gatiyaṃ jupaccayo. Arissa uādeso. Uddhaṃ gacchati pāpuṇātīti uggato. Upubba gamudhātu gatiyaṃ to. Āhito āropito ahaṃ māno etthāti attā, sarīro. Āpubba dhā dhātu ropane manipaccayo tupaccayo vā. Dhassa to. Massa to. Atha vā sukhadukkhaṃ adati anubhavatīti attā. Adadhātu anubhavane manipaccayo. Kaccāyanasaddasatthe pana ‘‘sukhadukkhaṃ adati bhakkhatīti attā, jātijarāmaraṇādīhi adiyate bhakkhiyateti vā attā. Ātumā’’ti vuttaṃ. Khyādīhi manimaca tovāti suttena padasiddhi veditabbā. Attāti abhidhānaṃ buddhi ca bhavanti etasmāti attabhāvo, rūpakāyo. Anuṭīkāyaṃ pana ‘‘āhito ahaṃ māno etthāti attā, soeva bhavati uppajjati na paraparikappito viya niccoti attabhāvo. Attāti vā diṭṭhigatikehi gahetabbākārena bhavati pavattatīti attabhāvo’’ti vuttaṃ . Brahmuno ujumeva uggato attabhāvo viya ujumeva uggato attabhāvo yassa soti brahmujuggattabhāvo, sugato. Yebhuyyena hi sattā khandhe kaṭiyaṃ jāṇusūti tīsu ṭhānesu namanti. Thokaṃ kaṭiyaṃ namantā pacchato namanti. Itaresu dvīsu ṭhānesu purato. Dīghasarīrā paneke passā vaṅkā honti, eke mukhaṃ unnametvā nakkhattāni gaṇayantā viya caranti, eke appamaṃsalohitā sūlasadisā honti, pavedhamānā gacchanti, tathāgato pana ujumeva uggantvā dīghappamāṇo devanagare ussitasuvaṇṇa toraṇaṃ viya hoti. Tasmā brahmujuggattabhāvoti thometi.
“Nīlakkhī”即“nīlaakkhī”的分解,意为:具有极青之眼。依此能见色,无论是均等或不均等的色,故为“眼”。“青”即“极青”,具此青眼者,即为“青眼”,此指善逝。因为世尊的眼并非通体青色:在应现青色之处,其眼具有如青睡莲般极其纯净的青色;应现黄色之处,则如黄迦尼迦花般为黄色;应现红色之处,则如红频婆花般为红色;应现白色之处,则如药星般为白色;应现黑色之处,则如蓝琉璃般为黑色。犹如金殿中张开的摩尼狮网一般显现。因为《大义释》中说:“世尊肉眼具五色——青色、黄色、红色、黑色、白色,以及世尊的眼毛安立之处——睫毛。其中,那青色极其青,明净可观,犹如青睡莲;其外的黄色极其黄,宛如金色,明净可观,犹如黄迦尼迦花;世尊双眼两端的红色极其红,明净可观,犹如红蚯蚓;中央的黑色极其黑,无翳纯净,明净可观,犹如蓝琉璃;其外的白色极其白,洁白明净,明净可观,犹如药星。”而世尊即以这具足四支的肉眼,即便在黑暗中,也能周遍地看见一由旬之远,无论昼夜。显示巴利原文
Nīlakkhīti nīlaakkhīti padacchedo. Atinīlanettena samannāgatoti attho. Ikkhati passati anena rūpārammaṇaṃ samavisamaṃ vāti akkhi, nettaṃ. Ikkhadhātu dassane i. Issa attaṃ. Nīlā atinīlā akkhi nettā yassāti nīlakkhi, sugato. Bhagavato hi na sakalanīlakkhiva hoti. Nīlayuttaṭṭhāne panassa ummārapupphasadisena ativisuddhena nīlavaṇṇena samannāgatāni akkhīni honti. Pītayuttaṭṭhāne kaṇikārapupphasadisena lohitavaṇṇena. Lohitayuttaṭṭhāne bandhujīvakapupphasadisena lohitavaṇṇena. Seta yuttaṭṭhāne osadhitārakasadisena setavaṇṇena. Kāḷa yuttaṭṭhāne addāriṭṭhakasadisena kāḷavaṇṇena samannāgatāni suvaṇṇavimāne ugghāṭitamaṇisīhapañjarasadisāni khāyanti. Vuttañhi mahāniddese ‘‘maṃsacakkhumhi bhagavato pañcavaṇṇā saṃvijjanti. Nīlo ca vaṇṇo, pītako ca vaṇṇo, lohitako ca vaṇṇo, kaṇho ca vaṇṇo, odāto ca vaṇṇo akkhilomāni ca bhagavato, yattha ca akkhi lomāni patiṭṭhitāni. Taṃ nīlaṃ hoti sunīlaṃ pāsādikaṃ dassaneyyaṃ ummārapupphasamānaṃ. Tassa parato pītakaṃ hoti supītakaṃ suvaṇṇavaṇṇaṃ pāsādikaṃ dassaneyyaṃ kaṇikārapupphasamānaṃ. Ubhato akkhikuṭāni bhagavato lohitakāni honti sulohikāni pāsādikāni dassaneyyāni indagopakasamānāni. Majjhe kaṇhaṃ hoti sukaṇhaṃ alūkhaṃ suddhaṃ pāsādikaṃ dassaneyyaṃ addāriṭṭhaka samānaṃ. Tassa parato odātaṃ hoti suodātaṃ setaṃ paṇḍaraṃ pāsādikaṃ dassaneyyaṃ osadhitārakasamāna’’nti. Bhagavā pana tena maṃsacakkhunā caturaṅgasamannāgate andhakārepi samantā yojanaṃ passati divā ceva rattiñca.
如《大义释》中说——显示巴利原文
Vuttañhi mahāniddese –
世尊以过去善业所生、属于自身的自然肉眼,昼夜皆能遍见一由旬。纵使在日已落、黑分布萨、密林深邃、大黑云涌起这四种条件具足的黑暗中,亦能周遍见一由旬。墙壁、门、城墙、山、林、藤蔓等,皆不能障碍见色。因此,依此特征,赞为“青眼”。显示巴利原文
‘‘Tena bhagavā pākatikena maṃsacakkhunā attabhāva pariyāpannena purimasucaritakammābhinibbattena samantā yojanaṃ passati divā ceva rattiñca. Yadāpi caturaṅgasamannāgato andhakāro hoti, sūriyo ca atthaṅgamito hoti, kāḷapakkho ca uposatho hoti, tibbo ca vanasaṇḍo hoti, mahā ca kāḷamegho abbhuṭṭhito hoti, evarūpepi caturaṅgasamannāgate andhakāre samantā yojanaṃ passati. Natthi so kuṭṭo vā kavāṭaṃ vā pākāro vā pabbato vā gaccho vā latā vā āvaraṇaṃ rūpānaṃ dassanāyā’’ti. Tasmā upalakkhaṇanayena nīlakkhīti thometi.
“Dīghapaṇhī”即长足跟,意为圆满的足跟。所谓“足跟”,因其能压制、阻碍他人,故指足的后部。在《目犍连文法》中说:“paṇa有交易、称赞之义,被称量、交易者即足跟,为足的后部。”具有长足跟者,称为“长足跟”,此即善逝。因为他人是前足跟长,小腿立于足跟顶端,犹如截断足跟后安上一般。但如来不然。如来的脚分为四部分,其中两部分为前足跟,第三部分安立小腿,第四部分则如红毯上滚动的球,足跟宛如指尖旋转而安立。因此,赞为“长足跟”。显示巴利原文
Dīghapaṇhīti āyatapaṇhi. Paripuṇṇapaṇhīti attho. Pasati bādhati anena paresanti paṇhi, pādassa pacchābhāgo. Pasadhātu bādhane ṇi. Sassa ho. Ṇvādimoggallāne pana ‘‘paṇa byavahārathutīsu hi paṇiyati vohāriyatīti paṇhi, pādassa pacchābhāgo’’ti vuttaṃ. Dīghā paṇhi yassa soti dīghapaṇhi, sugato. Yathā hi aññesaṃ agga pādo dīgho hoti. Paṇhimatthake jaṅghā patiṭṭhāti paṇhiṃ tacchetvā ṭhapitā viya hoti. Na evaṃ tathāgatassa. Tathāgatassa pana catūsu koṭṭhāsesu dve koṭṭhāsā aggapādā honti. Tatiye koṭṭhāse jaṅghā patiṭṭhāti. Catutthe koṭṭhāse āraggena vaṭṭetvā ṭhapitā viya rattakambale geṇḍukasadisā paṇhi hoti. Tasmā dīghapaṇhīti thometi.
“Sukhumamalachavī”分解为“sukhuma amala chavī”,义即细薄、无垢的皮肤,或细薄、离垢的皮肤。其中,“sukhuma”一词表示细薄,是没有词根生起的词;或者理解为“以细薄性令人悦意”,故称细薄。“垢”指染污等垢,因其附着、染污具垢之人,故称为垢。无有此垢,则为无垢,即皮肤。“覆盖肌肉”,故为皮肤。具有细薄、无垢、离垢皮肤的人,即是“细薄无垢皮肤”,此处指善逝。因为世尊色身如金般细滑,肤色如金,所以尘垢或污秽不会粘着,犹如莲叶上的水珠。正如《中部·梵寿经》中所说:显示巴利原文
Sukhumamalachavīti sukhuma amala chavīti padacchedo. Saṇhamalavisuddhataco saṇhamalavirahitataco vāti attho. Ettha ca sukhumasaddo saṇhavācako anipphannapāṭipadiko. Atha vā sukhayati saṇhabhāvenāti sukhumaṃ, saṇhaṃ. Sukhadhātu takkariyaṃ umapaccayo. Taṃsamaṅgīpuggalaṃ kiliṭṭhaṃ malati dhāretīti malaṃ, rajādimalaṃ. Maladhātu dhāraṇe a, natthi malametissāti amalā, chavī. Maṃsaṃ chādetīti chavī. Chada dhātu saṃvaraṇe ravapaccayo īpaccayo ca. Sukhumā saṇhā amalā malavirahitā chavī yassāti sukhumamalachavī, sugato. Bhagavato hi suvaṇṇasiniddhasaṇhasarīrattā kañcanasannibha tacattā ca rūpakāye padumapalāse udakabindhu viya rajojallaṃ vā malaṃ vā na limpati. Vuttañhi majjhimapaṇṇāse brahmāyusutte –
“然而,乔达摩尊者的皮肤细薄,因皮肤细薄,尘垢不粘着于身。”因此,赞叹为“细薄无垢皮肤”。显示巴利原文
‘‘Sukhumacchavī kho pana bhavaṃ gotamo sukhumattā chaviyā rajojallaṃ kāye na upalimpatī’’ti. Tasmā sukhuma malachavīti thometi.
“Thomyarasaggasaggī”一词,应分解为“thomyarasa gasa aggī”。其含义是:应被赞叹的、摄取味的七千条筋腱,向上竖立。“应被赞叹”故为“thomyo”,即筋腱,“thoma”词根用于赞叹义,加“ṇya”后缀。“rasaggasā”指那些吞纳甜等诸味的筋腱,“rasa”字加上“gasa”词根(进食义),加“a”后缀。或者,“rasaggasā”意为“通过这些,味被吞下、被带走”,“gasa”词根用于带走义,加“a”后缀——因为“dhātu”(词根)一词多义。“rasaggasānaṃ aggā”故为“rasaggasaggā”;它们存在于此,故为“rasaggasaggī”,即筋腱,此处“ī”后缀表“存在于此”义。拥有“thomyo”与“rasaggasaggī”者,即为“thomyarasaggasaggī”,指善逝。因为如来有七千条取味的筋腱,向上竖立,系于颈部。即使仅如芝麻大小的食物置于舌端,也能遍润全身。正因如此,当行大精进时,显示巴利原文
Thomyarasaggasaggīti thomyarasa gasa aggīti padacchedo. Thomitabba rasaharaṇasattasahassanhārū uddhaggikāti attho. Thomiyatīti thomyo, nhāru. Thomadhātu sīlāghāyaṃ ṇyo. Madhurādibhedaṃ rasaṃ gasenti anto pavesentīti rasaggasā, nhāru. Rasasaddūpapadagasadhātu adane a. Atha vā rasaṃ gasati harati etehīti rasaggasā , nhāru. Gasadhātu haraṇe a. Dhātusaddo hi anekattho. Rasaggasānaṃ aggāti rasaggasaggā, te ettha santīti rasaggasaggī, nhāru. Assathyatthe īpaccayo. Thomyo rasaggasaggī yassa soti thomyarasaggasaggī, sugato. Tathāgatassa hi sattarasaharaṇisahassāni uddhaggāni hutvā gīvāyameva paṭimukkāni. Tilaphalamattopi āhāro jivhagge ṭhapito sabbaṃ kāyaṃ anupharati. Teneva mahāpadhānaṃ padahantassa ekataṇḍulādīhipi kaḷāyayūsapasatenapi kāyassa yāpanaṃ hoti. Aññesaṃ pana tathā abhāvā na sakalakāyaṃ ojā pharati. Tena te bahvābādhā honti. Idaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ appābādhatāsaṅkhātassa nissandaphalassavasena pākaṭaṃ hoti, tasmā thomyarasaggasaggīti thometi.
24 在第二十四首偈中,“jino”(胜者)指已战胜五魔的佛陀。该词与“samacattālīsaggadanto”等词,因性别相同而关联。“cattālīsaggadanto”应分拆为“cattālīsa aggadanto”。其含义是:具足四十颗整齐、最上之牙。此处“agga”表“最上”义,为不变词干。或者,“aggo”意为它趋向、达到最上状态;“danto”意为它用食物咬、嚼。“√daṃsa”(咬)词根加后缀“ta”,“n”和词根末音脱落。拥有四十颗整齐、最上之牙者,称为“cattālīsaggadanto”,即胜者。其意思是:上颚所生之牙二十颗,下颚二十颗,如此共有四十颗整齐的牙齿。其他人即使牙齿齐全,也只有三十二颗;而来至如来者则有四十颗。因此,以“cattālīsaggadanto”作赞叹。显示巴利原文
24. Dutiyagāthāyaṃ jinoti pañcamārajitavā buddho. Tassa pana padassa samacattālīsaggadantotyādīhi padehi tulyaliṅgattabhāvena sambandho. Cattālīsaggadantoti cattālīsaaggadantoti padacchedo. Samacattālīsa uttamadantoti attho. Ettha ca aggasaddo uttamavācako anipphannapāṭipadiko. Atha vā uttamabhāvaṃ ajati gacchatīti aggo, danto. Daṃsati vidaṃsati bhojjamanenāti danto. Daṃsadhātu daṃsane ta. Tassa nto dhātvantalopo. Samacattālīsaṃ aggo uttamo danto yassāti cattālīsaggadanto, jino. Uparimahanuke patiṭṭhitā dantā vīsati heṭṭhime vīsatīti samacattālīsadantā hontīti attho. Aññesañhi paripuṇṇadantānampi dvattiṃsadantā honti. Tathā gatassa pana cattālīsaṃ. Tasmā cattālīsaggadantoti thometi.
“Samakalapanajo”意为:牙齿如同用锯锯断后安放一般整齐。“lapanaṃ”(口)意为凭借它来说话。“√lapa”(说)词根加“yu”后缀。生于彼口(lapane)中者,为“lapanajo”,即牙齿。这是依主释复合词。拥有整齐之“lapanajo”(牙齿)者,为“samakalapanajo”,即胜者。巴利原文中,有读作“samadanto”的,含义相同。其他人的牙齿,或高或低,参差不齐;而如来的牙齿,则如同用铁板裁切的贝壳片般齐整。因此,以“samakalapanajo”作赞叹。显示巴利原文
Samakalapanajoti kakacena chinditvā ṭhapito viya samadantoti attho. Lapati vadati etenāti lapanaṃ, mukhaṃ. Lapadhātu vadane yu. Tasmiṃ lapane mukhe jātoti lapanajo, danto. Tappurisasamāsoyaṃ, samako lapanajo danto yassāti samakalapanajo, jino. Pāḷiyaṃ pana ‘‘samadanto’’ti pāṭho atthi. Ayamevattho. Aññesañhi keci dantā uccā, keci nīcāti visamā honti. Tathāgatassa pana ayapaṭṭachinnasaṅkhapaṭalaṃ viya samā honti. Tasmā samakalapanajoti thometi.
“Antaraṃsappapīno”应分拆为“antara aṃsa pīno”。为护持韵律、顺应偈颂结构,而加上了前缀,如此表述。其含义是:在两肩、两肩胛之间,即正中央,背部丰满圆满。此处“aṃsa”一词指肩胛。正如《阿毗达那灯论》所说:“aṃso”指肩头,“khandho”指其连接处的“jattu”。显示巴利原文
Antaraṃsappapīnoti antaraaṃsapīnoti padavibhāgo. Gāthābandhavasena chandānurakkhaṇatthaṃ pakārāgamaṃ katvā evaṃ vuttaṃ. Dvinnaṃ aṃsānaṃ khandhānaṃ antaraṃ vemajjhe paripuṇṇapiṭṭhitaloti attho. Ettha ca aṃsasaddo khandhatthe vattati. Vuttañhetaṃ abhidhānappadīpikāyaṃ ‘‘aṃso nitthi bhujasiro, khandho tassandhi jattu ta’’nti.
“aṃso”(肩)意为“以此呼吸、存活”——由词根“ana”(呼吸)加后缀“sa”构成,“na”变为随韵。或者,作为身体的一部分,“aṃso”意为“它进行、运作”。“antaraṃso”指两肩、两肩胛之间,即正中央。“pīno”(丰满)指背部,意为“它充满、圆满”——由词根“piṇa”(充满、圆满)加后缀“ṇa”构成,“ṇa”变为“na”。在两肩、两肩胛之间正中央,拥有丰满、圆满的背部者,称为“antaraṃsappapīno”,即指胜者。这是省略后词的宽主格复合词。其他人的那个部位凹陷,两片肩胛骨各自显现。而如来的背部,从腰部开始,肉膜向上隆起直至肩部,如同竖立的金板一般覆盖而住立。因此,以“antaraṃsappapīno”来赞叹。在巴利原文中,另有“citantaraṃso”的读法,其注释书说:“‘citantaraṃso’指两骨之间,即‘antaraṃsa’,他的这一部位圆满,故称为‘antaraṃso’。”显示巴利原文
Anati jīvati etenāti aṃso, khandho. Anadhātu pāṇe sopaccayo. Nassa niggahitādeso. Sarīrassa avayavabhāvena anati gacchati pavattatīti vā aṃso, dvinnaṃ aṃsānaṃ khandhānaṃ antaraṃ vemajjhanti antaraṃso, piṇati pūratīti pīno, piṭṭhitalaṃ. Piṇadhātu pinane pūraṇe vā ṇa. Ṇassa no. Dvinnaṃ aṃsānaṃ khandhānaṃ antaraṃ vemajjhe pīnaṃ paripuṇṇaṃ piṭṭhitalaṃ yassāti antaraṃsappapīno, jino. Uttarapadalopabahubbīhisamāsoyaṃ. Aññesañhi taṃ ṭhānaṃ ninnaṃ hoti, dve piṭṭhikoṭṭā pāṭiekkaṃ paññāyanti. Tathāgatassa pana kaṭito paṭṭhāya maṃsapaṭalaṃ yāva khandhā uggamma samussitasuvaṇṇaphalakaṃ viya piṭṭhiṃ chādetvā patiṭṭhitaṃ. Tasmā antaraṃsappapīnoti thometi. Pāḷiyaṃ pana ‘‘citantaraṃso’’ti pāṭho. Tadaṭṭhakathāyañca ‘‘citantaraṃ soti antaraṃsaṃ vuccati dvinnaṃ koṭṭānamantaraṃ. Taṃ paripuṇṇa massāti antaraṃso’’ti vuttaṃ.
“Cakkenaṅkitapādo”应分解为“cakkena aṅkitapādo”,含义是:以千辐轮相所标记的足底。“cakkenaṅkitapādo”指胜者,即拥有以千辐轮相所标记、所印刻之足。此为第三格宽主格复合词。其他人的足底没有千辐轮相,而如来的足底则具足美妙绝伦的千辐轮相。因此,以“cakkenaṅkitapādo”来赞叹。显示巴利原文
Cakkenaṅkitapādoti cakkena aṅkitapādoti padacchedo. Aṭṭhasatapādacakkalakkhaṇena lakkhitapādataloti attho. Cakkena aṭṭhasatapādacakkena aṅkito lakkhito pādo yena soti cakkenaṅkitapādo, jino. Tatiyābahubbīhi samāsoyaṃ. Aññesañhi pādatale aṭṭhasatapādacakka lakkhaṇaṃ natthi. Tathāgatassa pādataleeva vicitraṃ aṭṭhasata pādacakkalakkhaṇaṃ atthi. Tasmā cakkenaṅkitapādoti thometi.
正如《梵寿经》中所说:“在尊者乔达摩的足底,确实生有千辐轮相,具足轮辋、轮毂,一切形相圆满。”至于千辐轮相的具体形貌,在“yopādapaṅkajamuduttalarājikehi”这首偈的注释中已经说过了。显示巴利原文
Vuttañhi brahmāyusutte ‘‘heṭṭhā kho pana tassa bhoto gotamassa pādatalesu cakkāni jātāni sahassārāni sanemikāni sanābhikāni sabbākāraparipūrānī’’ti. Aṭṭhasatapādacakkalakkhaṇasarūpaṃ pana yo pādapaṅkajamuduttalarā jikehīti gāthāvaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttamevāti.
“Aviraḷadasano”意为牙齿不稀疏,即具足不稀疏的牙齿。“viraḷo”意为“张开、绽放”,源自词根“vara”(绽放义)加后缀“ḷa”,有“assi”。“aviraḷo”指不稀疏的,或无稀疏的。“dasano”(牙)意为“用以咬、嚼硬食或软食者”,源自词根“daṃsa”(咬)加后缀“yu”,随韵被删除。拥有不稀疏之“dasano”(牙齿)者,即是“aviraḷadasano”,指胜者。其他人的牙齿如鳄鱼的牙齿一般稀疏,在吃鱼肉等时,牙缝会被填满。而如来的牙齿,则如同用金蔓串起的金刚石行列一般不稀疏,又如同用画笔所画的界限一般整齐。因此,以“aviraḷadasano”来赞叹。显示巴利原文
Aviraḷadasanoti avivaradanto. Avivaradantena sampannoti attho. Vivarati phullatīti viraḷo. Varadhātu phullaneḷo. Assi. Na viraḷo aviraḷo, natthi viraḷo etassāti aviraḷo, danto. Daṃsati vidaṃsati khādanīyaṃ vā bhojanīyaṃ vā etenāti dasano, danto. Daṃsadhātu daṃsane yu. Niggahitalopo. Aviraḷo dasano danto yassāti aviraḷadasano, jino. Aññesañhi kumbhilānaṃ viya dantā viraḷā honti. Macchamaṃsādīni khādantānaṃ dantantaraṃ pūrati. Tathāgatassa pana kanakalatāya samussāpitavajira panti viya aviraḷā tulikāya dassitaparicchedā viya dantā honti, tasmā aviraḷadasanoti thometi.
“Mārajussaṅkhapādo”应作“māraji ussaṅkhapādo”这样分词。其中,“mārajī”指战胜五魔的佛陀,是作者。因为他战胜了五魔,故称“mārajī”。“ussaṅkhapādo”的含义是:具足位于足上方的、因似螺贝而得名为“螺贝”的脚踝。“saṅkhe”意为“它善挖掘大地”,是“saṃ”前缀加词根“khanu”(破裂义)加“kvi”后缀。《譬喻注释书》中说:“‘saṅkhe’意为‘善咬、善掘而行’,即‘在海水中游行、行走’。”“saṅkhe”(脚踝)意为“如同螺贝”。“ussaṅkhapādo”指胜者,他拥有在足上方、向上而立的、似螺贝的脚踝。正如《梵寿经注释书》所说:“因为脚踝向上而住立,所以他的足有高踝,故为‘ussaṅkhapādo’。”其他人的脚踝在脚后跟,因此,他们的脚如同被楔子钉住一般,不能随意转动,行走时足底不可见。而如来的脚踝则高高隆起,住立于上方。因此,他的上身从肚脐开始,如同安置在船上的金像一般不动,只有下身移动。他的脚能舒适地转动。显示巴利原文
Mārajussaṅkhapādoti māraji ussaṅkhapādoti padacchedo. Ettha ca mārajīti pañcamārajitavā buddho kattubhūto. So hi pañcamāre jitavāti mārajīti vuccati. Ussaṅkhapādoti pādassa upari ṭhitena saṅkhasadisattā saṅkhanāmikena gopphakena samannāgatoti attho. Saṃsuṭṭhuṃ pathaviṃ khanatīti saṅkhe. Saṃpubbakhanudhātu avadāraṇe kvi. Apadānaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘saṃsuṭṭhuṃ khādanto khaṇanto gacchatīti saṅkhe. Samuddajalapariyante caramāno gacchati caratīti attho’’ti vuttaṃ. Saṅkhe viyāti saṅkhe, gopphako. Pādassa uddhaṃ upari ṭhitaṃ saṅkhasadisaṃ gopphaka massāti ussaṅkhapādo, jino. Vuttañhi brahmāyusuttaṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘uddhaṃ patiṭṭhitagopphakattā ussaṅkhā pādā assāti ussaṅkhapādo’’ti. Aññesañhi piṭṭhipāde gopphakā honti. Tena tesaṃ pādā āṇibaddhā viya baddhā honti. Na yathāsukhaṃ parivattanti. Gacchantānaṃ pādatalāni na dissanti. Tathāgatassa pana abhirūhitvā upari gopphakā patiṭṭhahanti. Tenassa nābhito paṭṭhāya uparimakāyo nāvāya ṭhapita suvaṇṇapaṭimā viya niccalo hoti. Adhokāyova iñjati. Sukhena pādā parivattanti. Puratopi pacchato ubhayapassesupi ṭhatvā passantānaṃ pādatalāni paññāyanti. Na hatthīnaṃ viya pacchatoyevāti. Tasmā ussaṅkhapādoti thometi.
“站立而不弯腰,以双手柔和地触摸膝盖”——此处可作词句分解:“站立”即保持站立,“不弯腰”即不俯身,“以双手柔和地”即以细软的双手,“膝盖”即小腿。因能以此行走来去,故名为“jaṇṇu”(膝),由词根“jan”(生)加“ṇu”。“jaṇṇukā”(膝盖)即指小腿与大腿的连接处。“触摸”即能够抚摩。在此,“站立而不弯腰”彰显了如来无驼背、无侏儒之相。其他人或为驼背,或为侏儒。驼背者上身不圆满,侏儒者下身不圆满。因身体不圆满,故不能在不俯身的情况下抚摩膝盖。而如来由于上下身皆圆满,故能做到,因此以“站立……能触摸膝盖”来称赞。显示巴利原文
Tiṭṭhanto nonamantobhayakaramudunā jaṇṇukānāma santoti ettha tiṭṭhanto no namanto ubhaya karamudunā jaṇṇukāni āmasantoti padavibhāgo. Tiṭṭhantoti ṭhitakova. Nonamantoti anamamāno hutvā. Ubhaya karamudunāti sukhumena hatthadvayena. Jaṇṇukānīti jaṅghāni. Jāyati gamanāgamanaṃ anenāti jaṇṇu, janadhātu janane ṇu. Soeva jaṇṇukā, jaṅghorūnaṃ sandhi labbhati. Tāni. Āmasantoti parimajjituṃ sakkonto. Ettha ca tiṭṭhanto nonamantoti iminā tathāgatassa akhujjaavāmanabhāvo dīpito . Avasesajanā hi khujjā vā honti vāmanā vā. Khujjānaṃ uparimakāyo aparipuṇṇo hoti vāmanānaṃ heṭṭhimakāyo. Te aparipuṇṇakāyattā na sakkonti nonamanto jaṇṇukāni parimajjituṃ. Tathāgato pana paripuṇṇaubhayakāyattā sakkoti, tasmā tiṭṭhanto…pe… jaṇṇukā nāmasantoti thometi.
“圆颈”指如同金柱般圆整的颈部。正如《梵摩喻经》中所说:“圆整之颈”。“圆”谓周圆转动运行,故为“vaṭṭa”(圆),词根“vaṭṭ”(转动)加“a”。“颈”谓以此喉咙吞咽食物,故为“khandha”(颈),词根“khād”(咀嚼、吞咽)加“kvip”后缀。应依“khādāmagamānaṃ khandhandhagandhā”此句来了解词句成就。《阿毗达那注》中说:“‘kaṃ’(头)安置(dadhāti)故为‘kandha’,此即‘khandha’,因将‘ka’变为‘kha’而成。”具有圆整周圆的颈,故为“vaṭṭakkhandha”(圆颈),指胜者。有些人如同鹤、鹭、猪等,颈部或长、或曲、或粗,说话时筋络显现,声音微弱;如来则不然。如来的颈项如同精心旋制而成的金柱,说话时筋络不现,声音洪大,犹如云雷。因此以“圆颈”称赞。显示巴利原文
Vaṭṭakkhandhoti suvaṇṇāliṅgo viya samavaṭṭitagaliko. Vuttañhi brahmāyusutte ‘‘samavaṭṭakkhandho’’ti. Parimaṇḍalā kārena vaṭṭati pavattatīti vaṭṭo, parimaṇḍalo. Vaṭṭadhātu vaṭṭane a. Bhojanaṃ khādati etena galenāti khandho, galo. Khādadhātu khādane bhakkhane vā kvipaccayo. Khādāmagamānaṃ khandhandhagandhāti suttena padasiddhi veditabbā. Abhidhānaṭīkāyaṃ pana ‘‘kaṃ matthakaṃ dadhātīti kandho. Soeva kakārassa khakārakaraṇavasenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Vaṭṭo samaparimaṇḍalo khandho galo yassāti vaṭṭakkhandho, jino. Yathā hi eke koñcā viya bakā viya varāhā viya ca dīghagalā vaṅkagalā puthugalā ca honti. Kathanakāle sirājalaṃ paññāyati. Mando saro nikkhamati, na evaṃ tassa. Tathāgatassa pana suvaṭṭitasuvaṇṇāliṅgasadiso khandho galo hoti. Kathanakāle sirājalaṃ na paññāyati. Meghassa viya gajjato saro mahā hoti. Tasmā vaṭṭakkhandhoti thometi.
再者,“胜者”指佛陀,为作者。此词与“牛犊睫毛”等词因性别一致而相关联。“牛犊睫毛”指如同刚出生片刻的红牛犊的眼眶般极其明净的眼眶,或具足极其明净的眼眶者。此处“睫毛”指整个眼眶。“眼眶”即眼之周边。有人说“眼眶”即眼睑。另有人说是指眼睑叶。然应知眼睑连同眼球。此处词义为:以此覆盖、围绕眼,故为“pakhuma”(睫毛),即睫毛等周边。词根“pat”(围绕)加“uma”,“ta”变为“kha”。或说:生于眼之两翼,故为“pakhuma”(睫毛),即睫毛。以“jāta”义加“uma”。应说“pakkhuma”而省略“ka”音,故说“pakhuma”。“pakhuma”即“pakhumaka”(睫毛)。如同刚出生片刻的红牛犊的睫毛般的睫毛为其所有,故为“gotaruṇapakhumaka”(牛犊睫毛),指胜者。意为:具有如同刚出生片刻的红牛犊睫毛般明净的眼眶。他人眼眶不圆满,如象、鼠、鸦等眼般,眼珠突出或深陷。而如来的双眼如同洗净磨光后放置的宝珠,柔软、滑润、深蓝,为细软睫毛所覆。因此以“牛犊睫毛”来称赞。显示巴利原文
Puna jinoti buddho kattubhūto. Tassa pana padassa gotaruṇapakhumakotyādīhi padehi tulyaliṅgattabhāvena sambandho. Gotaruṇapakhumakoti taṃmuhuttajātaratta vacchassa cakkhubhaṇḍo viya vippasannacakkhubhaṇḍo, vippasannacakkhubhaṇḍena samannāgato vā. Ettha ca pakhumakoti sakalaṃ cakkhubhaṇḍaṃ adhippetaṃ. Cakkhubhaṇḍanti cakkhuparivāraṃ. Cakkhubhaṇḍanti akkhidalanti keci. Akkhidalapattanti vadanti aññe. Akkhidale hi pana saddhiṃ akkhibimbanti veditabbaṃ. Ayaṃ panettha vacanattho. Patati cakkhuṃ parivāreti etenāti pakhumaṃ, pamhādiparivāraṃ. Patadhātu parivāre umo. Takārassa kho. Atha vā akkhino pakkhadvaye jātanti pakhumaṃ, pamhaṃ. Jātataddhite umo. Pakkhumanti vattabbe kakāralopavasena pakhumanti vuccati. Pakhumaṃyeva pakhumako. Gotaruṇassa taṃmuhuttajātarattavacchassa pakhumaṃ viya pakhumaṃ yassa soti gotaruṇapakhumako, jino. Gotaruṇassa taṃmuhuttajātarattavacchassa pakhumasadisaṃ vippasannacakkhubhaṇḍaṃ atthīti attho. Aññesañhi akkhibhaṇḍo aparipuṇṇo hoti. Hatthimūsikakākādīnaṃ akkhisadisehi viniggatehi gambhīrehipi akkhīhi samannāgatā. Tathāgatassa pana dhovitvā majjitvā ṭhapitamaṇiguḷikā viya mudusiniddhanīla sukhumapakhumācitāni akkhīni honti. Tasmā gotaruṇapakhumakoti thometi.
“狮子上半身”指如同狮子的上半身般圆满的身体。“能忍受风热等逼恼”故为“sīha”(狮子),词根“sah”(忍受)加“a”,增入“ī”音。或说:伤害猪、水牛等众生故为“sīha”(狮子)。词根“hiṃs”(伤害)加“ṇa”。应说“hiṃsa”而字母颠倒说为“sīha”。或说:于一切威仪中精进勇猛,故善勤策,为“sīha”(狮子),即鬃狮。此前缀“su”加词根“īha”(勤策)加“a”。故《声论》中说:“sah、hiṃsa、īha诸义,应知‘sīha’词之由来。”“如同狮子上半身所生之身般圆满的身体为其所有”故为“sīhapubbaḍḍhakāya”(狮子上半身),指胜者。正如狮子的上半身是圆满的,如来则不然,如来的身体一切圆满。狮子仅前身圆满,后身不圆满。而如来的整个身体如同狮子的上半身般圆满,且如同狮子般,不在各处有凹陷、凸起等丑陋、松散之状。于应长之处则长,于应短、应细、应粗、应圆之处,则如其应然而成。正如所说:“诸比丘,当可爱乐的业果现前时,以长而庄严的肢体,那些肢体便长得粗壮;以细而庄严的肢体,那些肢体便长得纤细;以圆而庄严的肢体,那些肢体便长得圆润。”如此,以种种心、以福心所造,以十波罗蜜所庄严的如来之身,世间一切工匠或具神通者,亦不能造作其仿制品。因此以“狮子上半身”来称赞。显示巴利原文
Sīhapubbaḍḍhakāyoti sīhassa pubbaḍḍhakāyo viya paripuṇṇakāyo. Vātātapādiparissayaṃ sahati khamatīti sīho, sahadhātu khamane a. Īkārāgamo. Atha vā sūkaramahiṃsādayo satte hiṃsatīti sīho. Hiṃsadhātu hanane ṇa. Hiṃsoti vattabbe akkharavipariyāyena sīhoti vuccati. Atha vā sabbiriyāpathesu daḷhavīriyattā suṭṭhu īhati vāyamatīti sīho, kesarasīho. Supubba īhadhātu cetāyaṃ a. Tena vuttaṃ saddanītiyaṃ ‘‘sahahiṃsa īhāvasā, sīhasaddagatiṃ vade’’ti. Sīhassa pubbaḍḍhe jāto kāyo viya paripuṇṇakāyo yassāti sīhapubbaḍḍhakāyo, jino. Yathā hi sīhassa pubbaḍḍhakāyova paripuṇṇo hoti, na evaṃ tassa. Tathāgatassa pana kāyo sabbaparipuṇṇoti attho. Sīhassa pana purimakāyova paripuṇṇo hoti, pacchima kāyo aparipuṇṇo. Tathāgatassa pana sīhassa pubbaḍḍhakāyoiva sabbo kāyo paripuṇṇo. Sopi sīhasseva na tattha tattha vinatunnatādivasena dussaṇṭhita visaṇṭhito. Dīghayuttaṭṭhāne pana dīgho. Rassakisathūla anuvaṭṭitayuttaṭṭhānesu tathāvidhova hoti. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘manāpiye ca kho bhikkhave kammavipāke paccupaṭṭhite yehi aṅgehi dīghehi sobhati, tāni aṅgāni thūlāni saṇṭhahanti. Yehi aṅgehi kisehi sobhati, tāni aṅgāni kisāni saṇṭhahanti. Yehi aṅgehi vaṭṭehi sobhati, tāni aṅgāni vaṭṭāni saṇṭhahantī’’ti. Iti nānācittena puññacittena cittito dasahi pāramīhi sajjito tathāgatassa attabhāvo tassa loke sabbasippino vā iddhimanto vā patirūpakampi kātuṃ na sakkonti. Tasmā sīhapubbaḍḍhakāyoti thometi.
25 在第三首偈中,“善逝”即是佛陀,为所述主体。此词与“七处隆满”等词,因性别相同而相互关联。“七处隆满”,意谓双手、双足、双肩及颈项七处,肌肉圆满丰隆。诸师则解说为:双手、双足、双肩与躯干,这七处圆满。以其肌肉丰满、充满,故称“隆满”。或者,因丰满、充满而得名。词根“pīṇ”(饱满)或“充满”,加上“ṇa”后缀,“ṇa”转为“na”。于双手、双足、双肩、一颈,此七处肌体隆满、圆满具足,故名“七处隆满”,用以指称善逝。他人手足背上筋脉显现,肩颈处骨端外露,形同饿鬼;如来则不然。如来七处肌肉丰隆圆满,手足背等处不见筋脉结节,其颈项犹如旋制安立之金柱,望去如同泥塑或彩绘之像。因此,以“七处隆满”来称赞他。显示巴利原文
25. Tatiya gāthāyaṃ sugatoti buddho kattubhūto. Tassa pana padassa sattappīnotyādīhi padehi tulyaliṅgattabhāvena sambandho. Sattappīnoti dvihatthapāda aṃsakūṭa ekagalavasena sattasu ṭhānesu paripuṇṇamaṃsikoti attho. Ācariyā pana paripuṇṇadvihatthapāda aṃsakūṭa khandhasaṅkhātasattaṭṭhānoti atthaṃ vadanti. Maṃsena pīṇati paripūratīti pīno. Pīṇate paripūrate vā pīno. Pīṇadhātu pīṇane, pūraṇe vā ṇa. Ṇassa no. Dve hatthapiṭṭhiyo dve pādapiṭṭhiyo dve aṃsakūṭāni ekagalo cāti sattasu ṭhānesu pīno paripuṇṇo maṃso assāti sattapīno, sugato labbhati. Aññesañhi hatthapādapiṭṭhīsu nhārujālā paññāyanti aṃsakūṭagalesu aṭṭhikoṭiyo. Te manussā petā viya khāyanti. Na tathāgato. Tathāgato pana sattasu ṭhānesu paripuṇṇamaṃsussadattā niguḷanhārujālehi hatthapiṭṭhādīhi vaṭṭetvā ṭhapitasuvaṇṇavaṇṇāliṅgasadisena galena sīlārūpakaṃ viya cittakammarūpakaṃ viya ca khāyati, tasmā sattappīnoti thometi.
在《梵摩喻经》中,则读作“七处隆满”。应当理解,其含义为:七处肌肉丰隆圆满。显示巴利原文
Brahmāyusutte pana ‘‘sattussado’’ti pāṭho. Tassa pana sattasu ṭhānesu paripuṇṇamaṃsussadoti attho daṭṭhabbo.
“长指”(dīghaṅgulī):应作“长指”(dīgha-aṅgulī)来分解此词。意为手指与脚趾长度匀称。所谓“指”(aṅguli),即向上伸展(aṅgati uddhaṃ gacchati),故称为指;或者,以其触摸(parāmasati)身体各个部分(kāyaṅga),故称为指,即手的末梢部分。“aṅg”为表行走义的字根,加上后缀“uli”。又或,“aṅga”(身体部分)加上“ulati”(行走、触摸),意为以此来触摸身体部分,故称指,即手的分支。以“aṅga”为前置词,字根“ul”表行走义,加上后缀“i”。手指与脚趾长度匀称,名为“长指”,即善逝。这是说,他的手指与脚趾长度均匀。因为其他人的手指,有的长、有的短;而如来并非如此。如来的手指与脚趾,如猿猴般修长,根部圆实,向末端逐渐收细,其状如同用树脂油揉搓均匀而成的黄色颜料棒。因此,以“长指”来称赞他。显示巴利原文
Dīghaṅgulīti dīghaaṅgulīti padacchedo. Samaāyatahattha pādaṅgulīti attho. Aṅgati uddhaṃ gacchatīti aṅguli. Aṅgati taṃ taṃ kāyaṅgaṃ parāmasati etāyāti vā aṅguli, karasākhā. Agidhātu gatiyaṃ ulipaccayo. Atha vā aṅgaṃ kāyaṅgaṃ ulati gacchati parāmasati etāyāti aṅguli, karasākhā. Aṅga saddūpapadauladhātu gatiyaṃ i. Samadīghā aṅguli hattha pādaṅguli yassa soti dīghaṅguli, sugato. Samadīghā hatthapādaṅguli atthīti attho. Yathā hi aññesaṃ kāci aṅguli dīghā hoti kāci rassā, na evaṃ tathāgatassa. Tathāgatassa pana makkaṭasseva dīghahatthapādaṅguliyo mūle thūlā anupubbena gantvā agge tanukā niyyāsatelena madditvā vaṭṭitaharitālavaṭṭasadisā honti. Tasmā dīghaṅgulīti thometi. Mathāti maathāti padacchedo. Makāro hi padasandhikaro. Athāti atthantare nipāto. Tadaññanti attho.
“毛孔一毛”(lomakūpekalomo)即“毛孔一毛”(lomakūpa-ekalomo)的分词,意为每个毛孔各生一毛。“毛”(lomo)由字根“lū”(割断)加ma后缀构成,因其割断皮肉,或生长时应当被割断,故称为毛。“ku”指水,保护水者称为“井”(kūpo);由前缀“kup”、字根“pā”(保护)加kvi后缀,u变为长音。如同井一般,故称毛孔(kūpo);或者“ku”指毛,保护毛者称为毛孔。《阿毗达那注释》中说:“‘ku’词加上po、长音等,成为kūpo;或者,覆盖(ubhati)者称为kūpo,bha变为po。”毛的孔即为毛孔。在每个毛孔中各生一毛者,称为“毛孔一毛”,即善逝。因为其他人的一个毛孔中会长出多根毛,而如来并非如此,如来的每个毛孔只生一根毛。正如《梵寿经》所说:“乔达摩尊者是毛孔一毛者,毛孔中所生的毛都是一根一根的。”因此,名为“毛孔一毛”。显示巴利原文
Lomakūpekalomoti lomakūpaekalomoti padacchedo. Ekekalomakūpe ekekajātalomoti attho. Cammamaṃsaṃ lunāti chindatīti lomo, vaḍḍhamānaṃ lunitabbanti vā lomo, lūdhātu chedane manipaccayo. Kuvuccati udakaṃ, taṃ pāti rakkhatīti kūpo. Kupubbapādhātu rakkhane kvi. Ussa dīgho. Kūpo viyāti kūpo, atha vā kuvuccati lomaṃ, taṃ pāti rakkhatīti kūpo. Abhidhānaṭīkāyaṃ pana ‘‘kusadde po. Dīghādi. Kūpo. Kena ubhatīti vā kūpo. Bhassa po’’ti vuttaṃ. Lomassa kūpo lomakūpo. Tasmiṃ tasmiṃ jāto ekeka lomo yassāti lomakūpekalomo, sugato. Yathā hi aññesaṃ ekekasmimpi lomakūpe anekāni lomāni jāyanti, na evaṃ tathāgatassa. Tathāgatassa pana ekekasmiṃ lomakūpe ekekalomo jāyati. Vuttañhi brahmāyusutte ‘‘ekekalomo kho pana bhavaṃ gotamo. Ekekāni lomāni lomakūpesu jātā nī’’ti. Tasmā lomakūpekalomoti thometi.
“具足洁白牙”(sampannodātadāṭho)即“具足—洁白—牙”(sampanna-odāta-dāṭho)的分词,意为具足洁白的牙齿。“具足”(sampanno),即圆满成就,由前缀“saṃ”、字根“pad”(行走义)加ta后缀,ta变为nna。“洁白”(odāto),即被咬断后映现出不同颜色的光泽,由前缀“ava”、字根“dā”(咬断义)加ta后缀。“牙”(dāṭho),即以此咬啮食物等的牙齿,属牙齿的一种;由字根“daṃs”(咬义)加ṭha后缀,daṃs变为dā。具足洁白牙齿者,称为“具足洁白牙”,即善逝。因为其他人的牙齿会腐烂、变黑或变色,而如来则是具足洁白牙者,其牙齿的光辉超过药叉星,闪耀光芒。经文中也有“善洁白牙”(susukkadāṭho)的读法,意思相同。因此,以“具足洁白牙”来称赞。显示巴利原文
Sampannodātadāṭhoti sampannoodātadāṭhoti padacchedo. Sampannasukkadāṭhoti attho. Sampajjatīti sampanno. Saṃpubbapadadhātu gatiyaṃ ta. Tassa anno. Avadāyati avakhaṇḍiyati aññavaṇṇobhāsanti odāto. Avapubba dādhātu avakhaṇḍane ta. Daṃsati odanādiṃ etāyāti dāṭho, dantaviseso. Daṃsadhātu daṃsane ṭho. Daṃsissa dā. Sampanno ca odāto ca dāṭho yassāti sampanno dātadāṭho, sugato. Aññesañhi pūtidantā uṭṭhahanti. Tena kāci dāṭhā kāḷāpi vivaṇṇāpi honti. Tathāgato pana sukkadāṭho osadhitārakampi atikkamma virocamānāya pabhāya samannāgatadāṭho hoti. Pāḷiyaṃ pana ‘‘susukkadāṭho’’ti pāṭho. Ayamevattho. Tasmā sampannodātadāṭhoti thometi.
“金色等肤”(kanakasamataco):意指肤色与黄金相似。“金”(kanakaṃ)出于字根“kan”(发光、行走、喜爱义)加aka后缀;或者因人们渴望它,故称金,即黄金。“等”(samaṃ)指与相似者一同运行,由前缀“saṃ”、字根“am”(行走义)加a后缀构成。“肤”(taco)指覆盖或防护肌肉,或者以金色光泽闪耀,故称肤,即皮肤,由字根“tac”(防护、发光义)加a后缀。肤色与黄金相等相似者,称为“金色等肤”,即善逝。因为其他人肤色有青、白、黄等不同,而如来并非如此。如来的肤色,犹如以天然朱砂研磨后,再用磨石打磨,以赭石粉处理后所置的纯金像一般,与金色相似。经文中也有“金色身,肤如黄金”(suvaṇṇavaṇṇo kañcanasannibhattaco)的读法,意思相同。因此,以“金色等肤”来称赞。显示巴利原文
Kanakasamatacoti suvaṇṇena sadisacammo. Kanati dibbati obhāsenāti kanakaṃ. Kaniyati icchiyati manusse hīti vā kanakaṃ, suvaṇṇaṃ. Kanadhātu dittigatikantīsu akapaccayo, saṃsadisena amati gacchati pavattatīti samaṃ. Saṃpubbaamadhātu gatiyaṃ a. Tacati maṃsaṃ chādeti saṃvarati vāti taco, tacati dibbati suvaṇṇobhāsenāti vā taco, cammaṃ. Tacadhātu saṃvaraṇadittīsu a. Kanakena suvaṇṇena samo sadiso taco yassāti kanaka samataco, sugato. Yathā hi aññesaṃ taco koci nīlataco setataco pītataco hoti, na evaṃ tathāgatassa. Tathāgatassa pana jātihiṅgulakena majjitvā nisadāya ghaṃsitvā gerukaparikammaṃ katvā ṭhapita ghanasuvaṇṇarūpakaṃ viya kañcanasadisataco hoti. Pāḷiyaṃ pana ‘‘suvaṇṇavaṇṇo kañcanasannibhattaco’’ti vutto. Ettha ca suvaṇṇavaṇṇo viya vaṇṇo yassāti suvaṇṇavaṇṇo, kañcanena sannibhaṃ sadisaṃ tacamassāti kañcanasannibhattacoti vacanattho kātabbo. Ettha ca suvaṇṇavaṇṇanti iminā tathāgatassa ghanasiniddhasaṇhasarīrataṃ dasseti. Kañcanasannibhattacoti iminā chavivaṇṇaṃ dasseti. Atha vā vevacanametaṃ padadvayaṃ. Tasmā kanakasamatacoti thometi.
“青黑上端毛”(nīlamuddhaggalomo):此词应拆分为“青黑、向上、末端毛”(nīlaṃ uddhaṃ agga-lomo)。其意为:毛色青黑,末端向上,如仰视容光般安立;或者说,毛色青黑、末端向上而安立者,便名为“青黑上端毛”,指的是善逝。因为常人的毛发末端皆朝下,如来则不同。如来的毛发在旋纹处末端向上,如仰视容光而立。正如《梵寿经》所说:“乔达摩尊者是上端毛者,所生之毛末端向上,青黑色,如眼药之色,呈耳环形旋纹,右旋而生。”因此,即以“青黑上端毛”来称叹。显示巴利原文
Nīlamuddhaggalomoti nīlaṃ uddhaṃ aggalomoti padacchedo. Nīlaṃ uddhaṃ aggā koṭi hutvā mukhasobhaṃ ullokayamāno viya ṭhitalomo, nīlāni uddhaṃ aggāni koṭīni hutvā ṭhitāni lomāni yassāti nīlamuddhaggalomo, sugato. Yathā hi aññesaṃ lomāni heṭṭhā aggāni hutvā tiṭṭhanti, na evaṃ tathāgatassa. Tathāgatassa pana lomāni āvaṭṭapariyosāne uddhaṃ aggāni hutvā mukhasobhaṃ ullokayamānāni viya tiṭṭhanti. Vuttañhetaṃ brahmāyusutte ‘‘uddhaggalomo bhavaṃ gotamo. Uddhaggāni lomāni jātāni nīlāni añjanavaṇṇāni kuṇḍalāvaṭṭāni padakkhiṇāvaṭṭakajātānī’’ti. Tasmā nīlamuddhaggalomoti thometi.
“等正觉者”(sambuddho):即如来。因他并非由他人教导而觉悟,而是自证四圣谛,故称为“等正觉者”。此词与“广长舌”等三个词在语法上性别相同,因此彼此关联。显示巴利原文
Sambuddhoti tathāgato. So hi anaññabuddho hutvā sāmaṃyeva cattāri saccāni bujjhatīti sambuddhoti vuccati. Tassa pana padassa thūlajivhotyādīhi tīhi padehi tulyaliṅgattabhāvena sambandho.
“广长舌”(thūlajivho):指具足柔软、长、广的舌。由于偈颂格律,省略了“柔软”与“长”的词而作此表述。因此注释书中说:“柔软、长、广、色泽具足的舌头。”所谓“广”(thūlā),意为增长,指舌,词根thūl(增长义)加后缀a。所谓“舌”(jivhā),意为维持生命,是味觉器官,词根jīv(持命义)加后缀ha。众生依味而活命,故味称为“命”(jīvita),即六种味。能品尝此味者,名为舌,即舌净色。此处就依处而言,是以舌的构成部分来指代。以“jīvita”为前导词,词根avhā(呼召义)加后缀a,依语源学规则省略“vita”音,而成“jivhā”。具有广、大、长、柔软之舌者,即名“广长舌”,指等正觉者。因为常人的舌有广、细、短、硬、粗糙等种种形相,而如来的舌柔软、长、广、色泽具足。如来为了消除前来寻求此相好的梵寿婆罗门等人的疑惑……显示巴利原文
Thūlajivhoti mududīghaputhula jivhāya sampannoti attho. Gāthābandhavasena hi mududīghasaddalopaṃ katvā evaṃ vuttaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘mudujivhā dīghā thūlā vaṇṇa sampannā’’ti. Thūlati brūhatīti thūlā, jivhā. Thūladhātu buddhiyaṃ a. Jīvati pāṇaṃ dhāretīti jivhā, rasanā. Jīvadhātu pāṇadhāraṇe hapaccayo. Jīvanti sattā etena rasenāti jīvitaṃ, chabbidharaso. Taṃ avhāyatīti jivhā, jivhāpasādarūpaṃ. Sambhārajivhā ṭhānūpacārena labbhati. Jīvitasaddūpapada avhadhātu avhāyane a. Jīvitaavhāti vattabbe niruttinayena vitasaddalopaṃ katvā jivhāti vuttaṃ. Thūlā mahantā dīghā mudukā jivhā yassāti thūlajivho, sambuddho. Aññesañhi jivhā thūlāpi hoti kisāpi rassāpi thaddhāpi visamāpi. Tathāgatassa pana mudujivhā dīghā puthulā vaṇṇa sampannā hoti. So taṃ lakkhaṇaṃ pariyesituṃ āgatānaṃ brahmāyubrāhmaṇādīnaṃ kaṅkhāvinodanatthaṃ jivhāya mudukattā taṃ jivhaṃ kathinasūci viya vaṭṭetvā ubhopi nāsikāsotāni parāmasati, dīghattā ubho kaṇṇasotāni parāmasati, puthulattā kesantapariyosānaṃ kevalampi nalāṭaṃ paṭicchādeti, evaṃ tassā mududīghaputhulabhāvaṃ pakāsento kaṅkhāvinodeti, evaṃ tilakkhaṇasampannaṃ jivhaṃ sandhāya thūla jivhoti thometi. Pāḷiyaṃ pana ‘‘pahūtajivho’’ti pāṭho. Ayamevattho.
“Atha”是不变词,表示“此外”之义。“Tadañña”即是此义。“Sīhahanuko”指下颚圆满,犹如狮子下颚。“Sīha”一词之义前已述及。“Hanu”因能破坏米饭等食物之色,故而得名。“Han”(伤害)为词根,后加词缀“u”。具足如狮子下颚般圆满之颚者,称为“sīhahanuko”,此处为呼格。于复合词末加“ka”。实言之,狮子下颚圆满,上颚则否。然如来上下两颚皆如狮子下颚般圆满,恰似月轮之十五日圆满。故以“sīhahanuko”一词称赞。显示巴利原文
Athāti atthantaratthe nipāto. Tadaññanti attho. Sīhahanukoti sīhassa heṭṭhā hanu viya paripuṇṇa hanuko. Sīhasaddattho heṭṭhā vuttoyeva. Hanati odanādīnaṃ vaṇṇavisesaṃ nāsetīti hanu. Hanadhātu hiṃsāyaṃ u. Sīhassa heṭṭhā hanu viya hanu yassāti sīhahanuko , sambuddho. Samāsante ko. Sīhassa hi heṭṭhimahanumeva paripuṇṇaṃ hoti, na uparimaṃ. Tathāgatassa pana sīhassa heṭṭhimaṃ viya dvepi paripuṇṇāni dvādasiyaṃ pakkhassa candasadisāni honti. Tasmā sīhahanukoti thometi.
“Jālikappādahattho”意指:手指与脚趾之间无皮膜相连,犹如善巧工匠妥善安装于窗上的细网。因能放光、辉耀,故称为“jāla”(网),“jal”(照耀)为词根,加词缀“ṇa”。拥有网或其中有网者,名为“jālika”,即窗,此处于“有”义上加词缀“ṇika”。复次,“jāla”本身即是“jālika”。依之而行,故名为“pāda”(足),即脚,“pad”(行)为词根,加词缀“ṇa”。能执持种种重物,故名为“hattha”(手),“har”(执持)为词根,加词缀“tha”。具足如窗网般指趾间隙者,名为“jālikappādahattho”,此处为呼格。其义为:手指与脚趾之间无皮膜相连的间隙,恰如善巧工匠妥善安置于窗上的网。此处本应宣说“jālikappādahatthaṅgulantara”,然省略后半分而作此表述。何以故?因手足趾间有皮膜相连者(如“phaṇahatthaka”蛇首者),为人身之缺陷所损,乃至不得出家。而如来之四指与五趾,长度悉皆均等。显示巴利原文
Jālikappādahatthoti kusalena vaḍḍhakinā vātapāne sammāyojitajālaṃ viya cammena appaṭibaddhahatthapādaṅgulantaro. Jalati dibbatīti jālaṃ, jaladhātu dittiyaṃ ṇa. Jālaṃ assa atthi tasmiṃ vā vijjatīti jālikaṃ, vātapānaṃ. Assathyatthe ṇiko. Atha vā jālaṃ eva jālikaṃ. Pajjati gacchati etenāti pādo, caraṇo. Padadhātu gamane ṇa. Taṃ taṃ bhāraṃ haratīti hattho, karo. Haradhātu haraṇe tho. Jālikaṃ viya hatthapādaṅgulantaraṃ yassāti jālikappādahattho, sambuddho. Kusalena vaḍḍhakinā vātapāne sammāyojitāni jālasadisāni hatthapādaṅgulantarāni honti. Na ca cammena paṭibaddhaaṅgulantarānīti attho. Ettha jālikappādahatthaṅgulantaranti vattabbe uttarapadalopena evaṃ vuttaṃ. Cammena paṭibaddhahatthapādaṅgulantaro hi phaṇahatthako purisadosena upahato pabbajjampi na labhati. Tathāgatassa pana catasso hatthaṅguliyo pañcapi pādaṅguliyo ekappamāṇā honti. Tāsaṃ ekappamāṇa tāya yavalakkhaṇaṃ aññamaññaṃ paṭivijjhitvā tiṭṭhati. Athassa hatthapādā kusalena vaḍḍhakinā sammāyojitajālavāta pānasadisā honti, tasmā jālikappādahatthoti thometi. Pāḷiyaṃ pana ‘‘jālahatthapādo’’ti pāṭho. Ayamevattho.
“Nātho”就作者的角度而言,是指佛陀。因其“nāthati”(祈求),即祈请所化众生行于利益之道;或能烧却他人相续中之烦恼;或具足最上之心自在力。复次,依功德而“īsati”(超胜)一切众生,或“āsīsati”(祝愿)所化众生之利乐,故称“nātho”。诚如《声论》所言:“‘nāth’一词根,应用于祈求、烧灼、自在、祝愿四种含义。”显示巴利原文
Nāthoti buddho kattuvasena. So hi nāthati vineyyānaṃ hitapaṭipattiṃ yācati, parasantānagataṃ vā kilesabyasaṃ upatāpeti, paramena cittissariyena samannā gato . Sabbasatte vā guṇehi īsati abhibhavati, veneyyānaṃ hitasukhaṃ vā āsīsatīti nāthoti vuccati. Vuttañhi saddanītiyaṃ ‘‘nāthadhātu yācane upatāpe issariye āsisane cāti catūsvatthesu pavattatī’’ti.
而该词与“uṇhīsasīso”一词因性相同而关联。“Uṇhīsasīso”的意思是:犹如国王缠戴之头巾般闪耀、由自然肉髻所成的头顶。因系于额前,故称“uṇhīsa”。此中,“upa”前缀加表“绑缚”义的“nah”词根,缀以“īsa”后缀,并发生音变。正如《阇利尼》中所说:显示巴利原文
Tassa pana padassa uṇhīsasīsotipadena tulyaliṅgattabhāvena sambandho. Uṇhīsasīsoti rañño baddhauṇhīsa paṭṭo viya virocamāno pakatimaṃsapiṇḍasaṅkhāto uṇhīsapaṭṭasīso. Nalāṭe nahiyati bandhiyatīti uṇhīso. Upubbanahadhātu bandhane, īso. Vaṇṇavikāro. Vuttañhi jāliniyaṃ –
字母的增加,字母的换位,
以及另外两种:字母的变异与字母的消失;
词根与义趣的殊胜结合。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Vaṇṇāgamo vaṇṇavipariyāyo, Dve cāpare vaṇṇavikāranāsā; Dhātūnamatthātisayena yogo, Taduccate pañcavidhaṃ nirutti’’nti.
其中,对于不存在的字母,增加字母称为“字母的增加”。对于存在的字母,通过上下换位,称为“字母的换位”。一个字母变成另一个字母,称为“字母的变化”。存在的字母消失,称为“字母的消失”。在各自相应之处,词根与特殊含义的结合,称为“词根与含义的卓越结合”,这是意旨所在。然而,此处因将“na”字母变为“ṇa”字母,应视为“字母的变化”。因花鬘等被系缚,故称为“sīsa”(头),即最上之肢。“sidh”词根用于系缚义,加“īsa”后缀。拥有如同国王以头巾缠绕之头者,称为“uṇhīsasīso”。或者,拥有如同国王头巾般处处圆满之头者,称为“uṇhīsasīso”,即依怙者。显示巴利原文
Tattha ca avijjamānassa āgamā vaṇṇāgamo nāma. Vijjamānaakkharānaṃ heṭṭhupariyāyavasena vaṇṇavipariyāyo nāma. Aññakkharassa aññakkharāpajjanatā vaṇṇavikāro nāma. Vijjamānakkharavināso vaṇṇavināso nāma. Tattha tattha yathāyogaṃ visesatthayogo dhātūnaṃ atthātisaya yogo nāmāti adhippāyo. Ettha pana nakārassa ṇakāraṃ katattā vaṇṇavikāroti daṭṭhabbo. Mālādiṃ siyati bandhiyatīti sīso, uttamaṅgo. Sidhātu bandhane īso. Rājūnaṃ uṇhīsapaṭṭena veṭhitasīso viya sīso yassāti uṇhīsasīso. Atha vā rājūnaṃ uṇhīsaṃ viya sabbattha parimaṇḍalasīso yassāti uṇhīsasīso, nātho.
正如《梵寿经注》所说:“‘uṇhīsasīso’一词是依两种含义而说:即圆满的额头与圆满的头。因为如来的肉膜从右耳鬓处生起,覆盖并充满整个额头,延伸至左耳鬓处安立,如同国王所缠的头巾般闪耀。据说,最后生菩萨们了知此相后,便为国王们制作头巾。这是第一种含义。其他人则头不圆满——有似猿猴头的,有如果头的,有像骨头的,有像葫芦头的,有前额凸出后脑倾斜的。而如来的头,则如用圆规旋转后安立一般,极为圆满,犹如水泡。其中,依第一种方式,如同以头巾缠绕的头,故称‘uṇhīsasīso’;依第二种方式,如同头巾般处处圆满的头,故称‘uṇhīsasīso’。”其复注解释说:“‘依于两种含义而说’意为:因为诸佛与转轮王由于额头圆满及头相圆满而被称为‘uṇhīsasīso’,所以依此两种含义而说‘uṇhīsasīso’。”因此,以“uṇhīsasīso”作为称赞。显示巴利原文
Vuttañhi brahmāyusuttaṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘uṇhīsasīsoti idaṃ paripuṇṇanalāṭañceva paripuṇṇasīsañcāti dve atthavase paṭicca vuttaṃ. Tathāgatassa hi dakkhiṇakaṇṇacūḷikato paṭṭhāya maṃsapaṭaṃ uṭṭhahitvā sakalaṃ nalāṭaṃ chādayamānaṃ pūrayamānaṃ gantvā vāmakaṇṇacūḷikāya patiṭṭhitaṃ. Rañño baddhauṇhīsapaṭṭo viya virocati. Pacchimabhavikabodhisattānaṃ kira imaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ viditvā rājūnaṃ uṇhīsapaṭṭaṃ akaṃsu. Ayaṃ tāva eko attho. Aññe pana janā aparipuṇṇasīsā honti. Keci kapisīsā, keci phalasīsā, keci aṭṭhisīsā, keci tumba sīsā, keci pabbhārasīsā. Tathāgatassa pana āraggena vaṭṭetvā ṭhapitaṃ viya suparipuṇṇaṃ udakapupphulasadisaṃ sīsaṃ hoti. Tattha purimanayena uṇhīsaveṭhitasīso viyāti uṇhīsasīso. Dutiyanayena uṇhīsaṃ viya sabbattha parimaṇḍala sīsoti uṇhīsasīso’’ti. Taṭṭīkāyañca ‘‘dve attha vase paṭicca vuttanti, yasmā buddhā cakkavattino ca paripuṇṇa nalāṭatāya paripuṇṇasīsabimbatāya uṇhīsasīsāti vuccanti. Tasmā te dve atthavase paṭicca uṇhīsasīsoti vutta’’nti vaṇṇeti. Tasmā uṇhīsasīsoti thometi.
“Itiguṇasahitaṃ”意为:具足如前所述、以“尼拘律树般圆满”等为代表的三十二大丈夫相之功德。如此所述的功德,即称为“itiguṇa”。与彼功德共存者,名为“itiguṇasahito”,即大仙。因为其他人并不具足三十二大丈夫相;转轮王虽具足大丈夫相,但除马阴藏相外,仅具其余诸相。唯有如来具足一切大丈夫相。因此,唯有世尊堪受“itiguṇasahito”的称赞——这是所说之义。“Taṃ mahesiṃ”意为:他寻求戒蕴等乃至涅槃,故称为“mahesī”(大仙)。我以三门礼敬、稽首彼大仙,这是关联。显示巴利原文
Itiguṇasahitanti iminā vuttappakārena nigrodhabimbotyādinā dvattiṃsamahāpurisalakkhaṇaguṇena sampannaṃ. Itievaṃ vuttappakāraṃ guṇaṃ itiguṇaṃ. Tena saha ito pattoti itiguṇasahito, mahesī. Aññe hi dvattiṃsa mahāpurisalakkhaṇehi sampannā na honti, cakkavattirājāno mahāpurisalakkhaṇehi sampannāpi ṭhapetvā kosohitavattha guyhalakkhaṇaṃ avasesehi sampannā honti. Tathāgatoyeva sabbamahāpurisalakkhaṇehi samannāgato. Tasmā bhagavantaṃyeva itiguṇasahitanti thomanaṃ arahatīti vuttaṃ hoti. Taṃ mahesinti sīlakkhandhādike ca nibbānañca esati gavesatīti mahesī. Taṃ mahesiṃ ahaṃ tīhi dvārehi namāmi vandāmīti sambandho.
23 以下是对这三首偈颂的简要义释。佛陀——即尼拘陀树般圆满者:身体周圆,犹如尼拘陀树之圆整;手足柔软,即手足细滑;梵音,具足八支之声,如梵天之音;鹿胫,膝头圆好,如伊尼鹿之胫;马阴藏相,隐秘之根如同公牛、大象等之根,被如金色莲房般的皮所覆盖;再者,善逝、佛陀,足善安立,双足平正安着,如金制鞋底;眉间白毫,生于眉间,细软洁白清净,具足白毫相;此外,善逝、佛陀,身如梵天正直,端正笔直犹如梵天之身;眼绀青色,即具足极深青之眼;踵广长,即踵部宽广或圆满;皮肤细滑,即皮肤细滑,垢秽清净,无微细垢;味中上味,即具有应受赞美的七千条上向之筋。显示巴利原文
23. Ayaṃ pana imāsu tīsu gāthāsu saṅkhepatthayojanā. Buddho kattubhūto nigrodhabimbo nigrodhassa parimaṇḍalo viya parimaṇḍalasarīro mudukaracaraṇo saṇhahatthapādo, brahmaghoso brahmuno saro viya aṭṭhaṅgasampannasaravanto, eṇijaṅghā eṇimigassa jaṅghā viya suvaṭṭajāṇuko, kosacchādaṅgajāto usabhavāraṇā dīnaṃ aṅgajāto viya suvaṇṇapadumakaṇṇikasadisena vatthakosena paṭicchannena guyhaṅgajātena samannāgato, punarapi punaapi, sugato buddho suppatiṭṭhitapādo suvaṇṇa pādukatalamiva bhūmiyaṃ samaṃ suṭṭhu patiṭṭhitapādo, mūdo dātuṇṇalomo bhamukantare jāto saṇhasukhumo seto suddho uṇṇalomavanto, athamapi tadaññaṃapi, sugato buddho, brahmujuggattabhāvo brahmuno ujuuggata attabhāvo viya ujumeva attabhāvo, nīlakkhī atinīlanettena samannāgato, dīghapaṇhi āyatapaṇhi paripuṇṇapaṇhi vā, sukhumamalachavī saṇhamalavisuddhataco saṇhamala virahitataco vā, thomyarasaggasaggī thomitabbasattara saharaṇasahassanhāruuddhaggikā.
24 胜者,即战胜五魔的佛陀;四十齿,即具足四十颗最上之齿;齿齐平,即齿列平整,如用锯截断后安立一般;肩间充实,即两肩与肩胛之间背部中央饱满;足有轮相,即足底具足百八辐轮之相;齿无疏离,即齿无间隙;魔胜者,即战胜五魔的佛陀;足踝高隆,即足踝上方有螺形之踝骨;站立时,不俯不仰,能以两手柔软细滑之掌抚摸、摩触膝盖;颈圆,即颈部圆整如金环;牛王睫,即眼睫如初生红色牛犊之眼般明净,或具足明净之眼;上身如狮,即上半身饱满,如狮子的前半身。显示巴利原文
24. Jino pañcamārajitavā buddho, cattālīsaggadanto samacattālīsauttamadanto, samakalapanajo kakacena chinditvā ṭhapito viya samadanto, antaraṃsappapīno dvinnaṃ aṃsānaṃ khandhānaṃ antaraṃ vemajjhe paripuṇṇapiṭṭhitalo, cakkenaṅkitapādo aṭṭhasatapādacakkalakkhaṇena lakkhita pādatalo, aviraḷadasano avivaradantena sampanno, māraji pañcamārajitavā buddho, ussaṅkhapādo pādassa upari ṭhitena saṅkhasadisattā saṅkhanāmikena gopphakena samannāgato, tiṭṭhanto ṭhitakova nonamanto anamamāno hutvā ubhayakaramudunā sukhumena hatthadvayena jaṇṇukāni jaṅghāni āmasanto parimajjituṃ sakkonto, vaṭṭakkhandho suvaṇṇāliṅgo viya samavaṭṭitagaliko, gotaruṇa pakhumako taṃmuhuttajātarattavacchassa cakkhubhaṇḍo viya vippasannacakkhubhaṇḍo, vippasannacakkhubhaṇḍena samannāgato vā, sīhapubbaḍḍhakāyo sīhassa pubbaḍḍhakāyo viya paripuṇṇakāyo.
25 善逝、佛陀,七处隆满,即两手、两足、两肩及颈项七处肌肉饱满;指长,即手指与足趾修长匀称;复次,一一毛孔各生一毛,即每一毛孔中唯生一毛;齿白齐整,即齿极白;皮肤金色,即肤色如黄金;毛向上,即毛色青黑,毛端向上,如仰望面庞般安立;正等觉者、如来,舌广长,即具足柔软、长而广之舌;颔如狮子,即颔部饱满如狮子的下颔;手足网缦,即手指、足趾之间如巧匠所制窗网,以皮相连而无碍;怙主、佛陀,顶有肉髻,即头顶有自然肉髻,如国王之头巾般光耀。如此,我以三门礼敬、稽首那位具足上述三十二大丈夫相之伟大圣者、佛陀。显示巴利原文
25. Sugato buddho, sattapīno dvihatthapādaaṃsakūṭaekagalavasena sattasu ṭhānesu paripuṇṇamaṃsiko, dīghaṅguli samaāyatahatthapādaṅguli, atha tadaññaṃ loma kūpekalomo ekekalomakūpe ekekajātalomo, sampannodātadāṭho sampannasukkadāṭho, kanaka samataco suvaṇṇena sadisacammo nīlamuddhaggalomo nīlaṃ uddhaṃ aggā koṭi hutvā mukhasobhaṃ ullokayamāno viya ṭhitalomo, sambuddho tathāgato, thūlajivho mududīghaputhulajivhāya sampanno, atha tadaññaṃ, sīhahanuko sīhassa heṭṭhāhanu viya paripuṇṇahanuko, jālikappāda hattho kusalena vaḍḍhakinā vātapāne sammāyojita jālaṃ viya cammena appaṭibaddhahatthapādaṅgulantaro, nātho buddho, uṇhīsasīso rañño uṇhīsapaṭṭo viya virocamāno pakatimaṃsapiṇḍasaṅkhāto uṇhīsapaṭṭasīso, iti guṇasahitaṃ evaṃ iminā vuttappakārena dvattiṃsamahāpurisalakkhaṇaguṇena samannāgataṃ taṃ mahesiṃ buddhaṃ tīhi dvārehi ahaṃ namāmi vandāmīti.
然而,此礼敬文中并未依照经典所说三十二大丈夫相的顺序来叙述,只是为了维护韵律,依偈颂的结构而采用了“如尼拘陀树般圆满”等词,非按次第。因此,为增益多闻,我们在此简要开示《行道品·相经》中所说的三十二大丈夫相之次第。显示巴利原文
Imissaṃ pana namakkārapāḷiyaṃ dvattiṃsamahāpurisalakkhaṇaṃ buddhavacanapāḷiyaṃ āgatanayānukkamena na vuttaṃ. Gāthābandhavasena chandānurakkhaṇatthameva pana nigrodhabimbotyādinā akkamena vuttaṃ. Tasmā pātheyyavagge lakkhaṇasutte vuttaṃ dvattiṃsamahāpurisalakkhaṇakkamaṃ saṅkhepena dassayissāma bahussutapaññāvaḍḍhanatthaṃ.
一、如来足善安立;二、足底有轮;三、踵广长;四、指长;五、手足柔软;六、手足网缦;七、足踝高隆;八、鹿胫;九、站立不俯,以双手摩触双膝;十、马阴藏相;十一、金色皮肤,如黄金;十二、皮肤细滑;十三、一一毛孔各生一毛;十四、毛向上而青黑;十五、身如梵天正直;十六、七处隆满;十七、上身如狮;十八、肩间充实;十九、身如尼拘陀树般圆满;二十、颈圆;二十一、味中上味;二十二、颔如狮子;二十三、四十齿;二十四、齿齐平;二十五、齿无疏离;二十六、齿极白;二十七、舌广长;二十八、梵音;二十九、眼绀青色;三十、牛王睫;三十一、眉间白毫,洁白柔软如棉;三十二、顶有肉髻。应知,此即三十二大丈夫相之次第。当知如来这三十二大丈夫相,是依波罗蜜与福德业,随其业力相应而获得的;而这些业在《行道品·相经》中有说,可参阅该处以取解。显示巴利原文
. Buddho suppatiṭṭhitapādo 2. heṭṭhāpādatalesu cakkajāto 3. āyatapaṇhi 4. dīghaṅguli 5. mudutaluna hatthapādo 6. jālahatthapādo 7. ussaṅkhapādo 8. eṇijaṅgho 9. ṭhitakova anonamanto ubhohi pāṇitalehi jāṇukāni parimasati 10. kosohita vatthaguyho 11. suvaṇṇavaṇṇo kañcanasannibhattaco 12. sukhumacchavī 13. ekekalomakūpesu ekekalomo 14. nīlamuddhaggalomo 15. brahmujugatto 16. sattussado 17. sīhapubbaḍḍhakāyo 18. citantaraṃso 19. nigrodhaparimaṇḍalo 20. samavaṭṭakkhandho 21. rasaggasaggī 22. sīhahanuko 23. cattālīsadanto 24. samadanto 25. aviraḷadanto 26. susukkadāṭho 27. pahuta jivho 28. brahmasaro 29. abhinīlanetto 30. gopa khumo 31. uṇṇā bhamukantare jātā odātā mudutūla sannibhā 32. uṇhīsasīsoti dvattiṃsamahāpurisalakkhaṇassa kamo veditabbo. Imāni pana bhagavato dvattiṃsamahāpurisalakkhaṇāni pāramīpuññakammena yathārahaṃ kammasarikkhakaṃ labbhantīti veditabbāni. Tāni pana kammāni pātheyyavagge lakkhaṇasutte vuttāni, tāni panettha oloketvā gahetabbānīti.
“佛陀!佛陀!”之称叹声已极难得,更何况成佛本身?
因此,世间智者,及希求种种利乐的诸善士,
承载所欲义利、天人所敬、无畏、应供,
增长世间喜乐、具足十力、无与伦比者,愿他们恒常礼敬。
显示巴利原文 Buddhobuddhotighoso atidulabhataro kā kathā buddhabhāvo, Loke tasmā vibhāvī vividhahitasukhaṃ sādhavo patthayantā; Iṭṭhaṃ atthaṃ vahantaṃ suranaramahitaṃ nibbhayaṃ dakkhiṇeyyaṃ, Lokānaṃ nandivaḍḍhaṃ dasabalamasamaṃ taṃ namassantu niccaṃ.
26 如此,以“善逝”等二十五首礼敬偈向佛陀致敬后,为策励对他的礼敬,而宣说“buddho buddhoti ghoso”等偈颂。然而,此偈应视为信乐偈。显示巴利原文
26. Evaṃ sugatantiādīhi pañcavīsativandanagāthāhi buddhassa paṇāmaṃ katvā idāni tassa vandane uyyojanaṃ karonto āha buddho buddhotighoso tyādigāthaṃ. Ayaṃ pana saddharāgāthāti daṭṭhabbo.
其中,世间“佛、佛”之声极为难得,佛位则更稀有——这是文句的关联。此处“世间”指人世间、三界或无边的轮围世间。“佛、佛之声”即“佛、佛”这样的称扬声或赞叹声。发声即为“声”,或被宣说、谈论的声音,即是称扬之声。词根“ghus”(意为出声)加“ṇa”后缀构成。或者,被宣说、赞叹即为“声”,即赞叹之声。因此《波罗夷篇注释》说:“称扬之声即是称扬,或赞叹之声。”“佛、佛”所起的声音、赞叹之声,即是“佛佛之声”。“极为难得”指极其稀有难得。本当说“dullabhataro”,为保护韵律省略“la”音,而说“dulabhataro”。难以获得故为“难得”,由前缀“du”(恶)加词根“labh”(获得)加后缀“a”。或者,“labh”未成就故为“难得”,此为不变复合词,如“dubbhikkha”(饥馑),前缀“du”表未成就义。“ati”加“dullabho”为“atidullabho”(极难得)。其中特别难得者,称为“atidullabhataro”(更为难得)。因为诸佛在世间只显示巴利原文
Tattha pana loke buddho buddhoti ghoso atidulabhataro buddhabhāvo kā kathāti sambandho. Ettha ca loketi manussaloke tiloke vā anantacakkavāḷa loke vā. Buddho buddhotighosoti buddho buddho iti kittisaddo thutisaddo vā. Ghusanaṃ ghoso. Ghusiyati kathiyatīti vā ghoso, kittisaddo. Ghusadhātu sadde ṇa. Atha vā ghusiyati thaviyatīti ghoso, thutisaddo. Tena vuttaṃ pārājikaṇḍaṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘kittisaddoti kittieva. Thutighoso vā’’ti. Buddho buddho iti pavatto ghoso thutighosoti buddhobuddhotighoso. Atidulabhataroti ativiya dullabhatamo. Dullabhataroti hi vattabbe chandānurakkhaṇatthaṃ lakāralopena dulabhataroti vuttaṃ. Dukkhena labhiyatīti dullabho. Dupubbalabhadhātu labhane a. Atha vā labhassa asamiddhanti dullabho, dubbhijāneyya abyayībhāvasamāsoyaṃ. Dusaddo asamiddhattho, yathā dubbhikkhoti. Ati viya dullabhoti atidulabho. Tesaṃ visesena atidullabhoti atidulabhataro. Buddhā hi loke kadāci karahaci uppajjanti. Tasmā buddho buddhoti ghoso atidulabhataroti vuttaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ cūḷavaggakhandhake ‘‘ghosopi kho eso gahapati dullabho lokasmiṃ, yadidaṃ buddho buddho’’ti. Yathā ca hi loke udumbarikapupphaṃ dullabhaṃ. Candamhi sasakaṃ hatthena gaṇhituṃ. Vāyasānaṃ khīraṃ, evaṃ buddhabhāvo atidullabhataroti vuttaṃ hoti. Ayaṃ pana hīnūpamāti daṭṭhabbā. Vuttañhetaṃ apadānapāḷiyaṃ –
‘‘Udumbarikapupphaṃva , candamhi sasakaṃ yathā; Vāyasānaṃ yathā khīraṃ, dullabhaṃ lokanāyaka’’nti ca; Dullabho buddhuppādo lokasmi’’nti ca;
转轮王出现世间虽亦难得,但在一个劫中,亦会有多位转轮王出世。然而如来出现世间,一个劫中唯有一位、两位、三位、四位或五位佛陀出现,绝不超出此数。因为在无量劫中,亦有空劫——全然无如来出现。因此,如来只是偶尔、极少时出现,故说“佛陀、佛陀之声极为难得,何况佛位”。世尊在《大般涅槃经》中也这样说:“阿难,诸天正在抱怨:‘我们从远方而来,为见如来。如来、阿拉汉、正自觉者只是偶尔、极少时出现于世间。今夜后夜时分,如来将般涅槃。而这位有大威力的比丘挡在世尊面前,致使我们在最后时刻无法得见如来。’”显示巴利原文
Kiñcāpi hi loke cakkavattirājūnaṃ uppajjamāno dullabho. Ekasmimpi pana kappe cakkavattirājāno anekā uppajjanti. Tathāgatā pana loke uppajjamānāpi ekasmiṃ kappe eka dviti catu pañca buddhāyeva uppajjanti, na taduttari. Yasmā hi asaṅkhyeyyepi kappe tathāgatasuñño hoti. Tasmā tathāgatasseva kadāci karahaci uppajjanato buddhobuddhotighoso atidulabhataro kā kathā buddhabhāvoti vutto. Vuttampi cetaṃ bhagavatā mahāparinibbānasamaye ‘‘devatā ānanda ujjhāyanti. Durāvatamhā āgatā tathāgataṃ dassanāya kadāci karahaci tathāgatā loke uppajjanti arahanto sammāsambuddhā. Ajja rattiyā paccūsasamaye tathāgatassa parinibbānaṃ bhavissati. Ayañca mahesakkho bhikkhu bhagavato purato ṭhito ovārento otarento vā na mayaṃ labhāma pacchime kāle tathāgataṃ dassanāyā’’ti.
“佛位”即佛陀之状态。“何待言”意为这还有什么可说的。为何说佛极其难得,却又说佛只是偶尔、极为稀有地出现?难道不是有许多佛于世间出现吗?确实如此。然而,名为“佛”者,必须历经无数劫的次数,或无数劫的日、月、年,乃至无数劫的漫长岁月,圆满十波罗蜜与五大舍离,方能成就,非仅一次等便能成就。实际上,至少须经四阿僧祇又十万劫,圆满十波罗蜜与五大舍离,才能成佛。因此说佛极其难得,又说诸佛只是偶尔、极为稀有地出现。显示巴利原文
Buddhabhāvoti buddhassa bhāvo. Kā kathāti kiṃ vattabboevāti attho. Kasmā pana buddho atidullabhataroti ca, buddho kadāci karahaci uppajjantīti ca vuttaṃ. Nanu buddhā loke anekā uppajjantīti. Saccametaṃ. Buddho nāma pana anekāsaṅkhyeyyavārena vā anekāsaṅkhyeyyadivasamāsasaṃvaccharaṃ vā anekāsaṅkhyeyyakappaṃ vā dasapāramiyo ca pañcamahāpariccāge ca pūretvāva bhavituṃ sakkoti, na ekekavārādinā. Atha kho pana antamaso kappasatasahassādhikāni cattāri asaṅkhyeyyāni dasapāramiyo ca pañca mahāpariccāge ca pūretvāva buddho bhavituṃ sakkoti. Tasmā buddho atidullabhataroti ca, buddhā kadāci karahaci uppajjantīti ca vuttanti.
如此,由于佛极其难得,且只是偶尔、极为稀有地出现,称扬“佛、佛”者能得大果报。这在《譬喻经》中说过:显示巴利原文
Evaṃ buddhassa atidullabhatarattā ca kadāci karahaci uppannattā caeva buddhobuddhoti kittayantassa mahapphalaṃ hoti. Vuttañhetaṃ apadāne –
“称扬‘佛’者,身中所生之喜,
此喜确实殊胜,胜过整个赡部洲洲。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Buddhoti kittayantassa, kāye bhavati yā pīti; Varameva hi sā pīti, kasiṇenapi jambudīpassā’’ti.
“因此”:因为“佛”之声名极为难得,佛位更不待言,所以。“有智者”指具足智慧者。他们能特别地修习、阐明利与不利、因与非因,故称“vibhāvā”,即智慧。“vi”为前缀,“bhū”为存在之词根,加“ṇa”后缀。他们具有此“sā”智,故称“有智者”,也就是善士。此词用作“善士”的修饰语。显示巴利原文
Tasmāti yasmā buddho buddhoti ghoso atidullabhataro, buddhabhāvo kā kathā. Tasmā. Vibhāvīti medhāvī. Te hi hitāhitaṃ kāraṇākāraṇaṃ vā visesena bhāveti pakāsetīti vibhāvā, paññā. Vipubba bhūdhātu sattāyaṃ ṇa. Sā etesaṃ atthīti vibhāvīti vuccanti, sādhavo labbhati. Taṃ pana sādhavoti pade visesanaṃ.
“种种利乐”:指各种世间与出世间的利益与安乐,其义如前已说。此词作为“渴望”的宾语。“善士”:指善良之人,他们能成就自他之利,故称“善士”。词根“sādh”意为成就,加后缀“avo”。此词与“礼敬”构成主格关系。“渴望”即希求,渴望种种利乐者称为“渴望者”,也就是善士。词根“patth”意为希求,加后缀“anta”,再增入“ya”音。此词为“善士”的修饰语。“所欲”:指所希求的,应被希求、应被渴望者。词根“isu”为希求、渴望,加后缀“tap”,词根末音省略。“义利”:指现世、来世等利益,被希求、被渴望者为“义利”,即果报、利益、结果。词根“atth”意为希求,加后缀“a”;或由“asa”词根(存在)加“tha”后缀,以果报之状态而存在故。“义利”与“所欲”二词同为“承载”的宾语。“承载者”:即持护者,能承载运载者,指佛陀。词根“vah”意为承载、到达,加后缀“anta”。佛陀通过说法,为众生持护世间与出世间的利乐,这便是其含义。显示巴利原文
Vividhahitasukhanti nānappakāraṃ lokiyalokuttara saṅkhātaṃ hitasukhaṃ. Tassa pana attho heṭṭhā vuttoyeva. Taṃ pana patthayantātipade kammaṃ. Sādhavoti sappurisā. Te hi saparahitaṃ sādheti nibbattetīti sādhavoti vuccati. Sādhadhātu saṃsiddhiyaṃ avo. Tassa pana padassa namassantūti padena kattubhāvena sambandho. Patthayantāti yācantā. Vividhahitasukhaṃ patthayanti yācantīti patthayantā, sādhavo. Patthadhātu yācane anto. Yakārāgamo. Taṃ pana sādhavotipade visesanaṃ. Iṭṭhanti kāmayamānaṃ. Icchitabbaṃ kamitabbanti iṭṭhaṃ. Isudhātu icchā kantīsu tapaccayo. Tassa raṭṭho, dhātvantalopo. Atthanti diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikādiatthaṃ. Atthiyati patthiyatīti attho, vipākānisaṃsaphalaṃ. Atthadhātu yācanāyaṃ a . Atha vā asati bhavati phalabhāvenāti attho. Asadhātu bhuvimhi tha. Taṃ pana padadvayaṃ vahantantipade kammaṃ. Vahantanti dhārakaṃ. Vahati haratīti vahanto, buddho. Vahadhātu vahane pāpuṇane vā anto. Buddho hi sattānaṃ lokiyalokuttarahitasukhaṃ dhammadesanāya dhāretīti attho.
「为天人所供养」:即受到天与人以四资具等所供养。此处再作词释:以自在游戏等而辉耀故,名为sura(天),即天神;sura(天)字属dit词根。或者说,sura(天)意为追求、获得、辉耀天界自在,故称天神。又因有美妙之言,故名为surā(天),即天神。维护蕴之相续故,名为narā(人);nara(人)字属「引导」义词根,变为a音。合天与人故,名为suranarā(天与人)。堪为天人所尊崇、供养故,名为suranaramahito(为天人所尊崇),即佛陀;maha(大)字于此作「供养」义,变为ta音。即此suranaramahito(为天人所尊崇)。nibbhayanti即无怖畏(abhayaṃ);bhiyate即怖畏(bhayaṃ)。无此怖畏故,名为nibbhayo(无怖畏),即佛陀。即此nibbhayaṃ(无怖畏)。意思是:在如来所处的八种众会之中,没有任何因缘能令他生起怖畏、心惊、战栗。显示巴利原文
Suranaramahitanti devehi ca manussehi ca catupaccayādīhi pūjitaṃ. Idaṃ panettha nibbacanaṃ. Issariyakīḷādīhi suranti dibbantīti surā, devā. Suradhātu dittiyaṃ. Atha vā suranti īsanti devissariyaṃ pāpuṇanti virocanti cāti surā, devā. Sundarā rā vācā etesanti vā surā, devā. Khandhasantānaṃ naranti nentīti narā, manussā. Naradhātu nayane a. Surā ca narā ca suranarā. Tehi mahitabbā pūjitabbāti suranaramahito, buddho. Mahadhātu pūjāyaṃ ta. Taṃ suranaramahitaṃ. Nibbhayanti abhayaṃ. Bhiyate bhayaṃ. Natthi bhayaṃ etassāti nibbhayo, buddho. Taṃ nibbhayaṃ. Tathāgatassa aṭṭhasu parisāsu kenaci kāraṇena bhayaṃ hadayacalanaṃ kampanaṃ natthīti attho.
「应施者」:即信仰他世之后,应施与最上布施的对象。应被施与故,名为dakkhiṇā(施),即所施之物;dā(给与)词根表施与义,加khiṇa缘。或者说,有情借此得以如愿增长种种成就,故名为dakkhiṇā(施),即信仰他世之后应施与的布施;dakkha(增长)词根表增长义,e转为u。堪受此施故,名为dakkhiṇeyyo(应施者),即佛陀;由arahati(值得)加ṇeyyo后缀而成。或者说,由随顺布施之利益、作大果报之义而净化,故名为dakkhiṇeyyo(应施者),即佛陀;由visodheti(净化)加后缀。实因佛陀由作大果报之义、由净化之义,以及如诸天、帝释、梵天,又如拘萨罗王等,及给孤独长者等,在信仰他世之后所施与的最上布施,佛陀都极为堪受,故以「应施者」赞颂之。显示巴利原文
Dakkhiṇeyyanti paralokaṃ saddahitvā dātabbauttamadānārahaṃ. Dātabbāti dakkhiṇā, deyyadhammavatthu. Dādhātu dānekkhiṇapaccayo. Atha vā dakkhanti vaḍḍhanti etāya sattā yathādhippetāhi sampattīhīti dakkhiṇā, paralokaṃ saddahitvā dātabbadānaṃ. Dakkhadhātu vaḍḍhaneyu, taṃ arahatīti dakkhiṇeyyo, buddho. Arahatitaddhite ṇeyyo. Atha vā dakkhiṇāya hitaṃ anurūpaṃ mahapphalakaraṇatāya visodhetīti dakkhiṇeyyo, buddho. Visodhetitaddhitāyaṃ. Buddhoyeva hi dakkhiṇāya mahapphalakaraṇavasena ca, visodhanavasena ca, devasakkabrahmehi ca, kosalarājādīhi ca, anāthapiṇḍikaseṭṭhādīhi ca paralokaṃ saddahitvā dātabbaṃ uttamadānaṃ visesena arahati, tasmā dakkhiṇeyyanti thometi.
「世间」:即有情世间。其义如前文已说。「令喜增长」:即以喜悦令其增长。被喜故,名为nandi(喜);此为表达情状之词;nanda(喜)词根表成就义,或于nandane(喜)义,转为i音。这是喜悦的同义词。令喜悦增长、令觉悟故,名为nandivaḍḍho(令喜增长),即佛陀;nandi词置于前,vaḍḍha(增长)词根表增长义,变为a音。其义为:佛陀确实以具足三十二大丈夫相、八十随好,以及具足一切知智等功德,并通过开示佛法,令世间一切有情的喜悦得以增长。实因一切有情在见佛、闻法之时,从无满足,故以世间之「令喜增长」赞颂之。《譬喻论注》说:「有情见佛,自然如见满月、大海,无有满足。一切有情见佛,如何能不满足?」然而,佛陀以三十二大丈夫相等,以及与声闻等共通的戒等功德,成为更为殊胜的具足者,且为一切天、人所极明显故,这是世尊在三十三天所开示的。显示巴利原文
Lokānanti sattalokānaṃ. Tassa pana attho heṭṭhā vuttoyeva. Nandivaḍḍhanti pītiyā vaḍḍhāpentaṃ. Nandiyate nandi. Bhāvasādhanoyaṃ. Nandadhātu samiddhiyaṃ nandane vā i. Pītiyā adhivacanametaṃ. Sā vaḍḍheti buddhetīti nandivaḍḍho, buddho. Nandisaddūpapadavaḍḍhadhātu vaḍḍhane a. Buddho hi dvattiṃsamahāpurisalakkhaṇāsītānubyañjanalakkhaṇasampannena ca sabbaññutañāṇādiguṇasampannena dhammadesanāya ca loke sabbasattānaṃ pītiṃ vaḍḍhetīti attho. Sabbasattānañhi buddhadassane dhammasavane ca titto natthi, tasmā lokānaṃ nandivaḍḍhanti thometi. Vuttañhetaṃ apadānaṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘pakatiyāeva hi buddhadassane puṇṇacandasamuddarājadassane atitto lokoti. Kathaṃ pana sabbasattānaṃ buddhadassane atitto hotī’’ti. Buddhassa pana bāttiṃsamahāpurisalakkhaṇādīhi sīlādiasādhāraṇaguṇehi ca adhika sampanno hutvā sabbadevamanussehi ativirocamānattā. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā tāvatiṃse –
‘‘Na koci devo vaṇṇena, sambuddhaṃ atirocati; Sabbe deve adhiggayha, sambuddhova virocatī’’ti.
“十力”者,具足与独觉佛、声闻弟子不共的十种身力与十种智力。此力不为任何违逆因缘所动摇,故称为力。或说,借以活命故称为力,即身力。于“生命”义中,baladhātu的ā变为a。又,能负重故称为力,了知一切法故称为力,即智力。十种身力与十种智力,依“余一法”规则合称“十力”。具足他们,故为“具十力”,即佛陀。然此处虽依通称而说,由其所指为殊胜处故,意指世尊的十种身力与十种智力。他们之自相,于《Nayanasubhagakāyaṅgī》等偈颂注释中已说。显示巴利原文
Dasabalanti aññehi paccekabuddhāriyasāvakehi asādhāraṇena dasakāyabalena ca dasañāṇabalena sampannaṃ. Tañhi kehici viruddhehi kāraṇehi balanti na kampentīti balanti vuccati. Atha vā balanti jīvitaṃ kappenti etenāti balaṃ, kāyabalaṃ. Baladhātu pāṇe a. Balanti bhāraṃ vahituṃ sakkuṇantīti vā balaṃ, balanti jānanti sabbadhammanti balaṃ, ñāṇa balaṃ. Dasabalañca dasabalañca dasabalāni ekasesanayena. Tāni yassa soti dasabalo, buddho. Idha pana sāmaññavasena vuttopi visesaṭṭhāniyattā bhagavato dasakāyabalāni ca, dasañāṇabalāni ca adhippetāni. Tesaṃ pana sarū patthaṃ nayanasubhagakāyaṅgantyādi gāthāvaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttameva.
“无等”:于戒等功德上,无有与之等同者。因无有等同、相似之人,故称asamo(无等),即佛陀。此处asamaṃ(无等)即指此。“彼”:指具足如是功德的佛陀。“常”:即恒常、一切时、无有间断。“应礼敬”:即应当敬礼。显示巴利原文
Asamanti sīlādiguṇehi kenaci asadisaṃ. Natthi samo sadiso puggalo etassāti asamo, buddho. Taṃ asamaṃ. Tanti tādisaṃ guṇasampannaṃ buddhaṃ. Niccanti satataṃ samitaṃ sabbakālaṃ nirantaranti attho. Namassantūti abhivandantūti.
这即是此处的略义。在世间、三界或人世间,“佛陀!佛陀!”的称颂赞叹之声,是极难得中最极难得的;佛位——即佛陀的状态——又何需多言!因此,由于“佛陀!佛陀!”之声极为难得,那具足明慧的智者,寻求种种世间与出世间的利益安乐,希求现世与来世的义利,而能承载这一切的佛陀,是天人所尊崇、供养的,他无有怖畏、无有畏惧、无有惊恐,是信受他世者应行殊胜布施的应供者,是令有情世间喜乐增长者,具足不共的十力——十身力与十智力,于戒等功德中无有伦比,为无等者。对于具足如是功德的佛陀,应恒常、无间断地敬礼。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepayojanā. Loke tiloke manussaloke vā, buddhobuddhotighoso buddho buddhoiti kittisaddo thutisaddo vā, atidulabhataro ativiya dullabhatamo, buddhabhāvo buddhassa bhāvo, kā kathā kiṃvattabbo eva, tasmā buddhobuddhoti ghosassa atidullabhatarattā, vibhāvī medhāvī vividhahitasukhaṃ nānappakāraṃ lokiyalokuttarasaṅkhātaṃ hitasukhaṃ patthayantā yācantā, sādhavo sappurisā iṭṭhaṃ kāmayamānaṃ, atthaṃ diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikādiatthaṃ, vahantaṃ dhārakaṃ, suranaramahitaṃ devamanussehi pūjitaṃ, nibbhayaṃ abhayaṃ asantāsaṃ vā, dakkhiṇeyyaṃ paralokaṃ saddahitvā dātabbauttamadānārahaṃ, lokānaṃ sattalokānaṃ nandivaḍḍhaṃ pītiyā vaḍḍhāpanentaṃ. Dasabalaṃ asādhāraṇena dasakāyañāṇabalena sampannaṃ, asamaṃ sīlādiguṇehi kenaci asadisaṃ taṃ tādisaṃ guṇasampannaṃ buddhaṃ niccaṃ satataṃ samitaṃ sabbakālaṃ nirantaraṃ, namassantu abhivandantūti.
以此功德,愿我于来世亦为贤明、具念、知足者,
能干正直,聪慧明敏,精进无懈,富而好施
敏锐、英勇、坚毅、利益自他、长寿、无病
谷物丰足,容貌端丽,誉望显著,力能负重,名闻远扬,具足忍辱
显示巴利原文 Puññenetena sohaṃ nipuṇamati sato samparāye ca titto, Dakkho diṭṭhujjupañño avikalavīriyo bhogavā saṃvibhāgī; Tikkho sūro dhitatto saparahitadharo dīghajīvī arogo, Dhañño vaṇṇo yasassī atibalavadharo kittimā khantupeto.
具足信施戒,持最上吉祥,于现法离染,
有惭、有善友、乐善法、守护五戒等;
少欲、少嗔、心极清净、具神通、不可衡量,
愿我成为值得称叹、言辞慈爱、了知善士功德者,成为那样的佛弟子。
显示巴利原文 Saddho dātaṅgupeto paramasiridharo diṭṭhadhamme viratto, Lajjī kalyāṇamitto abhiratakusalo pañcasīlādirakkho; Appiccho appakodho ativujuhadayo iddhimā appameyyo, Pāsaṃso pemavāco sujanaguṇavidū māmako so bhaveyyaṃ.
27 27. 如此,在以“佛、佛”之声起始的偈颂中策励礼佛之后,今以“善逝”等偈颂礼敬佛陀并发起誓愿,遂说“以此功德,我……”等两首偈颂。而这两首偈颂也应视为“信乐偈”。其中,第一首偈颂的关联句为:“愿我以此功德,于来世成为具足微细智者、具念者……乃至具足堪忍者。”其中的“我”即那个我,意为“正在礼敬佛陀的那个我”。“以此功德”即以此礼佛的功德业,能清净作者自身之相续,故称为“功德”。“pu”字根有“净化”之义,加“ṇya”后缀。此处所说“功德”,其意趣是指成就礼佛行为的善思。应知此功德,依所礼对象与礼拜者的福田及意乐之成就,成为现法受报,即给予随顺已得成就之业的力量,排除其果报相续中的障碍——亦即排除了压迫业与断绝业,并令基于此功德而障碍所欲成就的疾病等不生起,这就是其含义。“于来世”中的“ca”字是不定连接词,应连接到“微细智者”等处。“来世”指他世,因众生依业与烦恼而往趣、到达此处,或众生依业与烦恼而应往趣、到达彼处,故称来世。前缀“saṃ-pari”显示巴利原文
27. Evaṃ buddho buddhoti ghosotyādigāthāya buddhavandane uyyojanaṃ katvā idāni sugatantyādīhi gāthāhi buddhaṃ vanditvā paṇidhiṃ karonto āha puññenetena sohantyādi gāthādvayaṃ. Ayaṃ pana gāthādvayampi saddharāgāthāti daṭṭhabbā. Tattha paṭhamagāthāyaṃ soahaṃ etena puññena samparāye nipuṇamati ca sato ca…pe… khantupeto ca bhaveyyanti sambandho. Sohanti so ahaṃ. Buddhassa namakkāro soahanti attho. Etena puññenāti iminā buddhavandanapuññakammena attano kārakaṃ pavati sodhetīti puññaṃ. Pudhātu sodhane ṇya. Puññanti ca idha pana buddhapaṇāmakriyābhinipphādikā kusalacetanā adhippetā. Sā ca vandaneyyavandakānaṃ khettajjhāsayasampadāhi diṭṭhadhamma vedanīyabhūtā yathāladdhasampattinimittakassa kammassa anubalappadānavasena tannibbattitavipākasantatiyā antarāyakarāni upapīḷakaupacchedakakammāni paṭibāhitvā tannidānānaṃ yathādhippetasiddhivibandhakānaṃ rogādiantarāyānamappavattiṃsādheti cāti attho ca veditabbo. Samparāye cāti ettha casaddo aṭṭhānayogo. So ca nipuṇamatityādīsu padesu yojetabbo. Samparāyeti paraloke. So hi samparāyitabbā upagamitabbā ettha sattehīti ca, kammakilesavasena sattehi samparāyitabbā pāpuṇitabbāti vā etthāti ca samparāyoti vuccati. Saṃparipubba ayadhātu hi gatiyaṃ ṇa. Atha vā kammavasena abhimukho sampareti gacchati pavattatīti samparāyoti vuccati. Saṃpubbaparadhātu gatiyaṃ ṇya. Iti kho ānanda kusalāni sīlāni anupubbena aggāya parentītiādīsu viya hi curādi gaṇavasena parasaddaṃ gatiyamicchanti saddavidū. Tasmiṃ samparāye.
“微细智者”:即具有微细、深妙智慧者,或具备能通达微细、深妙义理之智慧者。此处“微细”一词,是表示微细、深妙的非派生词根词。“慧”:了知何者有利、何者不利,故名为“慧”,即智慧。“man”字根有“知”义。具有微细、深妙之慧者,称为微细智者。“具念者”:即具有念者。能忆念,故名“念”。“sara”字根有“思虑”义。此念存于彼,故为具念者。“满足者”:即能饱足者,且指满足于已得之物者,此为其含义。饱足、满足称为“满足”。“tis”字根有“满足”义,加“ta”后缀,“sa”变为“to”。即依三种知足——如法所得之知足、如力所知足、如适宜所知足——而满足,如此说。显示巴利原文
Nipuṇamatīti saṇhasukhumapaññavā ca. Saṇhasukhumaṃ atthantaraṃ paṭivijjhanasamatthāya paññāya sampanno ca vā. Ettha ca nipuṇasaddo saṇhasukhumavācako anipphannapāṭipadiko. Hitāhitaṃ manati jānātīti mati, paññā. Manadhātu ñāṇeti. Nipuṇā saṇhā mati paññā yassa meti nipuṇamati. Satoti satimā ca. Saratīti sati, saradhātu cintāyanti. Sā assa me atthīti sato. Tittoti tappano ca. Yathāladdhavatthunā santuṭṭho cāti attho. Tisanaṃ tappanaṃ titto. Tisadhātu tappane tapaccayo. Sakārassa toādeso. Yathālābha santoso, yathābalasantoso, yathāsāruppasanto so cāti tividhena santosena santuṭṭhoti vuttaṃ hoti.
“善巧者”:于种种事务中熟练、善巧者。他因于善业及其他应作不应作中不迟钝、迅速而行,故称“善巧者”。“dakkha”字根有“迅速”义,加“a”后缀。“正直见慧者”:断词应为“正直见、正直慧者”,意为具足正直的见与慧。某些典籍中有“正直见、慧”的读法,断词同为“正直见、正直慧者”,义同。“正直”:以不弯曲的状态存在,故为“正直”,即正直。“uju”字根有“正直”义,加“kvi”后缀。或者,以不弯曲的状态转起,故为“正直”,即不曲。“ara”字根有“去”义,加“ju”后缀,“ara”变为“u”。正确地观见,故为“见”,即慧。“dis”字根有“观见”义,加“ta”后缀,变为“ṭṭha”,字根末音消失并加“ī”。以正直、不曲之见为慧,依所形容者后置的规则,称为“正直见”。以种种方式了知,依无常等而觉悟,故为“慧”。前缀“pa”加“ñā”字根有“觉悟”义,加“a”后缀。具有正直见与正直慧者,称为“正直见慧者”,即此人。“具足精进者”:即无不足之精进、圆满精进者,此为含义。使之减损,故为“减损”显示巴利原文
Dakkhoti taṃ taṃ kicce cheko ca kusalo ca vā. So hi kusalakamme aññasmiñca kiccākicce adandhatāya sīghaṃ gacchatīti dakkho. Dakkhadhātu sīghatthe a. Diṭṭhujjupaññoti diṭṭhiujupaññoti padacchedo. Uju diṭṭhipaññāya samannāgatoti attho. Kesuci potthakesu diṭṭhijju paññoti pāṭho. Diṭṭhiujupaññoti padacchedo, soye vattho . Ujūti akuṭilabhāvena bhavatīti uju, ajjavo. Ujudhātu ajjave kvi. Atha vā arati akuṭilabhāvena pavattatīti uju, avaṅko. Aradhātu gatiyaṃ jupaccayo. Arissa uādeso. Sammā passatīti diṭṭhi, mati. Disadhātu passane tapaccayo. Tassa raṭṭhādeso. Dhātvantalopo ca ī ca. Uju ajjavā diṭṭhi mati diṭṭhuju visesanaparanipātavasena. Pakārena jānāti aniccādivasena avabujjhatīti paññā. Papubbañādhātu avabodhane a. Ujudiṭṭhi ca ujupaññā ca yassa meti diṭṭhujjupañño, puggalo. Avikalavīriyoti anūnavīriyo ca paripuṇṇavīriyo cāti attho. Vihīnaṃ karotīti vikalo. Vipubbakaradhātu karaṇe a. Rassalo. Vīrānaṃ kammaṃ vīriyaṃ. Avikalaṃ anūnaṃ vīriyaṃ assameti avikalavīriyo. Na sakkā kusīteneva navalokuttaradhammā laddhuṃ, āraddhavīriyeneva sakkā. Tasmā avikalavīriyoti patthetīti vuttaṃ hoti.
“具财富者”:即具足应受用的资具安乐者。应受用者,称为“财富”,即资具。“bhuj”字根有“保护、受用”义,加“ṇa”后缀。财富存在于他,故为“具财富者”。“能分享者”:即具分享习性者,或具足分享者;或以分享为习性,故为“能分享者”;或具有分享之习性者,故为“能分享者”;或于分享中有习性者,故为“能分享者”。此为“具彼习性”义。或以法而分享,故为“有分享法者”;或有分享之法者,故为“能分享者”;或于分享中有法者,故为“能分享者”。此为“具彼法”义。分享之善行存在于他;或以善行而分享,故为“能分享者”;或为分享而善行者,故为“能分享者”;或于分享中为善行者,故为“能分享者”。此为“具彼善行”义。前缀“saṃ”加“bhaj”字根有“分配”义,加“ṇa”后缀,“ja”变为“ga”。或者,分享即“分享”。此分享存在于他,故为“能分享者”。于“存在”义中加“ī”后缀。意思是:常对乞求者等他人施舍食物等布施之物者。显示巴利原文
Bhogavāti bhuñjitabbasampattisukhena sampanno ca. Bhuñjitabboti bhogo, sampatti. Bhujadhātu pālanabyavaharaṇesu ṇa. Bhogo assa me atthīti bhogavā. Saṃvibhāgīti saṃvibhajanasīlo ca saṃvibhajanasampanno ca vā, saṃvibhajati sīlenāti saṃvibhāgī. Saṃvibhajanasīloti vā saṃvibhāgī, saṃvibhajituṃ sīlamassāti vā saṃvibhāgī. Saṃvibhāge sīlamassāti saṃvibhāgī. Ayaṃ tassīlattho. Saṃvibhajati dhammenāti saṃvibhajanadhammoti vā. Saṃvibhajituṃ dhammo assāti vā, saṃvibhajane dhammo assāti vā saṃvibhāgī. Ayaṃ taddhammattho. Saṃvibhajanaṃ sādhukāro assa atthi. Sādhukārinā saṃvibhajatīti vā, saṃvibhajituṃ sādhukārīti vā, saṃvibhajane sādhukārīti vā saṃvibhāgī. Ayaṃ tassā dhukārattho. Saṃvipubba bhajadhātu vibhāge ṇa. Jassa go. Atha vā saṃvibhajanaṃ saṃvibhāgo. So me assa atthīti saṃvibhāgī . Assathyatthe ī. Paresaṃ yācakānaṃ annādidānavatthuṃ niccaṃ pariccajanakārīti vuttaṃ hoti.
“锐利者”:指具有锐利智慧者,或具有如磨刀石般智慧者。“锐利”即磨石、磨刀石,比喻智慧。词根“tij”有“磨利”义,加“kha”后缀。是谁的?意为“我有锐利的智慧”,故称“锐利者”。在表“具有”义时加“ṇo”后缀。含义是:具足锐利智慧者。由于智慧是一切善法中最殊胜、最根本的原因,故发愿成为“锐利者”。正如《弥林达问经》中所说:显示巴利原文
Tikkhoti tikkhappaññavā ca nisānapaññavā vā. Tijanaṃ nisanaṃ tikkhā, paññā. Tijadhātu nisāne kha. Jassa ko. Tikkhā paññā me assa atthīti tikkho. Assathyatthe ṇo. Tikkha paññāya sampanno cāti attho. Paññāya ca sabba kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ seṭṭhattā mūlakāraṇattā ca tikkhoti patthanaṃ karoti. Vuttañhi milindapañhe –
智慧于世间备受称赞,为令正法久住而作;
以智慧断除疑惑,智者证得寂静。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Paññā pasaṭṭhā lokasmiṃ, katā saddhammaṭṭhitiyā; Paññāya vimatiṃ hantvā, santiṃ pappoti paṇḍito’’ti.
“勇者”:指在四众或八众中为英雄者,意为具有力量、无所畏惧。“勇者”由“sūrayate, vīrayate”派生,是表示状态的派生词。词根“sūra”意为勇猛或英雄,加后缀“a”构成。又或者,以无惧、无怖、无畏的本质而行、而存续,故称“勇者”;此中词根“sūra”意为行,加后缀“a”。其含义是:如狮子般在众中具足勇猛与英雄气概。然而,在教法中,那些通达正法者并未显示“勇者”一词的词源解释,仅显示了“勇者”即“殊胜勇者”的释义。“坚定者”:此处应解析为“坚定”与“自我”。“坚定”指定,“自我”指心。意为:具足心一境性者。“坚定”:即安住于单一所缘,故为“坚定”;或能持与单一所缘相应之法,故为“坚定”,即定。词根“dhā”意为持,加后缀“ta”。“自我”:即了知所缘,故为“自我”,指心。词根“ara”意为行,加后缀“ta”,元音缩短。具有这样的坚定之定与自我之心者,称为“坚定者”。显示巴利原文
Sūroti catūsu parisāsu aṭṭhasu parisāsu ca vīro ca. Sattivanto nibbhayoti attho. Sūrayate virayate sūro. Bhāvasādhanoyaṃ. Sūradhātu vikkantiyaṃ vīre vā a. Atha vā abhiruachambhianutrāsabhāvena sūrati gacchati pavattatīti sūro. Sūradhātu gatiyaṃ a. Sīho viya parisamajjhe sūravīrasampanno cāti attho. Sāsani kehi pana saddhammavidūhi sūrasaddassa nibbacanaṃ na dassitaṃ. Kevalaṃ pana sūroti visiṭṭhasūroti atthavivaraṇamattameva dassitaṃ. Dhitattoti ettha dhita attoti padacchedo. Dhitoti samādhi. Attanti cittaṃ. Ekaggacittasampanno cāti attho. Dhāti tiṭṭhati ekārammaṇehi dhito, ekārammaṇe sampayuttadhamme dhāretīti vā dhito, samādhi. Dhādhātu dhāraṇe ta. Ārammaṇaṃ arati jānātīti attaṃ, cittaṃ. Aradhātu gatiyaṃ ta. Rassa to. Dhito samādhi attaṃ cittaṃ assa meti dhitatto.
“自他利行者”:指行自利与利他者,即致力于自己与他人利益之人。行自己与他人之利益与目标者,称为“自他利行者”。由“saparahita”一词前置,加上意为“行”的词根“cara”,再加“a”后缀而成。“长寿者”:指寿命长远,或具足长寿根者。拥有长寿命者,称为“长寿者”,即具足一劫寿命之人。“无病者”:指远离疾病,亦即健康。能破坏、摧破肢节者,名为“病”,即疾病。词根“ruja”意为破坏,加“ṇa”后缀。又或以能伤害为义,称为“病”,词根“ruja”意为伤害,加“ṇa”后缀。无此病者,称为“无病者”,意谓应远离九十六种疾病。“吉祥者”:指具足吉祥、福德、智慧之相者。当知“吉祥”一词能表吉祥、福德、智慧之相。如《须大拏本生》中所说:“吉祥,被认为是吉祥的。”又如《睒弥本生》所说:“生下了具足吉祥、福德、智慧之相的儿子。”以下为词源解释:财富的成就与圆满,即是“吉祥”,意为吉祥、智慧、福德、诸相的具足。词根“dhana”意为成就。因词根有多义,加“ṇya”后缀。当删除“ṇ”字结合时,与显示巴利原文
Saparahitacaroti attahitaparahitacaro, attano ca parassa ca atthaṃ paṭipannako cāti attho. Attano ca parassa ca hitaṃ atthaṃ payojanaṃ carati paṭipajjatīti saparahitacaro . Saparahitasaddūpapada caradhātu caraṇe a. Dīghajīvīti dīghāyuko ca. Dīghena jīvitindriyena sampanno vā. Dīgho jīvo jīvitaṃ assa meti dīghajīvi. Āyukappampi dīghajīvitasampanno cāti attho. Arogoti rogaviraho ca ārogyaṃ vā. Rujjati bhañjati aṅgapaccaṅgānīti rogo, byādhi. Rujadhātu bhaṅge ṇa. Atha vā rujjati hiṃsatīti rogo. Rujadhātu hiṃsāyaṃ ṇa. Natthi rogo tassa meti arogo, channavutirogānaṃ abhāvo bhaveyyanti attho. Dhaññoti sirīpuññapaññālakkhaṇasampanno ca. Dhaññasaddo hi sirīpuññapaññālakkhaṇavācakoti daṭṭhabbo. Vuttañhi vessantarajātake ‘‘dhaññaṃ maṅgala sammata’’nti ca. Temiyajātake ‘‘dhaññapuññalakkhaṇasampannaṃ puttaṃ vijāyī’’ti ca. Idaṃ pana nibbacanaṃ. Dhananaṃ sampajjanaṃ dhaññaṃ, sirīpaññāpuññalakkhaṇānaṃ sampannanti attho. Dhanadhātu sampanne. Dhātūnaṃ anekatthattā ṇyapaccayo. Ṇakārānubandhe lope kate yapaccayena saddhiṃ nakārassa ñakāraṃ katvā dhaññanti rūpasiddhi veditabbā. Atha vā dhanaṃ sirīpaññā puññalakkhaṇasampadaṃ assa me atthīti dhañño. Assathyatthe ṇyo.
“容色者”:指具足容色之人。此处容色有两种:身色与德色。身色,指色身具足悦目的形色;德色,指具足戒、定、慧等功德,以及头陀行等行道功德。以下为词源解释:“容色”——能令变异者心生悦意,故为“容色”,指身体形色。又能显示自身本质,故为“容色”,指功德。词根“vaṇṇa”意为显示,加“a”后缀。此二义于此皆适用。有容色者,称为“容色者”,于表“具有”之义加“a”后缀。“有名声者”:指具足眷属,或有称誉者。此处名声有两种:眷属名声与称誉名声。其中,因以此眷属而得祭祀、得供养,故名为“名声”,指眷属。词根“yaja”意为供养,加“a”后缀,“ja”变为“sa”。又或能行至、能到达主人之周遭,故为“名声”,指眷属。词根“yā”意为行,加后缀。因以此而得祭祀、得供养,故为“名声”,指称誉之声。词根“yaja”用于天供、摄受、布施等法,加“a”后缀,“ja”变为“sa”。又或能行至、能到达、能遍满一切处,故为“名声”,指称誉之声或赞叹之声。词根“yā”意为行,加后缀。依单数剩余法,将“yaso”与显示巴利原文
Vaṇṇoti vaṇṇasampanno ca. Ettha ca vaṇṇo duvidho hoti sarīravaṇṇaguṇavaṇṇavasena. Tattha sarīra vaṇṇo nāma rūpakāyassa pāsādikarūpasampannatā. Guṇa vaṇṇo nāma sīlasamādhipaññādiguṇena ca dhutaṅgādipaṭipadāguṇena ca sampannatā. Idaṃ pana nibbacanaṃ. Vaṇṇeti vikāramāpannānaṃ hadayaṅgatabhāvaṃ pakāsetīti vaṇṇo, sarīrarūpaṃ. Vaṇṇeti attano dabbaṃ pakāsetīti vaṇṇo, guṇo. Vaṇṇadhātu pakāsane a. Idha pana tadubhayampi yujjati. Vaṇṇaṃ assa me atthīti vaṇṇo. Assathyatthe a. Yasassīti parivārasampanno kittivanto vā. Ettha ca duvidho hoti yaso parivārakittiyasavasena. Tattha yajiyati pūjiyati etena parivārenāti yaso, parivāro. Yajadhātu pūjāyaṃ a. Jassa so. Atha vā yāti gacchati pāpuṇāti sāmikassa parivāranti yaso, parivāro. Yādhātu gatiyaṃ sopaccayo. Yajiyati pūjiyati etenāti yaso, kittisaddo. Yajadhātu devapūjāsaṅgahakaraṇadānadhammesu a. Jassa so. Atha vā yāti gacchati pāpuṇāti sabbattha byāpananti yaso, kittighoso thutisaddo vā. Yādhātu gatiyaṃ sopaccayo. Yaso ca yaso ca yaso ekasesanayena. So assa me atthīti yasassī, assathyatthe sīpaccayo.
“具大力者”:指持有极大力者,即能执持极殊胜身力与智力之人。其义为:应如阿阇世王等,能持五象、十象之力;又如舍利弗长老等,能持智慧之力。“有称誉者”:指有称誉之声者。功德被称扬、被讲述,故为“称誉”,即赞叹之声。词根“kitta”意为声音,加“i”后缀。有此称誉之声者,称为“有称誉者”,于表“具有”之义加“mantu”后缀。“具足忍者”:指具足、完全具备、拥有忍辱者。忍耐、容忍即是“忍”。词根“khama”意为忍耐,加“ta”后缀。以此忍而具足、完全具备、拥有者,称为“具足忍者”。其义为:应如忍辱说法的苦行者般具足忍辱。因忍辱难行,是一切善法中之首要、最殊胜者,故发愿成为“具足忍者”。正如世尊所说:“忍辱是最高苦行,是容忍。”以及“没有比忍辱更高的。”以及“忍辱之力,是军队之力。”显示巴利原文
Atibalavadharoti atibalavantadhārako ca ativiya kāyabalañāṇabalavantaṃ dhāretīti atibalavadharo. Ajātasatturājādayo viya pañcahatthi dasahatthibalassa dhāraṇasamattho ca, sāriputtattherādayo viya ñāṇabalassa dhāraṇasamattho ca bhaveyyanti attho. Kittimāti kittighosavanto ca. Kittiyate kathiyate guṇanti kitti, thutighoso. Kittadhātu sadde i. Kittighoso assa me atthīti kittimā. Assathyatthe mantupaccayo. Khantupetoti khantiyā upeto samupeto samannāgato ca. Khamanaṃ sahanaṃ khanti. Khamudhātu sahane tapaccayo. Tassanti tāya upeto samupeto samannāgatoti khantupeto. Khantivādatāpaso viya khantupeto ca bhaveyyanti attho. Khantiyā hi dukkarattā sabbakusala dhammānaṃ padhānattā seṭṭhatapattā ca khantupetoti patthanaṃ karoti. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā ‘‘khantī paramaṃ tapo titikkhā’’ti ca. ‘‘Khantyā bhiyyo na vijjatī’’ti ca. ‘‘Khantībalaṃ balānīka’’nti ca.
‘‘Sīlasamādhipaññānaṃ , khantippadhānakāraṇaṃ; Sabbepi kusalā dhammā, khantyāyattāva vaḍḍhare’’ti ca.
此处是简要的义理连接:我,即我本人,以此功德、以此礼敬佛陀的功德业,于来世、他世,愿成为:具有敏锐智、微细智慧者;具念者;满足者,即于所得知足者;善巧者,于诸事务中熟练者;具正直见与智慧者,即正见具足、智慧圆满者;不懈精进者,精进无减、圆满者;具受用财富者,即具足应受用之乐成就者;喜分享者,乐于分享者;锐利者,智慧锐利者;勇者,具足力量与无畏者;坚定者,心得定、一境性者;自他利行者,行自利利他者;长寿者,寿命绵长者;无病者,远离疾病者;吉祥者,具足吉祥、福德、智慧之相者;容色者,容色具足者;有名声者,眷属具足者;具大力者,持大力量者;有称誉者,称誉远扬者;具足忍者,完全具备忍辱者。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepayojanā. Sohaṃ so ahaṃ, etena puññena iminā buddhavandanapuññakammena samparāye paraloke, nipuṇamati ca saṇhasukhumapaññavā ca, sato satimā ca titto tappano yathāladdhavatthunā santuṭṭho ca, dakkho taṃtaṃkicce cheko ca, diṭṭhujjupañño ujudiṭṭhi paññāya sampanno ca avīkalavīriyo anūnavīriyo ca paripuṇṇavīriyo vā, bhogavābhuñjitabbasampattisukhena sampanno ca saṃvibhāgī saṃvibhajanasīlo ca tikkho tikkhapaññavā ca, sūroti sattivanto nibbhayo ca, dhitatto samāhita citto ca ekaggacitto vā, saparahitacaro attahita parahitapaṭipannako ca dīghajīvī dīghāyuko ca arogo rogaviraho ca dhañño sirīpuññapaññālakkhaṇasampanno ca vaṇṇo vaṇṇasampanno ca yasassī parivārasampanno ca atibalavadharo atibalavantadhārako ca kittimā kitti ghosavanto ca khantupeto khantiyā upeto samupeto samannāgato ca bhaveyyanti.
28 如此,在“以此福德”等偈颂中对来世发愿之后,那位具足信心而希望于现世发愿的施主,便说了“具信、具足施因缘”等偈颂。其中,“具信”指具足信的特相——以相信业等为相状。相信即是信,或者说,因相信而得名信;与信相应的诸法借此而相信,故称为信。由前缀“saṃ”加词根“dhā”构成,意为持守。具体而言,此信以相信业等为特相,或以信解为特相;以澄净为味,犹如能使水澄清的宝石;或以跃进为味,犹如渡越暴流;以无浑浊为现起,或以胜解为现起;以应信之事为足处,或以入流支为足处。此信应当被视作如手、如财富、如种子。因为世尊曾说:“信是手,是大龙象”,“信是世间人的最胜财富”,“信为种子,苦行为雨”,“以信渡越暴流”,“以信为旅途资粮,信是人的伴侣”,“诸比丘,圣弟子是有信者”,以及“信财”。显示巴利原文
28. Evaṃ puññenetenatyādigāthāya samparāye paṇidhiṃ katvā idāni diṭṭhadhamme patthanaṃ kattukāmo saddho dātaṅgupeto tyādigāthamāha. Tattha saddhoti kammādi saddahanalakkhaṇāya saddhāya sampanno ca. Saddahanaṃ saddhā, saddahatīti vā saddhā. Saddahanti sampayuttadhammā etāyāti saddhā. Saṃpubbadhādhātu dhāraṇe ta. Sā pana kammādīsu saddahanalakkhaṇā. Okappanalakkhaṇā vā. Pasādarasā. Udakappasādakamaṇi viya. Pakkhandanarasā vā. Oghuttaraṇo viya . Akālussiyapaccupaṭṭhānā adhimuttipaccupaṭṭhānā vā, saddheyyavatthupadaṭṭhānā sotāpattiyaṅgapadaṭṭhānā vā. Sā hatthavittabījāni viya daṭṭhabbā. Bhagavatā hi sā saddhā ‘‘saddhāhattho mahānāgo’’ti ca. ‘‘Saddhīdha vittaṃ purisassa seṭṭha’’nti ca. ‘‘Saddhābījaṃ tapo vuṭṭhī’’ti ca ‘‘saddhāya tarati ogha’’nti ca ‘‘saddhā bandhati pātheyyaṃ, saddhā dutiyā purisassa hotī’’ti ca, ‘‘saddhesiko bhikkhave ariyasāvako’’ti ca, ‘‘saddhādhana’’nti ca.
“那些对佛、法、僧宝具足信心者,”
“他们以寿命、名声、荣耀远远地照耀我。”
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Yesaṃ atthi saddhā buddhe, dhamme ca saṅgharatane; Te maṃ ativirocanti, āyunā yasasā siriyā’’ti.
以及:“依信而行布施,受持戒律,行布萨,生起禅那,生起观智,生起道,生起神通,生起等至。”以及:“信成就难得。”因此,他发愿祈求:“愿我成为具信者。”显示巴利原文
Ca. ‘‘Saddhaṃ upanissāya dānaṃ deti, sīlaṃ samādiyati, uposathakammaṃ karoti, jhānaṃ uppādeti, vipassanaṃ uppādeti, maggaṃ uppādeti, abhiññaṃ uppādeti, samāpattiṃ uppādetī’’ti ca. ‘‘Dullabhā saddhāsampattī’’ti ca vuttā. Tasmā saddho ca bhaveyyanti patthanaṃ karoti.
而且,此信有四种:传承信、证得信、信解信与净信。其中,一切知菩萨自发愿以来便已具备,故称传承信。圣弟子由证悟真理而获得,故称证得信。当听闻佛、法、僧时,心不动摇而信解,故称信解信。仅仅对佛等生起清净的信心,故称净信。但在此处,因为是所愿求的处所,所以意指一切信。“我有信”故为“具信者”。在“有”的意义上,加上词缀“ṇa”。显示巴利原文
Sā ca pana catubbidhā hoti āgamasaddhā, adhigamasaddhā, okappanasaddhā, pasādasaddhā cāti. Tattha sabbaññubodhisattānaṃ abhinīhārato āgatattā āgamasaddhā nāma. Ariyasāvakānaṃ saccapaṭivedhena adhigatattā adhigamasaddhā nāma. Buddho dhammo saṅghoti vutte acalabhāvena okappanaṃ okappanasaddhā nāma. Buddhādīsu pasāduppattimattā pasādasaddhā nāma. Idha pana paṇidhānaṭṭhānattā sabbasaddhā adhippetā. Saddhā assa me atthīti saddho. Assathyatthe ṇa.
“具足施之因缘”:意即具足、完备拥有作为施者之因、施者之条件的财富成就。或者说,他以应施之物、接受布施的人以及信这三项因缘而具足、完备拥有。所施之物为“施物”。这是状态名词。“dā”词根意为施与,加词缀“a”。因缘以此而被了知、被认识,故称为“因缘”,即财富成就。施者的因缘即是“施之因缘”,以此而具足、完备拥有,故称“具足施之因缘”。或者说,所施之物为“施物”,即布施的物品。施者的因缘即是“施之因缘”,以此而具足、完备拥有,故称“具足施之因缘”。他的意思是:他发愿祈求:“愿我成就应施之物、接受布施的人以及信这三项因缘。”正如《如是语注》中所说:“因为只有在信、应施之物、接受者这三者现前时,布施才能成立。”显示巴利原文
Dātaṅgupetoti dātassa aṅgāya kāraṇabhūtāya dhanasampattiyā upeto samupeto samannāgato ca. Dātabbavatthu ca, tappaṭiggāhakapuggalo ca, saddhā cāti tīhi aṅgehi upeto samupeto samannāgato ca vā. Diyate dātaṃ. Bhāvasādhanoyaṃ. Dādhātu dāne a. Aṅgīyati ñāyati etenāti aṅgo, dhanasampatti. Dātassa aṅgo dātaṅgo, tena upeto samupeto samannāgatoti dātaṅgupeto, atha vā diyatīti dātaṃ, dānavatthu. Dātassa aṅgo dātaṅgo, tena upeto samupeto samannāgatoti dātaṅgupeto, dātabbavatthu ca, tappaṭiggāhaka puggalo ca, saddhā cāti tīhi aṅgehi sampajjāmīti patthanaṃ karotīti vuttaṃ hoti. Vuttañhi itivuttaṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘saddhā deyyadhammo paṭiggāhako cāti imesaṃ tiṇṇaṃ samukhībhūtakāleyeva hi dānaṃ sambhavatī’’ti.
“持最胜吉祥者”:即持有最上吉祥者,或能持守最上吉祥者。此处,“吉祥”是智慧、福德、身庄严与成就的异名。由于为已作福德者所依止,故称为“吉祥”;或者,它依止于已作福德之人,故为“吉祥”;即获得智慧、福德、身庄严与成就。“sidh”词根意为“依止”,加“ira”和“ī”词缀。最上、最殊胜的吉祥是“最胜吉祥”,持此者即是“持最胜吉祥者”,意为能持守最胜吉祥者。显示巴利原文
Paramasiridharoti uttamasirīdhārako ca. Uttamasiriṃ dhāraṇasamattho ca vā. Ettha ca sirīti paññāpuññasarīrasobhaggasampattīnametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Katapuññehi seviyatīti sirī, katapuññe puggale sevati nissayatīti vā sirī, paññāpuññasarīrasobhaggasampatti labbhati. Sidhātu sevāyaṃ iro ī ca. Paramā uttamā sirī paramasirī, taṃ dhāretīti paramasirīdharo, paramasiriyā dhāraṇasamatthoti attho.
“现世”:指现前存在的自身相续。在此,现前存在的自身相续称为“现世”。因为它是应被见的,故为“现见”,即自身相续。应被见、应被观察的法及其自性存在其中,故称为“现世”。在此现世中,“离染者”是指于诸欲功德中远离染着的人。染着称为“染”,源自词根“ranj”,意为染着。远离了染着的人即是“离染者”。“有惭者”是指对恶法怀有惭耻,或具足那种以厌恶恶法为相的惭的人。或者,“有惭者”即具足惭与愧。因为以“有惭者”这一词,通过特相引出的方式,也包含了愧。为什么?因为善法特相的本性相同。正如《导论》中所说:显示巴利原文
Diṭṭhadhammeti paccakkhabhūte attabhāve. Ettha ca diṭṭhadhammo vuccati paccakkhabhūto attabhāvo. So hi passitabboti diṭṭho, attabhāvo. Diṭṭho passitabbo dhammo sabhāvo assāti diṭṭhadhammoti vuccati. Tasmiṃ diṭṭhadhamme. Virattoti kāmaguṇesu vigataratto ca, rajjanaṃ ratto. Ranjadhātu rāge. Vigato ratto assa meti viratto. Lajjīti pāpahirivanto ca, pāpajigucchanalakkhaṇāya lajjāya sampanno ca vā. Atha vā lajjīti hirottappasampanno ca. Lajjīsaddena hi lakkhaṇāhāranayena ottappampi gahetabbaṃ. Kasmā, kusala lakkhaṇasabhāvena samānattā. Vuttañhetaṃ nettipāḷiyaṃ –
“宣说一法时,凡是具有同一特相的诸法皆已穷尽,此即所谓特相引出之理。”
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Vuttamhi ekadhamme, ye dhammā ekalakkhaṇā keci; Vuttā bhavanti sabbo, sohāro lakkhaṇo nāmā’’ti.
‘惭’即羞惭,为惭。‘有惭’即是有惭,意指于身恶行等具足惭与愧。‘善友’即具足善妙之友。‘善’字表美妙义,非派生词基;或以‘善’为吉祥、利益,‘引导’为引导,故‘善友’即是善妙之友。‘友’即亲爱、被亲爱者。‘有善友’即具有善友,意为具足利益、守护、善妙之友。此处则指具足信、戒、闻、施、精进、念、定、慧等功德的善友。关于此,世尊于《教授尸迦罗越经》中说:显示巴利原文
Lajjatīti lajjā, hiri. Lajjadhātu hiriyaṃ. Lajjā assa me atthīti lajjā, kāyaduccaritādito hirottappasamannāgato cāti attho. Kalyāṇamittoti sundaramitta sampanno ca. Kalyāṇasaddo hi sundaravācako anipphanna pāṭipadiko. Atha vā kalyaṃ hitaṃ aṇayati pāpayatīti kalyāṇo, sumitto. Kalyasaddūpapadaaṇadhātu gatiyaṃ ṇa. Mijjati sinehatīti mitto, mijjiyati sinehiyatīti vā mitto, midadhātu sinehe ta. Kalyāṇo mitto assa meti kalyāṇamitto. Hitadharasumittasampanno ca bhaveyyanti attho. Idha pana saddhāsīlasutacāgavīriyasati samādhipaññāguṇehi samannāgato kalyāṇamitto adhippeto. Taṃ pana sandhāya bhagavatā siṅgālasutte –
‘有利益之友,苦乐中之同伴;’
能说义理的朋友,与悲悯朋友的朋友。
智者了知这四种朋友后,便应恭敬
亲近承事,犹如母亲对待亲生之子。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Upakāro ca yo mitto, sukhadukkhe ca yo sakhā; Atthakkhāyī ca yo mitto, yo ca mittānukampako; Etepi mitte cattāro, iti viññāya paṇḍito; Sakkaccaṃ Payirupāseyya, mātā puttaṃva orasa’’nti vutto.
在《清净道论》中:显示巴利原文
Visuddhimagge ca –
“他可爱、可敬、值得修习,能说法且堪忍言辞,能作甚深之论,不劝导无益之事。”如此说。因这样善友极为难得,故发愿“愿我值遇善友”,这便是所说的发愿。显示巴利原文
‘‘Piyo garu bhāvanīyo, vattā ca vacanakkhamo. Gambhīrañca kathaṃ kattā, no cāṭṭhāne niyojaye’’ti vutto. Iti evarūpassa ca kalyāṇamittassa dullabhattā kalyāṇamittena sampajjāmīti patthanaṃ karotīti vuttaṃ hoti.
‘乐善者’:即乐于布施等福德善法。‘鄙恶’指恶趣之门,‘善’谓能阻止、防护、关闭彼门,即布施等福德法。‘善’字源于‘关闭’义。于他们善法中极度喜乐,故称‘乐善者’,此为依义合词。本应说‘善乐者’,为保护韵律而以词序颠倒如此说。或者,‘极度喜乐’为‘乐’,于善法中有此乐者,即‘乐善者’,意为恒常乐于行善积福,具足乐善之心。显示巴利原文
Abhiratakusaloti dānādipuññakusaladhammesu abhiramaṇo ca. Kucchitaṃ apāyadvāraṃ salanti saṃvaranti pidahanti sādhavo etenāti kusalaṃ, dānādipuññadhammā. Kupubba saladhātu saṃvaraṇe a. Tesu abhiatirekaṃ ramatīti abhiratakusalo , kitantasamāsoyaṃ. Kusalābhiratoti vattabbe chandānurakkhaṇatthaṃ padavipariyāyena evaṃ vuttanti. Atha vā abhiatirekaṃ ramanaṃ abhirato, kusalesu abhirato yassa meti abhiratakusalo, niccaṃ kusalapuññassa karaṇe abhiratacittasampanno cāti attho.
“能护五戒等”:即有能力守护五戒等。这里的“等”字,包含了在家众的八关斋戒、沙弥的十戒、比丘的四遍净戒。以五戒为首,故称“五戒等”;能守护他们、有能力守护,所以称为“能护五戒等”。对于在家众,以常戒而守护五戒;若更具精进力,则还以斋戒支守护八关斋戒与十戒,令戒不破、不穿、不杂、不染。对于沙弥,以沙弥戒守护十戒;对于比丘,以比丘戒守护四遍净戒,即有如此守护的能力。因为世尊曾这么说:“诸比丘,因戒坏失,众生身坏命终后,生于恶趣、苦处、堕处、地狱。”又说:“诸比丘,因戒具足,众生身坏命终后,生于善趣、天界。”又说:“戒具足者,得大财富聚,善美名声远扬,于四众之中,无畏无怯、从容近前,不迷乱而命终,身坏命终后生于善趣、天界。”在注释书中也说:“无有庄严如戒庄严,无有花如戒花,无有香如戒香。”又说:“依戒具足,得三明。”又说:“最初当令戒清净。”又说:“众生由戒而得清净。”又说:“戒为教法之始。”又说:“七清净中,戒清净名为身。”又说:“此戒是依止、是立足处、是所缘、是救护、是庇护、是归宿、是皈依。”因此,发愿“能护五戒等”,即是此中之意。显示巴利原文
Pañcasīlādirakkhoti pañcasīlādīnaṃ rakkhituṃ samattho ca. Ettha ca ādisaddena gihīnaṃ aṭṭhaṅguposathasīlaṃ, sāmaṇerānaṃ dasaṅgasīlañca, bhikkhūnaṃ catupārisuddhisīlañca saṅgaṇhāti. Pañcasīlaṃ ādi yesaṃ teti pañcasīlādi, taṃ rakkhati rakkhituṃ samatthetīti pañcasīlādirakkho. Gahaṭṭhānaṃ niccasīlavasena pañcasīlaṃ sati ussāhasamatthe uposathaṅgavasena aṭṭhaṅgasīlaṃ dasaṅgasīlañca akhaṇḍaṃ acchiddaṃ asabalaṃ akammāsaṃ katvā rakkhituṃ sāmaṇerasīlavasena dasasīlañca, bhikkhusīlavasena catupārisuddhisīlañca rakkhituṃ samattho cāti attho. Bhagavatā hi ‘‘sīlavipattihetu vā bhikkhave sattā kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā apāyaṃ duggatiṃ vinipātaṃ nirayaṃ upapajjantī’’ti ca. ‘‘Sīlasampadāhetu vā bhikkhave sattā kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā sugatiṃ saggaṃ lokaṃ upapajjantī’’ti ca. ‘‘Sīlasampanno mahantaṃ bhogakkhandhaṃ adhigacchati kalyāṇo kittisaddo abbhuggacchati. Catuparisaṃ visārado upasaṅkamati amaṅkubhūto. Asammūḷho kālaṃ karoti, kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā sugatiṃ saggaṃ lokaṃ upapajjatī’’ti ca vuttattā ca. Aṭṭhakathāyañca ‘‘sīlālaṅkārasadiso alaṅkāro natthi, sīlasadisaṃ pupphaṃ natthi, sīlagandhasadiso gandho natthī’’ti ca. ‘‘Sīla sampattiñhi nissāya tisso vijjā pāpuṇātī’’ti ca. ‘‘Ādimhi sīlaṃ visodheyyā’’ti ca. ‘‘Sattā sīlena visujjhantī’’ti ca. ‘‘Sīlaṃ sāsanassa ādī’’ti ca. ‘‘Sattasu visuddhīsu sīlavisuddhi sarīraṃ nāmā’’ti ca. ‘‘Sīlaṃ nāmetaṃ avassayo patiṭṭhā ārammaṇaṃ tāṇaṃ leṇaṃ gati parāyana’’nti ca vuttattā pañcasīlādirakkhoti patthanaṃ karotīti vuttaṃ hoti.
“少欲”:即无欲,指对于色等欲功德无所欲求。此处“少”字表示无有之义。如同“少蚊虻、风热”等中的用法,“欲求”是欲,或者是求取色等欲功德者,是欲,也就是欲贪。“少欲”有四种:资具少欲、教理少欲、头陀支少欲、证悟少欲。其中,于四资具中少欲,名为资具少欲:若有人,他人给予资具很多时,他只取少许;给予很少时,他取更少,乃至不取,并非总是悉数接受,这便名为资具少欲。若有人通达三藏,却不欲令人知其多闻,这便名为教理少欲。若有人受持头陀支,却不令他人知道自己头陀支的行持之状,这便名为头陀支少欲。若有人证得预流等果位之一,却不欲让人知道自己预流等的果位,这便名为证悟少欲。发愿“愿我具足这些少欲功德”,即是此处的意思。显示巴利原文
Appicchoti aniccho ca, rūpādikāmaguṇesu anicchantoti attho. Abhāvatthohettha appasaddo. Appaḍaṃsamakasavā tātapātiādīsu viya icchanaṃ icchā, rūpādikāmaguṇaṃ icchatīti vā icchā, kāmataṇhā. Isudhātu icchākantīsu a. Dhātvantassaccho. Natthi icchā yassa meti appiccho, rūpādīsu kāmesu anicchanto cāti attho. Appiccho pana catubbidho hoti paccayaappiccho, pariyattiappiccho, dhutaṅgaappiccho, paṭivedhaappiccho cāti. Tattha catūsu paccayesu appiccho paccayaappiccho. Yo pana paccaye bahuṃ dente appaṃ gaṇhati, appaṃ dente appataraṃ vā gaṇhati na vā gaṇhati. Na anavasesagāhī hoti. Ayaṃ paccayaappiccho nāma. Yo pana tepiṭakopi samāno na bahussutabhāvaṃ jānāpetukāmo hoti, ayaṃ pariyattiappiccho nāma. Dhutaṅgasamādānassa pana dhutaṅgapariharaṇabhāvaṃ aññesaṃ jānituṃ na deti, ayaṃ dhutaṅgaappiccho nāma. Yo pana sotāpannādīsu aññataro hutvā sotāpannādibhāvaṃ jānāpetuṃ na icchati, ayaṃ adhigamaappiccho nāma. Imehi appicchaguṇehi sampanno ca ahaṃ bhaveyyanti vuttaṃ hoti.
“少嗔”:即远离具有恼害相之过失。所谓“他嗔怒”,因此称为嗔,这是嗔恚的异名。没有这种嗔,便称为“少嗔”。显示巴利原文
Appakodhoti dussanalakkhaṇadosato virahito ca. So hi kujjhatīti kodhoti vuccati. Dosassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Natthi kodho assa meti appakodho.
嗔怒者不知义利,嗔怒者不见法;
人被嗔怒征服时,便陷入一片黑暗。
显示巴利原文 Kuddho atthaṃ na jānāti, kuddho dhammaṃ na passati; Andhatamaṃ tadā hoti, yaṃ kodho sahate naranti.
作意已说的教法后,发愿‘少嗔’——这便是所说的意思。显示巴利原文
Vuttadesanaṃ manasikaritvā appakodhoti patthanaṃ karotīti vuttaṃ hoti.
“Ativujuhadayo”(极正直心者):即具足极正直之心。以无弯曲的状态而行、而转起,故为“uju”(正直),亦即“ajjava”(正直性)。“ar”字根有“行”之义,“ju”。“arissa”变为“u”。“ārammaṇa”(所缘)被持举,故为“hadaya”(心),即“citta”(心)。“hara”字根有“持举”义,“aya”。“rassa”变为“do”。或者,持举所缘而行、而转起,故为“hadaya”(心),即“citta”(心)。以“hara”音为前导的“aya”字根有“行”义,“a”。“uju”且是“hadaya”,故为“ujuhadaya”(正直心)。拥有极正直之心者,故为“ativujuhadayo”(极正直心者)。应成为远离三种弯曲——即如牛尿弯曲、如新月弯曲、如犁头弯曲——而具足极正直之心者,这是其含义。其中,有人造了恶后却说‘我没做’,他因前往又退缩,故名为‘牛尿弯曲’。有人正在造恶时却说‘我怕恶’,他因心多弯曲,故名为‘新月弯曲’。有人正在造恶时却说‘谁显示巴利原文
Ativujuhadayoti atieva ujucittasamannāgato ca. Arati gacchati pavattati akuṭilabhāvenāti uju, ajjavaṃ. Aradhātu gatiyaṃ ju. Arissa u. Ārammaṇaṃ haratīti hadayaṃ, cittaṃ. Haradhātu haraṇe aya. Rassa do. Atha vā ārammaṇaṃ harantaṃ ayati gacchati pavattatīti hadayaṃ, cittaṃ. Harasaddūpapada ayadhātu gatiyaṃ a. Uju ca taṃ hadayañcāti ujuhadayaṃ. Atieva uju hadayaṃ assa meti ativujuhadayo. Gomuttavaṅko ca candalekhāvaṅko ca naṅgalakoṭi vaṅko cāti tīhi vaṅkehi vigato hutvā ativiya ujucittasamannāgato ca bhaveyyanti attho. Tattha ca yo pāpaṃ katvāva na karomīti bhāsati. So gantvā paccosakkanatāya gomuttavaṅko nāma. Yo pāpaṃ karontova bhāyāmahaṃ pāpassāti bhāsati. So yebhuyyena kuṭilatāya candalekhā vaṅko nāma. Yo pāpaṃ karontova ko pāpassa na bhāyeyyāti bhāsati, so nātikuṭilatāya naṅgalakoṭivaṅko nāma hoti. Yassa vā tīṇi kammadvārāni asuddhāni. So gomuttavaṅko nāma hoti. Yassa yāni kānici dve. So candalekhā vaṅko nāma. Yassa yaṃkiñci ekaṃ. So naṅgalakoṭivaṅko nāmāti veditabbo.
“Iddhimā”(具神通者):即具足神通。关于“iddhi”(神通)一词的词义,前文已述。拥有“iddhi”者,故为“iddhimā”。表“存在”之义,加“mantup”后缀。其含义是:在生为人时,以人类神通;在生天时,以天神神通;在成沙门时,以沙门神通而圆满成就。显示巴利原文
Iddhimāti iddhiyā samannāgato ca, iddhisaddassa vacanattho heṭṭhā vuttoyeva. Iddhi assa me atthīti iddhimā. Assathyatthe mantupaccayo. Mānussikāle manussiddhiyā devuppattikāle deviddhiyā samaṇuppattikāle samaṇiddhiyā ca sampuṇṇeyyanti attho.
“Appameyyo”(不可量者):即具足不可量的戒等功德。可被量度者为“pameyyo”(可量者)。“pa”前缀的“mā”字根有“量度”义,“ṇya”。不可量度者为“appameyyo”(不可量者)。他拥有不可量的戒等功德,故为“appameyyo”。表“存在”之义,加“ṇa”后缀。这是说:他发愿“愿我以不可量的戒等功德,亦以财富成就而圆满”。显示巴利原文
Appameyyoti appametabbehi sīlādiguṇehi sampanno ca. Pametabboti pameyyo. Papubbamādhātu pamāṇe ṇya. Na pameyyo appameyyo, appameyyo sīlādiguṇo me assa atthīti appameyyo. Assathyatthe ṇa. Appameyyehi sīlādiguṇehi ca bhogasampattīhi ca sampajjāmīti patthanaṃ karotīti vuttaṃ hoti.
“Pāsaṃso”(应被称赞者):依戒等功德故,堪受佛陀等善士之称叹。被称叹、被赞叹,名为“pasaṃso”(所称叹者),此表状态。“pa”前缀的“saṃs”字根有“称赞”义,值得此者即“pāsaṃso”,于“应受”义加词缀“ṇa”。意谓:应当具足布施、持戒等功德,如是则为佛陀等善士所称叹者。显示巴利原文
Pāsaṃsoti sīlādiguṇehi buddhādisappurisānaṃ pasaṃsāraho ca, pasaṃsiyate thaviyate pasaṃso. Bhāva sādhanoyaṃ. Papubbasaṃsadhātu thutiyaṃ, taṃ arahatīti pāsaṃso. Arahatitaddhite ṇa. Buddhādisappurisehi pasaṃsi tabbehi dānasīlādiguṇehi sampanno ca bhaveyyanti vuttaṃ hoti.
“Pemavāco”(具可爱语者):因义理与文辞之甜美,而成就为佛陀等善士所喜爱的言语。“piya”(喜爱)即“pemā”(爱),亦即“vācā”(语言)。“pī”字根有满足、喜爱义,取“ima”。应被说者,为“vācā”(语言)。“vac”字根有表达义,在“语言”义上加“ṇa”。以爱语为所有,故名“pemavāco”(具可爱语者)。其义为:具备佛陀等善士所喜爱的、具足四支的言语。善士的语言具足四支:善说之语、法语、可爱语、真实语。正如《有偈品·相应部》中所说:显示巴利原文
Pemavācoti atthabyañjanamadhuratāya buddhādisappurisehi pemitabbavācāya sampanno ca. Piyateti pemā, vācā. Pīdhātu tappanakantīsu imo. Vacitabbāti vācā. Vacadhātu viyattiyaṃ vācāyaṃ ṇa. Pemā vācā assa meti pema vāco. Buddhādisappurisehi pemiyā caturaṅgasamannāgata vācāya sampanno cāti attho. Sappurisānaṃ pana vācā caturaṅgasamannāgatā hoti. Subhāsitavācā ca dhammavācā piyavācā saccavācāti. Tathāhetaṃ vuttaṃ sagāthāvagga saṃyutte –
“善说,诸善士说为最上,”
应说正法,不应说非法,这是第二;
应说可爱语,不应说不可爱语,这是第三;
应说真实语,不应说虚妄语,这是第四。
显示巴利原文 Subhāsitaṃ uttamamāhu santo, Dhammaṃ bhaṇe nādhammaṃ taṃ dutiyaṃ; Piyaṃ bhaṇe nāppiyaṃ taṃ tatiyaṃ, Saccaṃ bhaṇe nālikaṃ taṃ catutthanti.
此处连接如下:诸善士说,最上的善说、善言之语是:“应说正法,不应说非法”,他们说此为第二语;“应说可爱语,不应说不可爱语”,他们说此为第三语;“应说真实语,不应说虚妄语”,他们说此为第四语。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ panettha yojanā. Santo sappurisā uttamaṃ subhāsitaṃ suṭṭhu bhāsitaṃ vācaṃ āhu, dhammaṃ bhaṇe bhaṇeyya adhammaṃ na bhaṇe na bhaṇeyya, dutiyaṃ taṃ vācaṃ āhu, piyaṃ bhaṇe bhaṇeyya, appiyaṃ na bhaṇe na bhaṇeyya, tatiyaṃ taṃ vācaṃ āhu, saccaṃ bhaṇe bhaṇeyya alikaṃ na bhaṇe na bhaṇeyya, catutthaṃ taṃ vācaṃ āhūti.
“Sujanaguṇavidū”(善士功德了知者):即了知佛陀等善士的戒等功德者。“sujano”(善士)指善美之人。“guṇa”(功德)意为彰显具足戒等功德之人,即戒等功德,其字根有“显示”义,语基为“a”。佛陀等善士的功德称为“sujanaguṇo”,了知此功德者即“sujanaguṇavidū”。此词以“sujana”与“guṇa”为前分,“vid”字根有“知”义,后缀“ū”。其义为:应成为有能力了知佛陀等善士的戒、定、慧等功德者。显示巴利原文
Sujanaguṇavidūti buddhādisappurisānaṃ sīlādiguṇaṃ vijānako ca. Sundaro jano sujano. Guṇati pakāseti sīlādiguṇasamaṅgitaṃ puggalanti guṇaṃ, sīlādiguṇaṃ. Guṇadhātu pakāsane a. Sujanānaṃ buddhādisappurisānaṃ guṇo sujanaguṇo, taṃ vidati jānātīti sujanaguṇavidū. Sujana guṇasaddūpapadavidadhātu ñāṇe ū. Buddhādisappurisānaṃ sīlasamādhipaññādiguṇaṃ jānituṃ samattho ca bhaveyyanti attho.
“Māmako”(敬爱者):即对佛陀等善士怀有敬爱者。因敬爱故称“māmako”。“mama”字根有“尊敬”或“爱”义,后缀“ṇvu”,构成“aka”。其义为:应成为尊敬佛陀等三宝及正法者。“so”意为“我”。“bhaveyyanti”意为“愿成为”。显示巴利原文
Māmakoti buddhādisajjanānaṃ māmako ca. Mamāyatīti māmako. Mamadhātu mānane peme vā ṇvu. Tassa ako. Buddhādiratanattayañca saddhammañca mānanto ca bhaveyyanti attho. Soti so ahaṃ. Bhaveyyanti bhavāmīti.
然而,此处略作义理贯通:我愿于现世——即此可见的自身之中,具足信心,以信成就;具足施之资粮,即具备作为布施之因的财富圆满;亦具足所施之物、受施之人与信这三支;或为最胜吉祥之持有者、能持最胜吉祥者;于欲乐中离染、远离贪染;有惭耻、于恶行具足羞耻,或具足惭,其相为厌恶恶行;具足惭与愧;有善友、具足良友;乐于善法、于布施等福德善法中欣乐;能守护五戒等、有能力守护五戒等;少欲知足、无贪求,或不希求色等欲乐;少忿怒、远离以恼害为相的瞋过;其心极为正直、具足极为正直之心;具足神通;不可测度、具足戒等不可测度的功德;堪受称赞、因戒等功德而值得佛等善士称扬;言语可爱、因义理与文辞之甘美而具足佛等善士所喜爱的言语;了知善士功德、能了知佛等善士的戒等功德;属佛等善士之眷属;或恭敬佛法僧三宝与正法;愿我如是成就。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepayojanā. So ahaṃ diṭṭhadhamme paccakkhabhūte attabhāve, saddho saddhāya samannāgato ca, dātaṅgupeto dātassa aṅgāya kāraṇabhūtāya dhana sampattiyā upeto samupeto samannāgato ca, dātabba vatthu ca, tappaṭiggāhakapuggalo ca, saddhā cāti tīhi aṅgehi upeto samupeto samannāgato ca vā, paramasiridharo uttamasirīdhārako ca, uttamasiriṃ dhāraṇasamattho ca vā, viratto kāmaguṇesu vigataratto ca, lajjī pāpahirivanto ca, pāpajigucchanalakkhaṇāya lajjāya sampanno ca vā, hirottappasamannāgato ca vā, kalyāṇamitto sundaramitta sampanno ca, abhiratakusalo dānādipuññakusaladhammesu abhiramaṇo ca, pañcasīlādirakkho pañcasīlādīni rakkhituṃ samattho ca, appiccho aniccho ca, rūpādikāmaguṇesu anicchanto ca vā, appakodho dussanalakkhaṇadosato virahito ca, ativujuhadayo atieva ujucittasamannāgato ca, iddhiyā samannāgato ca, appameyyo appameyyehi sīlādiguṇehi sampanno ca, pāsaṃso sīlādiguṇehi buddhādisappurisānaṃ pasaṃsāraho ca, pemavāco atthabyañjanamadhuratāya buddhādisappurisehi pemitabbavācāya sampanno ca, sujanaguṇavidū buddhādisappurisānaṃ sīlādiguṇaṃ vijānako ca, māmako buddhādisajjanānaṃ māmako ca, buddhādiratanattayañca saddhammañca mānanto ca vā, bhaveyyaṃ bhavāmīti.
如是,于不可称量的、以相好所彰显的导师之功德中;
智者于诸能指示之偈颂中,乃至仅忆持一首偈颂。
显示巴利原文 Itthaṃ asaṅkhaye nātha, guṇe lakkhaṇadīpite; Gāthāsu sūcakāsveka, gāthampi sarate budho.
他解脱于四恶趣,并成就二种利益;
摧破灾厄之网,得获利乐与安乐。
显示巴利原文 Caturāpāyamutto so, sādhakatthadvayassa ca; Hatūpaddavajālo ca, lābhī hitasukhassa ca.
或为人天之主,乃至四洲之君;
愿于最后身中,成为他人之白伞盖。
显示巴利原文 Adhipo naradevānaṃ, catudīpissaropi vā; Bhaveyya antime dehe, tamaññaṃ setachattakaṃ.
Bhāvanāyānamāruyha, samamessati subbato; Imasmiṃ attabhāvepi, arogo dīghajīviko.
为一切世间所供养,其心乐修习;
受人喜爱、令人愉悦,更何况是持守无瞋者?
显示巴利原文 Pūjito sabbalokehi, bhāvanābhiratīmano; Janappiyo manāpo ca, kā kathākhiladhāraṇe.
29 29. 如此,以“以此福德”等两偈发愿之后,现在为了显示礼敬佛陀的果报利益,而宣说“如此”等五首偈颂。但这五首偈颂并非根本阿阇梨所宣说,而是后来由希求利益众生的智者们所加入的,应当这样看待。而这些偈颂,应视为“道行偈”。显示巴利原文
29. Evaṃ puññenetenatyādi gāthādvayena paṇidhiṃ katvā idāni buddhavandanassa phalānisaṃsaṃ dassento itthantyādi gāthāpañcakaṃ āha. Taṃ pana mūlācariyehi na vuttaṃ, pacchā pana hitakāmehi paṇḍitehi pakkhittaṃ gāthāpañcakanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tā pana gāthāyo pathyāvattagāthāti daṭṭhabbā.
其中,在第一首偈颂中,其关联如下:如此,在这些不可计量的、以相好所彰显的、能指示导师功德的偈颂中,任何一位智者若能忆持乃至一首偈颂。‘如此’即指前面以‘善逝’等所说的方式。‘不可计量’意为‘佛陀的功德有这么多’而无法计算。能被计算者,称为‘可计量’。或者,‘可计量’指被计算、被数算。‘Sakhidhātu’是‘计数’义,加‘ya’后缀。又或者,不能计算故为‘不可计量’。即使是一位佛陀的功德‘有这么多、有这么多’,也无法被任何人以百千亿年无有余遗地计算穷尽,更何况其他人。此义在《譬喻》中也有说明:显示巴利原文
Tāsu pana paṭhamagāthāyaṃ itthaṃ asaṅkhaye lakkhaṇadīpite nāthaguṇe sūcakāsu gāthāsu ekagāthampi yo budho sarateti sambandho. Itthanti iminā sugatantiādinā vuttappakārena. Asaṅkhayeti ettakā buddhaguṇāti gaṇetuṃ asamatthe. Saṅkhiyate saṅkhayā. Saṅkhiyati gaṇiyatīti vā saṅkhayā . Sakhidhātu saṅkhyāyaṃ yapaccayo. Atha vā saṅkhituṃ na sakkontīti asaṅkhayā. Ettakā buddhaguṇā ettakā buddhaguṇāti niravasesato ekabuddhopi anekavassa satasahassakoṭiyāpi gaṇetuṃ asamatthova. Pageva pana aññeti attho. Vuttampi cetaṃ apadāne –
纵使另一位佛陀宣说佛陀的功德,
若他持续宣说一劫乃至更久,
于此漫漫长劫之间,
如来的功德却不会耗尽。
纵能以斗量尽大海之水,
“你的全知智,实在无可测量”等。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Buddhopi buddhassa bhaṇeyya vaṇṇaṃ, Kappampi ce aññamabhāsamāno; Khīyetha kappo ciradīghamantare, Vaṇṇo na khīyetha tathāgatassā’’ti ca. ‘‘Sakkā samudde udakaṃ, pametuṃ āḷhakena vā; Natveva tava sabbaññu, ñāṇaṃ sakkā pametave’’ti ca.
《大篇相应注》中也说:“的确,诸佛的功德是无量的,就连诸佛自己,尚且无法毫无遗漏地宣说这功德,更何况其他的众生?”等。所谓“显示相”,即是应当以举例的方式进行说明。这里包含主力方法和示例方法。“依怙之德”,即佛陀的戒、定、慧等功德。而该词的词义如前所述。对于“于指责者中之一偈”,其断词方式为“于指责者中亦一偈”。“于指责者中”,是指在说明者之中。“于偈中”,是指在善逝等所说的二十六首礼敬偈之中。此中为地格,表示引出。“偈(gāthā)”,是指由诗人所吟唱、所宣说者。这是一种特殊状态。其词根为gedh,词缀为tha;gedh变为gā。或者,词根为gam(行),意为智;安住于此,所以称为gāthā。gam的词根义兼具“行”与“转”的意思;gam意为智,诗人依此智而编织、安置,因此称为gāthā,即在他们的偈颂之中。“亦一偈”,即也是其中一个偈颂。这里的“亦(pi)”字表示呵斥的含义。以此呵斥之意显示:“更不必说,在那么多的偈颂中去念诵佛陀的功德了!”“觉者(Budho)”,即智者。他了知何为义、何为非义,所以称为觉者。“Sarate”,即忆持。这是为表达护持欲乐的意味,在他称语态中,使用了自称语态的异音。显示巴利原文
Mahāvaggasaṃyuttaṭṭhakathāyañca ‘‘appamāṇā hi buddhā tesaṃ buddhāpi anavasesato vaṇṇaṃ vattuṃ asamatthā, pageva itarā pajā’’ti ca. Lakkhaṇadīpiteti upalakkhaṇa nayena pakāsitabbe. Ettha ca padhānanayo nidassana nayo ca labbhati. Nāthaguṇeti buddhassa sīlasamādhi paññādiguṇe. Tassa pana padassa vacanattho heṭṭhā vuttoyeva. Sūcakāsvekagāthampīti sūcakāsu ekagāthampīti padacchedo. Sūcakāsūti pakāsakāsu. Gāthāsūti sugatantyādinā vuttāsu chabbīsativandanagāthāsu. Niddhāraṇe cetaṃ bhummavacanaṃ. Kavīhi gāyati kathiyatīti gāthā. Pajjaviseso. Gedhātu sadde tha. Gedhātussa gādeso. Atha vā gaṃ vuccati ñāṇaṃ. Taṃ tiṭṭhati etthāti gāthā. Gaṃsaddūpapadathādhātu gatinivattiyaṃ. Gaṃ vuccati ñāṇaṃ, tena kavīhi bandhitvā thiyati thapiyatīti vā gāthā, tāsu gāthāsu. Ekagāthampīti ekapajjampi. Ettha ca pisaddo garahattho. Tena anekagāthāya buddhaguṇasaraṇe kā kathāvāti sambhāveti. Budhoti yo paṇḍito. So hi atthānatthaṃ budhati jānātītibudhoti vuccati. Sarateti sarati. Chandānurakkhaṇatthañhi parassapadativibhattiyā attanopadatevibhattādeso.
30 30.“如此,他就是觉者”,这是关联。“已脱四恶趣”,是指从地狱、畜生、饿鬼、阿修罗身这四种恶趣中获得解脱。多依福业而离去,所以称为apāyo(恶趣);或者,从乐处离去,所以称为apāyo。这是一个不变化复合词。另外,三种成就由此而去、行、转,所以称为aya,也就是福业。aya这个单词的词根,表示“行”义,词缀为a。依福业而去、行、转,或者应当被造福者所行、所转,因此称为aya,也就是乐;从那里离去,所以称为apāyo。四种恶趣,即四种恶趣;从那一切中得到解脱,所以称为“已脱四恶趣”。“及成办二利者”,其断词为:成办及二利。二利,即是名为现世利益和来世利益的两种利益。这里的“及(ca)”字是连词。那个“成办者”在这个场合中是适用的。成办者,即令其生起者。他成办、令其生起,所以称为成办者。显示巴利原文
30.Soti so budho bhaveyyāti sambandho. Caturāpāyamuttoti nirayatiracchānapetaasurakāyasaṅkhātehi catūhi apāyehi vimutto ca. Puññasammatā ayāyebhuyyena apagatoti apāyo. Ayato sukhato apagatoti vā apāyo. Abyayībhāvasamāsoyaṃ. Atha vā tisso sampattiyo ayanti gacchanti pavattanti etenāti ayo, puññaṃ. Ayadhātu gatiyaṃ a. Puññato ayati gacchati pavattatīti vā, puññakārīhi ayitabbo pavattetabboti vā ayo, sukhaṃ. Tato apagatoti apāyo. Caturo apāyo caturāpāyo, tehi mutto vimuttoti caturāpāyamutto. Sādhakatthadvayassa cāti sādhako atthadvayassa cāti padacchedo. Atthadvayassāti diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikasaṅkhātassa atthadvayassa. Ettha casaddo aṭṭhānayogo. So pana sādhako tyādīsu padesu yutto. Sādhakoti nipphādako ca. So hi sādheti nipphādetīti sādhakoti vuccati.
“及破灾网”:hata意为已破坏的灾网,由han(杀害)词根加词缀ta构成,表示已杀、已除。upaddava(灾)由upa前置词与du(侵害)词根组成,意为逼近而压迫、杀害,即生怖等十六种灾厄:生怖、老怖、病怖、死怖、王怖、贼怖、火怖、水怖、波浪怖、鳄怖、漩涡怖、鲨怖、自谴怖、他谴怖、罚怖、恶趣怖。jāla(网)本义为鱼网,由jal(杀害)词根加ṇa词缀构成,表示以此烤杀鱼;此处比喻如网,故称jālo(灾网),依密集义,指以此网罗杀害众生。因此“破灾网”即破除灾网,意谓由礼佛之心遣除灾厄之网。“获得利益与安乐”:lābhī意为获得者,源出lābha(获得)。hita(利益)有增长义,即真实义。sukha(安乐)令得安乐,即使人获得安乐;或解释为善巧掘除痛苦,由su(善)与khan(掘)词根构成。利益与安乐合为利益安乐,彼(礼佛者)能获得之。显示巴利原文
Hatūpaddavajālo cāti hato upaddavasaṅkhātajālo ca. Hanayittha apanayitthāti hato. Hanadhātu hiṃsāyaṃ ta. Upagantvā davati hiṃsatīti upaddavo, jātibhayādi soḷasaupaddavo. Upapubbadudhātu hiṃsāyaṃ, upaddavā nāma pana soḷasavidhā honti jātibhayaṃ, jarābhayaṃ, byādhibhayaṃ, maraṇabhayaṃ, rājabhayaṃ, corabhayaṃ, aggibhayaṃ, udakabhayaṃ, ūmibhayaṃ, kumbhilabhayaṃ, āvaṭṭabhayaṃ, susukābhayaṃ, attānuvādabhayaṃ, parānuvādabhayaṃ, daṇḍabhayaṃ, duggatibhayañcāti. Jalati hiṃsati macche etenāti jālaṃ, macchajālaṃ. Jālaṃ viyāti jālo, upaddavo. Nitatthena pana jalati hiṃsati satte etenāti jālo. Upaddavo. Jaladhātu hiṃsāyaṃ ṇa. Hato upaddavasaṅkhātajālo yena soti hatūpaddavajālo. Buddhapaṇāmacetanāya pahito upaddavasaṅkhātajālo bhaveyyāti attho. Lābhī hitasukhassa cāti hitassa ca sukhassa ca lābhī ca. Labhanaṃ lābho, taṃ assa atthīti lābhī, hinoti vaḍḍhatīti hitaṃ, atthaṃ. Sukhayatīti sukhaṃ. Yassuppajjati, taṃ sukhitaṃ karotīti attho. Atha vā suṭṭhu dukkhaṃ khanatīti sukhaṃ. Supubba khanudhātu avadhāraṇe kvi. Hitañca sukhañca hitasukhaṃ, tassa lābhī bhaveyyāti attho.
31-32 “或为人天之主,乃至四洲之主”:这是关联句。“人天”即人与天,此处为属格。adhipo(主)意为统治者:彼依法保护属民,或依法统治并保护,故称adhipo,由adhi前置词与pā(保护)词根构成。人主即为人王,天主即为天王。“乃至四洲之主”中的pi字是可能语气助词,表示“乃至”;由此推论:一洲之主尚且为王,何况乃至四洲之主。vā字仅为填充词。四洲即东胜神洲、西牛贺洲、南赡部洲、北俱卢洲,四洲之主即转轮圣王。其中,东胜神洲:pubba意为前面(东方),videha意为以智慧努力勤修于此,由vid(知)与īhā(努力)词根构成。此洲位于须弥山东方,故称东胜神洲。显示巴利原文
31-32. Naradevānaṃ adhipo ca catudīpissaropi vā bhaveyyāti sambandho. Naradevānanti narā ca devā ca naradevā, tesaṃ. Kammatthe cetaṃ chaṭṭhīvacanaṃ. Adhipoti issaro ca. So hi attādhīnaṃ pāti rakkhati dhammena vā adhiabhibhavitvā pāti rakkhatīti adhipoti vuccati. Adhipubbapādhātu rakkhane a, narānaṃ adhipo issaro manussarājā ca devānaṃ adhipo issaro devarājā ca bhaveyyāti attho. Catudīpissaropi vāti ettha pisaddo sambhāvanatthe nipāto. Tena pageva ekadīpissararājabhāvo ca, pade sissararājabhāvo cāti sambhāveti. Vā saddo padapūraṇa mattoyeva. Catudīpissaroti pubbavideho, aparago yāno, jambudīpo, uttarakuru cāti catunnaṃ dīpānaṃ issaro cakkavattirājāpi bhaveyyāti attho. Tattha pubbavidehoti sineruno pure bhavaṃ pubbaṃ, vedena paññāya īhanti vāyamanti etthāti vedeho, vidasaddūpapada īhadhātu vāyāme ṇa. Soyeva videho. Imaṃ dīpamupādāya sineruno pubbadisabhāgattā pubbo ca so videho cāti pubbavideho, pubbadīpo.
aparagoyāno(西牛贺洲):须弥山之彼方、后方存在,故为apara。以牛而行至此,故为goyāno。go词根,yā词根表行,yu为词缀。因属须弥山西方部分,故为aparagoyāno,即西洲。jambudīpo(南赡部洲):生起,故为jambu。百由旬粗干之树。jan词根表生,ū为词缀。na变为mo,加ba。于水中照耀,故为dīpo(洲),正法于此照耀,故为dīpo。dīp词根表照耀,a为词缀。断词为dvi-āpo,此处二水流动,故为dīpo,此有财复合词亦合理。被阎浮树标示或了知之洲,即jambudīpo,南洲。uttarakurū(北俱卢洲):须弥山之北方存在,故为uttarā。以成就法性五戒之力,于此有何大乐、大胸,故为kuru。此为有财复合词。ku意为恶。于此遮阻恶,故为kuru。ku为pubba,ruh词根表遮阻,kvi为词缀。词根末尾脱落。因属须弥山北方部分,故为uttarakuru,即北洲。四洲之主即四洲主,得转轮王位。显示巴利原文
Aparagoyānoti sineruno apare pacchime bhavo aparo. Gavena yanti gacchanti etthāti goyāno. Gosaddūpapada yādhātu gamane yu. Sineruno pacchima disabhāgattā aparo ca so goyāno cāti aparagoyāno, pacchimadīpo. Jambudīpoti jāyatīti jambū. Yojanasatubbedho rukkho. Janadhātu janane ū. Nassa mo. Bakārāgamo. Jalamajjhe dippatīti dīpo, dippanti jotanti ettha saddhammāti vā dīpo. Dīpadhātu dittiyaṃ a. Tassa pana dviāpoti padacchedaṃ katvā dvidhā āpo sandati etthāti dīpoti bahubbīhisamāsopi yujjati. Jambuyā lakkhito paññāto vā dīpo jambudīpo, dakkhiṇadīpo. Uttarakurūti sineruno uttare bhavā uttarā. Dhammatāsiddhassa pañcasīlassa ānubhāvena kaṃ sukhaṃ urumahantaṃ etthāti kuru. Bahubbīhisamāsoyaṃ. Kuṃ vuccati pāpaṃ. Taṃ rundhanti etthāti vā kuru. Kupubbarudhidhātu āvaraṇe kvi. Dhātvantassa lopo. Sineruno uttaradisabhāgattā uttaro ca so kuru cāti uttarakuru. Uttaradīpoti catunnaṃ dīpānaṃ issaro catudīpissaro, cakkavattirājā labbhati.
如此开示世间利益之后,今为开示出世间利益,说:“于最后身……乃至……善行者”。意谓:于最后身成为善行者,登修行之乘后,执持另一把白伞,将证得寂静。以下,依义理次第释之。
“最后”(antime):指最终的或最后的。处于尽头的“有”即是“最后有”,即最后之身。于此最后身中,“身”(dehe)即身体。所谓“身”,以被积聚、增长故,名为身——“dih”字根有积聚义,加“ṇa”词缀。或以之积聚福与非福,故为“身”,指处于最后有状态或善家子状态中的身体。
“善行者”(subbato):成为善修行者。善行具足者,为善行者,此处有“v”音的替换。
“登修行之乘”(bhāvanāyānaṃ āruyha):“bhāvanā”应修习、应增长,以三地诸行为所缘,名为修行;或谓修习、增长彼所缘者为修行,即毗婆舍那智慧——“bhū”字根有存在、增长义,加“yu”词缀。此修行依止与观修习而有二种。此处“另一把白伞”通过声转决定,意指毗婆舍那修行。“乘”(yāna)即以此到达涅槃,亦即无常等毗婆舍那智——“yā”字根有去义,加“yu”词缀。名为修……显示巴利原文
Evaṃ lokiyahitaṃ dassetvā idāni lokuttarahitaṃ dassento āha antime dehe…pe… subbatoti antime dehe subbato bhāvanāyānaṃ āruyha aññaṃ taṃ setachattakaṃ dhārento samaṃ essatīti sambandho. Tattha pana atthakkamena vaṇṇayissāma. Antimeti carime pacchime vā. Ante pariyosāne bhavo antimo, pacchimasarīro. Tasmiṃ. Deheti sarīre. Dihati upaciyati vaḍḍhatīti deho, sarīro. Dihadhātu upacaye ṇa. Atha vā dihati upacayati etena puññāpuññanti deho, pacchimabhavabhūte bhabbakulaputtabhūte vā sarīreti attho. Subbatoti suṭṭhu paṭipannako hutvā . Suṭṭhu vataṃ paṭipannaṃ assāti subbato. Vakārassabbo. Bhāvanāyānamāruyhāti bhāvanāyānaṃ āruyhāti padacchedo. Vipassanābhāvanāsaṅkhātayānaṃ āruhitvāti attho. Bhāvetabbā vaḍḍhetabbāti bhāvanā. Tebhūmaka saṅkhārārammaṇaṃ. Atha vā tadārammaṇaṃ bhāveti vaḍḍhetīti bhāvanā, vipassanāpaññā. Bhūdhātu sattāyaṃ vaḍḍhane vā yu. Sā ca samathavipassanā bhāvanāvasena duvidhā hoti. Tattha idha pana aññaṃ setachattakanti saddantarasanniṭṭhānena vipassanābhāvanā adhippetā. Yanti pāpuṇanti etena nibbānanti yānaṃ, aniccādivipassanāñāṇaṃ. Yādhātu gatiyaṃ yu. Bhāvanāsaṅkhātaṃ yānaṃ bhāvanāyānaṃ, bhāvanā ca sā yānañcāti vā bhāvanāyānaṃ.
“登上”(āruyha):登上了。意谓:登上了与本性乘相似的无常、苦、无我之乘。若不依无常等相,便绝无可能证得道、果、涅槃,故说“登修行之乘”。
“另一”(añña):指阿罗汉果。此果不超越初道所见之界限而觉了四谛法,故称“另一”——“ā”前缀表界限义,“ñā”字根有觉了义,加“kvi”词缀。
“白伞”(setachattaka):白色遮阳伞。被依止、受用者,为“白”(seta),即白色——“si”字根有依止、受用义,加“ta”词缀。遮蔽烦恼热者,为“伞”(chatta)——“chad”字根有遮蔽义,加“ta”词缀,即小伞。既是白又是小伞,故称“白伞”——即获得阿罗汉果之白伞。意谓:成为执持名为阿罗汉果的白伞者。
“寂静”(sama):指涅槃。因一切轮回之苦于此止息、寂灭、消灭,故称“寂静”。
“将证得”(essati):将到达。显示巴利原文
Āruyhāti ārohitvā. Pakatiyānasadisaṃ anicca dukkhaanattayānaṃ āruhitvāti attho. Aniccādilakkhaṇena hi vinā maggaphalanibbānaṃ patto nāma natthi. Tasmā bhāvanāyānamāruyhāti vuttaṃ. Aññanti arahattaphalaṃ. Tañhi paṭhamamaggena ādiṭṭhamariyādaṃ anatikkamitvā catusaccadhammaṃ avabujjhatīti aññanti vuccati. Āpubbañādhātu avabodhane kvi. Āsaddo mariyādattho. Setachattakanti odātātapattaṃ. Seviyatīti setaṃ, dhavalaṃ. Sidhātu sevāyaṃ ta. Kilesatapaṃ chādetīti chattaṃ. Chadadhātu saṃvaraṇe ta. Taṃyeva chattakaṃ. Setañca taṃ chattakañcāti setachattakaṃ. Arahattaphalaātapattaṃ labbhati. Aññaṃ arahattaphalasaṅkhātaṃ setachattakaṃ dhārento hutvāti sambandho. Samanti nibbānaṃ. Tañhi sabbaṃ vaṭṭadukkhaṃ samati vūpasamati nirujjhati etthāti samanti vuccati. Essatīti pāpuṇissatīti.
现在为了开示现世利益而说“于此自体亦”等。其中,应如此连接:于此自体亦,愿成为无病者、长寿者、被一切世间所供养者、于修行中意乐欢喜者、众人所爱者、可意者。“于此自体亦”中的“亦”字是总括义。以此总括来世利益。“自体”指以此而有名称与觉知,即“自我存在”,是五蕴的异名。“无病”指远离一切疾病。因为此人没有疾病,故称为“无病”。“长寿者”即长命者。因为此人寿命长,故称为“长寿者”。显示巴利原文
Idāni diṭṭhadhammikatthaṃ dassento imasmiṃ attabhāvepītiādimāha. Tattha imasmiṃ attabhāvepi arogo ca dīghāyuko ca sabbalokehi pūjito ca bhāvanābhi ratimano ca janappiyo ca manāpo ca bhaveyyāti yojanā. Attabhāvepīti ettha pisaddo sampiṇḍanattho. Tena samparāyikatthaṃ sampiṇḍeti. Attāti bhavati etena abhidhānaṃ buddhi cāti attabhāvo. Khandhapañcakassetamadhivacanaṃ. Arogoti sabbabyādhiviraho ca. So hi natthi rogo assāti arogoti vuccati. Dīghajīvikoti dīghāyuko ca. So hi dīghā jīvi āyu assāti dīghajīvikoti vuccati.
33 “一切世间”指一切天与人。“所供养”指应受供养。“于修行中意乐欢喜者”指心乐于止与观等修习者。“众人所爱”指应为一切人所敬爱。“可意”指令一切众生心生欢喜。应如此连接:愿成为这样的人。显示巴利原文
33.Sabbalokehīti sabbadevamanussehi. Pūjitoti pūjitabbo ca. Bhāvanābhiratimanoti samathavipassanā saṅkhātāya bhāvanāya abhiramaṇacitto ca. Janappiyoti sabbajanehi piyāyitabbo ca. Manāpoti sabbasattānaṃ cittavaḍḍhanako ca bhaveyyāti sambandho.
如此,在二十六首礼赞偈中,说明即使仅忆持一偈的佛德随念亦有果报之后,为说明以语词持诵全部偈颂而礼佛的众多果报,便说“何况全部持诵?”。其中,“何况全部持诵?”应断词为“何况全部持诵?”。其意为:对于以语词持诵全部佛礼赞偈,还有什么可说的呢?显示巴利原文
Evaṃ chabbīsatiyā vandanagāthāsu ekagāthāmattampi buddhaguṇānussaraṇe phalānisaṃsaṃ dassetvā idāni sabbagāthāyo vacasā dhāretvā buddhavandane anekāni phalānisaṃsāni dassetuṃ kā kathākhiladhāraṇeti āha. Tattha kā kathākhiladhāraṇeti kā kathā akhiladhāraṇeti padacchedo. Sabbabuddhavandanagāthāya vacasā dhāraṇe kiṃ vattabbā yevāti attho.
在此,“全部”一词是表一切之义,为不变词。或者,“khila”指减损。“khi”字根有灭尽义,加“la”词缀。取灭尽者,或少量者,称为“khila”。“khaya”词加“lā”字根有执取义,加“a”词缀。“不khila”即“akhila”,指所有偈颂。持诵即忆持,全部偈颂的持诵即为“全部持诵”,在此(全部持诵)中。在二十六首佛礼赞偈中,仅以语词持诵一首偈颂而礼佛,便能获得如前所述的果报利益,更何况以语词持诵所有佛礼赞偈后,日日礼佛呢?这是其义。以此五偈,令知如此所说的果报利益后,具信、正见的善男子以语词持诵所有佛礼赞偈,于昼夜、晨时、暮时、夜初分、夜后分,恒常、相续、无有间断地礼佛,这是(本论)所示之策励。显示巴利原文
Ettha ca akhilasaddo sabbavācako anipphannapāṭipadiko. Atha vā khiyanaṃ khilaṃ. Khidhātu khaye lapaccayo. Khayaṃ lāti gaṇhātīti vā khilaṃ, appakaṃ. Khayasaddūpapadalādhātu gahaṇe a. Na khilaṃ akhilaṃ, sabbagāthāyo. Dhāriyate dhāraṇaṃ, akhilāya sabbāya gāthāya dhāraṇaṃ akhiladhāraṇaṃ, tasmiṃ. Chabbīsatiyā buddhavandanagāthāsu ekaṃ gāthaṃ vacasā dhārayitvā buddhavandane yathāvuttaphalānisaṃsāni labbhanti, pageva pana sabbabuddhavandanagāthāyo vacasā dhārayitvā dine dine buddhavandaneti atthoti. Iminā pana gāthāpañcakena yathāvutta phalānisaṃsaṃ ñatvā saddahako sammādiṭṭhiko kulaputto sabbabuddhavandanagāthāyo vacasā dhārayitvā rattindivaṃ pubbaṇhakāle ca sāyanhakāle ca rattiyā paṭhamayāme ca pacchimayāme ca satataṃ samitaṃ nirantaraṃ buddhaṃ vandeyyāti uyyojanaṃ dassetīti.
这部名为《佛德灯明》的注释书,属于附有义疏的三藏,为古代诸师所礼敬。它由行于无畏智、教法清净者——尊者雷瓦达长老所造,以语法义理与韵律庄严的方式,阐明极为微细、难见、深奥的佛陀难思议功德,令善人生起净信。显示巴利原文
Iti porāṇācariyehi vanditassa namakkārassa saddatthanayehi chandālaṅkāranayehi ca saṇhasukhumasududdasa gambhīrassa buddhassa duppaṭividhaguṇaparidīpakassa sappurisānaṃ cittapasannajanakassa sāṭṭhakathe piṭakattaye asaṃhira visāradañāṇacārinā sāsanasodhakena bhaddantareva tattheravarena racitā buddhaguṇappadīpikanāmikā vaṇṇanā.
然而,此城由一位具名为“吉祥最胜胜利无尽名誉智者、三有日轮主大法王”的国王,令三藏巴利语刻于石上,并举行第五次结集;由三位大法王共许为“宝聚”的王都,种种家族杂居于此,具足福德与财富的善士,以及具戒定慧的比丘们在此安住,是佛法僧宝的矿藏。在这如日月般照耀佛教的曼德勒城中,有一处深受称颂的大摩诃罗摩园地。那里住着一位具足优婆塞功德的某优婆塞及其护持者某优婆夷,他们共同生起善妙欲乐,为证涅槃而建造了令人愉悦、因涂以黄金而名为“黄金色”的二层大砖寺。此寺中,有一位精通义注的三藏法师,日日相续为从八方前来求法的比丘们诵读附有义注的三藏,并安住于此;他在附有义注的三藏中行于不可动摇、无碍无畏之智;在曼德勒城,他是传承教法的法师众中之最上首,得授“瑞瓦达无比智者旗帜、教法传承大法王师”及“最胜大智者”的称号;他是根本十二教区大僧团的最上大导师,以“教法荣光阿阇梨”著称。这位净化教法的大导师长老,依循古德们在各处巴利中由世尊所说、阐明佛德的诸佛德句,以义与文、韵律庄严之理,对如持地之水聚般的佛德,撰写了这部《佛德灯明》注释书。显示巴利原文
Idaṃ pana puraṃ nimmitena sirīpavaravijayānantayasapaṇḍita tribhavanādityādhipatimahādhammarājādhirājāti lañchitanāmikena piṭakattayapāḷiṃ silārūḷhaṃ kārayitvā pañcama saṅgītikaraṇena timahādhammarājena ratanāpuñjanti sammate rājadhānībhūte nānākulasaṃkiṇṇe puññadhaññavantānaṃ sādhūnañca sīlasamādhipaññavantānaṃ bhikkhūnañca nivāsabhūte buddhadhammasaṅgharatanākare candimasūriyā viya buddhasāsanujjotane mantale nagare iti parikittite mahārāme dese vasantena upāsaka guṇasampannena nāmikena upāsakena ca tassupaṭṭhākāya nāmikāya upāsikāya ca samakusalacchandaṃ katvā nibbānassa sacchikaraṇatthāya kārite manorame suvaṇṇena limpitattā suvaṇṇavatī nāmike dvibhummike mahiṭṭhakavihāre aṭṭhahi disāhi āgatānaṃ sutesanabhikkhūnaṃ sāṭṭhakathaṃ piṭakattayaṃ dine dine satataṃ nirantaraṃ vācentena adhivasantena sāṭṭhakathe piṭakattaye asaṃhiravisāradañāṇacārinā mantale pure pariyattisāsanahitadhammācariyagaṇassa jeṭṭhukkaṭṭhabhūtena revatābhipaṇḍitadhajasāsanavaṃsamahādhammarājagurūti ca agga mahāpaṇḍitāti ca laddhalañchitena mūladvādasasāsana karamahāgaṇassa jeṭṭhamahānāyakabhūtena sāsanāpruñño ācariyoti vissutena sāsanasodhaka mahānāyakattheravarena porāṇehi tattha tattha pāḷiyaṃ bhagavatā vuttehi buddhaguṇappakāsakehi buddhaguṇapadehi thomitvā vanditassa atthabyañjanena chandālaṅkāranayena ca pathavīsandhārakassa udakakkhandhassa viya gambhīrassa pabbatena paṭicchādetvā ṭhapitassa vatthussa viya atiduddasassa satadhā bhinnassa vālassa aggakoṭiyā viya atisaṇha sukhumassa puthujjanañāṇena buddhassa duppaṭividhaguṇaparidīpakassa namakkārassa līnatthappakāsanā buddhaguṇappadīpikanāmikā saṃvaṇṇanā tāsu tāsu aṭṭhakathāṭīkāsu āgataṃ saṃvaṇṇanānayaṃ nissāya paññāpāṭavatthāya sāsanavuddhiyā ca katā.
于七万七千岁,弗沙月时,
于黑分第七日,佛日,善完成此共相。
而我造此论所生之福德,
以此福德,亦愿其余众生证得最上正觉。
从轮回中度脱无量众生,达至渴爱灭尽;
愿我以无上道智现证涅槃。
愿诸王常以正法守护这些众生;
愿一切众生安乐,愿胜者教法光耀。
愿缅甸国中人民,恒时无有灾厄;
常怀善思惟,愿证不死之境。
显示巴利原文 Sampatte cakkavasse sā, dvisahasse catūsate; Navādhikāsitīyā ca, sakkarāje ca sampatte. Sattatisatasahassa, vasse phussamāsasseva; Kālapakkhasattame ca, buddhadine suniṭṭhitā; Sāmañña. Esā ca saṅkharontena, yaṃ puññaṃ pasutaṃ mayā; Aññampi tena puññena, patvā sambodhimuttamaṃ. Saṃsārato bahū satte, tārayitvā taṇhakkhayaṃ; Nibbānaṃ sacchikāreyyaṃ, maggañāṇuttarena ca. Sadā rakkhantu rājāno, dhammeneva pajaṃ imaṃ; Sabbe sattā sukhī hontu, jotentu jinasāsanaṃ. Mrammaraṭṭhe manussā ca, sabbadā nirupaddavā; Niccaṃ kalyāṇasaṅkappā, pappontu amataṃ padanti.